Yamaha WD83390 Manual de usuario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: WD83390

Categoría: Equipo de música suplementario

Tipo: Manual de usuario

Este manual también es adecuado para

Owner’s Manual

Keep This Manual For Future Reference.

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-

tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modiﬁcations not

expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by

the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT:

When connecting this product to accessories and/

or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s

supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE:

This product has been tested and found to comply with the

requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital

devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-

able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-

tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies

and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in

the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation

of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If

this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be

determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-

nate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of

product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please con-

tact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division,

6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

WARNING:

THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance

with the following code:

GREEN-AND-YELLOW : EARTH

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not

correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in

your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured GREEN-and-YELLOW must be connected

to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the

safety earth symbol or colored GREEN or GREEN-and-YELLOW.

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal

which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the termi-

nal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. (3 wires)

ADVARSEL!

Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning

må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte

batteri tilbage til leverandoren.

VARNING

Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller

en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.

Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.

VAROITUS

Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo

ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty

paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.

(lithium caution)

This product contains a high intensity lamp that contains

a small amount of mercury. Disposal of this material

may be regulated due to environmental considerations.

For disposal information in the United States, refer to

the Electronic Industries Alliance web site:

www.eiae.org

(mercury)* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

NEDERLAND / THE NETHERLANDS

• Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back-up.

• This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back-up.

• Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op

het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur of

gelieve dan contact op te nemen met de vertegenwoordiging van

Yamaha in uw land.

•For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the

end of life please consult your retailer or Yamaha representative

ofﬁce in your country.

• Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA.

• Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small chemical

waste.

(lithium disposal)

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.

90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Digital Production Console

Model Name : DM1000

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is sus-

pected.

(FCC DoC)

This product contains a battery that contains perchlorate material.

Perchlorate Material—special handling may apply,

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

(Perchlorate)* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

The above warning is located on the side

of the unit

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead symbol

within an equilateral triangle is intended to

alert the user to the presence of uninsulated

“dangerous voltage” within the product’s

enclosure that may be of sufﬁcient magnitude

to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert the user to the

presence of important operating and mainte-

nance (servicing) instructions in the literature

accompanying the product.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1 Read these instructions.

2Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as

radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other appa-

ratus (including ampliﬁers) that produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polar-

ized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug

has two blades with one wider than the other. A

grounding type plug has two blades and a third

grounding prong. The wide blade or the third

prong are provided for your safety. If the pro-

vided plug does not ﬁt into your outlet, consult

an electrician for replacement of the obsolete

outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or

pinched particularly at plugs, convenience

receptacles, and the point where they exit from

the apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories speciﬁed by

the manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand,

tripod, bracket, or table spec-

iﬁed by the manufacturer, or

sold with the apparatus.

When a cart is used, use cau-

tion when moving the cart/

apparatus combination to

avoid injury from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms

or when unused for long periods of time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualiﬁed service person-

nel. Servicing is required when the apparatus

has been damaged in any way, such as power-

supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been

spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,

the apparatus has been exposed to rain or mois-

ture, does not operate normally, or has been

dropped.

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

(5)-1 1/2

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the device. The required voltage is

printed on the name plate of the device.

• Use only the speciﬁed power code.

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and

do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on

it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything

over it.

• Be sure to connect to an appropriate outlet with a protective grounding

connection. Improper grounding can result in electrical shock.

• Do not open the device or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify

them in any way. The device contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should

appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the device to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions,

or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden

loss of sound during use of the device, or if any unusual smells or smoke

should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,

disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the device inspected by

qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• If this device should be dropped or damaged, immediately turn off the power

switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the device

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the device or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the device is not to be used for

extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• When removing the electric plug from the device or an outlet, always hold the

plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• When transporting or moving the device, always use two or more people.

• Before moving the device, remove all connected cables. When you move the

device with the MB1000 attached, do not permit impact or stress on the cable

connector that connects the MB1000 to the device.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is

easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off

the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power

switch is turned off, electricity is still ﬂowing to the product at the minimum

level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug

the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

•Avoid setting all equalizer controls and faders to their maximum. Depending on

the condition of the connected devices, doing so may cause feedback and may

damage the speakers.

• Do not expose the device to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat

(such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent

the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal components.

• Do not place the device in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall

over.

• Do not block the vents. This device has ventilation holes at the top/front/rear/

sides to prevent the internal temperature from rising too high. In particular, do

not place the device on its side or upside down, or place it in any poorly-

ventilated location, such as a bookcase or closet.

• Do not use the device in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile

phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the device, TV, or radio may

generate noise.

• If you are using the optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge, do not hold only the

MB1000 when moving this unit. Otherwise, the meter brackets may be

damaged, the main unit may malfunction, or you may be injured if the unit falls.

• Before connecting the device to other devices, turn off the power for all devices.

Before turning the power on or off for all devices, set all volume levels to

minimum.

• Be sure to connect to a properly grounded power source. A ground screw

terminal is provided on the rear panel for safely grounding the device and

preventing electrical shock.

Power supply/Power cord

Do not open

Water warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/Power cord

Location

Connections

(5)-1 2/2

• Do not insert your ﬁngers or hand in any gaps or openings on the device (vents,

etc.).

•Avoid inserting or dropping foreign objects (paper, plastic, metal, etc.) into any

gaps or openings on the device (vents, etc.) If this happens, turn off the power

immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the

device inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not use headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable

volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience

any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

• Do not apply oil, grease, or contact cleaner to the faders. Doing so may cause

problems with electrical contact or fader motion.

• Do not rest your weight on the device or place heavy objects on it, and avoid use

excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• This device has rear-panel slots for installing mini-YGDAI cards. For technical

reasons, certain card combinations are not supported. Before installing any

cards, check the Yamaha web site (see page 6) to see whether your card is

compatible. Also check the total number of cards that can be installed in the

unit.

Installing cards that are not endorsed by Yamaha may cause electrical shock,

ﬁre, or damage to the unit.

• This device has a built-in backup battery. When you unplug the power cord from

the AC outlet, the internal data is retained. However, if the backup battery fully

discharges, this data will be lost. If the backup battery is running low, when you

turn on the device the display indicates “WARNING Low Battery!.” In this case,

immediately save the data to an external media using MIDI Bulk Dump, then

have qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel replace the backup battery.

• Using a mobile telephone near this unit may induce noise. If noise occurs, use the telephone away from the unit.

• The digital circuits of this unit may induce a slight noise into nearby radios and TVs. If noise occurs, relocate the affected equipment.

• When connecting D-sub cables, be sure to tighten the screws on both sides of the connector securely. To disconnect the cable, loosen the screws completely, then remove

the cable by holding the connector part. Do not remove the plug by pulling the cable while the screws are still attached. Otherwise, the connector may be damaged, leading

to malfunction.

• When you change the wordclock settings on any device in your digital audio system, some devices may output noise, so turn down your power amps beforehand,

otherwise your speakers may be damaged.

XLR-type connectors are wired as follows (IEC60268 standard): pin 1: ground, pin 2: hot (+), and pin 3: cold (-).

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the device, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the device is not in use.

The performance of components with moving contacts, such as switches, volume controls, and connectors, deteriorates over time. Consult qualiﬁed Yamaha service

personnel about replacing defective components.

* The illustrations and screen displays as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only, and may be different from the ones on your device.

* The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

* THX and THX pm3 are registered trademarks of THX Ltd.

Handling caution Backup battery

Yamaha Pro Audio global website

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Yamaha Pro Audio global website

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

Package Contents

• DM1000 Digital Production Console

• CD-ROM

•Power cord

•This manual

•Studio Manager Installation Guide

Optional Extras

• MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge

• SP1000 Wooden Side Panels

• RK1 Rack Mount Kit

• mini YGDAI I/O cards

About this Owner’s Manual

This

Owner’s Manual

explains how to operate the DM1000 Digital Production Console.

The table of contents can help you familiarize yourself with the manual’s organization and

to locate tasks and topics The index can help you locate speciﬁc information.

Before diving in, it is recommended that you read the “Operating Basics” chapter, starting

on page 29.

Each chapter in this manual discusses a speciﬁc section or function of the DM1000. The

Input and Output Channels are explained in the following chapters: “Input Channels,” “Bus

Outs,” and “Aux Sends.” Where possible, these chapters have been organized in order of sig-

nal ﬂow, from input to output.

Conventions Used in this Manual

The DM1000 features two types of buttons: physical buttons that you can press (e.g.,

ENTER and DISPLAY) and buttons that appear on the display pages. References to physical

buttons are enclosed in square brackets, for example, “press the [ENTER] button.” Refer-

ences to display page buttons are not emphasized, for example, “move the cursor to the ON

button.”

You can select display pages by using the [DISPLAY] buttons or the Left Tab Scroll, Right

Tab Scroll, and F1–4 buttons below the display. In order to simplify explanations, the pro-

cedures reference only the [DISPLAY] button method. See “Selecting Display Pages” on

page 30 for details on all the ways in which pages can be selected.

New Functions in DM1000 Version 2 7

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

New Functions in DM1000 Version 2

The following functions have been added to the DM1000 as part of the upgrade of the ﬁrm-

ware from version 1.0 to version 2.0.

Control Surface

• Encoder mode now features an assignable function, ALT LAYER, which enables you to con-

trol the channel level for all 32 channels without switching between layers. → page 36

•There are now 50 assignable Encoder mode parameters. → page 38

Aux Sends

•If an Aux Send is set to pre-fader, you can set the Pre point before or after channel mute.

→ page 99

•The AUX SELECT [AUX 1–8] buttons enable you to solo or unsolo Aux Sends without

switching to the Master layer. → page 107

Control Room Monitor

•You can select whether the Input Channel’s Pan setting is used when the Input Channel Solo

signal is set to Pre Fader. → page 120

•Raising the channel faders for soloed Channels from –∞ can unsolo the Channels.

→ page 121

•You can simultaneously select 2TR D1 or 2TR D2, and STEREO as control room monitor

sources. → page 123

Surround Function

•The on/off status of the Follow Pan button is reﬂected in the pan and Surround Pan

settings. → page 125

•The Surround Monitor function now supports THX Surround. → page 138

•You can simultaneously select BUS and SLOT as surround monitor sources. → page 137

Group/Link

•The Fader Group Master function enables you to control the overall level of the Fader group

channels simultaneously while maintaining the relative level balance of each channel.

→ page 150

•The Mute Group Master function enables you to mute all channels in a Mute group

simultaneously. → page 152

Internal Effects

•You can add optional Add-On Effects to the preset effects. → page 161

Scene Memory

•Any channel or parameter settings in the current scene can be copied and pasted into other

scenes. → page 171

•You can select additional parameters for the Recall Safe function. → page 170

New Functions in DM1000 Version 2

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Automix

•You can insert the mix parameters in a region speciﬁed in the Automix data.

→

page 193

•Touching the faders can punch parameter values in and out if the corresponding OVER-

WRITE button is set to on (Touch Sence Edit In ALL ).

→

page 271

Remote Control

•Cubase SX has been added as a target of the Remote layer.

→

page 215

•The Joystick or the controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section enable you to control Pro

To ols Surround Pan settings.

→

page 216

•Yamaha’s proprietary Advanced DAW protocol has been added to Nuendo, Cubase SX, and

General DAW. This enables you to control these devices using the DM1000’s SELECTED

CHANNEL section. (Controllable functions vary depending on the DAW software and ver-

sion you are using.)

Other Functions

•You can control the DM1000 from a connected Video Editor via the ESAM protocol.

→

page 259

•You can set the Routing ST Pair Link so that the routing from paired channels to the Stereo

Bus is linked.

→

page 268

•Some Operation Lock Safe parameters have been added.

→

page 280

•You can remotely control a connected Yamaha AD8HR A/D converter.

→

page 287

•You can assign the selected channels to a Fader or Mute group using the USER DEFINED

KEYS.

→

page 293

•You can switch the windows of the included Studio Manager software application using the

USER DEFINED KEYS.

→

page 293

Contents

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Contents

1 Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2 Control Surface & Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Installing an Optional Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

3 Operating Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

About the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Selecting Display Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Display Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Selecting Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Selecting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Selecting Fader Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Selecting Encoder Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button . . . . . . . . . . 37

Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

4 Connections and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Wordclock Connections and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Input and Output Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

5 Analog I/O & Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Analog Inputs & Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Digital Inputs & Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Converting Sampling Rates of Signals Received at 2TR Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . 55

Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Dithering Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

6 Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

About Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Setting the Input Channels from the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Pairing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Naming Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Using MS Stereo Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

7 Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

About Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Bus Out 1–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Pairing Buses or Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Attenuating Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Contents

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

8 Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Aux Out 1–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Setting Aux Send Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Panning Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Excluding Certain Channels from Aux Sends (Mix Minus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Copying Channel Fader Positions to Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Soloing AUX Sends using the [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

9 Input & Output Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Input Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Output Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Patching Direct Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Insert Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

10 Control Room Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Control Room Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Solo Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Using the Solo Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Using the Control Room Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Using the Talkback Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

11 Surround Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Using Surround Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Surround Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

12 Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters . . . . . . . . . 147

Grouping & Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Using Fader Group Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Using Mute Group Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

13 Internal Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

About the Internal Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Inserting the Internal Effects into Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Editing Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

About Surround Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

About Add-On Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

About Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

14 Scene Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

About Scene Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Storing and Recalling Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Auto Scene Memory Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Fading Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Recalling Scenes Safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Sorting Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Copying and Pasting a Scene (Global Paste) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Contents

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

15 Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

About the Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

General Library Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Using Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

16 Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

About Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Setting Up for Automix Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Recording an Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Inserting Mix Parameters into Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Punching In & Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

[SEL] Button Functions While the [AUTO] Button Indicator Is On . . . . . . . . . 199

Playing Back an Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Automix Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Automix Memory Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Fader1 &2 pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Editing Events Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

17 Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

About Remote Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Pro Tools Remote Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Nuendo/Cubase SX Remote Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Other DAW Remote Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

MIDI Remote Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Machine Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

18 MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

MIDI & the DM1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

MIDI Port Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI (Bulk Dump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

19 Controlling the DM1000 from a Video Editor . . . . . . 259

About ESAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Crossfade via ESAM Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Video Editors with confirmed compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Supported Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Remote Connector Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

20 Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Changing the Input and Output Connector Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Setting Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels (User Assignable Layer) . . . 272

Using the Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Using the User Defined Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Using Operation Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Cascading Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Using the AD8HR/AD824 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Checking the Battery and the System Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Initializing the DM1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Calibrating the Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

12 Contents

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix A: Parameter Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

USER DEFINED KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Input Patch Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Initial Input Patch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Output Patch Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Initial Output Patch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

GPI Trigger Source & Target List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Effects Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Effects and tempo synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Preset EQ Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Preset Gate Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Dynamics Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Appendix B: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

General Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Analog Input Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Analog Output Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Digital Input Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Digital Output Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

I/O Slot Spec (1–2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Control I/O Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

REMOTE Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

CONTROL Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Appendix C: MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Scene Memory to Program Change Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Initial Parameter to Control Change Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

MIDI Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Appendix D: About Optional Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Installing the SP1000 Side Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Rack Mounting the DM1000 Using the RK1 Rack Mount Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

MIDI Implementation Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End of Manual

DM1000 Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End of Manual

DM1000 Level Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End of Manual

Welcome 13

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Welcome

1 Welcome

Thank you for choosing the Yamaha DM1000 Digital Production Console.

The compact DM1000 Digital Console features 24-bit/96 kHz digital audio processing

without compromise, as well as 48-channel simultaneous mixing. The DM1000 covers a

broad range of needs and applications, including multi-track recording, 2-channel mix-

down, and cutting-edge surround sound production. This integrated, comprehensive

audio system features remote control function for DAWs (Digital Audio Workstations) as

popularized by the DM2000 and 02R96 Digital Mixing Consoles.

The DM1000 offers the following features:

■ Hardware Features

• 17 touch-sensitive 100-mm motorized faders (for touch-sensitive selection of channels,

or for punching in and out during Automix recording)

•Faders can set levels for Input Channels, Aux Sends, and Bus Outs.

•Rotary Encoders enable you to control panning for each channel, AUX send levels, and

various parameters.

•Six selectable software layers determine the function of channel faders and Encoders.

• 320 x 240 dot LCD display with ﬂuorescent backlighting

•Buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section enable direct editing of

channel mix parameters.

• 12 USER-DEFINED KEYS enable you to assign functions to control DM1000 internal

parameters.

•Two expansion slots for optional digital I/O, AD, and DA cards.

■ Sonic Speciﬁcations

• Linear 24-bit, 128-times oversampling A/D converters

• Linear 24-bit, 128-times oversampling D/A converters

• 20 Hz through 40 kHz frequency response at 96 kHz sampling rate.

• 106 dB typical dynamic range

• 32-bit internal signal processing (58-bit accumulator)

■ Inputs and Outputs

• 16 mic/line inputs with switchable +48 V phantom power and 4 line inputs

• 12 Omni Outs assignable to Stereo Out, Bus Out, Monitor Out, and Input Channel

Direct Outs.

•Two optional slots allow a maximum of 32 inputs.

•Two 2-track digital inputs, with sampling rate converters capable of converting sam-

pling rates of 44.1 kHz through 96 kHz.

•Double Channel support for recording and playing at 88.2/96 kHz on 44.1/48 kHz leg-

acy multi-track digital recorders.

•You can cascade two DM1000s while remaining in the digital domain.

•Input patches enable assignment of input signals to desired signal paths.

•Output patches enable assignment of Bus Out signals and Input Channel Direct Outs to

desired output jacks.

14 Chapter 1—Welcome

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

■ Channel Conﬁguration

•Simultaneous mixing of up to 48 Input Channels. Group multiple channels and pair

channels for stereo.

•8 Bus Outs and 8 AUX Sends. Buses 1-8 can be routed to Stereo Buses for use as Group

Buses.

•Channel library for storing and recalling the channel settings for each Input Channel

and Output Channel.

• 4-band EQ and dynamics processor equip all channels. Dynamics processor and EQ set-

tings can be stored in libraries and recalled.

■ Effects

•Four high-quality multi-channel effects (Apply effects via AUX Sends or Channel

Inserts).

• Effect library for storing and recalling effect settings.

•Optional Add-On Effects packages for adding effects that utilize a variety of new algo-

rithms.

■ Scene Memory

•Scene memories for storing and recalling the mix settings as Scenes.

•Snapshot style automation with Scene memories recallable via Automix.

■ Surround Sound

•Supports 3-1, 5.1, and 6.1 channel surround sound production.

•Joystick for adjusting each channel's surround pan.

■ Automix

•Automated controls of channel faders and parameters via Automix. (Even more power-

ful when combined with an MTR, DAW, and MIDI sequence system.)

•Control parameters of connected MIDI devices via Automix.

■ Remote Control

•Control and manage your DM1000 from your Mac or PC using bundled Studio Man-

ager software

•Remote Layers for controlling popular DAWs (Digital Audio Workstations), including

Pro Tools, Nuendo, etc.

•Control an external recorder via MMC commands and P2 commands.

■ MIDI

•Equipped with MIDI ports and a USB port for computer connection.

•Scene recall and mix parameter changes via MIDI

■ ESAM

•Controls the DM1000 from a connected Video Editor via the ESAM II protocol

Control Surface & Rear Panel 15

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Control Surface & Rear Panel

2 Control Surface & Rear Panel

Control Surface

AUXPAN

DISPLAY

ASSIGN

ENCODER MODE

EQUALIZER

LOW

HIGH

GAIN

FREQUENCY

LOW MID

HIGH MID

ROUTING

STEREO DIRECT

DISPLAY

SELECTED CHANNEL

BUS 8

32 48

BUS 7

31 47

BUS 6

30 46

BUS 5

29 45

BUS 4

28 44

BUS 3

27 43

16151413121110

20dB

ONOFF

+48V

78 1213

91011

1615141312111098765432

PEAK

SIGNAL

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PAD

20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 1

17 33

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 2

18 34

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 3

19 35

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 4

20 36

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 5

21 37

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 6

22 38

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 7

23 39

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 8

24 40

+10

SOLO

SEL

BUS 1

25 41

+10

SOLO

SEL

+10

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

BUS 2

26 42

AUTO

SEL

STEREO

AUX2 AUX 3 AUX4

AUX6AU X5 AUX7 AU X8

AUX SELECT

DISPLAY

FADER MODE

FADER

AUX

DISPLAY ACCESS

AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY

MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW

PAI R /GROUP

INPUT

OUTPUT

EFFECTSURROUND DYNAMICS SCENE

PAN/

INSERT/ DELAY

PATCH

PATC H

GRAB

SCENE MEMORY

STORERECALL

DISPLAY

USER DEFINED

KEYS

ENTER

INC

DEC

TAL KB ACK LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL

010

PHONES

MONITOR

LEVEL

SOLO CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

DIMMER

TALKBACK

MONITOR

STEREO

SLOT

BUS

DISPLAY

100

F1 F2 F 3

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

AD Input Section (p. 16) SELECTED CHANNEL Section (p. 21)

Headphones

& Talkback

Section

(p. 23)

MONITOR

Section (p. 24)

Channel Strip Section (p. 17) STEREO Section (p. 17) USER DEFINED KEYS

Section (p. 23)

Data Entry

Section (p. 23)

LAYER Section

(p. 22)

SCENE MEMORY

Section (p. 22)

Display Section

(p. 20)

DISPLAY ACCESS Section

(p. 19)

AUX SELECT

Section (p. 18)

ENCODER

MODE Section

(p. 18)

FADER MODE

Section (p. 18)

Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

AD Input Section

+48V ON/OFF switches 1–16

These switches turn on or off the +48 V phantom power feed to each INPUT.

PAD switches 1–16

These switches turn on or off the 20 dB pad (attenuator) for each AD Input.

GAIN controls 1–16

These controls adjust input sensitivity for each AD Input. Input sensitivity is +4 dB to

–40 dB when the Pad is on, and –16 dB to –60 dB when the Pad is off.

PEAK indicators 1–16

These indicators light up when the input signal level is 3 dB below clipping. Adjust the Pad

switch and GAIN control so that the indicator rarely lights up at signal peak.

SIGNAL indicators

These indicators light up when the input signal level is 20 dB below nominal.

Note: Screw holes for attaching a cover are located at both sides of the AD input section of the

DM1000. (Size M3, horizontal spacing 417 mm, vertical spacing 36 mm.) You may wish to

fabricate your own cover and attach it to the front panel to prevent the controls from being

operated inadvertently. Yamaha does not sell such a cover. If you fabricate and attach your

own cover, make sure that the mounting screws do not extend more than 10 mm into the front

panel. You will need to allow approximately 15–20 mm between the top panel and the cover

in order to clear the control knobs and buttons.

20dB

ONOFF

+48V

78 1213

91011

1615141312111098765432

PEAK

SIGNAL

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PAD

20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

Control Surface 17

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Control Surface & Rear Panel

Channel Strip Section

A Encoders 1–16

These rotary Encoders adjust the channel parameter settings. Depending on the button

selected in the ENCODER MODE section (see page 18), the Encoders will adjust the chan-

nel pan setting (when the ENCODER MODE [PAN] button indicator is lit), the AUX Send

level (when the ENCODER MODE [AUX] button indicator is lit), or any parameter (when

the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button indicator is lit).

These Encoders also feature push switches that are used to view the value of the parameter

currently assigned to the Encoder, or to punch in or out during Automix recording.

B [SEL] buttons 1–16

These buttons enable you to select desired channels. The [SEL] button indicator for the cur-

rently-selected channel lights up. The channel selected by each [SEL] button depends on the

currently-selected button in the LAYER section (see page 22).

These buttons also allow you to select channels for Automix recording and playback, create

or cancel channel pairs, and add channels to (or remove them from) Fader, Mute, EQ, and

Compressor groups.

C [SOLO] buttons 1–16

These buttons solo the selected channels. The [SOLO] button indicator of the cur-

rently-soloed channel lights up.

D [ON] buttons 1–16

These buttons turn the selected channels on or off. The [ON] button indicators for On

channels light up.

E Channel faders 1–16

These are touch-sensitive 100 mm motorized faders. Depending on the button selected in

the FADER MODE Section (see page 18), the faders will adjust the input or output level of

the selected channels or buses, or adjust the AUX Send level.

STEREO Section

A [AUTO] button

When this button is turned on, you can use the [SEL] buttons 1–16 to turn the Automix

function on or off.

B [SEL] button

Selects the Stereo Bus.

C [ON] button

Tur ns the selected bus on or off.

D [STEREO] fader

This touch-sensitive 100 mm motorized fader adjusts the ﬁnal output level of the Stereo

Bus.

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 1

17 33

AUTO

SEL

STEREO

18 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

AUX SELECT Section

A [DISPLAY] button

This button displays an Aux-related page (see page 99).

B [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons

These buttons select an Aux Send. When you press a button to select an AUX Send, the cor-

responding button indicator lights up.

ENCODER MODE Section

A [DISPLAY] button

This button displays an Encoder page, enabling you to assign functions to Encoders 1–16

(see page 37). To use a function assigned to an Encoder, press the [ASSIGN] button to turn

on the button indicator.

B [PAN] button

If you press this button, the button indicator turns on and Encoders 1–16 function as chan-

nel panpots.

C [AUX] button

If you press this button, the button indicator turns on and Encoders 1–16 function as chan-

nel Aux Send. The Send destination is selected in the AUX SELECT Section.

D [ASSIGN] button

If you press this button, the button indicator turns on and Encoders 1–16 function as

assignable controls for the parameters assigned on the Encoder pages. (By default, Input

Patches of the corresponding Input Channels are assigned.)

FADER MODE Section

A [FADER/AUX] button

Toggles between the desired parameter to be adjusted by channel faders 1–16. The faders

adjust the Channel or Bus level when the FADER indicator is lit, and adjust the Aux Send

level when the AUX indicator is lit.

B FADER indicator

C AUX indicator

An indicator lights up to indicate the parameter selected via the [FADER/AUX] button.

AUX2 AUX3 AUX4

AUX6AUX5 AUX7 AUX8

AUX SELECT

DISPLAY

AUX1

AUXPAN

DISPLAY

ASSIGN

ENCODER MODE

2 3 4

FADER MODE

FADE R

AUX

Control Surface 19

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Control Surface & Rear Panel

DISPLAY ACCESS Section

A [AUTOMIX] button

This button displays an Automix page, enabling you to make Automix settings (see

page 187).

B [DIO] button

This button displays a DIO page, enabling you to make digital I/O settings (see page 55).

C [SETUP] button

This button displays a Setup page, enabling you to make the DM1000 internal settings.

D [UTILITY] button

This button displays a Utility page, enabling you to use the internal oscillators and view

information about installed optional cards.

E [MIDI] button

This button displays a MIDI page, enabling you to make MIDI settings (see page 248).

F [REMOTE] button

This button displays a Remote page, enabling you to control a DAW remotely and make

machine control settings (see page 215).

G [METER] button

This button displays a Meter page, which displays Input Channel levels, or Bus Out or Aux

Send Out levels (see page 39).

H [VIEW] button

This button displays a View page, enabling you to view and set mix parameters for a speciﬁc

channel (see page 72).

I [PAIR/GROUP] button

This button displays a Pair/Group page, enabling you to pair channels, group multiple fad-

ers, or mute channels (see page 78 and 147).

J [ /INSERT/DELAY] button

This button displays a /INS/DLY page, enabling you to switch the signal phase, set the

signal to be inserted, or set the delay parameters (see page 63 and 158).

K [INPUT PATCH] button

This button displays an In Patch page, enabling you to patch input signals and Bus Out sig-

nals to the desired Input Channels (see page 109).

L [OUTPUT PATCH] button

This button displays an Out Patch page, enabling you to patch Bus Out and Insert Out sig-

nals to the desired destination (see page 112).

M [PAN/SURROUND] button

This button displays a Pan/Surr page, enabling you to adjust stereo or surround pan settings

(see page 70 and 125).

DISPLAY ACCESS

AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY

MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW

PAIR/GROUP

INPUT

OUTPUT

EFFECTSURROUND DYNAMICS SCENE

PA N/

INSERT/ DELAY

PAT CH

PATCH

1 2 3

N O P

20 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

N [DYNAMICS] button

This button displays a Dynamics page, enabling you to control channel gates and compres-

sors (see page 65).

O [EFFECT] button

This button displays an Effect page, enabling you to edit the internal effects processors and

use optional plug-in cards (see page 159).

P [SCENE] button

This button displays a Scene page, enabling you to store and recall Scenes (see page 163).

Display Section

A Display

This is a 320 x 240 dot LCD display with a ﬂuorescent backlight.

B Stereo meters

These 32-segment level meters display the ﬁnal output level of the Stereo Bus.

C Contrast control

This control adjusts the display contrast.

D [F1]–[F4] buttons

These buttons select a page from a multi-page screen. Selecting a tab at the bottom of the

screen using one of these buttons displays the corresponding page. (See page 30 for more

information on displaying a page.)

E Left Tab Scroll [ ] button

F Right Tab Scroll [ ] button

If there are more pages available than the four whose tabs are currently displayed, use these

buttons to display the additional tabs. These buttons are available only when the left or right

Tab Scroll arrow appears.

F1 F2 F 3

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

45 6

Tab Scroll arrow

Control Surface 21

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Control Surface & Rear Panel

SELECTED CHANNEL Section

A ROUTING [DISPLAY] button

This button displays a Routing page, enabling you to route selected channels to the desired

Bus, and adjust the level of the signals routed from Buses 1–8 to the Stereo Bus (see page 71

and 85).

B ROUTING [1]–[8] buttons

C ROUTING [STEREO] button

D ROUTING [DIRECT] button

These buttons select the desired Bus for routing the selected Input Channel signals. The cor-

responding button indicator for the currently-selected Bus lights up.

E EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button

This button displays an EQ page, enabling you to set the selected channel equalizer (see

page 67 and 68).

F EQUALIZER [HIGH] button

G EQUALIZER [HIGH-MID] button

H EQUALIZER [LOW-MID] button

I EQUALIZER [LOW] button

These buttons select the EQ band (HIGH, HIGH-MID, LOW-MID, LOW). The corre-

sponding button indicator of the currently-selected band lights up.

J EQUALIZER [Q] control

This control adjusts the currently-selected band Q.

K EQUALIZER [FREQUENCY] control

This control adjusts the currently-selected band frequency.

L EQUALIZER [GAIN] control

This control adjusts the currently-selected band gain.

M [GRAB] button

This button enables Joystick control of the surround pan setting for the currently-selected

Input Channel. This button can be turned on only when the surround pan setting is avail-

able.

N Joystick

The Joystick is used to set the surround pan position (see page 131).

EQUALIZER

LOW

HIGH

GAIN

FREQUENCY

LOW MID

HIGH MID

ROUTING

STEREO DIRECT

DISPLAY

SELECTED CHANNEL

GRAB

1 5

22 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

LAYER Section

A [1-16]/[17-32]/[33-48] buttons

These buttons select an Input Channel Layer. The channel strips control Channels 1–16,

17–32, or 33–48, depending on the button selected here. (See page 33 for more information

on Layers.)

B [REMOTE 1]/[REMOTE 2] buttons

These buttons select the Remote Layer, which can be used to control external devices,

including DAWs. (See page 215 for more information on the Remote Layer.)

C [MASTER] button

This button selects the Master Layer, which can be used to control Bus and Aux Send. (See

page 33 for more information on the Master Layer.)

SCENE MEMORY Section

A Scene memory display

The number of the currently-selected Scene memory is displayed here.

B Edit indicator

If you adjust a mix parameter after a Scene has been recalled or stored, a dot ﬂashes here.

C [STORE] button

This button enables you to store the current mix settings (See page 163 for more informa-

tion on Scene Memories).

D Scene Up [ ] / Down [ ] buttons

These buttons select a Scene to store or recall. Pressing the Scene Up [ ] button increments

the selection; pressing the Scene Down [ ] button decrements the selection. Holding down

either key increments or decrements the selection continuously.

E [RECALL] button

This button recalls the Scene memory selected by the Scene Up [ ] / Down [ ] buttons.

SCENE MEMORY

STORERECALL

21 3 4 5

Control Surface 23

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Control Surface & Rear Panel

USER DEFINED KEYS Section

A [DISPLAY] button

This button displays a User Def page, enabling you to assign functions to but-

tons 1–12 (see page 274).

B [1]–[12] buttons

These buttons perform the functions assigned in the User Def pages.

Data Entry Section

A Parameter wheel

This control adjusts the parameter values shown on the display. Turning it

clockwise increases the value; turning it counterclockwise decreases the value.

This wheel also enables you to scroll a displayed list and select a character for

entry (see page 32).

B [ENTER] button

This button activates a selected (highlighted) button on the display, and con-

ﬁrms the edited parameter values.

C [DEC] & [INC] buttons

These buttons increment or decrement a parameter value by one. Pressing the

[INC] button increments the value; pressing the [DEC] button decrements

the value. Holding down either key increments or decrements the value con-

tinuously.

D Left, Right, Up, Down ([ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]) cursor buttons

These buttons move the cursor around the display pages, or select parameters

and options. Holding down a cursor button moves the cursor continuously

in the respective direction.

Headphones & Talkback Section

A TALKBACK LEVEL control

This control sets the level of the built-in talkback microphone. (See page 123 for more

information on the Talkback function.)

B Talkback mic

This built-in microphone is used for talkback.

C PHONES LEVEL control

This control sets the level of the PHONES. (See page 119 for more information on moni-

toring through the headphones.)

D PHONES jack

You can connect a set of stereo headphones to this stereo phone jack.

DISPLAY

USER DEFINED

KEYS

ENTER

INC

DEC

TALKBACK LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL

010

PHONES

24 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

MONITOR Section

A [DISPLAY] button

This button displays a Monitor page, enabling you to adjust monitor settings (see page 119

and 136).

B [SOLO] indicator

This indicator ﬂashes when a single or multiple channels are soloed.

C [CLEAR] button

This button “unsolos” all soloed Channels.

D [2TR D1] button

E [2TR D2] button

F [STEREO] button

These buttons select the Control Room Monitor output signal. When the [2TR D1] button

indicator is lit, the signal at the 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1 jack is selected. When the [2TR D2]

button indicator is lit, the signal at the 2TR OUT DIGITAL 2 jack is selected. When the

[STEREO] button indicator is lit, the Stereo Bus signal is selected.

If you change the parameter setting on the Monitor | C-R/TB page (see page 122), you can

monitor the OMNI IN signal, instead of the 2TR IN DIGITAL signal, when you press the

[2TR D1] or [2TR D2] button.

G [SLOT] button

H [BUS] button

These buttons select the Surround Monitor signal source. When the [BUS] button indicator

is lit, the Bus 1–8 signals are selected. When the [SLOT] button indicator is lit, the signals

from Slots 1/2 are selected. (See page 136 for more information on the Surround Monitor.)

I [DIMMER] button

This button activates the Dimmer function, which lowers the Monitor and Surround Mon-

itor signals. This function is convenient when you wish to talk in the control room during

mixdown. The [TALKBACK] button indicator ﬂashes while the Talkback function is active

(see page 120).

J [TALKBACK] button

This button turns on the Talkback function. While the button indicator is lit, the Talkback

mic signal is sent to any desired Bus or Slot (see page 123).

K MONITOR LEVEL control

This control adjusts the monitor level.

Note:

• The DM1000 allows you to patch source signals to any output jack (other than the PHONES

jack). Therefore, the console does not feature a dedicated monitor output jack. Instead, you

can route monitoring signals to any desired output jack (typically to OMNI OUT jacks

1–12).

•By default, monitoring signals are assigned to OMNI OUT jacks 11 and 12.

MONITOR

LEVEL

SOLO CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

DIMMER

TALKBACK

MONITOR

STEREO

SLOT

BUS

DISPLAY

100

9 J K

Rear Panel 25

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Control Surface & Rear Panel

Rear Panel

AD Input and Output Section

A INPUT connectors 1–16

These balanced XLR-3-31-type con-

nectors accept line-level and micro-

phone signals. The nominal signal level

ranges from –60 dB through +4 dB.

B OMNI IN connectors 1–4

These balanced XLR-3-31-type connectors accept line-level signals. The nominal signal

level is +4 dB.

C OMNI OUT connectors 1–4

These balanced XLR-3-32-type con-

nectors output any Bus signals and

channel Direct Out signals. The nomi-

nal signal level is +4 dB.

WORD CLOCK

INOUT

CONTROL

INOUT

TO HOST

USB

REMOTE MIDI

SMPTE IN

COAXIAL AES/EBUCOAXIALAES/EBU

2TR IN

DIGITAL

METER

SLOT

INPUT

OMNI

23456781101112131415 9

23456781101112 9

213

AC IN

POWER

OFF

AD Input and Output Section (p. 25)

Power Section (p. 27) Digital I/O & Control Section (p. 26) SLOT Section (p. 26)

INPUT

OMNI

23456781101112131415 9

23456781101112 9

213

2 3

Male XLR plug

1 (ground)

2 (hot)

3 (cold)

Female XLR plug

1 (ground)

2 (hot)

3 (cold)

26 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

SLOT Section

A SLOT 1 & 2

You can insert optional mini-YGDAI cards into these slots. (See page 28 for more informa-

tion on installing these cards.)

Digital I/O & Control Section

A METER connector

This connector enables you to connect an optional MB1000 Meter Bridge.

B CONTROL connector

This 25-pin D-sub connector provides access to the GPI (General Purpose Interface).

Through this connector, the Talkback function can be turned on and off from external

equipment, or external equipment can be started or stopped from the DM1000 (see

page 276).

C SMPTE TIME CODE INPUT connector

This balanced XLR-3-31-type connector is used to input SMPTE timecode to synchronize

the Automix function.

D REMOTE connector

This 9-pin D-Sub connector is used to remotely control external equipment that supports

the Yamaha AD8HR, AD824 and Sony P2 Protocol (remote control commands that are

used on TASCAM DA-98HR and other professional video recorders). Use a reverse cable to

connect an AD8HR/AD824, and use a straight cable to connect a P2 Protocol device. Use a

reverse cable to connect two DM1000s to each other. Connecting two DM1000s to each

other enables communication via MIDI Protocol and SOLO Logic synchronization.

This connector can also be used to control the DM1000 from a video editor that supports

the ESAM II protocol. In this case, use the dedicated cable to make the connection (see

page 264).

E MIDI IN & OUT ports

These standard MIDI IN and OUT ports enable you to connect the DM1000 to other MIDI

equipment.

F TO HOST USB port

This USB port enables you to connect a computer equipped with a USB port.

SLOT

WORD CLOCK

INOUT

CONTROL

INOUT

TO HOST

USB

REMOTE MIDI

SMPTE IN

COAXIAL AES/EBUCOAXIALAES/EBU

2TR IN

DIGITAL

METER

432

6 7 8 9 J L K5

Rear Panel 27

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Control Surface & Rear Panel

G WORD CLOCK OUT connector

This BNC connector outputs a wordclock signal from the DM1000 to a connected external

device.

H WORD CLOCK IN connector

This BNC connector inputs a wordclock signal from a connected external device to the

DM1000.

I 2TR OUT DIGITAL AES/EBU 1

This XLR-3-31-type connector outputs AES/EBU format digital audio. The connector is

typically used to connect the digital stereo input (AES/EBU format) of a DAT recorder, MD

recorder, or CD recorder.

J 2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL 2

This phono connector outputs consumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio. The connector

is typically used to connect the digital stereo input (consumer format) of a DAT recorder,

MD recorder, or CD recorder.

K 2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 1

This XLR-3-32-type connector accepts AES/EBU format digital audio. The connector is

typically used to connect the digital stereo output (AES/EBU format) of a DAT recorder,

MD recorder, or CD recorder.

L 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 2

This phono connector accepts consumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio. The connector

is typically used to connect the digital stereo output (consumer format) of a DAT recorder,

MD recorder, or CD recorder.

Power Section

A Grounding screw

Be sure to use this screw to ground the DM1000 to protect yourself against electrical shock.

The supplied power cord features a three-pin plug. If the ground terminal of the AC outlet

is grounded, then the unit will be grounded sufﬁciently via the power cord. If the AC outlet

does not provide a suitable ground, this screw must be connected to a suitable ground

point. Grounding is also an effective method for eliminating hum, interference, and other

noise.

B POWER ON/OFF switch

This switch turns the power to the DM1000 on or off.

C AC IN connector

This connector enables you to connect the DM1000 to an AC outlet via the supplied power

cord.

Note: To prevent loud clicks and thumps in your speakers, turn on your audio equipment in

the following order (reverse this order when turning off)—sound sources, multitrack and mas-

ter recorders, DM1000, monitoring power ampliﬁers.

POWER

OFF

AC IN

28 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Installing an Optional Card

Visit the following Yamaha Pro Audio web site to ensure that the card you are installing is

supported by the DM1000. Also, verify the number of cards (including other Yamaha or

third-party cards) that can be installed in the unit.

<http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/>.

Follow the steps below to install an optional mini-YGDAI card.

1 Make sure that the power to the DM1000 is turned off.

2 Undo the two ﬁxing screws and remove the slot cover, as shown below.

Keep the cover and ﬁxing screws in a safe place for future use.

3 Insert the card between the guide rails and slide it all the way into the slot,

as shown below.

You may have to push ﬁrmly to fully insert the card into the internal connector.

4 Secure the card using the attached thumbscrews.

Tighten the screws ﬁrmly, or else the card may not be grounded correctly, which may cause

the DM1000 to malfunction.

WORD

CLOCK

OUT

CONTROL

OUT

TO HOST

USB

REMOTE MIDI

SMPTE IN

COAXIAL AES/EBU

COAXIAL

AES/EBU

2TR IN

DIGITAL

METER

POWER

OFF

SLOT

INPUT

OMNI

1112

145

567

DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE

MODEL DM1000

AC IN

WORD

CLOCK

OUT

CONTROL

OUT

TO HOST

USB

REMOTE MIDI

SMPTE IN

COAXIAL AES/EBU

COAXIAL

AES/EBU

2TR IN

DIGITAL

METER

POWER

OFF

SLOT

INPUT

OMNI

1112

145

567

DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE

MODEL DM1000

AC IN

Operating Basics 29

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Operating Basics

3 Operating Basics

This chapter describes basic operations on the DM1000, including how to use the display

and operate the controls on the top panel.

About the Display

The top panel display indicates various parameters that you must set before you can operate

the DM1000. The display indicates the following items:

A Selected DISPLAY

This section indicates the currently-selected display page group.

B Selected channel

This section indicates the Input or Output Channel currently selected by its correspond-

ing [SEL] button or fader. The ﬁrst four characters are the Channel ID (e.g.,

CH1–CH48, BUS1–BUS8, AUX1–AUX8, ST-L, ST-R). The second four characters are

the channel’s Short name. You can edit the channel’s Short name if you desire (see

page 79 and 91).

C Current Scene

This section indicates the number and title of the currently-selected Scene memory (see

page 164). If the selected Scene is write-protected, a padlock icon ( ) appears.

D EDIT indicator

This indicator appears when the current mix settings no longer match those of the Scene

that was most-currently recalled. It works in unison with the Edit indicator dot on the

Scene Memory display.

E ESAM indicator

This indicator appears when you select ESAM for the REMOTE FUNCTION parameter

on the Setup | Remote page (see page 260).

1Selected DISPLAY

2Selected channel

JPage title

NTab Scroll arrowsMPage tabs

KChannel name

LPage area

3Current Scene

4EDIT indicator 6MIDI indicator

7Surround mode indicator

8Sampling rate indicator

9Timecode counter

5EDIT indicator

30 Chapter 3—Operating Basics

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

F MIDI indicator

This indicator appears when the DM1000 is receiving MIDI data via the MIDI IN port,

USB port, REMOTE connector, or an installed MY8-mLAN card.

G Surround mode indicator

This indicator identiﬁes the currently-selected Surround mode (ST=stereo, 3-1, 5.1, or

6.1) (see page 125).

H Sampling rate indicator

This indicator identiﬁes the DM1000’s current sampling rate: 44.1 kHz (44k), 48 kHz

(48k), 88.2 kHz (88k), or 96 kHz (96k).

I Timecode counter

This counter displays the current position in the MIDI timecode being received via the

MIDI IN port, USB port, REMOTE connector, or an installed MY8-mLAN card. It

works in unison with the timecode counter on an optional MB1000 Meter Bridge.

If MIDI clock is selected as the timecode source on the Setup | Time Ref page, this

counter indicates the current MIDI clock position in bars:beats:clocks.

J Page title

This section indicates the title of the current page.

K Channel name

Depending on which page is currently selected, the channel name is the Long name of

the channel currently selected by its corresponding [SEL] button or the cursor buttons.

L Page area

This page area displays various page contents.

M Page tabs

These tabs enable you to select a display page.

N Tab Scroll arrows

These arrows indicate that more pages are available.

Selecting Display Pages

To select a display page:

1 Press the corresponding button on the top panel to select the desired page

group.

Display pages are grouped by function. To select a page group, press the [DISPLAY] button

in the following sections: AUX SELECT, ENCODER MODE, ROUTING, EQUALIZER,

MONITOR, USER DEFINED KEY. You can select additional page groups by pressing the

desired button in the DISPLAY ACCESS section.

2You can select pages that have currently-displayed tabs by pressing the

[F1]–[F4] buttons.

If the selected display page group contains multiple pages, press the [F1]–[F4] buttons

below the corresponding tab to select a speciﬁc page.

3To select a page for which a tab is not currently displayed, press either the

Left or Right [ ]/[ ] Tab Scroll button (depending on where the page is

located) to display the page tab, then press the corresponding [F1]–[F4] but-

ton.

If display page groups contain more than four pages, either the left or right arrow appears.

To display the currently-hidden tabs, press the Right or Left [ ]/[ ] Tab Scroll button.

You can also select a page from a page group as follows:

Display Interface 31

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Operating Basics

• Selecting the next page in a page group:

Press the button you selected in Step 1 repeatedly. This enables you to select a page that has

a hidden tab.

•To select the previous page in a page group:

Press and hold down the button you selected in Step 1. The screen steps back through the

pages one by one. Release the button when the desired page is displayed. This enables you

to select a page that has a hidden tab.

•To select the ﬁrst page in the group:

Double-click the button you selected in Step 1.

4 Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor (a bold frame) to a button,

parameter box, rotary control, or fader so that you can change the value.

Display Interface

This section describes how to use the display interface.

Rotary Controls & Faders

The rotary controls and faders enable you to adjust the contin-

uously variable parameter values, including Input Channel lev-

els and effects parameters. Press the cursor buttons to move the

cursor to a rotary control or fader you want to adjust, then

rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons

to modify the value.

Buttons

The buttons enable you to turn certain functions on (enabled)

or off (disabled). Move the cursor to the appropriate button,

then press the [ENTER] button to turn the function on (high-

lighted) or off. The buttons also enable you to select one of two

options or to execute certain functions.

Parameter Boxes

The parameter boxes enable you to select one of multiple

options. Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a

parameter box, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the

[INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the setting.

You may need to press the [ENTER] button to conﬁrm the

change of certain parameter box. If you edit a value in this type

of parameter boxes, the value ﬂashes. Press the [ENTER] but-

ton to conﬁrm the change, and the ﬂashing stops. If you move

the cursor to other parameters while the edited value is ﬂash-

ing, the edit is cancelled.

Tip: The DM1000 remembers the current page and parameter when you select a new page

group. If you return to the previous page group, the DM1000 displays the correct page, with

the same parameter selected. You can also select a page by using the controls or buttons on the

top panel (see page 266).

32 Chapter 3—Operating Basics

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Conﬁrmation Messages

For certain functions, the DM1000 prompts you for conﬁrmation before executing the

functions, as shown here.

Move the cursor to YES and press [ENTER] to execute the function, or move the cursor to

NO and press [ENTER] to cancel.

If you take no action for awhile, the conﬁrmation window closes automatically and the

function is not executed.

Title Edit Window

The Title Edit window enables you to enter titles for Scene and library memories, Auto-

mixes, and so on. You can enter 4, 12, or 16 characters, depending on the item.

The ﬁgure on the left shows uppercase characters and various punctuation marks. The ﬁg-

ure on the right shows lowercase characters and numbers.

Use the cursor buttons to select characters, and press the [ENTER] button to enter them

into the title. The cursor moves to the right automatically as each character is entered. To

move the cursor accross the title, use the Parameter wheel or the left and right arrows in the

display page.

Use the SHIFT LOCK button to select uppercase or lowercase characters, and use the SPC

button to enter a space.

To insert a space at the cursor position and move subsequent characters to the right, move

the cursor to the INS button and press [ENTER].

To delete the character at the cursor position and move subsequent characters to the left,

move the cursor to the DEL button and press [ENTER].

When you have ﬁnished, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER] to conﬁrm

the title. To cancel the title entry, move the cursor to the CANCEL button, then press

[ENTER].

Selecting Layers 33

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Operating Basics

Selecting Layers

Input Channels and Output Channels (Bus Outs & Aux Outs) are arranged into layers, as

illustrated below. There are six layers altogether.

The currently-selected layer determines the function of the channel

strip Encoders, [SEL] buttons, [SOLO] buttons, [ON] buttons, and fad-

ers. Use the LAYER buttons to select a layer you wish to edit using the

channel strip controls.

The following table shows the layers that you can access using the LAYER buttons, and the

parameters you can control using the channel strips on each layer.

LAYER buttons Layers

Channel Strips

1–8 9–16

[1-16] button

Input Channel Layer 1–16 Input Channels 1–16

[17-32] button

Input Channel Layer 17–32 Input Channels 17–32

[33-48] button

Input Channel Layer 33–48 Input Channels 33–48

[REMOTE 1] button

Remote Layer 1

Operation depends on the selected

target (see page 215).

[REMOTE 2] button

Remote Layer 2

[MASTER] button

Master Layer

Aux Send masters

1–8

Bus Out masters

1–8

Tip: The function of each channel strip fader and Encoder depends on the currently-selected

Fader mode (see page 35) and Encoder mode (see page 36) respectively.

BUS 8

32 48

BUS 7

31 47

BUS 6

30 46

BUS 5

29 45

BUS 4

28 44

BUS 3

27 43

+10

AUX 1

17 33

+10

AUX 2

18 34

+10

AUX 3

19 35

+10

AUX 4

20 36

+10

AUX 5

21 37

+10

AUX 6

22 38

+10

AUX 7

23 39

+10

AUX 8

24 40

+10

BUS 1

25 41

+10

BUS 2

26 42

STEREO

BUS 8

32 48

BUS 7

31 47

BUS 6

30 46

BUS 5

29 45

BUS 4

28 44

BUS 3

27 43

+10

AUX 1

17 33

+10

AUX 2

18 34

+10

AUX 3

19 35

+10

AUX 4

20 36

+10

AUX 5

21 37

+10

AUX 6

22 38

+10

AUX 7

23 39

+10

AUX 8

24 40

+10

BUS 1

25 41

+10

BUS 2

26 42

STEREO

BUS 8

32 48

BUS 7

31 47

BUS 6

30 46

BUS 5

29 45

BUS 4

28 44

BUS 3

27 43

+10

AUX 1

17 33

+10

AUX 2

18 34

+10

AUX 3

19 35

+10

AUX 4

20 36

+10

AUX 5

21 37

+10

AUX 6

22 38

+10

AUX 7

23 39

+10

AUX 8

24 40

+10

BUS 1

25 41

+10

BUS 2

26 42

STEREO

BUS 8

32 48

BUS 7

31 47

BUS 6

30 46

BUS 5

29 45

BUS 4

28 44

BUS 3

27 43

+10

AUX 1

17 33

+10

AUX 2

18 34

+10

AUX 3

19 35

+10

AUX 4

20 36

+10

AUX 5

21 37

+10

AUX 6

22 38

+10

AUX 7

23 39

+10

AUX 8

24 40

+10

BUS 1

25 41

+10

BUS 2

26 42

STEREO

BUS 8

32 48

BUS 7

31 47

BUS 6

30 46

BUS 5

29 45

BUS 4

28 44

BUS 3

27 43

+10

AUX 1

17 33

+10

AUX 2

18 34

+10

AUX 3

19 35

+10

AUX 4

20 36

+10

AUX 5

21 37

+10

AUX 6

22 38

+10

AUX 7

23 39

+10

AUX 8

24 40

+10

BUS 1

25 41

+10

BUS 2

26 42

STEREO

BUS 8

32 48

BUS 7

31 47

BUS 6

30 46

BUS 5

29 45

BUS 4

28 44

BUS 3

27 43

+10

AUX 1

17 33

+10

AUX 2

18 34

+10

AUX 3

19 35

+10

AUX 4

20 36

+10

AUX 5

21 37

+10

AUX 6

22 38

+10

AUX 7

23 39

+10

AUX 8

24 40

+10

BUS 1

25 41

+10

BUS 2

26 42

STEREO

Input Channel Layer 1–16

Input Channel Layer 17–32

Input Channel Layer 33–48

Master Layer

Remote Layer 1

Remote Layer 2

34 Chapter 3—Operating Basics

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Selecting Channels

The SELECTED CHANNEL controls enable you to edit

main mix parameters for a channel selected from the Input

Channels and Output Channels (Aux Outs, Bus Outs, and

Stereo Out).

To select a channel for editing using the SELECTED

CHANNEL controls, follow the steps below:

1 Press the corresponding LAYER button to select a

layer that includes the desired channel (see

page 33).

2 Use the corresponding [SEL] button or fader to

select the desired Input or Output Channel.

The channel is selected and the [SEL] button indicator

lights up.

If the Fader Touch Sense parameter is enabled on the Setup | Prefer2 page (see page 268),

operating a fader selects the corresponding channel.

The Channel’s ID and Short name appear in the upper-left corner of the display. If the cur-

rently-displayed page contains a relevant channel parameter, the cursor moves to that

parameter automatically. If the currently-displayed page contains no such parameter, a page

that does contain such a parameter is selected automatically.

3To select the Stereo Out, press the STEREO [SEL] button or touch the [STE-

REO] fader.

Repeatedly pressing the STEREO [SEL] button toggles between the Stereo Out left and Ste-

reo Out right channels.

If the currently-displayed page contains a relevant Stereo Out parameter, the cursor moves

to that parameter automatically. If the currently-displayed page contains no such parame-

ter, a page that does contain such a parameter is selected automatically.

Tip: For paired Input or Output Channels, the channel for which you pressed the [SEL] button

is selected, and its indicator lights up. The [SEL] button indicator of the paired partner ﬂashes.

Tip: If the Auto Channel Select parameter is enabled on the Setup | Prefer1 page (see

page 266), operating a fader or Encoder, or turning on a [SOLO] or [ON] button selects the

corresponding channel.

EQUALIZER

LOW

HIGH

GAIN

FREQUENCY

LOW MID

HIGH MID

ROUTING

STEREO DIRECT

DISPLAY

SELECTED CHANNEL

GRAB

Selecting Fader Modes 35

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Operating Basics

Selecting Fader Modes

The function of channel faders (1–16) depends on the selected Layer and Fader mode.

1 Select a layer that includes the desired channel (see page 33).

2 Press the FADER MODE [FADER/AUX] button to select a Fader

mode.

•When the [FADER]indicator

lights up: .............................................. You can use channel faders to

control Input Channel levels or

Output Channel (Aux Out 1–8,

Bus Out 1–8) master levels.

•When the [AUX] indicator

lights up: .............................................. You can use channel faders to control Input

Channel Aux Send levels.

The following table shows the channel fader functions for each Layer and Fader mode.

LAYER buttons Fader Mode

Channel Strip Fader

1–8 9–16

[1-16] button

Fader Input Channels 1–16 level

Aux Input Channels 1–16 Aux Send level

[17-32] button

Fader Input Channels 17–32 level

Aux Input Channels 17–32 Aux Send level

[33-48] button

Fader Input Channels 33–48 level

Aux Input Channels 33–48 Aux Send level

[REMOTE 1] button

Fader

Operation depends on the selected target (see

page 215).

Aux No operation No operation

[REMOTE 2] button

Fader

Operation depends on the selected target (see

page 215).

Aux No operation No operation

[MASTER] button

Fader

Aux Send master 1–8

output level

Bus Out master1–8 out-

put level

Aux No operation No operation

Note: Yo u cannot select Aux mode while the Master layer is selected. If you switch to the Master

layer while the FADER MODE [AUX] indicator is lit, the indicator automatically turns off

and the [FADER] indicator lights up.

FADER MODE

FADER

AUX

36 Chapter 3—Operating Basics

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Selecting Encoder Modes

The function of Encoders (1–16) depends on the selected Layer and Encoder mode.

1 Select a layer that includes the desired channel (see page 33).

2 Press the corresponding ENCODER MODE button to

select an Encoder mode.

•When the [PAN] button indicator

lights up: ...............................................Encoders 1–16 function as

Pan controls for the

selected layer.

•When the [AUX] button indicator

lights up: ...............................................Encoders 1–16 function as Aux Send level con-

trols for the selected layer.

•When the [ASSIGN] button indicator

lights up: ...............................................Encoders control the parameters assigned to the

[ASSIGN] button for the selected layer. (See the

next section for more information on how to

assign parameters to the [ASSIGN] button.)

The following table shows the Encoder functions for each Layer and Encoder mode.

LAYER buttons Encoder Mode

Channel Strip Encoder

1–8 9–16

[1-16] button

Pan Input Channels 1–16 pan

Aux Input Channels 1–16 Aux Send level

Assign

Assigned parameter

1. If ALT LAYER is assigned, the Encoder controls the parameters assigned to the faders of the layer that

is currently not selected (if Layer 1-16 is currently selected, the Encoder controls the parameters as-

signed to the faders in Layer 17-32; if Layer 17-32 is currently selected, the Encoder controls the pa-

rameters assigned to the faders in Layer 1-16).

[17-32] button

Pan Input Channels 17–32 pan

Aux Input Channels 17–32 Aux Send level

Assign

Assigned parameter

[33-48] button

Pan Input Channels 33–48 pan

Aux Input Channels 33–48 Aux Send level

Assign Assigned parameter

[REMOTE 1] button

Pan

Operation depends on the selected target (see

page 215).

Aux

Assign

[REMOTE 2] button

Pan

Aux

Assign

[MASTER] button

Pan

No operation

Aux

Assign Assigned parameter

AUXPAN

DISPLAY

ASSIGN

ENCODER MODE

Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button 37

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Operating Basics

Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN]

button

While the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button indicator is lit, you can use Encoders 1–16

to control a parameter assigned to the [ASSIGN] button. Follow the steps below to assign a

parameter to the [ASSIGN] button.

1 Press the ENCODER MODE [DISPLAY] button.

The Encoder | Encoder page appears. The name of the parameter currently assigned to the

[ASSIGN] button is displayed in the left-hand box. All assignable parameters are displayed

in the right-hand box. (The parameter currently-assigned to the button is highlighted in the

right-hand box.)

2 Use the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select a param-

eter in the right-hand box.

A parameter is selected when it appears inside the dotted box. Refer to the next page for a

complete list of assignable parameters.

3 Press [ENTER] to conﬁrm the assignment.

Once assigned, press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button to turn on the button indi-

cator. You can now use Encoders 1–16 to control the assigned parameter.

Note: When channels that do not feature the currently-assigned parameter are selected, the

Encoders are inactive. For example, if the assigned Encoder parameter is “Phase,” and the Mas-

ter layer is selected, Encoders are inactive, because the Aux Sends and Bus Outs do not feature

Phase parameters.

38 Chapter 3—Operating Basics

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

• Assignable Encoder Mode Parameter List

# Parameters Encoder Operation Push Switch Operation

No Assign

——

Attenuator

Attenuator Display the settings.

Input Patch

Input Channel patch

Conﬁrm patch selection.

Insert In Patch

Insert In patch

Insert Out Patch

Insert Out patch

Direct Out

Direct Out patch

Phase:

Phase: normal/reverse

Display the settings.

Insert On

Insert on/off

Aux pre/post

Delay On

Delay on/off

Delay Time

Delay FB.Gain

Delay Mix

EQ On

EQ on/off

EQ Type

EQ Low Q

EQ Low F

EQ Low Frequency

EQ Low G

EQ Low Gain

EQ Low-Mid Q

EQ Low-Mid F

EQ Low-Mid Frequency

EQ Low-Mid G

EQ Low-Mid Gain

EQ High-Mid Q

EQ High-Mid F

EQ High-Mid Frequency

EQ High-Mid G

EQ High-Mid Gain

EQ High Q

EQ High F

EQ High Frequency

EQ High G

EQ High Gain

Gate On

Gate on/off

Gate Threshold

Gate Range

Gate Attack

Gate Decay

Gate Hold

Comp On

Comp on/off

Comp Threshold

Comp Ratio

Comp Attack

Comp Release

Comp Out Gain

Comp Knee/Width

Surr L/R Pan

Surr F/R Pan

Surr Front DIV

Surr Rear DIV

Surr LFE Level

Surr Pan Wheel

Scene Fade Time

ALT LAYER

Alt Layer

HA Gain

Ins HA Gain

HA Ins Gain

Metering 39

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Operating Basics

Metering

This section describes how to check Input and Output Channel levels using the Meter pages

or an optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [METER] button repeatedly until the Meter | Posi-

tion page appears.

This page enables you to set the metering position for Input and Output Channels.

A INPUT section

This section enables you to select the metering position for Input Channel signals.

B OUTPUT section

This section enables you to select the metering position for Output Channel (Aux Out

1–8, Bus Out 1–8, Stereo Out) signals.

2 Move the cursor to the desired parameter button in the INPUT or OUTPUT

section, then press [ENTER].

You can select one of the following three positions in each section.

• PRE EQ ..........................Immediately before EQ.

• PRE FADER ..................Immediately before the fader.

• POST FADER ...............Immediately after the fader.

3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [METER] button repeatedly until the page listed

below that contains the desired channels appears.

- CH1-32 page

- CH33-48 page

These pages display the Input Channel 1–32 levels and Input Channel 33–48 levels

respectively.

- CH1-48 page

This page displays the Input Channel 1–48 levels altogether.

-Master page

This page displays the Output Channel (Aux Out 1–8, Bus Out 1–8, Stereo Out) levels

altogether.

-Effect page

This page displays the internal effects processor 1–4 input and output levels altogether.

Tip: If an optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge is installed, changes on this page will be

reﬂected on the Input & Output Metering Position parameters on the Peak Meter Bridge.

40 Chapter 3—Operating Basics

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

-Stereo page

This page displays the Stereo Out or Control Room Monitor output level.

4 If you selected the CH1-32 page, the CH33-48 page, or the Master page, use

the MASTER MODE parameter to select one of the following three metering

signal types:

• GATE GR....................... The amount of gain reduction for the gate (except for the Mas-

ter page)

• COMP GR..................... The amount of gain reduction for the compressor

• LEVEL ...........................Input Channel input level, or Output Channel output level

Tip: You can also select the CH1-32 page, the CH33-48 page, or the Master page using the

LAYER buttons. In this case, if an optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge is installed, the Peak

Meter Bridge displays the same signal meters in unison with the DM1000 meters.

Tip: These pages also allow you to change the metering position using the POSITION param-

eter. This parameter setting operates in unison with the Meter | Position page setting.

• CH1-32 page • CH33-48 page

• CH1-48 page • Master page

Metering 41

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Operating Basics

5 If you selected the Stereo page, use the METER MODE parameter to select

one of the following two metering signal types:

• C-R .................................Control Room Monitor output signal

• STEREO.........................Stereo Out signal

This parameter setting affects the meters on the Meter | Master page, the ST meter on the

Stereo page, and the stereo meter on the right side of the display.

6To activate the Peak Hold function, move the cursor to the PEAK HOLD but-

ton, then press [ENTER].

The PEAK HOLD button turns on, and the peak level is held on the meters on the page and

on the Peak Meter Bridge. To cancel the Peak Hold function, turn the PEAK HOLD button

off. If an optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge is installed, its Peak Hold function switches

in unison with the DM1000 meters.

42 Chapter 3—Operating Basics

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Connections and Setup 43

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Connections and Setup

4 Connections and Setup

This chapter explains how to connect and set up your DM1000.

Connections

The following section explains three typical ways to connect the DM1000 to external equip-

ment, although there are numerous others.

■ Conﬁguring an analog 32-channel mixing system

In this system, the DM1000, with optional AD cards (MY8-AD, MY8-AD96, etc.) installed

in Slots 1 and 2, is used as a keyboard mixer or sound re-enforcement mixer. Up to 32 ana-

log channels, including Inputs 1–16 and line inputs on the AD cards, are available for mix-

ing.

Tip: You can adjust the gain of the AD card channels by setting the DIP switches on the cards.

For more information, see your AD card documentation.

AUXPAN

DISPLAY

ASSIGN

ENCODER MODE

EQUALIZER

LOW

HIGH

GAIN

FREQUENCY

LOW MID

HIGH MID

ROUTING

STEREO DIRECT

DISPLAY

SELECTED CHANNEL

BUS 8

32 48

BUS 7

31 47

BUS 6

30 46

BUS 5

29 45

BUS 4

28 44

BUS 3

27 43

16151413121110

20dB

ONOFF

+48V

78 1213 14 15

91011

1615141312111098765432

PEAK

SIGNAL

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PAD

20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 1

17 33

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 2

18 34

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 3

19 35

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 4

20 36

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 5

21 37

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 6

22 38

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 7

23 39

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 8

24 40

+10

SOLO

SEL

BUS 1

25 41

+10

SOLO

SEL

+10

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

BUS 2

26 42

AUTO

SEL

STEREO

AUX2 AUX3 AUX4

AUX6AUX5 AUX7 AUX8

AUXSELECT

DISPLAY

AUX1

FADER MODE

FADER

AUX

DISPLAY ACCESS

AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY

MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW

PAIR /G ROUP

INPUT

OUTPUT

EFFECTSURROUND DYNAMICS SCENE

PAN/

INSERT/DELAY

PATCH

GRAB

SCENE MEMORY

STORE RE CALL

DISPLAY

USER DEFINED

KEYS

ENTER

INC

DEC

TALKBACK LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL

010

PHONES

MONITOR

LEVEL

SOLO CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

DIMMER

TALKB ACK

MONITOR

STEREO

SLOT

BUS

DISPLAY

100

F1 F2 F3

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

REC

SONG SCENE

MUSIC

PRODUCTION

SYNTHESIZER

Integrated

Sampling

Sequencer

Real-timeExternalControl

Surface

Modular

SynthesisPlug-in

System

REC

SONG SCENE

MUSIC

PRODUCTION

SYNTHESIZER

Integrated

Sampling

Sequencer

Real-timeExternalControl

Surface

Modular

SynthesisPlug-in

System

VOL VOL

Synthesizer Synthesizer

MY8-AD96

etc.

Effects processor

Master recorder

Monitoring system

Guitar

SLOT 1 SLOT 2

OMNI IN connector

OMNI OUT connector

2TR IN DIGITAL

connector

2TR OUT DIGITAL connector

OMNI OUT

connectors 11–12

PHONES jack

INPUT connector

MY8-AD96

etc.

44 Chapter 4—Connections and Setup

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

■ Conﬁguring a recording system with a hard disk recorder

In this system, the DM1000, with optional I/O cards (MY8-AT, MY16-AT, MY8-TD, etc.)

installed in Slots 1 and 2, is one component in a system that includes a digital MTR, such as

a hard disk recorder. This system will support track recording, overdubbing, track bounc-

ing, and mixdown. You can also control the hard disk recorder’s transport section by send-

ing MMC commands from the DM1000 to the recorder.

AUXPAN

DISPLAY

ASSIGN

ENCODER MODE

EQUALIZER

LOW

HIGH

GAIN

FREQUENCY

LOW MID

HIGH MID

ROUTING

STEREO DIRECT

DISPLAY

SELECTED CHANNEL

BUS 8

32 48

BUS 7

31 47

BUS 6

30 46

BUS 5

29 45

BUS 4

28 44

BUS 3

27 43

16151413121110

20dB

ONOFF

+48V

78 1213 14 15

91011

1615141312111098765432

PEAK

SIGNAL

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PAD

20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 1

17 33

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 2

18 34

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 3

19 35

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 4

20 36

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 5

21 37

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 6

22 38

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 7

23 39

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 8

24 40

+10

SOLO

SEL

BUS 1

25 41

+10

SOLO

SEL

+10

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

BUS 2

26 42

AUTO

SEL

STEREO

AUX2 AUX3 AUX4

AUX6AUX5 AUX7 AUX8

AUXSELECT

DISPLAY

AUX1

FADER MODE

FADER

AUX

DISPLAY ACCESS

AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY

MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW

PAIR /GROUP

INPUT

OUTPUT

EFFECTSURROUND DYNAMICS SCENE

PAN/

INSERT/DELAY

PATCH

GRAB

SCENE MEMORY

STORE RE CALL

DISPLAY

USER DEFINED

KEYS

ENTER

INC

DEC

TALKBACK LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL

010

PHONES

MONITOR

LEVEL

SOLO CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

DIMMER

TALKBACK

MONITOR

STEREO

SLOT

BUS

DISPLAY

100

F1 F2 F3

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

REC

SONG SCENE

MUSIC

PRODUCTION

SYNTHESIZER

Integrated

Sampling

Sequencer

Real-timeExternalControl

Surface

Modular

SynthesisPlug-in

System

VOL VOL

Synthesizer

Computer

MY8-AT

etc.

Effects processor

HDR (Hard Disk Recorder)

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

WORD CLOCK OUT connector

TO HOST USB port

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

WORD CLOCK IN connector

IN OUT IN OUT

Monitoring system

Master recorder

SLOT 1 SLOT 2

OMNI IN connector

OMNI OUT connector

2TR IN DIGITAL

connector

2TR OUT DIGITAL connector

OMNI OUT

connectors 11–12

PHONES jack

INPUT connector

MY8-AT

etc.

Connections 45

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Connections and Setup

■ Conﬁguring a recording system that uses a DAW (Digital Audio

Workstation)

In this system, the DM1000, with optional I/O cards (MY8-AT, MY16-AT, MY8-AE, etc.)

installed in Slots 1 and 2, is connected to a computer-based DAW (Digital Audio Worksta-

tion). The DM1000 can provide audio input and output for the DAW. If you connect the

DM1000 and the computer via USB, the DM1000’s Remote function enables you to control

the DAW’s locate and transport functions and change the parameters.

REC

SONG SCENE

MUSIC

PRODUCTION

SYNTHESIZER

Integrated

Sampling

Sequencer

Real-timeExternalControl

Surface

Modular

SynthesisPlug-in

System

AUXPAN

DISPLAY

ASSIGN

ENCODER MODE

EQUALIZER

LOW

HIGH

GAIN

FREQUENCY

LOW MID

HIGH MID

ROUTING

STEREO DIRECT

DISPLAY DISPLAY

SELECTED CHANNEL

BUS 8

32 48

BUS 7

31 47

BUS 6

30 46

BUS 5

29 45

BUS 4

28 44

BUS 3

27 43

16151413121110

20dB

ONOFF

+48V

78 1213 14 15

91011

1615141312111098765432

PEAK

SIGNAL

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PAD

20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 1

17 33

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 2

18 34

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 3

19 35

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 4

20 36

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 5

21 37

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 6

22 38

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 7

23 39

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 8

24 40

+10

SOLO

SEL

BUS 1

25 41

+10

SOLO

SEL

+10

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

BUS 2

26 42

AUTO

SEL

STEREO

AUX2 AUX3 AUX4

AUX6AUX5 AUX7 AUX8

AUXSELECT

DISPLAY

AUX1

FADER MODE

FADER

AUX

DISPLAY ACCESS

AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY

MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW

PAIR /GROUP

INPUT

OUTPUT

EFFECTSURROUND DYNAMICS SCENE

PAN/

INSERT/DELAY

PATCH

GRAB

SCENE MEMORY

STORE RECALL

DISPLAY

USER DEFINED

KEYS

ENTER

INC

DEC

TALK BACK LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL

010

PHONES

MONITOR

LEVEL

SOLO CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

DIMMER

TALKBACK

MONITOR

STEREO

SLOT

BUS

DISPLAY

100

F1 F2 F3

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

VOL VOL

Synthesizer

Computer

MY-16AT

etc.

Effects processor

Audio interface

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

WORD CLOCK OUT

connector

MIDI interface

Monitoring system

IN OUT IN OUT

Master recorder

SLOT 1 SLOT 2

OMNI IN connector

OMNI OUT connector

2TR IN DIGITAL

connector

2TR OUT DIGITAL connector

OMNI OUT

connectors 11–12

PHONES jack

INPUT connector

TO HOST USB port

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

WORD CLOCK IN connector

MY-16AT

etc.

46 Chapter 4—Connections and Setup

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Wordclock Connections and Settings

About wordclock

Digital audio equipment must be synchronized when digital audio signals are transferred

from one device to another. Even if both devices use identical sampling rates, digital signals

may not transfer correctly, or audible noise or unwanted clicks may occur if the digital

audio processing circuits inside each digital audio device are not synchronized with each

other.

Wo rdclocks are signals that enable digital audio processing circuits to synchronize with each

other. In a typical digital audio system, one device operates as the wordclock master, trans-

mitting wordclock signals, and the other devices operate as wordclock slaves, synchronizing

to the wordclock master.

If you are digitally connecting the DM1000 to other equipment, you must decide which

device to use as the wordclock master and which devices to use as slaves, then set up all the

devices accordingly. The DM1000 can be used as the wordclock master running at either

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, or 96 kHz, or slaved to an external wordclock source.

Wordclock connections

To establish wordclock synchronization between the DM1000 and external devices, you can

distribute wordclock signals independently via dedicated cables, or you can use clock infor-

mation derived from digital audio connections.

The WORD CLOCK IN and OUT connectors transmit and receive wordclock signals inde-

pendently on the DM1000. The following examples show two ways in which wordclock sig-

nals can be distributed and received via the WORD CLOCK IN and OUT connectors.

• Daisy Chain Distribution

In this example, the wordclock signal is distributed in a “daisy-chain” fashion, with each

device feeding the wordclock signal from the wordclock out connector on to the wordclock

in connector of the next device. This method of distribution is not recommended for larger

systems.

• Star Distribution

In this example, a dedicated wordclock distribution box is used to supply wordclock signals

from the wordclock master to each wordclock slave individually.

WC IN

(BNC)

WC OUT

(BNC)

WC OUT (BNC)

WC IN

(BNC)

WC IN

(BNC)

WC OUT

(BNC)

Wordclock

master

Device A

Wordclock slave

Device B

Wordclock slave

Device C

Wordclock slave

WC OUT

(BNC)

WC IN (BNC) WC IN (BNC) WC IN (BNC) WC IN (BNC)

Wordclock

master

Device A

Wordclock slave

Device B

Wordclock slave

Device D

Wordclock slave

Device C

Wordclock slave

Wordclock

distribution box

Wordclock Connections and Settings 47

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Connections and Setup

If the external devices do not have wordclock in and out connectors, you can use the clock

information included in the digital audio signals. In this case, digital audio signals and

wordclock signals are transferred via the 2TR OUT DIGITAL and 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks

or via the digital I/O cards installed in the rear panel slots.

Specifying the Wordclock Source

To digitally connect the DM1000 to external devices, you must specify the wordclock source

for the system. Follow the steps below.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F1] (WORD CLOCK)

button.

The Word Clock page appears. On this page, you can view the current synchronization sta-

tus of input signals at each slot and connector.

Note: When you change the wordclock settings on any device in your digital audio system,

some devices may output noise due to being out of synchronization. Be sure to turn down your

monitoring device before changing wordclock settings.

AUXPAN

DISPLAY

ASSIGN

ENCODER MODE

EQUALIZER

LOW

HIGH

GAIN

FREQUENCY

LOW MID

HIGH MID

ROUTING

STEREO DIRECT

DISPLAY

SELECTED CHANNEL

BUS 8

32 48

BUS 7

31 47

BUS 6

30 46

BUS 5

29 45

BUS 4

28 44

BUS 3

27 43

16151413121110

20dB

ONOFF

+48V

78 1213 14 15

91011

1615141312111098765432

PEAK

SIGNAL

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PAD

20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 1

17 33

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 2

18 34

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 3

19 35

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 4

20 36

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 5

21 37

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 6

22 38

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 7

23 39

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 8

24 40

+10

SOLO

SEL

BUS 1

25 41

+10

SOLO

SEL

+10

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

BUS 2

26 42

AUTO

SEL

STEREO

AUX2 AUX3 AUX4

AUX6AUX5 AUX7 AUX8

AUXSELECT

DISPLAY

AUX1

FADER MODE

FADER

AUX

DISPLAY ACCESS

AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY

MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW

PAIR /GROUP

INPUT

OUTPUT

EFFECTSURROUND DYNAMICS SCENE

PAN/

INSERT/DELAY

PATCH

GRAB

SCENE MEMORY

STORE RE CALL

DISPLAY

USER DEFINED

KEYS

ENTER

INC

DEC

TALKBACK LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL

010

PHONES

MONITOR

LEVEL

SOLO CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

DIMMER

TALKBACK

MONITOR

STEREO

SLOT

BUS

DISPLAY

100

F1 F2 F3

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

Digital I/O

card

External device

Digital audio signal

Wordclock signal

48 Chapter 4—Connections and Setup

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

The source select button indicators are explained below:

A usable wordclock signal is present at this input, and it is in sync with the current

DM1000 internal clock.

No wordclock signal is present at this input.

A usable wordclock signal is present at this input, but it is out of sync with the current

DM1000 internal clock.

This input is the currently-selected wordclock source.

This input was selected as the wordclock source, but no usable signal was received.

This input cannot be selected as the wordclock source because (a) a wordclock signal

cannot be sourced from this input on this type of I/O card, or (b) no I/O card is

installed.

2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a source, then press [ENTER].

The following are possible wordclock sources:

• SLOT1/SLOT2.............. These buttons select the inputs from the digital I/O cards

installed in Slots 1 and 2 as the wordclock source. Inputs are

selected in pairs (odd and even numbers in this order). The

SLOT TYPE column displays the names of any installed I/O

cards. The number of pairs depends on the type of I/O card

installed.

• WC IN............................ This button selects the wordclock signal input at the WORD

CLOCK IN connector on the rear panel.

• 2TRD1 ........................... This button selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL 1 input as the word-

clock source.

• 2TRD2 ........................... This button selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL 2 input as the word-

clock source.

• INT 44.1k, INT 48k,

INT 88.2, INT 96k........ These buttons select the internal clock generator as the word-

clock source. The DM1000 will function as the wordclock mas-

ter.

Tip:

• The FS box displays the sampling frequency at which the DM1000 is currently operating.

• The SLOT TYPE column displays the names of any installed I/O cards.

• The IN and OUT columns indicate the number of input and output channels available for

each installed I/O card.

Note: To transfer data at higher sampling frequencies (88.2 kHz or 96 kHz) between the

DM1000 and connected external devices, you need to set the data transfer format. See page 59

for more information.

Tip: If the wordclock signal is interrupted while the DM1000 is syncing to an external device,

the DM1000 will automatically switch to an internal clock (INT 44.1k/ INT 48k/INT

88.2k/INT 96k) that is closest to the interrupted clock.

Input and Output Patching 49

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Connections and Setup

Input and Output Patching

The DM1000 is designed to enable you to patch (assign) signals to Inputs and Outputs.

This section explains how to view the signals patched to Inputs and Outputs and change the

assignment.

Patching Input Channels

By default, the Input Channels are patched as follows:

• INPUT connectors 1–16 .................... Input Channels 1–16

• Channels 1–8 of Slot 1 ....................... Input Channels 17–24

• Channels 1–8 of Slot 2 ....................... Input Channels 25–32

•Outputs 1–2 of Internal Effects

Processor 1–4 ...................................... Input Channels 33–40

• L&R of 2TR IN DIGITAL

connectors 1–2 .................................... Input Channels 41–44

• OMNI IN connectors 1–4.................. Input Channels 45–48

Follow the steps below to view or change the patching.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the fol-

lowing page appears.

Inputs and Slot channels that are currently assigned to Input Channels are shown in the

parameter boxes (

1) beneath the channel numbers. The parameter indicators are

explained below:

• – .....................................No assignment

• AD1–AD16....................INPUT connectors 1–16

• OMN1–OMN4 .............OMNI IN connectors 1–4

• S1-1–S116......................Channels 1–16 of Slot 1

• S2-1–S216......................Channels 1–16 of Slot 2

• FX1-1–FX1-8 ................Outputs 1–8 of Internal Effects Processor 1

• FX2-1–FX2-2 ................Outputs 1–2 of Internal Effects Processor 2

• FX3-1–FX3-2 ................Outputs 1–2 of Internal Effects Processor 3

• FX4-1–FX4-2 ................Outputs 1–2 of Internal Effects Processor 4

• 2D1L & 2D1R ...............2TR DIGITAL IN 1 (L/R)

Tip: If the data from a connected instrument fails to be input, or if you are unable to monitor

an OMNI OUT, check the I/O patching, as explained below:

50 Chapter 4—Connections and Setup

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

• 2D2L & 2D2R ............... 2TR DIGITAL IN 2 (L/R)

• BUS1–8.......................... Bus 1–8 Outputs

• AUX1–8.........................Aux Send 1–8 Outputs

2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a patch parameter (

1) for

which you want to change the assignment, and rotate the Parameter wheel

or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching.

3 Press [ENTER] to conﬁrm the change.

Patching Omni Outs

By default, the Omni Outs are patched as follows:

• OMNI OUT connectors 1–8 ..............Aux Sends 1–8

• OMNI OUT connectors 9–10 ............Stereo Bus L & R

• OMNI OUT connectors 11–12..........Control Room Monitor L & R

Follow the steps below to view or change the patching.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the fol-

lowing page appears.

Signals that are currently assigned to the OMNI OUT connectors are shown in the param-

eter boxes (

1) underneath the connector numbers. The parameter indicators are

explained below:

• – .............................................................No assignment

• BUS1–BUS8..........................................Bus 1–8 signals

• AUX1–AUX8 ........................................Aux Send 1–8 Signals

• ST L/R....................................................Stereo Bus signals

• INS CH1–INS CH48 ...........................Input Channels 1–48 Insert Outs

• INS BUS1–INS BUS8 ..........................Bus 1–8 Insert Outs

• INS AUX1–INS AUX8 .........................Aux Send 1–8 Insert Outs

• INS ST-L/ST-R......................................Stereo Bus Insert Outs

Tip:

•By default, you can also use the Encoders to select Input Channel sources. Rotate the Encoders

to display the In Patch/In Patch page and select sources. Press the Encoder push switches to

conﬁrm the changes.

•To restore the default patching, recall Input Patch memory #00 (see page 176).

Input and Output Patching 51

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Connections and Setup

• SURR XXX

(“XXX” is a channel name). .............. Surround Monitor Outs

• CR-L/CR-R........................................... Control Room Monitor signals

• CAS BUS1–BUS8 ................................ Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs

• CAS AUX1–AUX8............................... Aux Send 1–8 Cascade Outs

• CAS ST-L/ST-R.................................... Stereo Bus Cascade Outs

• CASSOLOL/CASSOLOR ................... Solo Bus Cascade Outs

• SOLO-L/SOLO-R................................ Solo signals

• M.MX XXX

(“XXX” is a channel name.) .............. Surround Monitor Outs

2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a patch parameter (

1) you

wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC]

buttons to modify the patching.

3 Press [ENTER] to conﬁrm the change.

Tip: To restore the default patching, recall Output Patch memory #00 (see page 177).

52 Chapter 4—Connections and Setup

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Analog I/O & Digital I/O 53

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Analog I/O & Digital I/O

5 Analog I/O & Digital I/O

This chapter describes the DM1000’s analog and digital input/output connectors as well as

the basic operations involving the digital I/Os.

Analog Inputs & Outputs

AD Input Section

The DM1000’s rear panel features Input connectors 1–16, which enable you to connect

microphone and line-level sources, and OMNI IN connectors, which enable you to connect

line-level sources. Signals input at these connectors can be patched to Input Channels. (See

page 109 for more information on patching Input Channels.)

• INPUT connectors 1–16

These balanced XLR-3-31-type connectors accept line-level and

microphone signals. The nominal input range is –60 dB through

+4 dB.

• OMNI IN connectors 1–4

These balanced XLR-3-31-type connectors accept line-level signals.

The nominal signal level is +4 dB.

• Phantom Power

Inputs 1 through 16 feature switchable +48V phantom powering for

use with condenser-type microphones and direct boxes. Individual

+48V [ON/OFF] switches on each input turn phantom power on

and off.

•PAD switches

Inputs 1 through 16 feature pad switches, which attenuate input sig-

nals by 20 dB.

• GAIN controls

Inputs 1 through 16 feature rotary gain controls that adjust input

sensitivity. Input sensitivity ranges from +4 dB to –40 dB when the

Pad is on, and from –16 dB to –60 dB when the Pad is off.

• PEAK & SIGNAL Indicators

The SIGNAL indicator lights up when the input signal level is 20 dB

below nominal. The PEAK indicator lights up when the input signal

level is 3 dB below clipping.

INPUT

OMNI

ONOFF

+48V

20dB

PAD

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

54 Chapter 5—Analog I/O & Digital I/O

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Omni Outs

• OMNI OUT connectors 1–12

The DM1000 rear panel features OMNI OUT connectors 1–12 for

connecting line-level sources, such as a monitoring system, master

recorder, external effects processor. The OMNI OUT connectors use

balanced XLR-3-32-type jacks, with a rated output level of +4 dB.

These outputs can be patched to Bus Outs and Input Channel Direct

Outs. (See page 113 for more information on patching outputs to the

Omni Outs.)

Digital Inputs & Outputs

The DM1000 rear panel features digital input and output connectors that enable you to

connect external digital devices. Any signal path can be patched to these digital inputs and

outputs.

You can also add analog and digital I/Os by installing optional I/O cards in Slots 1 and 2.

Digital I/O Connectors

• 2TR IN DIGITAL connector

These connectors accept signals from a DAT or other 2-track digital recorder or consumer

format digital audio device.

2TR IN DIGITAL 1 uses an XLR-3-31-type connector and accepts

AES/EBU format digital audio.

2TR IN DIGITAL 2 is an RCA phono connector and accepts con-

sumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio.

You can patch signals input at these connectors to any Input Chan-

nels (see page 114). You can monitor these inputs via the Control

Room monitors by using the MONITOR [2TR D1] and [2TR D2]

buttons.

• 2TR OUT DIGITAL connectors

These connectors output signals to a DAT or other 2-track digital recorder or consumer for-

mat digital audio device.

2TR OUT DIGITAL 1 uses an XLR-3-32-type connector and outputs

AES/EBU format digital audio.

2TR OUT DIGITAL 2 is an RCA phono connector and outputs con-

sumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio.

You can patch outputs to Bus Outs and Input Channel Direct Outs

(see page 114).

SLOT 1–2

These slots allow you to install optional mini-YGDAI (Yamaha General Digital Audio Inter-

face) I/O cards. These cards offer AD/DA conversion, and various analog I/O options and

digital I/O interfaces in all the popular digital audio interconnect formats, including

AES/EBU, ADAT, and Tascam. You can patch signals input at these card connectors to any

Input Channels or Insert Ins (see page 110).

You can patch the card outputs to Bus Outs or Input Channel Direct Outs (see page 115).

INPUT

COAXIAL AES/EBU

2TR IN

DIGITAL

2TR D1

2TR D2

COAXIALAES/EBU

Converting Sampling Rates of Signals Received at 2TR Digital Inputs 55

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Analog I/O & Digital I/O

The following mini-YGDAI I/O cards are currently available.

See the Yamaha Professional Audio Web site at the following URL for up-to-date news on

I/O cards:

<http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/>.

Converting Sampling Rates of Signals Received at 2TR

Digital Inputs

The DM1000’s 2TR Digital Inputs and an optional MY8-AE96S Digital I/O card feature

sampling rate converters, so you can easily convert the sampling frequency of digital inputs

to the current DM1000 sampling rate.

1To convert the sampling rate of the signals input at the 2TR Digital Inputs,

press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F1] button.

Card Format In Out Resolution/Sampling Rate Connectors

MY8-AD

Analog in

—

20-bit, 44.1/48 kHz

Phone jack (balanced) x8

MY8-AD24

1. This card is a substitution for a 20-bit MY8-AD card.

24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz

MY4-AD

4 XLR-3-31 type (balanced) x4

MY8-AD96

8 24-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz D-sub 25-pin

MY4-DA

Analog out —

4 20-bit, 44.1/48 kHz XLR-3-32 type (balanced) x4

MY8-DA96

24-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz

D-sub 25-pin

MY8-ADDA96

Analog

in/out

88 Euroblock x4

MY8-AE

2. These cards support 24-bit/96 kHz in Double Channel mode. (Separate 96 kHz wordclock required.)

AES/EBU I/O

24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz

D-sub 25-pin

MY16-AE

16 16

MY8-AEB

88 BNC connector x8

MY8-AE96

8824-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz

D-sub 25-pin

MY8-AE96S

3. This card is identical to the MY8-AE96, except that it features a sampling rate converter.

MY8-AT

ADAT I/O

24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz

Optical x2

MY16-AT

16 16 Optical x4

MY8-TD

Tascam

D-sub 25-pin

BNC wordclock output

MY16-TD

16 16 D-sub 25-pin

MY8-mLAN

IEEE1394

6-pin 1394 connector x2

MY16-mLAN

16 16

WAVES Y56K

ADAT 8 8

24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz

Optical x2

WAVES Y96K

24-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz

56 Chapter 5—Analog I/O & Digital I/O

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

The DIO | Word Clock page appears. Use the following buttons to turn the sampling rate

converter on and off.

• 2TR IN D1..................... This button turns on and off the sampling rate converter for

2TR IN DIGITAL 1.

• 2TR IN D2..................... This button turns on and off the sampling rate converter for

2TR IN DIGITAL 2.

2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the 2TR IN D1 or 2TR IN D2

button, then press [ENTER].

The sampling rate converter for the selected 2TR Digital Input turns on or off. When on,

the sampling rate of the received digital audio is converted to the DM1000’s current sam-

pling rate.

3To convert the sampling rate of the signals input at the installed I/O card

inputs, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F2] button.

The DIO | Format page appears.

Use the buttons in the SRC sections (

1) to turn the sampling rate converters on and off.

You can turn the sampling rate converters of the digital I/O cards on or off in pairs (odd &

even channels, in this order).

Tip:

• The FS box displays the sampling frequency at which the DM1000 is currently operating.

• The AES/EBU and COAXIAL parameter ﬁelds display the converted sampling rate. (If the

current wordclock is not synched, they display “Unlock.”)

Note: The sampling rate converter is available only on the Yamaha MY8-AE96S Digital I/O

card. If you have installed other types of I/O cards in the slots, or if no cards are installed in

the DM1000, the buttons in the SRC sections are disabled.

Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status 57

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Analog I/O & Digital I/O

4 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to any two-channel button in the

SRC sections (

1), then press [ENTER].

The sampling rate converter for the selected 2-channel input turns on or off. When on, the

sampling rate of the received digital audio is converted to the DM1000’s current sampling

rate.

Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status

You can view and monitor the Channel Status (sampling rate, emphasis, etc.) of digital

audio signals connected to the 2TR Digital Inputs and Slot Inputs as follows.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] button, then press the [F2] button.

The Utility | CH Status page appears.

On this page, use the following buttons to select a slot or connector for which you want to

view the channel status.

A SLOT1, SLOT2

These buttons enable you to view the Channel Status of each two adjacent (odd and

even, in this order) channel signals connected to the digital I/O cards installed in Slots 1

and 2.

B 2TR IN

This button enables you to view the Channel Status of input signals connected to the

2TR Digital Inputs.

2 Move the cursor to the desired input or slot button, then press [ENTER].

Channel Status information for the selected input is displayed. However, if a mini-YGDAI

I/O card other than AES/EBU format is installed, Channel Status information will be grayed

out. Channel Status information includes the following items:

C FS

Indicates the sampling rate. If no signal is being input, or if the incoming wordclock is

not synching to the internal clock, “Unlock” appears.

D EMPHASIS

Indicates the Emphasis on/off status.

58 Chapter 5—Analog I/O & Digital I/O

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

E CATEGORY

Indicates the status of “Category Code Bit” included in the IEC958 Part 2 (S/PDIF-Con-

sumer) format. This parameter can display the following values:

F COPY

Indicates the status of copy protection information included in the IEC958 Part2

(S/PDIF-Consumer) format signals. “OK” appears if copying is allowed. “Prohibit”

appears if copy-protected.

3 If you select the SLOT button for a slot that has an

MY16-AE card installed, use the 01–08 and 09–16 but-

tons located in the lower-right corner of the screen

to select a channel group you wish to display.

Parameter values Description

General

Temporarily used.

Laser Optical

Laser optical device

D/D Conv

Digital - Digital converter and signal processing device

Magnetic

Magnetic tape device and magnetic disk device

D.Broadcast

Digital broadcast reception

Instruments

Musical instrument, microphone, and sources that generate string

signals

A/D Conv

A/D converter (without copyright information)

A/D Conv with(C)

A/D converter (with copyright information)

Solid Memory

Solid memory device

Experimental

Experimental device

Unknown

Note: “AES/EBU” appears in the Category row when you are monitoring IEC958 Part 3

(AES/EBU-Professional) format signals (that do not include Category Code Bit).

Dithering Digital Outputs 59

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Analog I/O & Digital I/O

Dithering Digital Outputs

When digital audio is transferred to lower-resolution systems, truncated bits may generate

unpleasant noise. To cancel the audible effect of this noise, a small complement of noise is

intentionally added to the digital outputs. This process is called “dithering.”

On the DM1000, you can dither the 2TR Digital Outputs and Slot Outputs. For example,

you can apply dithering to the DM1000 stereo mix data and record to a 16-bit DAT recorder.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F2] button.

The DIO | Format page appears. The dithering settings are displayed on the bottom of the

page.

2 Move the cursor to the output or channel to which you want to apply dith-

ering, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to

select the value that matches the resolution of the receiving device.

Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates

To operate the DM1000 at higher sampling frequencies (88.2 kHz or 96 kHz) and transfer

digital audio signals to and from connected external devices, you must set the data transfer

format in accordance with the sampling frequencies supported by the external devices.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F1] button.

The DIO | Word Clock page appears.

2 Select INT88.2k, INT96k, or an external device running at the higher sam-

pling rates as the wordclock source.

Note:

•You cannot apply dithering to outputs or channels that are set to “OFF.”

•Dithering is effective only when the resolution of the receiving device is lower than that of

the DM1000.

Tip: To copy the currently-selected setting to all channels, double-click the [ENTER] button.

The copy conﬁrmation window is displayed.

60 Chapter 5—Analog I/O & Digital I/O

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F2] button.

The DIO | Format page appears.

4 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to an IN/OUT parameter ﬁeld

(

1), and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to

set the data transfer format.

The IN/OUT parameters are used to set one of the following data transfer formats for each

slot input and output. However, you cannot select this mode unless the DM1000 is operat-

ing at a higher sampling rate.

• DOUBLE CHANNEL

In Double Channel mode, digital audio data is received and transmitted as mono signals at

a sampling rate that is exactly half (44.1/48 kHz) the current higher sampling rate. Data is

handled by two channels. This is useful when you wish to transfer data between the

DM1000 running at a higher sampling rate and legacy 44.1/48 kHz digital MTRs or HDRs.

• DOUBLE SPEED

In Double Speed mode, digital audio data is received and transmitted at the current higher

sampling rate (i.e., 88.2 kHz or 96 kHz). Select this mode if the devices that support the

higher sampling rates transmit or receive data.

• SINGLE

In Single mode, digital audio data is received and transmitted at a sampling rate that is half

(44.1/48 kHz) the current higher sampling rate of the DM1000. For example, this is useful

when you wish to send 44.1 kHz digital signals from an external HDR to the DM1000 run-

ning at 88.2 kHz.

Note: Double Channel mode reduces the total number of inputs or outputs on the correspond-

ing slot. The even-numbered channels are disabled.

Note: Yo u can select this setting only for slots in which a digital I/O card that inputs/outputs

double-speed digital audio data (e.g., MY8-AE96, MY8-AE96S) is installed.

Note: Yo u cannot select this setting for slots in which a digital I/O card that inputs/outputs

double-speed digital audio data (e.g., MY8-AE96, MY8-AE96S) is installed.

Tip: The parameter ﬁelds display “–” if the corresponding slots contain no I/O cards or if

AD/DA cards or other I/O cards that do not allow you to set the transfer format have been

installed.

Input Channels 61

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Input Channels

6 Input Channels

This chapter describes how to adjust the DM1000’s Input Channel parameters.

About Input Channels

The input Channel section enables you to adjust the level and tone of the signals input to

the DM1000 and route the signals to Bus 1–8, Stereo Bus, and Aux Out 1–8. The following

diagram illustrates the Input Channel signal ﬂow.

• (Phase)

This section switches the phase of input signals.

•GATE

This dynamics processor can be used as a gate or for ducking.

• COMP (Compressor)

This dynamics processor can be used as compressor, expander or limiter. The compressor

can be pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader.

•ATT (Attenuator)

This section enables you to attenuate or amplify the level of signals that will be input to the

EQ. The attenuator enables you to prevent post-EQ signals from clipping and to correct sig-

nal levels that are too low.

•4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer)

This parametric EQ features four bands (high, high-mid, low-mid, and low).

• INPUT DELAY (Input delay)

This section enables you to delay input signals. You can use this delay to ﬁne-tune the timing

between channels, or as a delay effect with feedback.

• ON (On/Off)

This section enables you to turn the channel on or off. The channel is muted with the Off

setting.

• LEVEL

This section enables you to adjust the input level of the Input Channel signal.

INPUT 1(...48)

INPUT PATCH

62 Chapter 6—Input Channels

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

•PAN

This section enables you to adjust the pan setting of the signals routed from the Input Chan-

nels to the Stereo Bus. You can also apply the pan setting to a pair of Bus channels.

If the internal Surround Sound setting is activated, the Surround Pan settings for 3-1, 5.1,

and 6.1 channels are available (see page 125).

• AUX (Aux Send level)

This section enables you to adjust the level of signals routed to Aux Out 1–8. The signals can

be routed to Aux Sends from either the pre-fader or post-fader position.

• INSERT

This section enables you to patch input signals to external devices via the on-board I/O con-

nectors or I/O cards, or insert the internal effect processors.

• METER

This section enables you to switch the metering position of the signal levels that are dis-

played in the Meter page or on the optional MB1000 Meter Bridge. (See page 39 for more

information on selecting the metering position.)

Tip: You can store these channel parameter settings in the Channel library. You can also store

the Gate, Compressor, and EQ parameter settings to the corresponding libraries.

Setting the Input Channels from the Display 63

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Input Channels

Setting the Input Channels from the Display

To set the Input Channel parameters, you can either move the cursor to the desired param-

eter on the display and change the value, or operate the desired button or control on the top

panel to directly change the setting.

This section explains how to set the parameters via the display.

Switching the Signal Phase

To switch the phase of each Input Channel, press the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeat-

edly until the following /INS/DLY | Phase page appears.

Move the cursor to the NOR/REV button of the channel for which you want to change the

phase, then press the [ENTER] or [INC]/[DEC] buttons to change the setting.

A NOR/REV

These buttons switch the corresponding Input Channel phase. NOR buttons indicate

normal phase, and REV buttons indicate reversed phase.

B GLOBAL

The GLOBAL NOR/REV buttons allow you to set the phase for all Input Channels

simultaneously.

Delaying Input Channels

To set the delay for each channel, press the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until

the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears.

-DLY 1-16 page

This page enables you to set the Delay function for Input Channels 1–16.

-DLY 17-32 page

This page enables you to set the Delay function for Input Channels 17–32.

-DLY 33-48 page

This page enables you to set the Delay function for Input Channels 33–48.

Tip:

• The name of the currently-selected channel is indicated in the upper-right corner of the

screen.

•You can set the phase separately for each channel in a channel pair.

64 Chapter 6—Input Channels

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

The parameters on these three pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same.

A DELAY SCALE

The following buttons determine the units of the delay value shown below the msec

value.

• meter ............................. Units are set to meters.

• feet ................................. Units are set to feet.

• sample ...........................Units are set to samples.

• beat ................................Units are set to beats.

• frame .............................Units are set to timecode frames.

B GANG button

When this button is turned on (highlighted), the delay time for each channel in a chan-

nel pair can be set simultaneously. When this option is turned off, the delay time can be

set for each channel in a channel pair individually.

C Channel section

You can set individual delay parameters here. The delay parameters include the follow-

ing items:

• msec...............................This parameter sets the delay time in milliseconds.

•meter/feet/sample/

beat/frame .................... The delay time can be set using units of meters, feet, samples,

beats, or frames, which you select by using the DELAY SCALE

buttons.

• MIX................................ This parameter sets the mix balance of dry (Input Channel)

and wet (delayed) signals.

• FB.GAIN .......................This parameter sets the amount of delay feedback.

Tip:

• The delay time range depends on the sampling rate at which the DM1000 is operating. (For

example, at 44.1 kHz, the range is 0 through 984.1 msec.)

•If you select the DELAY SCALE meter or feet button, the distance value can be converted to

the delay time based on sonic speeds (about 340 m/sec at 15 degrees Celsius). This option is

useful if you wish to correct the timing difference between two sound sources that are far

apart.

•If you select the DELAY SCALE beat button, a parameter box for setting a note that repre-

sents the beat and a parameter box for a tempo (BPM) setting appear below the DELAY

SCALE parameter. Setting the note and BPM settings in these parameter boxes enables you

to set a delay time that synchronizes to the song tempo.

Setting the Input Channels from the Display 65

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Input Channels

Gating Input Channels

To set the Input Channel gates, use the [SEL] buttons to select the desired Input Channel,

then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then the [F1] button. The Dynam-

ics | Gate Edit page appears.

A KEYIN SOURCE

Select one of the following buttons to determine the trigger source for the cur-

rently-selected Input Channel’s gate.

• SELF ...............................The selected channel’s own input signal is the trigger source.

• CHANNEL ....................Another Channel’s input signal is the trigger source. Select the

desired channel in the parameter box below the CHANNEL

button.

• AUX................................An Aux Send signal is the trigger source. Select the desired bus

in the parameter box below the AUX button.

B STEREO LINK

This parameter’s ON/OFF button enables you to pair gates for stereo operation even

when the Input Channels are not paired.

C CURVE

This area displays the current gate curve.

D TYPE

This area displays the current gate type (GATE or DUCKING).

E Meters

These meters indicate the levels of the post-gate signals and the amount of gain reduc-

tion.

F ON/OFF

The ON/OFF button turns the currently-selected Input Channel’s gate on or off.

G PARAMETER

These controls enable you to set the gate parameters. (See page 324 for more informa-

tion on the parameters.)

Note: Yo u cannot change the gate type on this page. To change the gate type, recall a pro-

gram that uses the desired gate type from the Gate library.

Tip: You can store the gate settings in the Gate library, which features preset programs

that can be used for various applications (see page 181).

66 Chapter 6—Input Channels

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Compressing Input Channels

To set the Input Channel compressors, use the [SEL] buttons to select the desired Input

Channel, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then the [F3] button to

display the Dynamics | Comp Edit page.

A POSITION

Use the Parameter wheel, or the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the position of the com-

pressor within the channel from the following options:

• PRE EQ.......................... Immediately before EQ (default)

• PRE FADER..................Immediately before the fader

• POST FADER ............... Immediately after the fader

B STEREO LINK

This ON/OFF button enables you to pair compressors for stereo operation even when

channels are not paired.

C CURVE

This area displays the current compressor curve.

D TYPE

This ﬁeld indicates the compressor type used by the currently-selected channel’s com-

pressor (COMP/EXPAND/COMP (H)/COMP (S)).

E Meters

These meters indicate the levels of the post-compressor signals and the amount of gain

reduction.

F ON/OFF

The ON/OFF button turns the currently-selected Input Channel’s compressor on or off.

G PARAMETER section

These controls enable you to set the compressor parameters. (See page 325 for more

information on the parameters of each compressor type.)

Note: Yo u cannot change the compressor type on this page. To change the compressor type,

recall a program that uses the desired compressor type from the compressor library.

Tip: You can store the compressor settings in the Compressor library, which features preset

programs that can be used for various applications (see page 183).

Setting the Input Channels from the Display 67

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Input Channels

Attenuating Input Channels

To set the attenuator for each channel, press the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER

[DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels

appears.

-ATT 1-16 page

This page enables you to set the attenuators for Input Channels 1–16.

-ATT 17-32 page

This page enables you to set the attenuators for Input Channels 17–32.

-ATT 33-48 page

This page enables you to set the attenuators for Input Channels 33–48.

The parameters on these three pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same.

Move the cursor to the knob for the desired Input Channel, then rotate the Parameter wheel

to set the amount of attenuation in the range of –96 dB to +12 dB. To reset the attenuation

amount to 0 dB, move the cursor to the desired knob, then press the [ENTER] button.

You can also copy the currently-selected Input Channel attenuation setting to all Input

Channels (including those not currently displayed on the screen). To do this, move the cur-

sor to the source knob that you wish to copy, then double-click the [ENTER] button. The

conﬁrmation window appears. Select YES to execute the copy operation.

You can also set the amount of attenuation in bits. To set the amount in bits in the range of

+2 bits to –24 bits, move the cursor to the desired bit shift parameter below the attenuator

knob, then rotate the Parameter wheel. (This function is available only for the Input Chan-

nel attenuators. You cannot use this function for the Output Channel attenuators.) You can

copy the currently-selected attenuation setting in bits to all Input Channels. To do this,

move the cursor to the source bit shift parameter box that you wish to copy, then dou-

ble-click the [ENTER] button. The conﬁrmation window appears.

Select YES to execute the copy operation.

Tip:

•You can also display the desired page by pressing the EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button once,

then press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the corresponding channel.

•You can also set the attenuation amount (in dB) for the currently-selected channel on the

EQ | EQ Edit page.

68 Chapter 6—Input Channels

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

EQ’ing Input Channels

The DM1000’s Input Channels feature 4-band (LOW, LOW-MID, HIGH-MID, HIGH)

parametric EQ. The LOW-MID and HIGH-MID bands are a peaking type of EQ. The LOW

and HIGH bands can be set to shelving, peaking, or HPF and LPF respectively.

1 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the channel for which you wish

to adjust EQ.

2 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to

display the EQ | EQ Edit page.

The parameters on this page are described below:

A EQ ON

The ON/OFF button turns the currently-selected Input Channel’s EQ on or off. You can

press the [ENTER] button to turn the EQ on or off as long as the cursor is located on

any parameter other than TYPE.

B TYPE

Selects the type of EQ. TYPE I is the EQ type used on legacy Yamaha 02R series digital

mixing consoles. TYPE II is a newly developed algorithm.

C ATT

Determines the amount of pre-EQ signal attenuation in dB. It is the same Attenuator

parameter that appears on the EQ | ATT 1-16, ATT 17-32, and ATT 33-48 pages.

D CURVE

This area displays the current EQ curve.

E Meters

These meters indicate the post-EQ signal levels of the currently-selected Input Channel

and its available pair partner.

Setting the Input Channels from the Display 69

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Input Channels

F LOW, L-MID, H-MID, HIGH sections

These sections contain the Q, Frequency (F), and Gain (G) parameters for the four

bands. These parameter values range as follows:

3 Move the cursor to the desired parameter, then rotate the Parameter wheel

to change the value.

Parameter LOW LOW-MID HIGH-MID HIGH

HPF, 10.0 to 0.10

(41 steps), L.SHELF

10.0 to 0.10 (41 steps)

LPF, 10.0 to 0.10

(41 steps), H.SHELF

Frequency

21.2 Hz to 20.0 kHz (120 steps per 1/12 octave)

Gain

–18.0 dB to +18.0 dB (0.1 dB steps)

1. The LOW and HIGH GAIN controls function as filter on/off controls when Q is set to HPF or LPF

respectively.

Tip:

• The LOW-band EQ functions as a high-pass ﬁlter when the Q parameter in the LOW section

is set to HPF. It functions as a shelving-type EQ when the Q parameter is set to L.SHELF.

• The HIGH-band EQ functions as a low-pass ﬁlter when the Q parameter in the HIGH sec-

tion is set to LPF. It functions as a shelving-type EQ when the Q parameter is set to H.SHELF.

Tip:

•You can also press the buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to select the desired

band and use the rotary controls to directly edit the Q, F, and G parameters (see page 75).

•You can store the EQ settings in the EQ library, which features preset programs that can be

used for various applications (see page 184).

70 Chapter 6—Input Channels

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Panning Input Channels

Input Channels can be panned in the range of L63 through CENTER to R63. To pan each

channel, press the [PAN/SURROUND] button repeatedly until one of the following pages

that contains the desired channels appears.

-Pan1-32 page

This page enables you to set the pan for Input Channels 1–32.

-Pan33-48 page

This page enables you to set the pan for Input Channels 33–48.

The parameters on these two pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same. Move

the cursor to the desired Pan control, then rotate the Parameter wheel to set the value.

A Pan controls

These knobs adjust the channel pan settings.

Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected Pan control to center.

B MODE

The MODE parameter determines how paired Input Channels are panned. There are

three Pan modes as follows:

• INDIVIDUAL............... In Individual mode, paired Input Channel

pan controls operate independently.

• GANG............................ In Gang mode, paired Input Channel pan

controls operate in unison, maintaining the

current pan range.

• INV GANG ................... In Inverse Gang mode, paired Input Channel

pan controls operate in unison but move in

opposite directions.

Tip:

•You can use the Encoders to change the Input Channel pan settings (see page 75). This is

useful if you wish to change the pan settings quickly. You can also use the Joystick in the

SELECTED CHANNEL section to change the pan settings, unless the DM1000 is in Sur-

round mode.

•Surround Pan is available when the DM1000 is in Surround mode. Refer to Chapter 11

“Surround Functions” on page 125 for more information on Surround Pan.

Setting the Input Channels from the Display 71

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Input Channels

Routing Input Channels

You can route each Input Channel to the Stereo Bus, Bus 1–8, or its own Direct Out. With

the default setting, signals are routed only to the Stereo Bus. However, you can patch signals

to a single or multiple destinations, if necessary.

1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until

the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears.

- CH1-16 page

This page enables you to change the routing for Input Channels 1–16.

- CH17-32 page

This page enables you to change the routing for Input Channels 17–32.

- CH33-48 page

This page enables you to change the routing for Input Channels 33–48.

The parameters on these three pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same.

A PAN buttons

These buttons determine whether the Input Channel’s Pan setting is applied to the Bus

Outs. In surround mode, they also determine whether the Surround Pan setting is

applied to the Bus Outs.

B Bus buttons 1–8

These buttons route the currently-selected Input Channel to the Bus Outs. If the

DM1000 is in Surround mode, the button indicators change as follows, depending on

the selected Surround mode:

L=Left, R=Right, C=Center, S=Surround, Ls=Left Surround

Rs=Right Surround, E=Low Frequency Effect, Bs=Back Surround

The above table shows the default assignment. The actual assignment may vary, depend-

ing on the settings on the Setup | Surround Bus Setup page.

C S button

When this button is turned on, the currently-selected Input Channel is routed to the

Stereo Bus.

Tip: You can also display the desired page by pressing the ROUTING [DISPLAY] button once,

then press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the corresponding channel.

Bus buttons 12345678

Surround mode: 3-1

LRCS 5678

Surround mode: 5.1

LRLsRs C E 7 8

Surround mode: 6.1

LRLsRs C Bs E 8

72 Chapter 6—Input Channels

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

D D button

When this button is turned on, the currently-selected Input Channel is routed to its

Direct Out. See page 115 for more information on the Direct Out.

E ALL STEREO button

This button turns on the S button for all channels on the page.

F ALL BUS button

This button turns on the Bus buttons 1–8 for all channels on the page.

G ALL CLEAR button

This button clears all routing assignments on the page.

H SURROUND MODE

This ﬁeld displays the current Surround mode.

Viewing Input Channel Settings

You can view and adjust parameter settings for the currently-selected Input Channel on the

View | Parameter or Fader pages.

■ Viewing the Gate, Compressor, and EQ Settings

To display the View | Parameter page for a speciﬁc Input Channel, use the corresponding

[SEL] button or fader to select the desired channel, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS

[VIEW] button, then the [F1] button.

Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press

the [INC]/[DEC] buttons or [ENTER] button to modify the setting.

A GATE section

This section enables you to turn the gate-type dynamics processor on or off and set the

parameters. (See page 65 for more information.)

B COMP section

This section enables you to turn the compressor-type dynamics processor on or off and

set the parameters. (See page 66 for more information.)

C INSERT section

This section enables you to turn the Insert on or off and patch the Insert In and Out.

(See page 116 for more information.)

D EQ section

This section enables you to set various EQ parameters. (See page 68 for more informa-

tion.)

Setting the Input Channels from the Display 73

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Input Channels

E Meters

These meters indicate the signal levels of the currently-selected Input Channel and its

available pair partner.

F (Phase) section

You can reverse the signal phase of the currently-selected Input Channel. (See page 63

for more information.)

G DELAY section

This section enables you to set the currently-selected channel’s Delay function. (See

page 63 for more information.)

H PAIR section

This section indicates whether or not channels are paired. The heart icon ( ) is in one

piece when channels are paired. The heart icon is broken ( ) when channels are not

paired. (See page 76 for more information.)

■ Viewing the Pan, Fader, and Aux Send Level Settings

To display the View | Fader page of a certain Input Channel, use the corresponding [SEL]

button or fader to select the desired channel, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] but-

ton, then the [F2] button.

Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel or

press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the setting.

A PAN/ON/Fader section

• PAN control..................This control adjusts the currently-selected Input Channel’s Pan

parameter.

Press the [ENTER] button to reset the Pan control to Center.

• ON/OFF button ...........This button turns on or off the currently-selected Input Chan-

nel.

• Fader ..............................This parameter sets the fader position of the currently-selected

Input Channel. The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is

set to 0.0 dB.

Press the [ENTER] button to reset the Fader to 0.0 dB.

B SURROUND PAN section

• SURROUND PAN........The Surround pan parameters for the currently-selected Input

Channel are displayed only when a Surround mode is selected.

See page 125 for more information on Surround pan.

321 4

74 Chapter 6—Input Channels

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

C BUS ROUTING/FOLLOW PAN section

• BUS ROUTING............ This section enables you to select a destination Bus for the

selected channel. When the D button is turned on, the channel

signal is patched to the Direct Out selected in the parameter

box below the button.

• FOLLOW PAN .............This button determines whether the Input Channel’s Pan set-

ting is applied to the paired Bus Outs (Follow Pan function).

When the button is turned off, the Follow Pan function is dis-

abled and an identical signal is sent to the paired Bus Outs. In

surround mode, it also determines whether the Surround Pan

setting is applied to the Bus Outs.

D AUX section

• AUX ............................... These controls set the currently-selected Input Channel’s Aux

Send 1–8 levels and positions. (See page 93 for more informa-

tion on Aux Sends.)

E Meter section

• Meters............................ These meters indicate the levels of the currently-selected Input

Channel.

• PRE EQ/PRE FADER/POST FADER ........... The metering position is displayed below

the meters.

F GROUP section

• FADER/MUTE/EQ/COMP ................These buttons indicate which Fader, Mute, EQ,

or Comp group, if any, the currently-selected

Input Channel is in. If the channel is in a group,

the group number appears. If the channel is not

in a group, “—” appears.

Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface 75

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Input Channels

Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface

You can use the faders, Encoders, [SEL] buttons, and various buttons and controls in the

SELECTED CHANNEL section on the top panel to directly control most parameters for

Input Channels.

Setting Input Channel Levels and Panning the Channels

1 Press the LAYER [1-16], [17-32], or [33-48] button to select a Layer.

2 Use the faders to set the Input Channel levels.

3 Press the ENCODER MODE [PAN] button, then rotate the corresponding

Encoder to pan the desired Input Channel.

When you rotate the Encoder, the current pan setting display pops up.

Routing and EQ’ing Input Channels

1 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader for the channel you wish to control.

2To route each Input Channel, use the following buttons in the SELECTED

CHANNEL section:

• ROUTING [1]–[8] buttons ............... These buttons route the currently-selected Input

Channel to a Bus.

• ROUTING [STEREO] button........... When this button is turned on, Input Channel

signals are routed to the Stereo Bus.

• ROUTING [DIRECT] button ........... When this button is turned on, the cur-

rently-selected Input Channel is routed to its

Direct Out. (See page 115 for more information

on Direct Out.)

The corresponding button indicator lights up.

3To control EQ for the currently-selected channel, press one of the following

buttons to select the band you wish to adjust:

• EQUALIZER [HIGH] button............ HIGH band

• EQUALIZER [H-MID] button.......... HIGH-MID band

• EQUALIZER [L-MID] button........... LOW-MID band

• EQUALIZER [LOW] button.............. LOW band

76 Chapter 6—Input Channels

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

4 Use the EQUALIZER [Q], [FREQUENCY], and [GAIN] controls to adjust the Q,

frequency, and gain of the band selected in Step 3.

See page 68 for more information on EQ.

Pairing Input Channels

On the DM1000, you can pair adjacent odd-even Input Channels or counterpart channels

on Layer 1 and Layer 2 that share the same physical fader. Faders and most parameters of

paired channels are linked for stereo operation. Paired channels’ linked parameters and

non-linked parameters (that are available for independent control) are listed below:

* You can set this parameter for each channel independent-

ly if the GANG button is turned off on the /INS/DLY |

DLY page.

** You can set this parameter for each channel independent-

ly on the EQ | ATT page, but the paired channel settings

are linked on the EQ | Edit and View pages.

To pair channels, or to cancel channel pairs, you can use the [SEL] buttons on the top panel

or access the Pair/Group pages.

Tip:

•Pressing and holding down the button selected in Step 3 resets the corresponding band gain.

•Pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL [HIGH] and [LOW] buttons simultaneously resets the

Q, frequency and gain for each band.

Linked parameters

[SEL] buttons

Faders

Channel on/off

Insert on/off

Solo on/off

Solo Safe

Aux on/off

Aux Send level

Aux Sends as Pre or Post

Gate

Comp settings

EQ settings

Fader group

Mute group

Fade time

Recall Safe

Non-linked parameters

Input patches

Insert patches

Output patches

Comp insert position

Phase

Delay on/off

Delay time*

Delay feedback

Delay mix

Routing

Pan, Follow Pan

Surround pan

Aux Send pan

Balance

Attenuators**

Pairing Input Channels 77

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Input Channels

■ Pairing Channels by Using the [SEL] Buttons

1 While pressing and holding down the [SEL] button for one of the channels

you wish to pair, press the [SEL] button for the adjacent channel. (The paired

channel numbers should be odd and even in this order).

The Channel Pairing window appears.

2 Move the cursor to the desired button in the Channel Pairing window, then

press [ENTER].

The following buttons are available in this window:

• CANCEL

Cancels the operation.

• CH x ➔ y

Copies the odd channel parameter values to the even channel.

• CH y ➔ x

Copies the even channel parameter values to the odd channel.

• RESET BOTH

Resets both channel parameters to the default settings (same as when Channel memory #01

is recalled).

Move the cursor to the desired button, then press [ENTER] to conﬁrm the pair.

Note: The settings of the ﬁrst channel are copied to the second channel and the channels are

paired if the Pair Conﬁrmation check box on the Preference1 page is not checked (default).

(If the selected channels have already been paired, this procedure will cancel the pair setting.)

Note: Yo u can pair only channels that are adjacent, odd-even (in this order) channels. Pressing

the [SEL] button for a non-adjacent channel will be ignored. You cannot pair or cancel a pair

of vertical partners.

Tip: Pressing and holding down the ﬁrst [SEL] button of the paired channels and pressing

the second [SEL] button cancels the pair.

78 Chapter 6—Input Channels

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

■ Pairing Input Channels Using the Display

1 Press the [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until the Pair/Grup | Input page

appears.

The parameters on this page are described below:

A PAIR MODE

Determines how channels are paired.

B STEREO/MONO x2 buttons

These buttons turn pairs on or off.

C MS buttons

These buttons are available when an MS microphone is connected. MS Decoding can be

used to decode signals from MS microphones arranged as MS pairs. (See page 80 for

more information on MS Decoding.)

2 Move the cursor to the PAIR MODE parameter ﬁeld (

1), then select the

HORIZONTAL or VERTICAL button.

The function of each mode is described below:

• HORIZONTAL............. This button pairs adjacent odd-even channels (default).

• VERTICAL.................... This button pairs counterpart channels on Layer 1 and Layer 2

that share the same physical fader (e.g., CH1 & CH17, CH16 &

CH32, etc.). This mode is useful when you wish to use one

fader to control both stereo channels.

When you switch the Pair Mode, the combinations of channel numbers displayed on the

page also change.

3 Move the cursor to the desired channel’s MONOx2 button, then press

[ENTER].

The channels are paired.

4To cancel a pair, move the cursor to the desired channel’s STEREO button,

then press [ENTER].

Note:

• When Pair mode is switched, only the channel numbers change. The mix parameters of the

paired partners do not change.

•For example, if you change Pair mode from Horizontal to Vertical, the Input Channel “2”

indication changes to Input Channel “17.” However, its parameters do not change. (If Chan-

nels 1 and 2 have been paired, switching the mode will pair Channels 1 and 17.)

Tip: You can also pair or cancel a pair of Output Channels in the same way on the Pair/Group

| Output page (see page 89).

Naming Input Channels 79

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Input Channels

Naming Input Channels

By default, Input Channels are named CH1, CH2, etc. You can change these names if nec-

essary. For example, it may be helpful for mixdown if you name a particular Input Channel

with the type of musical instrument connected to the corresponding input jack.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the In

Patch | CH Name page appears.

You can specify Short names in the center column (1) and Long (full) names in the right

column (

2).

When the Name Input Auto Copy check box (

3) is on, the ﬁrst four characters of a

newly-entered Long name are automatically copied to the Short name. On the other hand,

a newly-entered Short name is automatically added to the beginning of the Long name.

You can reset all channel names to their default names by moving the cursor to the INI-

TIALIZE button, then pressing [ENTER].

2 Move the cursor to a name you wish to change, then press [ENTER].

The Title Edit window appears, enabling you to enter a name.

3 Edit the name, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER].

The new name is now effective.

Tip: The edited name is stored in the Input Patch library.

1 2

80 Chapter 6—Input Channels

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Using MS Stereo Microphone

The MS system is a type of stereo recording that uses two microphones; mono-directional

M (Middle) and bi-directional S (Side) microphones. An M microphone picks up main sig-

nals, and an S microphone picks up directional signals. These two signals are decoded by

calculating a sum (M plus S) and a difference (M minus S), and are recorded to L and R

channels.

An MS microphone is usually a stereo microphone that has both M and S functions. Use an

MS microphone in the following way:

1 Connect the L connector of an MS microphone to an odd channel input jack,

and the R connector to an even channel input jack.

Signals from the MS microphone are

input from the L and R connectors. To

use an MS microphone with the

DM1000, connect the L connector to

the input jack of an odd Input Chan-

nel, and connect the R connector to

the input jack of the partner channel.

2 Press the [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until the Pair/Group | Input page

appears.

3Turn on the MS button for the channels to which the MS microphone is con-

nected.

The two channels are automatically paired and MS Decoding is turned on. With MS Decod-

ing turned on, the faders and Encoders (Pan parameters) function as follows:

• Odd-channel faders ................M level (Controls the volume level.)

• Odd-channel Encoders...........ML/MR balance

• Even-channel faders................S level (Controls the left and right directional spread.)

• Even-channel Encoders..........SL/SR balance

4 Use the faders and Encoders to adjust the MS microphone level and balance.

When the signals are routed to paired Buses or the Stereo Bus, a sum of signals (ML plus

SL) is sent to the odd-numbered Bus, and a difference of signals (ML minus SL) is sent to

the even-numbered Bus.

INPUT

234567819

MS microphone

R connector L connector

Bus Outs 81

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Bus Outs

7 Bus Outs

This chapter describes how to adjust the DM1000’s Stereo Out and Bus Out parameters.

About Stereo Out

The Stereo Out section receives Input Channel and Bus Out 1–8 signals, mixes them into

two channels, processes them using on-board EQ, compressor, etc., then routes them to two

channel output connectors. The following diagram illustrates the Stereo Out signal ﬂow.

• INSERT

This section enables you to route the Stereo Out signals to external devices via the on-board

connectors or I/O cards, or insert internal effects processors.

•ATT (Attenuator)

This section enables you to attenuate or amplify the level of signals to be input to the EQ.

The attenuator prevents post-EQ signals from clipping or corrects signal levels that are too

low.

•4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer)

This parametric EQ features four bands (HIGH, HIGH-MID, LOW-MID, and LOW).

• COMP (Compressor)

This dynamics processor can be used as compressor, expander, or limiter. The processor can

be located pre-EQ, pre-[STEREO] fader, or post-[STEREO] fader.

• ON (On/Off)

This button turns the Stereo Out on or off.

• LEVEL

The [STEREO] fader adjusts the Stereo Out output levels.

• Balance

This section enables you to adjust the level balance between the L and R channels of the Ste-

reo Out.

• OUTPUT DELAY (Output delay)

This section delays the output signals. It is mainly used to ﬁne-tune the signal timing.

• METER

This section enables you to switch the metering position of signal levels that are displayed

on the Meter page or by the stereo meter to the right of the screen. (See page 39 for more

information on selecting the metering position.)

Note: By default, the Stereo Out signals are output to OMNI OUT 9–10. However, you can

patch these signals to other output connectors or I/O cards using the Output Patch pages.

OUTPUT PATCH

OUTPUT

DELAY

METER

ATT

4BAND

INSERT

LEVEL

STEREO L

COMP

METER

(Gain Reduction)

BAL

INSERT

Same as stereo master L

STEREO R

METER

(Out Meter)

STEREO L

STEREO R

BUS1

BUS2

BUS3

BUS4

BUS5

BUS6

BUS7

BUS8

82 Chapter 7—Bus Outs

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Bus Out 1–8

The Bus Out 1–8 section mixes signals routed from Input Channels to the speciﬁed buses,

processes them using on-board EQ, compressor, etc., then routes them to the speciﬁed out-

put connectors or I/O cards.

The following diagram illustrates the Bus Out signal ﬂow.

• INSERT

•ATT (Attenuator)

•4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer)

• COMP (Compressor)

• ON (On/Off)

• LEVEL

• OUTPUT DELAY (Output delay)

• METER

The parameters and sections listed above are identical to those for the Stereo Out. For more

information, refer to the explanation the Stereo Out (see page 81).

• Bus to Stereo

Bus Out 1–8 signals are also routed to the Stereo Bus. In addition to the ON, LEVEL, and

other parameters, you can also set the Send Level, On/Off, Pan, and other parameters.

Tip: You can also pair adjacent odd-even buses (in this order) for stereo operation (see

page 89).

Note: By default, channels 1–8 and 9–16 of Slots 1 and 2 are patched to the Bus Out 1–8

outputs. However, you can change this patching on the Output Patch page.

OUTPUT PATCH

OUTPUT

DELAY

METER

ATT

4BAND

INSERT

LEVEL

COMP

METER

(Gain Reduction)

INSERT

METER

(Out Meter)

STEREO L

STEREO R

BUS1

BUS2

BUS3

BUS4

BUS5

BUS6

BUS7

BUS8

TO INPUT PATCH

PA N

BUS to STEREO

LEVEL

BUS 1(...8)

Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display 83

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Bus Outs

Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display

To set the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 parameters, you can either move the cursor to the

desired parameter on the display and change the value, or operate the desired button or

control on the top panel.

This section explains how to set the parameters on the display.

Attenuating the Stereo Out and Bus Out

To attenuate the Stereo Out and Bus Out signals, press the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUAL-

IZER [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to display the EQ | Out Att page. On this page, you can

attenuate the Bus Out 1–8, Aux Out 1–8, and Stereo Out signals.

The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input

Channels, except that this page does not include the bit shift parameters (see page 67).

Delaying the Stereo Out and Bus Outs

To delay the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 signals, press the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button

repeatedly until the /INS/DLY | Out Dly page appears.

The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input

Channels, except that this page does not include the MIX/FB.GAIN parameters (see

page 63).

Tip: Refer to Chapter 9 “Input & Output Patching” on page 109 for more information on

how to set inserts.

Tip: You can also display the Out Dly page by pressing the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button once,

then press the [SEL] button or move the fader to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1–8.

84 Chapter 7—Bus Outs

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Compressing the Stereo Out and Bus Outs

To set the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 compressors, press the [DYNAMICS] button, then

the [F3] button to display the Dynamics | Comp Edit page, and use the [SEL] buttons or

faders to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1–8.

The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input

Channels (see page 66).

EQ’ing the Stereo Out and Bus Outs

To set the EQ for the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 EQ, press the EQUALIZER [DISPLAY]

button repeatedly to display the EQ | EQ Edit page, and use the [SEL] buttons or faders to

select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1–8.

The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input

Channels (see page 68).

Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display 85

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Bus Outs

Routing Bus Out 1–8 Signals to the Stereo Bus

You can patch Bus Out 1–8 signals to Outputs and Slots 1/2, as well as to the Stereo Bus. You

can adjust the level and pan settings of the signals routed to the Stereo Bus for each bus. This

is convenient when you wish to use Bus Outs (1–8) as a Group Bus.

To patch the Bus Out 1–8 signals to the Stereo Bus, press the SELECTED CHANNEL

ROUTING [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to display the Routing | Bus To St page.

Move the cursor to the desired parameter you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter

wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the setting.

A TO ST PAN

These controls pan the Bus Out 1–8 signals between the left and right Stereo Out buses.

B TO ST ON/OFF

These buttons turn on and off the Bus Out 1–8 to the Stereo Bus routing.

C TO ST Faders

These faders set the Bus Out 1–8 to Stereo Bus levels.

86 Chapter 7—Bus Outs

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Viewing the Stereo Out and Bus Out Settings

You can view and adjust parameter settings for the currently-selected Stereo Out or Bus Out

on the View | Parameter and Fader pages.

■ Viewing the Compressor and EQ Settings

To display the View | Parameter page, use the corresponding [SEL] button or fader to select

the desired bus, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then the [F1] button.

The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input

Channels, except for the following items:

•The Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 Parameter pages do not contain the Gate and Phase

parameters.

•The Stereo Out Parameter page does not contain the Pair parameter.

■ Viewing Faders and Other Parameters

To display the View | Fader page, use the corresponding [SEL] button or fader to select the

desired bus, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then the [F2] button.

The Fader page layouts for Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 are slightly different.

• Stereo Out Fader page

A BAL

This control adjusts the level balance between the L and R channels of the Stereo Out.

B ON/OFF

This button turns the Stereo Out on or off, and links with the [ON] button in the STE-

REO section.

Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display 87

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Bus Outs

C Fader

This fader adjusts the Stereo Out output levels, and links with the [STEREO] fader. The

fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB.

• Bus Out (1–8) Fader page

A ON/OFF

This button turns the currently-selected Bus Out (1–8) on or off, and links with the

[ON] (9–16) button in the Master layer.

B Fader

This fader sets the currently-selected Bus Out (1–8) level, and links with the fader (9–16)

in the Master layer. The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB.

C TO ST PAN

This control sets the Bus Out to Stereo Out Pan position for the currently-selected Bus

Out (1–8).

D TO ST ON/OFF

This button turns on or off the Bus Out to Stereo Out signal for the currently-selected

Bus Out (1–8).

E TO ST Fader

This fader sets the Bus Out to Stereo Out signal level for the currently-selected Bus Out

(1–8).

Tip: The TO ST PAN, ON/OFF, and TO ST Fader parameters also appear on the Routing

| Bus to St page.

345

88 Chapter 7—Bus Outs

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the

Control Surface

You can use the faders, Encoders, [SEL] buttons, and various buttons and controls in the

SELECTED CHANNEL section on the top panel to directly control certain parameters for

the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8.

Setting the Levels

Move the [STEREO] fader to adjust the Stereo Out levels. Press the [ON] button in the STE-

REO section to turn the Stereo Out on or off.

To set Bus Out 1–8 levels, press the [MASTER] button in the LAYER section to select the

Master layer, then move faders 9–16. At this time, you can turn Bus Out 1–8 on or off using

the [ON] 9–16 buttons.

EQ’ing the Stereo Out and Bus Outs

1 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the bus to which you want to

apply EQ.

2To control the EQ of the currently-selected bus, select the desired band to

adjust by pressing one of the following buttons:

• EQUALIZER [HIGH] button ............HIGH band

• EQUALIZER [H-MID] button ..........HIGH-MID band

• EQUALIZER [L-MID] button ...........LOW-MID band

• EQUALIZER [LOW] button ..............LOW band

3 Use the EQUALIZER [Q], [FREQUENCY], and [GAIN] controls to adjust the Q,

frequency, and gain of the band selected in Step 2.

See page 68 for more information on EQ.

Pairing Buses or Aux Sends 89

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Bus Outs

Pairing Buses or Aux Sends

You can pair adjacent odd-even (in this order) buses or Aux Sends for stereo operation.

Paired bus and Aux Send linked parameters and non-linked parameters (that are available

for independent controls) are listed below:

** You can set this parameter for each channel independent-

ly if the GANG button is turned off on the /INS/DLY |

DLY page.

*** You can set this parameter for each channel independent-

ly on the EQ | ATT page, but the paired channel settings

are linked on the EQ | Edit and View pages.

Parameters marked with an asterisk * are available only for Bus Outs.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until the

Pair/Grup | Output page appears.

The parameters on this page are described below.

A STEREO/MONOx2

These buttons turn Bus or Aux Send pairs on or off.

B F.S

This button determines whether Aux Sends follow the Input Channel Surround Pan

when the DM1000 is in a Surround mode. When this button is turned on, Aux Sends

follow the Input Channel Surround Pan. This is useful for feeding Surround signals to

external Surround effects processors.

2 Move the cursor to the MONOx2 button for the desired Bus or Aux Send,

then press [ENTER].

The buses or Aux Sends are paired.

3To cancel a pair, move the cursor to the STEREO button for the desired Bus

or Aux Send, then press [ENTER].

Linked parameters

[SEL] buttons

Fader

Channel on/off

Insert on/off

Solo on/off

Comp settings

Comp insert position

EQ settings

Fader group

Mute group

Fade time

Recall safe

Bus to Stereo on/off*

Bus to Stereo fader*

Non-linked parameters

Output Patching

Insert Patching

Delay on/off**

Delay time

Bus to Stereo Pan*

Attenuators

***

90 Chapter 7—Bus Outs

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Attenuating Output Signals

To attenuate the DM1000’s output signals, display the EQ | Out Att page and adjust the Ste-

reo Out and Bus Out 1–8 attenuators individually.

If necessary, you can also select Output and I/O card channels and specify the amount of

attenuation. This technique is convenient when you want to attenuate output signals

quickly, regardless of the source signal patching.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | Out-

put Att page appears.

2 Move the cursor in the left column (

1), then scroll the list up or down using

the Parameter wheel to select the desired output or slot channel for which

you want to adjust attenuation.

The following outputs and slot channels can be selected:

• OMNI OUT 1–12.....................OMNI OUT connectors 1–12

• SLOT 1-1 through 1-16...........Channels 1–16 of Slot 1

• SLOT 2-1 through 2-16...........Channels 1–16 of Slot 2

3 Move the cursor to the parameter value in the right column (

2), then rotate

the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to set the amount of

attenuation.

The amount of attenuation can be set from 0 dB to –9 dB.

Tip: To reset the attenuation amount of all Output Channels to 0 dB, move the cursor to the

INITIALIZE button, then press [ENTER].

Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs 91

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Bus Outs

Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs

You can change the default Bus names (BUS1, AUX4, STEREO, etc.). It may be convenient

to name the buses “Monitor Out” or “Effect Send,” for example, so that you can easily iden-

tify the signal type.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out

Patch | CH Name page appears.

You can specify Short names in the center column (1) and Long (full) names in the right

column (

2).

When the Name Input Auto Copy check box (

3) is on, the ﬁrst four characters of a

newly-entered Long name are automatically copied to the Short name.

You can reset all bus names to their default names by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE

button, then pressing [ENTER].

2 Move the cursor to a name you wish to change, then press [ENTER].

The Title Edit window appears, which enables you to edit the name.

3 Edit the name, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER].

The new name is now effective.

Tip: The edited name is stored in the Output Patch library.

1 2

92 Chapter 7—Bus Outs

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Aux Sends 93

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Aux Sends

8 Aux Sends

This chapter describes how to control Aux Out 1–8.

Aux Out 1–8

The Aux Out 1–8 section mixes signals routed from the Input Channels to the correspond-

ing Aux Sends, processes them using on-board EQ, compressor, etc., then routes them to

the speciﬁed internal effects processors, output connectors or I/O card connectors.

The DM1000 features eight Aux Sends, which can be used to send signals to the internal and

external effects processors and monitors.

The following diagram illustrates the Aux Out 1–8 signal ﬂow.

• INSERT

•ATT (Attenuator)

•4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer)

• COMP (Compressor)

• ON (On/Off)

• LEVEL

• OUTPUT DELAY (Output delay)

• METER

These parameters are the same as the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 (see page 81).

Tip: You can also pair adjacent odd-even Aux Sends (in this order) for stereo Aux operation.

Note: With the default setting, Aux Out 1–8 are patched to OMNI OUT connectors 1–8 and

Aux Out 1–4 are patched to internal effects processors 1–4. However, you can change this

patching on the Out Patch page.

OUTPUT PATCH

OUTPUT

DELAY

METER

ATT

4BAND

INSERT

LEVEL

COMP

METER

(Gain Reduction)

INSERT

METER

(Out Meter)

TO INPUT PATCH

AUX 1(...8)

AUX 1

AUX 8

94 Chapter 8—Aux Sends

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Control Surface

You can use the faders, Encoders, [SEL] buttons, and various buttons and controls in the

SELECTED CHANNEL section on the top panel to directly control certain parameters for

Aux Out 1–8.

Setting Levels

To set Aux Out 1–8 levels, press the [MASTER] button in the LAYER section to select the

Master layer, then move faders 1–8. At this time, you can turn Aux Out 1–8 on or off using

the corresponding [ON] 1–8 buttons.

EQ settings

To control Aux Out 1–8 EQ parameters, select the desired Aux Out (1–8) using the corre-

sponding [SEL] button or fader, then use the buttons and controls in the SELECTED

CHANNEL section. The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are

the same as for Input Channels (see page 75).

Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display

To set Aux Out 1–8 parameters, you can either move the cursor to the desired parameter on

the screen and change the value, or operate the desired button or control on the top panel.

This section explains how to set the parameters on the screen.

Attenuating Aux Outs

To attenuate Aux Out 1–8 signals, press the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER [DIS-

PLAY] button repeatedly to display the EQ | Out Att page.

The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input

Channels, except that this page does not include the bit shift parameters (see page 67).

Tip: Refer to Chapter 9 “Input & Output Patching” on page 109 for more information on

how to set inserts.

Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display 95

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Aux Sends

Delaying Aux Outs

To delay Aux Out 1–8 signals, press the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the

/INS/DLY | Out Dly page appears.

The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input

Channels, except that this page does not have the MIX/FB.GAIN parameters (see page 63).

Comp settings

To set the Aux Out 1–8 compressors, press the [DYNAMICS] button, then the [F3] button

to display the Dynamics | Comp Edit page, and select the desired Aux Out 1–8 by using the

corresponding [SEL] buttons or faders.

The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input

Channels (see page 66).

Tip: You can also display the Out Dly page by pressing the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button once,

then selecting the desired Aux Out (1–8) by pressing the corresponding [SEL] button or moving

the fader.

96 Chapter 8—Aux Sends

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

EQ settings

To set the EQ for Aux Out 1–8, press the EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to dis-

play the EQ | EQ Edit page, and use the [SEL] buttons or faders to select Aux Out 1–8.

The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input

Channels (see page 68).

Viewing Aux Out settings

You can view and adjust the parameter settings for the currently-selected Aux Out on the

View | Parameter and Fader pages.

■ Viewing the Compressor and EQ Settings

To display the View | Parameter page, use the corresponding [SEL] button or fader to select

the desired Aux Out (1–8), then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then the [F1]

button.

The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input

Channels, except that this page does not include the Gate and Phase parameters (see

page 72).

Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display 97

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Aux Sends

■ Viewing Faders and On/Off Parameters

To display the View | Fader page, use the corresponding [SEL] button or fader to select the

desired Aux Out (1–8), then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then the [F2] but-

ton.

• ON/OFF.........................This button turns the currently-selected Aux Out (1–8) on or

off. It links with the corresponding [ON] (1–8) button in the

Master layer.

• Fader ..............................This fader sets the currently-selected Aux Out (1–8) level. It

links with the corresponding fader (1–8) in the Master layer.

The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0dB.

98 Chapter 8—Aux Sends

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Setting Aux Send Levels

You can adjust the level of signals routed from Input Channels to the corresponding Aux

Out (1–8). To do this, you can either use the Encoders on the top panel or set the parameters

on the screen.

Using the Encoders

1 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select the sends.

2 Press the ENCODER MODE [AUX] button.

When the ENCODER MODE [AUX] button is turned on, you can rotate the Encoders to

set Aux Send levels.

3 Select a layer that contains the source Input Channels, then rotate the cor-

responding Encoders.

The DM1000 displays the Send level of the currently-selected channel.

Note: If rotating the Encoders seems ineffective, check the Mode and Pre/Post parameters on

the Aux | Send page (see page 99).

Setting Aux Send Levels 99

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Aux Sends

Setting Send Levels from the Display

You can view multiple channels’ Aux Send levels on the screen and adjust them individually.

1 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select the Aux Sends.

2 Press the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the page listed

below that contains the desired channels appears.

-Send1-32 page

This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 1–32.

-Send33-48 page

This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 33–48.

The parameters on these two pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same.

• Aux Send rotary controls

These controls adjust the Aux Send level of the Input Channels. The current numeric levels

appear below the rotary controls.

• PRE/POST

These buttons enable you to specify the Aux Sends signal source points. The PRE buttons

send pre-fader signals, and the POST buttons send post-fader signals.

• MODE

Aux Sends have two operating modes that determine how signals are sent: Fixed (Aux Send

levels are ﬁxed); and Variable (Aux Send levels are variable).

• GLOBAL

The GLOBAL PRE and POST buttons enable you to set all Input Channels for the selected

Aux Send to pre-fader or post-fader simultaneously.

• PRE POINT

The PRE POINT PRE ON and POST ON buttons enable you to set the pre-fader channels

to pre-on (before the [ON] button) or post-on (after the [ON] button).

Note: In Fixed mode, Aux Send ON/OFF buttons appear instead of the Aux Send rotary con-

trols, PRE/POST buttons, GLOBAL PRE/POST buttons, and PRE POINT PRE ON/POST

ON. These ON/OFF buttons turn on or off each Input Channel for the currently-selected Aux

Send.

100 Chapter 8—Aux Sends

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

3 Move the cursor to the FIXED or VARIABLE button in the MODE section for

the currently-selected Aux Send to select a mode.

• Fixed Mode

In this mode, Aux Send levels are ﬁxed at nominal (0.0dB). Also, channel ON/OFF buttons

appear instead of the Send level rotary controls and PRE/POST buttons.

•Variable Mode

In this mode, Aux Send levels are variable and the signal source point can be either pre-fader

or post-fader. Channel Send level rotary controls and PRE/POST buttons appear on the

screen.

Tip: You can select Variable or Fixed mode individually for each of the eight Aux Sends.

Note:

•In Fixed mode, all ON/OFF buttons are turned OFF.

• When you switch to Variable mode, the signal source points are set to post-fader (PRE/POST

buttons are set to POST), and Send level rotary controls are reset to –∞.

Setting Aux Send Levels 101

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Aux Sends

4 If you switched to Fixed mode in Step 3, the ON/OFF buttons turn on or off

each Input Channel on or off for the currently-selected Aux Send.

5 If you switched to Variable mode in Step 3, the PRE/POST buttons and Send

level rotary controls enable you to adjust the signal source points and Send

levels.

You can turn each Input Channel on or off for the currently-selected Aux Send even in Vari-

able mode. To do this, move the cursor to the desired Send level control, then press

[ENTER]. (The rotary controls for Off channels are grayed out.)

Note: In Fixed mode, the Aux On/Off parameters for paired Input Channels are not linked

to each other.

Tip:

•In Variable mode, Aux Send levels, Aux On/Off, and Pre/Post parameters for paired Input

Channels are linked to each other.

•GLOBAL PRE/POST buttons enable you to set all Input Channels simultaneously (includ-

ing those not displayed on the current page) to pre-fader or post-fader.

102 Chapter 8—Aux Sends

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels

You can view and set parameters for all Aux Send 1–8, including setting levels and Pre/Post

parameters.

This is convenient when you wish to visually check all Aux Send settings or simultaneously

adjust the levels of certain channels routed to Aux 1–8.

1 Press the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the page listed

below that contains the desired channels appears.

-View1–16 page

This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 1–16.

-View17–32 page

This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 17–32.

-View33–48 page

This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 33–48.

These pages display the source Input channels and the corresponding Aux Sends in a

matrix. The parameters on these three pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the

same.

A DISPLAY

Use the following buttons to display the desired parameters.

• LEVEL ...........................Select the LEVEL button to display Send level bar graphs for

Input Channels routed to Aux 1–8.

• PRE/POST ....................Select the PRE/POST button to display signal source points for

Input Channels routed to Aux 1–8.

B FIX/VARI

These buttons indicate the Aux mode (Fixed or Variable) for Aux Out 1–8 and are only

for display purposes.

C LEVEL

This ﬁeld displays in dB the level of the Aux Send currently-selected by the cursor.

2 Move the cursor to either the DISPLAY LEVEL or PRE/POST button and press

[ENTER] to display the Level or Pre/Post parameters.

Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels 103

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Aux Sends

3 If you selected the PRE/POST button in Step 2, move the cursor to the desired

Input Channel and Aux intersection, then press the [ENTER] button to

change the signal source point.

4 If you selected the LEVEL button in Step 2, move the cursor to the desired

Input Channel and Aux intersection, then edit the Send level or turn the cur-

rently-selected AUX Send on or off.

Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to set the Send level, and

press the [ENTER] button to turn the currently-selected Aux Send on or off.

One of the following indicators appears, depending on the current Aux mode.

• Aux Sends in Fixed mode .................. A “FIX” indicator appears for On Aux Sends, and

a dot “ . ” appears for Off Aux Sends.

• Aux Sends in Variable mode ............. The current Send levels are displayed by the bar

graphs. If the level is set to nominal (0.0 dB), “N”

appears in the bar. The bars for Aux Sends that

are set to off are highlighted.

Note: Yo u can switch between Pre and Post only for Aux Sends that are set to Variable mode.

The “FIX” indication appears for Aux Sends that are set to Fixed mode, and you cannot switch

Pre/Post.

104 Chapter 8—Aux Sends

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Panning Aux Sends

You can pair adjacent odd-even (in this order) Aux Sends for stereo operation. This enables

you to pan signals from Input Channels to paired Aux Sends.

1 Pair the desired two Aux Sends. (See page 89 for more information on pair-

ing channels.)

2 Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select one of the paired

Aux Sends.

3 Press the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the page listed

below that contains the desired channels appears.

-Pan1–32 page

This page enables you to pan signals routed from Input Channels 1–32 to Aux Sends.

-Pan33–48 page

This page enables you to pan signals routed from Input Channels 33–48 to Aux Sends.

The parameters on these two pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same.

A Aux pan controls

These controls adjust the pan setting of signals routed from Input Channels to paired

Aux buses.

B MODE

The MODE parameter determines how paired Input Channels are panned.

C INPUT PAN LINK

When this parameter is turned on, Aux Sends follow the Input Channel Pan.

4 Move the cursor to the Aux pan control of the desired Input Channel and

rotate the Parameter wheel to set the pan value.

5 If necessary, move the cursor to the MODE parameter box and rotate the

Parameter wheel to select INDIVIDUAL, GANG, or INV GANG, then press

[ENTER].

If the INPUT PAN LINK ON/OFF button is turned off, this Mode setting is independent of

the Mode parameter on the Pan page. (See page 70 for more information on Mode

options.)

Excluding Certain Channels from Aux Sends (Mix Minus) 105

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Aux Sends

6To link the Input Channel Pan setting with the Aux Send Pan setting, move

the cursor to the INPUT PAN LINK ON/OFF button, then press [ENTER].

The pan positions on the Pan page are copied to the Aux pan setting, and the pan controls

on both pages are linked.

Excluding Certain Channels from Aux Sends (Mix Minus)

You can quickly exclude signals from certain channels from Aux Sends by using the controls

on the top panel. This operation is called “Mix Minus.”

For example, when Aux Sends are being used as monitors for the musicians or a narrator,

you can turn off the audio signals of the musicians or narrator, excluding them from the

monitor sound.

1 Press and hold down the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons of the desired

Aux Sends.

The [ON] button indicators in the channel strip section remain lit while you hold down the

button. This means that signals routed from channels with a lit [ON] button indicator to

the Aux Send are turned on.

2 Press the [ON] buttons of the Input Channels you wish to exclude from the

Aux Send. You can select multiple channels.

The selected channels’ [ON] button indicators turn off, and signals routed from those

channels to the corresponding Aux Send are turned off. “MIX MINUS FOR AUX * ”

appears on the bottom of the screen. (The asterisk represents an Aux number.)

3To reset the setting, while pressing and holding down the [AUX 1]–[AUX 8]

buttons you pressed in Step 1, press the [ON] buttons you pressed in Step 2.

The corresponding [ON] button indicators light up.

Tip:

•If paired Aux Sends are in Variable mode, the Aux Send levels, Aux On/Off, and Pre/Post

parameters for paired Input Channels are linked to each other.

•If paired Aux Sends are in Fixed mode, the Aux On/Off parameters for paired Input Chan-

nels are not linked to each other.

Note: If you release the button in the AUX SELECT section before you proceed to Step 2, you

will be unable to complete the Mix Minus operation.

Tip: At this time, the Send Level controls on the Aux | Send page are grayed out.

106 Chapter 8—Aux Sends

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Copying Channel Fader Positions to Aux Sends

While Aux Sends are in Variable mode, you can copy all Input Channel fader positions on

one layer to the corresponding Aux Sends.

This is convenient when you wish to send to the musicians monitor signals that have the

same balance setting as the Stereo Out signals.

1 Press and hold down the copy source layer (LAYER [1-16], [17-32], or [33-48])

button.

2 Press one of the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select the desired

Aux Send copy destination.

The conﬁrmation window for the Copy operation appears.

3To execute the Copy operation, move the cursor to the YES button, then

press [ENTER].

To cancel the Copy operation, move the cursor to the NO button, then press [ENTER].

Note: If you release the button in the LAYER section before you proceed to Step 2, you will be

unable to complete the Copy operation.

Tip: If the copy destination Input Channel has been paired with a vertical partner in another

Layer, the fader position will be copied to the partner’s Aux Send.

Soloing AUX Sends using the [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] Buttons 107

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Aux Sends

Soloing AUX Sends using the [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] Buttons

You can turn the Solo function on and off using the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] but-

tons, without having to switch to the Master layer. This is convenient when you wish to con-

trol the Solo function for Aux Out 1-8 while adjusting the Aux Sends from Input Channels.

1 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Solo

page appears.

2 Make sure that the SOLO parameter is set to Enabled.

3 Move the cursor to the AUX/SOLO LINK check box, then press the [ENTER]

button.

A pop-up window appears, asking you to conﬁrm the setting.

4To check the AUX/SOLO LINK check box, move the cursor to the YES button,

then press the [ENTER] button.

5 Press the desired AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons (for the Aux Sends

that you wish to solo) to light up the button indicators, then press the same

buttons again.

Only the selected Aux Sends are soloed, and the corresponding [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons

ﬂash.

108 Chapter 8—Aux Sends

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Input & Output Patching 109

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Input & Output Patching

9 Input & Output Patching

This chapter describes how to patch (assign) signal paths within the DM1000 to its inputs,

outputs, and slot channels

Input Patching

Signals input at INPUT connectors 1–16, 2TR IN DIGITAL connectors 1–2, and Slot I/O

cards are patched to Input Channels for use.

Patch example:

By default, the Input Channels are patched as follows:

You can change these patches, if you desire. To change input patching, you can either use

the Encoders on the top panel or set the parameters on the display.

Input Channels Input connectors and Slot channels

1–16

INPUT connectors 1–16

17–24

Channels 1–8 of Slot 1

25–32

Channels 1–8 of Slot 2

33–40

Internal Effects Processor 1–4 Outputs 1–2

41/42

2TR DIGITAL IN 1 (L/R)

43/44

2TR DIGITAL IN 2 (L/R)

45–48

OMNI IN connectors 1–4

Input Patching

INPUT connector 1

INPUT connector 2

INPUT connector 3

INPUT connector 4

INPUT connector 5

INPUT connector 6

INPUT connector 7

INPUT connector 8

Input Channel 1

Input Channel 2

Input Channel 3

Input Channel 4

Input Channel 5

Input Channel 6

Input Channel 7

Input Channel 8

110 Chapter 9—Input & Output Patching

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Input Patching from the Display

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the In

Patch | In Patch page appears.

Inputs and slot channels that are currently assigned to Input Channels are shown in the

parameter boxes (

1) below the channel numbers. The parameter indicators are explained

below:

2 Move the cursor to an input patch parameter you wish to change, and rotate

the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patch-

ing.

The long name of the currently-selected channel is

indicated in the upper-right corner of the screen (

1).

Below the channel name is the long name of the

selected input/slot channel (

2). (See page 79 and 265

for more information on changing channel names.)

3 Press [ENTER] to conﬁrm the change.

Parameter values Description

–

No assignment

AD1–AD16

INPUT connectors 1–16

OMN1–OMN4

OMNI IN connectors 1–4

S1-1–S116

Channels 1–16 of Slot 1

S2-1–S216

Channels 1–16 of Slot 2

FX1-1–FX1-8

Outputs 1–8 of Internal Effects Processor 1

FX2-1–FX2-2

Outputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2

FX3-1–FX3-2

Outputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3

FX4-1–FX4-2

Outputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4

2D1L & 2D1R

2TR DIGITAL IN 1 (L/R)

2D2L & 2D2R

2TR DIGITAL IN 2 (L/R)

BUS1–8

Bus 1–8 Outputs

AUX1–8

Aux 1–8 Outputs

Tip:

•You can patch an input signal to multiple Input Channels.

•You can store the Input Patch settings to the Input Patch library. Refer to Chapter 15 “Librar-

ies” on page 173 for more information.

• The number of outputs of internal Effects processor 1 varies depending on the selected effect

program. (See page 155 for more information on effect programs.)

Input Patching 111

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Input & Output Patching

Using the Encoders for Input Patching

By default, you can also use the Encoders on the top panel to change the Input Patching.

1 Press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button. The button indicator lights up.

By default, you can use the Encoders to change Input Patching while the [ASSIGN] button

indicator is lit.

2 Rotate the Encoder of the Input Channel for which you want to change

patching. (Alternatively, press the corresponding Encoder push switch.)

The In Patch | In Patch page appears, and the cursor moves to the corresponding Input

Channel parameter box.

3 Rotate the Encoder to select the desired input/slot channel number you

want to patch.

4 Press the Encoder push switch to conﬁrm the setting (or press the [ENTER]

button).

Tip: On the Encoder page, you can specify the Encoder function that works while the

[ASSIGN] button indicator is lit (see page 37).

112 Chapter 9—Input & Output Patching

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Output Patching

The DM1000’s Stereo Out, Bus Out 1–8, Aux Out 1–8 signals can be patched to any outputs

and slot channels.

Patch example:

By default, the following signal paths are patched to outputs and slot output channels:

You can change these patches, if you desire. The procedure for patching signals to output

varies depending on the output connectors and slots.

Output connectors and slot

channels

Signal ﬂow

OMNI OUT connectors 1–8

Aux Outs 1–8

OMNI OUT connectors 9–10

Stereo Out L & R

OMNI OUT connectors 11–12

Control Room Monitor L & R

Channels 1–8 of Slot 1

Bus Outs 1–8

Channels 9–16 of Slot 1

Bus Outs 1–8

Channels 1–8 of Slot 2

Bus Outs 1–8

Channels 9–16 of Slot 2

Bus Outs 1–8

2TR OUT DIGITAL 1 (L)

Stereo Out L

2TR OUT DIGITAL 1 (R)

Stereo Out R

2TR OUT DIGITAL 2 (L)

Stereo Out L

2TR OUT DIGITAL 2 (R)

Stereo Out R

Tip:

•You can patch a signal to multiple outputs and slot channels.

•You can store the Output Patch settings to the Output Patch library. Refer to Chapter 15

“Libraries” on page 173 for more information.

Output Patching

Stereo Out L

Stereo Out R

Aux Out 1

Aux Out 2

Aux Out 3

Aux Out 4

Aux Out 5

Aux Out 6

OMNI Out connector 1

OMNI Out connector 2

OMNI Out connector 3

OMNI Out connector 4

OMNI Out connector 5

OMNI Out connector 6

OMNI Out connector 7

OMNI Out connector 8

Output Patching 113

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Input & Output Patching

Patching Omni Outs

You can route the DM1000’s internal signals to OMNI OUT 1–12.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out

Patch | Omni Out page appears.

The OMNI 1–12 parameter boxes (

1) indicate the currently-patched signals. The param-

eter indicators are explained below:

2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter you wish to change, and rotate the

Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching.

3 Press [ENTER] to conﬁrm the change.

Parameter values Description

–

No assignment

BUS1–BUS8

Bus Out 1–8 signal

AUX1–AUX8

Aux Out 1–8 signal

ST L/R

Stereo Out signal

INS CH1–INS CH48

Input Channel 1–48 Insert Out

INS BUS1–INS BUS8

Bus Out 1–8 Insert Out

INS AUX1–INS AUX8

Aux Out 1–8 Insert Out

INS ST-L/ST-R

Stereo Out Insert Out

SURR XXX

(“XXX” represents a channel name.)

Surround Monitor Outs

CR-L/CR-R

Control Room Monitor signals

CAS BUS1–BUS8

Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs

CAS AUX1–AUX8

Aux Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs

CAS ST-L/ST-R

Stereo Bus Cascade Outs

CASSOLOL/CASSOLOR

Solo Bus Cascade Outs

SOLO-L/SOLO-R

Solo Bus signal

M.MX XXX

(“XXX” represents a channel name.)

Output signals from the surround monitor

monitor matrix

Tip: You can store the Output Patch settings to the Output Patch library. Refer to Chapter 15

“Libraries” on page 173 for more information.

114 Chapter 9—Input & Output Patching

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Patching the 2TR Digital Outputs

You can route the DM1000’s internal signals to 2TR OUT DIGITAL connectors 1–2.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out

Patch | 2TR Out page appears.

Signals assigned on the Omni Out page can also be assigned to the 2TR digital outputs.

2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter you wish to change, and rotate the

Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching.

3 Press [ENTER] to conﬁrm the change.

Patching Slot Outputs

You can route the DM1000’s internal signals to optional mini-YGDAI cards installed in Slot

1 and 2.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out

Patch | Slot Out page appears.

Signals assigned on the Omni Out page can also be assigned to the slot outputs. However,

you cannot assign SURR. XXX and M.MX XXX.

2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter you wish to change, and rotate the

Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching.

3 Press [ENTER] to conﬁrm the change.

Patching Direct Outs 115

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Input & Output Patching

Patching Direct Outs

Input Channel 1–48 signals can be directly patched to any outputs or slot outputs, as well

as Bus Out 1–8 and Stereo Out. This patching is convenient when you wish to record each

Input Channel signal to an individual track on a connected recorder.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out

Patch | Direct Out page appears.

The parameters on this page are described below.

A 1–48

These boxes indicate the Direct Out destination (outputs and slot channels) for Input

Channels 1–48.

B DIRECT OUT

Determines the Direct Out signal source position from the following three options:

• PRE EQ ..........................Immediately before Input Channel EQ

• PRE FADER ..................Immediately before Input Channel fader

• POST FADER ...............Immediately after Input Channel fader

2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter (1–48) you wish to change, and rotate

the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the destina-

tion.

If necessary, specify the signal source position using the DIRECT OUT parameter.

3 Press [ENTER] to conﬁrm the change.

4 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the Input Channel that is patched

to the Direct Out assigned in Steps 2 and 3.

5 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING [DIRECT] button.

The Direct Out patching is now effective, and the signals are routed to the assigned outputs

or slot channels.

Note: If you select a destination that is already used by an Output Patch setting and turn on

the ROUTING [DIRECT] button, the Output Patch setting will be disabled. To restore the

Output Patch setting, select another DIRECT OUT destination or turn off the ROUTING

[DIRECT] button.

Tip: Press the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to display

the Routing page. On this page, you can simultaneously route multiple Input Channels to

Direct Outs.

116 Chapter 9—Input & Output Patching

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Insert Patching

The DM1000’s Input Channels and Output Channels (Stereo Out, Bus Out 1–8, Aux Out

1–8) feature independent Insert Ins and Outs. Inputs, outputs, slot channels, and internal

effects processor inputs and outputs can be patched to the Output Channel Insert Ins and

Outs. In this way, you can send the signals to external effects processors for processing, or

insert internal effects.

Individual Insert Patching

You can patch the DM1000’s inputs, outputs, slot channels, and effects processor inputs and

outputs to the Insert Ins and Outs. The same procedure applies to both Input Channels and

Output Channels.

1 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader of an Input Channel or Output

Channel for Insert patching.

2 Press the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the /INS/DLY | Insert

page appears.

This page contains the following parameters:

A POSITION

This parameter determines the insert position of the Insert patch or compressor. The

insert position is indicated by highlighted COMP or INSERT buttons.

Effects

Input Output

Output connector Input connector

Insert Out Insert In

Channel

Insert Patching 117

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Input & Output Patching

B INSERT section

• ON/OFF.........................This button turns Insert on or off.

• OUT ...............................This parameter enables you to select outputs, slot channels, or

internal effects inputs as the Insert Out destination.

• IN....................................This parameter enables you to select inputs, slot channels, or

internal effects outputs as the Insert In source.

C COMP section

• ON/OFF.........................This button turns the compressor on or off.

• ORDER..........................This parameter determines the order of Insert patch and com-

pressor when they are inserted at the same signal path point.

With the “COMP → INS” setting, signals pass through the

compressor ﬁrst, then the Insert. With the “INS → COMP” set-

ting, signals pass through the Insert ﬁrst, then the compressor.

3 Move the cursor to the OUT parameter box, and rotate the Parameter wheel

or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the desired outputs, slot channels,

or internal effects inputs to be patched to Insert Out. The parameter indi-

cators are explained below:

4 Press [ENTER] to conﬁrm the change.

If you move the cursor to another parameter box or display another page before you press

the [ENTER] button, all settings on this page will be cancelled.

5 Move the cursor to the desired IN parameter box, and rotate the Parameter

wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the inputs or slot channels

to be patched to the Insert In.

Refer to the explanation regarding the Input Patch for more information on the parameter

values (see page 110).

6 Press [ENTER] to conﬁrm the change.

7To enable the speciﬁed Insert patch, move the cursor to the ON/OFF button

in the INSERT section, and press [ENTER] to turn it on or off.

Parameter values Description

–

No assignment

S1-1–S116

Channels 1–16 of Slot 1

S2-1–S216

Channels 1–16 of Slot 2

OMN1–OM12

OMNI OUT connectors 1–12

2D1L & 2D1R

2TR OUT DIGITAL1 (L/R)

2D2L & 2D2R

2TR OUT DIGITAL2 (L/R)

FX1-1–FX1-8

Inputs 1–8 of Internal Effects Processor 1

FX2-1 & FX2-2

Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2

FX3-1 & FX3-2

Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3

FX4-1 & FX4-2

Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4

Tip: Move the cursor to an empty OUT or IN parameter box and press the [ENTER] button.

The Patch Select window appears. Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the cursor buttons to

select an item to be patched and press [ENTER]. Then, move the cursor to the YES button and

press [ENTER]. The selected item is now patched.

118 Chapter 9—Input & Output Patching

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Viewing and Changing Insert In Patch

You can view and also change the items patched to the Insert Ins of all Input Channels (or

all Output Channels). This is useful when you wish to ﬁnd out if multiple channels have the

same patch.

1To view the Input Channels’ Insert Ins, press the [INPUT PATCH] button

repeatedly until the In Patch | Insert In page appears.

This page displays Input Channels 1–48 Insert In Patches.

2 Move the cursor to a channel patch parameter box you wish to change, then

rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the

patching.

3 Press [ENTER] to conﬁrm the change.

4To view the Output Channels’ Insert Ins, press the [OUTPUT PATCH] button

repeatedly until the Out Patch | Insert In page appears.

5 Move the cursor to a channel patch parameter box you wish to change, then

rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the

patching.

6 Press [ENTER] to conﬁrm the change.

Control Room Monitoring 119

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Control Room Monitoring

10 Control Room Monitoring

This chapter explains how to set up control room monitoring and use the Solo and Talkback

functions on the DM1000.

Control Room Monitor

The DM1000 features the Control Room stereo signal path to feed the control room’s main

monitors. By default, the Control Room signal source is patched to OMNI OUT connectors

11 & 12, which can feed the Control Room signal to the control room’s monitor.

• MONITOR SELECT

As a Control Room Monitor signal, you can select one from Stereo Out output, 2TR IN

DIGITAL 1 input, and 2TR IN DIGITAL 2 input.

If you change the parameter setting on the Monitor | C-R/TB page (see page 122), you can

monitor the OMNI IN signal, instead of the 2TR IN DIGITAL signal, when you press the

[2TR D1] or [2TR D2] button.

• SOLO bus

This special bus routes soloed Input Channels to the Control Room Monitor output,

bypassing Bus 1–8 and the Stereo Bus.

• OUTPUT SOLO

This section routes soloed Output Channels (Aux Out 1–8, Bus Out 1–8) to the Control

Room Monitor output.

• MONITOR LEVEL

Use the MONITOR [MONITOR LEVEL] control on the top panel to adjust the Control

Room Monitor level.

• DIMM (Dimmer)

The [DIMMER] button lowers the Control Room Monitor signal by the speciﬁed amount.

• PHONES

The Control Room Monitor signal is also fed to the PHONES jack. You can set the level

independently.

Note: Input and Output Channels cannot be solo-monitored simultaneously. The solo func-

tion for the most-recently soloed channels is enabled.

Note: The Dimmer function is activated automatically when the Talkback or Oscillator func-

tion is active.

120 Chapter 10—Control Room Monitoring

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Solo Setup

For solo setup, press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Solo

page appears.

This page contains the following parameters:

A SOLO

This parameter turns the Solo function on or off. By default, it is set to Enabled.

B MODE

This parameter determines how the Solo function works. There are two options. The

setting affects only Input Channels.

• RECORDING...............In Recording Solo mode, soloed Input Channel signals are fed

to the Solo bus and output via the Control Room Outputs.

Other buses (Stereo bus and Bus 1–8) are unaffected by this

mode.

• MIXDOWN.................. In Mixdown Solo mode, soloed Input Channel signals are fed

to the Stereo bus and output via the Control Room Outputs.

Unsoloed Input Channels are not fed to the Stereo bus while

the Solo function is enabled.

C SEL MODE

This parameter determines how the Input Channels will be soloed when you press the

[SOLO] button of each Channel. There are two options.

• MIX SOLO.................... In Mix Solo mode, any number of channels can be soloed

simultaneously.

• LAST SOLO .................. In Last Solo mode, only one channel can be soloed at a time by

pressing the [SOLO] button. The Solo function that was previ-

ously enabled for channels is automatically cancelled.

Tip:

•Recording Solo mode is convenient when you wish to monitor certain Input Channels

while recording, since the Stereo bus and Bus 1–8 signals are unaffected

•Mixdown Solo mode is useful when you wish to mute unsoloed Input Channels and feed

soloed Input Channel signals to the Stereo bus during mixdown.

Using the Solo Function 121

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Control Room Monitoring

D LISTEN

This parameter determines the source of the Input Channel Solo signal: Pre Fader or

After Pan. When Pre Fader is selected, turning on the PAN button below the Pre Fader

option will solo the channel with the pan position speciﬁed by the Pan setting even if the

source precedes the fader. This parameter is effective only in Recording Solo mode.

E SOLO TRIM

This parameter enables you to trim the level of the Solo signal in the range of –96 dB to

+12 dB.

F SOLO INTERRUPTION

When this parameter is set to Off, soloed channel signals are not fed to the Control

Room Monitor outputs. To monitor the Control Room Monitor signals and soloed

channel signals separately, change the output patching so that the soloed channel signals

are output independently from the Control Room Monitor outputs, then turn the Solo

Interruption parameter to Off.

G SOLO SAFE CHANNEL

For Mixdown Solo mode, Input Channels can be conﬁgured individually so that they

are not muted when other Input Channels are soloed (Solo Safe function). Signals from

Input Channels with the SOLO SAFE CHANNEL button turned on are always fed to the

Stereo bus, regardless of the channels’ Solo function status. You can clear all Solo Safe

settings by turning on the ALL CLEAR button.

H AUX/SOLO LINK

When this check box is checked, you can solo or unsolo Aux Sends using the AUX

SELECT [AUX 1] - [AUX 8] buttons without having to switch to the Master layer (see

page 107).

I FADER/SOLO RELEASE

If this check box is checked, you can unsolo the channels by raising the channel faders

that were at the level of –∞ when the Solo function was turned on. If the faders were set

to higher than –∞, the channels cannot be soloed. This setting is not effective in Mix-

down Solo mode and for Output Channels.

Using the Solo Function

You can solo and monitor Input Channels, Aux Out 1–8, and Bus Out 1–8 using the

[SOLO] buttons on the top panel.

1 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Solo

page appears.

2 Set the SOLO parameter to On and the SOLO INTERRUPTION parameter to

Off.

Set other parameters on the page, if necessary.

Tip: For example, if you set the internal effects processor’s return signal to Solo Safe, you

can monitor the soloed “processed (or wet)” signals.

Note: When you check the AUX/SOLO LINK or FADER/SOLO RELEASE check box, the

Solo setting is temporarily cancelled.

122 Chapter 10—Control Room Monitoring

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

3To solo and monitor Input Channels, press the corresponding LAYER button

to select a Layer that contains the desired channels, then press the channel

[SOLO] buttons.

The channel [SOLO] button indicators and the MONITOR [SOLO] indicator light up.

Only the soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Control Room Monitor outputs.

4To solo and monitor Output Channels, press the LAYER [MASTER] button,

then press the channel [SOLO] buttons.

Input and Output Channels (Aux Out 1–8, Bus Out 1–8) cannot be solo-monitored simul-

taneously. For example, if you solo an Input Channel, then solo an Output Channel, the

ﬁrst solo channel is temporarily cancelled.

If you solo an Output Channel ﬁrst, then solo an Input Channel, canceling the Input Chan-

nel’s solo will activate the Output Channel’s solo.

5You can unsolo all soloed channels by pressing all illuminated channel

[SOLO] buttons.

The button indicators turn off. You can also unsolo all soloed channels by pressing the

MONITOR [CLEAR] button.

Using the Control Room Monitor

1 Connect a monitoring system to the outputs (by default, OMNI OUT 11&12)

to which the Control Room Monitor signal is patched.

To monitor the signal via headphones, connect headphones to the PHONES jack.

2 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | C-R/TB

page appears.

A 2TR DIN FLIP

This parameter enables you to specify the signal source that will be monitored when you

press the MONITOR [2TR D1] or [2TR D2] button.

• 2TR D1 & OMNI 1/2 ... These buttons select the 2TR IN DIGITAL 1 and OMNI IN 1/2

inputs respectively as the signal source that will be monitored

when you press the [2TR D1] button.

• 2TR D2 & OMNI 3/4 ... These buttons select the 2TR IN DIGITAL 2 and OMNI IN 3/4

inputs respectively as the signal source that will be monitored

when you press the [2TR D2] button.

Tip: If the SEL MODE parameter is set to Mix Solo on the Monitor | Solo page, you can solo

multiple Input Channels simultaneously.

Using the Talkback Function 123

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Control Room Monitoring

B CONTROL ROOM DIMMER LEVEL

This parameter determines the amount of attenuation applied to the Control Room

Monitor signal by the Dimmer function when you press the MONITOR [DIMMER]

button. The amount of attenuation can range from 0 dB to –96 dB.

C MONO

This button switches the Control Room Monitor signal into mono.

D MIX C-R SOURCES

Check this check box to select the [2TR D1] or [2TR D2] button and the [STEREO] but-

ton as the monitoring signal sources simultaneously.

3 Set the Control Room Monitor parameters as necessary.

4 Press the MONITOR [STEREO], [2TR D1], or [2TR D2] button to select the

monitoring signal source.

Each button selects the following monitoring signal sources. When the MIX C-R SOURCES

check box is checked, you can select the [2TR D1] or [2TR D2] button and the [STEREO]

button simultaneously. However, you cannot select both [2TR D1] button and [2TR D2]

button. If the MIX C-R SOURCES check box is not checked, you can select only one signal

source.

• [STEREO] button ........Selects the Stereo Out signal.

• [2TR D1] button ..........Selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL1 signal.

• [2TR D2] button ..........Selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL2 signal.

5 Adjust the monitoring level using the MONITOR [MONITOR LEVEL] control

while playing the sound sources.

To adjust the level of the monitoring signal via headphones, turn the [PHONE LEVEL] con-

trol.

Using the Talkback Function

The DM1000 features a built-in talkback microphone on the control surface. The Talkback

function distributes the Talkback mic signal to the speciﬁed outputs or slot channels. The

Talkback function is useful when you wish to communicate with the musicians in the studio

or record your comments to a recorder.

Note: In this case, the [2TR D1] and [2TR D2] buttons are effective only when external devices

are connected to the 2TR Digital Outputs respectively and are turned on.

Tip: If you change the 2TR DIN FLIP parameter setting, pressing the [2TR D1] or [2TR D2]

button enables you to monitor the OMNI IN signal, instead of the 2TR IN DIGITAL signal.

MONITOR

LEVEL

SOLO CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

DIMMER

TALKBACK

MONITOR

STEREO

SLOT

BUS

DISPLAY

100

124 Chapter 10—Control Room Monitoring

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

1 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | C-R/TB

page appears.

This page contains the following parameters:

A OUTPUT ASSIGN section

The buttons in this section enable you to assign the Talkback mic signal to the desired

outputs. (You can select multiple destinations.)

B TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL

When the Talkback function is active, this parameter determines the amount of attenu-

ation applied to the Control Room monitor signals. The amount of attenuation can

range from 0 dB to –96 dB.

C USE ..... AS TALKBACK check box

Checking this box enables you to select an AD Input or slot input channel signal speci-

ﬁed in the parameter box as the Talkback signal source.

D NEVER LATCH TALKBACK check box

If this check box is checked, the Talkback function is enabled only while you are holding

down the [TALKBACK] button. When you release the button, the Talkback function

turns off. If the check box is unchecked, the Talkback function remains effective after

you press and release the [TALKBACK] button.

2 Move the cursor to the number button of an output channel to which you

wish to assign the Talkback signal in the OUTPUT ASSIGN section, then press

the [ENTER] button to highlight the channel number.

3 If you wish to operate the [DIMMER] button during Talkback communica-

tion, move the cursor to the TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL control and rotate

the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to set the amount of

attenuation.

4 Press the [TALKBACK] button.

The Talkback function is enabled.

By default, pressing and releasing the [TALKBACK] button once enables the Talkback func-

tion. Press the button again to turn off the function. If you press and hold down the [TALK-

BACK] button for more than 300ms, the Talkback function is enabled as long as you hold

down the button, and the function is turned off when you release the button.

However, if you have checked the NEVER LATCH TALKBACK check box on the Monitor |

Talkback page, the Talkback function remains effective only while you are pressing and

holding down the button.

Surround Functions 125

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Surround Functions

11 Surround Functions

This chapter describes surround panning, which determines how Input Channel signals are

panned within and across the stereo ﬁeld. It also describes the DM1000’s surround moni-

toring capabilities, which enable you to monitor, in a surround sound environment,

DM1000 surround mixes or surround sources input via the slots.

Using Surround Pan

About Surround Pan

The Surround Pan function places a sound image within a two-dimensional ﬁeld using a

multi-channel playback system, and pans the image to the front, rear, left, and right in rela-

tion to the listening position. To pan the stereo image, you can use the Parameter wheel,

[INC]/[DEC] buttons, or Joystick.

You can also store the surround pan settings in a Scene, or record the movement of the

sound image to Automixes.

If each channel’s follow pan (see page 74) is turned off, you can route the signals to the cor-

responding Bus Outs regardless of the Surround Pan setting. This is convenient when you

wish to assign the surround source or surround effect returns to the Buses.

If “Nominal Pan” (see page 267) in the Prefer1 page is checked, the level of the Input Chan-

nels that are panned hard left or right will be used as the nominal level. If the check box is

not checked, the nominal level will be +3dB.

In addition to a normal Stereo mode, the DM1000 features the following three Surround

modes:

• 3-1

This mode uses four channels that include front

left, front right, front center, and rear.

• 5.1

This mode uses six channels that include front left,

front right, rear left, rear right, front center, and

subwoofer.

Note: If you save a scene with the Follow Pan function turned off while using a DM1000 that

runs ﬁrmware older than Version 2.0, the surround settings of the scene may not be played

back correctly.

Front L Front RCenter

Surround

Subwoofer

Rear L Rear R

Front L Front RCenter

126 Chapter 11—Surround Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

• 6.1

This mode uses seven channels that include six

channels of 5.1 mode plus rear center.

When you select one of these Surround modes, each surround channel is routed to the

Buses speciﬁed on the Setup | Surr Bus page (see page 130).

The following table shows the factory-default Surround Channel to Bus Out assignment in

each Surround mode.

Surround

Mode

BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 BUS5 BUS6 BUS7

3-1

LRCS

———

Front left Front right Center Surround

5.1

LRLsRs C LFE

—

Front left Front right Rear left Rear right Center Subwoofer

6.1

LRLsRs C Bs LFE

Front left Front right Rear left Rear right Center Rear center Subwoofer

Subwoofer

Rear L Rear RRear center

Front L Front RCenter

Using Surround Pan 127

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Surround Functions

You can record each surround channel to a separate track to record surround panning. The

following diagram is an example in which each channel signal in 5.1 Surround mode is

recorded to digital MTR tracks.

Tip: You can set the surround pan either independently of normal panpots or in unison with

them.

BUS1 (L)

BUS2 (R)

BUS3 (Ls)

BUS4 (Rs)

BUS5 (C)

BUS6 (LFE)

SURROUND

PA N

LFE LEVEL

SURROUND

PA N

LFE LEVEL

SURROUND

PA N

LFE LEVEL

8-TRACK DIGITAL

DM1000

Input Channel 2

Digital MTR

Slot

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

Channel 5

Channel 6

MY8-TD etc.

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Input Channel 1

Input Channel 3

128 Chapter 11—Surround Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes

To conﬁgure the surround environment, select 3-1, 5.1, or 6.1 Surround mode on the

DM1000 and connect a multi-channel monitoring system to the DM1000.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/SURROUND] button repeatedly until the

Pan/Surr | Surr Mode page appears.

A SURROUND MODE

This parameter enables you to select a Surround mode by using the following buttons.

The button that is turned on (highlighted) indicates the currently-selected Surround

mode.

• STEREO ........................ The DM1000 uses normal stereo mode (default).

• 3-1 ..................................Selects 3-1 Surround mode.

• 5.1................................... Selects 5.1 Surround mode.

• 6.1................................... Selects 6.1 Surround mode.

B PAN/SURR LINK

When this button is turned on, Input Channel panpots and stereo surround panning are

linked.

Press this button to display the Surr Bus page, which enables you to change the Surround

Channel to Bus Out assignment.

2 Move the cursor to the Surround mode button you want to use.

When you move the cursor to one of these buttons, speaker icons appear, indicating a typ-

ical listening position and the Surround Channel to Bus Out conﬁguration.

• 3-1 Surround

Using Surround Pan 129

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Surround Functions

3 Press the [ENTER] button.

The conﬁrmation window for changing the Surround mode appears.

4 Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER].

The DM1000 enters the selected Surround mode.

5To link the Input Channel Pan setting with the stereo surround panning,

move the cursor to the PAN/SURR LINK button, then press [ENTER].

When the PAN/SURR LINK button is turned on, adjusting the Input Channel pan settings

will also change the stereo surround panning accordingly, and vice versa.

• 5.1 Surround

• 6.1 Surround

130 Chapter 11—Surround Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

6To change the Surround Channel to Bus Out assignment, move the cursor

to the SURR/BUS SETUP button, then press [ENTER].

The Setup | Surr Bus page appears.

A BUS1–BUS8

These parameters select channels to be assigned to the Bus Outs in 3-1, 5.1, and 6.1 Sur-

round modes.

B INIT

These buttons reset the channel assignment to the default setting.

7To change the assignment, move the cursor to the desired Bus parameter,

rotate the Parameter wheel to select a channel, then press [ENTER].

The channels are swapped between the selected Bus and the Bus to which the channel

assigned to the selected Bus was assigned previously.

8 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out

Patch | Slot Out page appears, then make sure that each Bus Out is routed

to the desired channel on the digital I/O card.

To monitor signals routed to the digital I/O card in the surround environment, use sur-

round monitoring (see page 136).

Tip:

•Pressing the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly also displays the Surr Bus page.

•Available Bus Outs vary depending on the Surround mode. For example, in 3-1 Surround

mode, Bus Outs 1–4 are available. In 5.1 Surround mode, Bus Outs 1–6 are available, and

in 6.1 Surround mode, Bus Outs 1–7 are available.

Using Surround Pan 131

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Surround Functions

Surround Panning from the Display

You can set the surround pan parameters for each Input Channel from the display.

1 Make sure that the DM1000 is in one of the Surround modes, then press the

[SEL] button of the channel for which you want to set surround pan.

2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/SURROUND] button repeatedly until the

Pan/Surr | Ch Edit page appears.

The Ch Edit page displays the selected Input Channel, and its surround pan setting and

available pair partner.

The following display page is an example in 6.1 Surround mode.

The following parameters are available on this page:

A Surround pan graph

This graph indicates the pan positions in the two-dimensional ﬁeld, with the listening

position in the center. A small diamond ( ) indicates the current surround pan posi-

tion, and a small square ( ) indicates the current position of the Joystick. You can move

the current surround pan position ( ) directly to one of the speaker icons by select-

ing its icon, then pressing [ENTER].

B Trajectory patterns

These buttons represent seven trajectory patterns that determine how the surround pan

moves when you operate the Parameter wheel or the [INC]/[DEC] buttons.

C FAST

Tur ning on this button increases the speed of sound images panned via the Parameter

wheel.

D Trajectory pattern parameters

These parameters ﬁne-tune the surround pan trajectory pattern.

• WIDTH ...................This parameter sets the left-to-right width of the selected tra-

jectory pattern.

• DEPTH ....................This parameter sets the front-to-rear width of the selected tra-

jectory pattern.

• OFFSET ...................This parameter offsets the left-to-right direction of the selected

trajectory pattern.

• OFFSET ...................This parameter offsets the front-to-rear direction of the

selected trajectory pattern.

5 6 97 8

132 Chapter 11—Surround Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

E LFE

This parameter control sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel signal

routed to the subwoofer, and appears only in 5.1 and 6.1 Surround modes.

F DIV

This parameter control determines how the Center signal is fed to the Left, Right, and

Center channels. It is expressed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100%. When you set

the parameter to 100, the Center signal is fed to only the Center channel. When you set

the parameter to 0, the Center signal is fed to only the Left and Right channels. When

you set the parameter to 50, the Center signal is fed equally to the Left, Right, and Center

channels. This parameter control appears only in 3-1 and 5.1 Surround modes.

6 F & R

In 6.1 Surround mode, F and R parameter controls appear, instead of the DIV control.

The F parameter control determines how the Front Center signal is fed to the Left and

Right channels, and the R parameter control determines how the rear surround signal

is fed to the Left and Right surround channels.

G LINK

This button is available only in 6.1 Surround mode. When you turn on this button, the

F and R controls are set to the same value, and linked together.

H ST LINK

Tur ning on this button links the surround pan parameters of two Input Channels that

are currently displayed on the page (Stereo Link function). You can link the surround

pan parameters of two channels regardless of whether they are paired.

I PATTERN

When Input Channels are linked by the Stereo Link function, the seven patterns select-

able here determine how the linked surround pan moves via the Parameter wheel and

the [INC]/[DEC] buttons.

3 Select one of seven trajectory patterns by turning on the corresponding tra-

jectory pattern button.

The following patterns are available:

• ...................... The sound image moves between left and right.

Tip: In 3-1, 5.1, and 6.1 Surround modes, operating the Joystick locates the Pan/Surr |

Ch Edit page.

40 5636 40

Using Surround Pan 133

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Surround Functions

• ...................... The sound image moves between front and rear.

• ...................... The sound image moves from front right to rear left. With this pattern,

you can also ﬁne-tune the trajectory by using the WIDTH, DEPTH,

OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( ) parameters.

• ...................... The sound image moves from front left to rear right. With this pattern,

you can also ﬁne-tune the trajectory using the WIDTH, DEPTH,

OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( ) parameters.

• ...................... The sound image moves between left and right while tracing an arc.

With this pattern, you can also ﬁne-tune the radius and shape of the

arc using the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( )

parameters.

40 5636 40

36 36 36 12 8 8 44 16 20 16

40 48 44 44 20 32 28 56 32 24

134 Chapter 11—Surround Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

• ...................... The sound image moves between front and rear while tracing an arc.

With this pattern, you can also ﬁne-tune the radius and shape of the

arc using the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( )

parameters.

• ...................... The sound image moves while tracing a circle or oval. With this pat-

tern, you can also ﬁne-tune the radius and shape of the circle or oval

using the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( ) param-

eters.

4 If necessary, ﬁne-tune the trajectory by editing the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET

( ), and OFFSET ( ) parameter values.

5To set the surround pan position, move the cursor to anywhere outside the

parameter boxes, then rotate the Parameter wheel.

6To adjust the surround pan using the Joystick, press the SELECTED CHANNEL

[GRAB] button (the button indicator lights up), then operate the Joystick.

In this way, you can move the current pan position icons ( ) directly and quickly. Even if

the [GRAB] button is turned off, placing the small square ( ) over the small diamond ( )

will automatically turn on the [GRAB] button.

This Joystick function can be disabled by the Joystick Auto Grab preference (see page 268)

on the Setup | Prefer1 page.

7To link the surround pan settings of two channels displayed on the page,

turn on the ST LINK button.

Use the PATTERN parameter box below the ST LINK button to specify how you want the

linked surround pan to move.

Tip: You can also adjust the pan position using the Encoders if you assign the surround pan

parameters to the Encoders.

40 48 44 44 20 32 28 56 32 24

44 48 32 24 24 24 60 40 52 40

Using Surround Pan 135

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Surround Functions

The following table shows how the sound images on two linked channels move when dif-

ferent trajectory patterns and stereo link patterns are combined. A solid line indicates the

movement of the selected channel, and a dotted line indicates the movement of the

linked partner.

8To list multiple-channel surround pan settings, press the [PAN/SURROUND]

button repeatedly until the Pan/Surr | Surr1–16, Surr17–32, or Surr33–48

page appears.

These pages display and enable you to edit the surround pan settings for 16 channels.

Note: If you record the movement of the linked channels in an Automix, the sound image

moves on both channels when you play the Automix.

Trajectory

Pattern

136 Chapter 11—Surround Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

A Surround pan graphs

These graphs display the trajectory patterns and the current pan positions for the Input

Channels. Move the cursor to the desired channel’s graph, then rotate the Parameter

wheel to adjust the pan settings along the selected trajectory pattern. Turning on the

[GRAB] button enables you to use the Joystick to set the surround pan of the cur-

rently-selected Input Channel.

Press [ENTER] while the cursor is on the graph to display the Ch Edit page for the

selected channel.

B parameter box

This parameter box enables you to move the surround pan setting of the selected chan-

nel left and right.

C parameter box

This parameter box enables you to move the surround pan setting of the selected chan-

nel front and rear.

Surround Monitoring

About Surround Monitoring

The DM1000 features comprehensive surround monitoring functions that enable you to

monitor, in the optimum environment, the surround sources in the Buses or those input

from Slot 1 or 2. These functions include down mixing (which enables you to monitor sig-

nals on fewer channels) and ﬁne-tuning of surround channel signals according to the mon-

itoring environment.

The surround monitoring functions also feature an oscillator for testing speakers, a mon-

itoring matrix for down mixing, Bass Management for optimizing channel signals for the

monitoring environment, and monitor alignment using individual Attenuator and Delay

parameters for each speaker.

To monitor the Surround Monitor signal via the surround system, you must connect

the system to the output connectors on the DM1000, then patch the Surround Monitor

signal source to these connectors.

For example, if the surround system is connected to the OMNI OUT connector, press the

[OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out Patch | OMNI Out page appears. This

page will enable you to patch the surround channel (indicated as “SURR XXX” where

“XXX” is the channel name) to the corresponding OMNI OUT connector.

MONITOR

LEVEL

MONITOR MATRIX OUT

FROM CONTROL ROOM L/R TO CONTROL ROOM DIMM

C-R to SURROUND MONITOR

BUS1-8

STEREO

BUS

DIMM

MONITOR

MATRIX

MONITOR

ALLIGNMENT

BASS

MANAGEMENT

SLOT2 1-8

SLOT

8x8

Patch

SLOT1 1-8

PINK NOISE

500-2kHz

BPF

1kHz, 50Hz

SURROUND

MONITOR

TO OUTPUT PATCH

Surround Monitoring 137

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Surround Functions

The following diagram shows an example of 5.1 Surround Monitor signals patched to

OMNI OUTs 1–6.

Use the following two buttons in the MONITOR section on the top panel to select the Sur-

round Monitor signal source. If the MIX MONITOR SOURCES check box is checked in the

Monitor | Surround page, you can select both buttons simultaneously.

•[BUS] button

This button selects the Bus Outs assigned to the surround channels

as the source. Turn on this button to check the effects of surround

pan and surround effect settings, or to monitor a surround mix cur-

rently being recorded to a digital MTR.

•[SLOT] button

This button selects the Inputs of Slot 1 or 2 as the source. Turn on this

button to monitor a surround mix from a connected multi-track

recorder.

Use the MONITOR [MONITOR LEVEL] control on the top panel to

adjust the Surround Monitor level.

Note: If you turn on the [BUS] button while Surround mode is set to Stereo, the Stereo Bus

signals are patched to Surround Monitor.

MONITOR

LEVEL

TALKBACK

MONITOR

SLOT

BUS

100

SOLO CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2 STEREO

DISPLAY

DIMMER

138 Chapter 11—Surround Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Conﬁguring Basic Surround Monitoring

You can set basic parameters for Surround Monitor, including monitor matrix, Bass Man-

agement, and monitor alignment.

To do so, press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Surr Setup

page appears.

This page displays the basic parameter settings in the MONITOR FLOW section (

1).

• SURR. MODE

This parameter indicates the current Surround mode. (You cannot change the Surround

mode on this page).

• MONITOR MATRIX

This parameter selects a surround mode on the surround monitoring system. By default, it

is set to the same mode as the SURR. MODE parameter, though you can select any mode

that features fewer channels than the current mode. This function is useful when you wish

to monitor, for example, a 5.1 surround source through a stereo monitoring system.

Available modes depend on the current Surround mode.

When you change the Monitor Matrix mode in the MONITOR MATRIX parameter box,

the area below the MONITOR FLOW section displays the Matrix ﬂow diagram as well as

AT T parameter boxes that enable you to adjust the amount of attenuation for each signal

path. Adjust the attenuation, if necessary.

Note: If you set Surround mode to 6.1 and Monitor Matrix to 6.1 for monitoring on the

DM1000 with a ﬁrmware version older than 2.0, the DM1000 with the ﬁrmware version 2.0

may not reproduce the exact same monitoring environment.

Surround Mode ST 3-1 5.1 6.1

STEREO

O ———

3-1

OO——

5.1

OOO—

6.1

OOOO

Note: If you selected 3-1 Monitor Matrix mode, specify a value identical to the following three

attenuation parameters:

•ATT1 for 3-1 SURR.

•ATT4 for 5.1 SURR.

•ATT5 for 6.1 SURR.

This attenuation amount is not used for down-mixes, but rather for adjusting the monitoring

level of the Ls, Rs, Ls2, and Rs2 speakers.

Surround Monitoring 139

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Surround Functions

The following diagram shows an example in 5.1 Surround mode and 3-1 Monitor Matrix

mode.

• BASS MANAGEMENT

You can set the ﬁlter and attenuator settings for each Surround Monitor Channel using

eight preset Bass Management modes. The following presets are available:

ATT1: Adjusts the level difference between LR and LsRs.

ATT2: Adjusts the level difference between C and Bs.

AMP: Corrects the LFE channel level.

HPF1–3: Cut the low range so that the speakers’ supporting frequency ranges will not interfere with the

subwoofer signals.

HPF1–2: Cut the high range so that the subwoofer’s supporting frequency ranges will not interfere with

other speakers’ signals.

You can set the Bass Management parameters in the following ranges:

The HPF 1, 2, 3, and LPF 1 & 2 values indicate a cut-off frequency and a filter response. For example,

“80-12” means a cutoff frequency of 80 Hz and a filter response of –12 dB/octave.

“L” means Linkwitz filter. Other filters are Butterworth.

Note: Yo u can patch the Surround Monitor Matrix channels to the output connectors.

Presets Parameters

No. Title HPF 1, 2, 3 LPF1 LPF2 ATT 1 & 2 AMP

DVD LFE80Hz 80–12 80–24 80–24 0 10

DVD LFE120Hz 80–12 120–42 80–24 0 10

Movie LFE80Hz 80–12 80–24 80–24 –3 10

Movie LFE120Hz 80–12 120–42 80–24 –3 10

Bypass THRU THRU MUTE 0 0

THXD

THX DVD 80-12L 120-42 80-24L 0 10

THXF

THX Movie 80-12L 120-42 80-24L –3 10

THXM

THX Music 80-12L 120-42 80-24L 0 10

Note:

•If you select preset THXD or THXF, you cannot change the parameters.

•If you select preset THXM, you can switch AMP between 10 dB and 0 dB. However, you

cannot change other parameters.

Parameters Range

HPF 1, 2, 3

THRU, 80-12, 80-12L, 80-24, 80-24L

LPF1

THRU, 80-24, 80-24L, 120-42

LPF2

THRU, 80-24, 80-24L, MUTE

ATT 1 & 2

0 to –12 dB (1 dB steps)

AMP

0 to +12 dB (1 dB steps)

140 Chapter 11—Surround Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

About the Presets

(1) DVD LFE80Hz

This is a preset optimized for DVD-Video production. The LFE playback bandwidth is set

up to 80 Hz. When using this preset, we recommend that you use an external device to apply

an LPF (fc=80 Hz, –24 dB/oct) to the LFE master source.

To monitor audio on DVD-Audio or SACD discs, change the LFE level (AMP) and LPF

(LPF1) to 0 dB and THRU, respectively, if necessary.

The LFE output gain on some DVD players and decoders may already be set to +10 dB. To

monitor the output from such devices, change the LFE level (AMP) to 0 dB.

(2) DVD LFE120Hz

This is also a preset optimized for DVD-Video production. This preset is the same as preset

(1) mentioned above, except that the LFE playback bandwidth is set up to 120 Hz. Use this

preset to monitor standard LFE signals recorded on DVD-Video discs that include the

high-end frequency ranges (120 Hz).

(3) Movie LFE80Hz

This preset is the same as preset (1) mentioned above, except that the output level of sur-

round channels is set to –3 dB when the Monitor Matrix mode is 5.1 or 6.1. This preset is

suitable for movie production.

When using this preset, we recommend that you use an external device to apply an LPF

(fc=80 Hz, –24 dB/oct) to the LFE master source.

(4) Movie LFE120Hz

This preset is the same as preset (2) mentioned above, except that the output level of sur-

round channels is set to –3 dB when the Monitor Matrix mode is 5.1 or 6.1. This preset is

suitable for movie production.

(5) Bypass

Use this preset not only for bass management but to bypass all parameters, such as the LFE

level & LPF, surround channel level, etc.

To disable only the bass management, select another preset, then turn off the BASS MAN-

AGEMENT ON/OFF button.

■ THX Presets:

The following presets have been approved by THX™ Ltd. for use in THX pm3™ Certiﬁed

Studios*. They are designed to provide dedicated parameters for the proper playback of

multi-channel audio content in bass managed systems and to be compatible with sub-

woofer-satellite type consumer systems.

*Use of a THX preset does not permit a studio to use the designation - THX pm3 Certiﬁed

Studio. The THX pm3 Studio Certiﬁcation Program uses performance and design speciﬁ-

cations to create calibrated environments for optimum sound and picture presentation. For

more information, visit the THX website at http://www.thx.com

[THXD] THX DVD

This preset is conﬁgured for DVD-Video production. Use this preset when mixing and/or

monitoring audio content not from a theatrical ﬁlm source. The parameters cannot be

changed.

[THXF] THX Film

This preset is conﬁgured for Film pre-production. Use this preset when mixing and/or

monitoring theatrical ﬁlm-based content (such as a pre-mix for ﬁlm). The parameters can-

not be changed.

Surround Monitoring 141

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Surround Functions

[THXM] THX Music

This preset is conﬁgured for DVD-Music production. Use this preset when mixing and/or

monitoring multi-channel music content (including DVD-Audio and SACD). Only one

parameter can be changed. The LFE gain (AMP) can be set to +10dB (default) or 0dB.

Select the level that complies with the standards of the target media. Please note: The LFE

output gain on some DVD players, receivers, and/or decoders may already be set to +10dB.

Select the 0dB setting only if the destination environment (home theatre, etc.) has the LFE

gain set to 0dB. Otherwise, use the default setting.

The following diagrams show the Bass Management conﬁguration for each Monitor Matrix

setting, with Bass Management turned on or off.

5.1 ON

3-1 ON ST ON

5.1 OFF

3-1 OFF ST OFF

6.1 ON

6.1 OFF

142 Chapter 11—Surround Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

• MONITOR ALIGNMENT

You can adjust the Attenuator and Delay for each Surround Monitor Channel. This func-

tion is primarily used to correct the level difference and delay time among speakers.

Move the cursor to the ATT or DLY parameter in the MONITOR FLOW section. The

MONITOR ALIGNMENT diagram is displayed in the area below the section.

Move the cursor to the ATT or DLY parameter box and edit the Attenuator or Delay value.

The Attenuator parameters can be set to –∞ dB or from –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB in 0.1 dB steps.

The Delay parameters can be set from 0.00 to 30.0 msec in 0.02 msec steps.

Setting the Monitoring Level of the Sound System

1 Adjust the monitoring levels using the MONITOR [MONITOR LEVEL] control.

All channel monitoring levels change simultaneously.

2 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Sur-

round page appears.

This page enables you to solo or mute monitoring channels, store the [MONITOR LEVEL]

control setting, and select the monitoring source.

Note:

• These parameter settings are effective only on the monitoring signals, not on normal Bus

Out signals.

•If you set Surround mode to 6.1 and Monitor Matrix mode to 6.1 for monitoring, you must

also make the settings described above.

Tip: You can store these settings in the Surround Monitor library. See page 186 for more infor-

mation.

Surround Monitoring 143

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Surround Functions

A MUTE/SOLO section

This section enables you to mute or solo Surround Monitor Channels for each Bus.

• SOLO .............................This button turns the Surround Monitor Solo function on or

off. When this button is turned on, you can select speaker icons

() to solo certain Buses.

• buttons .................These buttons mute or unmute the speakers. The meters con-

nected to the speaker icons indicate the signal level of the cor-

responding Buses.

B SETTING section

• MIX MONITOR SOURCES .............. When this check box is checked, you can select

the [BUS] button and [SLOT] button simulta-

neously as the monitoring source.

• SLOT 1 & 2 ........................................... These buttons determine which Slot Inputs are

monitored through the Surround Monitor when

you press the [SLOT] button. Turning on both

buttons 1 and 2 mixes the two slot signals.

• C-R TO MONITOR L/R..................... When this button is turned on, the Left and Right

Surround Monitor Channels are fed to the Con-

trol Room Monitors.

C STATUS section

This section enables you to set the output levels of the currently-selected Surround

Monitors.

• SURROUND MODE ...This parameter displays the current Surround mode.

• MONITOR LEVEL.......This parameter indicates the current Surround Monitor level.

• SET SPL85.....................This button enables you to calibrate the volume setting of the

[MONITOR LEVEL] control to 85 dB SPL, the cinema stan-

dard for setting up Surround Channel Monitor speakers, and

then store the value.

• SNAP TO SPL85...........Turning on this button resets the [MONITOR LEVEL] control

setting to the value stored by the SET SPL85 button.

3 Move the cursor to the SET SPL button, then press [ENTER] to turn on the

button.

The volume setting of the [MONITOR LEVEL] control is calibrated to 85 dB SPL and

stored.

If you store the cinema standard level in this way, moving the cursor to the SNAP TO SPL85

button and pressing [ENTER] always restores the stored value, even after you adjust the

[MONITOR LEVEL] control.

Note: The Surround Monitor Mute and Solo functions are reset to the default condition when

you change the Surround mode.

Tip: When the SET SPL button is turned on, the standard value (85.0 dB ) indicated in the

MONITOR LEVEL box is applied to the stored [MONITOR LEVEL] control setting.

144 Chapter 11—Surround Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Using the Oscillator for Surround Monitor

The DM1000 features a dedicated Oscillator that enables you to check the output and sound

of the surround sound speakers. You can send the Oscillator signal to certain speakers or to

each speaker in turn. This function is useful when you wish to check the volume balance

and phase of the surround monitor speakers.

1 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Surr

Setup page appears.

The SPEAKER SETUP section enables you to turn the Oscillator on or off and specify the

signal destination.

A SPEAKER SETUP

You can select the Oscillator waveform and the speakers to which the Oscillator signal is

sent.

• OSC. .............................. This parameter selects the Oscillator waveform.

• ON/OFF ........................This button turns the Oscillator on or off.

• ROTATE ........................ When the ROTATE button is on, the Oscillator signal is output

by each speaker in turn, with an interval of ﬁve seconds (3-sec-

ond signal and 2-second pause).

• (Speaker) buttons.......................These buttons turn the Oscillator on or off for

each speaker.

• (SW Phase) button......................This button reverses the phase of the signal out-

put to the Subwoofer (SW).

2 Make sure that the Speaker button ( ) for the speaker to which you want

to output the Oscillator signal is turned on.

If the button is off, move the cursor to the button, then press [ENTER] to turn it on.

3 Move the cursor to the OSC. parameter box, then rotate the Parameter

wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select one of the following Oscil-

lator waveforms.

• PINK NOISE ................Pink noise

• 500–2 kH....................... Pink noise through a 500 Hz to 2 kHz BPF

• 1 kHz ............................. 1 kHz sinewave

• 50 Hz.............................. 50 Hz sinewave

Tip: This Oscillator is available only for Surround monitoring.

Surround Monitoring 145

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Surround Functions

4 Move the cursor to the ON/OFF button, then press the [ENTER] or

[INC]/[DEC] buttons to turn the Oscillator on.

The speaker speciﬁed in Step 2 outputs the Oscillator signal. If necessary, adjust the speaker

volume balance in the MONITOR ALIGNMENT section on the Surr Setup page (see

page 142).

Patching Slot Inputs to Surround Channels

You can patch individual Slot Inputs to Surround Monitor Channels as follows.

1 Make sure that the DM1000 is in the same Surround mode as the monitoring

source.

2 Press the MONITOR [SLOT] button.

Slot 1 or 2 Input is selected as the surround monitor source.

3 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Surr

Patch page appears.

This page enables you to make the Slot Input to Surround Monitor Channel assignment.

4 Move the cursor to a patch parameter for which you want to change the

assignment, and rotate the Parameter wheel to select a slot channel to be

assigned to the Surround Monitor channel.

To assign no channels, select “–.” Set all unnecessary channels to “–.”

5 If necessary, move the cursor to the LEVEL parameter box, then use the

Parameter wheel to adjust the Slot Input levels simultaneously.

You can adjust the signal levels in the range of –96 dB to +12 dB .

6 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Sur-

round page appears.

In the SETTING section of the Surround page (see page 143), you can select a Slot Input to

be monitored.

7 Move the cursor to the SLOT 1 or 2 button in the SETTING section, then press

[ENTER] to select the desired monitoring Slot Input.

You can now monitor the selected Slot Input source via Surround Monitor.

Tip: You can make a surround source channel assignment for each Surround mode.

146 Chapter 11—Surround Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters 147

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters

12 Grouping Channels & Linking

Parameters

This chapter describes how to group faders or [ON] buttons for multiple channels and link

the EQ or compressor parameters for simultaneous operation.

Grouping & Linking

On the DM1000, you can group faders or [ON] buttons for multiple Input Channels or

multiple Output Channels (Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8) and link the EQ or compressor

parameters.

The following elements can be grouped or linked within Input Channels or Output Chan-

nels.

• Fader group

Input Channel or Output Channel faders can be grouped. There are eight Input Channel

Fader groups and four Output Channel Fader groups. When channel faders are grouped,

operating one of them enables you to control the level of the other grouped faders while

maintaining the relative level differences.

Also, the DM1000 features a Fader Group Master function that enables you to control the

level of all grouped channels using the Group Master level while maintaining the relative

level balance between channels.

• Mute group

Input Channel or Output Channel [ON] buttons can be grouped. There are eight Input

Channel mute groups and four Output Channel mute groups. When channel [ON] buttons

are grouped, pressing any one of them turns the [ON] buttons for all the grouped channels

on or off. A mute group can include On channels and Off channels at the same time, which

turn off or on respectively when you press any one of the grouped [ON] buttons.

Also, the DM1000 features a Mute Group Master function that enables you to mute

grouped channels using the Master Mute buttons.

• EQ Link

Input or Output Channel EQ parameters can be linked. There are four EQ links for Input

Channels and Output Channels respectively.

All channels in an EQ link share the same EQ parameter settings. When you change an EQ

parameter value for one of the linked channels, the change is applied to all other linked

channels.

• Compressor Link

Input or Output Channel compressor parameters can be linked. There are four compressor

links for Input Channels and Output Channels respectively.

All channels in a compressor link share the same compressor parameter settings. When you

change a compressor parameter value for one of the linked channels, the change is applied

to all other linked channels.

148 Chapter 12—Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups

Follow the steps below to group faders or [ON] buttons for Input Channels or Output

Channels (Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8).

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until one of the

pages that contains the desired group and channels appears.

-Fader1–32 page

-Fader33–48 page

These pages enable you to set Fader groups (A–H) for Input Channels 1–48.

-Out Fader page

This page enables you to set Fader groups (Q–T) for Bus Outs (1–8) and Aux Outs

(1–8).

-Mute1–32 page

-Mute33–48 page

These pages enable you to set Mute groups (I–P) for Input Channels 1–32 and 33–48

respectively.

-Out Mute page

This page enables you to set Mute groups (U–X) for Bus Outs (1–8) and Aux Outs (1–8).

• Fader1–32 page

• Mute1–32 page

Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups 149

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters

2 Press the up ( ) or down ( ) button to select a group.

3 Press the [SEL] button for a channel you wish to add to the group.

The selected channel is marked with “ ” and the channel is added to the group.

4 In the same way, press the [SEL] button for other channels you wish to add

to the group.

The relative level of the faders for the grouped channels is determined by the position of the

faders when the channels were added to the group.

The On/Off status of the grouped channels is determined by the [ON] button status when

the channels were added to the group.

5To turn a group on or off, move the corresponding button in the ENABLE

column, then press [ENTER].

When the group Enable button is turned off, the corresponding group is temporarily can-

celled.

6To use a fader group, operate one of the faders for the grouped channels.

Tip:

•If you add one channel from a pair to a group, the pair partner is automatically added to

the group.

•You can also select a channel on another layer by switching layers.

Note:

•If you wish to change the relative level balance between the grouped channels while this page

is displayed, ﬁrst turn off the Enable button or remove the channels for which you want to

change the level from the group.

•If other pages are displayed, press and hold down the [SEL] button for the desired channels

to temporarily remove them from the group, then change the level balance.

Example: Fader group C is selected.

Example: Input Channels 1–6, and 13–14 have been added to

Fader group C.

150 Chapter 12—Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

7To use a mute group, press one of the [ON] buttons for the grouped channels.

All channels in the group switch their on/off status.

Using Fader Group Master

The DM1000 features a Fader Group Master function that enables you to control the level of

all channels using the Group Master level while maintaining the relative balance between

channels, much like a VCA group on an analog mixing console. While this function is enabled,

channel fader operation does not affect channel levels in the corresponding Fader group.

1 After you perform Step 5 in “Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups” on

page 148, use the cursor buttons to select the INPUT FADER MASTER check

box or the OUTPUT FADER MASTER check box, then press [ENTER] to turn

on the Fader Group Master function.

2 When the Fader Master check box is checked, you can set channel levels of

the Fader groups in the Master column.

When the Master column is selected, repeatedly pressing the [ENTER] button turns the

Fader group on and off.

You can also make these settings in the In Master page or Out Master page, as shown below.

3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button repeatedly until the Group | In

Master or Group | Out Master page appears.

Note:

• While a mute group is enabled, you cannot turn a subset of the grouped channels on or off.

•If you wish to turn a subset of the grouped channels on or off, ﬁrst turn off the Enable button,

or remove the channels you wish to turn on or off from the group.

Using Fader Group Master 151

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters

4 Use the cursor buttons to select parameters, then use the Parameter wheel,

INC/DEC buttons, or [ENTER] button to set the parameters.

• INPUT/OUTPUT FADER MASTER....When this check box is checked, you can set the

master levels for the Fader groups. The result-

ant Channel level equals the corresponding

Channel fader level plus the Group Master

level.

• ALL NOMINAL............This button resets the master levels for all Fader groups to nom-

inal.

• ON/OFF.........................This turns each Input Fader group on or off. This function

works like a VCA mute on an analog mixing console.

• Faders ............................These faders adjust the master levels of the Fader groups. Fader

knobs are highlighted when faders are set to 0.0 dB. Press the

[ENTER] button to set the currently-selected fader to 0.0 dB.

You can also control the parameters from the channel strips on the control surface as

described below by using the User Assignable Layer of the Remote Layers. See page 272 for

information on the User Assignable Layer.

• Encoders........................The Encoders are not available.

• [AUTO] buttons...........These buttons are used to control the Fader Group Master

On/Off and the master level during Automix.

• [SEL] buttons ...............These buttons move the cursor on the In Master page or Out

Master page.

• [SOLO] buttons ...........These buttons turn the Solo function of each Fader group on

and off. You can monitor all the channels in each Fader group.

• Channel Faders ............The channel faders enable you to set the master level for each

Fader group.

152 Chapter 12—Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Using Mute Group Master

In addition to the Mute Group function that links the operation of channel [ON] buttons,

the DM1000 features a Mute Group Master function that enables you to mute grouped

channels using the Master Mute buttons in a manner similar to using a mute group on an

analog mixing console. While this function is enabled, the [ON] buttons for grouped chan-

nels will not be linked.

1 After you perform Step 5 in “Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups” on

page 148, use the cursor buttons to select the INPUT MUTE MASTER check

box or OUTPUT MUTE MASTER check box, then press [ENTER] to turn on

the Mute Group Master function.

2 When the Mute Master check box is checked, use the group MASTER MUTE

buttons to mute or unmute the groups.

If channels are muted via the Mute Master function, the channel [ON] button indicators

ﬂash. It is useful if you assign the MASTER MUTE buttons to USER DEFINED KEYS but-

tons.

Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters

Follow the steps below to link EQ or compressor parameters for Input Channels or Output

Channels (Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8). This function enables you to set EQ or compressor

parameters for multiple channels to the same values simultaneously.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until one of the

following pages appears.

-In EQ page

This page enables you to set EQ links (a–d) for Input Channels.

Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters 153

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters

-Out EQ page

This page enables you to set EQ links (e–h) for Bus Outs (1–8) and Aux Outs (1–8).

-In Comp page

This page enables you to set Compressor links (i–l) for Input Channels.

-Out Comp page

This page enables you to set Compressor links (m–p) for Bus Outs (1–8) and Aux Outs

(1–8).

154 Chapter 12—Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

2 Press the up ( ) or down ( ) cursor button to select a link to which you want

to add channels.

3 Press the [SEL] button for a channel you wish to add to the EQ or Compressor

link.

The selected channel is marked with “ ” and the channel is added to the link.

4 In the same way, press the [SEL] button for other channels you wish to add

to the link.

The EQ or compressor settings for the ﬁrst channel added to the link are applied to all sub-

sequently-added channels.

5 After all desired channels are added to the link, edit the EQ or compressor

parameters for one of the linked channels.

The edits for the EQ or compressor parameters are applied to the rest of the linked channels.

Tip:

•If you add one channel from a pair to a link, the pair partner is automatically added to the

link.

•You can also select a channel on another layer by switching layers.

Example: EQ link C for Input Channels is selected.

Example: Input Channels 1–4, 6, 9–10 and 14 have been

added to EQ link C.

Internal Effects 155

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Internal Effects

13 Internal Effects

This chapter describes how to use the DM1000’s internal effects processors.

About the Internal Effects

The DM1000 features four internal multi-effects processors that can be used via Aux Sends

or by inserting them into speciﬁc channels.

These effects processors offer numerous types of effects, including reverbs, delays, modu-

lation-based effects, combination effects, and multi-channel effects designed especially

for use with surround sound.

Processor inputs and outputs can be patched to various sources. For example, effects pro-

cessor inputs can be fed from the Aux Sends and output to Input Channels (effects

send/return). Effects processors can also be inserted into Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux

Outs, or the Stereo Out.

Effects processor 1 creates 1-in/2-out, 2-in/2-out, or multi-channel surround effects.

Effects processors 2 through 4 create 1-in/2-out or 2-in/2-out effects.

The DM1000 also features the Effects library, which contains 61 preset programs (including

Add-On Effects) and 67 user programs.

INPUT PATCH

AUX1-8

INSERT OUT

EFFECT1 OUT 1-2

EFFECT2 OUT 1-2

EFFECT3 OUT 1-2

EFFECT4 OUT 1-2

FX1 SEND

1-8

FX2 SEND

1-2

FX3 SEND

1-2

FX4 SEND

1-2

EFFECT 1

INPUT

OUTPUT

EFFECT 2

INPUT

OUTPUT

EFFECT 3

INPUT

OUTPUT

EFFECT 4

INPUT

OUTPUT

SELECT

156 Chapter 13—Internal Effects

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends

You can use effects processors via Aux Sends by patching effects processor inputs to Aux

Outs, and effects processor outputs to Input Channels.

1 Recall an effect program you wish to use.

See page 177 for more information on recalling effect programs.

2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the In

Patch | Effect page appears.

This page enables you to patch all inputs and outputs of Effects processors 1–4.

This page contains the following parameters:

A IN

These parameter boxes select the signals to be fed to the effects processors.

B OUT

These parameter boxes select the destination of the signals output from the effects pro-

cessors.

C FOLLOW SURROUND

When surround effects (see page 161) are recalled to Effects processor 1, this button

sorts the effect inputs and outputs displayed in the list according to the order speciﬁed

on the Setup | Surr Bus page (see page 130). If the recalled surround effects are compat-

ible with 5.1 Channel systems, the surround bus setting for 5.1 surround mode will be

used.

D button

This button recalls the FX1 Edit–FX4 Edit pages, which enable you to adjust the effect

parameters.

3To select a signal to be input to the effects processor, move the cursor to

the desired In parameter box, rotate the Parameter wheel to select a signal

from the following options, then press [ENTER].

• – ..................................... No assignment

• AUX1–8.........................Aux Outs 1–8

• INS CH1–48 .................Input Channel 1–48 Insert Out

• INS BUS1–8.................. Bus Out 1–8 Insert Out

• INS AUX1–8 ................. Aux Out 1–8 Insert Out

• INS ST-L & INS ST-R ..Stereo Out L & R Insert Out

1 23 4

Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends 157

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Internal Effects

• FX1-1–FX4-2 ................Other effects processor outputs

You cannot select outputs FX1–3 to FX1–8. In addition, you

cannot select the output of the effects processor you are cur-

rently using.

To use the internal effects processors via Aux Sends, select Aux 1–8 (in most cases).

You can patch a different signal to the other input of 2-in/2-out effect programs.

4To patch a signal output from the effects processor, move the cursor to the

desired OUT parameter box, rotate the Parameter wheel to select the signal

destination from the following options, then press [ENTER].

• – .....................................No assignment

• CH1–48 .........................Input Channels 1–48

• INS CH1–48..................Input Channel Insert In

• INS BUS1–8 ..................Bus Out 1–8 Insert In

• INS AUX1–8..................Aux Out 1–8 Insert In

• INS ST-L & INS ST-R...Stereo Out Insert In

• FX1-1–FX4-2 ................Other effects processor inputs

You cannot select the input of the effects processor you are cur-

rently using.

To use the internal effects processors via Aux Sends, select CH 1–48 (in most cases). The

channels you assign here will become the effects return channels.

You can patch a different channel to the other output of a 1-in/2-out or 2-in/2-out effect

program to create stereo effects.

5 Adjust the level of Aux Sends patched to the effects processor.

Refer to chapter 8 “Aux Sends” on page 93 for information on setting the Aux Sends.

6 Adjust the level, pan, and EQ of the Input Channels patched to the effect

outputs.

Tip:

•You can patch a signal to multiple effect inputs.

•Move the cursor to an IN parameter box and press the [ENTER] button. The Patch Select

window appears. This window enables you to select the input source quickly.

Tip:

•You can also use the Patch Select window to set the OUT parameter boxes, as explained in

Step 3.

• The number of inputs and outputs available for each effect varies depending on the type of

effect programs initially recalled.

Note: Yo u cannot select a channel as the destination of multiple effect signals. If you select a

channel that is already selected in another OUT parameter box, that OUT parameter box

switches its indicator to “–” (not assigned).

Note: Do not raise the level of the Aux Sends (patched to the effects processor) on the effects

return channels. Otherwise, the signal will return to the same channel, causing a signal loop

and possibly damaging your speakers.

Tip: Use the Master layer fader to adjust the ﬁnal Aux Send output level. At this time, you

can view the level on the Meter | Master page (see page 39).

Tip: To mix the effects sound returned via the Aux Sends with the original dry sound, set the

effect’s MIX BALANCE parameter to 100% (only the effects sound will be output).

158 Chapter 13—Internal Effects

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Inserting the Internal Effects into Channels

You can insert the internal effects into certain Input Channels or Output Channels (Bus

Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8, Stereo Out).

1 Select an internal Effects processor (1–4), then recall the desired effect pro-

grams.

2 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the Input Channel or Output

Channel into which you want to insert the selected effects.

3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the

/Ins/Dly | Insert page appears.

4 Select the effect insertion position using the INSERT button in the POSITION

section.

5 Move the cursor to the OUT parameter box in the INSERT section, then select

the inputs of the effects processor selected in Step 1.

• FX1-1 through FX1-8 .Inputs 1–8 of Internal Effects Processor 1

• FX2-1 & FX2-2 ............. Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2

• FX3-1 & FX3-2 ............. Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3

• FX4-1 & FX4-2 ............. Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4

6 Press [ENTER] to conﬁrm the setting.

7 Move the cursor to the IN parameter box in the INSERT section, select the

outputs of the effects processor selected in Step 5 and 6, then press [ENTER]

to conﬁrm the setting.

8 Move the cursor to the ON/OFF button in the INSERT section, then press

[ENTER] to turn on the button.

Effect insertion is now enabled.

Note: If effects are inserted in channels, you cannot use those effects via Aux Sends or insert

them into other channels.

Tip: Repeatedly pressing the STEREO [SEL] button toggles between the left and right Stereo

Out channels.

Tip:

•After inserting effects to channels, adjust the MIX BALANCE parameter for the effects,

according to the purpose and effects type.

•Move the cursor to an empty IN or OUT parameter box and press the [ENTER] button.

The Patch Select window appears, which enables you to quickly select available signal paths.

Editing Effects 159

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Internal Effects

Editing Effects

To edit effect programs recalled to the internal Effects processors 1–4, press the DISPLAY

ACCESS [EFFECT] button repeatedly until the Edit page for the effects processor you wish

to edit appears.

Effects processors 1–4 correspond to the following pages:

• Effects Processor 1.......FX1 Edit page

• Effects Processor 2.......FX2 Edit page

• Effects Processor 3.......FX3 Edit page

• Effects Processor 4.......FX4 Edit page

These Edit pages contain the following effect parameters.

A EFFECT NAME

This parameter displays the name of the effect program currently used by the effects

processor.

B TYPE

This parameter displays the type of effect program currently used by the effects proces-

sor. The I/O conﬁguration of the effect program is displayed below this parameter.

C button

Move the cursor to this parameter, then press [ENTER] to display the Library page for

the selected effects processor.

D button

Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to display the In Patch | Effect page,

which enables you to assign signals to the inputs and outputs of Effects processors 1–4.

E MIX BALANCE

This parameter knob enables you to set the balance between wet and dry signals. When

the parameter is set to 0%, only the dry signal is heard. When set to 100%, only the wet

signal is heard. Turn on the BYPASS button to bypass the currently-selected effects pro-

cessor.

F TEMPO

This section displays the parameters that appear only when a delay effect type or a mod-

ulation-based effect type is selected. These TEMPO parameters calculate and set the

delay time for delay effects, or the modulation frequency for modulation effects, relative

to the speciﬁed tempo and note length. Use these parameters along with the SYNC or

NOTE parameter located at the bottom of the display page.

160 Chapter 13—Internal Effects

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

When you turn on the SYNC parameter, the DM1000 recalculates the delay time or

modulation frequency based on the TEMPO parameter value (tempo) and the NOTE

parameter value (note). For example, if the TEMPO parameter is set to 120BPM and the

NOTE parameter is set to one eighth note, turning on the SYNC parameter sets the

delay time to 250 msec and the modulation frequency to 0.25 Hz.

• TEMPO ......................... This parameter control sets the TEMPO parameter value in

BPM.

• MIDI CLK..................... Turning on the MIDI CLK by moving the cursor to this button

and pressing [ENTER] updates the TEMPO data based on the

MIDI Clock information received at the speciﬁed MIDI Rx

port. (The TEMPO data is not updated if the MIDI Clock

tempo is outside the range of 25 to 300 BPM.)

• TAP TEMPO................. You can also specify the tempo by moving the cursor to this

button and double-clicking the [ENTER] button. The DM1000

calculates the tempo based on the time interval between your

two taps (clicks) on the [ENTER] button. (The TEMPO data is

not updated if the tap tempo is outside the range of 25 to

300 BPM.)

G Meters

These meters indicate the input or output levels of the currently-selected effects proces-

sor. Select the IN button or OUT button to display the input levels or output levels

respectively. There are eight meters when Effects processor 1 is selected; two when

Effects processors 2–4 are selected.

Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or

press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to adjust the setting. You can store the edited settings as

a new program in the Effects library (see page 177).

Tip:

•If you turn on the SYNC parameter and edit the TEMPO or NOTE parameter, the

DM1000 recalculates the delay time or modulation frequency.

•If you turn on the SYNC parameter and edit the delay time or modulation frequency,

the NOTE parameter value changes based on the TEMPO parameter setting.

Tip: If the Freeze effect is selected, the TEMPO section displays the record and playback

buttons for using the effect, the recording data condition, and a progress bar that indicates

the current status.

Tip: You can also view the input and output levels of the effects processors on the Meter |

Effect 1–4 pages (see page 39).

Note: Yo u cannot change the effects type on this page. To change the effects type, recall a

program that uses the desired effects type from the Effects library.

About Surround Effects 161

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Internal Effects

About Surround Effects

The effects types available for Effects processor 1 include surround effects that support

5.1-channel (AUTO PAN 5.1, CHORUS 5.1, etc.). Surround effects are multi-channel

effects that feature up to six inputs and six outputs, and enable you to create the effect of the

sound image moving or circling back and forth and left to right, and to process up to six

channel input signals simultaneously.

The DM1000 Surround mode setting does not affect the surround effects. For example,

even if the DM1000 is in Stereo Surround mode, you can recall a surround effect program

and use its 6-channel inputs and outputs. However, to monitor the effect signals correctly,

you must patch the effect outputs to Input Channels and monitor the signals using the Sur-

round Monitor function (see page 136).

About Add-On Effects

Installing optional Add-On Effects packages enables you to expand your effects selection

beyond the internal effects. Add-On Effects will be stored in and recalled from preset #53

and the subsequent preset programs. You can also store edited effects in user program #62

and the subsequent user programs. For more information on Add-On Effects, refer to the

installation guide that is included in your Add-On Effects packages.

Note:

•Only Effects processor 1 enables you to recall Surround effects settings.

•Recalling certain surround effects into Effects processor 1 will disable Effects processors 2–4.

162 Chapter 13—Internal Effects

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

About Plug-Ins

If you installed a mini-YGDAI card that supports the Effects function into Slot 1 or 2, you

can use plug-in effects in addition to the internal effects processors.

You can patch Bus signals or channel insert outs to the plug-in input. The plug-in output

can be patched to Input Channels or channel insert ins.

To use the plug-in effects, press the [EFFECT] button repeatedly until the Effect | P-IN Edit1

or P-IN Edit 2 page appears. If you installed a mini-YGDAI card in Slot 1, use the P-IN Edit1

page to set the plug-in. If you installed the card in Slot 2, use the P-IN Edit2 page.

For details on using plug-ins, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the plug-in card.

As of July 2004, the DM1000 supports the following plug-in cards. Visit the Yamaha web site

for the latest information on compatible plug-in cards.

• Waves............................. Y56K

The Y56K card setting is stored in memory in the card when you store scenes, and is recalled

at the time of scene recall. The setting is not stored in a scene memory on the DM1000.

Therefore, the setting does not support the scene memory’s Global Paste, Sort, and Auto

Update functions.

Note: The Y56K card supports scenes #1-96. If you store or recall a scene # 97 or subsequent

scenes, the Y56K card setting will not respond. (In this case, a warning message appears.)

Scene Memories 163

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Scene Memories

14 Scene Memories

This chapter describes Scene memories, which store DM1000 mix and effects settings.

About Scene Memories

Scene memories enable you to store a snapshot of DM1000 channel mix settings and inter-

nal effects processor settings as a “Scene” in a special memory area.

There are 99 Scene memories, and you can recall any Scene using the display pages or the

controls on the top panel.

What is Stored in a Scene?

The following parameter settings are stored in a Scene:

Tip:

•You can also recall Scenes by replaying Automixes (see page 187) or by transmitting Program

Changes from external MIDI devices (see page 249).

•You can back up Scene memories to external MIDI devices by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see

page 256).

Scene Parameters

Mix parameters

All channel faders

Channel to Aux Out 1–8 Send levels

Aux Out 1–8 & Bus Out 1–8 levels

All channel [ON] button settings

All channel Phase & Delay settings

All channel Attenuator settings

All channel Compressor settings

Input Channel Gate settings

All channel EQ settings

All channel Pan settings

All channel routings

Fader groups, Mute groups, Fader group Masters, Mute

group Masters, EQ links, and Compressor links

All channel pair settings

Effects parameters

Effect programs recalled for Effects processors 1–4 and their

parameter settings

Remote Layer

Fader, Encoder and [ON] button status (only when Remote

Control Target is set to USER DEFINED)

Scene settings

Scene titles and Fade Time settings

Input Patching

Input Patch library numbers

Output Patching

Output Patch library numbers

Note:

•Scenes take a snapshot of Input and Output Patch library numbers that are in use at the

time the Scene is stored, but exclude current (edited) Input and Output patching.

•If you do not store the edited Input and Output patching to the libraries, recalling a Scene

may change the current patching.

164 Chapter 14—Scene Memories

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

About Scene Numbers

Scene memories are numbered with #U or from #0 through #99. You can store Scenes in

Scene memories #1–99. When you recall a Scene, the Scene memory number (Ud, 00–99)

appears on the Scene memory display and at the top of the display page.

Scene memory #0 (#00 on the Scene memory display) is a special read-only memory

that contains the default settings of all mix parameters. To reset all mix parameters on

the DM1000 to their initial or default values, recall Scene memory #0.

Also, the Initial Data Nominal check box on the Setup | Prefer1 page (see page 266) enables

you to specify whether Input Channel faders are set to either 0 dB or –∞ dB when Scene

memory #0 is recalled.

Scene memory #U (“Ud” on the Scene memory display) is a special read-only memory

that contains the mix settings immediately before you most recently recalled or stored

a Scene. To undo or redo Scene memory recall and store operations, recall Scene memory

#U.

When you adjust parameters after recalling a Scene, the Edit indicators appear (the dot in

the Scene memory display and “EDIT” at the top of the display), indicating that the mix set-

tings no longer match those of the Scene that was most recently recalled. The contents of

the Edit Buffer (where the current mix settings are stored) are retained while the DM1000

is turned off. This allows the DM1000 to restore the edited mix settings when you turn on

the power.

The contents of recalled Scene memory

#2 match the current settings on the

DM1000, and the Edit indicator remains

off.

The parameters of recalled Scene memory #2

were edited. Therefore, the Edit indicators

appear, indicating that the current settings on

the DM1000 do not match Scene memory #2.

Scene memory display

Display

Dot

Edit indicator

Storing and Recalling Scenes 165

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Scene Memories

Storing and Recalling Scenes

You can store and recall Scenes by pressing the buttons on the top panel or using the dedi-

cated Scene memory page on the display.

Storing and Recalling Scenes Using the SCENE MEMORY

Buttons

You can use the SCENE MEMORY buttons to store and recall Scenes.

1 Adjust the mix parameters on the DM1000 to the conditions you wish to

store as a Scene.

2 Press the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] or Down [ ] buttons to select a Scene

memory number.

If you select a Scene memory other than the currently-recalled Scene, its number ﬂashes on

the Scene memory display.

Scene memories #U (“Ud”) and #0 (“00”) are special read-only memories, to which you

cannot store Scenes. Also, you cannot store Scenes to write-protected Scene memories (see

page 166).

3 Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] button.

The Title Edit window appears, which enables you to name the Scene to be stored.

4 Enter the title, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER].

The Title Edit window closes and the current Scene is stored to the selected Scene memory.

5To recall a Scene, press the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] or Down [ ] buttons to

select a Scene memory number, then press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL]

button.

Note:

• When you store Scenes, make sure that there are no settings in the Edit Buffer that you do

not want to store. Make sure that no settings, especially faders, have been adjusted uninten-

tionally.

•If you are not sure of the Edit Buffer’s contents, recall the last Scene, make the adjustments

you want, then store the Scene. You may wish to store the current Scene to an unused Scene

memory, just in case.

Tip: You can disable this window by turning the Store Conﬁrmation parameter to Off on the

Setup | Prefer1 page (see page 266). In this case, the stored Scene will have the same name as

the one recalled most-recently.

Tip: If you turn the Recall Conﬁrmation parameter to On on the Setup | Prefer1 page, a Scene

recall conﬁrmation window for Scene recalls appears before the Scene is recalled (see page 266).

166

Chapter 14—Scene Memories

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Storing and Recalling Scenes Using the Scene Memory Page

On the Scene Memory page, you can store, recall, write-protect, delete, and edit the titles of

Scenes.

1 Adjust the mix parameters on the DM1000 to the conditions you wish to

store as a Scene.

2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | Scene

page appears.

3 Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select a

Scene memory, move the cursor to one of the following buttons, then press

[ENTER].

The stored Scene memory titles are displayed. The DM1000 displays the message “No

Data!” for empty Scene memories.

TITLE EDIT

Select this button to display the Title Edit window, which enables you to edit a selected

Scene title.

RECALL

This button recalls the contents of the selected Scene memory.

STORE

This button stores the current Scene to the selected Scene memory. By default, a conﬁr-

mation window appears before you store the Scene.

CLEAR

This button deletes the contents of the selected Scene memory.

PROTECT ON/OFF

This button switches on and off the write-protection of the contents of the selected

Scene memory. A padlock icon ( ) appears next to the title of a Scene memory that is

write-protected.

PATCH LINK INPUT

This indicates the Input Patch library number that is linked to each scene. When you

store a scene, the number of the input patch that was most recently recalled or stored

will automatically be linked with that scene. When you recall that scene, this library

number will also be automatically recalled. You can also move the cursor to the param-

eter boxes and change the library numbers.

Auto Scene Memory Update

167

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Scene Memories

PATCH LINK OUTPUT

This indicates the Output Patch library number that is linked to each scene. When you

store a scene, the number of the output patch that was most recently recalled or stored

will automatically be linked with that scene. When you recall that scene, this library

number will also be automatically recalled. You can also move the cursor to the param-

eter boxes and change the library numbers.

Auto Scene Memory Update

If the Scene MEM Auto Update check box on the Setup | Prefer1 page (see page 266) is

turned on, parameter edits are stored automatically in a

Shadow memory

, which is avail-

able for each Scene. This is called the

Auto Update function

If the Auto Update function is enabled, parameter edits made after the Scene was recalled

are stored in the Scene’s Shadow memory. When you again recall the Scene, the contents of

the Original and Shadow memories are recalled alternately.

Therefore,

even after you recall the Original Scene memory, you can recall the edited

version from Shadow memory to restore the most recent edits

When recalling Original and Shadow memories, you can easily tell which is currently active

by viewing the Edit indicators.

If a Shadow memory is recalled, the edited version is stored when you store the Scene. (The

contents of the Original and Shadow memories then become identical.) If you recall a Scene

by replaying an Automix or while the Automix function is enabled, the contents of the Orig-

inal memory are always recalled, even if the Auto Update function is enabled.

Scene memory display

Display

Dot

Edit indicator

Original Scene Shadow memory

168 Chapter 14—Scene Memories

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Fading Scenes

You can specify the time it takes the Input and Output Channel faders to move to their new

positions when a Scene is recalled. This is called Fade Time, and it can be set for each chan-

nel in the range of 00.0 through 30.0 seconds (in 0.1 second steps). You can set the Fade

Time for each Scene individually or for all Scenes globally.

Fading Input Channels

To set the Fade Time for Input Channels 1–48, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] but-

ton repeatedly until the Scene | In Fade page appears. Move the cursor to the desired chan-

nel parameter box, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to

modify the Fade Time setting.

A Global Fade Time

When this check box is checked, a Scene is recalled using the currently-speciﬁed Fade

Time. (The Fade Time setting stored in the recalled Scene is temporarily ignored.) This

check box setting works in unison with the Out Fade page.

B ALL INPUT CLEAR

This button resets all channel Fade Times on the page to 00.0 second.

C INPUT CH1–48

These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for each Input Channel in the range

of 00.0 through 30.0 seconds. The Fade Time setting for one channel in a pair works in

unison with its partner.

Tip:

•After you set the Fade Time, if you operate a certain fader while recalling a Scene, the fader’s

Fade Time setting is ignored.

•You can copy the currently-selected Input Channel Fade Time setting to all Input Channels

by double-clicking the [ENTER] button. This is convenient when you wish to set the Fade

Time for all channels simultaneously.

Fading Scenes 169

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Scene Memories

Fading Output Channels

To set the Fade Time for the Output Channels (Stereo Out, Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8),

press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | Out Fade page

appears.

The basic operation is the same as on the In Fade page.

A BUS1–8

These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for each Bus Out (1–8) in the range

of 00.0 through 30.0 seconds.

B AUX1–8

These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for Aux Outs 1–8.

C STEREO

This parameter enables you to set the Fade Time for the Stereo Out.

D INPUT MASTER A–H

These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for Input Fader Group Master A–H.

E OUTPUT MASTER Q–T

These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for Output Fader Group Master Q–T.

Tip: You can copy the currently-selected Output Channel Fade Time setting to all Output

Channels by double-clicking the [ENTER] button.

170 Chapter 14—Scene Memories

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Recalling Scenes Safely

When a Scene is recalled, all mix parameters are set accordingly. However, in some situa-

tions, you can retain the current settings of certain parameters on certain channels by

using the Recall Safe function. You can set the Recall Safe function parameters for each

Scene individually or for all Scenes globally.

To set the Recall Safe function, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly

until the Scene | Rcl Safe page appears.

A Global Recall Safe

When this check box is checked, Recall Safe settings stored in Scene memories are

ignored and the current settings are retained.

B SAFE

This parameter enables or disables the Recall Safe function.

C MODE

The following MODE buttons determine which Safe channel parameters will remain

unaffected by Scene recalls. The MODE buttons correspond to the following parame-

ters:

• ALL ................................All parameters

• FADER........................... Channel faders

• ON.................................. Channel On/Off parameters

• PA N ................................ Channel Pan parameters, Stereo Out balance

• EQ .................................. Channel EQ parameters

• COMP............................ Channel Comp parameters

• GATE .............................Channel Gate parameters

• AUX ............................... Channel Aux Send levels, Pre/Post

• AUX ON ........................ Aux Send On/Off parameters

• DELAY........................... Channel Delay parameters

• ROUTING ....................Channel Routing parameters

D RECALL SAFE CHANNEL section

This section enables you to select which channels will remain unaffected by Scene

recalls, including Input Channels 1–48, Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8, Stereo Out, each

Group Master, internal effects, USER DEFINED Remote layers, HA (AD8HR/AD824),

and plug-in effects. The Recall Safe function is effective on channels and functions for

which the buttons are turned on.

Tip: The ALL button is mutually exclusive of the other buttons.

Sorting Scenes 171

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Scene Memories

Sorting Scenes

You can sort Scenes in Scene memories.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | Sort

page appears.

2 Move the cursor to the SOURCE list (1) in the left column, and rotate the

Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the Scene mem-

ory you wish to move.

3 Move the cursor to the DESTINATION list (

2) in the right column, and rotate

the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the position

to which you want to move the source Scene memory.

4 Press [ENTER] to move the source Scene memory to the speciﬁed destina-

tion.

The Scene memory numbers are updated accordingly.

Copying and Pasting a Scene (Global Paste)

Any channel or parameter settings for the current scene can be copied and pasted into one

or more scenes. This function is useful when you want to apply edited parameter settings in

the current scene to other scenes.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Paste SRC

page appears.

1 2

172 Chapter 14—Scene Memories

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

2 Use the cursor buttons, [SEL] buttons, or Parameter wheel to select the chan-

nel category, then use the [ENTER] button or the INC/DEC buttons to select

the copy source channel.

The number of the source channel is highlighted.

You can also select Group Masters, internal Effects, a User Deﬁned Remote layer, or HA

(AD8HR/AD824) as copy sources.

3 Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the copy source param-

eter, then press the [ENTER] button.

4 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Paste DST

page appears.

5 Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the destination

scene(s).

Scenes speciﬁed between FROM and TO (inclusive) become the paste destination. You can

paste up to 10 scenes at a time.

6 Use the cursor buttons to select the PASTE button, then use the [ENTER] but-

ton to paste the settings.

You cannot paste the settings to write-protected scenes.

To restore the previous settings that existed before the paste operation, click the UNDO

button, then press [Enter]. However, if the settings in the scene are changed after the paste

operation (such as by saving, clearing, or sorting the scene, or receiving scene data via MIDI

Bulk Dump), the UNDO function is disabled. Also, note that you will not be able to undo

the operation after you turn off the power to the console.

Libraries 173

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Libraries

15 Libraries

This chapter describes the DM1000’s various libraries.

About the Libraries

The DM1000 features nine libraries that enable you to store Channel, Input Patch, Output

Patch, Effects, and other data. You can also quickly recall this data from the libraries to

restore previous parameter values.

The DM1000 offers the following libraries:

•Channel Library

•Input Patch Library

•Output Patch Library

• Effects Library

•Bus to Stereo Library

• Gate Library

•Compressor Library

• EQ Library

•Surround Monitor Library

General Library Operation

Most library functions are the same for each library.

1 Use the buttons on the top panel to locate the desired library pages.

The procedure for locating library pages varies depending on the library. Refer to the latter

part of this chapter for more information on how to display the desired library page.

The example below assumes you have located the Input Patch library page.

The library memory title list is displayed in the middle of the page. The message “No Data!”

appears in the title column of empty library memories.

Tip:

•You can store library data to a computer hard disk using the included Studio Manager soft-

ware. Be sure to back up your important data.

•You can also store library data to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data ﬁler, by

using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 256).

174 Chapter 15—Libraries

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

An “” icon is displayed next to the name of read-only preset memories. You cannot store,

clear, or edit the titles of these memories.

Memories #0 and #U are special read-only memories. Recall memory #0 to reset the param-

eter settings to their initial values. Recall #U to undo memory recall and store operations.

2 Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the

desired memory.

The selected memory appears inside the dotted box.

3 Move the cursor to one of the following function buttons, then press

[ENTER].

A TITLE EDIT

This button displays the Title Edit window, which enables you to edit the title of the

selected memory. Move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER] to conﬁrm

the edited title. See page 32 for more information on entering characters.

B RECALL

This button recalls the contents of the selected library memory. If you turn on the Recall

Conﬁrmation parameter on the Setup | Prefer1 page, the DM1000 displays a memory

recall conﬁrmation window.

C STORE

This button stores the settings to the selected memory. Before you store the settings, you

can enter or edit the title using the Title Edit window. See page 32 for more information

on entering characters.

You can disable the Title Edit window by turning off the Store Conﬁrmation parameter

on the Setup | Prefer1 page. If you bypass the Edit Title window, the name “New Data”

will be used as a title for the Scene memory.

D CLEAR

This button deletes the contents of the selected memory. After you press [ENTER], the

DM1000 displays a conﬁrmation window. To execute the delete operation, move the

cursor to the OK button in the conﬁrmation window, then press [ENTER].

Note: If you select a memory that already contains settings and execute the delete opera-

tion, the settings will be lost. Make sure that you do not accidentally delete important set-

tings.

Using Libraries 175

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Libraries

Using Libraries

Channel Library

Channel library enables you to store and recall Input Channel and Output Channel param-

eter settings. The library contains two preset memories and 127 user (readable & writable)

memories.

You can recall only the settings for the currently-selected channels from the Channel library.

For example, you can recall Input Channel settings to Input Channels, but not to Bus Outs,

Aux Sends, or Stereo Out, with the exception that memories #0 and #1 can be recalled to

any channels.

Follow the steps below to use the Channel library.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then press the [F3] button.

The View | Library page appears.

A SEL CH

This parameter indicates the currently-selected channel.

B CURRENT CONFIGURATION section

If the currently-selected channel is an Input Channel, its Surround mode and Aux con-

ﬁguration information is displayed here.

C Level meters

These meters indicate the levels of the currently-selected channel and the available part-

ner.

D STORED FROM

This parameter indicates the channel for which the settings were originally stored in the

selected library memory. If the currently-selected library memory contains Input Chan-

nel settings, its Surround mode and Aux pairing information are also displayed below

this parameter.

2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then press the [SEL] buttons to select

channels.

For details on the Store and Recall functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 173.

If the selected memory’s channel type does not match the type of the destination channel,

an alarm mark ( ) and the word “CONFLICT” appear next to the STORED FROM

parameter. These alarms indicate that you tried to recall unrecallable channel settings to the

currently-selected channel.

176 Chapter 15—Libraries

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

The alarm indicators also appear when the Surround mode, Aux pair, and other non-chan-

nel parameter settings originally stored in the memory do not match those for the destina-

tion channel. However, if the channel type of the memory and that of the destination

channel match, you can recall the settings even with the alarm indicators displayed. (For

unmatched parameter settings, the DM1000 will use the settings in the memory that is to

be recalled.)

The following preset memories are available for the Channel library.

Input Patch Library

The Input Patch library enables you to store and recall all Input Patch settings. The library

contains one preset memory and 32 user (readable & writable) memories.

To access the Input Patch library, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button

repeatedly until the In Patch | Library page appears. For details on storing and recalling

memories, see “General Library Operation” on page 173.

Input Patch preset memory #0 contains the following settings:

No. Preset Name Description

Reset (–∞ dB)

This preset memory resets all parameters of the currently-selected channel

to their initial values and sets the channel fader level to (–∞ dB).

Reset (0 dB)

This preset memory resets all parameters of the currently-selected channel

to their initial values and sets the channel fader level to 0 dB (i.e., nominal).

Input Channels 1–16

INPUT connectors 1–16

Input Channels 17–24

Channels 1–8 of Slot 1

Input Channels 25–32

Channels 1–8 of Slot 2

Input Channels 33–40

Internal Effects Processor 1–4 Outputs 1 & 2

Input Channels 41–44

2TRD1 & D2

Input Channels 45–48

OMNI IN connectors 1–4

Using Libraries 177

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Libraries

Output Patch Library

The Output Patch library enables you to store and recall all Output Patch settings. The

library contains one preset memory and 32 user (readable & writable) memories.

To access the Output Patch library, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button

repeatedly until the Out Patch | Library page appears.

For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library Operation” on

page 173.

The Output Patch preset memory #0 contains the following settings:

Effects Library

The Effects library enables you to store and recall Effects processor 1–4 programs. The

library contains 61 preset programs (including Add-On Effects) and 67 user (readable &

writable) programs.

To store and recall settings to and from the library, you must locate the corresponding

Effects processor’s page.

To access the Effects library, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [EFFECT] button repeatedly until

the library page for the desired Effects processor appears.

OMNI OUT connectors 1–8

Aux Outs 1–8

OMNI OUT connectors 9–10

Stereo Out L & R

OMNI OUT connectors 11–12

Control Room Monitor L & R

Channels 1–8 of Slot 1

BUS1–BUS8

Channels 9–16 of Slot 1

BUS1–BUS8

Channels 1–8 of Slot 2

BUS1–BUS8

Channels 9–16 of Slot 2

BUS1–BUS8

2TR OUT DIGITAL1 (L)

Stereo Out L

2TR OUT DIGITAL1 (R)

Stereo Out R

2TR OUT DIGITAL2 (L)

Stereo Out L

2TR OUT DIGITAL2 (R)

Stereo Out R

Note:

• The Effects library is shared by Effects processors 1–4. However, only Effects processor 1

enables storing and recalling Surround effects settings.

•Certain effects type settings recalled to Effects processor 1 disable Effects processors 2–4.

178 Chapter 15—Libraries

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Each Effects processor features the library pages listed below:

• Internal Effects Processor 1 Library ........... FX1 Lib page

• Internal Effects Processor 2 Library ........... FX2 Lib page

• Internal Effects Processor 3 Library ........... FX3 Lib page

• Internal Effects Processor 4 Library ........... FX4 Lib page

A EFFECT NAME

This parameter displays the name of the Effects program currently used by the Effects

processor.

B TYPE

This parameter displays the effects type currently used by the Effects processor. The

number of input and output channels for the currently-used effects appears below the

TYPE parameter.

Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to display the Effect | FX1 Edit, FX2

Edit, FX3 Edit, or FX4 Edit page to adjust the Effects parameters.

Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to display the In Patch | Effect page

to assign the input and output signals of Effects processors 1–4.

E Level meters

These meters indicate the input or output levels of the currently-selected Effects proces-

sor. Select the IN button or OUT button to display the input levels or output levels

respectively.

For details on storing and recalling programs, see “General Library Operation” on

page 173.

The following tables list the preset effects programs in the Effects library:

• Reverbs

No. Preset Name Type Description

Reverb Hall

REVERB HALL Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate

Reverb Room

REVERB ROOM Room reverberation simulation with gate

Reverb Stage

REVERB STAGE Reverb designed for vocals, with gate

Reverb Plate

REVERB PLATE Plate reverb simulation with gate

Early Ref.

EARLY REF. Early reﬂections without the subsequent reverb

Gate Reverb

GATE REVERB Gated early reﬂections

Reverse Gate

REVERSE GATE Gated reverse early reﬂections

Using Libraries 179

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Libraries

• Delays

• Modulation-based Effects

• Guitar Effects

• Dynamic Effects

• Combination Effects

No. Preset Name Type Description

Mono Delay

MONO DELAY Simple mono delay

Stereo Delay

STEREO DELAY Simple stereo delay

Mod.delay

MOD.DELAY Simple repeat delay with modulation

Delay LCR

DELAY LCR 3-tap (left, center, right) delay

Echo

ECHO Stereo delay with crossed left/right feedback

No. Preset Name Type Description

Chorus

CHORUS Chorus

Flange

FLANGE Flanger

Symphonic

SYMPHONIC

Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and

more complex modulation than normal chorus

Phaser

PHASER 16-stage stereo phase shifter

Auto Pan

AUTO PAN Auto-panner

TREMOLO

TREMOLO Tremolo

HQ.Pitch

HQ.PITCH Mono pitch shifter, producing stable results

Dual Pitch

DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shifter

Rotary

ROTARY Rotary speaker simulation

Ring Mod.

RING MOD. Ring modulator

Mod.Filter

MOD.FILTER Modulated ﬁlter

No. Preset Name Type Description

Distortion

DISTORTION Distortion

Amp Simulate

AMP SIMULATE Guitar amp simulation

No. Preset Name Type Description

Dyna.Filter

DYNA.FILTER Dynamically controlled ﬁlter

Dyna.Flange

DYNA.FLANGE Dynamically controlled ﬂanger

Dyna.Phaser

DYNA.PHASER Dynamically controlled phase shifter

No. Preset Name Type Description

Rev+Chorus

REV+CHORUS Reverb and chorus in parallel

Rev->Chorus

REV->CHORUS Reverb and chorus in series

Rev+Flange

REV+FLANGE Reverb and ﬂanger in parallel

Rev->Flange

REV->FLANGE Reverb and ﬂanger in series

Rev+Sympho.

REV+SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in parallel

Rev->Sympho.

REV->SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in series

Rev->Pan

REV->PAN Reverb and auto-pan in series

Delay+ER.

DELAY+ER. Delay and early reﬂections in parallel

Delay->ER.

DELAY->ER. Delay and early reﬂections in series

Delay+Rev

DELAY+REV Delay and reverb in parallel

Delay->Rev

DELAY->REV Delay and reverb in series

Dist->Delay

DIST->DELAY Distortion and delay in series

180 Chapter 15—Libraries

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

• Others

• Add-On Effects

3. These preset programs are dedicated to Add-On Effects. The numbers of effects programs that do not

have Add-On Effects installed are grayed out and cannot be used. For more information on Add-On

Effects, refer to “About Add-On Effects” on page 161.

No. Preset Name Type Description

Multi.Filter

MULTI.FILTER 3-band parallel ﬁlter (24 dB/octave)

Freeze

FREEZE Simple sampler

Stereo Reverb

ST REVERB Stereo reverb

Reverb 5.1

REVERB 5.1 6-channel reverb for 5.1 surround

1. These effects can be recalled only to Effects processor #1.

Octa Reverb

OCTA REVERB

2. If these effects types are recalled to Effects processor #1, Effects processors #2 through #4 are disabled.

8-channel reverb

Auto Pan 5.1

AUTO PAN 5.1 6-channel auto pan for 5.1 surround

Chorus 5.1

CHORUS 5.1 6-channel chorus for 5.1 surround

Flange 5.1

FLANGE 5.1 6-channel ﬂanger for 5.1 surround

Sympho. 5.1

SYMPHO. 5.1 6-channel symphonic effect for 5.1 surround

M. Band Dyna.

M. BAND DYNA. Multi-band dynamics processor

Comp 5.1

COMP 5.1

Multi-band compressor for 5.1 surround

Compand 5.1

COMPAND 5.1

Multi-band compander for 5.1 surround

No. Preset Name Type Description

Comp276

COMP276

—

Comp276S

COMP276S

Comp260

COMP260

Comp260S

COMP260S

Equalizer601

EQUALIZER601

OpenDeck

OPENDECK

REV-X Hall

REV-X HALL

REV-X Room

REV-X ROOM

REV-X Plate

REV-X PLATE

Note:

•Effects that include “5.1” in the names are multi-channel Surround effects that support 5.1

channels. These effects types are most effective when 6-channel outputs are connected to a

5.1-channel system.

•If REVERB 5.1, OCTA REVERB, COMP 5.1, or COMPAND 5.1 are recalled to Effects pro-

cessor #1, Effects processors #2 through #4 are disabled.

Using Libraries 181

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Libraries

Bus to Stereo Library

You can store Bus to Stereo settings (levels and panpots of signals routed from Bus Outs 1–8

to the Stereo Bus). The library contains one preset memory and 32 user (readable & writ-

able) memories.

To access the Bus to Stereo library, press the SELECTED CHANNEL [DISPLAY] button

repeatedly until the Routing | Library page appears.

A CURRENT CONFIGURATION section

Bus Out (1–8) pairing information for the current conﬁguration is displayed here.

B LIBRARY CONFIGURATION box

Bus Out pairing information for the conﬁguration stored in the currently-selected

memory is displayed here. When the current conﬁguration and the conﬁguration in the

selected memory do not match, the word “CONFLICT” appears in the LIBRARY CON-

FIGURATION box.

For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library Operation” on

page 173.

Gate Library

The Gate library enables you to store and recall Input Channel gate settings. The library

contains four preset memories and 124 user (readable & writable) memories.

Follow the steps below to use the Gate library.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then press the [F2] button.

The Dynamics | Gate Lib page appears.

182 Chapter 15—Libraries

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

A CURRENT TYPE

This parameter displays the currently-selected channel gate type (Gate or Ducking).

B CURRENT CURVE

This graph displays the current channel gate curve.

C GR meters

These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being applied by the gate, and the

post-gate levels of the currently-selected channel and its available pair partner.

D Type & Curve section

The type (Gate or Ducking) and curve of the currently-selected memory is displayed

here.

2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then press the [SEL] buttons to select

channels.

You can now store the selected channel gate settings or recall the gate library memories to

channels. For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library Operation”

on page 173.

The following table lists the preset memories in the Gate library:

Compressor Library

This library enables you to store and recall settings for the compressors on Input Channels,

Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8, and Stereo Out. The library contains 36 preset memories and

92 user (readable & writable) memories.

Follow the steps below to use the Compressor library.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then press the [F4] button.

The Dynamics | Comp Lib page appears.

Tip: If you selected an Aux Out (1–8), Bus Out (1–8), or Stereo Out that does not feature

a gate, the DM1000 indicates “XXX HAS NO GATE!” (in which XXX represents a signal

name).

No. Preset Name Type Description

Gate

GATE Gate template

Ducking

DUCKING Ducking template

A. Dr. BD

GATE Gate preset for use with acoustic bass drums

A. Dr. SN

GATE Gate preset for use with acoustic snare drums

Using Libraries 183

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Libraries

A CURRENT TYPE

This parameter displays the currently-selected channel comp type (Compressor,

Expander, Compander Soft, Compander Hard).

B CURRENT CURVE

This graph displays the current compressor curve.

C GR meters

These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being applied by the compressor,

and the post-comp levels of the currently-selected channel and its available pair partner.

D Type & Curve section

The type and curve of the currently-selected memory is displayed here.

2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then press the [SEL] buttons to select

channels.

You can now store the selected channel comp settings and recall the compressor library

memories to channels. For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library

Operation” on page 173.

The following table lists the preset memories in the Compressor library:

No. Preset Name Type Description

Comp

COMP

Compressor for reducing the overall volume level. Use

it on the stereo output during mixdown, or with paired

Input or Output Channels.

Expand

EXPAND Expander template.

Compander (H)

COMPAND-H Hard-kneed compressor template.

Compander (S)

COMPAND-S Soft-kneed compressor template.

A. Dr. BD

COMP Compressor for use with acoustic bass drum.

A. Dr. BD

COMPAND-H

Hard-kneed compander for use with acoustic bass

drum.

A. Dr. SN

COMP Compressor for use with acoustic snare drum.

A. Dr. SN

EXPAND Expander for use with acoustic snare drum.

A. Dr. SN

COMPAND-S

Soft-kneed compander for use with acoustic snare

drum.

A. Dr. Tom

EXPAND

Expander for use with acoustic tom toms, which auto-

matically reduces the volume when the tom toms are

not played, improving mic separation.

A. Dr. OverTop

COMPAND-S

Soft-kneed compander for emphasizing the attack and

ambience of cymbals recorded with overhead mics. It

automatically reduces the volume when the cymbals

are not played, improving mic separation.

E. B. Finger

COMP

Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a ﬁn-

ger-picked electric bass guitar.

E. B. Slap

COMP

Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a

slapped electric bass guitar.

Syn. Bass

COMP

Compressor for controlling or emphasizing the level of

a synth bass.

Piano1

COMP Compressor for brightening the tonal color of a piano.

Piano2

COMP

A variation on preset 15, using a deep threshold to

change the overall attack and level.

E. Guitar

COMP

Compressor for electric guitar “cutting” or arpeg-

gio-style backing. The sound color can be varied by

playing different styles.

A. Guitar

COMP

Compressor for acoustic guitar “stroke” or arpeg-

gio-style backing.

Strings1

COMP Compressor for use with strings.

Strings2

COMP A variation on preset 19, intended for violas or cellos.

184 Chapter 15—Libraries

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

EQ Library

This library enables you to store and recall EQ settings for Input Channels, Bus Outs 1–8,

Aux Outs 1–8, and Stereo Out. The library contains 40 preset memories and 160 user (read-

able & writable) memories.

Follow the steps below to use the EQ library.

1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to

display the EQ | EQ Library page.

Strings3

COMP

A variation on preset 20, intended for string instru-

ments with a very low range, such as cellos or contra-

bass.

BrassSection

COMP

Compressor for brass sounds with a fast and strong

attack.

Syn. Pad

COMP

Compressor for musical instruments that feature gentle

sounds which, depending on the tones, could diffuse,

such as synth pad. Intended to prevent diffusion of the

sound.

SamplingPerc

COMPAND-S

Compressor for making sampled percussion sound like

real acoustic percussion.

Sampling BD

COMP

A variation on preset 24, intended for sampled bass

drum sounds.

Sampling SN

COMP

A variation on preset 25, intended for sampled snare

drum sounds.

Hip Comp

COMPAND-S

A variation on preset 26, intended for sampled loops

and phrases.

Solo Vocal1

COMP Compressor for use with main vocals.

Solo Vocal2

COMP A variation on preset 28.

Chorus

COMP A variation on preset 28, intended for choruses.

Click Erase

EXPAND

Expander for removing a click track that may bleed

through from a musicians headphones.

Announcer

COMPAND-H

Hard-kneed compander for reducing the level of the

music when an announcer speaks.

Limiter1

COMPAND-S A soft-kneed compander with a slow release.

Limiter2

COMP A “peak-stop” compressor.

Total Comp1

COMP

Compressor for reducing the overall volume level. Use

it on the stereo output during mixdown, or with paired

Input or Output Channels.

Total Comp2

COMP A variation on preset 35, but with more compression.

No. Preset Name Type Description

Using Libraries 185

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Libraries

A CURRENT TYPE

This parameter displays the currently-selected channel EQ type (TYPE I or II).

B CURRENT CURVE

This graph displays the current EQ curve.

C Level meters

These meters indicate the post-EQ levels of the currently-selected channel and its avail-

able pair partner.

D Type & Curve section

The type and curve of the currently-selected EQ program are displayed here.

2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then press the [SEL] buttons to select

channels.

You can now store the selected channel EQ settings or recall the EQ library memories to

channels. For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library Operation”

on page 173.

The following table lists the preset memories in the EQ library:

No. Preset Name Description

Bass Drum 1

Emphasizes the low range of a bass drum and the attack created by the

beater.

Bass Drum 2

Creates a peak around 80 Hz, producing a tight, stiff sound.

Snare Drum 1

Emphasizes “snappy” and rimshot sounds.

Snare Drum 2

Emphasizes various ranges for that classic rock snare drum sound.

Tom-tom 1

Emphasizes the attack of tom-toms, and creates a long, “leathery” decay.

Cymbal

Emphasizes the attack of crash cymbals, extending the “sparkling” decay.

High Hat

Use on a tight high-hat, emphasizing the mid to high range.

Percussion

Emphasizes attack and adds clarity to the high-range of instruments, such

as shakers, cabasas, and congas.

E. Bass 1

Produces a tight electric bass sound by cutting very low frequencies.

E. Bass 2

Unlike preset 9, this preset emphasizes the low range of an electric bass.

Syn. Bass 1

Use on a synth bass with emphasized low range.

Syn. Bass 2

Emphasizes the attack that is peculiar to synth bass.

Piano 1

Makes pianos sound brighter.

Piano 2

Used in conjunction with a compressor, this preset emphasizes the attack

and low range of pianos.

E. G. Clean

Use for line-level recording of an electric or semi-acoustic guitar to get a

slightly harder sound.

E. G. Crunch 1

Adjusts the tonal quality of a slightly distorted guitar sound.

E. G. Crunch 2

A variation on preset 16.

E. G. Dist. 1

Makes a heavily distorted guitar sound clearer.

E. G. Dist. 2

A variation on preset 18.

A. G. Stroke 1

Emphasizes the bright tones of acoustic guitars.

A. G. Stroke 2

A variation on preset 20. You can also use it with an acoustic-electric nylon

string guitar.

A. G. Arpeg. 1

Ideal for arpeggio playing on acoustic guitars.

A. G. Arpeg. 2

A variation on preset 22.

Brass Sec.

Use with trumpets, trombones, or saxes. When used with a single instru-

ment, try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID frequency.

Male Vocal 1

An EQ template for male vocals. Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID

parameters according to the voice quality.

Male Vocal 2

A variation on preset 25.

186 Chapter 15—Libraries

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Surround Monitor Library

This library enables you to store and recall Surround Monitor settings. The library contains

one preset memory that initializes the Surround Monitor settings, and 32 user (readable &

writable) memories.

To access the Surround Monitor library, press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeat-

edly until the Monitor | Surr Lib page appears. For details on storing and recalling memo-

ries, see “General Library Operation” on page 173.

Female Vo. 1

An EQ template for female vocals. Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID

parameters according to the voice quality.

Female Vo. 2

A variation on preset 27.

Chorus&Harmo

An EQ template for brightening choruses.

Total EQ 1

Use on a stereo mix during mixdown. Sounds even better when used with a

compressor.

Total EQ 2

A variation on preset 30.

Total EQ 3

A variation on preset 30. Can also be used with paired Input or Output

Channels.

Bass Drum 3

A variation on preset 1, with low and mid range reduced.

Snare Drum 3

A variation on preset 3, creating a thicker sound.

Tom-tom 2

A variation on preset 5, emphasizing the mid and high ranges.

Piano 3

A variation on preset 13.

Piano Low

Emphasizes the low range of pianos recorded in stereo.

Piano High

Emphasizes the high range of pianos recorded in stereo.

Fine-EQ Cass

Add clarity when recording to or from cassette tape.

Narrator

Ideal for recording narration.

No. Preset Name Description

Automix 187

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Automix

16 Automix

This chapter describes the Automix function, which automates real-time mix operation,

and explains how to use it.

About Automix

The DM1000 features an Automix function, which allows dynamic automation of virtually

all mix parameters, including Levels, Mutes, Pan, Surround Pan, Aux Sends, Aux Send

Mutes, EQ, and effects.

Va rious mixing events can be recorded in Automix. You can also punch channels or param-

eters in and out of recording on-the-ﬂy, and edit most parameters off-line with 1/4 frame

accuracy. Remote layer operations, and Scene and library recall operations can also be auto-

mated, which enables you to create mix automation that combines snap shots and dynamic

mix parameter changes.

You can store up to 16 Automixes in the Automix library. You can also store an Automix or

the entire Automix library to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data ﬁler, by using

MIDI Bulk Dump.

The following parameter events can be recorded in an Automix:

Parameters

Input

Channels

Bus Out

Master

Aux Send

Master

Stereo Out

Channel levels (faders)

OOOO

Channel mutes (ON/OFF)

OOOO

Pan

O ———

Surround pan, LFE level, and DIV

O ———

EQ (F, Q, G, On/Off)

OOOO

Aux Send 1–8 levels

O ———

Aux Send 1–8 mutes

O ———

Fader Group Master

(Level, On/Off)

—

Scene recalls

—

EQ, Gate, Comp, Effects, Channel

library recalls

—

Effects parameters

(certain parameters)

—

User Deﬁned Remote Layers

(faders, [ON], Encoders)

—

188 Chapter 16—Automix

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Setting Up for Automix Recording

This section describes the procedure you must perform before you start Automix recording.

Selecting the Timecode Source

Follow the steps below to select the timecode source and frame rate that the DM1000 uses

for the Automix function.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | Time

Ref page appears.

This page enables you to select the timecode source for the Automix operation, and the port

that receives the timecode.

A TIME REFERENCE section

Select one of the following timecode sources for the Automix operation.

• INTERNAL ................... Internally generated timecode

• SMPTE .......................... SMPTE timecode received via the TIME CODE INPUT

SMPTE connector

• MIDI CLOCK............... MIDI Clock received via the Rx PORT (speciﬁed on the Setup

| MIDI/Host page)

• MTC-MIDI ...................MTC received via the MIDI IN port

• MTC-USB ..................... MTC received via the USB port

• MTC-REMOTE............MTC received via the REMOTE connector

• MTC-SLOT1................. MTC received via Slot 1 (for use with an optional MY8-mLAN

card installed in Slot 1)

B FRAMES

These parameter buttons select the SMPTE/MTC frame rate.

C button

Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER]. The DM1000 quickly locates the

Automix | Main page.

2 Move the cursor to the TIME REFERENCE section and select the desired time-

code source.

3 If you selected INTERNAL, SMPTE, or MTC timecode, move the cursor to one

of the FRAMES parameter buttons to select the desired frame rate.

If the DM1000 receives timecode with a frame rate that differs from the speciﬁed rate, the

error message “Frame Mismatch!” appears. If you select the SMPTE timecode, the error

message “Frame Jump!” may appear, depending on the selected frame rate.

Setting Up for Automix Recording 189

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Automix

4 If you select MIDI CLOCK, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeat-

edly until the Setup | MIDI/Host page appears (see page 246). Then, in the

Rx PORT parameter box, specify the port or slot that receives MIDI Clock.

Creating a Time Signature Map

If you selected the MIDI CLOCK source, you must specify the initial time signature and any

time signature changes that follow, according to the song. (If you do not do this, the song

timing and Automix position may not match when playback starts in mid-song.)

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | Time

Sig page appears.

This page enables you to specify a measure number in the MEAS column and the time sig-

nature in the TIME column. By default, 4/4 is set in the ﬁrst measure.

2To change the initial time signature, move the cursor to the TIME value in

the ﬁrst measure, and use the Parameter wheel or [INC]/[DEC] buttons to

select the desired time signature.

3To insert a time signature change, specify the desired measure number in

an empty box in the MEAS column, and specify the corresponding time sig-

nature in the TIME column.

To delete a time signature change, select it, then press [ENTER]. You cannot delete the ini-

tial time signature entry at measure #1.

Tip:

•If you select the MIDI CLOCK source, Automix will respond to MIDI Start, Stop, and Con-

tinue messages.

•An Automix will play back correctly even if the frame rate differs from that used when the

Automix was originally recorded. However, an Automix recorded using MIDI Clock and

an Automix recorded using other timecode sources are not compatible with one another.

190 Chapter 16—Automix

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Recording an Automix

This section describes a general procedure for Automix recording, including creating a new

Automix, as well as recording the fader, [ON] button, and other controller events real-time.

Creating a New Automix

Follow the steps below to create a new Automix and select the parameters you want to

record.

1 Connect a timecode source to the DM1000.

2 Select the timecode source on the Setup | Time Ref page (see page 188).

If you selected MIDI CLOCK timecode, create a time signature map (see page 189).

3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly until the Automix

| Main page appears.

This page enables you to set the basic Automix parameters, and record and play back Auto-

mixes.

4 Move the cursor to the NEW button located in the lower-right corner of the

page, then press [ENTER].

A conﬁrmation window for creating a new Automix appears.

5 Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER].

A new Automix is created.

6 Move the cursor to the AUTOMIX DISABLED/ENABLED button, then press

[ENTER] to switch it to ENABLED.

The new Automix is enabled.

7 In the OVERWRITE section, select parameters you want to record.

The seven buttons in the OVERWRITE section enable you to select parameters to be

recorded in the Automix, including the following. See page 196 for more information.

• FADER........................... Fader operation

• ON.................................. [ON] button on/off

Recording an Automix 191

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Automix

• PA N ................................Pan operation

• SURR .............................Surround pan operation

• AUX................................Aux Send level operation

• AUX ON ........................Aux Send on/off operation

• EQ...................................EQ operation

Recording the First Event

Follow the steps below to select channels and start Automix recording.

1 Move the cursor to the REC button at the bottom of the page, then press

[ENTER].

The REC button ﬂashes, indicating that the Automix is ready to record.

2 Press the [AUTO] button on the top panel.

The button indicator lights up. If you turn on the [AUTO] button indicator while the REC

button is lit or ﬂashing on the Automix Main page, the [SEL] buttons will allow you to

enable or disable the Automix function for each channel, or arm or disarm each channel.

Depending on the REC button status on the Main page, pressing the channel [SEL] buttons

will place the corresponding channels in the following state:

• When the REC button is ﬂashing or lit:

• When the REC button is off:

3 Select the layer that contains the channels you wish to record, then press

the corresponding channel [SEL] buttons.

The button indicators light up orange. The corresponding channels are armed.

4 Start the timecode source.

The REC and PLAY buttons are highlighted and the recording starts. The [SEL] button

indicators (illuminated in Step 3) change from orange to red (indicating that recording is

in progress).

Tip: Alternatively, you could press the AUTO REC button (instead of the REC button), then

press [ENTER] to place the Automix in record ready mode. Whether you press REC or AUTO

REC will affect the way in which you cancel record ready mode.

Green

Ready for

Automix playback

Orange

Ready for Automix

recording

Off

Automix

disabled

Green

Ready for

Automix playback

Orange

Ready for Automix

recording

Off

Automix

disabled

Green

Ready for

Automix playback

192 Chapter 16—Automix

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

5 Adjust the faders, Encoders, [ON] buttons, and other controls of the channels

selected in Step 3.

6To record EQ events, use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ set-

tings of the currently-selected channel.

To select other channels, press the [AUTO] button to turn off the [AUTO] button indicator,

then use the [SEL] buttons to select channels.

7To stop Automix recording, stop the timecode source, or move the cursor

to the STOP button on the page, then press [ENTER].

A conﬁrmation message appears asking whether you want to update the existing Automix

data (i.e., keep the edits just recorded).

Move the cursor to YES and press [ENTER] to update the data, or move the cursor to NO

and press [ENTER] to discard the edits and return to the previous condition. Even after you

update the existing Automix data, unless you proceed to the next recording, you can still

restore the previous data by moving the cursor to the UNDO button on the Main page and

pressing [ENTER].

Tip: To punch channels out of recording, press the corresponding [SEL] buttons to change the

button indicators from red to green.

Tip: Scene and library recalls are always recorded, regardless of the selection in the OVER-

WRITE section and the [SEL] button status.

Tip:

• When you stop Automix recording, all channels are disarmed, and the [SEL] button indi-

cators light up green.

•If you use the AUTO REC button instead of the REC button in Step 1, the AUTO REC button

will continue to ﬂash after you stop Automix recording. In this way, you can resume recording

when you restart the timecode source. To cancel record ready mode, move the cursor to the

AUTO REC button, then press [ENTER].

•If the Mix Update Conﬁrmation preference is off on the Setup | Prefer3 page, the conﬁrma-

tion window for updating the existing Automix data will not appear, and the edits just

recorded will be retained.

Note:

•You can rerecord events as many times as you like. Remember, however, that unlike the ﬁrst

pass, on subsequent passes existing events for the currently-punched in parameter are over-

written.

•You can reduce the risk of overwriting important data by punching in and out only necessary

parameters using the buttons in the OVERWRITE section.

Inserting Mix Parameters into Automix 193

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Automix

Inserting Mix Parameters into Automix

You can insert the static mix parameter settings into the range speciﬁed by the IN and OUT

parameters in the current Automix data. This is useful when you want to quickly insert

static EQ settings into a speciﬁed range of the Automix data.

1 After you create a new Automix following the steps in the “Creating a New

Automix” (page 190), press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly

until the Setup | Prefer3 page appears.

2 For the “Insert Time Link to Locate Memory” preference, select Locate mem-

ories that will be applied to Insert In and Out.

Note: If the timecode source is MIDI clock, this preference setting is ignored, since the IN and

OUT parameters in the TIME SETTING section (page 207) on the Automix | Event Job page

will be applied.

Time Time

IN OUT

Before Insert After Insert

Event No event Event

Event erased

Value prior to Insert

Inserted

parameter value

194 Chapter 16—Automix

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button repeatedly until the Remote |

Machine page appears.

4 Assign the Insert In and Out Locate points to the Locate memories speciﬁed

in the LOCATE/TIME section (page 244) and selected in Step 2.

5 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly until the Automix

| Main page appears.

6 Use the cursor buttons to select the INSERT button, then press [ENTER].

A conﬁrmation message appears.

The default IN and OUT parameter values use the Locate memories speciﬁed in Steps 1 –

4. If you change the Locate points for the corresponding Locate memories while the conﬁr-

mation message is displayed, the IN and OUT parameter values will be updated accord-

ingly.

If MIDI clock is selected as a timecode source, the values are displayed by bars.

Inserting Mix Parameters into Automix 195

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Automix

7 Use the cursor buttons to select YES, then press [ENTER].

The DM1000 enters Insert mode, and the INSERT button is highlighted.

The fader positions, mute function and other parameters are updated to the settings speci-

ﬁed for the time value of the IN parameter.

8 Select the parameter you wish to insert using the buttons in the OVERWRITE

section.

To select effect or plug-in parameters, locate the Effect | Edit or P-in Edit page, then move

the cursor to the desired parameter and press [ENTER].

9 Press the [AUTO] button. The button indicator lights up.

10 Select a channel to be inserted by pressing the corresponding channel [SEL]

button.

The selcted channel [SEL] button lights up red.

11 Edit a parameter you wish to insert.

12 Use the cursor buttons to select the INSERT button, then press [ENTER].

A conﬁrmation message appears.

13 Use the cursor buttons to select YES, then press [ENTER] to insert the data.

Once the data is inserted, Insert mode is cancelled and the INSERT button is unhighlighted.

196 Chapter 16—Automix

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Parameter Recording

The following table summarizes the parameter recording operation for each parameter

available in Automix recording.

Parameters Channel OVERWRITE Operation Pair/Group

Channel Levels

(faders)

Input

FADER

Set Layer to Input, Fader

mode to Fader, use faders

Faders of paired channels and

grouped faders are recorded

together.

Bus Out, Aux Send

Set Layer to Master, Fader

mode to Fader, use faders

Stereo Out Use Stereo Out fader

Group Master Level

Use faders set to the Group

Master in User Assignable

Layer

Channel Mutes

(ON/OFF)

Input

Set Layer to Input, use [ON]

buttons

[ON] buttons of paired chan-

nels and grouped mutes are

recorded together.

Bus Out, Aux Send

Set Layer to Master, use [ON]

buttons

Stereo Out Use Stereo Out [ON] button

Group Maser On/Off

Use [ON] buttons set to the

Group Master in User Assign-

able Layer

Pan

Input PAN

Set Layer to Input, Encoder

mode to Pan, use Encoders.

Use SELECTED CHANNEL sec-

tion PAN control

If Pan mode is Gang or

Inverse-Gang, paired chan-

nels are recorded together.

Surround Pan

Input SURR

Use Joystick. If a surround

parameter assigned to an

Encoder, also use Encoders

If ST LINK button on Sur-

round Edit page is on, adja-

cent partners are recorded

together.

EQ (F, Q, G, On/Off)

Input, Bus Out,

Aux Send, Stereo Out

Use SELECTED CHANNEL

EQUALIZER section. (If EQ

parameter assigned to an

Encoder, also use Encoders.)

EQ of paired channels, and

grouped EQs recorded

together.

Aux Sends 1–8 Level

Input AUX

If Fader mode is Aux, use fad-

ers. If Encoder mode is Aux,

use Encoders (also use Aux

Send or Aux View pages).

Aux send levels of paired

channels recorded together.

(If the selected Aux Send is

paired, the send level to both

Aux Sends is recorded.)

Aux Send 1–8 mutes

Input AUX ON

Use Aux Send or Aux View

pages

Aux send mutes of paired

channels recorded together.

(If the selected Aux Send is

paired, mutes for both Aux

Sends recorded.)

Scene recalls

——

Use SCENE MEMORY section

or Scene Memory page

—

Library recalls

EQ, Gate, Comp,

Effects, Channel

—

Use corresponding library

page

—

Effects parameters

(certain

parameters)

Effects processors 1–4 — Use corresponding page —

User Deﬁned

Remote Layer

Faders FADER

Select User Deﬁned Remote

Layer, use faders

—

[ON] buttons ON

Select User Deﬁned Remote

Layer, use [ON] buttons

—

Encoders PAN

Select User Deﬁned Remote

Layer, use Encoders

—

Punching In & Out 197

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Automix

Punching In & Out

You can modify part of a recorded Automix or add events to an Automix (Punch In & Out).

You can punch in and out channels using the [SEL] buttons, or individual parameters using

other controls.

Punch In & Out Using the [SEL] Buttons

Follow the steps below to punch channels in and out using the [SEL] buttons.

1 Select parameters you wish to record in the OVERWRITE section.

2 Move the cursor to the REC or AUTO REC button at the bottom of the page,

then press [ENTER].

3 Press the [AUTO] button.

The button indicator lights up. At this time, make sure that the [SEL] button indicators for

all channels (including the channels you want to punch in) are lit green.

4 Start the timecode source.

The REC and PLAY buttons are highlighted and parameter event recording is armed. How-

ever, no events are yet recorded since no channels are selected.

5To punch in channels, press the corresponding [SEL] buttons.

The corresponding [SEL] button indicators light up red and the channels are placed in

record mode.

6 Adjust the controls of the selected channels.

7To punch out the channels, press the corresponding [SEL] buttons again.

8 Stop the Automix.

A conﬁrmation window regarding updating the Automix data appears.

Punching In & Out Individual Events

Even if you selected some parameters in the OVERWRITE section, you can punch in an

individual parameter by following the steps below:

1 In the OVERWRITE section, select the parameters you want to record.

2 Move the cursor to the REC or AUTO REC button at the bottom of the page,

then press [ENTER].

3 Press the [AUTO] button on the top panel.

The button indicator lights up. Make sure that the [SEL] button indicators for all channels

are lit green.

4 Start the timecode source.

The REC and PLAY buttons are highlighted and event recording is armed. However, no

events are yet recorded since no channels are selected.

Note: If the punch-in channels already contain the parameter events selected in the OVER-

WRITE section, punching-in immediately overwrites the existing events. Be careful while

selecting parameters in the OVERWRITE section so that you will not delete events you wish

to retain.

Tip: You can also select the recording channels ﬁrst using the [SEL] buttons, start the timecode

source, then select the desired parameters in the OVERWRITE section to punch in and out.

198 Chapter 16—Automix

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

5 Perform the following operations to punch in and out individual events.

6 Stop the Automix.

A conﬁrmation window regarding updating the Automix data appears.

Parameters Channel OVERWRITE Operation Punch In Punch Out

Channel Levels

(faders)

Input

FADER

Set Layer to Iinput,

Fader mode to Fader

Touch fader knob

and adjust

1. To punch in events by performing this operation, set TOUCH SENSE to TOUCH or LATCH on the Fader1 or 2 page.

Release fader knob

2. To punch out events by performing this operation, set TOUCH SENSE to TOUCH on the Fader1 or 2 page.

Bus Out,

Aux Send

Set Layer to Master,

Fader mode to fader

Stereo Out Stereo Out fader

Group Mas-

ter Fader

Set Fader mode to

fader. Set Group Mas-

ter in User Assign-

able Layer.

Pan

Input PAN

Set Layer to Input,

Encoder mode to Pan

Press Encoder and

adjust

Press Encoder

Surround Pan

Input SURR

Select Input Layer

and assign Surround

LFE Level or Surround

Pan Wheel to the

Encoders

Press Encoder and

adjust

Press Encoder

EQ (F, Q, G)

All channels EQ

Use SELECTED

CHANNEL EQUAL-

IZER section. (If EQ

parameter assigned

to an Encoder, also

use Encoders.)

Adjust SELECTED

CHANNEL control

Press Encoder and

adjust

3. To punch in events by performing this operation, turn on the Auto EQ Edit preference.

Press [SEL] button

EQ On/Off

Press Encoder and

adjust

4. To punch in events by performing this operation, assign EQ parameters to the Encoders.

Press Encoder

Aux Sends 1–8 Level

Input AUX

Set Layer to Input,

Fader mode to Aux

Touch fader knob

and adjust

Release fader knob

Set Layer to Input,

Encoder mode to Aux

Press Encoder and

adjust

Press Encoder

Effects parameters

(certain

parameters)

Effects pro-

cessors 1–4

—

Select internal effects

processors

Move the cursor to

the parameter con-

trol on the page,

then press [ENTER].

Move the cursor to

the parameter con-

trol on the page,

then press [ENTER].

User Deﬁned

Remote Layer

Faders FADER

Select User Deﬁned

Remote Layer

Touch fader knob

and adjust

Release fader knob

Encoders PAN

Select User Deﬁned

Remote Layer

Press Encoder and

adjust

Press Encoder

[SEL] Button Functions While the [AUTO] Button Indicator Is On 199

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Automix

[SEL] Button Functions While the [AUTO] Button

Indicator Is On

While the [AUTO] button indicator is lit, you can use the channel [SEL] buttons to turn the

Automix function on and off, arm or disarm channels, or punch channels in and out.

The [SEL] button indicators operate as follows:

• Off ..................................Automix recording or playback disabled.

• Green .............................Automix stopped or playing

• Orange...........................The channel is armed.

• Red .................................Automix recording in progress

• Flashing red ..................Edit Out mode set to TAKEOVER, and fader events continue

recording after punch out

• Flashing green..............Edit Out mode set to TAKEOVER, and faders are disabled after

punch out

Playing Back an Automix

As long as the Automix function is enabled, the Automix function will chase the incoming

timecode and play and stop the current Automix accordingly.

You can stop playback manually by moving the cursor to the STOP or ABORT button on

the Automix | Main/Memory page, then pressing [ENTER].

Playback will stop automatically if the DM1000 receives no timecode for a while, if the

DM1000 receives MIDI Stop commands (only when the MIDI CLOCK source is selected),

or if the end of the Automix data is reached.

While the [AUTO] button indicator is lit, the [SEL] button indicators light up green on the

channel strips available for Automix playback. When Automix playback for an individual

channel is disabled, its [SEL] button indicator turns off.

During playback, faders move in accordance with recorded fader events (as long as the cor-

responding layer and Fader mode is selected). You can disable fader movement by turning

off the MOTOR button on the Fader 1 or 2 page (see page 205).

You can view fader events on the Fader 1 or 2 page (see page 205), and other events on the

corresponding pages. Recorded events of the currently-selected channel are reﬂected in the

SELECTED CHANNEL section controls and displays.

Note: If the current effects type is different from that used when the effects parameter edits

were recorded, the parameter edits will not be played back. However, they are not deleted.

When you rerecord effects parameter edits from the beginning, it is recommended that you

delete the existing effects events ofﬂine.

200 Chapter 16—Automix

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Automix Main Page

This section explains the Automix Main page. This page enables you to set the basic Auto-

mix parameters and record and play back Automixes. To locate the Automix | Main page,

press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly until the page appears.

A FREE

The amount of free Automix memory remaining is displayed here in kilobytes, as a per-

centage, and by a bar graph.

B SIZE

The size of the current Automix and the size of any Automix data in the undo buffer are

displayed here in kilobytes.

C TIME REFERENCE

The timecode source and frame rate speciﬁed on the Time Ref page (see page 188) are

also displayed here.

D INT START TIME

This parameter sets the start time of the DM1000 internal timecode generator in hours,

minutes, seconds, frames, and subframes. Move the cursor to a digit you wish to change,

and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the value.

Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected digit to “00.”

E OFFSET

This parameter speciﬁes an offset relative to the external timecode source in hours, min-

utes, seconds, frames, and subframes. Specify a “+” value to move events forward rela-

tive to the incoming timecode. Specify a “–” value to move events backwards relative to

the incoming timecode. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected digit

to “00.”

F UPDATE

This button determines the fate of events that exist beyond the point at which rerecord-

ing is stopped.

When the TO END button is on, the DM1000 erases all events (that exist beyond the

point at which rerecording is stopped) for parameters that have been edited during the

current pass. This function is useful when you want parameters to remain the same right

through to the end of the Automix.

When the TO END button is off, existing events are left as they are.

O P Q R S

Automix Main Page 201

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Automix

When the TO END button is on, the way in which fader events are processed depends

on the currently-selected Fader Edit mode and Edit Out mode. The following table

shows how the faders operate when the Fader Edit mode is set to Absolute.

If the Fader Edit mode is set to Relative, and the Edit Out mode is set to either Takeover

or Off, the fader will remain at a position relative to its position when recording was

stopped right through to the end of the Automix.

G EDIT OUT

This parameter sets the Edit Out mode: TAKEOVER, RETURN, or OFF (both buttons

are off). This mode determines how rerecorded fader moves align with existing fader

data at the punch out point.

Fader data includes Input Channel levels, Bus Out master levels, Aux Send master levels,

the Stereo Out level, and Remote layer faders.

TO END Return Takeover or Off

OFF

At the point at which recording is stopped, the fader

returns to the position speciﬁed by the existing fader

data, at the speed speciﬁed by the Time parameter

on the Fader1 or 2 page.

At the point at which recording is stopped, the fader

remains at the same position until the next fader

event in the existing data is encountered.

At the point at which recording is stopped, the fader

returns to the position speciﬁed by the existing fader

data, at the speed speciﬁed by the Time parameter

on the Fader1 or 2 page. All subsequent events are

erased. The fader remains at that position through to

the end of the Automix.

At the point at which recording is stopped, all subse-

quent events are erased so that the fader remains at

that position right through to the end of the Auto-

mix.

Existing data

Return time

Time

Punch in Stop recording

Fader edit

Time

Punch in Stop recording

Existing data

Fader edit

Existing data

Return time

Time

Punch in Stop recording

Fader edit

Time

Punch in Stop recording

Existing data

Fader edit

202 Chapter 16—Automix

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

The following table shows how faders move in each Edit Out mode. You can set the

Return Time (time required by Input and Output Channel faders to return to the pre-

viously-recorded position) on the Fader1 or 2 page (see page 205).

H FADER EDIT

This parameter determines how fader moves are rerecorded (it has no effect during the

ﬁrst recording pass). You can select ABSOLUTE or RELATIVE.

In Absolute mode, fader moves are rerecorded as absolute values (existing fader data is

erased). In Relative mode, fader moves are rerecorded relative to the existing fader data.

Fader data includes Input Channel level, Bus Out master levels, Aux Out master levels,

the Stereo Out level, Remote layer faders.

The following table explains Fader Edit mode operation (TO END: off. Edit Out: off).

I TOUCH SENSE

If you set this parameter to TOUCH, you can punch in and out the parameters selected

in the OVERWRITE section by just touching the fader knobs. If you set this parameter

to LATCH, you can only punch in the parameters (punch-out is disabled). If the Fader

Touch Sense parameter is set to “DISABLED,” on the Setup | Prefer2 page, this section is

grayed out.

Off Return Takeover

At the punch out point, the fader

remains at the same position until the

next fader event in the existing data

occurs.

At the punch out point, the fader

returns to the position speciﬁed by the

existing fader data, at the speed speci-

ﬁed by the Time parameter on the

Fader1 or 2 page.

At the punch out point, recording con-

tinues until the fader position intersects

the existing fader data. If you are still

touching the fader knob at the actual

punch out point, the fader is disabled

until you release it.

In this example, punch out was per-

formed by pressing the [AUTO] button,

and the fader was moved manually

between the speciﬁed punch out point

and actual punch out point.

Absolute Relative

Fader edits are recorded as absolute values and

existing fader data between the punch in and out

points is erased.

Fader edits are rerecorded relative to the existing

fader data.

Time

Punch in Punch out

Existing data

Fader edit

Existing data

Return time

Time

Punch in Punch out

Fader edit

Time

Punch in Punch out

Existing data

Fader edit

Actual punch out

Time

Punch in Punch out

Existing data

Fader edit

Time

Punch in Punch out

Existing data

Fader edit

Automix Main Page 203

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Automix

J OVERWRITE section

This section enables you to select parameters to be recorded on the ﬁrst pass, and rere-

corded (i.e., overwritten) on subsequent passes. You can select or deselect these param-

eters while recording is in progress (see page 190).

K AUTOMIX ENABLED/DISABLED

This parameter enables or disables the Automix. When the parameter is set to DISABLE,

you cannot record or play back an Automix. If the ESAM function is enabled, you can-

not enable the Automix.

L NEW

Move the cursor to the NEW button, then press [ENTER] to create a new Automix.

When you create a new Automix, a Scene recall event to recall the current Scene (i.e., the

last Scene recalled) is automatically inserted at the start of the Automix. (You can edit

this event so that you will be able to recall another Scene.)

M UNDO

Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to undo various Automix opera-

tions (Undo function). When you record new events in an Automix, or when you per-

form an ofﬂine edit, the current Automix data is copied to the Undo buffer. You can

retrieve the data from the buffer by moving the cursor to the UNDO button and press-

ing [ENTER] while Automix is stopped. You can also cancel the Undo operation (Redo

function).

N INSERT

Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to insert the current mix parame-

ters into the current Automix data. This is useful when you want to quickly replace the

Automix data in the speciﬁed range (e.g., to replace dialogs). Refer to “Inserting Mix

Parameters into Automix” on page 193

O AUTO REC

Move the cursor to the AUTO REC button, then press [ENTER] to place the DM1000

in Automix record ready mode. The button becomes highlighted. In this state, when the

DM1000 receives the appropriate timecode, it automatically starts Automix recording.

Record ready mode is not canceled, even if Automix recording is stopped, unless you

move the cursor to this button and press [ENTER].

P REC

Move the cursor to the REC button, then press [ENTER] to place the DM1000 in Auto-

mix record ready mode. The button starts to ﬂash. In this state, when the DM1000

receives the appropriate timecode, it automatically starts Automix recording.

Unlike the AUTO REC button, however, record ready mode is canceled when recording

is stopped.

If you move the cursor to this button and press [ENTER] during Automix playback, the

DM1000 engages record ready mode.

Q PLAY

If the timecode source is set to internal, move the cursor to the PLAY button and press

[ENTER]. Automix recording or playback starts.

If you selected an external timecode source, as soon as the DM1000 receives the external

timecode, recording or playback starts, and this button turns on automatically. After you

stop Automix by pressing the STOP button or ABORT button, you can restart recording

or playback by pressing this button as long as the DM1000 is still receiving timecode.

Tip:

• The Undo buffer is cleared when you turn off the power to the DM1000. If you want to

save the contents of the Undo buffer, perform the undo operation, then store the Automix.

•However, you cannot undo the operations performed on the Event Edit page.

204 Chapter 16—Automix

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

R STOP

Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to stop Automix recording or play-

back. (If you stop recording, a conﬁrmation window appears asking whether you wish

to update the Automix data.) The button remains highlighted while Automix is stopped.

S ABORT

This button aborts the current recording without updating the existing Automix data.

Automix Memory Page

The Automix Memory page enables you to store and recall Automixes. The lower half of this

page is identical to the Automix Main page.

To locate the Automix | Memory page, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button

repeatedly until the page appears.

A TITLE EDIT

This button enables you to edit the title of the Automix memory selected in the center

column.

B RECALL

This button recalls the Automix memory selected in the center column.

C STORE

This button enables you to store the current Automix to the memory selected in the cen-

ter column.

D CLEAR

This button clears the Automix memory selected in the center column.

E TITLE

This parameter displays the title of the current Automix.

F MEMORY TITLE column

This column enables you to select an Automix memory to be recalled or stored. The col-

umn lists the titles of Automix memories. An empty Automix memory has a title of “No

Data!”

G CURRENT

This parameter displays the size of the current Automix.

H UNDO

This parameter displays the size of the current Undo buffer.

Fader1 &2 pages 205

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Automix

I FREE

This parameter displays the amount of free memory available for storing the current

Automix.

J MEMORY

This parameter displays the size of the Automix memory selected in the center column.

K PROTECT ON/OFF

To protect the contents of the Automix memory selected in the MEMORY TITLE col-

umn, move the cursor to this button and press [ENTER]. A padlock icon ( ) appears

next to the titles of Automix memories that are write-protected. You cannot store, clear,

or edit the title of write-protected Automix memories.

For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library

Operation” on page 173.

Fader1 &2 pages

The Fader1 & 2 pages enable you to edit fader positions while viewing the current fader

position and the fader data recorded in the Automix.

To locate the Fader1 or 2 page, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly

until the page appears.

During Automix playback, fader positions are displayed graphically as black bars on the

Automix | Fader1 or 2 page. The Fader1 page displays fader positions for Input Channel 1

through 48 and Stereo out. The Fader2 page displays fader positions for Bus Outs 1–8, Aux

Outs 1–8 and Fader Group Masters A–H, Q–T.

When the Fader mode is set to Fader, each page displays Input and Output Channel levels.

When the Fader mode is set to Aux, each page displays Aux Send levels.

During rerecording, the Fader1 and 2 pages display the existing

fader data in bar graphs. While fader events are being recorded,

arrows appear next to each fader bar. A downward arrow indi-

cates that the current fader position is higher than that speciﬁed

by the existing fader data. An upward arrow indicates that the

current fader position is lower than that speciﬁed by the existing

fader data.

A ABSOLUTE & RELATIVE

These buttons are the same as those on the Main page (see page 200).

1 2

4 5 6

206 Chapter 16—Automix

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

B MOTOR

This button turns the fader motors on or off for Automix playback. The button is high-

lighted when the motors are on.

C Edit Safe buttons

The numbered buttons below each fader bar are Edit Safe buttons, which prohibit Auto-

mix recording on certain channels. A channel is set to safe and excluded from Automix

recording when its button is highlighted. However, you can play existing events and use

faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons on safe channels. This is useful for rehearsing mix

moves.

D TOUCH SENSE

This function is the same as that on the Automix Main page.

E UPDATE

This button is the same as that on the Automix Main page.

F EDIT OUT

The TAKEOVER and RETURN buttons are the same as those on the Automix | Main

page. The EDIT OUT section on this page also contains the TIME parameter. This

parameter determines the time required for faders to return to the levels speciﬁed by the

existing Automix data when the RETURN button is turned on.

Tip: You cannot turn off the motors during Automix recording. Even if this button is turned

off, the motors are automatically turned on when recording starts.

Tip:

•You can make all channels safe simultaneously by selecting a non-highlighted button and

double-clicking the [ENTER] button. A conﬁrmation window appears.

•You can cancel all safe channels simultaneously by selecting a highlighted button and

double-clicking the [ENTER] button. A conﬁrmation window appears.

Editing Events Offline 207

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Automix

Editing Events Ofﬂine

You can edit recorded Automix events ofﬂine on the Event Job and Event Edit pages. You

can perform ofﬂine editing only while the Automix function is stopped.

Event Job Page

On the Event Job page, you can erase, copy, move/merge, or trim speciﬁed events on spec-

iﬁed channels between speciﬁed in and out points.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly until the Automix

| Event Job page appears.

A Channel buttons

These button enable you to select the channels for which you want to edit Automix data.

B ALL SELECT

This button selects all channels.

C ALL CLEAR

This button de-selects all channels.

D TIME SETTING

This section enables you to specify the region of Automix data to be edited (IN and OUT

points).

E JOB TYPE

This section enables you to select the job type. If you select “MEM” in the SOURCE sec-

tion, the MERGE button replaces the MOVE button.

2 Use the Channel buttons to select channels for which you want to edit Auto-

mix data.

You can select multiple Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Outs, and the Stereo Out.

3 Specify the region of Automix data you want to edit by setting the IN and

OUT parameters in the TIME SETTING section.

You can also capture the IN and OUT points on-the-ﬂy by moving the cursor to the IN or

OUT button and pressing the [ENTER] button. To modify the captured positions, move the

cursor to the value you wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the

[INC]/[DEC] buttons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected digit to “00.”

Up to eight IN and OUT timecode values can be captured and stored in the eight Capture

memories. The currently-selected Capture memory number (1–8) appears to the left of the

IN and OUT buttons. Move the cursor to the Capture memory number, and rotate the

Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the desired Capture memory.

208 Chapter 16—Automix

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

4 Move the cursor to the desired Job button in the Job Type section, then press

[ENTER].

The following Jobs are available. Certain Jobs feature an extra parameter below the TIME

SETTING section.

■ ERASE

This button erases the speciﬁed range of Automix data.

■ COPY

This button copies the speciﬁed range of Automix data to another position. When you select

this button, the SOURCE and COPY TO sections appear below the TIME SETTING sec-

tion.

• SOURCE section

This section enables you to select the copy source Automix.

• COPY TO section

- TIME

This parameter speciﬁes the start point to which the speciﬁed data is to be copied. (The

number in parentheses on the right indicates the end point of the destination.) You can

also capture the start point on-the-ﬂy by moving the cursor to the TO button and press-

ing the [ENTER] button to capture the current position. To modify the captured posi-

tions, move the cursor to the value you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel

or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the cur-

rently-selected digit to “00.”

-CH

This parameter speciﬁes the channel to which you want to copy the speciﬁed data. If

multiple channels are selected as the copy source, use the CH parameter box to specify

the number of the top channel in the destination. (The number in parentheses on the

right indicates the number of the last channel in the destination.)

For example, if eight channels are selected as the copy source and you specify “17” in the

CH parameter box, the copy destination will be Channels 17 through 24.

Editing Events Offline 209

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Automix

■ MOVE/MERGE

The function of this button changes depending on the SOURCE section setting.

If you select CURRENT (current Automix) in the SOURCE section, this button becomes

the MOVE button, which moves the speciﬁed range of Automix data to another position.

If you select MEM (Automix memories 1–16) in the SOURCE section, this button becomes

the MERGE button, which merges the speciﬁed range of Automix data with other Automix

data.

When you select this Job, the SOURCE section and MOVE TO (MERGE TO) section

appear below the TIME SETTING section.

• SOURCE section

These parameters select the source Automix to be moved or merged. If you select CUR-

RENT (the current Automix), you can use the MOVE button. If you select MEM (Automix

memory), you can use the MERGE button. If you select MEM, specify the Automix mem-

ory number in the small parameter box on the right.

• MOVE TO (MERGE TO) section

- TIME

This parameter speciﬁes the start point to which the speciﬁed data is to be moved or

merged. (The number in parentheses on the right indicates the end point of the desti-

nation.) You can also capture the start point on-the-ﬂy by moving the cursor to the TO

button, then pressing the [ENTER] button to capture the current position. To modify

the captured positions, move the cursor to the value you wish to change, and rotate the

Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset

the currently-selected digit to “00.”

-CH

This parameter speciﬁes the channel to which the speciﬁed data is to be moved or

merged. If multiple channels are selected as the move/merge source, use the CH param-

eter box to specify the number of the top channel in the destination. (The number in

parentheses on the right indicates the number of the last channel in the destination.)

For example, if eight channels are selected as the move/merge source and you specify

“17” in the CH parameter box, the move/merge destination will be Channels 17 through

24.

■ TRIM

This button enables you to adjust the level of fader

events in the speciﬁed range of Automix data. When

you select this Job, the TRIM EDIT section appears

below the TIME SETTING section.

-IN

This parameter determines the time required for the fader to reach the level speciﬁed by

the Trim amount parameter.

- OUT

This parameter determines the time required for the fader to return to the previous

level.

210 Chapter 16—Automix

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

-Trim amount

This parameter speciﬁes the trim amount in the range of –96 dB to +96 dB.

5 After setting all necessary parameters, move the cursor to the EXEC button,

then press [ENTER].

The PARAMETERS window appears, which enables you to select parameters to be edited,

and to perform the selected Job.

A parameter is selected when its button is highlighted. (You can specify multiple parame-

ters.) These buttons correspond to the following parameters:

Button Events

FADER

Channel Fader events (Inputs Channels, Bus Out masters, Aux Out masters,

Group Master Levels, and the Stereo Out)

Channel Mute events, and Group Master On

PAN

Input Channel pan events

SURR

Input Channel surround pan, LFE level, and DIV parameter events

Channel EQ events

LIB

Channel library recall events

GATE

Gate library recall events

COMP

Comp library recall events

EQ library recall events

SCENE

Scene recall events

FX LIB 1–4

Effects library recall events of each internal effects processor

AUX 1–8

Level events of each Aux Send

ON 1–8

Mute events of each Aux Send

REMOTE 1–2

User Deﬁned Remote Layer events

EFFECT 1–4

Parameter events for each internal effects processor

Time

Trim: –

TRIM IN

TRIM OUT

IN OUT

Trimmed data

Existing data

Editing Events Offline 211

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Automix

6To execute the selected Job, move the cursor to the EXEC button, then press

[ENTER].

A conﬁrmation window appears. Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER]

to execute the Job.

Event Edit Page

The Event Edit page enables you to edit, duplicate, delete events and insert new events.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly until the Automix

| Event Edit page appears.

A Event list

This list contains the Automix event time, channels, and parameter values. The cur-

rently-selected event in the list is indicated by a triangular icon (®). Use the Up and

Down cursor buttons to select an event, and use the Left and Right cursor buttons to

select a parameter value of the selected event.

B SYNC

This button synchronizes the event list to the current timecode position. Move the cur-

sor to this button, then press [ENTER] to select events closest to the current timecode

position.

C DUPLICATE

This button duplicates the event selected in the list.

D DELETE

This button deletes the event selected in the list.

Tip:

•You can select all parameter buttons simultaneously by moving the cursor to a non-high-

lighted button and double-clicking the [ENTER] button. A conﬁrmation window appears.

•You can deselect all selected parameter buttons simultaneously by moving the cursor to a

highlighted button and double-clicking the [ENTER] button. A conﬁrmation window

appears.

Tip:

•Move the cursor to the NO button, then press [ENTER] to abort the Job.

•To return to the previous page without executing the Job, move the cursor to the

button, then press [ENTER].

1 3 25

212 Chapter 16—Automix

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

E SELECTED CH

When this option is on, only events of the channels currently selected by the channel

[SEL] buttons are displayed in the list.

F Event select buttons

These buttons select the type of events to be displayed in the event list.

G INSERT

This button inserts a new event in the position selected in the event list.

H LOCATE

This button locates events at (or closest to) the timecode position indicated on the Cap-

ture memory display.

I Capture memory display

This display counter indicates the captured timecode position.

J CAPTURE

This button captures the current timecode position. Up to eight timecode values can be

captured and stored in the eight Capture memories.

K Capture memory

This box indicates the number of the currently-selected Capture memory (1–8).

2 Use the Event select buttons to select the type of events to be displayed in

the event list.

The format of the list varies depending on the selected event. The following table shows the

events that correspond to the Event select buttons, and the list format:

Button Events Listed List Format

SCENE/LIB

Library and Scene recall events TIME CODE, CH, SCENE/LIB

FADER

Channel Fader events (Inputs Channels, Bus

Out masters, Aux Out masters, Group Master

Levels, and the Stereo Out)

TIME CODE, CH, dB, SEC

Channel Mutes (ON/OFF), and Group Master

TIME CODE, CH, ON/OFF

PAN

Pan TIME CODE, CH, L-C-R

SURR-PAN

Surround Pan TIME CODE, CH, SURR

SURR-LFE

Surround LFE TIME CODE, CH, dB

SURR-DIV

Surround DIV TIME CODE, CH, DIV

SURR-RDIV

Surround RDIV TIME CODE, CH, RDIV

EQ-ON

EQ On/Off TIME CODE, CH, ON/OFF

EQ-FREQ

EQ Frequency TIME CODE, CH, BAND/Hz

EQ-Q

EQ Q TIME CODE, CH, BAND/Q

EQ-GAIN

EQ Gain TIME CODE, CH, BAND/dB

AUX

Aux Send 1–8 levels TIME CODE, CH, AUX, dB

AUX ON

Aux Send 1–8 mutes TIME CODE, CH, AUX, ON/OFF

Tip: When the SELECTED CH check box is on, only events of the currently-selected channel

are displayed.

Note: If the data size of the selected event exceeds 1.75 MB, the message “Automix Work Mem-

ory Full!” appears, and not all events may be displayed. In this case, check the SELECTED

CH check box to display only events of the selected channel.

Editing Events Offline 213

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Automix

3To duplicate or delete events, select an event by moving the triangular icon

(®®

®®

) to the event in the list, then select the DUPLICATE or DELETE button.

4To modify the event time, channel or parameter value, move the cursor to

a parameter value you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel or

press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons.

5To locate an event, play the Automix and move the cursor to the CAPTURE

button, then press [ENTER].

The current position is captured and indicated in the Capture memory display.

6To recall the event at the captured position, move the cursor to the LOCATE

button, then press [ENTER].

The event at (or closest to) the captured position is displayed and selected in the event list.

7To insert a new event, use the Event select buttons to select the type of event

that you want to insert. Use the Capture memory display to specify the point

at which you want to insert the new event. Move the cursor to the INSERT

button, then press [ENTER].

The new event is inserted at the position currently displayed in the Capture memory dis-

play.

Tip:

•To modify the captured position, move the cursor to the Capture memory display, then rotate

the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset

the currently-selected digit to “00.”

•Up to eight timecode values can be captured in the Capture memories. To recall another

Capture memory, move the cursor to the parameter box located to the left of the CAPTURE

button, then select the desired Capture memory number (1–8).

214 Chapter 16—Automix

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Remote Control 215

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Remote Control

17 Remote Control

This chapter describes the Remote function, which enables you to control external equip-

ment directly from the DM1000 top panel.

About Remote Function

The DM1000’s Remote function enables you to control external DAW (Digital Audio Work-

station) equipment, MIDI devices, recorders, etc.

There are three types of Remote functions (Remote 1 &2, and Machine Control):

■ REMOTE 1 (Remote Layer 1)

■ REMOTE 2 (Remote Layer 2)

To use these Remote functions, you must connect the DM1000 to an external device via

USB, and operate the faders, Encoders and [ON] buttons on the top panel to control the

external device remotely.

You can specify a target device and parameter values on the Remote | Remote1 and Remote

2 pages. These layers are enabled when you turn on the LAYER [REMOTE 1] and

[REMOTE 2] buttons respectively. During Remote operation, the controls on the top panel

enable you to control the external device. (You cannot adjust the DM1000’s parameters

unless you select a different layer.)

You can assign functions of a target device to the controls on the top panel of the DM1000

by using Remote Layers 1 and 2. The following targets are available for remote control:

• ProTools ........................You can remotely control Digidesign Pro Tools.

• Nuendo ..........................You can remotely control Steinberg Nuendo.

• Cubase SX .....................You can remotely control Steinberg Cubase SX.

• General DAW................You can remotely control DAW software that supports the pro-

tocol used by Pro Tools.

• User Deﬁned.................You can also assign MIDI messages to the faders, [ON] buttons,

or Encoders to remotely control a connected MIDI device, such

as a synthesizer.

• User Assignable Layer.......You can combine the DM1000 channels to create a custom

layer. (See page 272 for more information on this function.)

■ Machine Control

From the Remote | Machine Control page, you can control an external recording machine

that is connected to the DM1000 MIDI port, REMOTE connector, USB port, or optional

MY8-mLAN card. There are two types of commands used for machine control.

• MMC..............................MMC stands for MIDI Machine Control. MMC commands

can be transferred via the MIDI ports, USB port, and Slot 1 if

an MY8-mLAN card is installed.

• P2....................................P2 protocol is used by the Tascam DA-98HR and other profes-

sional video machines. This command can be transferred via

the REMOTE connector.

Tip: ProTools, Nuendo, Cubase SX, and General DAW targets can be assigned to only one

layer at a time. If you have already assigned a ProTools, Nuendo, Cubase SX, or General DAW

target to Remote Layer 1 or 2, you cannot assign other targets to the other Remote Layer.

Tip: To control external devices from the DM1000, you can also use the User Deﬁned buttons

or the CONTROL connector as a GPI (General Purpose Interface). Refer to Chapter 20 “Other

Functions” on page 265 for more information.

216 Chapter 17—Remote Control

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Pro Tools Remote Layer

The DM1000 features Remote Layer 1 and 2 targets especially designed for controlling Pro

To ols.

Connections and Conﬁguring Pro Tools

Follow the steps below to connect the DM1000 to your computer via the USB port so that

you can control Pro Tools from the DM1000.

■ Conﬁguring Windows Computers

1 Connect the DM1000 TO HOST USB port to a USB port on your PC using a

USB cable.

2 Install the necessary USB drivers included on the DM1000 CD-ROM.

See the Studio Manager Installation Guide for more information on installing the drivers.

■ Conﬁguring Macintosh Computers

1 Connect the DM1000 TO HOST USB port to a USB port on your Mac using

a USB cable.

2 Install the required USB driver included on the DM1000 CD-ROM.

See the Studio Manager Installation Guide for more information on installing the driver.

3 If you are using Mac OS versions 8.6 through 9.2.2, install OMS.

The DM1000 communicates with Pro Tools via OMS (Open Music System) software.

If you have not installed OMS on your Mac, use the OMS installer included on the DM1000

CD-ROM to install OMS.

Note: Yo u cannot control Pro Tools via MIDI connections. Be sure to connect your computer

via the USB or an optional MY8-mLAN card installed in one of the DM1000 slots.

AUXPAN

DISPLAY

ASSIGN

ENCODER MODE

EQUALIZER

LOW

HIGH

GAIN

FREQUENCY

LOW MID

HIGH MID

ROUTING

STEREO DIRECT

DISPLAY DISPLAY

SELECTED CHANNEL

BUS 8

32 48

BUS 7

31 47

BUS 6

30 46

BUS 5

29 45

BUS 4

28 44

BUS 3

27 43

16151413121110

20dB

ONOFF

+48V

78 1213 14 15

91011

1615141312111098765432

PEAK

SIGNAL

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PAD

20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 1

17 33

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 2

18 34

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 3

19 35

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 4

20 36

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 5

21 37

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 6

22 38

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 7

23 39

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 8

24 40

+10

SOLO

SEL

BUS 1

25 41

+10

SOLO

SEL

+10

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

BUS 2

26 42

AUTO

SEL

STEREO

AUX2 AUX3 AUX 4

AUX6AUX5 AUX7 AUX8

AUXSELECT

DISPLAY

AUX1

FADER MODE

FADER

AUX

DISPLAYACCESS

AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY

MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW

PAIR/GROUP

INPUT

OUTPUT

EFFECTSURROUND DYNAMICS SCENE

PAN/

INSERT/DELAY

PATCH

GRAB

SCENE MEMORY

STORERECALL

DISPLAY

USER DEFINED

KEYS

ENTER

INC

DEC

TALKBACK LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL

010

PHONES

MONITOR

LEVEL

SOLO CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

DIMMER

TALKBACK

MONITOR

STEREO

SLOT

BUS

DISPLAY

100

F1 F2 F3

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

USBTO HOST USB port

Computer

Pro Tools Remote Layer 217

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Remote Control

4 Launch Pro Tools.

5 Choose OMS Studio Setup from the Setups menu, and conﬁgure OMS as nec-

essary.

Refer to the documentation that came with

OMS for more information on conﬁguring

the OMS Studio Setup menu. OMS recog-

nizes the DM1000 as a USB MIDI interface

that features eight ports.

6 Choose Peripherals from the Setups menu to open the Peripherals window.

7 Double-click the MIDI Controllers tab.

8 Refer to the screen below to set the Type, Receive From, Send To, and #Ch’s

parameters.

As the controller type, select HUI for #1 and #2, and MCS Panner for #3 to use the Joystick.

9 When you ﬁnish setting the parameters, close the window.

Tip: To control Pro Tools remotely, you need one port for every eight audio channels. Also,

you need an additional port to control surround pan via the Joystick. Therefore, select MIDI

Controller #1 for Channels 1-8, MIDI Controller #2 for Channels 9-16, and #3 for the Joystick.

218 Chapter 17—Remote Control

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Conﬁguring the DM1000

Follow the steps below to set up the DM1000 so that you can remotely control Pro Tools

from the DM1000 Remote Layer 1.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |

MIDI/Host page appears.

2 Move the cursor to the ﬁrst DAW parameter box (

1) in the SPECIAL FUNC-

TIONS section, then rotate the Parameter wheel to select USB as the port.

3 Press [ENTER] to conﬁrm the setting.

4 Move the cursor to the adjacent parameter

box (on the right), then rotate the Param-

eter wheel to specify the port ID.

5 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, then press the [F1] button.

The Remote | Remote 1 page appears.

Note: If you select an incorrect port, you will be unable to use the Remote function. Be sure

to match the port ID with that speciﬁed in the Peripherals window in Pro Tools.

Pro Tools Remote Layer 219

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Remote Control

6 Select ProTools (as the target device) for the Target parameter (2) located

in the upper-right corner of the page.

By default, Remote Layer 1 target is set to ProTools. If another target has been selected,

rotate the Parameter wheel to select ProTools.

7 Press the LAYER [REMOTE 1] button.

Remote Layer 1 is now available for control, enabling you to remotely control Pro Tools.

Note: When the Pro Tools Remote Layer is selected, the DM1000’s top panel faders, Encoders

and other channel buttons control Pro Tools. To control the DM1000, you need to select an

Input Channel layer or the Master layer.

Tip:

•If an optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge is installed, Pro Tools channel levels are displayed

on the MB1000 meters.

•Pressing the [REMOTE 2] button and setting the TARGET parameter to ProTools enables

you to control Pro Tools from the Remote Layer 2. In this case, the Remote Layer 1 Target

parameter is automatically set to No Assign.

220 Chapter 17—Remote Control

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Display

While the Pro Tools layer is selected, you can use the [F2]–[F4] buttons as well as the left

and right [ ]/[ ] Tab Scroll buttons to select display modes. You can select the follow-

ing display modes using these buttons:

■ Insert Display mode ( [F2] button)

Press the [F2] button to select Insert Display mode. In this mode, you can assign and edit

plug-ins.

A TARGET

This parameter enables you to select the remote control target device.

B COUNTER

This counter indicates the current position. This counter works in unison with the time-

code counter on Pro Tools. The display format of the counter is speciﬁed in Pro Tools.

The following three check boxes in the COUNTER section indicate the cur-

rently-selected format.

• TIME CODE:................Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Time Code.”

• FEET: ............................. Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Feet:Frames.”

• BEATS:........................... Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Bars:Beats.”

• If no check boxes are selected:...........Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Min-

utes:Seconds” or “Samples.”

C SELECT ASSIGN

This parameter indicates the current function of the Encoders. For example, Pan, PanR,

SndA, SndB, SndC, SndD, or SndE (see page 222).

D P.WHEEL MODE

This parameter indicates the function currently assigned to the Parameter wheel (see

page 224).

Pro Tools Remote Layer 221

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Remote Control

E INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section

This section enables you to insert plug-ins into Pro Tools channels and adjust plug-in

settings. Use the left and right [ ]/[ ] Tab Scroll buttons to change the parameters

displayed in this section.

• ASSIGN .........................Turn on this button to insert plug-ins into Pro Tools channels.

(If you are using the TDM system, you can also assign outboard

effects processors.)

• COMPARE ....................You can compare your edits with the original settings by turn-

ing on this button. This button works in unison with the Com-

pare button in the Pro Tools Inserts and Sends windows.

• BYPASS..........................Turning on this button bypasses the plug-ins (see page 231).

• INSERT/PARAM..........Switching this button to INSERT enables you to assign plug-ins

using four rotary controls on the page. Switching this button to

PARAM enables you to adjust the plug-in parameters using the

four rotary controls (see page 230).

• Information box ..........This box displays plug-in parameter names, values, alarm mes-

sages from Pro Tools, etc.

• Rotary controls 1–4.....These controls enable you to select plug-ins or adjust the

selected plug-in parameters.

■ Channel Display mode ( [F3] button)

Press the [F3] button to select this display mode, in which the parameter controls for tracks

1–16 are displayed.

• Parameter controls 1–16 ................... Channel parameter controls, such as channel

1–16 panpots, Send A–E send levels, etc. are dis-

played.

222 Chapter 17—Remote Control

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

■ Meter Display mode ( [F4] button)

Press the [F4] button to select this display mode, in which the level meters for tracks 1–16

are displayed.

• Channels 1–16.............. The channel 1–16 levels or Send levels are displayed.

Control Surface Operation

When the Pro Tools Remote Layer is selected, the DM1000 controls on the top panel engage

the following functions:

■ Channel Strip section

• Encoders

Encoders adjust the panpots or Aux Send levels. Use the ENCODER MODE [PAN] or

[AUX] button to select a parameter to edit.

• [SEL] buttons

These buttons select Pro Tools channels, inserts, and Automation mode. By default, these

buttons select channels.

• [SOLO] buttons

These buttons solo Pro Tools channels. The button indicators for the soloed channels light

up.

• [ON] buttons

These buttons mute Pro Tools channels.

• Faders

The faders set Pro Tools channel levels, including the audio tracks, MIDI tracks, master

fader, Aux Ins, etc. If 16 or fewer channels are displayed in Pro Tools, faders are assigned

starting from the left-most channel.

■ STEREO section

• [AUTO] button

This button switches Pro Tools Automation mode.

Pro Tools Remote Layer 223

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Remote Control

■ AUX SELECT Section

• [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons

These buttons select Sends A–E so that you can adjust the corresponding Pro Tools channel

send level.

• [AUX 6] button

Press and hold down this button and press the desired [SEL] button to reset the correspond-

ing channel fader level.

Press and hold down this button and press the desired Encoder push-switch to reset the cor-

responding channel panpot to center. While you are holding down the [AUX 6] button, the

SELECT ASSIGN parameter indicates “DFLT.”

• [AUX 8] button

Use this button along with the desired [SEL] button to assign a plug-in to the corresponding

Pro Tools channel.

■ ENCODER MODE section

•[PAN] button

When you turn on this button, the Encoders function as Pro Tools channel panpots.

• [AUX] button

When you turn on this button, the Encoders function as Send A–E level controls. AUX Send

destination is selected in the AUX SELECT section. When you press this button, Send A is

selected as the destination automatically.

If the Encoders are currently set to control the Send A–E levels, the button indicator lights

up.

■ FADER MODE section

•[FADER/AUX] button

This button selects Flip mode (see page 228) for faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons.

■ DISPLAY ACCESS section

• [AUTOMIX] button

To display channel Automation mode, press this button while a Channel Display mode or

Meter Display mode page is selected.

•[PAIR/GROUP] button

Press this button while a Channel Display mode or Meter Display mode page is selected to

display a Group ID to which each channel belongs.

• [EFFECT] button

Press this button to display or hide the Inserts window in Pro Tools.

■ Display section

•Tab Scroll buttons

These buttons switch the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT parameter settings on Insert Display

mode pages.

• [F1] button

Press this button to turn off the Peak Hold indicator on Meter Display mode pages.

224 Chapter 17—Remote Control

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

■ SELECTED CHANNEL Section

• ROUTING [1] button

Selects the previous track to be controlled by the Joystick.

• ROUTING [2] button

Selects the next track to be controlled by the Joystick.

• ROUTING [3] button

Functions the same as the [OPTION] key on a computer keyboard.

• ROUTING [4] button

Switches between L and R of the selected track. The [4] button indicator lights up when the

R channel is selected.

• ROUTING [5] button

Selects Main, or Send (in this order) for the selected track.

• ROUTING [6] button

Selects a controller mode for Panner operation. The button does not affect the DM1000’s

operation.

• ROUTING [7] button

Selects Send, or Main (in this order) for the selected track.

• ROUTING [8] button

Mutes or unmutes the selected track. The [8] button indicator lights up while the track is

muted.

• ROUTING [DIRECT] button

Functions the same as the [SHIFT] key on the computer keyboard.

• [GRAB] button

Press this button, turning on the button indicator, then operate the Joystick to quickly set

the pan position.

• Joystick

Operating the Joystick while the [GRAB] button indicator is turned on enables you to

quickly set the pan position.

■ Data Entry section

• [ENTER] button

This button switches the on/off status of the buttons on the display.

• Left, Right, Up, Down ([ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]) cursor buttons

These buttons move the cursor on the display.

• [INC] & [DEC] buttons

The [INC] button works the same as the Enter key on your computer keyboard. The [DEC]

button works the same as the Esc key on your computer keyboard.

• Parameter wheel

The Parameter wheel enables you to adjust the currently-selected parameter, or execute the

shuttle and scrub operation. By default, it adjusts the value of the currently-selected param-

eter (The P.WHEEL MODE parameter indicates “Prm.”).

Pro Tools Remote Layer 225

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Remote Control

■ USER DEFINED KEYS section

• [1]–[12] buttons

You can assign one of 164 parameters to each of these buttons. In particular, if you assign

any of 53 Remote Control parameters to these buttons, you can operate the transport sec-

tion and select various Pro Tools modes from the DM1000 top panel. See page 274 for more

information on assigning the parameters to the buttons.

Parameter Function

DAW REC

Places Pro Tools in Record Enabled mode. The button indicator ﬂashes while

the transport section is stopped. The indicator lights up when recording starts.

DAW PLAY

Starts playback from the current cursor position.

DAW STOP

Stops playback and recording.

DAW FF

Fast forwards the cursor position.

DAW REW

Fast rewinds the cursor position.

DAW SHUTTLE

Switches Wheel mode to Shuttle.

DAW SCRUB

Switches Wheel mode to Scrub (Jog).

DAW AUDITION

You can audition the pre-roll, post-roll, in-point area, or out-point area by

holding down the button to which this function is assigned and pressing a

button to which DAW PRE, DAW POST, DAW IN, or DAW OUT is assigned.

DAW PRE

Plays back from the pre-roll point up to the beginning of the selected area.

DAW IN

Plays back from the beginning of the selected area for a duration speciﬁed as

the pre-roll.

DAW OUT

Plays back to the end of the selected area for a duration speciﬁed as the

post-roll.

DAW POST

Plays back from the end of the selected area for a duration speciﬁed as the

post-roll.

DAW RTZ

Moves the playback cursor to the beginning of the session.

DAW END

Moves the playback cursor to the end of the session.

DAW ONLINE

Toggles between on-line and off-line.

DAW LOOP

Toggles between Loop Playback on and off.

DAW QUICKPUNCH

Toggles between QuickPunch on and off.

DAW AUTO FADER

Correspond to the Automation Overwrite (Auto Enable) functions.

DAW AUTO MUTE

DAW AUTO PAN

DAW AUTO SEND

DAW AUTO PLUGIN

DAW AUTO SENDMUTE

DAW AUTO READ

Select Automation modes.

DAW AUTO TOUCH

DAW AUTO LATCH

DAW AUTO WRITE

DAW AUTO TRIM

DAW AUTO OFF

DAW AUTO SUSPEND

Cancels Automation recording and playback for all channels. When Automa-

tion is interrupted, the LED ﬂashes, and channel strip controls maintain the

current settings.

DAW AUTO STATUS

Displays the channel Automation mode (Read, Tch, Ltch, Wrt, or Off). The

mode setting appears at the bottom of each channel on a Channel or Meter

Display page when you press and hold the button to which this function is

assigned.

DAW GROUP STATUS

Displays a Group ID (to which each channel belongs) below each channel

number on a Channel or Meter Display page (in all caps for a main group and

in lowercase letters for a sub-group).

226 Chapter 17—Remote Control

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

DAW MONI STATUS

Pressing the key (to which this function is assigned) enables you to view the

current monitoring mode and the channel strip type.

DAW CREATE GROUP

Pressing the key (to which this function is assigned) enables you to execute

the function speciﬁed in the menu of the Pro Tools Group list.

DAW SUSPEND GROUP

Suspends all mix groups temporarily. Press the button again to undo suspen-

sion.

DAW WIN TRANSPORT

Shows or hides the Transport window.

DAW WIN INSERT

Shows or hides the Inserts window.

DAW WIN MIX/EDIT

Toggles between the Mix window and Edit window. (Both windows are not

displayed at the same time.)

DAW WIN MEM-LOC

Shows or hides the Memory Locations window.

DAW WIN STATUS

Shows or hides the Status window.

DAW UNDO

Executes the Edit menu’s Undo/Redo command.

DAW SAVE

Executes the Edit menu’s Save command.

DAW EDIT MODE

Pressing the button (to which this function is assigned) repeatedly selects

Shufﬂe, Slip, Spot, or Grid edit mode in this order.

DAW EDIT TOOL

Pressing the button (to which this function is assigned) repeatedly selects one

of seven edit tools (Zoomer, Trimmer, Selector, Grabber, Smart Tool, Scrubber,

and Pencil, in this order).

DAW SHIFT/ADD

Functions in the same way as Macintosh keyboard keys (Shift, Option, Con-

trol, and Alt). Pressing one of the buttons (to which these functions are

assigned) along with another button enables you to execute various com-

mands.

DAW OPTION/ALL

DAW CTRL/CLUCH

DAW ALT/FINE

DAW BANK +

Executes the Bank Swap operation. Pressing the button (to which this function

is assigned) switches the entire 16-channel bank.

DAW BANK –

DAW Channel +

Executes the Channel Scroll operation. Pressing the buttons (to which these

functions are assigned) enables you to scroll channels horizontally.

DAW Channel –

DAW REC/RDY 1

Pressing the buttons (to which these functions are assigned) places the corre-

sponding channel strips in Record Ready mode. At this time, the indicator of

the button you pressed ﬂashes. It lights up when recording starts.

DAW REC/RDY 2

DAW REC/RDY 3

DAW REC/RDY 4

DAW REC/RDY 5

DAW REC/RDY 6

DAW REC/RDY 7

DAW REC/RDY 8

DAW REC/RDY 9

DAW REC/RDY 10

DAW REC/RDY 11

DAW REC/RDY 12

DAW REC/RDY 13

DAW REC/RDY 14

DAW REC/RDY 15

DAW REC/RDY 16

DAW REC/RDY ALL

If no channel strips are in Record Enabled mode, pressing the button (to

which this function is assigned) places all channel strips in Record Enabled

mode. The button indicator ﬂashes if any channel strip in any bank is in

Record Enabled mode. Pressing the button while the button indicator is ﬂash-

ing cancels Record Enabled mode for all channel strips.

Parameter Function

Pro Tools Remote Layer 227

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Remote Control

Selecting Channels

To select a single Pro Tools channel, press the [SEL] button that corresponds to the desired

channel.

To select multiple Pro Tools channels simultaneously, while holding down one [SEL] but-

ton, press the [SEL] buttons of the other channels you wish to add. Press the [SEL] buttons

again to cancel the selection.

Setting Channel Levels

1 Make sure that the FADER MODE [FADER] indicator is lit steadily.

If the FADER MODE [FADER] and [AUX] indicators are ﬂashing alternately, press the

[FADER/AUX] button to turn on the [FADER] indicator.

2 Operate the faders to set channel levels.

Press and hold down the [AUX 6] button and press the desired [SEL] button to reset the

corresponding channel fader level.

Muting Channels

To mute Pro Tools channels, press the [ON] buttons. The [ON] button indicators of muted

channels turn off. Grouped channels are muted together.

Press the [ON] buttons again to unmute channels. The [ON] button indicators of unmuted

channels light up.

There are two mute modes in Pro Tools: Implicit mute and Explicit mute. You can check the

mute mode by viewing the [ON] button indicators.

• Implicit mute................This is a forced mute mode in which the channels are muted

because other channels are soloed. In this mode, the [ON] but-

ton indicators ﬂash.

• Explicit mute ................In this mode, the channels are muted or turned off manually.

In this mode, the [ON] button indicators turn off.

Panning Channels

You can adjust the Pro Tools channel pan settings.

1 Press the ENCODER MODE [PAN] button.

2 Press the [F2] button to select Channel Display mode.

On a Channel Display mode page, parameter controls 1–16 indicate the pan settings.

3 For stereo channel pan settings, press the [PAN] button again. The button

indicator ﬂashes.

Pressing the [PAN] button repeatedly toggles between the left and right panpots. When the

left panpot is active, the SELECT ASSIGN parameter of the display indicates “Pan.” When

the right panpot is active, the SELECT ASSIGN parameter indicates “PanR.”

4Turn the Encoders to pan the channels.

Press and hold down the [AUX 6] button and press the desired Encoder push-switch to reset

the corresponding channel panpot to center.

Soloing Channels

To solo Pro Tools channels, press the [SOLO] buttons of the desired channels. Grouped

channels are soloed together, and other channels are muted.

Press the [SOLO] buttons again to unsolo the channels.

228 Chapter 17—Remote Control

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Conﬁguring Sends A–E as Pre or Post

You can set Pro Tools channels for the selected Sends (A–E) to pre or post.

1 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons to select the desired Sends

(A–E).

The selected button indicators light up. Send pre/post status can be viewed in Channel Dis-

play or Meter Display mode by pressing and holding down the [AUX1]–[AUX5] buttons.

2 Press the Encoder push-switches for the desired channels.

Pressing the Encoder push-switches repeatedly toggles between pre and post.

You can set Sends as pre or post by pressing the Encoder push-switches if faders, Encoders,

and [ON] buttons are in Flip mode. See page 228 for more information.

Setting Send Levels

You can adjust Pro Tools Send (A–E) send levels as follows.

1 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons to select the desired Sends

(A–E).

2 Rotate the Encoders for the desired channels.

You can set Send levels by rotating the Encoders if faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons are

in Flip mode. Refer to “Flip Mode” for more information.

Muting Sends A–E

You can mute Sends by pressing the [ON] buttons if faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons

are in Flip mode. Refer to “Flip Mode” for more information.

Panning Sends A–E

You can pan only Sends assigned to stereo destinations by rotating the Encoders if faders,

Encoders, and [ON] buttons are in Flip mode. Refer to the next section for more informa-

tion.

Flip Mode

In Flip mode, you can use the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons to control send levels,

pre/post positions, and mute settings as shown in the following table.

1 Press the FADER MODE [FADER/AUX] button.

The FADER MODE [FADER] and [AUX] indicators ﬂash alternately, and the SELECT

ASSIGN parameter on the display indicates “FLIP.”

2 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons to select the desired Sends

(A–E).

The button indicator of the selected send lights up.

Control Normal mode Flip Mode

Faders

Channel level Send level

Encoders

Channel pan/send level Send pan

Encoder push-switches

Encoder mode is Pan: inactive;

Encoder mode is Send level: Send pre/post

Send pre/post

[ON] buttons

Channel mute Send mute

Pro Tools Remote Layer 229

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Remote Control

3 Use the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons to control the currently-selected

send.

For stereo Aux input channels, you can set the left and right panpots individually. To do this,

press the ENCODER MODE [PAN] button repeatedly. When the button indicator is lit

continuously, you can set the left panpot. When the button indicator is ﬂashing, you can set

the right panpot.

Assigning Plug-ins to Pro Tools Channels

You can assign plug-ins to ﬁve inserts available for Pro Tools channel strips as follows.

1 Press the [F2] button to select Insert Display mode.

2 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 8] button.

The [AUX 8] button indicator ﬂashes. You can now select a channel to which you want to

insert plug-ins.

3 Press the [SEL] button of each desired channel.

4 Make sure that the INSERT button (

1) is selected in the INSERT

ASSIGN/EDIT section.

If the PARAM button is selected instead, move the cursor to the button, then press

[ENTER] to select INSERT.

5 Move the cursor to the ASSIGN button (

2), then press [ENTER] to turn on

the button.

You can now select plug-ins. If you press another channel’s [SEL] button after you turn on

the ASSIGN button, the button turns off. If you wish to assign plug-ins to other channels,

turn on the ASSIGN button again.

6 Move the cursor to one of the four parameter controls, then rotate the

Parameter wheel to select a plug-in.

By default, the parameter controls enable you to select plug-ins to be assigned to channel

inserts #1–#4. To assign a plug-in to insert #5, press the Tab Scroll button [ ] to change

the indication in the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section.

If you are using the TDM system, you can also assign outboard effects processors.

230 Chapter 17—Remote Control

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

7 Press [ENTER] to conﬁrm the assignment.

Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to assign more plug-ins to other insert positions in the channel strip.

8 In the same way, assign plug-ins to other channels.

9 When you ﬁnish assigning plug-ins, press the [AUX 8] button.

The button indicator turns off.

Editing Plug-ins

You can edit plug-ins inserted in the channel strips as follows:

1 Press the [F2] button to select Insert Display mode.

2 Press the corresponding [SEL] button to select the channel that was assigned

the plug-in you want to edit.

3 In the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section, move the cursor to the parameter con-

trol (Insert 1–4) that was assigned the parameter you want to edit.

4 Press [ENTER] to display the parameters.

In the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section, the PARAM button is automatically selected and the

Information box indicates the selected plug-in parameters.

You can now use parameter controls 1–4 and the [ENTER] button to adjust the parameters.

5 Use the Tab Scroll buttons to display the parameter value you wish to

change.

Most plug-ins feature ﬁve or more parameters. To edit the ﬁfth or subsequent parameters,

use the Tab Scroll buttons to display the desired parameters and their values in the INSERT

ASSIGN/EDIT section. The current page number and the plug-in name appear for a

moment immediately after you press the Tab Scroll buttons.

Note: To adjust a plug-in assigned to insert #5, press the Tab Scroll button [ ] to change

the parameter indication in the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section, then select a parameter con-

trol.

Pro Tools Remote Layer 231

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Remote Control

6 Move the cursor to a parameter control, then rotate the Parameter wheel

or press the [ENTER] button to adjust the value.

One or two parameters are assigned to a single parameter control. To turn the parameter

setting on or off, press [ENTER]. To modify the parameter variable, rotate the Parameter

wheel.

7 When you ﬁnish adjusting the parameters, move the cursor to the PARAM

button, then press [ENTER] to switch it to INSERT.

Bypassing Plug-ins

You can bypass plug-ins assigned to Pro Tools channels.

Before bypassing plug-ins, you must press the corresponding [SEL] button to select a chan-

nel to which the plug-ins have been assigned, then press the [F2] button to select Insert Dis-

play mode.

To bypass plug-ins, display the parameters of the plug-in you wish to bypass in the INSERT

ASSIGN/EDIT section, then turn on the BYPASS button.

232 Chapter 17—Remote Control

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Scrub & Shuttle

By assigning the DAW SCRUB parameter to one of the User Deﬁned buttons [1]–[12], you

can scrub Pro Tools tracks back and forth by turning the Parameter wheel. By assigning the

DAW SHUTTLE parameter to one of the User Deﬁned buttons [1]–[12], you can shuttle

back and forth by turning the Parameter wheel.

1 Assign the DAW SCRUB or DAW SHUTTLE parameter to one of the User

Deﬁned buttons [1]–[12].

Before assigning parameters to these buttons, you must switch layers to cancel the Remote

function. See page 274 for more information on assigning the parameters to the User

Deﬁned buttons.

2 Press the LAYER [REMOTE 1] or [REMOTE 2] button to enable remote control

of Pro Tools.

3 Make sure that Pro Tools is stopped.

4 Press the User Deﬁned button to which you assigned the DAW SCRUB or

DAW SHUTTLE parameter in Step 1.

You can now use the Scrub or Shuttle function.

5 Rotate the Parameter wheel.

Rotate the Parameter wheel clockwise to scrub or shuttle forwards. Turn it counterclock-

wise to scrub or shuttle backwards.

The minimum scrub playback step varies depending on the zoom setting in the Pro Tools

Edit window.

6To cancel the Scrub or Shuttle function, press the User Deﬁned button to

which you assigned the DAW SCRUB or DAW SHUTTLE parameter in Step 1.

Alternatively, you can cancel the Scrub or Shuttle function by pressing the User Deﬁned

button to which the DAW STOP parameter is assigned. The Scrub or Shuttle function is

automatically cancelled if you commence playback or fast forward.

Note: The Scrub/Shuttle operation might be stopped unexpectedly by Pro Tools. Therefore,

whenever you use the Scrub or Shuttle function, make sure that the P.WHEEL MODE param-

eter indicates “SCRUB” or “SHUTTLE.” You can check the Scrub/Shuttle function status by

viewing the corresponding User Deﬁned button indicator.

Pro Tools Remote Layer 233

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Remote Control

Automation

You can view the Pro Tools Automation mode as follows:

1 Press the [F3] or [F4] button to display the channels for remote control.

2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button.

The channel’s Automation settings are displayed.

While the STEREO [AUTO] button is on, the channel [SEL] button indicators also display

the channel’s Automation mode.

Pro Tools Display [SEL] Button Indicators

Auto write

Wrt

Flashing red (Record Ready)

Red (Recording)

Auto touch

Tch

Auto latch

Ltch

Auto read

Read Green

Auto off

Off Off

Tip: If you assign the parameter that controls Automation to one of the User Deﬁned buttons,

you can control the Automation settings by holding down the programmed User Deﬁned but-

ton and pressing the [SEL] button of the target channel. See page 274 for more information

on assigning parameters to User Deﬁned buttons.

234 Chapter 17—Remote Control

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Using the Panner

■ Selecting a Track

Use the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING buttons to manipulate the following track

operations.

■ Stereo Track Link

You can control the panner for the L and R channels of stereo tracks simultaneously or indi-

vidually, depending on the stereo link status.

To cancel the stereo panner link, press and hold down the [Control] key on the keyboard

and move the Joystick.

■ Panner Operation via the Joystick

1 Select the track you wish to pan.

2 Press the [GRAB] button, turning on the [GRAB] button indicator.

3 While the [GRAB] button indicator is lit, operate the Joystick.

If you move the Joystick for direct panning while the [GRAB] button indicator is lit, the pan

position is speciﬁed as an absolute value, which may cause the pan position to jump dras-

tically.

You can also restrict the trajectory direction of the Joystick. To limit movement to the L and

R directions, press and hold down the [DIRECT] button and move the Joystick. To limit

movement to the up and down (front and rear) directions, select 3 Knob mode in the Pro

To ols Panner window.

To do this... Use these buttons:

Selecting the previous track ROUTING [1] button

Selecting the next track ROUTING [2] button

Selecting the top track ROUTING [3] + [1] buttons

Selecting the last track ROUTING [3] + [2] buttons

Selecting the main output of the selected track ROUTING [3] + [5] buttons

Selecting Send 5 of the selected track ROUTING [3] + [7] buttons

Selecting the output/send of the selected track ROUTING [5] + [7] buttons

Nuendo/Cubase SX Remote Layer 235

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Remote Control

Nuendo/Cubase SX Remote Layer

You can remotely control Nuendo and Cubase SX using Remote Layers 1 and 2.

■ Conﬁguring Computers

1 Connect the DM1000 to your computer using a USB cable, and install the

required USB driver included on the DM1000 CD-ROM.

Refer to the Studio Manager installation guide for more information on installing the

driver.

2 Launch Nuendo/Cubase SX, select the Device Setup menu, and set up

Nuendo/Cubase SX so that the DM1000 can communicate with the soft-

ware.

Refer to the Nuendo/Cubase SX User’s Manual for more information on setting up the soft-

ware.

■ Conﬁguring the DM1000

1 Refer to page 218 to conﬁgure the Setup | MIDI/HOST page.

2 Press the LAYER [REMOTE 1] or [REMOTE 2] button to set the TARGET param-

eter to Nuendo/Cubase SX.

You can now remotely control Nuendo/Cubase SX using the selected Remote Layer.

Other DAW Remote Layers

You can remotely control DAW software that supports the Pro Tools protocol.

■ Conﬁguring Computers

1 Connect the DM1000 to your computer using a USB cable, and install the

required USB driver included on the DM1000 CD-ROM.

Refer to the Studio Manager installation guide for more information on installing the

driver.

2 Launch and set up DAW software so that the DM1000 communicates with

the software.

Refer to the DAW software’s user’s manual for more information on setting up the software.

■ Conﬁguring the DM1000

1 Refer to page 218 to conﬁgure the Setup | MIDI/HOST page.

2 Press the LAYER [REMOTE 1] or [REMOTE 2] button to set the TARGET param-

eter to General DAW.

You can now remotely control DAW software using the selected Remote Layer.

236 Chapter 17—Remote Control

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

MIDI Remote Layer

If you select USER DEFINED as the target for Remote Layer 1 or 2, you can remotely control

the parameters of external MIDI devices (such as synthesizers and tone generators) by oper-

ating the channel Encoders, [ON] buttons, and faders to output various MIDI messages.

(This is called MIDI Remote function.)

You can store MIDI messages assigned to the channel controls in four banks. When the

DM1000 is shipped from the factory, it includes main MIDI settings in these banks, which

you can quickly recall to use the MIDI Remote function.

If necessary, you can also assign other MIDI messages to the faders, [ON] buttons, or

Encoders to remotely control the parameters of a connected MIDI device.

Using the MIDI Remote Function

This section describes how to use Remote Layer 2 to recall and use the factory-preset MIDI

Remote settings stored in the banks.

By default, the DM1000’s four MIDI Remote banks (Banks 1–4) contain the following

MIDI messages.

1 Connect the DM1000’s MIDI OUT port to the MIDI IN port of the MIDI

device.

Bank Usage

Control Function

Encoders [ON] buttons Faders

1 Panning and setting GM sound levels Pan — Volume

Setting GM sound effect send levels/Adjust-

ing volume levels

Effect Send — Volume

3 Panning and setting XG sound levels Pan — Volume

Adjusting pan, mute, and levels for Cubase

series mixer

Pan Mute Volume

AUXPAN

DISPLAY

ASSIGN

ENCODER MODE

EQUALIZER

LOW

HIGH

GAIN

FREQUENCY

LOW MID

HIGH MID

ROUTING

STEREO DIRECT

DISPLAY DISPLAY

SELECTED CHANNEL

BUS 8

32 48

BUS 7

31 47

BUS 6

30 46

BUS 5

29 45

BUS 4

28 44

BUS 3

27 43

16151413121110

20dB

ONOFF

+48V

78 1213 14 15

91011

1615141312111098765432

PEAK

SIGNAL

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PAD

20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 1

17 33

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 2

18 34

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 3

19 35

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 4

20 36

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 5

21 37

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 6

22 38

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 7

23 39

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 8

24 40

+10

SOLO

SEL

BUS 1

25 41

+10

SOLO

SEL

+10

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

BUS 2

26 42

AUTO

SEL

STEREO

AUX2 AUX3 AUX 4

AUX6AUX5 AUX7 AUX8

AUXSELECT

DISPLAY

AUX1

FADER MODE

FADER

AUX

DISPLAYACCESS

AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY

MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW

PAIR/G ROUP

INPUT

OUTPUT

EFFECTSURROUND DYNAMICS SCENE

PAN/

INSERT/DELAY

PATCH

GRAB

SCENE MEMORY

STORERECALL

DISPLAY

USER DEFINED

KEYS

ENTER

INC

DEC

TALKBACK LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL

010

PHONES

MONITOR

LEVEL

SOLO CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

DIMMER

TALKBACK

MONITOR

STEREO

SLOT

BUS

DISPLAY

100

F1 F2 F3

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

REC

SONG SCENE

MUSIC

PRODUCTION

SYNTHESIZER

Integrated

Sampling

Sequencer

Real-timeExternalControl

Surface

Modular

SynthesisPlug-in

System

MIDI OUT

Synthesizer

MIDI IN

MIDI Remote Layer 237

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Remote Control

2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |

MIDI/Host page appears.

3 Move the cursor to the REMOTE 2 parameter box (

1) in the SPECIAL FUNC-

TIONS section, rotate the Parameter wheel to select MIDI, then press

[ENTER].

If the MIDI port is already in use, a conﬁrmation window for changing the assignment

appears. Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER].

4 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, then press the [F2] button.

The Remote | Remote 2 page appears.

5 Move the cursor to the TARGET parameter box, rotate the Parameter wheel

to select USER DEFINED, then press [ENTER].

The conﬁrmation window for changing the setting appears. Move the cursor to the YES

button, then press [ENTER]. The display changes as follows:

A TRANSMIT ENABLE/DISABLE

This button switches the MIDI Remote function between enable and disable.

B INITIALIZE

This button resets the settings stored in the bank selected by the BANK parameter to the

default setting.

C BANK

This parameter enables you to select one of four banks.

Tip: If the REMOTE 2 parameter box is grayed out, proceed to Steps 4 and 5 to set the TARGET

parameter, then return to Steps 2 and 3.

238 Chapter 17—Remote Control

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

D ID, SHORT, LONG

These parameters display the channel names. The ID parameter displays the channel ID

(RM01–RM16) for the currently-controlled MIDI device.

E ON section

This section displays the type of MIDI messages (in hexadecimal or alphabet) assigned

to the [ON] buttons for the currently-selected channels (RM01–RM16).

• LATCH/UNLATCH .....This button toggles between Latch and Unlatch for [ON] but-

ton operation.

• LEARN ..........................When you turn on this button, MIDI messages received at the

MIDI IN port are assigned to the DATA parameter boxes.

• DATA parameter boxes.......................These boxes display the type of MIDI messages

(in hexadecimal or alphabets) assigned to the

[ON] button).

F ENCODER section

This section displays the type of MIDI messages (in hexadecimal or alphabet) assigned

to the Encoders for the currently-selected channels (RM01–RM16).

G FADER section

This section displays the type of MIDI messages (in hexadecimal or alphabet) assigned

to the faders for the currently-selected channels (RM01–RM16).

6 Move the cursor to the desired bank button (BANK parameter buttons 1–4),

then press [ENTER].

7 Press the LAYER [REMOTE 2] button to select Remote Layer 2.

You can now use the MIDI Remote function.

8 Use the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons to control the MIDI device.

MIDI Remote Layer 239

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Remote Control

Assigning MIDI Messages to Channel Controls

You can quickly use the MIDI Remote function if you use the factory presets in the banks.

However, you can also assign the desired MIDI messages to the faders, [ON] buttons, or

Encoders.

This section describes how to assign MIDI messages to the channel controls, using the

example of assigning Hold On/Off messages (Control Change #64; Values 127 & 0) to the

Channel 1 [ON] button.

1 Connect the DM1000’s MIDI IN port to the MIDI OUT port of a MIDI key-

board to which a Hold On/Off controllable foot switch is connected. Enable

the MIDI Remote function on the DM1000.

2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, then the [F2] button to display

the Remote | Remote 2 page. Rotate the Parameter wheel to set the TARGET

parameter to USER DEFINED.

You can now use the MIDI Remote function. Refer to the previous section for more infor-

mation on using the MIDI Remote function.

3 Move the cursor to the desired bank button (BANK parameter buttons 1–4),

then press [ENTER].

4 Press the [SEL] buttons for the desired channels.

Currently-assigned MIDI messages appear in the ON, ENCODER, and FADER sections.

5 Move the cursor to the LEARN button in the ON section, then press [ENTER].

MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN port of the DM1000 will be assigned to the DATA

parameter boxes in the ON section.

Tip: You can also choose the desired channels using the ID, SHORT, and LONG parameters.

AUXPAN

DISPLAY

ASSIGN

ENCODER MODE

EQUALIZER

LOW

HIGH

GAIN

FREQUENCY

LOW MID

HIGH MID

ROUTING

STEREO DIRECT

DISPLAY DISPLAY

SELECTED CHANNEL

BUS 8

32 48

BUS 7

31 47

BUS 6

30 46

BUS 5

29 45

BUS 4

28 44

BUS 3

27 43

16151413121110

20dB

ONOFF

+48V

78 1213 14 15

91011

1615141312111098765432

PEAK

SIGNAL

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PAD

20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 1

17 33

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 2

18 34

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 3

19 35

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 4

20 36

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 5

21 37

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 6

22 38

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 7

23 39

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 8

24 40

+10

SOLO

SEL

BUS 1

25 41

+10

SOLO

SEL

+10

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

BUS 2

26 42

AUTO

SEL

STEREO

AUX2 AUX3 AUX 4

AUX6AUX5 AUX7 AUX8

AUXSELECT

DISPLAY

AUX1

FADER MODE

FADER

AUX

DISPLAYACCESS

AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY

MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW

PAIR/GROUP

INPUT

OUTPUT

EFFECTSURROUND DYNAMICS SCENE

PAN/

INSERT/DELAY

PATCH

GRAB

SCENE MEMORY

STORE RECALL

DISPLAY

USER DEFINED

KEYS

ENTER

INC

DEC

TALKBACK LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL

010

PHONES

MONITOR

LEVEL

SOLO CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

DIMMER

TALKBACK

MONITOR

STEREO

SLOT

BUS

DISPLAY

100

F1 F2 F3

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

MIDI OUT

MIDI keyboard

MIDI INMIDI OUTMIDI IN

Foot switch

240 Chapter 17—Remote Control

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

6 Press and hold down the MIDI keyboard foot switch.

The MIDI Hold On message is assigned in the DATA parameter box.

MIDI messages are described below:

• 00–7F ............................. MIDI messages are expressed in hexadecimal.

• END ............................... This message indicates the end of MIDI messages. Subsequent

messages assigned in the DATA parameter boxes will be

ignored.

• –...................................... This message indicates that no messages are assigned to the

DATA parameter boxes.

7 While continuing to hold down the foot switch, turn off the LEARN button.

8 Move the cursor to the third parameter box (“7F” in this example), then

rotate the Parameter wheel to change the value to SW.

“SW” is a variable that changes depending on the [ON] button’s on/off status. You can use

the following variables in MIDI messages.

• SW.................................. This variable is selectable only in the DATA parameter boxes of

the ON section. When the [ON] buttons are turned on, “7F”

(127 in decimal) is output. When the [ON] buttons are turned

off, “00” (0 in decimal) is output.

• ENC................................ This setting is selectable only in the DATA parameter boxes of

the ENCODER section. When you operate the Encoders, values

in the range of 00 to 7F (0–127 in decimal) are output.

• FAD ................................This setting is selectable only in the DATA parameter boxes of

the FADER section. When you operate the faders, values in the

range of 00 to 7F (0–127 in decimal) are output.

Tip: When you click the LEARN button to assign MIDI messages, the DM1000 automatically

recognizes the end of the messages and assigns END and “–.”

Tip: If “SW” is not assigned in the DATA parameter boxes of the ON section, the current MIDI

messages are output.

Note: Be sure to set variables in the ENCODER and FADER sections. If no variables are

assigned, operation of the Encoders or faders is ignored.

MIDI Remote Layer 241

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Remote Control

9 Move the cursor to the LATCH/UNLATCH button, then press [ENTER] to

select LATCH or UNLATCH depending on how you want the [ON] buttons

to function.

• LATCH...........................Pressing the [ON] buttons repeatedly transmits alternating On

and Off messages.

• UNLATCH....................Pressing and holding down the [ON] buttons transmits On

messages, and releasing the [ON] buttons transmits Off mes-

sages.

■ When “SW” is assigned:

-LATCH

- UNLATCH

■ When “SW” is not assigned:

- UNLATCH

10 To change the channel name, move the cursor to the ID LONG parameter

box, then press [ENTER] to display the Title Edit window.

See page 32 for more information on editing names.

Tip: Refer to the diagrams below for information on how the [ON] buttons behave when Latch

or Unlatch is selected.

Tip: In most situations, select Unlatch if SW is not assigned.

Tip:

•Move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then press [ENTER]. A window is displayed

that enables you to reset the parameter settings in the currently-selected bank.

•You can also assign MIDI messages to the parameter boxes manually without using the

LEARN button.

Off Illuminated Off

MIDI data transmission

(SW=7F)

MIDI data transmission

(SW=00)

Off Off

MIDI data transmission

(SW=7F)

MIDI data transmission

(SW=00)

Illuminated

MIDI data transmission

Off OffIlluminated

242 Chapter 17—Remote Control

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Machine Control Function

The DM1000 can control the transport functions and select tracks on external recording

machines that support MMC and the P2 protocol by transmitting commands via the MIDI

OUT port and REMOTE connector respectively.

1 Refer to the diagram below for information on connecting the DM1000 to

an external device.

2To control a device that supports the P2 protocol, press the DISPLAY ACCESS

[SETUP] button repeatedly to display the Setup | Remote page, then set the

REMOTE FUNCTION parameter (

1) to “P2-DFLT.”

This page enables you to select the type of signals transmitted or received via the REMOTE

connector. See page 287 for more information.

Tip: P2 protocol is used by Tascam DA-98HR and other professional video machines. The

DM1000 is capable of transmitting P2 protocol commands via the REMOTE connector.

Note: Controllable parameters vary depending on the connected devices. Refer to the User’s

Manual for the external device for more information on controllable parameters.

Tip: For the REMOTE FUNCTION parameter, you can also select P2-VTR1, P2-VTR2, or

P2-VTR3 as a P2 protocol format. These three options are provided to support future P2 pro-

tocol supporting devices. Currently, they are identical to P2-DFLT.

AUXPAN

DISPLAY

ASSIGN

ENCODER MODE

EQUALIZER

LOW

HIGH

GAIN

FREQUENCY

LOW MID

HIGH MID

ROUTING

STEREO DIRECT

DISPLAY DISPLAY

SELECTED CHANNEL

BUS 8

32 48

BUS 7

31 47

BUS 6

30 46

BUS 5

29 45

BUS 4

28 44

BUS 3

27 43

16151413121110

20dB

ONOFF

+48V

78 1213 14 15

91011

1615141312111098765432

PEAK

SIGNAL

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PAD

20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 1

17 33

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 2

18 34

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 3

19 35

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 4

20 36

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 5

21 37

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 6

22 38

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 7

23 39

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 8

24 40

+10

SOLO

SEL

BUS 1

25 41

+10

SOLO

SEL

+10

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

BUS 2

26 42

AUTO

SEL

STEREO

AUX2 AUX3 AUX 4

AUX6AUX5 AUX7 AUX8

AUXSELECT

DISPLAY

AUX1

FADER MODE

FADER

AUX

DISPLAYACCESS

AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY

MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW

PAIR/G ROUP

INPUT

OUTPUT

EFFECTSURROUND DYNAMICS SCENE

PAN/

INSERT/DELAY

PATCH

GRAB

SCENE MEMORY

STORERECALL

DISPLAY

USER DEFINED

KEYS

ENTER

INC

DEC

TALKBA CK LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL

010

PHONES

MONITOR

LEVEL

SOLO CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

DIMMER

TALKBACK

MONITOR

STEREO

SLOT

BUS

DISPLAY

100

F1 F2 F3

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

AUXPAN

DISPLAY

ASSIGN

ENCODER MODE

EQUALIZER

LOW

HIGH

GAIN

FREQUENCY

LOW MID

HIGH MID

ROUTING

STEREO DIRECT

DISPLAY DISPLAY

SELECTED CHANNEL

BUS 8

32 48

BUS 7

31 47

BUS 6

30 46

BUS 5

29 45

BUS 4

28 44

BUS 3

27 43

16151413121110

20dB

ONOFF

+48V

78 1213 14 15

91011

1615141312111098765432

PEAK

SIGNAL

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PAD

20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 1

17 33

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 2

18 34

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 3

19 35

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 4

20 36

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 5

21 37

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 6

22 38

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 7

23 39

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 8

24 40

+10

SOLO

SEL

BUS 1

25 41

+10

SOLO

SEL

+10

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

BUS 2

26 42

AUTO

SEL

STEREO

AUX2 AUX3 AUX 4

AUX6AUX5 AUX7 AUX8

AUXSELECT

DISPLAY

AUX1

FADER MODE

FADER

AUX

DISPLAYACCESS

AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY

MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW

PAIR/GROUP

INPUT

OUTPUT

EFFECTSURROUND DYNAMICS SCENE

PAN/

INSERT/DELAY

PATCH

GRAB

SCENE MEMORY

STORERECALL

DISPLAY

USER DEFINED

KEYS

ENTER

INC

DEC

TALKBACK LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL

010

PHONES

MONITOR

LEVEL

SOLO CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

DIMMER

TALKBACK

MONITOR

STEREO

SLOT

BUS

DISPLAY

100

F1 F2 F3

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

MIDI OUT

MMC-supported

machine

MIDI IN REMOTE connector

P2 protocol-

supported machine

RS422MIDI IN MIDI OUT

Machine Control Function 243

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Remote Control

3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |

MIDI/Host page appears.

4 Move the cursor to either the MMC button or P2 button in the MACHINE

CONTROL section (

1) to specify the remote control method, then press the

[ENTER] button.

In the MACHINE CONTROL section, you can also select the type of commands used on

the Remote | Machine Control page. The MMC button selects MMC commands, and the

P2 button select the P2 protocol.

5 If the MMC button is turned on, press the cursor [ ] button to move the

cursor to the PORT parameter box, then rotate the Parameter wheel to select

the MMC destination.

The following ports and slots are available as the MMC destination.

• MIDI ..............................MIDI port

• USB ................................USB port

• SLOT1............................Slot 1 with an MY8-mLAN (mLAN card) installed

• REMOTE.......................REMOTE connector

If USB is selected, move the cursor to the adjacent parameter box (on the right), and select

one of eight ports.

6 Move the cursor to the DEVICE ID parameter box, then rotate the Parameter

wheel to set the DM1000 MMC Device ID to the same ID number as the exter-

nal device.

MMC commands are effective on devices that use the same Device ID. Therefore, the

DM1000’s MMC Device ID needs to match the ID of the devices you wish to control.

244 Chapter 17—Remote Control

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

7To start remote control, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, then

press the [F3] button to display the Remote | Machine page.

This page contains the following parameters:

A LOCATE/TIME section

This section enables you to set the locate points.

• LOCATE 1–8................. These buttons locate the positions (speciﬁed by the TIME val-

ues) on external machines.

• RTZ ................................ This Return To Zero button locates the zero timecode position

on external machines.

• TIME.............................. Locate points are speciﬁed in hour/minute/second/frame for-

mat.

• CAPTURE.....................These buttons capture the current position on external

machines and import the information into the TIME column.

B TRACK ARMING section

This section controls the tracks on external machines.

• 1–24 buttons................. These buttons turn external tracks 1–24 on or off, and set or

cancel their Record Ready mode.

• ALL CLEAR .................. Turning on this button switches all buttons (1–24) simulta-

neously.

C TRANSPORT section

This section enables you to control the transport functions on external machines.

• REW............................... This button starts rewind on external machines.

• FF ................................... This button starts fast forward on external machines.

• STOP..............................This button stops external machines.

• PLAY .............................. This button starts playback on external machines.

• REC................................This button is used in conjunction with the PLAY button to

start recording on external machines.

D FRAMES

This parameter selects the timecode frame rate.

8To control the transport functions, move the cursor to the desired button in

the TRANSPORT section, then press [ENTER].

9 If you desire, move the cursor to the buttons and parameters in the

LOCATE/TIME section and the TRACK ARMING section, then press the

[ENTER] button or rotate the Parameter wheel to control the transport func-

tions on external machines.

MIDI 245

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

MIDI

18 MIDI

This chapter describes the DM1000’s MIDI-related functions.

MIDI & the DM1000

Using Control Changes, Program Changes, and other MIDI messages enables you to

recall Scenes and edit parameters on the DM1000, and store DM1000 internal data on

external MIDI devices.

The DM1000 supports the following MIDI messages. Each of these MIDI messages can be

individually turned on or off for transmission and reception.

• Program Changes

If you assign the DM1000’s Scenes to Program Change numbers, the DM1000 transmits

Program Changes when it recalls Scenes. Also, the DM1000 will switch Scenes when it

receives Program Changes.

• Control Changes

If you assign the DM1000’s parameters to Control Change numbers, the DM1000 transmits

the assigned Control Changes when the parameter values change. Also, the DM1000

changes certain parameter values when it receives the corresponding Control Changes.

• System Exclusive Messages

The DM1000 transmits System Exclusive Parameter Changes in real-time when the param-

eter values change. Also, the DM1000 notiﬁes certain parameter values when it receives

assigned Parameter Changes.

• MTC (MIDI Timecode)

The DM1000 uses MTC to synchronize Automix with a recorder or computer-based

sequencer.

• MIDI Clock

The DM1000 uses MIDI Clock to synchronize Automix with a MIDI device that does not

support MTC.

• MMC (MIDI Machine Control)

MMC is used for external machine control.

• MIDI Note On/Off

These messages are used to adjust the Freeze effect and Auto Pan 5.1.

• Bulk Dump Messages

These messages enable you to store the DM1000’s internal data to a sequencer or MIDI ﬁler.

When the DM1000 receives these messages, they overwrite the DM1000 data

The DM1000 features the following interface for transmitting and receiving MIDI data.

• MIDI IN & OUT ports

These ports transmit and receive MIDI data to and from standard MIDI devices. Each port

is a single port interface that transmits and receives single-port data (16 channels x 1 ports).

246 Chapter 18—MIDI

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

• USB port

This port is used to connect a computer and transfer MIDI messages. This is a multiport

interface that transmits and receives up to eight-port data (16 channels x 8 ports). If you

connect a computer to the USB port, you must install the appropriate driver software on

the computer. See the Studio Manager Installation Guide for more information on install-

ing drivers.

• REMOTE connector

This connector normally enables you to remotely control a Yamaha AD8HR/AD824 or a

device that supports Sony P2 protocol, or to make a cascade connection with another

DM1000. It also enables you to transfer MIDI messages.

To transfer MIDI messages, you need to set the parameters in the GENERAL section on the

Setup | MIDI/Host page to “MIDI” (see “Tx PORT”).

Note that a connection between the REMOTE connector and a computer’s COMM port

does not transfer MIDI messages.

• SLOT 1

Instaling an optional “MY8-MLAN” mLAN card in Slot 1 enables the DM1000 to transmit

and receive MIDI messages to and from the connected MIDI device.

MIDI Port Setup

Selecting a Port for MIDI Message Transfer

To conﬁgure MIDI ports for MIDI message transfer, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP]

button repeatedly until the Setup | MIDI/Host page appears. This page enables you to set

MIDI message input and output.

The following parameters are available on this page:

A GENERAL section

This section enables you to select ports that transmit and receive MIDI messages, such

as Program Changes and Control Changes.

Note: If the computer is turned on but the USB MIDI application has not been launched,

DM1000 performance may be slow. In this case, cancel the assignment of the USB port as the

MIDI message transmission port.

MIDI Port Setup 247

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

MIDI

• Rx PORT .......................This parameter speciﬁes a port for general MIDI data recep-

tion. In the left parameter box, select MIDI, USB, SLOT1, or

REMOTE. If you select USB, specify the port number in the

right parameter box.

• Tx PORT........................This parameter speciﬁes a port for general MIDI data transmis-

sion. The available ports are the same as for the Rx PORT

parameter.

B MIDI THRU section

These parameters enable you to route incoming MIDI data from one port to another

without changes. Select a port for reception in the ﬁrst parameter box, and select a port

for transmission in the next parameter box (located to the right of the arrow). If you

select USB, specify the port number in the small parameter box adjacent to the port

parameter box.

C MACHINE CONTROL section

This section enables you to select a remote control method and a remote control port to

control external devices, including hard disk recorders and video equipment.

• TYPE..............................Specify a type (method) of remote control by turning on either

the MMC (MIDI Machine Control) button or the P2 (Sony P2

protocol) button.

• PORT .............................Select MIDI, USB, SLOT1, or REMOTE for MMC command

transfer. If you select USB, specify the port number in the right

parameter box.

• DEVICE ID ...................Specify the DM1000’s MMC Device ID. MMC Device IDs

identify connected devices, enabling recognition during MMC

transmission and reception.

D SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section

This section enables you to specify ports for various special functions.

• Studio Manager............In the left parameter box, select MIDI, USB, SLOT1, or

REMOTE as the port used by the included Studio Manager

software. In the two small parameter boxes on the right, specify

a port number (if you selected USB), and an ID number.

• DAW...............................Select USB or SLOT1 as a port for use with a DAW. If you select

USB, specify in the right parameter box a port number pair

(1-3, 2-4, 3-5, 4-6, 5-7, 6-8).

• REMOTE 1....................This parameter indicates the target currently selected for

Remote Layer 1. If the target is set to “USER DEFINED,” you

can select a MIDI message destination port.

• REMOTE 2....................This parameter indicates the target currently selected for

Remote Layer 2. If the target is set to “USER DEFINED,” you

can select a MIDI message destination port.

• CASCADE LINK ..........Select MIDI or REMOTE as a port for DM1000 cascade con-

nection. The TRANSMIT and REQUEST buttons are used to

synchronize all parameters that are cascade-linked. The

TRANSMIT button synchronizes the connected DM1000’s

parameters to your primary DM1000’s parameters. The

REQUEST button synchronizes your DM1000 parameters to

the connected DM1000’s parameters.

248 Chapter 18—MIDI

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Selecting MIDI Messages for Transmission and Reception

You can select MIDI messages to be transmitted or received at a port speciﬁed in the GEN-

ERAL section on the Setup | MIDI/Host page (see page 246).

To do so, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button repeatedly until the MIDI | Setup page

appears.

Select MIDI channels for transmission and reception in the CHANNEL row, and turn the

transmission and reception of each MIDI message on or off using the buttons in the param-

eter rows from PROGRAM CHANGE to OTHER COMMANDS.

A CHANNEL

This parameter row enables you to specify MIDI Channels for MIDI message transmis-

sion and reception. The following parameters are available in this row:

• Tx ...................................This parameter box speciﬁes a MIDI Transmit Channel.

• Rx ................................... This parameter box speciﬁes a MIDI Receive Channel.

B PROGRAM CHANGE

This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Program

Changes.

• Tx ON/OFF................... Transmission of Program Change messages is enabled or dis-

abled.

• Rx ON/OFF................... Reception of Program Change messages is enabled or disabled.

• OMNI ON/OFF............ When this button is turned on, Program Changes on all MIDI

Channels are received regardless of the CHANNEL row set-

tings.

• ECHO ON/OFF ...........This button determines whether Program Change messages

received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI

OUT port.

C CONTROL CHANGE

This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Control Changes.

• Tx ON/OFF................... Transmission of Control Change messages is enabled or dis-

abled.

• Rx ON/OFF................... Reception of Control Change messages is enabled or disabled.

• ECHO ON/OFF ........... This button determines whether Control Change messages

received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI

OUT port.

D PARAMETER CHANGE

This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Parameter

Changes.

Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall 249

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

MIDI

• Tx ON/OFF...................Transmission of Parameter Change messages is enabled or dis-

abled.

• Rx ON/OFF

................... Reception of Parameter Change messages is enabled or disabled.

• ECHO ON/OFF............This button determines whether Parameter Change messages

received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI

OUT port.

E BULK

This parameter row enables or disables reception of Bulk Dump data.

• Rx ON/OFF...................Reception of Bulk Dump data is enabled or disabled.

F OTHER COMMANDS

• ECHO ON/OFF............This button determines whether other MIDI messages received

at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT

port.

G Fader Resolution

This parameter speciﬁes the resolution of the value output when you operate the

DM1000’s faders. To transfer fader value data between two cascaded DM1000s, or to

record the DM1000 operation to or play it back from a sequencer, select the HIGH but-

ton. When the LOW button is selected, the fader resolution switches to 256 steps.

Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall

You can assign DM1000 Scenes to MIDI Program Changes for remote recall. When you

recall a Scene on the DM1000, the unit transmits the assigned Program Change to the con-

nected MIDI device. When the DM1000 receives a Program Change, the assigned Scene is

recalled.

Initially, Scenes 1 through 99 are assigned sequentially to Program Changes 1 through 99,

and Scene #0 is assigned to Program Change #100, although you can change these assign-

ments.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |

MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports for transmission and reception

of MIDI messages (see page 246).

2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the DM1000 can

transfer MIDI messages to and from the external device.

3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button, then press the [F2] button.

The MIDI | Pgm Asgn page appears.

Tip: You can store a Scene to Program Change assignment table to an external device by using

MIDI Bulk Dump or included Studio Manager software.

250 Chapter 18—MIDI

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

4 Move the cursor to a parameter box in the PGM CHG column, and rotate

the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the Program

Change numbers to which you want to assign Scenes.

5 Press the cursor button [ ] to move the cursor to a parameter box in the

SCENE NO./TITLE column, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the

[INC]/[DEC] buttons to select Scenes.

6 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button repeatedly until the MIDI | Setup

page appears, then specify the MIDI Transmit and Receive Channels.

7Turn on the PROGRAM CHANGE Tx ON/OFF and Rx ON/OFF buttons.

Now, when the DM1000 receives the Program Changes on the speciﬁed MIDI Channels,

the corresponding Scenes are recalled. Also, when you switch Scenes on the DM1000, the

DM1000 transmits the Program Changes on the speciﬁed MIDI Channels.

Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time

Control

You can assign DM1000 parameters to MIDI Control Changes for real-time control. When

the DM1000 receives a Control Change, the assigned DM1000 parameter is set accordingly.

Also, when you adjust a parameter on the DM1000, the DM1000 transmits the assigned

Control Change message.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |

MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports for transmission and reception

of MIDI messages (see page 246).

2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the DM1000 can

transfer MIDI messages to and from the external device.

3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button, then press the [F3] button.

The MIDI | Ctl Asgn page appears. This page enables you to assign DM1000 parameters to

Control Changes.

Tip:

•If you assign a Scene to multiple Program Changes, the Program Change with the lowest

number becomes effective.

•You can initialize the Scene to Program Change assignment table by moving the cursor to

the INITIALIZE button, then pressing [ENTER].

Tip: You can store a Parameter to Control Change assignment table to an external device by

using MIDI Bulk Dump or included Studio Manager software.

Tip: See page 344 for more information on the default Parameter to Control Change assign-

ments.

Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control 251

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

MIDI

4 Move the cursor to the MODE parameter’s TABLE button (1), then press

[ENTER].

The MODE parameter determines which MIDI messages are transmitted when DM1000

parameters are adjusted. The following options are available for the MODE parameter:

• TABLE............................MIDI Control Change messages are transmitted in accordance

with the assignments on this page.

• NRPN.............................The assignments on the Ctl Asgn page are ignored, and pre-

deﬁned NRPNs (Non Registered Parameter Numbers) are

transmitted for remote control.

5 Move the cursor to a parameter box in the No. (CH) column, then rotate the

Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the Control

Changes to which you want to assign parameters.

You can assign parameters to up to 16-channel Control Changes on the Ctl Asgn page,

regardless of the MIDI Channels currently selected for transmission and reception.

Skip Steps 5 and 6 if you turned on the NRPN button in Step 4.

6 Select parameters in the parameter boxes in the three PARAMETER columns.

Select a parameter group in the parameter box in the ﬁrst PARAMETER column, and spec-

ify the desired values in the parameter boxes in the second and third PARAMETER col-

umns.

The following parameters and values are available:

Tip: NRPNs are special MIDI messages that combine three different Control Changes. They

enable you to control many parameters on a single MIDI Channel.

HIGH MID LOW

NO ASSIGN

——

FADER H

CHANNEL INPUT1–48

MASTER BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO

AUX1 SEND

INPUT1–48

AUX2 SEND

AUX3 SEND

AUX4 SEND

AUX5 SEND

AUX6 SEND

AUX7 SEND

AUX8 SEND

BUS TO ST BUS1–8

FADER L

CHANNEL INPUT1–48

MASTER BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO

AUX1 SEND

INPUT1–48

AUX2 SEND

AUX3 SEND

AUX4 SEND

AUX5 SEND

AUX6 SEND

AUX7 SEND

AUX8 SEND

BUS TO ST BUS1–8

252 Chapter 18—MIDI

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

CHANNEL INPUT1–48

MASTER BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO

AUX1 SEND

INPUT1–48

AUX2 SEND

AUX3 SEND

AUX4 SEND

AUX5 SEND

AUX6 SEND

AUX7 SEND

AUX8 SEND

BUS TO ST BUS1–8

PHASE

CHANNEL INPUT1–48

INSERT ON

CHANNEL INPUT1–48

MASTER BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO

PRE/POST

AUX1 SEND

INPUT1–48

AUX2 SEND

AUX3 SEND

AUX4 SEND

AUX5 SEND

AUX6 SEND

AUX7 SEND

AUX8 SEND

IN DELAY

INPUT1–48

TIME HIGH

TIME MID

TIME LOW

MIX HIGH

MIX LOW

FB GAIN H

FB GAIN L

OUT DELAY

BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO L, R

TIME HIGH

TIME MID

TIME LOW

HIGH MID LOW

Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control 253

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

MIDI

INPUT1–48/BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO

Q LOW

F LOW

G LOW H

G LOW L

Q LO-MID

F LO-MID

G LO-MID H

G LO-MID L

Q HI-MID

F HI-MID

G HI-MID H

G HI-MID L

Q HIGH

F HIGH

G HIGH H

G HIGH L

ATT H

ATT L

HPF ON

LPF ON

GATE

INPUT1–48

ATTACK

THRESH H

THRESH L

RANGE

HOLD H

HOLD L

DECAY H

DECAY L

COMP

INPUT1–48/BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO

ATTACK

THRESH H

THRESH L

RELEASE H

RELEASE L

RATIO

GAIN H

GAIN L

KNEE

PAN

CHANNEL

INPUT1–48

AUX1–2

AUX3–4

AUX5–6

AUX7–8

BUS TO ST BUS1–8

BALANCE

MASTER STEREO

HIGH MID LOW

254 Chapter 18—MIDI

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Parameters that feature a setting range of more than 128 steps (such as Fader and Delay

Time parameters) require two or more Control Change messages to specify the values.

For example, if you wish to control Fader parameters on certain channels using Control

Changes, you must assign the same channel to two Control Change numbers, and select

“FADER H” and “FADER L” for the Control Changes in the parameter boxes in the ﬁrst

PARAMETER column.

SURROUND

LFE H

INPUT1–48

LFE L

DIV (F)

DIV R

WIDTH

DEPTH

OFS LR

OFS FR

EFFECT

BYPASS

EFFECT1–4

MIX

PARAM1 H

PARAM1 L

PARAM32 H

PARAM32 L

HIGH MID LOW

Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control 255

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

MIDI

If you wish to control Delay Time parameters on certain channels using Control Changes,

you must assign the same channel Delay parameter to three Control Change numbers, and

select “TIME LOW,” “TIME MID,” and “TIME HIGH” for the Control Changes in the

parameter boxes in the second (middle) PARAMETER column.

7 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button repeatedly until the MIDI | Setup

page appears, then specify MIDI Transmit and Receive Channels.

8Turn on the CONTROL CHANGE Tx ON/OFF and Rx ON/OFF buttons.

DM1000 parameters will now be set accordingly when the DM1000 receives corresponding

Control Changes. Also, when you adjust parameters on the DM1000, the DM1000 will

transmit corresponding Control Changes.

Note: Parameters that feature a setting range in excess of 128 steps require an appropriate

combination of range parameters for successful MIDI Control Change.

Tip: You can initialize the Parameter to Control Change assignment table by moving the cur-

sor to the INITIALIZE button, then pressing [ENTER].

Note: Before controlling parameters using Control Changes, make sure that both Tx and Rx

ON/OFF buttons in the PARAMETER CHANGE row are turned off.

256 Chapter 18—MIDI

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes

You can control DM1000 parameters in real time by using Parameter Change messages that

are System Exclusive messages, instead of using MIDI Control Changes.

See “MIDI Data Format” at the end of this Manual for detailed information on available

Parameter Changes.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |

MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports for transmission and reception

of MIDI messages (see page 246).

2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the DM1000 can

transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from the external device.

3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button repeatedly until the MIDI | Setup

page appears, then turn off the Tx and Rx ON/OFF buttons in the PARAM-

ETER CHANGE row.

The DM1000 will now set certain parameter values when it receives corresponding Param-

eter Changes. Also, when you adjust certain parameters on the DM1000, it transmits corre-

sponding Parameter Changes.

Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI (Bulk Dump)

You can back up data stored in the DM1000, such as libraries and Scenes, to an external

MIDI device by using MIDI Bulk Dump. In this way, you can later restore previous

DM1000 settings by transmitting this MIDI data back to the DM1000.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |

MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports for transmission and reception

of MIDI messages (see page 246).

2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the DM1000 can

transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from the external device.

3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button, then press the [F4] button.

Note: When you control paramters using Parameter Changes, make sure that both buttons

in the CONTROL CHANGE section on the MIDI | SETUP page are turned off.

Note: Some of the data transmitted from the DM1000 to the sequence software may occa-

sionally drop out during Bulk Dump transmission. To avoid this, we recommend that you use

the included Studio Manager software to store DM1000 data to an external device.

Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI (Bulk Dump) 257

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

MIDI

The MIDI | Bulk page appears.

The page includes the following parameters:

A CATEGORY section

This section enables you to select data for transmission and reception.

B REQUEST

Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to transmit messages from the

DM1000 that request a second DM1000 (connected to the ﬁrst DM1000) to transmit

the data speciﬁed in the CATEGORY section. This button is used primarily when two

DM1000s are connected in cascade.

C TRANSMIT

Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to transmit data speciﬁed in the

CATEGORY section to an external MIDI device.

D INTERVAL

This parameter speciﬁes the interval between data packets during bulk transmission in

50 millisecond steps. If the external device drops part of the bulk data, increase this

parameter value.

4 In the CATEGORY section, move the cursor to the button of the data type

you want to transmit, then press [ENTER].

The following options are available:

• ALL.................................This button selects all data available for bulk dump. When this

button is turned on, all other buttons in this section are turned

off.

• SCENEMEM .................This button selects Scene memories. You can select Scenes you

wish to transmit in the parameter box next to the button.

• AUTOMIX ....................This button selects Automix memories. You can select Auto-

mixes you wish to transmit in the parameter box next to the

button.

• LIBRARY.......................This button selects libraries. You can select the type of library in

the TYPE parameter box (next to the button), then specify the

library number in the parameter box on the right.

• BANK.............................This parameter enables you to select the User Deﬁned Key

banks (KEYS UDEF), User Deﬁned Remote Layer banks (RMT

UDEF), or User Assignable Layer banks (USR LAYER) for bulk

dump. You can select one of these three types in the parameter

box next to the button, and select the banks in the parameter

box on the right.

258 Chapter 18—MIDI

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

• SETUPMEM ................. This button selects the DM1000 setup data (i.e., system set-

tings).

• PGM TABLE ................. This button selects the MIDI | Pgm Asgn page settings.

• CTL TABLE................... This button selects the MIDI | Ctl Asgn page settings.

• PLUG-IN....................... This button selects the settings of any optional Y56K cards

installed in Slot #1 or #2. You can select Y56K card programs in

the parameter box next to the button.

5 If necessary, move the cursor to the parameter box next to the selected but-

ton, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to

select the desired bulk dump data.

6To start transmitting bulk data, move the cursor to the TRANSMIT button,

then press [ENTER].

Bulk Dump is executed. During the operation, the Bulk Dump window appears, indicating

the current bulk dump status. To abort the bulk dump operation, move the cursor to the

CANCEL button in the window, then press [ENTER].

7To receive bulk data, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button repeatedly

until the MIDI | Setup page appears, then turn on the Rx ON/OFF button in

the BULK row.

Now, when the DM1000 receives bulk data, the corresponding internal data is updated.

Note: Data selected by the SETUPMEM button includes MIDI transmission and reception

port settings and message settings. After you store to an external device bulk dump data that

has its reception disabled, if the DM1000 later starts to receive this particular data, DM1000

bulk dump reception will be turned off immediately, and the DM1000 will be unable to receive

subsequent data. Therefore, before you store the data selected by the SETUPMEM button using

Bulk Dump, be sure to enable bulk data transmission and reception.

Tip: If you selected [ALL] in the parameter box, all data selected by the corresponding button

is transmitted as bulk dump data.

Tip: To transmit bulk dump request messages, move the cursor to the REQUEST button, then

press [ENTER]. If a second DM1000 is connected, it will transmit bulk data to the ﬁrst

DM1000 in response to the request.

Controlling the DM1000 from a Video Editor 259

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Controlling the DM1000

from a Video Editor

19 Controlling the DM1000 from a

Video Editor

This chapter describes the control functions, which enable you to control the DM1000 from

a video editor using the ESAM protocol.

About ESAM

ESAM (Editing Suite Audio Mixers) is the post-production standards for linking video edi-

tor to a mixing console. You can automate audio crossfade and switching operations that

are linked to video editing operations.

The DM1000 supports the ESAM Serial II Protocol (ESAM II) - Extended. For supported

commands, see page 264.

Connection Example

The following diagram illustrates an example of connecting a video editor and a VTR via

the DM1000. You need a dedicated cable to connect the DM1000’s REMOTE connector to

the video editor (page 264). For more information on the basic connections and setup, refer

to chapter 4 “Connections and Setup” on page 43.

Note:

•Use control room monitoring (page 119) to monitor the signals. First, set the OMNI OUT

connectors' signal routing to “CR-L/CR-R” using the Output Patch | Omni Out page

(page 113).

• The maximum output level of the OMNI OUT connectors is +24 dB. If you are connecting

a device with the maximum input level of +18 dB to an OMNI OUT connector, attenuate

the output signal using the attenuators (page 90).

AUXPAN

DISPLAY

ASSIGN

ENCODER MODE

EQUALIZER

LOW

HIGH

GAIN

FREQUENCY

LOW MID

HIGH MID

ROUTING

STEREO DIRECT

DISPLAY DISPLAY

SELECTED CHANNEL

BUS 8

32 48

BUS 7

31 47

BUS 6

30 46

BUS 5

29 45

BUS 4

28 44

BUS 3

27 43

16151413121110

20dB

ONOFF

+48V

78 1213 14 15

91011

1615141312111098765432

PEAK

SIGNAL

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PAD

20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 1

17 33

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 2

18 34

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 3

19 35

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 4

20 36

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 5

21 37

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 6

22 38

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 7

23 39

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 8

24 40

+10

SOLO

SEL

BUS 1

25 41

+10

SOLO

SEL

+10

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

BUS 2

26 42

AUTO

SEL

STEREO

AUX2 AUX3 AUX4

AUX6AUX5 AUX7 AUX8

AUXSE LECT

DISPLAY

AUX1

FADER MODE

FADER

AUX

DISPLAY ACCESS

AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY

MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW

PAIR /G ROUP

INPUT

OUTPUT

EFFECTSURROUND DYNAMICS SCENE

PAN/

INSERT/DELAY

PATCH

GRAB

SCENE MEMORY

STORE RECALL

DISPLAY

USER DEFINED

KEYS

ENTER

INC

DEC

TALK BACK LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL

010

PHONES

MONITOR

LEVEL

SOLO CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

DIMMER

TALKB ACK

MONITOR

STEREO

SLOT

BUS

DISPLAY

100

F1 F2 F3

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

VTR1

(REC)

VTR2 VTR3

AES/EBU

REMOTE

ESAM II

Digital I/O card

MY16-AE or MY8-AE

Video editor

Video

switcher

Remote (D-sub 9-pin)

(D-sub 9-pin)

260 Chapter 19—Controlling the DM1000 from a Video Editor

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Crossfade via ESAM Commands

This section describes how to execute a crossfade (transition) using the DM1000’s ESAM

mode.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |

Remote page appears.

2 Move the cursor to the REMOTE FUNCTION parameter, then select ESAM to

enter ESAM mode.

A conﬁrmation message appears. Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER]

to conﬁrm.

3 Move the cursor to EVEN, ODD, or NONE in the ESAM PARITY section, then

press [ENTER] to set the Parity Flag for the REMOTE connector.

Set the Parity Flag appropriate for your video editor. Normally, set this parameter to EVEN.

However, for some video editors, such as the Ampex ACE200, select ODD.

Tip:

•It is useful to combine Input Channels from VTR1-3 and Output Channels (Bus Outs) to

VTR1 (REC) on the same layer. For more information, refer to “Creating a Custom Layer

by Combining Channels (User Assignable Layer)” on page 272.

•Save the DM1000 Channel settings and Input and Output patches in scene memories

(page 163) and Input/Output Patch libraries (page 176, 177).

•Use the Operation Lock function to prevent the DM1000 settings from being modiﬁed acci-

dentally (page 280).

Note: Yo u cannot switch to ESAM mode during Automix recording or playback.

Note: When the DM1000 enters ESAM mode, various settings will change as follows:

• The Solo function will be enabled (page 120).

• The Solo function’s MODE will be set to RECORDING (page 120).

• The Solo function’s LISTEN will be set to AFTER PAN (page 120).

• The Solo function’s SEL MODE will be set to MIX SOLO (page 120).

• The Automix function will be disabled (page 190).

• The Fader Group Master will be disabled (page 150).

Note: In ESAM mode, the Fade Time setting for Scene Recall is temporarily disabled

(page 168).

Note: If the Parity Flag is not set correctly and the video editor transmits the ESAM com-

mands, an error message “REMOTE Parity Error” appears on the display.

Crossfade via ESAM Commands 261

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Controlling the DM1000

from a Video Editor

4 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | Time

Ref page appears.

5 Move the cursor to the FRAMES parameter, then select the desired frame

rate.

The Transition Time transmitted from a video editor is expressed in frames. Match the

frame rate.

6 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button repeatedly until the Remote |

ESAM 1-32 page or ESAM 33-48 page appears.

7 Assign Input Channels 1-48 to Machines A-H. (Specify which machine is con-

nected to which channel.)

To add or delete machines to or from Input Channels, move the cursor to a desired machine

(A-H), then press the channel [SEL] button. You cannot assign a channel to multiple

machines.

8 Move the cursor to the REC column, then press [ENTER] to select one REC

machine from Machines A-H.

The REC machine selected here will be used to specify a REC machine via the ESAM com-

mand. You cannot specify multiple REC machines.

Note: These settings are effective only when the DM1000 receives Machine commands. If the

DM1000 receives Source commands that control individual channels, the settings will be

ignored.

262 Chapter 19—Controlling the DM1000 from a Video Editor

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

9 Move the cursor to the MOTOR button, then press [ENTER] to turn the motor

faders on or off.

When the MOTOR button is turned off, the motor faders will not move even when the

DM1000 receives the ESAM commands. (However, the fader levels will change.)

10 Set each channel routing on the Routing page (page 71).

Use BUS 1–8 as sends to the REC machine. The routing settings will differ as follows

depending on whether you use pre-read (page 263).

-When not using pre-read

On the PLAY machine, turn on channel routing assignments to the BUS 1–8 to which

you want to send audio signals, and turn off assignments to the stereo bus.

On the REC machine, turn on channel routing assignments to the stereo bus. Turn off

assignments to BUS 1–8.

-When using pre-read

For the routing settings of the PLAY machine and the REC machine, turn on assign-

ments of the audio signals to the BUS 1–8 to which you want to send audio signals. Turn

on assignments to the stereo bus if you want to use the stereo bus to monitor the input

signals from the machine.

11 Press the [AUTO] button to turn on the button indicator so that

each channel [SEL] button will reﬂect the corresponding ESAM

fader on/off status.

12 Press the channel [SEL] buttons to turn on or off the corresponding Input

Channel ESAM fader.

Repeatedly pressing a [SEL] button toggles the corresponding ESAM fader on and off.

When an ESAM fader is turned off, the ESAM command for the corresponding channel

fader level will be ignored.

When an ESAM fader is turned on, the [SEL] button status changes depending on the chan-

nel status, as follows:

• Off ..................................ESAM fader is off.

• Lights up red ................ ESAM fader (FROM channel) is on.

• Flashes red....................ESAM fader (TO channel) is on.

• Lights up green ............ ESAM fader (non-FROM/TO channel) is on.

Note: When the MOTOR button is turned off, the physical position of the faders will not cor-

respond to the actual fader levels. In this case, touch a fader or turn the MOTOR button on

to match the fader position and level.

Note: If your video editor does not transmit commands for monitoring, you will need to make

routing settings for the channels being monitored so that the assignment to the stereo bus is

turned on.

AUTO

SEL

SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL

SEL SEL SEL

Crossfade via ESAM Commands 263

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Controlling the DM1000

from a Video Editor

13 Set the pre-crossfade FROM machine level (the fader’s initial value) and the

post-crossfade TO machine level (the fader’s target value).

Set the stereo fader to 0 dB. If you’re not using pre-read, you’ll need to set the channel fader

of the REC machine to 0 dB in order to monitor the return from the REC machine.

-Setting the FROM machine level

Use the fader to adjust the level of the FROM machine channel. When a video editor

transmits the ESAM command, the channel will be set as the FROM machine. At this

time, the fader level will be used as the initial value of the crossfade. The target value is

ﬁxed at –∞.

-Setting the TO machine level

Use the fader to adjust the level of the TO machine channel. When a video editor trans-

mits the ESAM command, the channel will be set as the TO machine. At this time, the

fader level will be used as the target value of the crossfade. The initial value is ﬁxed at –∞.

14 Set the delay for each Input Channel, if necessary.

For more information, see page 63.

15 Send the ESAM command from the video editor to execute the crossfade

(transition).

If you touch a fader during the crossfade operation, the corresponding channel will stop the

crossfade operation and you will be able to control the fader manually.

Pre-read Operation

Pre-read is an editing operation performed on a single device that is used as a PLAY and

REC machine. It requires a special VTR that supports the pre-read operations.

To perform the pre-read operation, you must send playback signals from the REC machine

to Bus 1-8. Do not send the playback signal to Bus 1-8 unless you perform the pre-read

operation. Otherwise, the signal will loop.

If you plan to occasionally perform the pre-read operation, store two different routing set-

tings in scene memories so that you can recall either scene anytime.

Tip: If you save the DM1000 setup settings in a scene memory, you can quickly restore the

setting later. For more information on scene memories, refer to chapter 14 “Scene Memories”

on page 163.

264 Chapter 19—Controlling the DM1000 from a Video Editor

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Video Editors with conﬁrmed compatibility

As of June 2004, we have conﬁrmed that this system operates correctly with the following

video editors.

•Sony BVE2000, 9100

•Accom Axial 2010, 2020, 3000

•Ampex ACE200

•Panasonic AG A850

For the most recent information, check the following website.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

Supported Commands

All commands are Write commands that will be used to change the status of the DM1000

from the connected video editor.

Remote Connector Pin Assignment

You need the following dedicated cable to connect the DM1000’s Remote connector to a

video editor.

-Remote connector’s pin assignment

* On the dedicated cable,

2 and 8, and 3 and 7 should be crossed.

No. Command Hexadecimal

All Stop A0

Transition Duration A7

Transition Start A9

Monitor Mode AA

FROM Machine B4

TO Machine B5

Monitor Machine B6

Swap Machine C0

FROM Source A1

TO Source A3

Monitor Source A5

FROM Source (Multi-channel) BC

TO Source (Multi-channel) BD

Monitor Source (Multi-channel) BE

Transition Duration (Multi-channel) BF

Pin # Connector on a video editor Remote connector on the DM1000

Ground Ground

Receive A Receive A (*)

Transmit B Transmit B (*)

Ground Ground

Spare Spare

Ground Ground

Receive B Receive B (*)

Transmit A Transmit A (*)

Ground Ground

12345

6789

Other Functions 265

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Other Functions

20 Other Functions

This chapter describes the DM1000’s miscellaneous functions.

Changing the Input and Output Connector Names

You can change the default name of the input and output connectors, if you desire.

Changing the Input Connector Names

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | In

Port page appears.

You can specify Short names in the parameter boxes (

1) in the center column, and Long

names in the parameter boxes (

2) in the right column.

2 Use the Parameter wheel to select a port for which you want to change the

name.

3 Move the cursor to a name you want to change, then press [ENTER].

The Title Edit window appears, which enables you to edit the name.

4 Edit the name, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER].

The new name is now effective.

When the Name Input Auto Copy check box (

3) is on, the ﬁrst four characters of a

newly-entered Long name are automatically copied to the Short name.

You can reset all port names to their default names by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE

button, then pressing [ENTER].

Tip: The edited name is stored in the Input Patch library.

266 Chapter 20—Other Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Changing the Output Connector Names

To change output connector names, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeat-

edly until the Setup | Out Port page appears.

The procedure for editing the names and using the Name Output Auto Copy check box and

the INITIALIZE button is the same as on the In Port page.

Setting Preferences

You can change the default settings and environmental settings of the DM1000 by using the

Setup | Prefer1, Prefer2, and Prefer3 pages. To locate one of the Preferences page, press the

DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly.

Prefer1 page

This page enables you to set the DM1000 so that when you press a button on the top panel,

the DM1000 displays the corresponding display page, and shows or hides conﬁrmation and

alarm messages.

This page contains the following parameters. (These parameters are explained in the order

from the top of the left column to the bottom of the right column.)

• Auto ROUTING Display

If this check box is on, the Routing pages appear automatically when you press a rout-

ing-related button in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.

Setting Preferences 267

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Other Functions

• Auto PAN/SURROUND Display

If this check box is on, the Pan/Surr pages appear automatically when you operate the Joy-

stick in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. If you want to use the Joystick to adjust the pan

setting, turn on this check box. In Stereo Surround mode, operating the Joystick enables

you to adjust the Pan setting. Otherwise, it enables you to adjust the Surround Pan settings.

• Auto EQUALIZER Display

If this check box is on, the EQ | EQ Edit page appears automatically when you press an

EQ-related button in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.

• Auto SOLO Display

If this check box is on, the Monitor | Solo C-R page appears automatically when you solo

an Input Channel.

• Auto WORD CLOCK Display

If this check box is on, the DIO | Word Clock page appears automatically if the cur-

rently-selected external wordclock source fails.

• Auto Channel Select

If this check box is on, you can select a channel by moving the corresponding fader or

Encoder, or by turning on the corresponding channel [SOLO], [ON], or [AUTO] button.

• Store Conﬁrmation

If this check box is on, the Title Edit window to input a Scene or library memory name

appears when you store a Scene or library memory.

• Recall Conﬁrmation

If this check box is on, a conﬁrmation window appears when you recall a Scene or library

memory.

• Patch Conﬁrmation

If this check box is on, a conﬁrmation message appears when you edit the Input and Output

Patches.

• Pair Conﬁrmation

If this check box is on, the conﬁrmation message appears when you create or cancel a pair.

• Nominal Pan

If this check box is checked, and when Input Channel signals are panned hard left or hard

right, the signals on the left/odd channels and right/even channels will be at the nominal

level. If this check box is not checked, these signals will be boosted by 3 dB. (When the sig-

nals are panned to center, they will be at the nominal level.) In Surround mode, the same

thing applies when any Surroound pan channel is panned hard left or right.

• Fast Meter Fall Time

If this check box is on, the level meters fall more quickly.

• TC Drop Warning

If this check box is on, a warning message appears if a dropout is detected in the incoming

timecode.

• DIO Warning

If this check box is on, a warning message appears when any errors are detected in digital

audio signals received at the Slot 1 or 2, or 2TR Digital Inputs.

• MIDI Warning

If this check box is on, a warning message appears when any errors are detected in the

incoming MIDI messages.

268 Chapter 20—Other Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

• Initial Data Nominal

If this check box is on, Input Channel faders are set to nominal (0 dB) when you recall Scene

#0.

• Meter Follow Layer

If this check box is on, a connected optional MB1000 Meter Bridge automatically track a

layer selection made in the LAYER section on the DM1000.

• Scene MEM Auto Update

If this check box is on, you can use the Scene Memory Auto Update function (see page 167).

• Joystick Auto Grab

If this check box is on, the [GRAB] button is automatically enabled and the Joystick is

engaged in as the surround pan control when you move the Joystick pointer to the current

surround pan position.

• Cascade COMM Link

If this check box is on, various functions and parameters are linked between cascaded

DM1000s (See page 282 for more information on cascade connection). When the check

box is off, only the Solo function is linked.

• Auto Direct Out On

If this check box is on and you change the channel Direct Out destination from “–” to any

other output, the channel Direct Out is automatically enabled. If you change the channel

Direct Out destination from an output to “–,” the channel Direct Out is automatically dis-

abled.

• Routing ST Pair Link

When this check box is checked, paired channels’ routing to the Stereo Bus will be linked.

Prefer2 page

The Prefer2 page enables you to name the channel indicated on the display, and adjust the

display brightness.

This page contains the following parameters:

A Channel ID/Channel

This parameter selects a style for displayed channel. If the Channel ID check box is

selected, the Channel ID appears (e.g., CH1, BUS1). If the Channel Short Name check

box is on, the Channel Short name appears (see page 265).

Setting Preferences 269

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Other Functions

B Port ID/PORT

This parameter selects a format for the port name displayed on the pages. When the Port

ID check box is on, the Port ID (such as AD1 or OMN10) appears. When the Port Short

Name check box is on, the Short Port name appears (see page 266).

C Channel Copy Parameter

This parameter selects the channel parameters to be copied when you assign the Chan-

nel Copy function to one of the User Deﬁned buttons (see page 274). You can select

multiple options.

• ALL.................................This button selects all parameters that can be copied. When you

turn on this button, all other options are cancelled.

• FADER...........................Copies the fader values.

• ON..................................Copies the on/off status of the [ON] buttons.

• PA N ................................Copies the pan settings.

• SURR .............................Copies the surround pan settings.

• AUX................................Copies the Aux Send levels.

• AUX ON ........................Copies the on/off status of the Channel to Aux signals.

• EQ...................................Copies the EQ parameter values.

D Fader Touch Sense

These parameters control the Touch Sense function.

•

ENABLED/DISABLED

..This button enables or disables the Touch Sense function.

• CONTROL ....................If this button is turned on and the touch sensors are not trig-

gered, fader operations is ignored. During Automix recording,

you can perform “cut-in” style operations by touching a fader.

When this button is off, the DM1000 always recognizes fader

movements.

• SELECT .........................If this button is on, you can select channels using the Touch

Sense function.

• Sensitivity .....................This parameter adjusts the touch sensitivity in the range of 01

to 10.

E Display Brightness

This parameter sets the brightness of the Scene Memory display and the LED indicators

in the range of 1 through 4.

270 Chapter 20—Other Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Prefer3 page

This page enables you to set various Automix preferences.

This page contains the following parameters. (These parameters are explained in the order

from the top of the left column to the bottom of the right column).

• Mix Update Conﬁrmation

If this check box is on, when Automix recording stops, a conﬁrmation message appears ask-

ing if you want to update the current Automix with the latest edits.

• Auto EQ Edit in

If this check box is on, EQ settings are automatically punched into the Automix recording

when you adjust an EQ control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.

• Copy Initial Fader

If this check box is on, the fader value recorded immediately before the speciﬁed IN point

is copied to the speciﬁed TO point when you copy or move the Fader events. This eliminates

fader position matching problems when no fader event exists at the speciﬁed TO point.

• Auto Inc TC Capture

If this check box is on, the Timecode Capture memory is incremented automatically each

time a timecode address is captured on the Automix | Event Edit page (see page 211).

• Link Capture & Locate Memory

If this check box is on, the Capture memories on the Automix | Event Edit page are linked

to the Locate memories.

• Clear Edit Channel after REC

If this check box is on, the previously-recorded channel events are automatically cleared

when Automix recording (with Auto Rec on) stops.

•Timecode Display Relative

If this check box is on, the indicated timecode is offset based on the OFFSET parameter on

the Main page.

• Receive Full Frame Message

If this check box is on, MTC full-frame messages, in addition to the usual quarter-frame

messages, are recognized and Automix follows them. If this check box is off, only the usual

quarter-frame messages are recognized.

• Show Compact Size

Automix data is compressed while recording. If this check box is on, the DM1000 displays

the compressed size of the Automix.

Setting Preferences 271

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Other Functions

• Automix Store Undo

If this check box is on, you can undo the Automix Store & Clear functions.

•Touch Sence Edit In ALL

If this check box is on, all parameters that are turned on in the OVERWRITE section on the

Automix | Main page will be punched in and out via the faders’ Touch Sense function. If this

check box is off, only the faders selected in Fader mode will be punched in and out.

• Drop Out Time

This parameter sets an interval (in frames) between the interruption of incoming timecode

and the stoppage of Automix recording or playback.

• Lock Time

This parameter sets the interval (in frames) allowed until the Automix locks to incoming

timecode messages. If the sync operation is unstable, set this value higher.

• Frame Jump Error

This parameter sets the time interval (in frames) required by the DM1000 to recognize an

error after incoming timecode messages jump. If the actual interval is shorter than the value

speciﬁed by this parameter, the DM1000 continues the sync operation. If the frame jump

causes the recording or playback to stop during the MTC sync operation, set the parameter

value higher than the number of frames indicated in the error message.

If you set the parameter to a higher value, adjust the Drop Out Time parameter value, if nec-

essary.

• Fader REC Accuracy

This parameter sets the accuracy of recording faders over time to “Little,” “Some,” “More,”

or “Most.” If you set the parameter to lower values, you will save Automix memory space.

• Insert Time Link to Locate Memory

This parameter selects Locate memories that are applied to the Insert IN/OUT parameters.

272 Chapter 20—Other Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels (User

Assignable Layer)

If you set the Remote Layer target to “USER ASSIGNABLE,” you can create a custom layer

by combining any DM1000 channels (excluding the Stereo Out). This custom layer is called

“User Assignable layer.” You can use either Remote 1 or Remote 2 for a User Assignable layer.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, then press the [F1] or [F2] but-

ton.

The Remote | Remote1 or Remote2 page appears.

2 Set the TARGET parameter to USER ASSIGNABLE, then press [ENTER].

A conﬁrmation window appears.

3 Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER].

The DM1000 displays the page shown below.

4 Select the channels you wish to assign to the User Assignable layer using the

1–16 parameter boxes (

1).

You can store up to four 16-channel setups in four banks by switching Banks 1–4 via the

BANK 1–4 buttons. If you press[ENTER] before selecting the channels to assign, you will

still be able to select the channels you wish to assign in the User CH Select window.

5 Use the LAYER [REMOTE 1] or [REMOTE 2] button to assign or recall the User

Assignable layer.

You can use the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons to control the assigned channels.

Tip: You can reset the assignment to default by moving the cursor to the CLEAR button and

pressing [ENTER].

Tip: If you connected an optional MB1000 Meter Bridge, its meters indicate the level of the

channels currently-assigned to layer channels 1–16.

Using the Oscillator 273

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Other Functions

Using the Oscillator

The DM1000 features an Oscillator you can use for sound checks. Follow the steps below to

use the Oscillator:

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] button, then press the [F1] button.

The Utility | Oscillator page appears.

This page contains the following parameters:

A OSCILLATOR ON

This parameter button turns the Oscillator on or off.

B WAVEFORM

These parameter buttons select the Oscillator waveforms.

C LEVEL section

The parameter control in this section sets the Oscillator output level.

D ASSIGN section

The buttons in this section select the Oscillator output.

2 Move the cursor to the button for the Oscillator output channel in the

ASSIGN section, then press [ENTER] (you can select multiple channels).

3 Move the cursor to one of the WAVEFORM parameter buttons, then press

[ENTER].

You can select the following waveforms:

• SINE 100Hz ..................100 Hz sinewave

• SINE 1kHz ....................1 kHz sinewave

• SINE 10kHz ..................10 kHz sinewave

• 1kHz/400Hz..................Sinewave with different frequency output to L, R, and

odd/even buses

• PINK NOISE.................Pink noise

• BURST NOISE .............Burst noise (200 msec pink noise pulses at four second inter-

vals)

4 Move the cursor to the parameter control in the LEVEL section, then rotate

the Parameter wheel to set the Oscillator level to minimum.

Note: Sinewave and pink noise create unusually high sound pressure. Oscillator levels that

are too high can damage the speakers. When you use the Oscillator, be sure to set the level to

minimum, then raise the level gradually.

274 Chapter 20—Other Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

5 Move the cursor to the OSCILLATOR ON/OFF button, then press the [ENTER]

or [INC]/[DEC] buttons to turn on the Oscillator.

The Oscillator signal is now routed to the channels selected in the ASSIGN section.

6 Move the cursor to the parameter control in the LEVEL section, then rotate

the Parameter wheel to raise the Oscillator level.

You can view the current Oscillator level on the LEVEL meter.

Using the User Deﬁned Keys

You can assign any of more than 200 functions to the USER DEFINED KEYS [1]–[12].

If you assign to one of the buttons (or “keys”) a function that is usually executed on the dis-

play pages, you can use the assigned button as a shortcut.

The Function to User Deﬁned Keys assignments are stored in banks. (See page 295 for more

information on the initial bank settings.) The DM1000 provides eight banks (Banks A–H).

Switching banks enables you to change the assignment quickly.

Follow the steps below to assign functions to the USER DEFINED KEYS.

1 Press the USER DEFINED KEYS [DISPLAY] button to locate the User Def | User

Def page.

This page contains the following parameters:

A INITIALIZE

This button resets the contents of all banks to their initial settings.

B BANK

These buttons select the desired banks.

C TITILE

This parameter displays the name of the bank selected by the BANK parameter button.

Move the cursor to the TITLE parameter box, then press [ENTER]. The Title Edit win-

dow appears, enabling you to enter a name.

D 1–12

These parameter boxes enable you to assign functions to USER DEFINED KEYS

[1]–[12].

DISPLAY

USER DEFINED

KEYS

Using the User Defined Keys 275

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Other Functions

2 Move the cursor to the desired BANK parameter button, then press [ENTER].

The corresponding bank is selected, and the functions assigned to the User Deﬁned buttons

in that bank are displayed in the 1–12 parameter boxes.

3 Move the cursor to one of the 1–12 parameter boxes, then press [ENTER].

The DM1000 displays the User Deﬁne Select window, which enables you to assign functions

to the selected buttons.

4 Move the cursor to the left column, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press

the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select a function you wish to assign.

A function is selected when it appears inside the dotted box. See page 293 for a complete list

of assignable functions.

5 In the same way, set the center and right column.

The items that appear in the center and right columns vary depending on the function

selected in Step 4.

6To close the window, move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER].

When the window closes, the speciﬁed function is assigned to the selected User Deﬁned

button.

To cancel the assignment, move the cursor to the CANCEL button, then press [ENTER].

7 If you assigned functions that require numbers (such as recalling a Scene or

library memory), move the cursor to the extra parameter box shown on the

right and specify the number.

Tip: When you select a function that is executed based on speciﬁed numbers (for example, a

function that recalls a speciﬁc Scene or library memory or transmits MIDI messages), an extra

parameter box appears on the right, in which you must specify the number.

Tip:

•You can store User Deﬁned Keys banks to a computer hard disk using the included Studio

Manager software. Be sure to back up important data.

•You can also store the assignment data to an external device, such as a MIDI data ﬁler, by

using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 256).

276 Chapter 20—Other Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Using GPI (General Purpose Interface)

The DM1000’s CONTROL port provides a GPI (General Purpose Interface) for controlling

external equipment. You can conﬁgure the GPI so that it will output 8-channel trigger sig-

nals when you operate the faders or USER DEFINED KEYS, or so that it will receive 4-chan-

nel trigger signals to control the DM1000 parameters.

You can assign functions to these trigger signals. In this way, for example, you can control a

“RECORDING” warning light outside a studio from the DM1000, or you can control the

DM1000’s Talkback function or Dimmer function using an outside switch.

1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | GPI

page appears.

A INPUT section

This section enables you to select functions that will be controlled via trigger signals 1–4

input at the CONTROL port. Assignable functions are listed in the area below this sec-

tion.

B OUTPUT section

This section enables you to select the sources that will output trigger signals 1–8. Select-

able sources are listed in the area below this section.

9 1 21 14 9 2 21 15

9 3 21 16 9 4 21 17

22 5 10 6

GPO0 GPO1 GPO2 GPO3

GPO4 GPO5 GPO6 GPO7

GPI0 GPI1

23 5 11 6

GPI2 GPI3

This is an example of the external circuit that operates GPI.

In this example, a trigger signal causes the LEDs to light up

when the button is selected as the trigger signal polarity

in the OUTPUT section. A trigger signal causes the LEDs to

turn off when the button is selected as the trigger signal

polarity.

Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) 277

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Other Functions

2To assign functions to the incoming trigger signals, move the cursor to one

of four trigger signal parameters 1–4 in the INPUT section.

3 Rotate the Parameter wheel to select the desired function from the list below

the INPUT section, then press [ENTER] to conﬁrm the selection.

4 Select one of two buttons located to the right of trigger signal parameters

1–4 to specify how the incoming trigger signals will be detected.

• .......... When the switch is grounded (Low), the trigger signal is active and the

selected parameter changes.

• .......... When the GPI Input goes High (open), the trigger signal is active and the

selected parameter changes.

At this point, when the DM1000 receives the trigger signal at the CONTROL port, the

selected parameter changes.

5To select parameters or controls as the trigger signal sources, move the cur-

sor to the OUTPUT section and select the desired trigger signal parameters

1–8 in the same way as for the INPUT section.

6 Use the buttons located to the right of the trigger signal (1–8) parameters

to switch the polarity of the trigger signals that are output when you control

the trigger sources.

• .......... The GPI Output goes High (open) when the trigger signal source is active.

• .......... The GPI Output goes Low (ground) when the trigger signal source is active.

Tip: Refer to the next page for a complete list of assignable parameters.

Input signals from

the CONTROL port

Executes the function.

Trigger =

Input signals from

the CONTROL port

Trigger =

Executes the function.

Executes the function. Executes the function.

278 Chapter 20—Other Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

At this time, the trigger signal is output from the CONTROL port when you operate the

assigned parameters or controls.

■ Parameters available in the INPUT section

• TALKBACK/DIMMER .......................Same as the MONITOR [TALKBACK] and

[DIMMER] button functions.

• BUS/SLOT ............................................Same as the MONITOR [BUS] and [SLOT] but-

ton functions.

• STEREO/2TRD1/2TRD2....................Same as the MONITOR [STEREO], [2TRD1],

and [2TRD2] button functions.

Tip: Refer to the next page for a complete list of assignable parameters and controls.

No Assign AUX1 ON

TALKBACK :

DIMMER AUX8 ON

BUS ST ON

SLOT CH1 ON UNLATCH

STEREO :

2TRD1 CH48 ON UNLATCH

2TRD2 BUS1 ON UNLATCH

TALKBACK UNLATCH :

DIMMER UNLATCH BUS8 ON UNLATCH

BUS UNLATCH AUX1 ON UNLATCH

SLOT UNLATCH :

STEREO UNLATCH AUX8 ON UNLATCH

2TRD1 UNLATCH ST ON UNLATCH

2TRD2 UNLATCH UDEF1

CH1 ON :

: UDEF12

CH48 ON

BUS1 ON

BUS8 ON

Trigger signal polarity =

Output signals from

the CONTROL port

Trigger signal polarity =

Output signals from

the CONTROL port

Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) 279

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Other Functions

• xxx UNLATCH .............The assigned button function is enabled only while the incom-

ing trigger signal is active.

• xxx ON...........................The corresponding channels are turned on or off each time the

incoming trigger signal becomes active.

• xxx ON UNLATCH......The corresponding channels are turned on only while the

incoming trigger signal is active.

• UDEFxxx.......................Same as the corresponding User Deﬁned buttons.

■ Trigger sources available in the OUTPUT section

• xxx FADER ON ............The trigger signal is transmitted when you raise a fader from

–∞.

• xxx FADER OFF...........The trigger signal is transmitted when you lower a fader to –∞.

• xxx FADER TALLY.......The trigger signal is transmitted while a fader remains above

–∞.

• xxx LATCH ...................Pressing the corresponding button toggles the trigger signal on

and off.

• xxx UNLATCH .............The trigger signal is transmitted while you are pressing and

holding down the corresponding button.

• REC LAMP....................The trigger signal is transmitted while the transport section on

the Remote | Machine Control page is in record mode.

• POWER ON..................The trigger signal is transmitted while the power to the

DM1000 is on.

No Assign ST FADER OFF

CH1 FADER ON CH1 FADER TALLY

: :

CH48 FADER ON CH48 FADER TALLY

BUS1 FADER ON BUS1 FADER TALLY

: :

BUS8 FADER ON BUS8 FADER TALLY

AUX1 FADER ON AUX1 FADER TALLY

: :

AUX8 FADER ON AUX8 FADER TALLY

ST FADER ON ST FADER TALLY

CH1 FADER OFF UDEF1 LATCH

: :

CH48 FADER OFF UDEF12 LATCH

BUS1 FADER OFF UDEF1 UNLATCH

: :

BUS8 FADER OFF UDEF12 UNLATCH

AUX1 FADER OFF REC LAMP

: POWER ON

AUX8 FADER OFF

280 Chapter 20—Other Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Using Operation Lock

The DM1000 features an Operation Lock function that prevents unintentional edits and

restricts access to panel operation with a password.

To use the Operation Lock function, press the [UTILITY] button, then the [F4] button to

display the Utility | Lock page.

This page contains the following parameters:

A OPERATION LOCK

This button enables or cancels Operation Lock. When you turn on this button, the Pass-

word window appears.

Enter a four-letter password using the Channel 1–10 [SEL] buttons (Channel 10 [SEL]

button enters “0”). (The password characters are represented by asterisks.) Move the

cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER] to enable Operation Lock. The factory

default password is “1234.”

To cancel Operation Lock, press [ENTER]. The Password window appears again. Enter

the password and select the OK button. Operation Lock is cancelled.

B OPERATION LOCK SAFE section

This section enables you to select certain controls on the panel to exclude from Opera-

tion Lock. To cancel all “safe” buttons simultaneously, move the cursor to the CLEAR

ALL button, then press [ENTER].

Note: If you forget the password, you cannot cancel Operation Lock. Be sure to write down

the password.

Using Operation Lock 281

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Other Functions

C PASSWORD

This button enables you to change the current password. Move the cursor to the PASS-

WORD button, then press [ENTER]. The Set Password window appears, enabling you

to change the password.

Enter the current password in the PASSWORD ﬁeld, and a new password in the NEW

PASSWORD ﬁeld. The factory default password is “1234.” Enter the new password again

in the REENTRY ﬁeld located below the NEW PASSWORD ﬁeld. Move the cursor to the

OK button, then press [ENTER] to change the password.

Tip: To clear the registered password, move the cursor to the CLEAR button, then press

[ENTER]. If you forget the password, initialize the password setting (see page 289).

282 Chapter 20—Other Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Cascading Consoles

The DM1000 features a Cascade Bus that enables cascade connection. You can connect two

DM1000s in cascade using the digital inputs and outputs, or the OMNI IN and OMNI

OUT connectors. In this way, two consoles work just like one big console, integrating each

unit’s Buses 1–8, Aux Sends 1–8, Stereo Bus, and Solo Bus.

The following DM1000 functions are linked via the cascade connection. To link functions

and parameters (excluding the Solo function), turn on the Cascade COMM Link check box

on the Setup | Prefer1 page (see page 266).

•Display page selection

•Aux selection

•Solo function

•Fader Mode

• Encoder Mode

•Metering Position

•Peak Hold On/Off

•Meter Fast Fall on/off

•Scene Store, Recall, and Title Edit

•The following Automix functions:

- Make New Automix

- Store and Recall Automix

- Automix Title Edit of

- Automix Transport (AutoREC, REC, PLAY, STOP,ABORT)

•The following Automix parameters:

- Automix Enable/Disable

- Motor On/Off

- Frame Type

- Return Time

- Int Start Time

- TC Offset

- Write to End

- Fader Return

- Fader Edit Mode

- Touch Sense Edit Off/Touch/Latch

- Overwrite (FADER/CH ON/PAN/EQ/AUX/AUX ON/SURR)

Tip: The Solo function is always linked regardless of the status of the Cascade COMM Link

check box.

Tip: The Fader Mode will not be linked if the Master layer is selected.

Cascading Consoles 283

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Other Functions

The following paragraphs explain how to make a cascade connection using two DM1000s

and the inputs and outputs of digital I/O cards installed in the slots of two DM1000s.

1 Install digital I/O cards into Slot 1 or 2 on two DM1000s.

2 Connect two DM1000s as follows:

•If you want to use the REMOTE connector to transfer MIDI messages, connect the

REMOTE connector of each DM1000 using a 9-pin D-sub reverse cable. If you want to

use the MIDI IN and OUT ports, connect MIDI IN on one DM1000 to MIDI out on the

other DM1000 using a MIDI cable.

The following connection example uses the REMOTE connectors.

•Connect the digital I/O card output on the transmitting DM1000 (slave) to the digital

I/O card input on the receiving DM1000 (master).

3 On the slave unit, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button

repeatedly until the Out Patch | Slot Out page appears.

Tip: To link Automixes between two DM1000s in a cascade system, conﬁgure the units so that

they can receive the same sync signal (SMPTE or MTC). If necessary, connect a distribution

box to distribute the sync signal to each DM1000.

Note: Do not make any MIDI connections between DM1000s that are cascaded via the

REMOTE connectors, or vice versa. Otherwise, a loop will be created, causing both consoles

to execute endless transmission and reception.

AUXPAN

DISPLAY

ASSIGN

ENCODER MODE

EQUALIZER

LOW

HIGH

GAIN

FREQUENCY

LOW MID

HIGH MID

ROUTING

STEREO DIRECT

DISPLAY

SELECTED CHANNEL

BUS 8

32 48

BUS 7

31 47

BUS 6

30 46

BUS 5

29 45

BUS 4

28 44

BUS 3

27 43

16151413121110

20dB

ONOFF

+48V

78 1213 14 15

91011

1615141312111098765432

PEAK

SIGNAL

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PAD

20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 1

17 33

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 2

18 34

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 3

19 35

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 4

20 36

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 5

21 37

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 6

22 38

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 7

23 39

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 8

24 40

+10

SOLO

SEL

BUS 1

25 41

+10

SOLO

SEL

+10

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

BUS 2

26 42

AUTO

SEL

STEREO

AUX2 AUX3 AUX4

AUX6AUX5 AUX7 AUX8

AUXSELECT

DISPLAY

AUX1

FADER MODE

FADER

AUX

DISPLAY ACCESS

AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY

MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW

PAIR/GROUP

INPUT

OUTPUT

EFFECTSURROUND DYNAMICS SCENE

PAN/

INSERT/DELAY

PATCH

GRAB

SCENE MEMORY

STORE RE CALL

DISPLAY

USER DEFINED

KEYS

ENTER

INC

DEC

TALK BACK LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL

010

PHONES

MONITOR

LEVEL

SOLO CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

DIMMER

TALKBACK

MONITOR

STEREO

SLOT

BUS

DISPLAY

100

F1 F2 F3

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

AUXPAN

DISPLAY

ASSIGN

ENCODER MODE

EQUALIZER

LOW

HIGH

GAIN

FREQUENCY

LOW MI D

HIGH MID

ROUTING

STEREO DIRECT

DISPLAY

SELECTED CHANNEL

BUS 8

32 48

BUS 7

31 47

BUS 6

30 46

BUS 5

29 45

BUS 4

28 44

BUS 3

27 43

16151413121110

20dB

ONOFF

+48V

78 1213 14 15

91011

1615141312111098765432

PEAK

SIGNAL

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PAD

20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 1

17 33

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 2

18 34

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 3

19 35

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 4

20 36

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 5

21 37

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 6

22 38

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 7

23 39

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 8

24 40

+10

SOLO

SEL

BUS 1

25 41

+10

SOLO

SEL

+10

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

BUS 2

26 42

AUTO

SEL

STEREO

AUX2 AUX3 AUX4

AUX6AUX5 AUX7 AUX8

AUXSELECT

DISPLAY

AUX1

FADER MODE

FADER

AUX

DISPLAY ACCESS

AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY

MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW

PAIR /G RO UP

INPUT

OUTPUT

EFFECTSURROUND DYNAMICS SCENE

PAN/

INSERT/DELAY

PATCH

GRAB

SCENE MEMORY

STORE RE CALL

DISPLAY

USER DEFINED

KEYS

ENTER

INC

DEC

TALKBACK LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL

010

PHONES

MONITOR

LEVEL

SOLO CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

DIMMER

TALKBACK

MONITOR

STEREO

SLOT

BUS

DISPLAY

100

F1 F2 F3

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

MY8-AT

etc.

MY8-AT

etc.

SLOT 1 SLOT 2

MY8-AT

etc.

MY8-AT

etc.

SLOT 1 SLOT 2

DM1000 (Slave) DM1000 (Master)

OUT OUT IN IN

REMOTE

connector

REMOTE

connector

284 Chapter 20—Other Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

4 Assign the Bus signals to the slot channels that are used for the cascade con-

nection.

The following signals are available:

The following display page is an example of integrating Bus 1–8, Aux Send 1–4, Stereo Bus,

and Solo Bus signals via two 8-channel digital I/O cards (such as MY8-AT).

5 On the master unit, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button

repeatedly until the In Patch | Cascade In page appears.

6 Select the Input Channels on the master unit to which the Bus signals are

input from the Slave unit.

The following display page is an example of receiving the slave unit’s Bus 1–8, Aux Send 1–4,

Stereo Bus, and Solo Bus signals via two 8-channel digital I/O cards (such as MY8-AT).

Options Description

CAS BUS1–BUS8

Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs

CAS AUX1–AUX8

Aux Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs

CAS ST-L, CAS ST-R

Stereo Bus L & R Cascade Outs

CASSOLOL, CASSOLOR

Solo Bus L & R Cascade Outs

Tip: Patching may vary depending on the type and number of buses used for the cascade con-

nection.

Note: Since the number of channels available on the digital I/O cards is limited, only Aux

Sends 1–4 are cascaded in this example. Using a 16-channel digital I/O card (such as

MY16-AT) enables you to cascade all buses.

Note: Be sure to patch the slave Bus signals to the same Buses on the master unit. Incorrect

patching will result in an incorrect cascade connection.

Cascading Consoles 285

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Other Functions

7 On the master unit, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button repeatedly until

the DIO | Cascade page appears, then adjust the Attenuators using the

parameter controls.

The DIO | Cascade page enables you to adjust the level of signals input to the Cascade Bus

using the dedicated attenuators. You can also turn the Cascade Buses on or off using the but-

tons below the parameter controls.

8 On the slave unit, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly to

display the Setup | Remote page, then set the REMOTE FUNCTION param-

eter (

1) to “MIDI.”

9 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly to display the Setup

| MIDI/Host page, then set the Cascade Link parameter to “REMOTE.”

After Steps 8 and 9, the slave unit will be able to transmit and receive MIDI messages via the

REMOTE connector.

286 Chapter 20—Other Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

10 Repeat Steps 8 and 9 for the master unit so that it will be able to transmit

and receive MIDI messages via the REMOTE connector.

11 To match the parameters of both DM1000s, locate the Setup | MIDI/Host

page on the copy source unit.

12 Move the cursor to the TRANSMIT button for the SYNC parameter, then

press [ENTER].

Parameters for cascade link (page 282) will be copied to the other DM1000 via the

REMOTE connector. If you select the REQUEST button instead of the TRANSMIT button

for the SYNC parameter, you can reverse the copy direction.

At this point, Bus 1–8, Aux 1–4, and the Stereo Bus on both DM1000s are integrated, and

the data is output via Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–4, and the Stereo Out on the master unit.

If you solo channels on one of the DM1000s, you can monitor the soloed signals via the

Control Monitor.

Note: Yo u can also link the parameters using the MIDI IN and OUT connection if you set

the CASCADE LINK parameter to “MIDI.”

Using the AD8HR/AD824 287

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Other Functions

Using the AD8HR/AD824

The Yamaha AD8HR/AD824, an 8-channel AD converter, enables you to control its gain

and phantom power from a connected DM1000. The DM1000 can control up to four

AD8HR/AD824s simultaneously.

If you connect the DM1000 to the AD8HR/AD824 digitally, and connect the DM1000

REMOTE connector to the AD8HR/AD824 REMOTE connector using a serial cable, you

can use the AD8HR/AD824 as AD Inputs for which you can preset the gain.

This section describes how to connect and conﬁgure the DM1000 and two AD8HRs.

1 Install a digital I/O card in a DM1000 slot.

If you plan to connect an AD824, install a digital I/O card on the AD824.

2 Connect the DM1000 and AD8HRs as follows.

Connection methods and cables vary depending on the speciﬁcations of the devices. The

following illustration is an example of a system in which two AD8HRs are connected via

MY8-AE cards.

Tip: You cannot store the Phantom power setting as a Scene on the DM1000.

Note:

•Set the AD8HR PC/RS422 switches to “RS422.” (If these switches are set to “PC,” the system

will not work correctly.)

•To control multiple AD8HRs or AD824s, connect the DM1000 and the AD8HRs or AD824s

in daisy chain. If you are using both AD8HR and AD824, make sure that you connect the

AD8HR closer to the DM1000.

AUXPAN

DISPLAY

ASSIGN

ENCODER MODE

EQUALIZER

LOW

HIGH

GAIN

FREQUENCY

LOW MID

HIGH MID

ROUTING

STEREO DIRECT

DISPLAY

SELECTED CHANNEL

BUS 8

32 48

BUS 7

31 47

BUS 6

30 46

BUS 5

29 45

BUS 4

28 44

BUS 3

27 43

16151413121110

20dB

ONOFF

+48V

78 1213 14 15

91011

1615141312111098765432

PEAK

SIGNAL

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PAD

20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

ONOFF

+48V

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 1

17 33

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 2

18 34

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 3

19 35

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 4

20 36

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 5

21 37

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 6

22 38

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 7

23 39

+10

SOLO

SEL

AUX 8

24 40

+10

SOLO

SEL

BUS 1

25 41

+10

SOLO

SEL

+10

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

SOLO

SEL

BUS 2

26 42

AUTO

SEL

STEREO

AUX2 AUX3 AUX4

AUX6AUX5 AUX7 AUX8

AUXSELECT

DISPLAY

AUX1

FADER MODE

FADER

AUX

DISPLAY ACCESS

AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY

MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW

PAIR/GROUP

INPUT

OUTPUT

EFFECTSURROUND DYNAMICS SCENE

PAN/

INSERT/DELAY

PATCH

GRAB

SCENE MEMORY

STORE RECALL

DISPLAY

USER DEFINED

KEYS

ENTER

INC

DEC

TALK BACK LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL

010

PHONES

MONITOR

LEVEL

SOLO CLEAR

2TR D1

2TR D2

DIMMER

TALKB ACK

MONITOR

STEREO

SLOT

BUS

DISPLAY

100

F1 F2 F3

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

OVER

-2

-4

-6

-8

-10

-12

-14

-18

-24

-30

-36

-42

-48

-56

-72

+48V

HPF

96kHz

88.2kHz

48kHz

44.1kHz

+48V

OFF ON

MASTER

WORD CLOCK

+48V

HPF

96kHz

88.2kHz

48kHz

44.1kHz

+48V

OFF ON

MASTER

WORD CLOCK

MY8-AE

etc.

SLOT 1

AD8HR

DIGITAL OUT A

REMOTE

connector

HA REMOTE

connector 1

AD8HR

SLOT 2

MY8-AE

etc.

HA REMOTE

connector 2

DIGITAL OUT A

DM1000 (Master)

HA REMOTE

connector 1

288 Chapter 20—Other Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup |

Remote page appears.

This page contains the following parameters:

A REMOTE FUNCTION

This parameter selects a device to be connected to the DM1000 REMOTE connector.

B HA section

This section enables you to specify the slot channels that will receive eight channel sig-

nals from AD8HR/AD824s that have their ID numbers set to 1 through 4.

C HA CONTROL section

This section enables you to set the AD8HR/AD824 channel 1–8 gain and the Phantom

power on or off.

• ID #1–#4........................ These buttons select the AD8HR/AD824s you want to control.

• 1–8 (1st row)................. These parameter controls adjust the gain for AD8HR/AD824

channels 1–8.

• +48V .............................. When you turn on these buttons, the phantom power on the

corresponding channels will be turned on.

• 1–8 (2nd row)............... These parameter controls adjust the cut-off frequency of the

high-pass ﬁlter for the corresponding channels. They are

grayed out and cannot be set for the AD824.

• HPF................................ When you turn on these buttons, the high-pass ﬁlter on the

corresponding channels will be turned on. They are grayed out

and cannot be set for the AD824.

4 Make sure that the REMOTE FUNCTION parameter is set to “HA,” and in the

HA section select the slot channels that receive signals from the

AD8HR/AD824s.

5 Use the parameter controls and buttons in the HA CONTROL section to set

the channel gain, turn on/off the phantom power, and adjust the high-pass

ﬁlter.

Checking the Battery and the System Version 289

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Other Functions

Checking the Battery and the System Version

The Utility | Battery page enables you to check the condition of the internal mem-

ory-backup battery and the system version number. To locate this page, press the DISPLAY

ACCESS [UTILITY] button repeatedly.

A Status

If the Status is “Okay,” the battery has sufﬁcient voltage for operation. If the Status is

“Voltage low!,” ask your Yamaha dealer to replace the battery as soon as possible. Failure

to replace a low battery may result in data loss.

B Ver X.XX (X.XX represents the version number.)

This indicator identiﬁes the system version number. Check the current system version

number before you update the ﬁrmware.

Visit the following website to check the latest system version number:

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

Initializing the DM1000

You can delete all currently-recorded settings and restore the factory-preset values, and reset

the Operation Lock password to its initial setting. Follow the steps below.

1 Make sure that the power to the DM1000 is turned off.

2 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] button, turn on the

POWER ON/OFF switch.

After a moment, the DM1000 displays the following conﬁrmation window.

Note: Do not attempt to replace the battery yourself as a malfunction may occur.

Tip:

•If you want to keep the current internal data, be sure to ﬁrst back up the data using the

included Studio Manager software.

•You can also store the data to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data ﬁler, by using

MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 256).

290 Chapter 20—Other Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

3To reset the DM1000 to factory default settings, move the cursor to the INI-

TIALIZE button, then press [ENTER].

To cancel the initialization operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL button, then press

[ENTER].

When the internal data is thoroughly overwritten, the DM1000 restarts using the factory

settings.

4To reset the Operation Lock password to its initial setting, in Step 2, move

the cursor to the PASSWORD button, then press [ENTER].

The password is reset to “1234”.

If you do not take any action after the conﬁrmation window appears, the window automat-

ically closes and the DM1000 restarts without being initialized.

Calibrating the Faders

The DM1000 motorized fader positions may shift over time depending on the operating

conditions and environment. You can correct the shifted faders using the Calibration func-

tion.

1 Make sure that the power to the DM1000 is turned off.

2 Press and hold down the [ENTER] button, then turn on the POWER ON/OFF

switch.

After a while, the following calibration window appears.

3 Make sure that “1 FADER MOVE & FADER POSITION” is selected, then press

[ENTER].

To adjust only the motor fader movement, use the cursor buttons to select “2 FADER

MOVE ONLY,” then press [ENTER].

To adjust only the fader position, use the cursor buttons to select “3 FADER POSITION

ONLY,” then press [ENTER]. Proceed to Step 5.

To cancel the calibration operation, use the cursor buttons to select “4 QUIT,” then press

[ENTER]. The DM1000 starts in normal mode.

4 The calibration operation begins, adjusting the motor fader movement, and

the DM1000 displays a message that indicates the calibration operation is

in progress.

The calibration operation takes about two minutes. DO NOT touch the faders during the

operation.

Calibrating the Faders 291

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Other Functions

5 When the calibration operation is complete, the DM1000 displays a window

in which you can select faders for position adjustment.

If you selected “2 FADER MOVE ONLY” in Step 3, the fader adjustment is complete. The

DM1000 starts in normal mode.

6 Use the channel [SEL] buttons to select faders for which you wish to calibrate

the position, then press [ENTER].

The selected channel [SEL] button indicators ﬂash. (When you press [ENTER], they light

up steadily.) At the beginning, all [SEL] buttons are ﬂashing. However, if an error occurs

and the unit is trying calibration again, only the [SEL] button indicator of a problematic

fader ﬂashes.

7 Follow the instruction in the window to set the position of the selected faders

to –∞, then press [ENTER].

8 Set the position of the selected faders to the level instructed in the window,

then press [ENTER]. Set faders 1-16 to –15, and Stereo fader to –30.

9 Set the position of the selected faders to the level instructed in the window,

then press [ENTER]. Set faders 1-16 to 0, and Stereo fader to any position.

10 Set the position of the selected faders to the level instructed in the window,

then press [ENTER]. Set faders 1-16 to +10, and Stereo fader to 0.

If there is no problem with the calibration result, this concludes the calibration operation.

The DM1000 will start in normal mode.

292 Chapter 20—Other Functions

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

11 If there is any problem with the calibration result, the DM1000 displays the

following window.

Also, the channel [SEL] button indicator of a problematic fader flashes.

Use the cursor buttons to select one of the following three options, then press[ENTER].

• CONTINUE..........................................While the [SEL] button indicator of a problem-

atic fader is ﬂashing, the calibration process

returns to Step 5.

• START FROM THE BEGINNING ....The calibration process returns to Step 2.

• QUIT ANYWAY ...................................The DM1000 cancels the calibration operation

and starts in normal mode. The standard setting

will be applied to problematic faders.

If this window appears after you try the calibration process several times, consult your near-

est Yamaha dealer.

If the calibration data has some problems, the DM1000 displays the following window

when it starts up. In this case, calibrate the position of the faders speciﬁed in the window.

USER DEFINED KEYS 293

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

USER DEFINED KEYS

# Function Display

0 No Assign No Assign

1 Scene MEM. Recall +1 Scene +1 Recall

2 Scene MEM. Recall -1 Scene -1 Recall

3 Scene MEM. Recall No. XX Scene XX Recall

4 Effect-1 Lib. Recall +1 Fx1 Lib+1 Recall

5 Effect-1 Lib. Recall -1 Fx1 Lib-1 Recall

6 Effect-1 Lib. Recall No.XX Fx1 LibXXX RCL.

7 Effect-2 Lib. Recall +1 Fx2 Lib+1 Recall

8 Effect-2 Lib. Recall -1 Fx2 Lib-1 Recall

9 Effect-2 Lib. Recall No.XX Fx2 LibXXX RCL.

10 Effect-3 Lib. Recall +1 Fx3 Lib+1 Recall

11 Effect-3 Lib. Recall -1 Fx3 Lib-1 Recall

12 Effect-3 Lib. Recall No.XX Fx3 LibXXX RCL.

13 Effect-4 Lib. Recall +1 Fx4 Lib+1 Recall

14 Effect-4 Lib. Recall -1 Fx4 Lib-1 Recall

15 Effect-4 Lib. Recall No.XX Fx4 LibXXX RCL.

16 Effect-1 Bypass On/Off Fx1 Bypass

17 Effect-2 Bypass On/Off Fx2 Bypass

18 Effect-3 Bypass On/Off Fx3 Bypass

19 Effect-4 Bypass On/Off Fx4 Bypass

20 Channel Lib. Recall +1 CH Lib+1 Recall

21 Channel Lib. Recall -1 CH Lib-1 Recall

22 Channel Lib. Recall No. XX CH LibXXX Recall

23 GATE Lib. Recall +1 Gate Lib+1 RCL.

24 GATE Lib. Recall -1 Gate Lib-1 RCL.

25 GATE Lib. Recall No. XX Gate LibXXX RCL.

26 COMP Lib. Recall +1 Comp Lib+1 RCL.

27 COMP Lib. Recall -1 Comp Lib-1 RCL.

28 COMP Lib. Recall No. XX Comp LibXXX RCL.

29 EQ Lib. Recall +1 EQ Lib+1 Recall

30 EQ Lib. Recall -1 EQ Lib-1 Recall

31 EQ Lib. Recall No. XX EQ LibXXX Recall

32 Surr Lib. Recall +1 Surr. Lib+1

33 Surr Lib. Recall -1 Surr. Lib-1

34 Surr Lib. Recall No.XX Surr. Libxxx

35 SURR. MONI MUTE Mute L On/Off Surr.Mon L Mute

36 SURR. MONI MUTE Mute R On/Off Surr.Mon R Mute

37 SURR. MONI MUTE Mute Ls On/Off Surr.Mon Ls Mute

38 SURR. MONI MUTE Mute Rs On/Off Surr.Mon Rs Mute

39 SURR. MONI MUTE Mute C On/Off Surr.Mon C Mute

40 SURR. MONI MUTE Mute Bs On/Off Surr.Mon Bs Mute

SURR. MONI MUTE Mute LFE

On/Off

Surr.Mon LFEMute

42 SURR. MONI SLOT1 ON/OFF Surr.SLOT1 ON

43 SURR. MONI SLOT2 ON/OFF Surr.SLOT2 ON

SURR. MONI BASS MANAGE

ON/OFF

Bass Manage ON

45 SURR. MONI SNAP TO 85dB SPL SNAP TO SPL85

46 Bus to ST Lib. Recall +1 BUS to ST Lib+1

47 Bus to ST Lib. Recall -1 BUS to ST Lib-1

48 Bus to ST Lib. Recall No. XX BUS to ST LibXX

49 Input Patch Lib. Recall +1 IN Patch Lib+1

50 Input Patch Lib. Recall -1 IN Patch Lib-1

51 Input Patch Lib. Recall No. XX IN Patch LibXX

52 Output Patch Lib. Recall +1 Out Patch Lib+1

53 Output Patch Lib. Recall -1 Out Patch Lib-1

54 Output Patch Lib. Recall No. XX Out Patch LibXX

55 Input Fader Group Enable A IN Fader Group A

56 Input Fader Group Enable B IN Fader Group B

57 Input Fader Group Enable C IN Fader Group C

58 Input Fader Group Enable D IN Fader Group D

59 Input Fader Group Enable E IN Fader Group E

60 Input Fader Group Enable F IN Fader Group F

61 Input Fader Group EnableG IN Fader Group G

62 Input Fader Group Enable H IN Fader Group H

63 Input MUTE Group Enable I IN Mute Group I

64 Input MUTE Group Enable J IN Mute Group J

65 Input MUTE Group Enable K IN Mute Group K

66 Input MUTE Group Enable L IN Mute Group L

67 Input MUTE Group Enable M IN Mute Group M

68 Input MUTE Group Enable N IN Mute Group N

69 Input MUTE Group Enable O IN Mute Group O

70 Input MUTE Group Enable P IN Mute Group P

71 Output Fader Group Enable Q OutFader Group Q

72 Output Fader Group Enable R OutFader Group R

73 Output Fader Group Enable S OutFader Group S

74 Output Fader Group Enable T OutFader Group T

75 Output MUTE Group Enable U Out Mute Group U

76 Output MUTE Group Enable V Out Mute Group V

77 Output MUTE Group Enable W Out Mute Group W

78 Output MUTE Group Enable X Out Mute Group X

79 Input Fader Group Assign X IN Fader Assign X

80 Input Mute Group Assign X IN Mute Assign X

81 Input EQ Group Assign X IN EQ Assign x

82 Input COMP Group Assign X IN COMP Assign x

83 Output Fader Group Assign X OutFader Assign X

84 Output Mute Group Assign X Out Mute Assign X

85 Output EQ Group Assign X Out EQ Assign x

86 Output COMP Group Assign X Out COMP Assign x

87 Input Mute Group Master X In Mute Master X

88 Output MUTE Group Master X Out Mute Master X

89 Automix REC Automix REC

90 Automix PLAY Automix PLAY

91 Automix STOP Automix STOP

92 Automix ABORT Automix ABORT

93 Automix AUTO REC Automix AUTOREC

94 Automix ENABLE Automix ENABLE

95 Automix RETURN Automix RETURN

96 Automix RELATIVE Automix RELATIVE

97 Automix TOUCH SENSE Automix T.SENSE

98 Automix UPDATE TO END Amx UPDATETO END

99 Overwrite FADER Overwrite FADER

100 Overwrite ON Overwrite ON

101 Overwrite PAN Overwrite PAN

102 Overwrite SURROUND Overwrite SURR.

103 Overwrite EQ Overwrite EQ

104 Overwrite AUX Overwrite AUX

105 Overwrite AUX ON Overwrite AUX ON

106 PEAK HOLD On/Off Peak Hold

107 OSCILLATOR On/Off OSC ON/OFF

108 SOLO Enable SOLO ENABLE

109 AUX/SOLO LINK Mode On/Off AUX/SOLO LINK

110 FADER/SOLO RELEASE Mode On/Off FaderSolo RELEASE

111 Control Room Monitor MONO C-R MONO

112 Pan / Surround Link PAN/SURR LINK

113 Talkback Assign SLOT1-XX Talkback SLOT1-XX

114 Talkback Assign SLOT2-XX Talkback SLOT2-XX

# Function Display

294 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

115 Talkback Assign OMNI OUT XX Talkback OMNI XX

116 Channel Name ID/Short CH ID/Short

117 Port Name ID/Short Port D/Short

118 Channel Copy Channel Copy

119 Channel Paste Channel Paste

120 Display Back Display Back

121 Display Forward Display Forward

122 UDEF KEYS BANK +1 UDEF KEYS BANK+1

123 UDEF KEYS BANK -1 UDEF KEYS BANK-1

124 UDEF KEYS BANK X UDEF KEYS BANK x

125 REMOTE USER DEFINE BANK +1 RMT UDEF BANK+1

126 REMOTE USER DEFINE BANK -1 RMT UDEF BANK-1

127 REMOTE USER DEFINE BANK X RMT UDEF BANK X

128 REMOTE USER ASS LAYER BANK +1 USR LAYER BANK+1

129 REMOTE USER ASS LAYER BANK -1 USR LAYER BANK-1

130 REMOTE USER ASS LAYER BANK X USR LAYER BANK X

131 MIDI NOTE No.XX MIDI NOTE XXX

132 MIDI Program change No.XX MIDI PGM XXX

133 MIDI Control Change No.XX MIDI CC XXX

134 Machine REC Machine REC

135 Machine PLAY Machine PLAY

136 Machine STOP Machine STOP

137 Machine FF Machine FF

138 Machine REW Machine REW

139 Machine SHUTTLE Machine SHUTTLE

140 Machine SCRUB Machine SCRUB

141 Machine LOCATE X Machine LOCATE X

142 Machine Set LOCATE X Machine Capture X

143 Machine RTZ Machine RTZ

144 Machine Set RTZ Machine Set RTZ

145 Track Arming 1 Track Arming 1

146 Track Arming 2 Track Arming 2

147 Track Arming 3 Track Arming 3

148 Track Arming 4 Track Arming 4

149 Track Arming 5 Track Arming 5

150 Track Arming 6 Track Arming 6

151 Track Arming 7 Track Arming 7

152 Track Arming 8 Track Arming 8

153 Track Arming 9 Track Arming 9

154 Track Arming 10 Track Arming 10

155 Track Arming 11 Track Arming 11

156 Track Arming 12 Track Arming 12

157 Track Arming 13 Track Arming 13

158 Track Arming 14 Track Arming 14

159 Track Arming 15 Track Arming 15

160 Track Arming 16 Track Arming 16

161 Track Arming 17 Track Arming 17

162 Track Arming 18 Track Arming 18

163 Track Arming 19 Track Arming 19

164 Track Arming 20 Track Arming 20

165 Track Arming 21 Track Arming 21

166 Track Arming 22 Track Arming 22

167 Track Arming 23 Track Arming 23

168 Track Arming 24 Track Arming 24

169 Track Arming All Clear Track Arming CLR

170 DAW REC DAW REC

171 DAW PLAY DAW PLAY

172 DAW STOP DAW STOP

173 DAW FF DAW FF

174 DAW REW DAW REW

175 DAW SHUTTLE DAW SHUTTLE

176 DAW SCRUB DAW SCRUB

177 DAW AUDITION DAW AUDITION

178 DAW PRE DAW PRE

# Function Display

179 DAW IN DAW IN

180 DAW OUT DAW OUT

181 DAW POST DAW POST

182 DAW RTZ DAW RTZ

183 DAW END DAW END

184 DAW ONLINE DAW ONLINE

185 DAW LOOP DAW LOOP

186 DAW QUICKPUNCH DAW QUICKPUNCH

187 DAW GROUP STATUS DAW GROUP STATUS

188 DAW AUTO FADER DAW AUTO FADER

189 DAW AUTO MUTE DAW AUTO MUTE

190 DAW AUTO PAN DAW AUTO PAN

191 DAW AUTO SEND DAW AUTO SEND

192 DAW AUTO PLUGIN DAW AUTO PLUGIN

193 DAW AUTO SEND MUTE DAW AUTO SENDMUTE

194 DAW AUTO READ DAW AUTO READ

195 DAW AUTO TOUCH DAW AUTO TOUCH

196 DAW AUTO LATCH DAW AUTO LATCH

197 DAW AUTO WRITE DAW AUTO WRITE

198 DAW AUTO TRIM DAW AUTO TRIM

199 DAW AUTO OFF DAW AUTO OFF

200 DAW AUTO SUSPEND DAW AUTO SUSPEND

201 DAW AUTO STATUS DAW AUTO STATUS

202 DAW MONITOR STATUS DAW MONI STATUS

203 DAW CREATE GROUP DAW CREATE GROUP

204 DAW SUSPEND GROUP DAW SUSPEND GRP

205 DAW WINDOW TRANSPORT DAW WIN TRANSPORT

206 DAW WINDOW INSERT DAW WIN INSERT

207 DAW WINDOW MIX/EDIT DAW WIN MIX/EDIT

208 DAW WINDOW MEM-LOC DAW WIN MEM-LOC

209 DAW WINDOW STATUS DAW WIN STATUS

210 DAW Shortcut UNDO DAW UNDO

211 DAW Shortcut SAVE DAW SAVE

212 DAW Shortcut EDIT MODE DAW EDIT MODE

213 DAW Shortcut EDIT TOOL DAW EDIT TOOL

214 DAW Shortcut SHIFT/ADD DAW SHIFT/ADD

215 DAW Shortcut OPTION/ALL DAW OPTION/ALL

216 DAW Shortcut CTRL/CLUCH DAW CTRL/CLUCH

217 DAW Shortcut ALT/FINE DAW ALT/FINE

218 DAW BANK + DAW BANK +

219 DAW BANK - DAW BANK -

220 DAW Channel + DAW Channel +

221 DAW Channel - DAW Channel -

222 DAW REC/RDY X DAW REC/RDY X

223 DAW REC/RDY ALL DAW REC/RDY ALL

224

Studio Manager Window Control

SM CTRL Close

225

Studio Manager Window Control

Close All

SM CTRL Close All

226

Studio Manager Window Control

Selected Channel

SM CTRL Sel Ch

227

Studio Manager Window Control

Library

SM CTRL Library

228

Studio Manager Window Control

Patch Editor

SM CTRL Patch

229

Studio Manager Window Control

Surround Editor

SM CTRL Surround

230

Studio Manager Window Control

Time Counter

SM CTRL TimeCount

231

Studio Manager Window Control

Effect Editor

SM CTRL Effect

232

Studio Manager Window Control

Meter

SM CTRL Meter

233

Studio Manager Window Control

Layer

SM CTRL Layer

234

Studio Manager Window Control

Master

SM CTRL Master

# Function Display

USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments 295

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments

BANK A BANK B BANK C BANK D

TITLE Surround Monitor Scene Recall Group Enable Automix

1 Snap to SPL85 Scene 1 Recall IN Fader Group A Automix ENABLE

2 Bass Manage ON Scene 2 Recall IN Mute Group I Overwrite FADER

3 Surr.Mon L Mute Scene 3 Recall IN Fader Group B Overwrite ON

4 Surr.Mon R Mute Scene 4 Recall IN Mute Group J Overwrite PAN

5 Surr.Mon C Mute Scene 5 Recall IN Fader Group C Overwrite SURR

6 Surr.Mon Bs Mute Scene 6 Recall IN Mute Group K Overwrite AUX

7 Surr.Mon Ls Mute Scene 7 Recall IN Fader Group D Overwrite AUX ON

8 Surr.Mon Rs Mute Scene 8 Recall IN Mute Group L Overwrite EQ

9 Surr.Mon LFEMute Scene 9 Recall IN Fader Group E Automix ABORT

10 No Assign Scene 10 Recall IN Mute Group M Automix AUTOREC

11 Surr Lib-1 Recall Scene _1 Recall IN Fader Group F Automix RETURN

12 Surr Lib+1 Recall Scene +1 Recall IN Mute Group N Amx UPDATE TO END

BANK E BANK F BANK G BANK H

TITLE DAW 1 DAW 2 Machine Control Program Change

1 UDEF BANK F UDEF BANK E Machine Locate 1 MIDI PGM 1

2 DAW WIN MIX/EDIT DAW AUTO STATUS Machine Locate 2 MIDI PGM 2

3 DAW BANK - DAW BANK - Machine Locate 3 MIDI PGM 3

4 DAW BANK + DAW BANK + Machine Locate 4 MIDI PGM 4

5 DAW CHANNEL - DAW AUTO READ Machine SHUTTLE MIDI PGM 5

6 DAW CHANNEL + DAW AUTO TOUCH Machine SCRUB MIDI PGM 6

7 DAW SHUTTLE DAW AUTO LATCH Machine RTZ MIDI PGM 7

8 DAW SCRUB DAW AUTO WRITE Machine REC MIDI PGM 8

9 DAW STOP DAW AUTO TRIM Machine STOP MIDI PGM 9

10 DAW PLAY DAW AUTO OFF Machine PLAY MIDI PGM 10

11 DAW SHIFT/ADD DAW AUTO SUSPEND Machine REW MIDI PGM 11

12 DAW OPTION/ALL DAW OPTION/ALL Machine FF MIDI PGM 12

296 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Input Patch Parameters

INPUT INSERT IN EFFECT IN CASCADE

Port ID Description Port ID Description Port ID Description Port ID Description

– NONE – NONE – NONE – NONE

AD1 AD IN 1 AD1 AD IN 1 AUX1 AUX1 AD1 AD IN 1

AD2 AD IN 2 AD2 AD IN 2 AUX2 AUX2 AD2 AD IN 2

AD3 AD IN 3 AD3 AD IN 3 AUX3 AUX3 AD3 AD IN 3

AD4 AD IN 4 AD4 AD IN 4 AUX4 AUX4 AD4 AD IN 4

AD5 AD IN 5 AD5 AD IN 5 AUX5 AUX5 AD5 AD IN 5

AD6 AD IN 6 AD6 AD IN 6 AUX6 AUX6 AD6 AD IN 6

AD7 AD IN 7 AD7 AD IN 7 AUX7 AUX7 AD7 AD IN 7

AD8 AD IN 8 AD8 AD IN 8 AUX8 AUX8 AD8 AD IN 8

AD9 AD IN 9 AD9 AD IN 9 INSCH1 InsertOut-CH1 AD9 AD IN 9

AD10 AD IN 10 AD10 AD IN 10 INSCH2 InsertOut-CH2 AD10 AD IN 10

AD11 AD IN 11 AD11 AD IN 11 INSCH3 InsertOut-CH3 AD11 AD IN 11

AD12 AD IN 12 AD12 AD IN 12 INSCH4 InsertOut-CH4 AD12 AD IN 12

AD13 AD IN 13 AD13 AD IN 13 INSCH5 InsertOut-CH5 AD13 AD IN 13

AD14 AD IN 14 AD14 AD IN 14 INSCH6 InsertOut-CH6 AD14 AD IN 14

AD15 AD IN 15 AD15 AD IN 15 INSCH7 InsertOut-CH7 AD15 AD IN 15

AD16 AD IN 16 AD16 AD IN 16 INSCH8 InsertOut-CH8 AD16 AD IN 16

OMNI1 OMNI IN 1 OMNI1 OMNI IN 1 INSCH9 InsertOut-CH9 OMNI1 OMNI IN 1

OMNI2 OMNI IN 2 OMNI2 OMNI IN 2 INSCH10 InsertOut-CH10 OMNI2 OMNI IN 2

OMNI3 OMNI IN 3 OMNI3 OMNI IN 3 INSCH11 InsertOut-CH11 OMNI3 OMNI IN 3

OMNI4 OMNI IN 4 OMNI4 OMNI IN 4 INSCH12 InsertOut-CH12 OMNI4 OMNI IN 4

S1-1 Slot1 CH1 IN S1-1 Slot1 CH1 IN INSCH13 InsertOut-CH13 S1-1 Slot1 CH1 IN

S1-2 Slot1 CH2 IN S1-2 Slot1 CH2 IN INSCH14 InsertOut-CH14 S1-2 Slot1 CH2 IN

S1-3 Slot1 CH3 IN S1-3 Slot1 CH3 IN INSCH15 InsertOut-CH15 S1-3 Slot1 CH3 IN

S1-4 Slot1 CH4 IN S1-4 Slot1 CH4 IN INSCH16 InsertOut-CH16 S1-4 Slot1 CH4 IN

S1-5 Slot1 CH5 IN S1-5 Slot1 CH5 IN INSCH17 InsertOut-CH17 S1-5 Slot1 CH5 IN

S1-6 Slot1 CH6 IN S1-6 Slot1 CH6 IN INSCH18 InsertOut-CH18 S1-6 Slot1 CH6 IN

S1-7 Slot1 CH7 IN S1-7 Slot1 CH7 IN INSCH19 InsertOut-CH19 S1-7 Slot1 CH7 IN

S1-8 Slot1 CH8 IN S1-8 Slot1 CH8 IN INSCH20 InsertOut-CH20 S1-8 Slot1 CH8 IN

S1-9 Slot1 CH9 IN S1-9 Slot1 CH9 IN INSCH21 InsertOut-CH21 S1-9 Slot1 CH9 IN

S110 Slot1 CH10 IN S110 Slot1 CH10 IN INSCH22 InsertOut-CH22 S110 Slot1 CH10 IN

S111 Slot1 CH11 IN S111 Slot1 CH11 IN INSCH23 InsertOut-CH23 S111 Slot1 CH11 IN

S112 Slot1 CH12 IN S112 Slot1 CH12 IN INSCH24 InsertOut-CH24 S112 Slot1 CH12 IN

S113 Slot1 CH13 IN S113 Slot1 CH13 IN INSCH25 InsertOut-CH25 S113 Slot1 CH13 IN

S114 Slot1 CH14 IN S114 Slot1 CH14 IN INSCH26 InsertOut-CH26 S114 Slot1 CH14 IN

S115 Slot1 CH15 IN S115 Slot1 CH15 IN INSCH27 InsertOut-CH27 S115 Slot1 CH15 IN

S116 Slot1 CH16 IN S116 Slot1 CH16 IN INSCH28 InsertOut-CH28 S116 Slot1 CH16 IN

S2-1 Slot2 CH1 IN S2-1 Slot2 CH1 IN INSCH29 InsertOut-CH29 S2-1 Slot2 CH1 IN

S2-2 Slot2 CH2 IN S2-2 Slot2 CH2 IN INSCH30 InsertOut-CH30 S2-2 Slot2 CH2 IN

S2-3 Slot2 CH3 IN S2-3 Slot2 CH3 IN INSCH31 InsertOut-CH31 S2-3 Slot2 CH3 IN

S2-4 Slot2 CH4 IN S2-4 Slot2 CH4 IN INSCH32 InsertOut-CH32 S2-4 Slot2 CH4 IN

S2-5 Slot2 CH5 IN S2-5 Slot2 CH5 IN INSCH33 InsertOut-CH33 S2-5 Slot2 CH5 IN

S2-6 Slot2 CH6 IN S2-6 Slot2 CH6 IN INSCH34 InsertOut-CH34 S2-6 Slot2 CH6 IN

S2-7 Slot2 CH7 IN S2-7 Slot2 CH7 IN INSCH35 InsertOut-CH35 S2-7 Slot2 CH7 IN

S2-8 Slot2 CH8 IN S2-8 Slot2 CH8 IN INSCH36 InsertOut-CH36 S2-8 Slot2 CH8 IN

S2-9 Slot2 CH9 IN S2-9 Slot2 CH9 IN INSCH37 InsertOut-CH37 S2-9 Slot2 CH9 IN

S210 Slot2 CH10 IN S210 Slot2 CH10 IN INSCH38 InsertOut-CH38 S210 Slot2 CH10 IN

S211 Slot2 CH11 IN S211 Slot2 CH11 IN INSCH39 InsertOut-CH39 S211 Slot2 CH11 IN

S212 Slot2 CH12 IN S212 Slot2 CH12 IN INSCH40 InsertOut-CH40 S212 Slot2 CH12 IN

S213 Slot2 CH13 IN S213 Slot2 CH13 IN INSCH41 InsertOut-CH41 S213 Slot2 CH13 IN

S214 Slot2 CH14 IN S214 Slot2 CH14 IN INSCH42 InsertOut-CH42 S214 Slot2 CH14 IN

S215 Slot2 CH15 IN S215 Slot2 CH15 IN INSCH43 InsertOut-CH43 S215 Slot2 CH15 IN

S216 Slot2 CH16 IN S216 Slot2 CH16 IN INSCH44 InsertOut-CH44 S216 Slot2 CH16 IN

FX1-1 Effect1 OUT 1 FX1-1 Effect1 OUT 1 INSCH45 InsertOut-CH45 2TD1L 2TR IN Dig.1 L

Input Patch Parameters 297

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

FX1-2 Effect1 OUT 2 FX1-2 Effect1 OUT 2 INS CH46 InsertOut-CH46 2D1R 2TR IN Dig.1 R

FX1-3 Effect1 OUT 3 FX1-3 Effect1 OUT 3 INS CH47 InsertOut-CH47 2D2L 2TR IN Dig.2 L

FX1-4 Effect1 OUT 4 FX1-4 Effect1 OUT 4 INS CH48 InsertOut-CH48 2D2R 2TR IN Dig.2 R

FX1-5 Effect1 OUT 5 FX1-5 Effect1 OUT 5 INS BUS1 InsertOut-BUS1

FX1-6 Effect1 OUT 6 FX1-6 Effect1 OUT 6 INS BUS2 InsertOut-BUS2

FX1-7 Effect1 OUT 7 FX1-7 Effect1 OUT 7 INS BUS3 InsertOut-BUS3

FX1-8 Effect1 OUT 8 FX1-8 Effect1 OUT 8 INS BUS4 InsertOut-BUS4

FX2-1 Effect2 OUT 1 FX2-1 Effect2 OUT 1 INS BUS5 InsertOut-BUS5

FX2-2 Effect2 OUT 2 FX2-2 Effect2 OUT 2 INS BUS6 InsertOut-BUS6

FX3-1 Effect3 OUT 1 FX3-1 Effect3 OUT 1 INS BUS7 InsertOut-BUS7

FX3-2 Effect3 OUT 2 FX3-2 Effect3 OUT 2 INS BUS8 InsertOut-BUS8

FX4-1 Effect4 OUT 1 FX4-1 Effect4 OUT 1 INS AUX1 InsertOut-AUX1

FX4-2 Effect4 OUT 2 FX4-2 Effect4 OUT 2 INS AUX2 InsertOut-AUX2

2D1L 2TR IN Dig.1 L 2D1L 2TR IN Dig.1 L INS AUX3 InsertOut-AUX3

2D1R 2TR IN Dig.1 R 2D1R 2TR IN Dig.1 R INS AUX4 InsertOut-AUX4

2D2L 2TR IN Dig.2 L 2D2L 2TR IN Dig.2 L INS AUX5 InsertOut-AUX5

2D2R 2TR IN Dig.2 R 2D2R 2TR IN Dig.2 R INS AUX6 InsertOut-AUX6

BUS1 BUS1 INS AUX7 InsertOut-AUX7

BUS2 BUS2 INS AUX8 InsertOut-AUX8

BUS3 BUS3 INS ST-L InsertOut-STL

BUS4 BUS4 INS ST-R InsertOut-STR

BUS5 BUS5

FX1-1

Effect1 OUT 1

BUS6 BUS6

FX1-2

Effect1 OUT 2

BUS7 BUS7

FX2-1

Effect2 OUT 1

BUS8 BUS8

FX2-2

Effect2 OUT 2

AUX1 AUX1

FX3-1

Effect3 OUT 1

AUX2 AUX2

FX3-2

Effect3 OUT 2

AUX3 AUX3

FX4-1

Effect4 OUT 1

AUX4 AUX4

FX4-2

Effect4 OUT 2

AUX5 AUX5

AUX6 AUX6

AUX7 AUX7

AUX8 AUX8

1.You cannot assign the output of the same effect to EFFECT IN.

INPUT INSERT IN EFFECT IN CASCADE

Port ID Description Port ID Description Port ID Description Port ID Description

298 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Initial Input Patch Settings

CHANNEL EFFECT IN PATCH

CASCADE IN PATCH

EFFECT TYPE

1 AD1

2 AD2

3 AD3

4 AD4

5 AD5

6 AD6

7 AD7

8 AD8

9 AD9

10 AD10

11 AD11

12 AD12

13 AD13

14 AD14

15 AD15

16 AD16

17 S1-1

18 S1-2

19 S1-3

20 S1-4

21 S1-5

22 S1-6

23 S1-7

24 S1-8

25 S2-1

26 S2-2

27 S2-3

28 S2-4

29 S2-5

30 S2-6

31 S2-7

32 S2-8

33 FX1-1

34 FX1-2

35 FX2-1

36 FX2-2

37 FX3-1

38 FX3-2

39 FX4-1

40 FX4-2

41 2TD1L

42 2TD1R

43 2TD2L

44 2TD2R

45 OMNI1

46 OMNI2

47 OMNI3

48 OMNI4

1-1 AUX1

1-2 NONE

1-3 NONE

1-4 NONE

1-5 NONE

1-6 NONE

1-7 NONE

1-8 NONE

2-1 AUX2

2-2 NONE

3-1 AUX3

3-2 NONE

4-1 AUX4

4-2 NONE

BUS1 NONE

BUS2 NONE

BUS3 NONE

BUS4 NONE

BUS5 NONE

BUS6 NONE

BUS7 NONE

BUS8 NONE

AUX1 NONE

AUX2 NONE

AUX3 NONE

AUX4 NONE

AUX56 NONE

AUX6 NONE

AUX7 NONE

AUX8 NONE

ST L NONE

ST R NONE

SOLO L NONE

SOLO R NONE

EFFECT1 REVERB HALL

EFFECT2 REVERB ROOM

EFFECT3 REVERB STAGE

EFFECT4 REVERB PLATE

(mono input)

Initial Input Patch Settings 299

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

CHANNEL NAME

CHANNEL ID SHORT LONG

CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1

CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2

CH3 CH3 CH3 CH3

CH4 CH4 CH4 CH4

CH5 CH5 CH5 CH5

CH6 CH6 CH6 CH6

CH7 CH7 CH7 CH7

CH8 CH8 CH8 CH8

CH9 CH9 CH9 CH9

CH10 CH10 CH10 CH10

CH11 CH11 CH11 CH11

CH12 CH12 CH12 CH12

CH13 CH13 CH13 CH13

CH14 CH14 CH14 CH14

CH15 CH15 CH15 CH15

CH16 CH16 CH16 CH16

CH17 CH17 CH17 CH17

CH18 CH18 CH18 CH18

CH19 CH19 CH19 CH19

CH20 CH20 CH20 CH20

CH21 CH21 CH21 CH21

CH22 CH22 CH22 CH22

CH23 CH23 CH23 CH23

CH24 CH24 CH24 CH24

CH25 CH25 CH25 CH25

CH26 CH26 CH26 CH26

CH27 CH27 CH27 CH27

CH28 CH28 CH28 CH28

CH29 CH29 CH29 CH29

CH30 CH30 CH30 CH30

CH31 CH31 CH31 CH31

CH32 CH32 CH32 CH32

CH33 CH33 CH33 CH33

CH34 CH34 CH34 CH34

CH35 CH35 CH35 CH35

CH36 CH36 CH36 CH36

CH37 CH37 CH37 CH37

CH38 CH38 CH38 CH38

CH39 CH39 CH39 CH39

CH40 CH40 CH40 CH40

CH41 CH41 CH41 CH41

CH42 CH42 CH42 CH42

CH43 CH43 CH43 CH43

CH44 CH44 CH44 CH44

CH45 CH45 CH45 CH45

CH46 CH46 CH46 CH46

CH47 CH47 CH47 CH47

CH48 CH48 CH48 CH48

300 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Output Patch Parameters

SLOT, OMNI INSERT IN DIRECT OUT 2TR OUT Digital

Source Description Source Description Source Description Source Description

– NONE – NONE – NONE – NONE

BUS1 BUS1 AD1 AD IN 1 S1-1 Slot1 CH1 OUT BUS1 BUS1

BUS2 BUS2 AD2 AD IN 2 S1-2 Slot1 CH2 OUT BUS2 BUS2

BUS3 BUS3 AD3 AD IN 3 S1-3 Slot1 CH3 OUT BUS3 BUS3

BUS4 BUS4 AD4 AD IN 4 S1-4 Slot1 CH4 OUT BUS4 BUS4

BUS5 BUS5 AD5 AD IN 5 S1-5 Slot1 CH5 OUT BUS5 BUS5

BUS6 BUS6 AD6 AD IN 6 S1-6 Slot1 CH6 OUT BUS6 BUS6

BUS7 BUS7 AD7 AD IN 7 S1-7 Slot1 CH7 OUT BUS7 BUS7

BUS8 BUS8 AD8 AD IN 8 S1-8 Slot1 CH8 OUT BUS8 BUS8

AUX1 AUX1 AD9 AD IN 9 S1-9 Slot1 CH9 OUT AUX1 AUX1

AUX2 AUX2 AD10 AD IN 10 S110 Slot1 CH10 OUT AUX2 AUX2

AUX3 AUX3 AD11 AD IN 11 S111 Slot1 CH11 OUT AUX3 AUX3

AUX4 AUX4 AD12 AD IN 12 S112 Slot1 CH12 OUT AUX4 AUX4

AUX5 AUX5 AD13 AD IN 13 S113 Slot1 CH13 OUT AUX5 AUX5

AUX6 AUX6 AD14 AD IN 14 S114 Slot1 CH14 OUT AUX6 AUX6

AUX7 AUX7 AD15 AD IN 15 S115 Slot1 CH15 OUT AUX7 AUX7

AUX8 AUX8 AD16 AD IN 16 S116 Slot1 CH16 OUT AUX8 AUX8

STEREO-L STEREO L OMNI1 OMNI IN 1 S2-1 Slot2 CH1 OUT STEREO-L STEREO L

STEREO-R STEREO R OMNI2 OMNI IN 2 S2-2 Slot2 CH2 OUT STEREO-R STEREO R

INSCH1 InsertOut-CH1 OMNI3 OMNI IN 3 S2-3 Slot2 CH3 OUT INSCH1 InsertOut-CH1

INSCH2 InsertOut-CH2 OMNI4 OMNI IN 4 S2-4 Slot2 CH4 OUT INSCH2 InsertOut-CH2

INSCH3 InsertOut-CH3 S1-1 Slot1 CH1 IN S2-5 Slot2 CH5 OUT INSCH3 InsertOut-CH3

INSCH4 InsertOut-CH4 S1-2 Slot1 CH2 IN S2-6 Slot2 CH6 OUT INSCH4 InsertOut-CH4

INSCH5 InsertOut-CH5 S1-3 Slot1 CH3 IN S2-7 Slot2 CH7 OUT INSCH5 InsertOut-CH5

INSCH6 InsertOut-CH6 S1-4 Slot1 CH4 IN S2-8 Slot2 CH8 OUT INSCH6 InsertOut-CH6

INSCH7 InsertOut-CH7 S1-5 Slot1 CH5 IN S2-9 Slot2 CH9 OUT INSCH7 InsertOut-CH7

INSCH8 InsertOut-CH8 S1-6 Slot1 CH6 IN S210 Slot2 CH10 OUT INSCH8 InsertOut-CH8

INSCH9 InsertOut-CH9 S1-7 Slot1 CH7 IN S211 Slot2 CH11 OUT INSCH9 InsertOut-CH9

INSCH10 InsertOut-CH10 S1-8 Slot1 CH8 IN S212 Slot2 CH12 OUT INSCH10 InsertOut-CH10

INSCH11 InsertOut-CH11 S1-9 Slot1 CH9 IN S213 Slot2 CH13 OUT INSCH11 InsertOut-CH11

INSCH12 InsertOut-CH12 S110 Slot1 CH10 IN S214 Slot2 CH14 OUT INSCH12 InsertOut-CH12

INSCH13 InsertOut-CH13 S111 Slot1 CH11 IN S215 Slot2 CH15 OUT INSCH13 InsertOut-CH13

INSCH14 InsertOut-CH14 S112 Slot1 CH12 IN S216 Slot2 CH16 OUT INSCH14 InsertOut-CH14

INSCH15 InsertOut-CH15 S113 Slot1 CH13 IN OMNI1 OMNI OUT 1 INSCH15 InsertOut-CH15

INSCH16 InsertOut-CH16 S114 Slot1 CH14 IN OMNI2 OMNI OUT 2 INSCH16 InsertOut-CH16

INSCH17 InsertOut-CH17 S115 Slot1 CH15 IN OMNI3 OMNI OUT 3 INSCH17 InsertOut-CH17

INSCH18 InsertOut-CH18 S116 Slot1 CH16 IN OMNI4 OMNI OUT 4 INSCH18 InsertOut-CH18

INSCH19 InsertOut-CH19 S2-1 Slot2 CH1 IN OMNI5 OMNI OUT 5 INSCH19 InsertOut-CH19

INSCH20 InsertOut-CH20 S2-2 Slot2 CH2 IN OMNI6 OMNI OUT 6 INSCH20 InsertOut-CH20

INSCH21 InsertOut-CH21 S2-3 Slot2 CH3 IN OMNI7 OMNI OUT 7 INSCH21 InsertOut-CH21

INSCH22 InsertOut-CH22 S2-4 Slot2 CH4 IN OMNI8 OMNI OUT 8 INSCH22 InsertOut-CH22

INSCH23 InsertOut-CH23 S2-5 Slot2 CH5 IN 2TD1L 2TR OUT Dig.1 L INSCH23 InsertOut-CH23

INSCH24 InsertOut-CH24 S2-6 Slot2 CH6 IN 2TD1R 2TR OUT Dig.1 R INSCH24 InsertOut-CH24

INSCH25 InsertOut-CH25 S2-7 Slot2 CH7 IN 2TD2L 2TR OUT Dig.2 L INSCH25 InsertOut-CH25

INSCH26 InsertOut-CH26 S2-8 Slot2 CH8 IN 2TD2R 2TR OUT Dig.2 R INSCH26 InsertOut-CH26

INSCH27 InsertOut-CH27 S2-9 Slot2 CH9 IN OMNI9 OMNI OUT 9 INSCH27 InsertOut-CH27

INSCH28 InsertOut-CH28 S210 Slot2 CH10 IN OMNI10 OMNI OUT 10 INSCH28 InsertOut-CH28

INSCH29 InsertOut-CH29 S211 Slot2 CH11 IN OMNI11 OMNI OUT 11 INSCH29 InsertOut-CH29

INSCH30 InsertOut-CH30 S212 Slot2 CH12 IN OMNI12 OMNI OUT 12 INSCH30 InsertOut-CH30

INSCH31 InsertOut-CH31 S213 Slot2 CH13 IN — — INSCH31 InsertOut-CH31

INSCH32 InsertOut-CH32 S214 Slot2 CH14 IN — — INSCH32 InsertOut-CH32

INSCH33 InsertOut-CH33 S215 Slot2 CH15 IN — — INSCH33 InsertOut-CH33

INSCH34 InsertOut-CH34 S216 Slot2 CH16 IN — — INSCH34 InsertOut-CH34

INSCH35 InsertOut-CH35 FX1-1 Effect1 OUT 1 — — INSCH35 InsertOut-CH35

Output Patch Parameters 301

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

INSCH36 InsertOut-CH36 FX1-2 Effect1 OUT 2 — — INSCH36 InsertOut-CH36

INSCH37 InsertOut-CH37 FX1-3 Effect1 OUT 3 — — INSCH37 InsertOut-CH37

INSCH38 InsertOut-CH38 FX1-4 Effect1 OUT 4 — — INSCH38 InsertOut-CH38

INSCH39 InsertOut-CH39 FX1-5 Effect1 OUT 5 — — INSCH39 InsertOut-CH39

INSCH40 InsertOut-CH40 FX1-6 Effect1 OUT 6 — — INSCH40 InsertOut-CH40

INSCH41 InsertOut-CH41 FX1-7 Effect1 OUT 7 — — INSCH41 InsertOut-CH41

INSCH42 InsertOut-CH42 FX1-8 Effect1 OUT 8 — — INSCH42 InsertOut-CH42

INSCH43 InsertOut-CH43 FX2-1 Effect2 OUT 1 — — INSCH43 InsertOut-CH43

INSCH44 InsertOut-CH44 FX2-2 Effect2 OUT 2 — — INSCH44 InsertOut-CH44

INSCH45 InsertOut-CH45 FX3-1 Effect3 OUT 1 — — INSCH45 InsertOut-CH45

INSCH46 InsertOut-CH46 FX3-2 Effect3 OUT 2 — — INSCH46 InsertOut-CH46

INSCH47 InsertOut-CH47 FX4-1 Effect4 OUT 1 — — INSCH47 InsertOut-CH47

INSCH48 InsertOut-CH48 FX4-2 Effect4 OUT 2 — — INSCH48 InsertOut-CH48

INSBUS1 InsertOut-BUS1 2TD1L 2TR IN Dig.1 L — — INSBUS1 InsertOut-BUS1

INSBUS2 InsertOut-BUS2 2TD1R 2TR IN Dig.1 R — — INSBUS2 InsertOut-BUS2

INSBUS3 InsertOut-BUS3 2TD2L 2TR IN Dig.2 L — — INSBUS3 InsertOut-BUS3

INSBUS4 InsertOut-BUS4 2TD2R 2TR IN Dig.2 R — — INSBUS4 InsertOut-BUS4

INSBUS5 InsertOut-BUS5 — — — — INSBUS5 InsertOut-BUS5

INSBUS6 InsertOut-BUS6 — — — — INSBUS6 InsertOut-BUS6

INSBUS7 InsertOut-BUS7 — — — — INSBUS7 InsertOut-BUS7

INSBUS8 InsertOut-BUS8 — — — — INSBUS8 InsertOut-BUS8

INSAUX1 InsertOut-AUX1 — — — — INSAUX1 InsertOut-AUX1

INSAUX2 InsertOut-AUX2 — — — — INSAUX2 InsertOut-AUX2

INSAUX3 InsertOut-AUX3 — — — — INSAUX3 InsertOut-AUX3

INSAUX4 InsertOut-AUX4 — — — — INSAUX4 InsertOut-AUX4

INSAUX5 InsertOut-AUX5 — — — — INSAUX5 InsertOut-AUX5

INSAUX6 InsertOut-AUX6 — — — — INSAUX6 InsertOut-AUX6

INSAUX7 InsertOut-AUX7 — — — — INSAUX7 InsertOut-AUX7

INSAUX8 InsertOut-AUX8 — — — — INSAUX8 InsertOut-AUX8

INSSTL InsertOut-STL — — — — INSSTL InsertOut-STL

INSSTR InsertOut-STR — — — — INSSTR InsertOut-STR

Surr L Surr Monitor L — — — — CR-L Control Room L

Surr R Surr Monitor R — — — — CR-R Control Room R

Surr Ls Surr Monitor Ls — — — — CAS BUS1 Cascade Out Bus1

Surr Rs Surr Monitor Rs — — — — CAS BUS2 Cascade Out Bus2

Surr C Surr Monitor C — — — — CAS BUS3 Cascade Out Bus3

Surr SW Surr Monitor SW — — — — CAS BUS4 Cascade Out Bus4

Surr Ls2 Surr Monitor Ls2 — — — — CAS BUS5 Cascade Out Bus5

Surr Rs2 Surr Monitor Rs2 — — — — CAS BUS6 Cascade Out Bus6

CR-L Control Room L — — — — CAS BUS7 Cascade Out Bus7

CR-R Control Room R — — — — CAS BUS8 Cascade Out Bus8

CAS BUS1 Cascade Out Bus1 — — — — CAS AUX1 Cascade Out Aux1

CAS BUS2 Cascade Out Bus2 — — — — CAS AUX2 Cascade Out Aux2

CAS BUS3 Cascade Out Bus3 — — — — CAS AUX3 Cascade Out Aux3

CAS BUS4 Cascade Out Bus4 — — — — CAS AUX4 Cascade Out Aux4

CAS BUS5 Cascade Out Bus5 — — — — CAS AUX5 Cascade Out Aux5

CAS BUS6 Cascade Out Bus6 — — — — CAS AUX6 Cascade Out Aux6

CAS BUS7 Cascade Out Bus7 — — — — CAS AUX7 Cascade Out Aux7

CAS BUS8 Cascade Out Bus8 — — — — CAS AUX8 Cascade Out Aux8

CAS AUX1 Cascade Out Aux1 — — — — CAS ST_L Cascade STEREO_L

CAS AUX2 Cascade Out Aux2 — — — — CAS ST_R Cascade STEREO_R

CAS AUX3 Cascade Out Aux3 — — — — CAS SO_L Cascade SOLO_L

CAS AUX4 Cascade Out Aux4 — — — — CAS SO_R Cascade SOLO_R

CAS AUX5 Cascade Out Aux5 — — — — SOLO L SOLO OUT L

CAS AUX6 Cascade Out Aux6 — — — — SOLO R SOLO OUT R

CAS AUX7 Cascade Out Aux7 — — — — — —

SLOT, OMNI INSERT IN DIRECT OUT 2TR OUT Digital

Source Description Source Description Source Description Source Description

302 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Initial Output Patch Settings

SLOT OMNI OUT

CAS AUX8 Cascade Out Aux8 — — — — — —

CAS ST_L Cascade STEREO_L — — — — — —

CAS ST_R Cascade STEREO_R — — — — — —

CAS SO_L Cascade SOLO_L — — — — — —

CAS SO_R Cascade SOLO_R — — — — — —

SOLO L SOLO OUT L — — — — — —

SOLO R SOLO OUT R — — — — — —

Moni L Moni Matrix L — — — — — —

Moni R Moni Matrix R — — — — — —

Moni Ls Moni Matrix Ls — — — — — —

Moni Rs Moni Matrix Rs — — — — — —

Moni C Moni Matrix C — — — — — —

Moni Bs Moni Matrix Bs — — — — — —

Moni LFE Moni Matrix LFE — — — — — —

SLOT, OMNI INSERT IN DIRECT OUT 2TR OUT Digital

Source Description Source Description Source Description Source Description

SLOT1-1 BUS1

SLOT1-2 BUS2

SLOT1-3 BUS3

SLOT1-4 BUS4

SLOT1-5 BUS5

SLOT1-6 BUS6

SLOT1-7 BUS7

SLOT1-8 BUS8

SLOT1-9 BUS1

SLOT1-10 BUS2

SLOT1-11 BUS3

SLOT1-12 BUS4

SLOT1-13 BUS5

SLOT1-14 BUS6

SLOT1-15 BUS7

SLOT1-16 BUS8

SLOT2-1 BUS1

SLOT2-2 BUS2

SLOT2-3 BUS3

SLOT2-4 BUS4

SLOT2-5 BUS5

SLOT2-6 BUS6

SLOT2-7 BUS7

SLOT2-8 BUS8

SLOT2-9 BUS1

SLOT2-10 BUS2

SLOT2-11 BUS3

SLOT2-12 BUS4

SLOT2-13 BUS5

SLOT2-14 BUS6

SLOT2-15 BUS7

SLOT2-16 BUS8

1 AUX1

2 AUX2

3 AUX3

4 AUX4

5 AUX5

6 AUX6

7 AUX7

8 AUX8

9 ST L

10 ST R

11 C-R L

12 C-R R

Initial Output Patch Settings 303

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

DIRECT OUT 2TR OUT Digital

CHANNEL NAME

1 SLOT1-1

2 SLOT1-2

3 SLOT1-3

4 SLOT1-4

5 SLOT1-5

6 SLOT1-6

7 SLOT1-7

8 SLOT1-8

9 SLOT2-1

10 SLOT2-2

11 SLOT2-3

12 SLOT2-4

13 SLOT2-5

14 SLOT2-6

15 SLOT2-7

16 SLOT2-8

17 NONE

18 NONE

19 NONE

20 NONE

21 NONE

22 NONE

23 NONE

24 NONE

25 NONE

26 NONE

27 NONE

28 NONE

29 NONE

30 NONE

31 NONE

32 NONE

33 NONE

34 NONE

35 NONE

36 NONE

37 NONE

38 NONE

39 NONE

40 NONE

41 NONE

42 NONE

43 NONE

44 NONE

45 NONE

46 NONE

47 NONE

48 NONE

ST IN has no DIRECT OUT

1L ST L

1R ST R

2L ST L

2R ST R

CHANNEL ID SHORT LONG

AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1

AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 AUX2

AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 AUX3

AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 AUX4

AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5

AUX6 AUX6 AUX6 AUX6

AUX7 AUX7 AUX7 AUX7

AUX8 AUX8 AUX8 AUX8

BUS1 BUS1 BUS1 BUS1

BUS2 BUS2 BUS2 BUS2

BUS3 BUS3 BUS3 BUS3

BUS4 BUS4 BUS4 BUS4

BUS5 BUS5 BUS5 BUS5

BUS6 BUS6 BUS6 BUS6

BUS7 BUS7 BUS7 BUS7

BUS8 BUS8 BUS8 BUS8

STEREO ST ST STEREO

304 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

GPI Trigger Source & Target List

INPUT

#Target

0 NO ASSIGN

1TALKBACK

3 DIMMER

4 BUS

5 SLOT

6 2TRD1

7 2TRD2

8TALKBACK UNLATCH

9 DIMMER UNLATCH

10 BUS UNLATCH

11 SLOT UNLATCH

12 2TRD1 UNLATCH

13 2TRD2 UNLATCH

14 CH1 ON

15 CH2 ON

16 CH3 ON

17 CH4 ON

18 CH5 ON

19 CH6 ON

20 CH7 ON

21 CH8 ON

22 CH9 ON

23 CH10 ON

24 CH11 ON

25 CH12 ON

26 CH13 ON

27 CH14 ON

28 CH15 ON

29 CH16 ON

30 CH17 ON

31 CH18 ON

32 CH19 ON

33 CH20 ON

34 CH21 ON

35 CH22 ON

36 CH23 ON

37 CH24 ON

38 CH25 ON

39 CH26 ON

40 CH27 ON

41 CH28 ON

42 CH29 ON

43 CH30 ON

44 CH31 ON

45 CH32 ON

46 CH33 ON

47 CH34 ON

48 CH35 ON

49 CH36 ON

50 CH37 ON

51 CH38 ON

52 CH39 ON

53 CH40 ON

54 CH41 ON

55 CH42 ON

56 CH43 ON

57 CH44 ON

58 CH45 ON

59 CH46 ON

60 CH47 ON

61 CH48 ON

62 BUS1 ON

63 BUS2 ON

64 BUS3 ON

65 BUS4 ON

66 BUS5 ON

67 BUS6 ON

68 BUS7 ON

69 BUS8 ON

70 AUX1 ON

71 AUX2 ON

72 AUX3 ON

73 AUX4 ON

74 AUX5 ON

75 AUX6 ON

76 AUX7 ON

77 AUX8 ON

78 ST ON

79 CH1 ON UNLATCH

80 CH2 ON UNLATCH

81 CH3 ON UNLATCH

82 CH4 ON UNLATCH

83 CH5 ON UNLATCH

84 CH6 ON UNLATCH

85 CH7 ON UNLATCH

86 CH8 ON UNLATCH

87 CH9 ON UNLATCH

88 CH10 ON UNLATCH

89 CH11 ON UNLATCH

90 CH12 ON UNLATCH

91 CH13 ON UNLATCH

92 CH14 ON UNLATCH

93 CH15 ON UNLATCH

94 CH16 ON UNLATCH

95 CH17 ON UNLATCH

96 CH18 ON UNLATCH

97 CH19 ON UNLATCH

98 CH20 ON UNLATCH

99 CH21 ON UNLATCH

100 CH22 ON UNLATCH

101 CH23 ON UNLATCH

102 CH24 ON UNLATCH

103 CH25 ON UNLATCH

104 CH26 ON UNLATCH

105 CH27 ON UNLATCH

106 CH28 ON UNLATCH

107 CH29 ON UNLATCH

108 CH30 ON UNLATCH

109 CH31 ON UNLATCH

110 CH32 ON UNLATCH

111 CH33 ON UNLATCH

112 CH34 ON UNLATCH

113 CH35 ON UNLATCH

114 CH36 ON UNLATCH

115 CH37 ON UNLATCH

116 CH38 ON UNLATCH

#Target

117 CH39 ON UNLATCH

118 CH40 ON UNLATCH

119 CH41 ON UNLATCH

120 CH42 ON UNLATCH

121 CH43 ON UNLATCH

122 CH44 ON UNLATCH

123 CH45 ON UNLATCH

124 CH46 ON UNLATCH

125 CH47 ON UNLATCH

126 CH48 ON UNLATCH

127 BUS1 ON UNLATCH

128 BUS2 ON UNLATCH

129 BUS3 ON UNLATCH

130 BUS4 ON UNLATCH

131 BUS5 ON UNLATCH

132 BUS6 ON UNLATCH

133 BUS7 ON UNLATCH

134 BUS8 ON UNLATCH

135 AUX1 ON UNLATCH

136 AUX2 ON UNLATCH

137 AUX3 ON UNLATCH

138 AUX4 ON UNLATCH

139 AUX5 ON UNLATCH

140 AUX6 ON UNLATCH

141 AUX7 ON UNLATCH

142 AUX8 ON UNLATCH

143 ST ON UNLATCH

144 UDEF1

145 UDEF2

146 UDEF3

147 UDEF4

148 UDEF5

149 UDEF6

150 UDEF7

151 UDEF8

152 UDEF9

153 UDEF10

154 UDEF11

155 UDEF12

#Target

GPI Trigger Source & Target List 305

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

OUTPUT

#Target

0 NO ASSIGN

1 CH1 FADER ON

2 CH2 FADER ON

3 CH3 FADER ON

4 CH4 FADER ON

5 CH5 FADER ON

6 CH6 FADER ON

7 CH7 FADER ON

8 CH8 FADER ON

9 CH9 FADER ON

10 CH10 FADER ON

11 CH11 FADER ON

12 CH12 FADER ON

13 CH13 FADER ON

14 CH14 FADER ON

15 CH15 FADER ON

16 CH16 FADER ON

17 CH17 FADER ON

18 CH18 FADER ON

19 CH19 FADER ON

20 CH20 FADER ON

21 CH21 FADER ON

22 CH22 FADER ON

23 CH23 FADER ON

24 CH24 FADER ON

25 CH25 FADER ON

26 CH26 FADER ON

27 CH27 FADER ON

28 CH28 FADER ON

29 CH29 FADER ON

30 CH30 FADER ON

31 CH31 FADER ON

32 CH32 FADER ON

33 CH33 FADER ON

34 CH34 FADER ON

35 CH35 FADER ON

36 CH36 FADER ON

37 CH37 FADER ON

38 CH38 FADER ON

39 CH39 FADER ON

40 CH40 FADER ON

41 CH41 FADER ON

42 CH42 FADER ON

43 CH43 FADER ON

44 CH44 FADER ON

45 CH45 FADER ON

46 CH46 FADER ON

47 CH47 FADER ON

48 CH48 FADER ON

49 BUS1 FADER ON

50 BUS2 FADER ON

51 BUS3 FADER ON

52 BUS4 FADER ON

53 BUS5 FADER ON

54 BUS6 FADER ON

55 BUS7 FADER ON

56 BUS8 FADER ON

57 AUX1 FADER ON

58 AUX2 FADER ON

59 AUX3 FADER ON

60 AUX4 FADER ON

61 AUX5 FADER ON

62 AUX6 FADER ON

63 AUX7 FADER ON

64 AUX8 FADER ON

65 STEREO FADER ON

66 CH1 FADER OFF

67 CH2 FADER OFF

68 CH3 FADER OFF

69 CH4 FADER OFF

70 CH5 FADER OFF

71 CH6 FADER OFF

72 CH7 FADER OFF

73 CH8 FADER OFF

74 CH9 FADER OFF

75 CH10 FADER OFF

76 CH11 FADER OFF

77 CH12 FADER OFF

78 CH13 FADER OFF

79 CH14 FADER OFF

80 CH15 FADER OFF

81 CH16 FADER OFF

82 CH17 FADER OFF

83 CH18 FADER OFF

84 CH19 FADER OFF

85 CH20 FADER OFF

86 CH21 FADER OFF

87 CH22 FADER OFF

88 CH23 FADER OFF

89 CH24 FADER OFF

90 CH25 FADER OFF

91 CH26 FADER OFF

92 CH27 FADER OFF

93 CH28 FADER OFF

94 CH29 FADER OFF

95 CH30 FADER OFF

96 CH31 FADER OFF

97 CH32 FADER OFF

98 CH33 FADER OFF

99 CH34 FADER OFF

100 CH35 FADER OFF

101 CH36 FADER OFF

102 CH37 FADER OFF

103 CH38 FADER OFF

104 CH39 FADER OFF

105 CH40 FADER OFF

106 CH41 FADER OFF

107 CH42 FADER OFF

108 CH43 FADER OFF

109 CH44 FADER OFF

110 CH45 FADER OFF

111 CH46 FADER OFF

112 CH47 FADER OFF

113 CH48 FADER OFF

114 BUS1 FADER OFF

115 BUS2 FADER OFF

116 BUS3 FADER OFF

117 BUS4 FADER OFF

118 BUS5 FADER OFF

119 BUS6 FADER OFF

#Target

120 BUS7 FADER OFF

121 BUS8 FADER OFF

122 AUX1 FADER OFF

123 AUX2 FADER OFF

124 AUX3 FADER OFF

125 AUX4 FADER OFF

126 AUX5 FADER OFF

127 AUX6 FADER OFF

128 AUX7 FADER OFF

129 AUX8 FADER OFF

130 STEREO FADER OFF

131 CH1 FADER TALLY

132 CH2 FADER TALLY

133 CH3 FADER TALLY

134 CH4 FADER TALLY

135 CH5 FADER TALLY

136 CH6 FADER TALLY

137 CH7 FADER TALLY

138 CH8 FADER TALLY

139 CH9 FADER TALLY

140 CH10 FADER TALLY

141 CH11 FADER TALLY

142 CH12 FADER TALLY

143 CH13 FADER TALLY

144 CH14 FADER TALLY

145 CH15 FADER TALLY

146 CH16 FADER TALLY

147 CH17 FADER TALLY

148 CH18 FADER TALLY

149 CH19 FADER TALLY

150 CH20 FADER TALLY

151 CH21 FADER TALLY

152 CH22 FADER TALLY

153 CH23 FADER TALLY

154 CH24 FADER TALLY

155 CH25 FADER TALLY

156 CH26 FADER TALLY

157 CH27 FADER TALLY

158 CH28 FADER TALLY

159 CH29 FADER TALLY

160 CH30 FADER TALLY

161 CH31 FADER TALLY

162 CH32 FADER TALLY

163 CH33 FADER TALLY

164 CH34 FADER TALLY

165 CH35 FADER TALLY

166 CH36 FADER TALLY

167 CH37 FADER TALLY

168 CH38 FADER TALLY

169 CH39 FADER TALLY

170 CH40 FADER TALLY

171 CH41 FADER TALLY

172 CH42 FADER TALLY

173 CH43 FADER TALLY

174 CH44 FADER TALLY

175 CH45 FADER TALLY

176 CH46 FADER TALLY

177 CH47 FADER TALLY

178 CH48 FADER TALLY

179 BUS1 FADER TALLY

#Target

180 BUS2 FADER TALLY

181 BUS3 FADER TALLY

182 BUS4 FADER TALLY

183 BUS5 FADER TALLY

184 BUS6 FADER TALLY

185 BUS7 FADER TALLY

186 BUS8 FADER TALLY

187 AUX1 FADER TALLY

188 AUX2 FADER TALLY

189 AUX3 FADER TALLY

190 AUX4 FADER TALLY

191 AUX5 FADER TALLY

192 AUX6 FADER TALLY

193 AUX7 FADER TALLY

194 AUX8 FADER TALLY

195 ST FADER TALLY

196 UDEF1 LATCH

197 UDEF2 LATCH

198 UDEF3 LATCH

199 UDEF4 LATCH

200 UDEF5 LATCH

201 UDEF6 LATCH

202 UDEF7 LATCH

203 UDEF8 LATCH

204 UDEF9 LATCH

205 UDEF10 LATCH

206 UDEF11 LATCH

207 UDEF12 LATCH

208 UDEF1 UNLATCH

209 UDEF2 UNLATCH

210 UDEF3 UNLATCH

211 UDEF4 UNLATCH

212 UDEF5 UNLATCH

213 UDEF6 UNLATCH

214 UDEF7 UNLATCH

215 UDEF8 UNLATCH

216 UDEF9 UNLATCH

217 UDEF10 UNLATCH

218 UDEF11 UNLATCH

219 UDEF12 UNLATCH

220 REC LAMP

221 POWER ON

#Target

306 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

User Deﬁned Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings

Bank 1 (GM Vol & Pan)

Name

Controller

Data Format

Short Long 12345678910111213141516

RM01 GM01 GM-CH01 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER B0 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B0 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM02 GM02 GM-CH02 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER B1 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B1 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM03 GM03 GM-CH03 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER B2 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B2 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM04 GM04 GM-CH04 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER B3 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B3 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM05 GM05 GM-CH05 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER B4 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B4 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM06 GM06 GM-CH06 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER B5 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B5 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM07 GM07 GM-CH07 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER B6 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B6 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM08 GM08 GM-CH08 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER B7 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B7 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM09 GM09 GM-CH09 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER B8 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B8 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM10 GM10 GM-CH10 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER B9 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B9 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM11 GM11 GM-CH11 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER BA 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER BA 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM12 GM12 GM-CH12 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER BB 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER BB 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM13 GM13 GM-CH13 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER BC 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER BC 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM14 GM14 GM-CH14 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER BD 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER BD 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM15 GM15 GM-CH15 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER BE 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER BE 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM16 GM16 GM-CH16 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER BF 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER BF 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings 307

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Bank 2 (GM Vol & Effect 1)

Name

Controller

Data Format

Short Long 12345678910111213141516

RM01 GM01 GM-CH01 VOL&EFF1

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER B0 0C ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B0 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM02 GM02 GM-CH02 VOL&EFF1

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER B1 0C ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B1 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM03 GM03 GM-CH03 VOL&EFF1

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER B2 0C ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B2 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM04 GM04 GM-CH04 VOL&EFF1

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER B3 0C ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B3 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM05 GM05 GM-CH05 VOL&EFF1

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER B4 0C ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B4 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM06 GM06 GM-CH06 VOL&EFF1

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER B5 0C ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B5 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM07 GM07 GM-CH07 VOL&EFF1

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER B6 0C ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B6 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM08 GM08 GM-CH08 VOL&EFF1

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER B7 0C ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B7 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM09 GM09 GM-CH09 VOL&EFF1

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER B8 0C ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B8 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM10 GM10 GM-CH10 VOL&EFF1

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER B9 0C ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B9 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM11 GM11 GM-CH11 VOL&EFF1

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER BA 0C ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER BA 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM12 GM12 GM-CH12 VOL&EFF1

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER BB 0C ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER BB 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM13 GM13 GM-CH13 VOL&EFF1

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER BC 0C ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER BC 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM14 GM14 GM-CH14 VOL&EFF1

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER BD 0C ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER BD 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM15 GM15 GM-CH15 VOL&EFF1

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER BE 0C ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER BE 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM16 GM16 GM-CH16 VOL&EFF1

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER BF 0C ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER BF 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

308 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Bank 3 (XG Vol & Pan)

Name

Controller

Data Format

Short Long 12345678910111213141516

RM01 XG01 XG-CH01 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 00 0E ENC F7 END ––––––

FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 00 0B FAD F7 END ––––––

RM02 XG02 XG-CH02 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 01 0E ENC F7 END ––––––

FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 01 0B FAD F7 END ––––––

RM03 XG03 XG-CH03 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 02 0E ENC F7 END ––––––

FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 02 0B FAD F7 END ––––––

RM04 XG04 XG-CH04 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 03 0E ENC F7 END ––––––

FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 03 0B FAD F7 END ––––––

RM05 XG05 XG-CH05 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 04 0E ENC F7 END ––––––

FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 04 0B FAD F7 END ––––––

RM06 XG06 XG-CH06 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 05 0E ENC F7 END ––––––

FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 05 0B FAD F7 END ––––––

RM07 XG07 XG-CH07 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 06 0E ENC F7 END ––––––

FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 06 0B FAD F7 END ––––––

RM08 XG08 XG-CH08 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 07 0E ENC F7 END ––––––

FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 07 0B FAD F7 END ––––––

RM09 XG09 XG-CH09 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 08 0E ENC F7 END ––––––

FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 08 0B FAD F7 END ––––––

RM10 XG10 XG-CH10 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 09 0E ENC F7 END ––––––

FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 09 0B FAD F7 END ––––––

RM11 XG11 XG-CH11 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 0A 0E ENC F7 END ––––––

FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 0A 0B FAD F7 END ––––––

RM12 XG12 XG-CH12 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 0B 0E ENC F7 END ––––––

FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 0B 0B FAD F7 END ––––––

RM13 XG13 XG-CH13 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 0C 0E ENC F7 END ––––––

FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 0C 0B FAD F7 END ––––––

RM14 XG14 XG-CH14 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 0D 0E ENC F7 END ––––––

FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 0D 0B FAD F7 END ––––––

RM15 XG15 XG-CH15 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 0E 0E ENC F7 END ––––––

FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 0E 0B FAD F7 END ––––––

RM16 XG16 XG-CH16 VOL&PAN

ON END –––––––––––––––

ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 0F 0E ENC F7 END ––––––

FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 0F 0B FAD F7 END ––––––

User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings 309

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Bank 4 (Nuendo VST Mixer)

Name

Controller

Data Format

Short Long 12345678910111213141516

RM01 CH1 VST MIXER CH1

ON B0 40 SW END ––––––––––––

ENCODER B0 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B0 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM02 CH2 VST MIXER CH2

ON B1 40 SW END ––––––––––––

ENCODER B1 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B1 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM03 CH3 VST MIXER CH3

ON B2 40 SW END ––––––––––––

ENCODER B2 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B2 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM04 CH4 VST MIXER CH4

ON B3 40 SW END ––––––––––––

ENCODER B3 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B3 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM05 CH5 VST MIXER CH5

ON B4 40 SW END ––––––––––––

ENCODER B4 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B4 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM06 CH6 VST MIXER CH6

ON B5 40 SW END ––––––––––––

ENCODER B5 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B5 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM07 CH7 VST MIXER CH7

ON B6 40 SW END ––––––––––––

ENCODER B6 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B6 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM08 CH8 VST MIXER CH8

ON B7 40 SW END ––––––––––––

ENCODER B7 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B7 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM09 CH9 VST MIXER CH9

ON B8 40 SW END ––––––––––––

ENCODER B8 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B8 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM10 CH10 VST MIXER CH10

ON B9 40 SW END ––––––––––––

ENCODER B9 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER B9 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM11 CH11 VST MIXER CH11

ON BA 40 SW END ––––––––––––

ENCODER BA 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER BA 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM12 CH12 VST MIXER CH12

ON BB 40 SW END ––––––––––––

ENCODER BB 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER BB 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM13 CH13 VST MIXER CH13

ON BC 40 SW END ––––––––––––

ENCODER BC 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER BC 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM14 CH14 VST MIXER CH14

ON BD 40 SW END ––––––––––––

ENCODER BD 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER BD 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM15 CH15 VST MIXER CH15

ON BE 40 SW END ––––––––––––

ENCODER BE 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER BE 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

RM16 CH16 VST MIXER CH16

ON BF 40 SW END ––––––––––––

ENCODER BF 0A ENC END ––––––––––––

FADER BF 07 FAD END ––––––––––––

310 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Effects Parameters

REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM,

REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE

One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate

reverb simulations, all with gates.

EARLY REF.

One input, two output early reﬂections.

GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE

One input, two output early reﬂections with gate,

and early reﬂections with reverse gate.

MONO DELAY

One input, two output basic repeat delay.

STEREO DELAY

Two input, two output basic stereo delay.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10

Reverb diffusion (left–right

reverb spread)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

E/R DLY 0.0–100.0 ms

Delay between early reﬂections

and reverb

E/R BAL. 0–100%

Balance of early reﬂections and

reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% =

all early reﬂections)

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

GATE LVL OFF, –60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in

ATTACK 0–120 ms Gate opening speed

HOLD

1. 0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz),

0.01 ms–1.06 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 0.01 ms–981 ms (fs=96 kHz)

Gate open time

DECAY

2. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s

(fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)

Gate closing speed

Parameter Range Description

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Ran-

dom, Revers, Plate,

Spring

Type of early reﬂection simula-

tion

ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0–10

Early reﬂections decay character-

istics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF. 0–10

Reﬂection diffusion (left–right

reﬂection spread)

DENSITY 0–100% Reﬂection density

ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reﬂections

FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Parameter Range Description

TYPE Type-A, Type-B Type of early reﬂection simulation

ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0–10

Early reﬂections decay character-

istics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF. 0–10

Reﬂection diffusion (left–right

reﬂection spread)

DENSITY 0–100% Reﬂection density

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reﬂections

FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Parameter Range Description

DELAY 0.0–2730.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

1. (

Max. value depends on tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine DELAY

Parameter

Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. G L –99 to +99%

Left channel feedback (plus values

for normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

FB. G R –99 to +99%

Right channel feedback (plus val-

ues for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine left channel DELAY

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine right channel DELAY

Effects Parameters 311

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

MOD. DELAY

One input, two output basic repeat delay with mod-

ulation.

DELAY LCR

One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center,

right).

ECHO

Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed

feedback loop.

CHORUS

Two input, two output chorus effect.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

DLY.NOTE

1. (

Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine DELAY

MOD.NOTE

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FREQ

Parameter

Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–2730.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY C 0.0–2730.0 ms Center channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–2730.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0–2730.0 ms Feedback delay time

LEVEL L –100 to +100% Left channel delay level

LEVEL C –100 to +100% Center channel delay level

LEVEL R –100 to +100% Right channel delay level

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

1. (

Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine DELAY L

NOTE C

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine DELAY C

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine DELAY R

NOTE FB

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FB. DLY

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB.DLY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel feedback delay time

FB.DLY R 0.0–1350.0 ms

Right channel feedback delay

time

FB. G L –99 to +99%

Left channel feedback gain (plus

values for normal-phase feed-

back, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

FB. G R –99 to +99%

Right channel feedback gain

(plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

L->R FBG –99 to +99%

Left to right channel feedback

gain (plus values for nor-

mal-phase feedback, minus val-

ues for reverse-phase feedback)

R->L FBG –99 to +99%

Right to left channel feedback

gain (plus values for nor-

mal-phase feedback, minus val-

ues for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine DELAY L

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine DELAY R

NOTE FBL

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FB.DLY L

NOTE FBR

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FB.DLY R

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FREQ.

312 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

FLANGE

Two input, two output ﬂange effect.

SYMPHONIC

Two input, two output symphonic effect.

PHASER

Two input, two output 16-stage phaser.

AUTO PAN

Two input, two output autopanner.

TREMOLO

Two input, two output tremolo effect.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

OFFSET 0–100

Lowest phase-shifted frequency

offset

PHASE

0.00–354.38

degrees

Left and right modulation phase

balance

STAGE

2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12,

14, 16

Number of phase shift stages

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

DIR.

1. L<->R, L—>R, L<—R, Turn L, Turn R

Panning direction

WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Effects Parameters 313

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

HQ. PITCH

One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter.

DUAL PITCH

Two input, two output pitch shifter.

ROTARY

One input, two output rotary speaker simulator.

RING MOD.

Two input, two output ring modulator.

MOD. FILTER

Two input, two output modulation ﬁlter.

DISTORTION

One input, two output distortion effect.

Parameter Range Description

PITCH

–12 to +12 semi-

tones

Pitch shift

FINE –50 to +50 cents Pitch shift ﬁne

DELAY 0.0–1000.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

MODE 1–10 Pitch shift precision

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine DELAY

Parameter Range Description

PITCH 1

–24 to +24 semi-

tones

Channel #1 pitch shift

FINE 1 –50 to +50 cents Channel #1 pitch shift ﬁne

LEVEL 1 –100 to +100%

Channel #1 level (plus values for

normal phase, minus values for

reverse phase)

PAN 1 L63 to R63 Channel #1 pan

DELAY 1 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #1 delay time

FB. G 1 –99 to +99%

Channel #1 feedback gain (plus

values for normal-phase feed-

back, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

PITCH 2

–24 to +24 semi-

tones

Channel #2 pitch shift

FINE 2 –50 to +50 cents Channel #2 pitch shift ﬁne

LEVEL 2 –100 to +100%

Channel #2 level (plus values for

normal phase, minus values for

reverse phase)

PAN 2 L63 to R63 Channel #2 pan

DELAY 2 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #2 delay time

FB. G 2 –99 to +99%

Channel #2 feedback gain (plus

values for normal-phase feed-

back, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

MODE 1–10 Pitch shift precision

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE 1

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine Channel

#1 delay

NOTE 2

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine Channel

#2 delay

Parameter Range Description

ROTATE STOP, START Rotation stop, start

SPEED SLOW, FAST

Rotation speed (see SLOW and

FAST parameters)

SLOW 0.05–10.00 Hz SLOW rotation speed

FAST 0.05–10.00 Hz FAST rotation speed

DRIVE 0–100 Overdrive level

ACCEL 0–10 Acceleration at speed changes

LOW 0–100 Low-frequency ﬁlter

HIGH 0–100 High-frequency ﬁlter

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE OSC, SELF

Modulation source: oscillator or

input signal

OSC FREQ 0.0–5000.0 Hz Oscillator frequency

FM FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz

Oscillator frequency modulation

speed

FM DEPTH 0–100%

Oscillator frequency modulation

depth

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE FM

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FM FREQ

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

PHASE

0.00–354.38

degrees

Left-channel modulation and

right-channel modulation phase

difference

TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF

Filter type: low pass, high pass,

band pass

OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset

RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance

LEVEL 0–100 Output level

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FREQ

Parameter Range Description

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2,

OVD1, OVD2,

CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distor-

tion, OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive

MASTER 0–100 Master volume

TONE –10 to +10 Tone

N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction

314 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

AMP SIMULATE

One input, two output guitar amp simulator.

DYNA. FILTER

Two input, two output dynamically controlled ﬁlter.

DYNA. FLANGE

Two input, two output dynamically controlled

ﬂanger.

DYNA. PHASER

Two input, two output dynamically controlled

phaser.

REV+CHORUS

One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in

parallel.

Parameter Range Description

AMP TYPE

1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR,

CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT

Guitar amp simulation type

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2,

OVD1, OVD2,

CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distor-

tion, OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive

MASTER 0–100 Master volume

BASS 0–100 Bass tone control

MIDDLE 0–100 Middle tone control

TREBLE 0–100 High tone control

CAB DEP 0–100%

Speaker cabinet simulation

depth

EQ F 100–8.00 kHz Parametric equalizer frequency

EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Parametric equalizer gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 Parametric equalizer bandwidth

N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE INPUT, MIDI

Control source: input signal or

MIDI Note On velocity

SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity

DIR. UP, DOWN

Upward or downward fre-

quency change

DECAY

1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s

(fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)

Filter frequency change decay

speed

TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type

OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset

RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance

LEVEL 0–100 Output Level

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE INPUT, MIDI

Control source: input signal or

MIDI Note On velocity

SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity

DIR. UP, DOWN

Upward or downward fre-

quency change

DECAY

1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s

(fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)

Decay speed

OFFSET 0–100 Delay time offset

FB.GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE INPUT, MIDI

Control source: input signal or

MIDI Note On velocity

SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity

DIR. UP, DOWN

Upward or downward fre-

quency change

DECAY

1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s

(fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)

Decay speed

OFFSET 0–100

Lowest phase-shifted frequency

offset

FB.GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

STAGE

2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12,

14, 16

Number of phase shift stages

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV/CHO 0–100%

Reverb and chorus balance (0%

= all reverb, 100% = all chorus)

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Effects Parameters 315

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

REV->CHORUS

One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in

series.

REV+FLANGE

One input, two output reverb and ﬂanger effects in

parallel.

REV->FLANGE

One input, two output reverb and ﬂanger effects in

series.

REV+SYMPHO.

One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects

in parallel.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV.BAL 0–100%

Reverb and chorused reverb bal-

ance (0% = all chorused reverb,

100% = all reverb)

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV/FLG 0–100%

Reverb and ﬂange balance (0% =

all reverb, 100% = all ﬂange)

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV.BAL 0–100%

Reverb and ﬂanged reverb bal-

ance (0% = all ﬂanged reverb,

100% = all reverb)

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV/SYM 0–100%

Reverb and symphonic balance

(0% = all reverb, 100% = all

symphonic)

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FREQ.

316 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

REV->SYMPHO.

One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects

in series.

REV->PAN

One input, two output reverb and autopan effects in

parallel.

DELAY+ER.

One input, two output delay and early reﬂections

effects in parallel.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV.BAL 0–100%

Reverb and symphonic reverb

balance (0% = all symphonic

reverb, 100% = all reverb)

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV.BAL 0–100%

Reverb and panned reverb bal-

ance (0% = all panned reverb,

100% = all reverb)

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

DIR.

1. L<–>R, L–>R, L<–R, Turn L, Turn R

Panning direction

WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DLY/ER 0–100%

Delay and early reﬂections bal-

ance (0% = all delay, 100% = all

early reﬂections)

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Ran-

dom, Revers, Plate,

Spring

Type of early reﬂection simula-

tion

ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0–10

Early reﬂections decay character-

istics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reﬂections

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine left chan-

nel DELAY L

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine right chan-

nel DELAY R

NOTE FB

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FB. DLY

Effects Parameters 317

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

DELAY->ER.

One input, two output delay and early reﬂections

effects in series.

DELAY+REV

One input, two output delay and reverb effects in

parallel.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DLY.BAL 0–100%

Delay and early reﬂected delay

balance (0% = all early reﬂected

delay, 100% = all delay)

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Ran-

dom, Revers, Plate,

Spring

Type of early reﬂection simula-

tion

ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0–10

Early reﬂections decay character-

istics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reﬂections

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine left chan-

nel DELAY L

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine right chan-

nel DELAY R

NOTE FB

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FB. DLY

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

DELAY HI 0.1–1.0

Delay high-frequency feedback

ratio

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DLY.BAL 0–100%

Delay and reverb balance (0% =

all delay, 100% = all reverb)

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine left chan-

nel DELAY L

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine right chan-

nel DELAY R

NOTE FB

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FB. DLY

318 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

DELAY->REV

One input, two output delay and reverb effects in

series.

DIST->DELAY

One input, two output distortion and delay effects in

series.

MULTI FILTER

Two input, two output 3-band multi-ﬁlter

(24 dB/octave).

FREEZE

One input, one output basic sampler.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

DELAY HI 0.1–1.0

Delay high-frequency feedback

ratio

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DLY.BAL 0–100%

Delay and delayed reverb bal-

ance (0% = all delayed reverb,

100% = all delay)

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine left chan-

nel DELAY L

NOTE R *1

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine right chan-

nel DELAY R

NOTE FB *1

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FB. DLY

Parameter Range Description

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2,

OVD1, OVD2,

CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distor-

tion, OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive

MASTER 0–100 Master volume

TONE –10 to +10 Tone control

N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction

DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

DLY.BAL 0–100%

Distortion and delay balance

(0% = all distortion, 100% = all

delayed distortion)

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

DLY.NOTE

1. (

Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine DELAY

MOD.NOTE

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

TYPE 1 HPF, LPF, BPF

Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass,

band pass

TYPE 2 HPF, LPF, BPF

Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass,

band pass

TYPE 3 HPF, LPF, BPF

Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass,

band pass

FREQ. 1 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 1 frequency

FREQ. 2 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 2 frequency

FREQ. 3 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 3 frequency

LEVEL 1 0–100 Filter 1 level

LEVEL 2 0–100 Filter 2 level

LEVEL 3 0–100 Filter 3 level

RESO. 1 0–20 Filter 1 resonance

RESO. 2 0–20 Filter 2 resonance

RESO. 3 0–20 Filter 3 resonance

Parameter Range Description

REC

MODE

MANUAL, INPUT

In MANUAL mode, recording is

started by pressing the REC and

PLAY buttons. In INPUT mode,

Record-Ready mode is engaged

by pressing the REC button, and

actual recording is triggered by

the input signal.

REC DLY

–1000 to +1000

Recording delay. For plus values,

recording starts after the trigger is

received. For minus values,

recording starts before the trigger

is received.

TRG LVL –60 to 0 dB

Input trigger level (i.e., the signal

level required to trigger record-

ing or playback)

TRG

MASK

0–1000 ms

Once playback has been trig-

gered, subsequent triggers are

ignored for the duration of the

TRG MASK time.

PLY MODE

MOMENT,

CONTI., INPUT

In MOMENT mode, the sample

plays only while the that the PLAY

button is pressed. In CONT mode,

playback continues once the PLAY

button has been pressed. The

number of times the sample plays

is set using the LOOP NUM

parameter. In INPUT mode, play-

back is triggered by the input sig-

nal.

START

1. 0.0–5941.0 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 ms–5458.3 ms (fs=48 kHz),

0.0–2970.5 ms (fs=88.2 kHz), 0.0 ms–2729.2 ms (fs=96 kHz)

Playback start point in millisec-

onds

END

Playback end point in milliseconds

LOOP

Loop start point in milliseconds

LOOP

NUM

0–100 Number of times the sample plays

START

[SAMPLE]

0–262000 Playback start point in samples

END

[SAMPLE]

0–262000 Playback end point in samples

LOOP

[SAMPLE]

0–262000 Loop start point in samples

PITCH

–12 to +12 semi-

tones

Playback pitch shift

FINE –50 to +50 cents Playback pitch shift ﬁne

MIDI TRG OFF, C1–C6, ALL

PLAY button can be triggered by

using MIDI Note on/off messages.

Effects Parameters 319

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

ST REVERB

Two input, two output stereo reverb.

REVERB 5.1

One input, six output reverb for 5.1 surround, with

surround panning.

OCTA REVERB

Eight input, eight output reverb.

AUTO PAN 5.1

Six input, six output autopanner for 5.1 surround.

• When you press the RESET button, the phase will be initialized to

the setting of the OFFSET parameter.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

REV TYPE

Hall, Room, Stage,

Plate

Reverb type

INI. DLY 0.0–100.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10

Reverb diffusion (left–right

reverb spread)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

E/R BAL. 0–100%

Balance of early reﬂections and

reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% =

all early reﬂections)

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

REV TYPE

Hall, Room,

Stage, Plate

Reverb type

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10

Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb

spread)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0

kHz, THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DIV. 0–100%

Divergence determines how the

front center signal is fed to the

Left, Right, and Center channels.

When set to 0%, it’s fed only to

the Left and Right channels (i.e.,

Phantom Center). When set to

50%, it’s fed equally to the Left,

Right, and Center channels. When

set to 100%, it’s fed to only the

Center channel (i.e., Real Center).

ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Size of simulated room’s reverb

POS L/R L63–R63 Left/right listening position

POS F/R F63–R63 Front/rear listening position

POS CTRL OFF, NOR, INV

1. When set to NOR, the position can be set by using the Joystick so

long as the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND [EFFECT]

button’s indicator is on. When set to INV, the Joystick will work

inversely. When set to OFF, Joystick control is off.

ER L/R L63–R63 Left/right early reﬂections position

ER F/R F63–R63

Front/rear early reﬂections posi-

tion

ER LVL 0–100% Early reﬂections level

ER CTRL OFF, NOR, INV

REV L/R L63–R63 Left/right reverb position

REV F/R F63–R63 Front/rear reverb position

REV LVL 0–100% Reverb level

REV CTRL OFF, NOR, INV

POS RAD. 0–63

Radius of the panning track at the

listening position

ER RAD. 0–63

Radius of the panning track for

early reﬂections

REV RAD. 0–63

Radius of the panning track for

reverb

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

REV TYPE

Hall, Room, Stage,

Plate

Reverb type

INI. DLY 0.0–100.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10

Reverb diffusion (left–right

reverb spread)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

E/R BAL. 0–100%

Balance of early reﬂections and

reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% =

all early reﬂections)

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE

OFF, HOLD,

INPUT1, INPUT2,

INPUT3, INPUT4,

INPUT5, INPUT6,

MIDI

Source speciﬁes the trigger that

will initiate auto pan. When you

press the TRIGGER button in the

screen, auto pan will begin

regardless of the setting of this

parameter.

OFF: No trigger is speciﬁed. Auto

pan will always be off.

HOLD: No trigger is speciﬁed.

Auto pan will always be on.

INPUT 1-6: The input signal to

effect inputs 1-6 will be the trig-

ger.

MIDI: MIDI note-on messages

will be the trigger.

TRG LVL –60 to 0 dB

If SOURCE is set to INPUT, any

signal with a level greater than

the setting of this parameter will

be detected as a trigger.

TRG MASK 0–1000 ms

Trigger Mask speciﬁes the time

from when a trigger is received

until the next trigger will be

accepted.

TIME 0.1 s–10.0 s

The time after which autopan

starts once it’s been triggered

SPEED 0.05–40.00 Hz Autopan speed

DIR. Turn L, Turn R Autopan direction

OFFSET

–180 to +180

degrees

Pan offset

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

320 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

CHORUS 5.1

Six input, six output chorus for 5.1 surround.

FLANGE 5.1

Six input, six output ﬂanger for 5.1 surround.

SYMPHO. 5.1

Six input, six output symphonic effect for 5.1 sur-

round.

M.BAND DYNA.

Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor,

with individual solo and gain reduction metering for

each band.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–400.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–400.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–400.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level

MID GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level

HI. GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level

PRESENCE –10 to +10

For positive values, the threshold

of the high band is lowered and

the threshold of the low band is

increased. For negative values,

the opposite will occur. When

set to 0, all three bands are

affected the same.

CMP. THRE 24.0 to 0.0 dB Compressor threshold

CMP. RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Compressor ratio

CMP. ATK 0–120 ms Compressor attack

CMP. REL

Compressor release time

CMP. KNEE 0–5 Compressor knee

LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay

CMP. BYP OFF, ON Compressor bypass

L–M XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency

M–H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency

SLOPE –6 to –12 dB Filter slope

CEILING

–6.0 to 0.0 dB,

OFF

Speciﬁes the maximum output

level

EXP. THRE –54.0 to –24.0 dB Expander threshold

EXP. RAT 1:1 to ∞:1 Expander ratio

EXP. REL

1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s

(fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)

Expander release time

EXP. BYP OFF, ON Expander bypass

LIM. THRE –12.0 to 0.0 dB Limiter threshold

LIM. ATK 0–120 ms Limiter attack

LIM. REL

Limiter release time

LIM. BYP OFF, ON Limiter bypass

LIM. KNEE 0–5 Limiter knee

SOLO LOW OFF, ON

If this is on, only the low-fre-

quency band will be output.

SOLO MID OFF, ON

If this is on, only the mid-fre-

quency band will be output.

SOLO

HIGH

OFF, ON

If this is on, only the high-fre-

quency band will be output.

Effects Parameters 321

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

COMP 5.1

Six input, six output compressor for 5.1 surround,

with individual solo for each band, and gain reduc-

tion metering of left and right (L+R), left surround

and right surround (LS+RS), center (C), or LFE

channels.

COMPAND 5.1

Six input, six output compander for 5.1 surround,

with individual solo for each band, and gain reduc-

tion metering of left and right (L+R), left surround

and right surround (LS+RS), center (C), or LFE

channels.

Other preset effects (COMP276, COMP276S,

COMP260, COMP260S, EQUALIZER601, OPEN-

DECK, REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, REV-X

PLATE) are optional Add-On Effects. For more

information on these effects, refer to the Owner’s

Manual that came with the Add-On Effects pack-

ages.

Parameter Range Description

LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level

MID GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level

HI. GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level

PRESENCE –10 to +10

For positive values, the threshold

of the high band is lowered and

the threshold of the low band is

increased. For negative values,

the opposite will occur. When

set to 0, all three bands are

affected the same.

THRE. –24.0 to 0.0 dB Compressor threshold

RATIO 1:1 to ∞:1 Compressor ratio

ATTACK 0–120 ms Compressor attack

RELEASE

1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s

(fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)

Compressor release time

KNEE 0–5 Compressor knee

LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay

KEY LINK

2. 5.1: Key-in’s of all inputs are linked

5.0: Key-in’s of L, C, R, LS, and RS are linked (LFE is independent)

3+2: Key-in’s of L, C, and R, and key-in's of LS and RS, are linked

respectively (LFE is independent)

2+2: Key-in’s of L and R, and key-in's of LS and RS, are linked

respectively (C and LFE are independent)

Key-in linking

L–M XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency

M–H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency

SLOPE –6 to –12 dB Filter slope

CEILING

–6.0 to 0.0 dB,

OFF

Speciﬁes the maximum output

level

SOLO LOW OFF, ON

If this is on, only the low-fre-

quency band will be output.

SOLO MID OFF, ON

If this is on, only the mid-fre-

quency band will be output.

SOLO

HIGH

OFF, ON

If this is on, only the high-fre-

quency band will be output.

Parameter Range Description

LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level

MID GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level

HI. GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level

PRESENCE –10 to +10

For positive values, the threshold

of the high band is lowered and

the threshold of the low band is

increased. For negative values,

the opposite will occur. When

set to 0, all three bands are

affected the same.

THRE. –24.0 to 0.0 dB Compressor threshold

RATIO 1:1 to 20:1 Compressor ratio

ATTACK 0–120 ms Attack time

RELEASE

1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s

(fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)

Release time

WIDTH 1–90 dB

Compressor effect range and

expander effect width

TYPE Soft, Hard Compander type

LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay

KEY LINK

2. 5.1: Key-in’s of all inputs are linked

5.0: Key-in’s of L, C, R, LS, and RS are linked (LFE is independent)

3+2: Key-in’s of L, C, and R, and key-in's of LS and RS, are linked

respectively (LFE is independent)

2+2: Key-in’s of L and R, and key-in's of LS and RS, are linked

respectively (C and LFE are independent)

Key-in linking

L–M XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency

M–H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency

SLOPE –6 to –12 dB Filter slope

CEILING

–6.0 to 0.0 dB,

OFF

Speciﬁes the maximum output

level

SOLO LOW OFF, ON

If this is on, only the low-fre-

quency band will be output.

SOLO MID OFF, ON

If this is on, only the mid-fre-

quency band will be output.

SOLO

HIGH

OFF, ON

If this is on, only the high-fre-

quency band will be output.

322 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Effects and tempo synchronization

Some of the DM2000’s effects allow you to synchronize the effect with the tempo. There are two such types of effect; delay-type

effects and modulation-type effects. For delay-type effects, the delay time will change according to the tempo. For modulation-type

effects, the frequency of the modulation signal will change according to the tempo.

• Parameters related to tempo synchronization

The following ﬁve parameters are related to tempo synchronization.

1) SYNC 2) NOTE 3) TEMPO 4) DELAY 5) FREQ.

SYNC:.............................This is the on/off switch for tempo synchronization.

NOTE and TEMPO: .....These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization.

DELAY and FREQ.: .......DELAY is the delay time, and FREQ. is the frequency of the modulation signal. These directly affect

the way in which the effect sound will change. DELAY is relevant only for delay-type effects, and

FREQ. is relevant only for modulation-type effects.

• How the parameters are related

Te mpo synchronization uses TEMPO and NOTE to calculate a value that will be the basis for the tempo, and continues making

adjustments so that this tempo basis stays essentially the same as the DELAY (or FREQ.). This means that when TEMPO, NOTE,

and DELAY (or FREQ.) are synchronized, and you change any of these values, the other parameters will be re-set in order to

maintain the correct relationship. The parameters that are re-set and the calculation method(*a) used are as follows.

If you turn SYNC on → NOTE will be set

If you edit DELAY (or FREQ.) → NOTE will be set

In this case, the NOTE value is calculated as follows.

NOTE = DELAY (or FREQ.)/(4 x (60/TEMPO))

If you edit NOTE → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set

In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.

DELAY (or FREQ.) = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)

If you edit TEMPO → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set

In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.

DELAY (or FREQ.) = original DELAY (or FREQ.) x (previous TEMPO/new TEMPO)

Example 1: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, TEMPO=120, you change NOTE from 8th note to quarter note

DELAY= new NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)

= (1/4) x 4 x (60/120)

= 0.5 (sec)

= 500 ms

Thus, the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms.

Example 2: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, NOTE=8th note, you change TEMPO from 120 to 121

DELAY= original DELAY x (previous TEMPO/new TEMPO)

= 250 x (120/121)

= 247.9 (ms)

Thus, the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247.9 ms.

*a Rounded values are used for the calculation results.

• Ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values

The ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values are limited by the ranges of the DELAY or FREQ. values. You cannot set NOTE or

TEMPO values that would cause DELAY or FREQ. to exceed their maximum possible values when synchronized to tempo. This

limitation also applies even when SYNC is OFF.

• Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter

The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters.

•It is a common value shared by all effects

•You cannot stored it to or recall it from the Effects Library. (You can store it to and recall it from a Scene.)

This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled as when that effect was stored. Here

is an example.

Store the effect: TEMPO=120 → Change TEMPO to 60 → Recall the effect: TEMPO=60

Normally when you change the TEMPO, the DELAY (or FREQ.) will be re-set accordingly. However if the DELAY (or FREQ.)

were changed, the effect would sound differently when recalled than when it was stored. To prevent the effect from changing in

this way between store and recall, the DM2000 does not update the DELAY (or FREQ.) value when an effect is recalled, even if

the TEMPO is no longer the same as when that effect was stored.

* The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values.

= 1/48

= 2/1

= 1/16= 1/24 = 1/12

= 3/4= 3/16 = 1/2

= 3/32 = 1/6

= 1/4

= 1/8

= 1/1= 3/8

Preset EQ Parameters 323

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Preset EQ Parameters

#Title

Parameter

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

Bass Drum

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+3.5 dB –3.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB

100 Hz 265 Hz 1.06 kHz 5.30 kHz

1.2 10 0.9 —

Bass Drum

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF

+8.0 dB –7.0 dB +6.0 dB ON

80 Hz 400 Hz 2.50 kHz 12.5 kHz

1.4 4.5 2.2 —

Snare

Drum 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +4.5 dB

132 Hz 1.00 kHz 3.15 kHz 5.00 kHz

1.2 4.5 0.11 —

Snare

Drum 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

+1.5 dB –8.5 dB +2.5 dB +4.0 dB

180 Hz 335 Hz 2.36 kHz 4.00 kHz

—100.7 0.1

Tom-tom 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

+2.0 dB –7.5 dB +2.0 dB +1.0 dB

212 Hz 670 Hz 4.50 kHz 6.30 kHz

1.4 10 1.2 0.28

Cymbal

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–2.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB

106 Hz 425 Hz 1.06 kHz 13.2 kHz

—80.9 —

High Hat

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–4.0 dB –2.5 dB +1.0 dB +0.5 dB

95 Hz 425 Hz 2.80 kHz 7.50 kHz

— 0.5 1 —

Percussion

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–4.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB

100 Hz 400 Hz 2.80 kHz 17.0 kHz

— 4.5 0.56 —

E. Bass 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–7.5 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB

35.5 Hz 112 Hz 2.00 kHz 4.00 kHz

—54.5 —

E. Bass 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+3.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.5 dB +0.5 dB

112 Hz 112 Hz 2.24 kHz 4.00 kHz

0.1 5 6.3 —

Syn. Bass 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+3.5 dB +8.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB

85 Hz 950 Hz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz

0.1 8 4.5 —

Syn. Bass 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+2.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.5 dB 0.0 dB

125 Hz 180 Hz 1.12 kHz 12.5 kHz

1.6 8 2.2 —

Piano 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–6.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB

95 Hz 950 Hz 3.15 kHz 7.50 kHz

—80.9 —

Piano 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+3.5 dB –8.5 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB

224 Hz 600 Hz 3.15 kHz 5.30 kHz

5.6 10 0.7 —

E. G. Clean

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+2.0 dB –5.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.5 dB

265 Hz 400 Hz 1.32 kHz 4.50 kHz

0.18 10 6.3 —

E. G.

Crunch 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

+4.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB +2.0 dB

140 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.60 kHz

8 4.5 0.63 9

E. G.

Crunch 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+2.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB

125 Hz 450 Hz 3.35 kHz 19.0 kHz

8 0.4 0.16 —

E. G. Dist. 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+5.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB

355 Hz 950 Hz 3.35 kHz 12.5 kHz

—910—

E. G. Dist. 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+6.0 dB –8.5 dB +4.5 dB +4.0 dB

315 Hz 1.06 kHz 4.25 kHz 12.5 kHz

—10 4 —

A. G.

Stroke 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–2.0 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +4.0 dB

106 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.30 kHz

0.9 4.5 3.5 —

A. G.

Stroke 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–3.5 dB –2.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB

300 Hz 750 Hz 2.00 kHz 3.55 kHz

—94.5 —

A. G.

Arpeg. 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

–0.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB

224 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 6.70 kHz

— 4.5 4.5 0.12

A. G.

Arpeg. 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

0.0 dB –5.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB

180 Hz 355 Hz 4.00 kHz 4.25 kHz

—74.5 —

Brass Sec.

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

–2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB

90 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz

2.8 2 0.7 7

Male Vocal

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

–0.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB

190 Hz 1.00 kHz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz

0.11 4.5 0.56 0.11

Male Vocal

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+2.0 dB –5.0 dB –2.5 dB +4.0 dB

170 Hz 236 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.70 kHz

0.11 10 5.6 —

#Title

Parameter

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

324 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Preset Gate Parameters

(fs = 44.1 kHz)

Female Vo.

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

–1.0 dB +1.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB

118 Hz 400 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.00 kHz

0.18 0.45 0.56 0.14

Female Vo.

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–7.0 dB +1.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB

112 Hz 335 Hz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz

— 0.16 0.2 —

Chorus &

Harmo

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

–2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB

90 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz

2.8 2 0.7 7

Total EQ 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +6.5 dB

95 Hz 950 Hz 2.12 kHz 16.0 kHz

7 2.2 5.6 —

Total EQ 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+4.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB +6.0 dB

95 Hz 750 Hz 1.80 kHz 18.0 kHz

7 2.8 5.6 —

Total EQ 3

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+1.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB

67 Hz 850 Hz 1.90 kHz 15.0 kHz

— 0.28 0.7 —

Bass Drum

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

+3.5 dB –10.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB

118 Hz 315 Hz 4.25 kHz 20.0 kHz

2100.4 0.4

Snare

Drum 3

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB

224 Hz 560 Hz 4.25 kHz 4.00 kHz

— 4.5 2.8 0.1

Tom-tom 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–9.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB

90 Hz 212 Hz 5.30 kHz 17.0 kHz

— 4.5 1.2 —

Piano 3

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+4.5 dB –13.0 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB

100 Hz 475 Hz 2.36 kHz 10.0 kHz

8109—

Piano Low

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–5.5 dB +1.5 dB +6.0 dB 0.0 dB

190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 12.5 kHz

10 6.3 2.2 —

Piano High

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

–5.5 dB +1.5 dB +5.0 dB +3.0 dB

190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 5.60 kHz

10 6.3 2.2 0.1

Fine-EQ

Cass

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–1.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +3.0 dB

75 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz

— 4.5 1.8 —

Narrator

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–4.0 dB –1.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB

106 Hz 710 Hz 2.50 kHz 10.0 kHz

470.63 —

#Title

Parameter

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

#Title Type Parameter Value

Gate GATE

Threshold (dB) –26

Range (dB) –56

Attack (ms) 0

Hold (ms) 2.56

Decay (ms) 331

Ducking DUCKING

Threshold (dB) –19

Range (dB) –22

Attack (ms) 93

Hold (ms) 1.20 S

Decay (ms) 6.32 S

A. Dr. BD GATE

Threshold (dB) –11

Range (dB) –53

Attack (ms) 0

Hold (ms) 1.93

Decay (ms) 400

A. Dr. SN GATE

Threshold (dB) –8

Range (dB) –23

Attack (ms) 1

Hold (ms) 0.63

Decay (ms) 238

Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) 325

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz)

#Title Type Parameter Value

Comp COMP

Threshold (dB) –8

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 60

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 250

Expand EXPAND

Threshold (dB) –23

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) 3.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 70

Compander

(H)

COMPAND-H

Threshold (dB) –10

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 6

Release (ms) 250

Compander

(S)

COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) –8

Ratio ( :1) 4

Attack (ms) 25

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 24

Release (ms) 180

A. Dr. BD COMP

Threshold (dB) –24

Ratio ( :1) 3

Attack (ms) 9

Out gain (dB) 5.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 58

A. Dr. BD COMPAND-H

Threshold (dB) –11

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) –1.5

Width (dB) 7

Release (ms) 192

A. Dr. SN COMP

Threshold (dB) –17

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 8

Out gain (dB) 3.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 12

A. Dr. SN EXPAND

Threshold (dB) –23

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 0

Out gain (dB) 0.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 151

A. Dr. SN COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) –8

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 11

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 10

Release (ms) 128

A. Dr. Tom EXPAND

Threshold (dB) –20

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 2

Out gain (dB) 5.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 749

A. Dr.

OverTop

COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) –24

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 38

Out gain (dB) –3.5

Width (dB) 54

Release (ms) 842

E. B. Finger COMP

Threshold (dB) –12

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 15

Out gain (dB) 4.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 470

E. B. Slap COMP

Threshold (dB) –12

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 6

Out gain (dB) 4.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 133

Syn. Bass COMP

Threshold (dB) –10

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 9

Out gain (dB) 3.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 250

Piano1 COMP

Threshold (dB) –9

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 17

Out gain (dB) 1.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 238

Piano2 COMP

Threshold (dB) –18

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 7

Out gain (dB) 6.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 174

E. Guitar COMP

Threshold (dB) –8

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 7

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee 4

Release (ms) 261

A. Guitar COMP

Threshold (dB) –10

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 5

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 238

Strings1 COMP

Threshold (dB) –11

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 33

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 749

Strings2 COMP

Threshold (dB) –12

Ratio ( :1) 1.5

Attack (ms) 93

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 4

Release (ms) 1.35 S

#Title Type Parameter Value

326 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Strings3 COMP

Threshold (dB) –17

Ratio ( :1) 1.5

Attack (ms) 76

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 186

BrassSection COMP

Threshold (dB) –18

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 18

Out gain (dB) 4.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 226

Syn. Pad COMP

Threshold (dB) –13

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 58

Out gain (dB) 2.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 238

SamplingPerc COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) –18

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 8

Out gain (dB) –2.5

Width (dB) 18

Release (ms) 238

Sampling BD COMP

Threshold (dB) –14

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 2

Out gain (dB) 3.5

Knee 4

Release (ms) 35

Sampling SN COMP

Threshold (dB) –18

Ratio ( :1) 4

Attack (ms) 8

Out gain (dB) 8.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 354

Hip Comp COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) –23

Ratio ( :1) 20

Attack (ms) 15

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 15

Release (ms) 163

Solo Vocal1 COMP

Threshold (dB) –20

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 31

Out gain (dB) 2.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 342

Solo Vocal2 COMP

Threshold (dB) –8

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 26

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 3

Release (ms) 331

Chorus COMP

Threshold (dB) –9

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 39

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 226

#Title Type Parameter Value

Click Erase EXPAND

Threshold (dB) –33

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) 2.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 284

Announcer COMPAND-H

Threshold (dB) –14

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) –2.5

Width (dB) 18

Release (ms) 180

Limiter1 COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) –9

Ratio ( :1) 3

Attack (ms) 20

Out gain (dB) –3.0

Width (dB) 90

Release (ms) 3.90 s

Limiter2 COMP

Threshold (dB) 0

Ratio ( :1) ∞

Attack (ms) 0

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 319

Total Comp1 COMP

Threshold (dB) –18

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 94

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee hard

Release (ms) 447

Total Comp2 COMP

Threshold (dB) –16

Ratio ( :1) 6

Attack (ms) 11

Out gain (dB) 6.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 180

#Title Type Parameter Value

Dynamics Parameters 327

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Dynamics Parameters

The dynamics effects for each channel strip include a Gate section (only for Input Chan-

nels) and a Comp section. The Gate section includes Gate and Ducking types. The Comp

section includes Compressor, Expander, Compander Hard (COMP. (H)), and Compander

Soft (COMP. (S)) types.

GATE Section (Only for Input Channels)

GATE

A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a speciﬁed amount (RANGE).

Parameter Range Description

THRESHOLD (dB) –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points)

This determines the level at which the gate effect

is applied.

RANGE (dB) –70 to 0 (71 points)

This determines the amount of attenuation when

the gate closes.

ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points)

This determines how fast the gate opens when the

signal exceeds the threshold level.

HOLD (ms)

44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec

48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec

88.2kHz: 0.01 ms – 1.06 sec

96kHz: 0.01 ms – 981 ms

(160 points)

This determines how long the gate stays open

once the trigger signal has fallen below the thresh-

old.

DECAY (ms)

44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec

48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec

88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec

96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec

(160 points)

This determines how fast the gate closes once the

hold time has expired. The value is expressed as

the duration required for the level to change by

6 dB.

Input Level Time Time

Output Level

Input Level

Output Level

I/O Characteristics Time Series Analysis

RANGE

THRESHOLD

RANGE

Input Signal Output Signal

ATTACK DECAY

HOLD

328 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

DUCKING

Ducking is commonly used for voice-over applications in which the background music

level is reduced automatically when an announcer speaks. When the KEY IN source signal

level exceeds the speciﬁed THRESHOLD, the output level is attenuated by a speciﬁed

amount (RANGE).

Parameter Range Description

THRESHOLD (dB) –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points)

This determines the level of trigger signal (KEY IN)

required to activate ducking.

RANGE (dB) –70 to 0 (71 points)

This determines the amount of attenuation when

ducking is activated.

ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points)

This determines how soon the signal is ducked

once the ducker has been triggered.

HOLD (ms)

44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec

48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec

88.2kHz: 0.01 ms – 1.06 sec

96kHz: 0.01 ms – 981 ms

(160 points)

This determines how long ducking remains active

once the trigger signal has fallen below the

THRESHOLD level.

DECAY (ms)

44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec

48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec

88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec

96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec

(160 points)

This determines how soon the ducker returns to its

normal gain once the trigger signal level drops

below the threshold. The value is expressed as the

duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.

Input Level Time Time

Output Level

Input Level

Output Level

I/O Characteristics Time Series Analysis

RANGE

THRESHOLD

RANGE

Input Signal Output Signal

ATTACK DECAY

HOLD

Dynamics Parameters 329

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

COMP Section

COMP

The COMP processor attenuates signals above a speciﬁed THRESHOLD by a speciﬁed

RATIO. The COMP processor can also be used as a limiter, which, with a RATIO of ∞:1,

reduces the level to the threshold. This means that the limiter’s output level never actually

exceeds the threshold.

Parameter Range Description

THRESHOLD (dB) –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points)

This determines the level of input signal required to

trigger the compressor.

RATIO

1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1,

1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1,

3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,

8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1

(16 points)

This determines the amount of compression, that

is, the change in output signal level relative to

change in input signal level.

ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points)

This determines how soon the signal will be com-

pressed once the compressor has been triggered.

RELEASE (ms)

44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec

48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec

88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec

96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec

(160 points)

This determines how soon the compressor returns

to its normal gain once the trigger signal level

drops below the threshold. The value is expressed

as the duration required for the level to change by

6 dB.

OUT GAIN (dB) 0.0 to +18.0 (180 points) This sets the compressor's output signal level.

KNEE Hard, 1–5 (6 points)

This determines how compression is applied at the

threshold. For higher knee settings, compression is

applied gradually as the signal exceeds the speci-

ﬁed threshold, creating a more natural sound.

Input Level Time Time

Output Level

Input Level

Output Level

Time Series Analysis (RATIO=∞:1)

RATIO

THRESHOLD

Input signal Output Signal

ATTACK RELEASE

I/O Characteristics

(KNEE=hard, OUT GAIN=0.0dB)

330 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

EXPAND

An expander attenuates signals below a speciﬁed THRESHOLD by a speciﬁed RATIO.

Parameter Range Description

THRESHOLD (dB) –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points)

This determines the level of input signal required to

trigger the expander.

RATIO

1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1,

1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1,

3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,

8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1

(16 points)

This determines the amount of expansion.

ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points)

This determines how soon the expander returns to

its normal gain once the trigger signal level exceeds

the threshold.

RELEASE (ms)

44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec

48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec

88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec

96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec

(160 points)

This determines how soon the signal is expanded

once the signal level drops below the threshold.

The value is expressed as the duration required for

the level to change by 6 dB.

OUT GAIN (dB) 0.0 to +18.0 (180 points) This sets the expander's output signal level.

KNEE Hard, 1–5 (6 points)

This determines how expansion is applied at the

threshold. For higher knee settings, expansion is

applied gradually as the signal falls below the spec-

iﬁed threshold, creating a more natural sound.

Input Level Time Time

Output Level

Input Level

Output Level

I/O Characteristics

(KNEE=hard, OUT GAIN=0.0dB)

Time Series Analysis (RATIO=∞:1)

RATIO

THRESHOLD

Input Signal Output Signal

ATTACK RELEASE

Dynamics Parameters 331

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

COMPANDER HARD (H)

COMPANDER SOFT (S)

The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor, expander and limiter.

The companders function differently at the following levels:

1 0 dB and higher .................................... Functions as a limiter.

2 Exceeding the threshold....................... Functions as a compressor.

3 Below the threshold and width ........... Functions as an expander.

The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5:1, while the soft compander has an expan-

sion ratio of 1.5:1. The expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to maximum.

The compressor has a ﬁxed knee setting of 2.

*The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values, and can

be increased by up to 18 dB.

*The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change

caused by the compression and expansion processes.

Parameter Range Description

THRESHOLD (dB) –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points)

This determines the level at which compression is

applied.

RATIO

1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1,

1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1,

3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,

8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, (15 points)

This determines the amount of compression.

ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points)

This determines how soon the signal is com-

pressed or expanded once the compander has

been triggered.

RELEASE (ms)

44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec

48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec

88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec

96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec

(160 points)

This determines how soon the compressor or

expander returns to the normal gain once the

trigger signal level drops below or exceeds the

threshold respectively. The value is expressed as

the duration required for the level to change by

6 dB.

OUT GAIN (dB) –18.0 to 0.0 (180 points) This sets the compander's output signal level.

WIDTH (dB) 0–90 (91 points)

This determines how far below the threshold

expansion will be applied. The expander is acti-

vated when the level drops below the threshold

and width.

0dB

Input Level

Output Level

THRESHOLD

WIDTH

332 Appendix B: Specifications

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix B: Speciﬁcations

General Spec

Number of scene memories

Sampling Frequency

Internal

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz

External

Normal rate: 44.1 kHz–10% to 48 kHz+6%

Double rate: 88.2 kHz–10% to 96 kHz+6%

Signal Delay

fs=48 kHz

Less than 1.6 ms CH INPUT to OMNI OUT

fs=96 kHz

Less than 0.8 ms CH INPUT to OMNI OUT

Fader

100 mm motorized with touch sense × 17

Fader Resolution

+10 to –138, –∞ dB input faders

0 to –138, –∞ dB master faders, stereo fader

Total Harmonic Distortion

(CH INPUT to OMNI OUT)

(Input Gain=Min.)

fs=48 kHz

Less than 0.05% 20 Hz to 20 kHz @ +14 dB into 600 Ω

Less than 0.01% 1 kHz @ +24 dB into 600 Ω

fs=96 kHz

Less than 0.05% 20 Hz to 40 kHz @ +14 dB into 600 Ω

Less than 0.01% 1 kHz @ +24 dB into 600 Ω

Frequency Response

(CH INPUT to OMNI OUT)

fs=48 kHz

20 Hz–20 kHz, 0.5, –1.5 dB @ +4 dB into 600 Ω

fs=96 kHz

20 Hz–40 kHz, 0.5, –1.5 dB @ +4 dB into 600 Ω

Dynamic Range

(maximum level to noise level)

110 dB typ. DA Converter (OMNI OUT)

106 dB typ. AD+DA (to OMNI OUT) @ fs=48 kHz

106 dB typ. AD+DA (to OMNI OUT) @ fs=96 kHz

Hum & Noise

(20 Hz–20 kHz)

Rs=150 Ω

–128 dB Equivalent Input Noise

–86 dB residual output noise. OMNI OUT (STEREO OUT off)

Input Gain=Max.

Input Pad =0 dB

–86 dB (90 dB S/N) OMNI OUT

(STEREO fader at nominal level and all CH INPUT faders at minimum level)

Input Pad =0 dB

Input Sensitivity

=–60 dB

–64 dB (68 dB S/N) OMNI OUT

(STEREO fader at nominal level and one CH INPUT fader at nominal level)

Maximum Voltage Gain

74 dB CH INPUT (CH1–16) to OMNI OUT (STEREO, BUS, AUX)

Crosstalk

(@ 1 kHz)

Input Gain=Min.

80 dB adjacent input channels (CH1–16)

80 dB input to output

AD Input (1–16)

Phantom switch

+48 V DC

Pad switch

0/20 dB attenuation

Gain control

44 dB (–60 to –16), detented

Peak indicator

LED (red) turns on when post HA level reaches 3 dB below clipping at dig-

ital domain

Signal indicator

LED (green) turns on when post HA level reaches 20 dB below nominal at

digital domain

AD converter

24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times over-

sampling (fs=88.2, 96 kHz)

Analog Input

(OMNI IN 1–4)

AD converter

24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times over-

sampling (fs=88.2, 96 kHz)

Option Input (SLOT 1–2) Available cards

Optional digital interface cards (MY16, MY8, MY4 series)

Digital Input

(2TR IN DIGITAL 1–2)

SRC

On/off (1:3 and 3:1 maximum input to output sample rate ratio)

General Spec 333

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Input Channel CH1–48

Input patch

—

Phase

Normal/reverse

Gate-type

On/off

Key in: 12 ch Group (1–12, 13–24, 25–36, 37–48)/AUX1–8

Comp-type

On/off

Key in: self /Stereo Link

Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader

Attenuator

–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)

4-band PEQ (TYPE1)

On/off

Delay

0–43400 samples

On/off

—

Fader

100 mm motorized (INPUT/AUX1–8)

Aux send

On/off

AUX1–8; pre fader/post fader

Solo

On/off

Pre fader/after pan

Pan

127 positions (Left= 1–63, Center, Right= 1–63)

Surround pan

127 × 127 positions

[(Left= 1–63, Center, Right= 1–63)] x [(Front= 1–63, Center, Rear= 1–63)]

LFE level

–∞, –96 dB to +10 dB (256 step)

Routing

STEREO, BUS1–8, DIRECT OUT

Direct out

Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader

Metering

Displayed on LCD

Peak hold on/off

TALKBACK

Level control

Analog rotary potentiometer

AD converter

24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times over-

sampling (@fs=88.2, 96 kHz)

Talkback select

Built-in microphone/AD IN 1–16/OMNI IN 1–4

On/off

—

OSCILLATOR

Level

0 to –96 dB (1 dB step)

On/off

—

Waveform

Sine 100 Hz, sine 1 kHz, sine 10 kHz, 400 Hz/1 kHz, pink noise, burst noise

Routing

BUS1–8, AUX1–8, STEREO L, R

OMNI OUT 1–12

Output patch

STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX1–8, SURROUND MONITOR, CONTROL ROOM,

DIRECT OUT 1–48, INSERT OUT (CH1–48, BUS1–8, AUX1–8, STEREO),

MONITOR MATRIX OUT, SOLO OUT, CASCADE OUT (BUS1–8, AUX 1–8,

STEREO, SOLO)

DA converter

24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times over-

sampling (@fs=88.2, 96 kHz)

2TR OUT DIGITAL 1–2

Dither

On/off

Word length 16, 20, 24-bit

Output patch

STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX 1–8, CONTROL ROOM, DIRECT OUT 1–48, INSERT

OUT (CH 1–48, BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO), SOLO OUT, CASCADE OUT

(BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO, SOLO)

Option Output (SLOT 1–2)

Available card

Optional digital interface card (MY16, MY8, MY4 series)

Output patch

STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX 1–8, SURROUND MONITOR, CONTROL ROOM,

DIRECT OUT 1–48, INSERT OUT (CH 1–48, BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO),

MONITOR MATRIX OUT, SOLO OUT, CASCADE OUT (BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8,

STEREO, SOLO)

Dither

On/off

Word length 16/20/24-bit

334 Appendix B: Specifications

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

STEREO

Comp-type

On/off

Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader

Attenuator

–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)

4-band PEQ

On/off

—

Fader

100 mm motorized

Balance

127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63)

Delay

0–29100 samples

Metering

Displayed on LCD

Peak hold on/off

32-elements x2 LED meters

BUS1–8

Comp-type

On/off

Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader

Attenuator

–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)

4-band PEQ

On/off

—

Fader

100 mm motorized

Delay

0–29100 samples

Bus to stereo

Level (–∞, –138 dB to 0 dB)

On/off

Pan: 127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63)

Metering

Displayed on LCD

Peak hold on/off

AUX1–8

Comp-type

On/off

Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader

Attenuator

–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)

4-band PEQ

On/off

—

Fader

100 mm motorized

Delay

0–29100 samples

Metering

Displayed on LCD

Peak hold on/off

SURROUND MONITOR

Mute

On/off

Solo

On/off

Source

BUS1–8, SLOT 1–2

Monitor to C-R

On/off

Oscillator

Pink noise/500–2 kHz/1 kHz

Monitor matrix

6.1→6.1, 6.1→5.1, 6.1→3-1, 6.1→ST, 5.1→5.1, 5.1→3-1, 5.1→ST,

3-1→3-1, 3-1→ST

Bass

management

5 presets

Monitor

alignment

ATT (–12.0 dB to 12 dB 0.1 dB step), Delay (0–30.0 msec 0.02 msec step)

INTERNAL EFFECTS

(EFFECT 1–4)

Bypass

On/off

In/out

8-in, 8-out (EFFECT1): depends on effects type

2-in, 2-out (EFFECT2–4): depends on effects type

Effect-in from

AUX1–8/INSERT OUT/effect-out (out 1, 2 only)

Effect-out 1, 2 to

Input patch/effect-in

General Spec 335

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

EQ Parameters

Gate Parameters

Power Requirements

U.S./Canada

120 V, 60 Hz 135 W

Other

220–240 V, 50/60 Hz 135 W

Dimensions (H x D x W)

200 x 585 x 436 mm (7.8" x 23.0" x 17.1")

With MB1000 and SP1000 installed: 295 x 635 x 486 mm (11.6" x 25.0" x

19.1")

Net weight

20 kg (75 lbs)

Operating free-air temperature range

10–35°C (50–95°F)

Storage temperature range

–20 to 60°C (–4 to 140°F)

Supplied Accessories

AC Cable, CD-ROM (Studio Manager), Owner’s Manual, Studio Manager

Installation Guide

Options

Digital interface card (MY16, MY8, MY4 series)

PEAK METER BRIDGE: MB1000

SIDE PANEL: SP1000

RACK MOUNT KIT: RK1

1. Total harmonic distortion is measured with a 6 dB/octave filter @ 80 kHz.

2. Hum & Noise are measured with a 6 dB/octave filter @ 12.7 kHz; equivalent to a 20 kHz filter with infinite dB/octave

attenuation.

3. See “Gate Parameters” on page 335.

4. See “Comp Parameters” on page 336.

5. See “EQ Parameters” on page 335.

LOW/HPF L-MID H-MID HIGH /LPF

0.1–10.0

(41 points)

low shelving

HPF

0.1–10.0

(41 points)

0.1–10.0

(41 points)

high shelving

LPF

21.2 Hz–20 kHz (1/12 oct step)

±18 dB

(0.1 dB step)

HPF: on/off

±18 dB

(0.1 dB step)

±18 dB

(0.1 dB step)

LPF: on/off

Gate

Threshold

–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Range

–70 dB to 0 dB (1 dB step)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)

Hold

0.02 ms–1.96 s (216 points) @ 48 kHz

0.02 ms–2.13 s (216 points) @ 44.1 kHz

0.01 ms–981 ms (216 points) @ 96 kHz

0.01 ms–1.06 s (216 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Decay

5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz

3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz

3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Ducking

Threshold

–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Range

–70 dB to 0 dB (1 dB step)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)

Hold

0.02 ms–1.96 s (216 points) @ 48 kHz

0.02 ms–2.13 s (216 points) @ 44.1 kHz

0.01 ms–981 ms (216 points) @ 96 kHz

0.01 ms–1.06 s (216 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Decay

5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz

3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz

3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

336 Appendix B: Specifications

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Comp Parameters

Compressor

Threshold

–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Ratio (x :1)

x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20, ∞ (16 points)

Out gain

0 dB to +18 dB (0.1 dB step)

Knee

Hard, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (6 step)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)

Release

5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz

3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz

3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Expander

Threshold

–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Ratio (x :1)

x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20, ∞ (16 points)

Out gain

0 dB to +18 dB (0.1 dB step)

Knee

Hard, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (6 points)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)

Release

5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz

3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz

3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Compander H

Threshold

–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Ratio (x :1)

x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20 (15 points)

Out gain

–18 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Width

1 dB–90 dB (1 dB step)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)

Release

5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz

3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz

3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Compander S

Threshold

–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Ratio (x :1)

x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20 (15 points)

Out gain

–18 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Width

1 dB–90 dB (1 dB step)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)

Release

5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz

3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz

3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Libraries

337

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Libraries

Analog Input Spec

In these specifications, when dB represents a specific voltage, 0 dB is referenced to 0.775 Vrms.

All input AD converters (INPUT 1–16, OMNI INPUT 1–4, TALKBACK) are 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling. (@fs=44.1,

48 kHz)

+48 V DC (phantom power) is supplied to CH INPUT (1–16) XLR type connectors via individual switches.

Analog Output Spec

In these specifications, when dB represents a specific voltage, 0 dB is referenced to 0.775 Vrms.

All output DA converters (OMINI OUT 1–12, PHONES) are 24-bit, 128-times oversampling. (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz)

Effect library (EFFECT 1–4)

Presets 61 (EFFECT 2–4: 53)

User memories 67

Compressor library

Presets 36

User memories 92

Gate library

Presets 4

User memories 124

EQ library

Presets 40

User memories 160

Channel library

Presets 2

User memories 127

Surround Monitor library

Presets 1

User memories 32

Input patch library

Presets 1

User memories 32

Output patch library

Presets 1

User memories 32

Bus to Stereo library

Presets 1

User memories 32

Input PAD GAIN

Actual Load

Impedance

For Use With

Nominal

Input level

Connector

Sensitivity

1. Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of +4 dB (1.23 V) or the nominal output level when the unit

is set to maximum gain. (All faders and level controls are maximum position.)

Nominal

Max.

before clip

INPUT 1–16

–60 dB

Ω

50–600

Ω

Mics & 600

Ω

Lines

–70 dB

(0.245 mV)

–60 dB

(0.775 mV)

–40 dB

(7.75 mV)

XLR-3-31 type

(Balanced)

2. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).

–16 dB

–26 dB

(38.8 mV)

–16 dB

(0.123 V)

+4 dB

(1.23 V)

–6 dB

(388 mV)

+4 dB

(1.23 V)

+24 dB

(12.28 V)

OMNI IN 1–4

— 10k

Ω

600

Ω

Lines

+4 dB

(1.23 V)

+4 dB

(1.23 V)

+24 dB

(12.28 V)

Output

Actual

Source

Impedance

For Use With

Nominal

Output level

Connector

Nominal

Max.

before clip

OMNI OUT 1–12

Ω

600

Ω

Lines

+4 dB

(1.23 V)

+24 dB

(12.28 V)

XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)

1. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).

PHONES

100

Ω

Phones 4 mW 25 mW

Stereo Phone Jack (TRS)

(Unbalanced)

2. PHONES stereo phone jack is unbalanced (Tip=LEFT, Ring=RIGHT, Sleeve=GND).

Ω

Phones

12 mW 75 mW

338 Appendix B: Specifications

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Digital Input Spec

Digital Output Spec

Input Format Data length Level Connector

2TR IN DIGITAL

AES/EBU 24-bit RS422

XLR-3-31 type (Balanced)

1. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).

IEC-60958 24-bit 0.5 Vpp/75 Ω Phono

Output Format Data length Level Connector

2TR OUT DIGITAL

AES/EBU

Professional use

1. Channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1

Type: linear PCM

Emphasis: NO

Sampling rate: depends on the internal configuration

24-bit

2. Dither: word length 16/20/24 bit

RS422

XLR-3-32 type

(Balanced)

3. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).

IEC-60958

Consumer use

4. Channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL 2

Type: linear PCM

Category code: Digital signal mixer

Copy prohibit: NO

Emphasis: NO

Clock accuracy: Level II (1000 ppm)

Sampling rate: depends on the internal configuration

24-bit

0.5V pp/75 Ω Phono

I/O Slot Spec (1–2) 339

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

I/O Slot Spec (1–2)

Each I/O SLOT accepts a digital interface card. SLOT #1 has a serial interface.

Control I/O Spec

Maker Model Function INPUT

OUTPUT

1. Selectable from STEREO/BUS/AUX/DIRECT/EXT INSERT/SURROUND MONITOR/CR MONITOR.

Details depend on each interface card.

Format Resolution Frequency

The

number of

Available

cards

Note

Yamaha

MY8-AT

Digital I/O

ADAT

24 bit

44.1/48 kHz

Can handle

24 bit/96 kHz by

double channel mode

MY16-AT 16 16

MY8-TD 8 8

TASCAM

MY16-TD 16 16

MY8-AE 8 8

AES/EBU

MY16-AE 16 16

MY8-AEB

88MY8-AE96S

44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz

Sampling Rate Con-

verter for input

MY8-AE96

MY4-AD

ANALOG IN

—

24 bit

44.1/48 kHz

MY8-AD

20 bit

MY8-AD24

24 bit

MY8-AD96 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz

MY4-DA

ANALOG OUT —

4 20 bit 44.1/48 kHz

MY8-DA96 8

24 bit 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz

MY8-

ADDA96

ANALOG I/O 8 8

MY8-mLAN

mLAN Interface

IEEE1394 24 bit 44.1/48 kHz Maximum 5 nodes

MY16-

mLAN

16 16

Waves

Y56K

Effect & I/O 8 8 ADAT 24 bit

44.1/48 kHz 1

Y96K 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz 2

Apogee

AP8AD ANALOG IN 8 —

— 24 bit 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz 2 4ch @fs=88.2, 96 kHz

AP8DA ANALOG OUT — 8

I/O Port Format Level Connector in Console

TO HOST USB USB 0 V–3.3 V B type USB connector

MIDI

1. MIDI IN can use as TIME CODE IN MTC.

MIDI — DIN Connector 5P

OUT

MIDI — DIN Connector 5P

TIME CODE INPUT SMPTE Nominal –10 dB/10k Ω

XLR-3-31 type (Balanced)

2. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).

WORD CLOCK

— TTL/75 Ω BNC Connector

OUT

— TTL/75 Ω BNC Connector

CONTROL

—

C-MOS IN, Open collector OUT

1pin: 150 mA, 8pin total: 500 mA

D-SUB Connector 25P (Female)

REMOTE

— RS422 D-SUB Connector 9P (Male)

METER

— RS422 D-SUB Connector 15P (Female)

340 Appendix B: Specifications

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

REMOTE Port

CONTROL Port

Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 GND 6

RX+/GND

RX–/RX–

1. RS422 (for AD8HR, AD824)/SONY 9 pin pro-

tocol (P2), ESAM II

RTS/RX+

TX–/TX+

CTS/TX–

TX+/GND

9 GND

5 N.C.

Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 GPO0 14 GPO1

2 GPO2 15 GPO3

3 GPO4 16 GPO5

4 GPO6 17 GPO7

5 GND 18 GND

6 GND 19 GND

7 GND 20 GND

8 GND 21 +5V

9 +5V 22 GPI0

10 GPI1 23 GPI2

11 GPI3 24 N.C.

12 N.C. 25 N.C.

13 N.C.

Dimensions 341

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Dimensions

Unit: mm

436(Included Screw heads)

430(Not included Screw heads)

112

565

585

156

280

200

374101

154

355

342 Appendix B: Specifications

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Dimensions with the MB1000 and SP1000 installed:

Unit: mm

Speciﬁcations and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only.

Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or speciﬁcations at any time

without prior notice. Since speciﬁcations, equipment or options may not be the same in

every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

European Models

Purchaser/User Information speciﬁed in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2.

Inrush Current: 28 A

Conforms to Environments: E1, E2, E3 and E4

486

295

635

Appendix C: MIDI 343

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Appendix C: MIDI

Scene Memory to Program Change Table

Program

Change #

Initial

Scene #

User

Scene #

Program

Change #

Initial

Scene #

User

Scene #

Program

Change#

Initial

Scene #

User

Scene #

101 44448787

202 45458888

303 46468989

404 47479090

505 48489191

606 49499292

707 50509393

808 51519494

909 52529595

10 10 53 53 96 96

11 11 54 54 97 97

12 12 55 55 98 98

13 13 56 56 99 99

14 14 57 57 100 00

15 15 58 58 101 —

16 16 59 59 102 —

17 17 60 60 103 —

18 18 61 61 104 —

19 19 62 62 105 —

20 20 63 63 106 —

21 21 64 64 107 —

22 22 65 65 108 —

23 23 66 66 109 —

24 24 67 67 110 —

25 25 68 68 111 —

26 26 69 69 112 —

27 27 70 70 113 —

28 28 71 71 114 —

29 29 72 72 115 —

30 30 73 73 116 —

31 31 74 74 117 —

32 32 75 75 118 —

33 33 76 76 119 —

34 34 77 77 120 —

35 35 78 78 121 —

36 36 79 79 122 —

37 37 80 80 123 —

38 38 81 81 124 —

39 39 82 82 125 —

40 40 83 83 126 —

41 41 84 84 127 —

42 42 85 85 128 —

43 43 86 86

344 Appendix C: MIDI

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Initial Parameter to Control Change Table

CHANNEL1

# High Mid Low

0 NO ASSIGN

1FADER H CHANNEL INPUT1

2FADER H CHANNEL INPUT2

3FADER H CHANNEL INPUT3

4FADER H CHANNEL INPUT4

5FADER H CHANNEL INPUT5

6FADER H CHANNEL INPUT6

7FADER H CHANNEL INPUT7

8FADER H CHANNEL INPUT8

9FADER H CHANNEL INPUT9

10 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT10

11 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT11

12 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT12

13 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT13

14 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT14

15 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT15

16 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT16

17 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT17

18 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT18

19 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT19

20 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT20

21 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT21

22 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT22

23 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT23

24 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT24

25 FADER H MASTER BUS1

26 FADER H MASTER BUS2

27 FADER H MASTER BUS3

28 FADER H MASTER BUS4

29 NO ASSIGN

30 FADER H MASTER STEREO

31 NO ASSIGN

32 NO ASSIGN

33 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT1

34 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT2

35 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT3

36 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT4

37 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT5

38 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT6

39 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT7

40 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT8

41 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT9

42 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT10

43 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT11

44 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT12

45 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT13

46 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT14

47 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT15

48 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT16

49 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT17

50 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT18

51 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT19

52 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT20

53 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT21

54 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT22

55 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT23

56 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT24

57 FADER L MASTER BUS1

58 FADER L MASTER BUS2

59 FADER L MASTER BUS3

60 FADER L MASTER BUS4

61 NO ASSIGN

62 FADER L MASTER STEREO

63 NO ASSIGN

64 ON CHANNEL INPUT1

65 ON CHANNEL INPUT2

66 ON CHANNEL INPUT3

67 ON CHANNEL INPUT4

68 ON CHANNEL INPUT5

69 ON CHANNEL INPUT6

70 ON CHANNEL INPUT7

71 ON CHANNEL INPUT8

72 ON CHANNEL INPUT9

73 ON CHANNEL INPUT10

74 ON CHANNEL INPUT11

75 ON CHANNEL INPUT12

76 ON CHANNEL INPUT13

77 ON CHANNEL INPUT14

78 ON CHANNEL INPUT15

79 ON CHANNEL INPUT16

80 ON CHANNEL INPUT17

81 ON CHANNEL INPUT18

82 ON CHANNEL INPUT19

83 ON CHANNEL INPUT20

84 ON CHANNEL INPUT21

85 ON CHANNEL INPUT22

86 ON CHANNEL INPUT23

87 ON CHANNEL INPUT24

88 NO ASSIGN

89 PAN CHANNEL INPUT1

90 PAN CHANNEL INPUT2

91 PAN CHANNEL INPUT3

92 PAN CHANNEL INPUT4

93 PAN CHANNEL INPUT5

94 PAN CHANNEL INPUT6

95 PAN CHANNEL INPUT7

102 PAN CHANNEL INPUT8

103 PAN CHANNEL INPUT9

104 PAN CHANNEL INPUT10

105 PAN CHANNEL INPUT11

106 PAN CHANNEL INPUT12

107 PAN CHANNEL INPUT13

108 PAN CHANNEL INPUT14

109 PAN CHANNEL INPUT15

110 PAN CHANNEL INPUT16

111 PAN CHANNEL INPUT17

112 PAN CHANNEL INPUT18

113 PAN CHANNEL INPUT19

114 PAN CHANNEL INPUT20

115 PAN CHANNEL INPUT21

116 PAN CHANNEL INPUT22

117 PAN CHANNEL INPUT23

118 PAN CHANNEL INPUT24

119 NO ASSIGN

# High Mid Low

Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 345

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

CHANNEL2

# High Mid Low

0 NO ASSIGN

1FADER H CHANNEL INPUT25

2FADER H CHANNEL INPUT26

3FADER H CHANNEL INPUT27

4FADER H CHANNEL INPUT28

5FADER H CHANNEL INPUT29

6FADER H CHANNEL INPUT30

7FADER H CHANNEL INPUT31

8FADER H CHANNEL INPUT32

9FADER H CHANNEL INPUT33

10 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT34

11 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT35

12 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT36

13 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT37

14 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT38

15 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT39

16 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT40

17 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT41

18 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT42

19 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT43

20 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT44

21 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT45

22 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT46

23 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT47

24 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT48

25 FADER H MASTER BUS5

26 FADER H MASTER BUS6

27 FADER H MASTER BUS7

28 FADER H MASTER BUS8

29 NO ASSIGN

30 ON MASTER STEREO

31 NO ASSIGN

32 NO ASSIGN

33 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT25

34 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT26

35 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT27

36 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT28

37 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT29

38 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT30

39 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT31

40 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT32

41 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT33

42 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT34

43 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT35

44 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT36

45 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT37

46 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT38

47 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT39

48 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT40

49 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT41

50 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT42

51 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT43

52 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT44

53 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT45

54 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT46

55 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT47

56 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT48

57 FADER L MASTER BUS5

58 FADER L MASTER BUS6

59 FADER L MASTER BUS7

60 FADER L MASTER BUS8

61 NO ASSIGN

62 BALANCE MASTER STEREO

63 NO ASSIGN

64 ON CHANNEL INPUT25

65 ON CHANNEL INPUT26

66 ON CHANNEL INPUT27

67 ON CHANNEL INPUT28

68 ON CHANNEL INPUT29

69 ON CHANNEL INPUT30

70 ON CHANNEL INPUT31

71 ON CHANNEL INPUT32

72 ON CHANNEL INPUT33

73 ON CHANNEL INPUT34

74 ON CHANNEL INPUT35

75 ON CHANNEL INPUT36

76 ON CHANNEL INPUT37

77 ON CHANNEL INPUT38

78 ON CHANNEL INPUT39

79 ON CHANNEL INPUT40

80 ON CHANNEL INPUT41

81 ON CHANNEL INPUT42

82 ON CHANNEL INPUT43

83 ON CHANNEL INPUT44

84 ON CHANNEL INPUT45

85 ON CHANNEL INPUT46

86 ON CHANNEL INPUT47

87 ON CHANNEL INPUT48

88 NO ASSIGN

89 PAN CHANNEL INPUT25

90 PAN CHANNEL INPUT26

91 PAN CHANNEL INPUT27

92 PAN CHANNEL INPUT28

93 PAN CHANNEL INPUT29

94 PAN CHANNEL INPUT30

95 PAN CHANNEL INPUT31

102 PAN CHANNEL INPUT32

103 PAN CHANNEL INPUT33

104 PAN CHANNEL INPUT34

105 PAN CHANNEL INPUT35

106 PAN CHANNEL INPUT36

107 PAN CHANNEL INPUT37

108 PAN CHANNEL INPUT38

109 PAN CHANNEL INPUT39

110 PAN CHANNEL INPUT40

111 PAN CHANNEL INPUT41

112 PAN CHANNEL INPUT42

113 PAN CHANNEL INPUT43

114 PAN CHANNEL INPUT44

115 PAN CHANNEL INPUT45

116 PAN CHANNEL INPUT46

117 PAN CHANNEL INPUT47

118 PAN CHANNEL INPUT48

119 NO ASSIGN

# High Mid Low

346 Appendix C: MIDI

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

CHANNEL3

# High Mid Low

0 NO ASSIGN

1EQG LOW H INPUT1

2EQG LOW H INPUT2

3EQG LOW H INPUT3

4EQG LOW H INPUT4

5EQG LOW H INPUT5

6EQG LOW H INPUT6

7EQG LOW H INPUT7

8EQG LOW H INPUT8

9EQG LOW H INPUT9

10 EQ G LOW H INPUT10

11 EQ G LOW H INPUT11

12 EQ G LOW H INPUT12

13 EQ G LOW H INPUT13

14 EQ G LOW H INPUT14

15 EQ G LOW H INPUT15

16 EQ G LOW H INPUT16

17 EQ G LOW H INPUT17

18 EQ G LOW H INPUT18

19 EQ G LOW H INPUT19

20 EQ G LOW H INPUT20

21 EQ G LOW H INPUT21

22 EQ G LOW H INPUT22

23 EQ G LOW H INPUT23

24 EQ G LOW H INPUT24

25 FADER H MASTER AUX1

26 FADER H MASTER AUX2

27 FADER H MASTER AUX3

28 FADER H MASTER AUX4

29 NO ASSIGN

30 NO ASSIGN

31 NO ASSIGN

32 NO ASSIGN

33 EQ G LOW L INPUT1

34 EQ G LOW L INPUT2

35 EQ G LOW L INPUT3

36 EQ G LOW L INPUT4

37 EQ G LOW L INPUT5

38 EQ G LOW L INPUT6

39 EQ G LOW L INPUT7

40 EQ G LOW L INPUT8

41 EQ G LOW L INPUT9

42 EQ G LOW L INPUT10

43 EQ G LOW L INPUT11

44 EQ G LOW L INPUT12

45 EQ G LOW L INPUT13

46 EQ G LOW L INPUT14

47 EQ G LOW L INPUT15

48 EQ G LOW L INPUT16

49 EQ G LOW L INPUT17

50 EQ G LOW L INPUT18

51 EQ G LOW L INPUT19

52 EQ G LOW L INPUT20

53 EQ G LOW L INPUT21

54 EQ G LOW L INPUT22

55 EQ G LOW L INPUT23

56 EQ G LOW L INPUT24

57 FADER L MASTER AUX1

58 FADER L MASTER AUX2

59 FADER L MASTER AUX3

60 FADER L MASTER AUX4

61 NO ASSIGN

62 NO ASSIGN

63 NO ASSIGN

64 EQ F LOW INPUT1

65 EQ F LOW INPUT2

66 EQ F LOW INPUT3

67 EQ F LOW INPUT4

68 EQ F LOW INPUT5

69 EQ F LOW INPUT6

70 EQ F LOW INPUT7

71 EQ F LOW INPUT8

72 EQ F LOW INPUT9

73 EQ F LOW INPUT10

74 EQ F LOW INPUT11

75 EQ F LOW INPUT12

76 EQ F LOW INPUT13

77 EQ F LOW INPUT14

78 EQ F LOW INPUT15

79 EQ F LOW INPUT16

80 EQ F LOW INPUT17

81 EQ F LOW INPUT18

82 EQ F LOW INPUT19

83 EQ F LOW INPUT20

84 EQ F LOW INPUT21

85 EQ F LOW INPUT22

86 EQ F LOW INPUT23

87 EQ F LOW INPUT24

88 NO ASSIGN

89 EQ Q LOW INPUT1

90 EQ Q LOW INPUT2

91 EQ Q LOW INPUT3

92 EQ Q LOW INPUT4

93 EQ Q LOW INPUT5

94 EQ Q LOW INPUT6

95 EQ Q LOW INPUT7

102 EQ Q LOW INPUT8

103 EQ Q LOW INPUT9

104 EQ Q LOW INPUT10

105 EQ Q LOW INPUT11

106 EQ Q LOW INPUT12

107 EQ Q LOW INPUT13

108 EQ Q LOW INPUT14

109 EQ Q LOW INPUT15

110 EQ Q LOW INPUT16

111 EQ Q LOW INPUT17

112 EQ Q LOW INPUT18

113 EQ Q LOW INPUT19

114 EQ Q LOW INPUT20

115 EQ Q LOW INPUT21

116 EQ Q LOW INPUT22

117 EQ Q LOW INPUT23

118 EQ Q LOW INPUT24

119 NO ASSIGN

# High Mid Low

Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 347

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

CHANNEL4

# High Mid Low

0 NO ASSIGN

1EQG LOW H INPUT25

2EQG LOW H INPUT26

3EQG LOW H INPUT27

4EQG LOW H INPUT28

5EQG LOW H INPUT29

6EQG LOW H INPUT30

7EQG LOW H INPUT31

8EQG LOW H INPUT32

9EQG LOW H INPUT33

10 EQ G LOW H INPUT34

11 EQ G LOW H INPUT35

12 EQ G LOW H INPUT36

13 EQ G LOW H INPUT37

14 EQ G LOW H INPUT38

15 EQ G LOW H INPUT39

16 EQ G LOW H INPUT40

17 EQ G LOW H INPUT41

18 EQ G LOW H INPUT42

19 EQ G LOW H INPUT43

20 EQ G LOW H INPUT44

21 EQ G LOW H INPUT45

22 EQ G LOW H INPUT46

23 EQ G LOW H INPUT47

24 EQ G LOW H INPUT48

25 FADER H MASTER AUX5

26 FADER H MASTER AUX6

27 FADER H MASTER AUX7

28 FADER H MASTER AUX8

29 NO ASSIGN

30 NO ASSIGN

31 NO ASSIGN

32 NO ASSIGN

33 EQ G LOW L INPUT25

34 EQ G LOW L INPUT26

35 EQ G LOW L INPUT27

36 EQ G LOW L INPUT28

37 EQ G LOW L INPUT29

38 EQ G LOW L INPUT30

39 EQ G LOW L INPUT31

40 EQ G LOW L INPUT32

41 EQ G LOW L INPUT33

42 EQ G LOW L INPUT34

43 EQ G LOW L INPUT35

44 EQ G LOW L INPUT36

45 EQ G LOW L INPUT37

46 EQ G LOW L INPUT38

47 EQ G LOW L INPUT39

48 EQ G LOW L INPUT40

49 EQ G LOW L INPUT41

50 EQ G LOW L INPUT42

51 EQ G LOW L INPUT43

52 EQ G LOW L INPUT44

53 EQ G LOW L INPUT45

54 EQ G LOW L INPUT46

55 EQ G LOW L INPUT47

56 EQ G LOW L INPUT48

57 FADER L MASTER AUX5

58 FADER L MASTER AUX6

59 FADER L MASTER AUX7

60 FADER L MASTER AUX8

61 NO ASSIGN

62 NO ASSIGN

63 NO ASSIGN

64 EQ F LOW INPUT25

65 EQ F LOW INPUT26

66 EQ F LOW INPUT27

67 EQ F LOW INPUT28

68 EQ F LOW INPUT29

69 EQ F LOW INPUT30

70 EQ F LOW INPUT31

71 EQ F LOW INPUT32

72 EQ F LOW INPUT33

73 EQ F LOW INPUT34

74 EQ F LOW INPUT35

75 EQ F LOW INPUT36

76 EQ F LOW INPUT37

77 EQ F LOW INPUT38

78 EQ F LOW INPUT39

79 EQ F LOW INPUT40

80 EQ F LOW INPUT41

81 EQ F LOW INPUT42

82 EQ F LOW INPUT43

83 EQ F LOW INPUT44

84 EQ F LOW INPUT45

85 EQ F LOW INPUT46

86 EQ F LOW INPUT47

87 EQ F LOW INPUT48

88 NO ASSIGN

89 EQ Q LOW INPUT25

90 EQ Q LOW INPUT26

91 EQ Q LOW INPUT27

92 EQ Q LOW INPUT28

93 EQ Q LOW INPUT29

94 EQ Q LOW INPUT30

95 EQ Q LOW INPUT31

102 EQ Q LOW INPUT32

103 EQ Q LOW INPUT33

104 EQ Q LOW INPUT34

105 EQ Q LOW INPUT35

106 EQ Q LOW INPUT36

107 EQ Q LOW INPUT37

108 EQ Q LOW INPUT38

109 EQ Q LOW INPUT39

110 EQ Q LOW INPUT40

111 EQ Q LOW INPUT41

112 EQ Q LOW INPUT42

113 EQ Q LOW INPUT43

114 EQ Q LOW INPUT44

115 EQ Q LOW INPUT45

116 EQ Q LOW INPUT46

117 EQ Q LOW INPUT47

118 EQ Q LOW INPUT48

119 NO ASSIGN

# High Mid Low

348 Appendix C: MIDI

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

CHANNEL5

# High Mid Low

0 NO ASSIGN

1EQG LO-MID H INPUT1

2EQG LO-MID H INPUT2

3EQG LO-MID H INPUT3

4EQG LO-MID H INPUT4

5EQG LO-MID H INPUT5

6EQG LO-MID H INPUT6

7EQG LO-MID H INPUT7

8EQG LO-MID H INPUT8

9EQG LO-MID H INPUT9

10 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT10

11 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT11

12 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT12

13 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT13

14 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT14

15 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT15

16 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT16

17 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT17

18 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT18

19 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT19

20 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT20

21 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT21

22 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT22

23 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT23

24 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT24

25 ON MASTER BUS1

26 ON MASTER BUS2

27 ON MASTER BUS3

28 ON MASTER BUS4

29 NO ASSIGN

30 NO ASSIGN

31 NO ASSIGN

32 NO ASSIGN

33 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT1

34 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT2

35 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT3

36 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT4

37 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT5

38 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT6

39 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT7

40 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT8

41 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT9

42 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT10

43 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT11

44 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT12

45 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT13

46 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT14

47 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT15

48 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT16

49 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT17

50 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT18

51 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT19

52 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT20

53 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT21

54 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT22

55 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT23

56 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT24

57 ON MASTER BUS5

58 ON MASTER BUS6

59 ON MASTER BUS7

60 ON MASTER BUS8

61 NO ASSIGN

62 NO ASSIGN

63 NO ASSIGN

64 EQ F LO-MID INPUT1

65 EQ F LO-MID INPUT2

66 EQ F LO-MID INPUT3

67 EQ F LO-MID INPUT4

68 EQ F LO-MID INPUT5

69 EQ F LO-MID INPUT6

70 EQ F LO-MID INPUT7

71 EQ F LO-MID INPUT8

72 EQ F LO-MID INPUT9

73 EQ F LO-MID INPUT10

74 EQ F LO-MID INPUT11

75 EQ F LO-MID INPUT12

76 EQ F LO-MID INPUT13

77 EQ F LO-MID INPUT14

78 EQ F LO-MID INPUT15

79 EQ F LO-MID INPUT16

80 EQ F LO-MID INPUT17

81 EQ F LO-MID INPUT18

82 EQ F LO-MID INPUT19

83 EQ F LO-MID INPUT20

84 EQ F LO-MID INPUT21

85 EQ F LO-MID INPUT22

86 EQ F LO-MID INPUT23

87 EQ F LO-MID INPUT24

88 NO ASSIGN

89 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT1

90 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT2

91 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT3

92 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT4

93 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT5

94 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT6

95 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT7

102 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT8

103 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT9

104 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT10

105 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT11

106 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT12

107 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT13

108 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT14

109 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT15

110 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT16

111 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT17

112 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT18

113 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT19

114 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT20

115 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT21

116 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT22

117 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT23

118 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT24

119 NO ASSIGN

# High Mid Low

Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 349

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

CHANNEL6

# High Mid Low

0 NO ASSIGN

1EQG LO-MID H INPUT25

2EQG LO-MID H INPUT26

3EQG LO-MID H INPUT27

4EQG LO-MID H INPUT28

5EQG LO-MID H INPUT29

6EQG LO-MID H INPUT30

7EQG LO-MID H INPUT31

8EQG LO-MID H INPUT32

9EQG LO-MID H INPUT33

10 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT34

11 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT35

12 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT36

13 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT37

14 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT38

15 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT39

16 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT40

17 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT41

18 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT42

19 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT43

20 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT44

21 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT45

22 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT46

23 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT47

24 EQ G LO-MID H INPUT48

25 ON MASTER AUX1

26 ON MASTER AUX2

27 ON MASTER AUX3

28 ON MASTER AUX4

29 NO ASSIGN

30 NO ASSIGN

31 NO ASSIGN

32 NO ASSIGN

33 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT25

34 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT26

35 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT27

36 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT28

37 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT29

38 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT30

39 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT31

40 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT32

41 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT33

42 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT34

43 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT35

44 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT36

45 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT37

46 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT38

47 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT39

48 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT40

49 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT41

50 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT42

51 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT43

52 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT44

53 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT45

54 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT46

55 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT47

56 EQ G LO-MID L INPUT48

57 ON MASTER AUX5

58 ON MASTER AUX6

59 ON MASTER AUX7

60 ON MASTER AUX8

61 NO ASSIGN

62 NO ASSIGN

63 NO ASSIGN

64 EQ F LO-MID INPUT25

65 EQ F LO-MID INPUT26

66 EQ F LO-MID INPUT27

67 EQ F LO-MID INPUT28

68 EQ F LO-MID INPUT29

69 EQ F LO-MID INPUT30

70 EQ F LO-MID INPUT31

71 EQ F LO-MID INPUT32

72 EQ F LO-MID INPUT33

73 EQ F LO-MID INPUT34

74 EQ F LO-MID INPUT35

75 EQ F LO-MID INPUT36

76 EQ F LO-MID INPUT37

77 EQ F LO-MID INPUT38

78 EQ F LO-MID INPUT39

79 EQ F LO-MID INPUT40

80 EQ F LO-MID INPUT41

81 EQ F LO-MID INPUT42

82 EQ F LO-MID INPUT43

83 EQ F LO-MID INPUT44

84 EQ F LO-MID INPUT45

85 EQ F LO-MID INPUT46

86 EQ F LO-MID INPUT47

87 EQ F LO-MID INPUT48

88 NO ASSIGN

89 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT25

90 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT26

91 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT27

92 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT28

93 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT29

94 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT30

95 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT31

102 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT32

103 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT33

104 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT34

105 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT35

106 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT36

107 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT37

108 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT38

109 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT39

110 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT40

111 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT41

112 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT42

113 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT43

114 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT44

115 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT45

116 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT46

117 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT47

118 EQ Q LO-MID INPUT48

119 NO ASSIGN

# High Mid Low

350 Appendix C: MIDI

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

CHANNEL7

# High Mid Low

0 NO ASSIGN

1EQG HI-MID H INPUT1

2EQG HI-MID H INPUT2

3EQG HI-MID H INPUT3

4EQG HI-MID H INPUT4

5EQG HI-MID H INPUT5

6EQG HI-MID H INPUT6

7EQG HI-MID H INPUT7

8EQG HI-MID H INPUT8

9EQG HI-MID H INPUT9

10 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT10

11 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT11

12 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT12

13 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT13

14 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT14

15 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT15

16 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT16

17 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT17

18 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT18

19 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT19

20 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT20

21 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT21

22 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT22

23 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT23

24 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT24

25 NO ASSIGN

26 NO ASSIGN

27 NO ASSIGN

28 NO ASSIGN

29 NO ASSIGN

30 NO ASSIGN

31 NO ASSIGN

32 NO ASSIGN

33 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT1

34 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT2

35 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT3

36 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT4

37 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT5

38 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT6

39 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT7

40 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT8

41 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT9

42 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT10

43 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT11

44 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT12

45 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT13

46 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT14

47 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT15

48 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT16

49 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT17

50 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT18

51 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT19

52 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT20

53 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT21

54 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT22

55 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT23

56 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT24

57 NO ASSIGN

58 NO ASSIGN

59 NO ASSIGN

60 NO ASSIGN

61 NO ASSIGN

62 NO ASSIGN

63 NO ASSIGN

64 EQ F HI-MID INPUT1

65 EQ F HI-MID INPUT2

66 EQ F HI-MID INPUT3

67 EQ F HI-MID INPUT4

68 EQ F HI-MID INPUT5

69 EQ F HI-MID INPUT6

70 EQ F HI-MID INPUT7

71 EQ F HI-MID INPUT8

72 EQ F HI-MID INPUT9

73 EQ F HI-MID INPUT10

74 EQ F HI-MID INPUT11

75 EQ F HI-MID INPUT12

76 EQ F HI-MID INPUT13

77 EQ F HI-MID INPUT14

78 EQ F HI-MID INPUT15

79 EQ F HI-MID INPUT16

80 EQ F HI-MID INPUT17

81 EQ F HI-MID INPUT18

82 EQ F HI-MID INPUT19

83 EQ F HI-MID INPUT20

84 EQ F HI-MID INPUT21

85 EQ F HI-MID INPUT22

86 EQ F HI-MID INPUT23

87 EQ F HI-MID INPUT24

88 NO ASSIGN

89 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT1

90 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT2

91 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT3

92 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT4

93 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT5

94 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT6

95 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT7

102 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT8

103 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT9

104 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT10

105 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT11

106 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT12

107 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT13

108 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT14

109 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT15

110 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT16

111 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT17

112 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT18

113 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT19

114 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT20

115 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT21

116 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT22

117 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT23

118 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT24

119 NO ASSIGN

# High Mid Low

Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 351

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

CHANNEL8

# High Mid Low

0 NO ASSIGN

1EQG HI-MID H INPUT25

2EQG HI-MID H INPUT26

3EQG HI-MID H INPUT27

4EQG HI-MID H INPUT28

5EQG HI-MID H INPUT29

6EQG HI-MID H INPUT30

7EQG HI-MID H INPUT31

8EQG HI-MID H INPUT32

9EQG HI-MID H INPUT33

10 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT34

11 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT35

12 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT36

13 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT37

14 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT38

15 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT39

16 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT40

17 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT41

18 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT42

19 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT43

20 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT44

21 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT45

22 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT46

23 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT47

24 EQ G HI-MID H INPUT48

25 NO ASSIGN

26 NO ASSIGN

27 NO ASSIGN

28 NO ASSIGN

29 NO ASSIGN

30 NO ASSIGN

31 NO ASSIGN

32 NO ASSIGN

33 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT25

34 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT26

35 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT27

36 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT28

37 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT29

38 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT30

39 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT31

40 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT32

41 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT33

42 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT34

43 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT35

44 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT36

45 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT37

46 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT38

47 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT39

48 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT40

49 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT41

50 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT42

51 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT43

52 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT44

53 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT45

54 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT46

55 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT47

56 EQ G HI-MID L INPUT48

57 NO ASSIGN

58 NO ASSIGN

59 NO ASSIGN

60 NO ASSIGN

61 NO ASSIGN

62 NO ASSIGN

63 NO ASSIGN

64 EQ F HI-MID INPUT25

65 EQ F HI-MID INPUT26

66 EQ F HI-MID INPUT27

67 EQ F HI-MID INPUT28

68 EQ F HI-MID INPUT29

69 EQ F HI-MID INPUT30

70 EQ F HI-MID INPUT31

71 EQ F HI-MID INPUT32

72 EQ F HI-MID INPUT33

73 EQ F HI-MID INPUT34

74 EQ F HI-MID INPUT35

75 EQ F HI-MID INPUT36

76 EQ F HI-MID INPUT37

77 EQ F HI-MID INPUT38

78 EQ F HI-MID INPUT39

79 EQ F HI-MID INPUT40

80 EQ F HI-MID INPUT41

81 EQ F HI-MID INPUT42

82 EQ F HI-MID INPUT43

83 EQ F HI-MID INPUT44

84 EQ F HI-MID INPUT45

85 EQ F HI-MID INPUT46

86 EQ F HI-MID INPUT47

87 EQ F HI-MID INPUT48

88 NO ASSIGN

89 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT25

90 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT26

91 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT27

92 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT28

93 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT29

94 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT30

95 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT31

102 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT32

103 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT33

104 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT34

105 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT35

106 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT36

107 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT37

108 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT38

109 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT39

110 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT40

111 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT41

112 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT42

113 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT43

114 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT44

115 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT45

116 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT46

117 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT47

118 EQ Q HI-MID INPUT48

119 NO ASSIGN

# High Mid Low

352 Appendix C: MIDI

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

CHANNEL9

# High Mid Low

0 NO ASSIGN

1EQG HIGH H INPUT1

2EQG HIGH H INPUT2

3EQG HIGH H INPUT3

4EQG HIGH H INPUT4

5EQG HIGH H INPUT5

6EQG HIGH H INPUT6

7EQG HIGH H INPUT7

8EQG HIGH H INPUT8

9EQG HIGH H INPUT9

10 EQ G HIGH H INPUT10

11 EQ G HIGH H INPUT11

12 EQ G HIGH H INPUT12

13 EQ G HIGH H INPUT13

14 EQ G HIGH H INPUT14

15 EQ G HIGH H INPUT15

16 EQ G HIGH H INPUT16

17 EQ G HIGH H INPUT17

18 EQ G HIGH H INPUT18

19 EQ G HIGH H INPUT19

20 EQ G HIGH H INPUT20

21 EQ G HIGH H INPUT21

22 EQ G HIGH H INPUT22

23 EQ G HIGH H INPUT23

24 EQ G HIGH H INPUT24

25 NO ASSIGN

26 NO ASSIGN

27 NO ASSIGN

28 NO ASSIGN

29 NO ASSIGN

30 NO ASSIGN

31 NO ASSIGN

32 NO ASSIGN

33 EQ G HIGH L INPUT1

34 EQ G HIGH L INPUT2

35 EQ G HIGH L INPUT3

36 EQ G HIGH L INPUT4

37 EQ G HIGH L INPUT5

38 EQ G HIGH L INPUT6

39 EQ G HIGH L INPUT7

40 EQ G HIGH L INPUT8

41 EQ G HIGH L INPUT9

42 EQ G HIGH L INPUT10

43 EQ G HIGH L INPUT11

44 EQ G HIGH L INPUT12

45 EQ G HIGH L INPUT13

46 EQ G HIGH L INPUT14

47 EQ G HIGH L INPUT15

48 EQ G HIGH L INPUT16

49 EQ G HIGH L INPUT17

50 EQ G HIGH L INPUT18

51 EQ G HIGH L INPUT19

52 EQ G HIGH L INPUT20

53 EQ G HIGH L INPUT21

54 EQ G HIGH L INPUT22

55 EQ G HIGH L INPUT23

56 EQ G HIGH L INPUT24

57 NO ASSIGN

58 NO ASSIGN

59 NO ASSIGN

60 NO ASSIGN

61 NO ASSIGN

62 NO ASSIGN

63 NO ASSIGN

64 EQ F HIGH INPUT1

65 EQ F HIGH INPUT2

66 EQ F HIGH INPUT3

67 EQ F HIGH INPUT4

68 EQ F HIGH INPUT5

69 EQ F HIGH INPUT6

70 EQ F HIGH INPUT7

71 EQ F HIGH INPUT8

72 EQ F HIGH INPUT9

73 EQ F HIGH INPUT10

74 EQ F HIGH INPUT11

75 EQ F HIGH INPUT12

76 EQ F HIGH INPUT13

77 EQ F HIGH INPUT14

78 EQ F HIGH INPUT15

79 EQ F HIGH INPUT16

80 EQ F HIGH INPUT17

81 EQ F HIGH INPUT18

82 EQ F HIGH INPUT19

83 EQ F HIGH INPUT20

84 EQ F HIGH INPUT21

85 EQ F HIGH INPUT22

86 EQ F HIGH INPUT23

87 EQ F HIGH INPUT24

88 NO ASSIGN

89 EQ Q HIGH INPUT1

90 EQ Q HIGH INPUT2

91 EQ Q HIGH INPUT3

92 EQ Q HIGH INPUT4

93 EQ Q HIGH INPUT5

94 EQ Q HIGH INPUT6

95 EQ Q HIGH INPUT7

102 EQ Q HIGH INPUT8

103 EQ Q HIGH INPUT9

104 EQ Q HIGH INPUT10

105 EQ Q HIGH INPUT11

106 EQ Q HIGH INPUT12

107 EQ Q HIGH INPUT13

108 EQ Q HIGH INPUT14

109 EQ Q HIGH INPUT15

110 EQ Q HIGH INPUT16

111 EQ Q HIGH INPUT17

112 EQ Q HIGH INPUT18

113 EQ Q HIGH INPUT19

114 EQ Q HIGH INPUT20

115 EQ Q HIGH INPUT21

116 EQ Q HIGH INPUT22

117 EQ Q HIGH INPUT23

118 EQ Q HIGH INPUT24

119 NO ASSIGN

# High Mid Low

Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 353

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

CHANNEL10

# High Mid Low

0 NO ASSIGN

1EQG HIGH H INPUT25

2EQG HIGH H INPUT26

3EQG HIGH H INPUT27

4EQG HIGH H INPUT28

5EQG HIGH H INPUT29

6EQG HIGH H INPUT30

7EQG HIGH H INPUT31

8EQG HIGH H INPUT32

9EQG HIGH H INPUT33

10 EQ G HIGH H INPUT34

11 EQ G HIGH H INPUT35

12 EQ G HIGH H INPUT36

13 EQ G HIGH H INPUT37

14 EQ G HIGH H INPUT38

15 EQ G HIGH H INPUT39

16 EQ G HIGH H INPUT40

17 EQ G HIGH H INPUT41

18 EQ G HIGH H INPUT42

19 EQ G HIGH H INPUT43

20 EQ G HIGH H INPUT44

21 EQ G HIGH H INPUT45

22 EQ G HIGH H INPUT46

23 EQ G HIGH H INPUT47

24 EQ G HIGH H INPUT48

25 NO ASSIGN

26 NO ASSIGN

27 NO ASSIGN

28 NO ASSIGN

29 NO ASSIGN

30 NO ASSIGN

31 NO ASSIGN

32 NO ASSIGN

33 EQ G HIGH L INPUT25

34 EQ G HIGH L INPUT26

35 EQ G HIGH L INPUT27

36 EQ G HIGH L INPUT28

37 EQ G HIGH L INPUT29

38 EQ G HIGH L INPUT30

39 EQ G HIGH L INPUT31

40 EQ G HIGH L INPUT32

41 EQ G HIGH L INPUT33

42 EQ G HIGH L INPUT34

43 EQ G HIGH L INPUT35

44 EQ G HIGH L INPUT36

45 EQ G HIGH L INPUT37

46 EQ G HIGH L INPUT38

47 EQ G HIGH L INPUT39

48 EQ G HIGH L INPUT40

49 EQ G HIGH L INPUT41

50 EQ G HIGH L INPUT42

51 EQ G HIGH L INPUT43

52 EQ G HIGH L INPUT44

53 EQ G HIGH L INPUT45

54 EQ G HIGH L INPUT46

55 EQ G HIGH L INPUT47

56 EQ G HIGH L INPUT48

57 NO ASSIGN

58 NO ASSIGN

59 NO ASSIGN

60 NO ASSIGN

61 NO ASSIGN

62 NO ASSIGN

63 NO ASSIGN

64 EQ F HIGH INPUT25

65 EQ F HIGH INPUT26

66 EQ F HIGH INPUT27

67 EQ F HIGH INPUT28

68 EQ F HIGH INPUT29

69 EQ F HIGH INPUT30

70 EQ F HIGH INPUT31

71 EQ F HIGH INPUT32

72 EQ F HIGH INPUT33

73 EQ F HIGH INPUT34

74 EQ F HIGH INPUT35

75 EQ F HIGH INPUT36

76 EQ F HIGH INPUT37

77 EQ F HIGH INPUT38

78 EQ F HIGH INPUT39

79 EQ F HIGH INPUT40

80 EQ F HIGH INPUT41

81 EQ F HIGH INPUT42

82 EQ F HIGH INPUT43

83 EQ F HIGH INPUT44

84 EQ F HIGH INPUT45

85 EQ F HIGH INPUT46

86 EQ F HIGH INPUT47

87 EQ F HIGH INPUT48

88 NO ASSIGN

89 EQ Q HIGH INPUT25

90 EQ Q HIGH INPUT26

91 EQ Q HIGH INPUT27

92 EQ Q HIGH INPUT28

93 EQ Q HIGH INPUT29

94 EQ Q HIGH INPUT30

95 EQ Q HIGH INPUT31

102 EQ Q HIGH INPUT32

103 EQ Q HIGH INPUT33

104 EQ Q HIGH INPUT34

105 EQ Q HIGH INPUT35

106 EQ Q HIGH INPUT36

107 EQ Q HIGH INPUT37

108 EQ Q HIGH INPUT38

109 EQ Q HIGH INPUT39

110 EQ Q HIGH INPUT40

111 EQ Q HIGH INPUT41

112 EQ Q HIGH INPUT42

113 EQ Q HIGH INPUT43

114 EQ Q HIGH INPUT44

115 EQ Q HIGH INPUT45

116 EQ Q HIGH INPUT46

117 EQ Q HIGH INPUT47

118 EQ Q HIGH INPUT48

119 NO ASSIGN

# High Mid Low

354 Appendix C: MIDI

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

CHANNEL11

# High Mid Low

0 NO ASSIGN

1EQATT H INPUT1

2EQATT H INPUT2

3EQATT H INPUT3

4EQATT H INPUT4

5EQATT H INPUT5

6EQATT H INPUT6

7EQATT H INPUT7

8EQATT H INPUT8

9EQATT H INPUT9

10 EQ ATT H INPUT10

11 EQ ATT H INPUT11

12 EQ ATT H INPUT12

13 EQ ATT H INPUT13

14 EQ ATT H INPUT14

15 EQ ATT H INPUT15

16 EQ ATT H INPUT16

17 EQ ATT H INPUT17

18 EQ ATT H INPUT18

19 EQ ATT H INPUT19

20 EQ ATT H INPUT20

21 EQ ATT H INPUT21

22 EQ ATT H INPUT22

23 EQ ATT H INPUT23

24 EQ ATT H INPUT24

25 NO ASSIGN

26 NO ASSIGN

27 NO ASSIGN

28 NO ASSIGN

29 NO ASSIGN

30 NO ASSIGN

31 NO ASSIGN

32 NO ASSIGN

33 EQ ATT L INPUT1

34 EQ ATT L INPUT2

35 EQ ATT L INPUT3

36 EQ ATT L INPUT4

37 EQ ATT L INPUT5

38 EQ ATT L INPUT6

39 EQ ATT L INPUT7

40 EQ ATT L INPUT8

41 EQ ATT L INPUT9

42 EQ ATT L INPUT10

43 EQ ATT L INPUT11

44 EQ ATT L INPUT12

45 EQ ATT L INPUT13

46 EQ ATT L INPUT14

47 EQ ATT L INPUT15

48 EQ ATT L INPUT16

49 EQ ATT L INPUT17

50 EQ ATT L INPUT18

51 EQ ATT L INPUT19

52 EQ ATT L INPUT20

53 EQ ATT L INPUT21

54 EQ ATT L INPUT22

55 EQ ATT L INPUT23

56 EQ ATT L INPUT24

57 NO ASSIGN

58 NO ASSIGN

59 NO ASSIGN

60 NO ASSIGN

61 NO ASSIGN

62 NO ASSIGN

63 NO ASSIGN

64 EQ HPF ON INPUT1

65 EQ HPF ON INPUT2

66 EQ HPF ON INPUT3

67 EQ HPF ON INPUT4

68 EQ HPF ON INPUT5

69 EQ HPF ON INPUT6

70 EQ HPF ON INPUT7

71 EQ HPF ON INPUT8

72 EQ HPF ON INPUT9

73 EQ HPF ON INPUT10

74 EQ HPF ON INPUT11

75 EQ HPF ON INPUT12

76 EQ HPF ON INPUT13

77 EQ HPF ON INPUT14

78 EQ HPF ON INPUT15

79 EQ HPF ON INPUT16

80 EQ HPF ON INPUT17

81 EQ HPF ON INPUT18

82 EQ HPF ON INPUT19

83 EQ HPF ON INPUT20

84 EQ HPF ON INPUT21

85 EQ HPF ON INPUT22

86 EQ HPF ON INPUT23

87 EQ HPF ON INPUT24

88 NO ASSIGN

89 EQ LPF ON INPUT1

90 EQ LPF ON INPUT2

91 EQ LPF ON INPUT3

92 EQ LPF ON INPUT4

93 EQ LPF ON INPUT5

94 EQ LPF ON INPUT6

95 EQ LPF ON INPUT7

102 EQ LPF ON INPUT8

103 EQ LPF ON INPUT9

104 EQ LPF ON INPUT10

105 EQ LPF ON INPUT11

106 EQ LPF ON INPUT12

107 EQ LPF ON INPUT13

108 EQ LPF ON INPUT14

109 EQ LPF ON INPUT15

110 EQ LPF ON INPUT16

111 EQ LPF ON INPUT17

112 EQ LPF ON INPUT18

113 EQ LPF ON INPUT19

114 EQ LPF ON INPUT20

115 EQ LPF ON INPUT21

116 EQ LPF ON INPUT22

117 EQ LPF ON INPUT23

118 EQ LPF ON INPUT24

119 NO ASSIGN

# High Mid Low

Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 355

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

CHANNEL12

# High Mid Low

0 NO ASSIGN

1EQATT H INPUT25

2EQATT H INPUT26

3EQATT H INPUT27

4EQATT H INPUT28

5EQATT H INPUT29

6EQATT H INPUT30

7EQATT H INPUT31

8EQATT H INPUT32

9EQATT H INPUT33

10 EQ ATT H INPUT34

11 EQ ATT H INPUT35

12 EQ ATT H INPUT36

13 EQ ATT H INPUT37

14 EQ ATT H INPUT38

15 EQ ATT H INPUT39

16 EQ ATT H INPUT40

17 EQ ATT H INPUT41

18 EQ ATT H INPUT42

19 EQ ATT H INPUT43

20 EQ ATT H INPUT44

21 EQ ATT H INPUT45

22 EQ ATT H INPUT46

23 EQ ATT H INPUT47

24 EQ ATT H INPUT48

25 NO ASSIGN

26 NO ASSIGN

27 NO ASSIGN

28 NO ASSIGN

29 NO ASSIGN

30 NO ASSIGN

31 NO ASSIGN

32 NO ASSIGN

33 EQ ATT L INPUT25

34 EQ ATT L INPUT26

35 EQ ATT L INPUT27

36 EQ ATT L INPUT28

37 EQ ATT L INPUT29

38 EQ ATT L INPUT30

39 EQ ATT L INPUT31

40 EQ ATT L INPUT32

41 EQ ATT L INPUT33

42 EQ ATT L INPUT34

43 EQ ATT L INPUT35

44 EQ ATT L INPUT36

45 EQ ATT L INPUT37

46 EQ ATT L INPUT38

47 EQ ATT L INPUT39

48 EQ ATT L INPUT40

49 EQ ATT L INPUT41

50 EQ ATT L INPUT42

51 EQ ATT L INPUT43

52 EQ ATT L INPUT44

53 EQ ATT L INPUT45

54 EQ ATT L INPUT46

55 EQ ATT L INPUT47

56 EQ ATT L INPUT48

57 NO ASSIGN

58 NO ASSIGN

59 NO ASSIGN

60 NO ASSIGN

61 NO ASSIGN

62 NO ASSIGN

63 NO ASSIGN

64 EQ HPF ON INPUT25

65 EQ HPF ON INPUT26

66 EQ HPF ON INPUT27

67 EQ HPF ON INPUT28

68 EQ HPF ON INPUT29

69 EQ HPF ON INPUT30

70 EQ HPF ON INPUT31

71 EQ HPF ON INPUT32

72 EQ HPF ON INPUT33

73 EQ HPF ON INPUT34

74 EQ HPF ON INPUT35

75 EQ HPF ON INPUT36

76 EQ HPF ON INPUT37

77 EQ HPF ON INPUT38

78 EQ HPF ON INPUT39

79 EQ HPF ON INPUT40

80 EQ HPF ON INPUT41

81 EQ HPF ON INPUT42

82 EQ HPF ON INPUT43

83 EQ HPF ON INPUT44

84 EQ HPF ON INPUT45

85 EQ HPF ON INPUT46

86 EQ HPF ON INPUT47

87 EQ HPF ON INPUT48

88 NO ASSIGN

89 EQ LPF ON INPUT25

90 EQ LPF ON INPUT26

91 EQ LPF ON INPUT27

92 EQ LPF ON INPUT28

93 EQ LPF ON INPUT29

94 EQ LPF ON INPUT30

95 EQ LPF ON INPUT31

102 EQ LPF ON INPUT32

103 EQ LPF ON INPUT33

104 EQ LPF ON INPUT34

105 EQ LPF ON INPUT35

106 EQ LPF ON INPUT36

107 EQ LPF ON INPUT37

108 EQ LPF ON INPUT38

109 EQ LPF ON INPUT39

110 EQ LPF ON INPUT40

111 EQ LPF ON INPUT41

112 EQ LPF ON INPUT42

113 EQ LPF ON INPUT43

114 EQ LPF ON INPUT44

115 EQ LPF ON INPUT45

116 EQ LPF ON INPUT46

117 EQ LPF ON INPUT47

118 EQ LPF ON INPUT48

119 NO ASSIGN

# High Mid Low

356 Appendix C: MIDI

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

CHANNEL13

# High Mid Low

0 NO ASSIGN

1 SURROUND LFE H INPUT1

2 SURROUND LFE H INPUT2

3 SURROUND LFE H INPUT3

4 SURROUND LFE H INPUT4

5 SURROUND LFE H INPUT5

6 SURROUND LFE H INPUT6

7 SURROUND LFE H INPUT7

8 SURROUND LFE H INPUT8

9 SURROUND LFE H INPUT9

10 SURROUND LFE H INPUT10

11 SURROUND LFE H INPUT11

12 SURROUND LFE H INPUT12

13 SURROUND LFE H INPUT13

14 SURROUND LFE H INPUT14

15 SURROUND LFE H INPUT15

16 SURROUND LFE H INPUT16

17 SURROUND LFE H INPUT17

18 SURROUND LFE H INPUT18

19 SURROUND LFE H INPUT19

20 SURROUND LFE H INPUT20

21 SURROUND LFE H INPUT21

22 SURROUND LFE H INPUT22

23 SURROUND LFE H INPUT23

24 SURROUND LFE H INPUT24

25 NO ASSIGN

26 NO ASSIGN

27 NO ASSIGN

28 NO ASSIGN

29 NO ASSIGN

30 NO ASSIGN

31 NO ASSIGN

32 NO ASSIGN

33 SURROUND LFE L INPUT1

34 SURROUND LFE L INPUT2

35 SURROUND LFE L INPUT3

36 SURROUND LFE L INPUT4

37 SURROUND LFE L INPUT5

38 SURROUND LFE L INPUT6

39 SURROUND LFE L INPUT7

40 SURROUND LFE L INPUT8

41 SURROUND LFE L INPUT9

42 SURROUND LFE L INPUT10

43 SURROUND LFE L INPUT11

44 SURROUND LFE L INPUT12

45 SURROUND LFE L INPUT13

46 SURROUND LFE L INPUT14

47 SURROUND LFE L INPUT15

48 SURROUND LFE L INPUT16

49 SURROUND LFE L INPUT17

50 SURROUND LFE L INPUT18

51 SURROUND LFE L INPUT19

52 SURROUND LFE L INPUT20

53 SURROUND LFE L INPUT21

54 SURROUND LFE L INPUT22

55 SURROUND LFE L INPUT23

56 SURROUND LFE L INPUT24

57 NO ASSIGN

58 NO ASSIGN

59 NO ASSIGN

60 NO ASSIGN

61 NO ASSIGN

62 NO ASSIGN

63 NO ASSIGN

64 SURROUND DIV F INPUT1

65 SURROUND DIV F INPUT2

66 SURROUND DIV F INPUT3

67 SURROUND DIV F INPUT4

68 SURROUND DIV F INPUT5

69 SURROUND DIV F INPUT6

70 SURROUND DIV F INPUT7

71 SURROUND DIV F INPUT8

72 SURROUND DIV F INPUT9

73 SURROUND DIV F INPUT10

74 SURROUND DIV F INPUT11

75 SURROUND DIV F INPUT12

76 SURROUND DIV F INPUT13

77 SURROUND DIV F INPUT14

78 SURROUND DIV F INPUT15

79 SURROUND DIV F INPUT16

80 SURROUND DIV F INPUT17

81 SURROUND DIV F INPUT18

82 SURROUND DIV F INPUT19

83 SURROUND DIV F INPUT20

84 SURROUND DIV F INPUT21

85 SURROUND DIV F INPUT22

86 SURROUND DIV F INPUT23

87 SURROUND DIV F INPUT24

88 NO ASSIGN

89 EQ ON INPUT1

90 EQ ON INPUT2

91 EQ ON INPUT3

92 EQ ON INPUT4

93 EQ ON INPUT5

94 EQ ON INPUT6

95 EQ ON INPUT7

102 EQ ON INPUT8

103 EQ ON INPUT9

104 EQ ON INPUT10

105 EQ ON INPUT11

106 EQ ON INPUT12

107 EQ ON INPUT13

108 EQ ON INPUT14

109 EQ ON INPUT15

110 EQ ON INPUT16

111 EQ ON INPUT17

112 EQ ON INPUT18

113 EQ ON INPUT19

114 EQ ON INPUT20

115 EQ ON INPUT21

116 EQ ON INPUT22

117 EQ ON INPUT23

118 EQ ON INPUT24

119 NO ASSIGN

# High Mid Low

Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 357

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

CHANNEL14

# High Mid Low

0 NO ASSIGN

1 SURROUND LFE H INPUT25

2 SURROUND LFE H INPUT26

3 SURROUND LFE H INPUT27

4 SURROUND LFE H INPUT28

5 SURROUND LFE H INPUT29

6 SURROUND LFE H INPUT30

7 SURROUND LFE H INPUT31

8 SURROUND LFE H INPUT32

9 SURROUND LFE H INPUT33

10 SURROUND LFE H INPUT34

11 SURROUND LFE H INPUT35

12 SURROUND LFE H INPUT36

13 SURROUND LFE H INPUT37

14 SURROUND LFE H INPUT38

15 SURROUND LFE H INPUT39

16 SURROUND LFE H INPUT40

17 SURROUND LFE H INPUT41

18 SURROUND LFE H INPUT42

19 SURROUND LFE H INPUT43

20 SURROUND LFE H INPUT44

21 SURROUND LFE H INPUT45

22 SURROUND LFE H INPUT46

23 SURROUND LFE H INPUT47

24 SURROUND LFE H INPUT48

25 NO ASSIGN

26 NO ASSIGN

27 NO ASSIGN

28 NO ASSIGN

29 NO ASSIGN

30 NO ASSIGN

31 NO ASSIGN

32 NO ASSIGN

33 SURROUND LFE L INPUT25

34 SURROUND LFE L INPUT26

35 SURROUND LFE L INPUT27

36 SURROUND LFE L INPUT28

37 SURROUND LFE L INPUT29

38 SURROUND LFE L INPUT30

39 SURROUND LFE L INPUT31

40 SURROUND LFE L INPUT32

41 SURROUND LFE L INPUT33

42 SURROUND LFE L INPUT34

43 SURROUND LFE L INPUT35

44 SURROUND LFE L INPUT36

45 SURROUND LFE L INPUT37

46 SURROUND LFE L INPUT38

47 SURROUND LFE L INPUT39

48 SURROUND LFE L INPUT40

49 SURROUND LFE L INPUT41

50 SURROUND LFE L INPUT42

51 SURROUND LFE L INPUT43

52 SURROUND LFE L INPUT44

53 SURROUND LFE L INPUT45

54 SURROUND LFE L INPUT46

55 SURROUND LFE L INPUT47

56 SURROUND LFE L INPUT48

57 NO ASSIGN

58 NO ASSIGN

59 NO ASSIGN

60 NO ASSIGN

61 NO ASSIGN

62 NO ASSIGN

63 NO ASSIGN

64 SURROUND DIV F INPUT25

65 SURROUND DIV F INPUT26

66 SURROUND DIV F INPUT27

67 SURROUND DIV F INPUT28

68 SURROUND DIV F INPUT29

69 SURROUND DIV F INPUT30

70 SURROUND DIV F INPUT31

71 SURROUND DIV F INPUT32

72 SURROUND DIV F INPUT33

73 SURROUND DIV F INPUT34

74 SURROUND DIV F INPUT35

75 SURROUND DIV F INPUT36

76 SURROUND DIV F INPUT37

77 SURROUND DIV F INPUT38

78 SURROUND DIV F INPUT39

79 SURROUND DIV F INPUT40

80 SURROUND DIV F INPUT41

81 SURROUND DIV F INPUT42

82 SURROUND DIV F INPUT43

83 SURROUND DIV F INPUT44

84 SURROUND DIV F INPUT45

85 SURROUND DIV F INPUT46

86 SURROUND DIV F INPUT47

87 SURROUND DIV F INPUT48

88 NO ASSIGN

89 EQ ON INPUT25

90 EQ ON INPUT26

91 EQ ON INPUT27

92 EQ ON INPUT28

93 EQ ON INPUT29

94 EQ ON INPUT30

95 EQ ON INPUT31

102 EQ ON INPUT32

103 EQ ON INPUT33

104 EQ ON INPUT34

105 EQ ON INPUT35

106 EQ ON INPUT36

107 EQ ON INPUT37

108 EQ ON INPUT38

109 EQ ON INPUT39

110 EQ ON INPUT40

111 EQ ON INPUT41

112 EQ ON INPUT42

113 EQ ON INPUT43

114 EQ ON INPUT44

115 EQ ON INPUT45

116 EQ ON INPUT46

117 EQ ON INPUT47

118 EQ ON INPUT48

119 NO ASSIGN

# High Mid Low

358 Appendix C: MIDI

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

CHANNEL15

# High Mid Low

0 NO ASSIGN

1 SURROUND LR INPUT1

2 SURROUND LR INPUT2

3 SURROUND LR INPUT3

4 SURROUND LR INPUT4

5 SURROUND LR INPUT5

6 SURROUND LR INPUT6

7 SURROUND LR INPUT7

8 SURROUND LR INPUT8

9 SURROUND LR INPUT9

10 SURROUND LR INPUT10

11 SURROUND LR INPUT11

12 SURROUND LR INPUT12

13 SURROUND LR INPUT13

14 SURROUND LR INPUT14

15 SURROUND LR INPUT15

16 SURROUND LR INPUT16

17 SURROUND LR INPUT17

18 SURROUND LR INPUT18

19 SURROUND LR INPUT19

20 SURROUND LR INPUT20

21 SURROUND LR INPUT21

22 SURROUND LR INPUT22

23 SURROUND LR INPUT23

24 SURROUND LR INPUT24

25 NO ASSIGN

26 NO ASSIGN

27 NO ASSIGN

28 NO ASSIGN

29 NO ASSIGN

30 NO ASSIGN

31 NO ASSIGN

32 NO ASSIGN

33 SURROUND FR INPUT1

34 SURROUND FR INPUT2

35 SURROUND FR INPUT3

36 SURROUND FR INPUT4

37 SURROUND FR INPUT5

38 SURROUND FR INPUT6

39 SURROUND FR INPUT7

40 SURROUND FR INPUT8

41 SURROUND FR INPUT9

42 SURROUND FR INPUT10

43 SURROUND FR INPUT11

44 SURROUND FR INPUT12

45 SURROUND FR INPUT13

46 SURROUND FR INPUT14

47 SURROUND FR INPUT15

48 SURROUND FR INPUT16

49 SURROUND FR INPUT17

50 SURROUND FR INPUT18

51 SURROUND FR INPUT19

52 SURROUND FR INPUT20

53 SURROUND FR INPUT21

54 SURROUND FR INPUT22

55 SURROUND FR INPUT23

56 SURROUND FR INPUT24

57 NO ASSIGN

58 NO ASSIGN

59 NO ASSIGN

60 NO ASSIGN

61 NO ASSIGN

62 NO ASSIGN

63 NO ASSIGN

64 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT1

65 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT2

66 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT3

67 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT4

68 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT5

69 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT6

70 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT7

71 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT8

72 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT9

73 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT10

74 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT11

75 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT12

76 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT13

77 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT14

78 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT15

79 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT16

80 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT17

81 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT18

82 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT19

83 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT20

84 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT21

85 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT22

86 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT23

87 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT24

88 NO ASSIGN

89 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT1

90 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT2

91 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT3

92 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT4

93 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT5

94 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT6

95 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT7

102 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT8

103 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT9

104 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT10

105 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT11

106 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT12

107 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT13

108 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT14

109 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT15

110 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT16

111 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT17

112 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT18

113 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT19

114 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT20

115 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT21

116 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT22

117 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT23

118 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT24

119 NO ASSIGN

# High Mid Low

Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 359

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

CHANNEL16

# High Mid Low

0 NO ASSIGN

1 SURROUND LR INPUT25

2 SURROUND LR INPUT26

3 SURROUND LR INPUT27

4 SURROUND LR INPUT28

5 SURROUND LR INPUT29

6 SURROUND LR INPUT30

7 SURROUND LR INPUT31

8 SURROUND LR INPUT32

9 SURROUND LR INPUT33

10 SURROUND LR INPUT34

11 SURROUND LR INPUT35

12 SURROUND LR INPUT36

13 SURROUND LR INPUT37

14 SURROUND LR INPUT38

15 SURROUND LR INPUT39

16 SURROUND LR INPUT40

17 SURROUND LR INPUT41

18 SURROUND LR INPUT42

19 SURROUND LR INPUT43

20 SURROUND LR INPUT44

21 SURROUND LR INPUT45

22 SURROUND LR INPUT46

23 SURROUND LR INPUT47

24 SURROUND LR INPUT48

25 NO ASSIGN

26 NO ASSIGN

27 NO ASSIGN

28 NO ASSIGN

29 NO ASSIGN

30 NO ASSIGN

31 NO ASSIGN

32 NO ASSIGN

33 SURROUND FR INPUT25

34 SURROUND FR INPUT26

35 SURROUND FR INPUT27

36 SURROUND FR INPUT28

37 SURROUND FR INPUT29

38 SURROUND FR INPUT30

39 SURROUND FR INPUT31

40 SURROUND FR INPUT32

41 SURROUND FR INPUT33

42 SURROUND FR INPUT34

43 SURROUND FR INPUT35

44 SURROUND FR INPUT36

45 SURROUND FR INPUT37

46 SURROUND FR INPUT38

47 SURROUND FR INPUT39

48 SURROUND FR INPUT40

49 SURROUND FR INPUT41

50 SURROUND FR INPUT42

51 SURROUND FR INPUT43

52 SURROUND FR INPUT44

53 SURROUND FR INPUT45

54 SURROUND FR INPUT46

55 SURROUND FR INPUT47

56 SURROUND FR INPUT48

57 NO ASSIGN

58 NO ASSIGN

59 NO ASSIGN

60 NO ASSIGN

61 NO ASSIGN

62 NO ASSIGN

63 NO ASSIGN

64 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT25

65 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT26

66 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT27

67 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT28

68 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT29

69 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT30

70 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT31

71 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT32

72 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT33

73 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT34

74 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT35

75 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT36

76 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT37

77 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT38

78 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT39

79 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT40

80 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT41

81 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT42

82 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT43

83 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT44

84 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT45

85 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT46

86 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT47

87 SURROUND WIDTH INPUT48

88 NO ASSIGN

89 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT25

90 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT26

91 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT27

92 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT28

93 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT29

94 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT30

95 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT31

102 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT32

103 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT33

104 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT34

105 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT35

106 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT36

107 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT37

108 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT38

109 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT39

110 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT40

111 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT41

112 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT42

113 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT43

114 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT44

115 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT45

116 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT46

117 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT47

118 SURROUND DEPTH INPUT48

119 NO ASSIGN

# High Mid Low

360 Appendix C: MIDI

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

MIDI Data Format

1. DATA FORMAT

1.1 CHANNEL MESSAGE

1.2 SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGE

1.3 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE

1.4 EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE

1.4.1 Real Time System Exclusive

1.4.2 System Exclusive Message

1.4.2.1 Bulk Dump

The following data types of bulk dump are used on the DM1000.

1.4.2.2 PARAMTER CHANGE

The following data types of parameter change are used by the DM1000.

* ‘tx’ indicates that the data can be transmitted from the DM1000, and

‘rx’ indicates that the data can be received by the DM1000.

2. Format Details

2.1 NOTE OFF (8n)

Reception

If [OTHER ECHO] is ON, these message are echoed from MIDI OUT.

If the [Rx CH] matches, these messages are received and used to control effects.

2.2 NOTE ON (9n)

Reception

If [OTHER ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed from MIDI OUT.

If the [Rx CH] matches, these messages are received and used to control effects.

2.3 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn)

Reception

If [Control Change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed from MIDI OUT.

If [TABLE] is selected, these message are received if [Control Change Rx] is ON,

and will control parameters according to the [Control assign table] settings.

The parameters that can be set are defined in the Control Change Assign Pa-

rameter List.

If [NRPN] is selected, these messages are received if [Control Change Rx] is ON

and the [Rx CH] matches, and will control the parameter that is specified by the

four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and Data Entry control num-

ber (06h, 26h). Parameter settings are defined in the Control Change Assign Pa-

rameter List.

Command rx/tx function

8n NOTE OFF rx Control the internal effects

9n NOTE ON rx Control the internal effects

Bn CONTROL CHANGE rx/tx Control parameters

Cn PROGRAM CHANGE rx/tx Switch scene memories

Command rx/tx function

F1 MIDI TIME CODE QUARTER

FRAME

rx MTC

F2 SONG POSITION POINTER rx Used when TIME REFERENCE is

MIDI CLOCK.

Command rx/tx function

F8 TIMING CLOCK rx MIDI clock

FA START rx Start automix (from the beginning)

FB CONTINUE rx Start automix (from the middle)

FC STOP rx Stop automix

FE ACTIVE SENSING rx Check MIDI cable connections

FF RESET rx Clear running status

Command rx/tx function

F0 7F dd 06 … F7 MMC

COMMAND

tx MMC command

F0 7F dd 07 … F7 MMC RESPONSE rx MMC response

F0 7F dd 01 … F7 MIDI TIME CODE rx MTC full message

Command rx/tx function

F0 43 0n 7E … F7 BULK DUMP

DATA

rx/tx BULK DUMP DATA

F0 43 2n 7E … F7 BULK DUMP

REQUEST

rx/tx BULK DUMP REQUEST

Data name tx/rx function

‘m’ tx/rx Scene Memory & Request

(compressed data)

‘S’ tx/rx Setup Memory & Request

‘L’ tx/rx User deﬁned MIDI remote &

Request

‘V’ tx/rx User deﬁned keys & Request

‘U’ tx/rx User assignable layer & Request

‘C’ tx/rx Control change table & Request

‘P’ tx/rx Program change table & Request

‘Q’ tx/rx Equalizer library & Request

‘Y’ tx/rx Compressor library & Request

‘G’ tx/rx Gate library & Request

‘E’ tx/rx Effect library & Request

‘H’ tx/rx Channel library & Request

‘R’ tx/rx Input patch library & Request

‘O’ tx/rx Output patch library & Request

‘J’ tx/rx Bus to Stereo library & Request

‘K’ tx/rx Surround Monitor library & Request

‘a’ tx/rx Automix data & Request

(compressed data)

‘N’ tx/rx Plug-in Effect Card Data & Request

Command rx/tx function

F0 43 1n 3E 0C … F7 RARAMETER

CHANGE

rx/tx DM1000-speciﬁc parameter change

F0 43 3n 3E 0C … F7 PARAMETER

REQUEST

rx/tx DM1000-speciﬁc parameter change

F0 43 1n 3E 7F … F7 PARAMETER

CHANGE

rx/tx General purpose digital mixer

parameter change

F0 43 3n 3E 7F … F7 PARAMETER

REQUEST

rx/tx General purpose digital mixer

parameter request

Type (HEX) tx/rx function

1 (01) tx/rx Edit buffer

2 (02) tx/rx Patch data

3 (03) tx/rx Setup data

4 (04) tx/rx Backup data

16 (10) tx/rx Function (recall, store, title, clear)

17 (11) rx Function (pair, copy)

18 (12) rx Function (effect)

19 (13) tx/rx Sort table

20 (14) tx/rx Function (attribute, link)

32 (20) rx Key remote

33 (21) tx/rx Remote meter

34 (22) tx/rx Remote time counter

35 (23) tx/rx Automix status

STATUS 1000nnnn 8n

Note off message

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn

Note number

0vvvvvvv vv

Velocity(ignored)

STATUS 1001nnnn 9n

Note on message

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn

Note number

0vvvvvvv vv

Velocity(1-127:on, 0:off)

MIDI Data Format 361

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Transmission

If [TABLE] is selected, operating a parameter specified in the [Control assign ta-

ble] will cause these messages to be transmitted if [Control Change Tx] is ON.

The parameters that can be specified are defined in the Control Change Assign

Parameter List.

If [NRPN] is selected, operating a specified parameter will cause data to be

transmitted on the [Tx CH] if [Control Change Tx] is ON, using the four mes-

sages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and Data Entry control number (06h,

26h). Parameter settings are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter

List.

This data cannot be transmitted via control change to Studio Manager since

there is no guarantee that the contents of the tables will match. (Parameter

Change messages will always be used.)

If [TABLE] is selected

If [NRPN] is selected

*1) The second and subsequent STATUS need not be added during

transmission. Reception must be implemented so that reception oc-

curs whether or not STATUS is present.

2.4 PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn)

Reception

If [Program Change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed from MIDI

OUT.

If [Program Change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches, these messages will

be received. However if [OMNI] is ON, they will be received regardless of the

channel. When a message is received, a Scene Memory will be recalled according

to the settings of the [Program Change Table].

Transmission

If [Program Change TX] is ON, this message is transmitted according to the set-

tings of the [Program Change Table] on the [Tx CH] channel when a scene

memory is recalled.

If the recalled scene has been assigned to more than one program number, the

lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted. Transmission to Studio

Manager using Program Change messages will not be performed since there is

no guarantee that the contents of the tables will match. (Parameter Changes will

always be used.)

2.5 SONG POSITION POINTER (F2)

Reception

If this is received when the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI

CLOCK, the automix will move to the song position that was received.

2.6 TIMING CLOCK (F8)

Reception

If the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI CLOCK, this message is used

to synchronize automix. It is also used to control effects. This message is trans-

mitted 24 times per quarter note.

2.7 START (FA)

Reception

This message is received if the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI

CLOCK, and will start the automix. In actuality, automix will start when the

next TIMING CLOCK is received after receiving the START message.

2.8 CONTINUE (FB)

Reception

This message is received if the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI

CLOCK, and will cause automix to start from the current song position. In ac-

tuality, automix will start when the next TIMING CLOCK is received after re-

ceiving the CONTINUE message.

2.9 STOP (FC)

Reception

This message is received if the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI

CLOCK, and will cause automix to stop.

2.10 ACTIVE SENSING (FE)

Reception

Once this message has been received, the failure to receive any message for an

interval of 400 ms or longer will cause MIDI transmission to be initialized, such

as by clearing the Running Status.

2.11 SYSTEM RESET (FF)

Reception

When this message is received, MIDI communications will be cleared, e.g., by

clearing the Running Status.

2.12 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE (F0)

2.12.1 MIDI MACHINE CONTROL (MMC)

These messages are transmitted when the Machine Control section of the

DM1000 is operated.

2.12.2 BULK DUMP

This message sends or receives the contents of various memories stored within

the DM1000.

The basic format is as follows.

For DUMP DATA

F0 43 0n 7E cc cc <Model ID> tt mm mm [Data …] cs F7

For DUMP REQUEST

F0 43 2n 7E <Model ID> tt mm mm F7

A unique header (Model ID) is used to determine whether the device is a

DM1000.

CHECK SUM is obtained by adding the bytes that follow BYTE COUNT

(LOW) and end before CHECK SUM, taking the binary compliment of this

sum, and then setting bit 7 to 0.

CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F

Reception

This message is received if [Bulk RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device

number included in the SUB STATUS.

When a bulk dump is received, it is immediately written into the specified

memory.

When a bulk dump request is received, a bulk dump is immediately transmit-

ted.

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn

Control number (0-95, 102-119)

0vvvvvvv vv

Control Value (0-127)

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change

DATA 01100010 62

NRPN LSB

0vvvvvvv vv

LSB of parameter number

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change *1

DATA 01100011 63

NRPN MSB

0vvvvvvv vv

MSB of parameter number

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change *1

DATA 00000110 06

MSB of data entry

0vvvvvvv vv

MSB of parameter data

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change *1

DATA 00100110 26

LSB of data entry

0vvvvvvv vv

LSB of parameter data

STATUS 1100nnnn Cn

Program change

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn

Program number (0-127)

STATUS 11110010 F2

Song position pointer

DATA 0vvvvvvv vv

Song position LSB

0vvvvvvv vv

Song position MSB

STATUS 11111000 F8

Timing clock

STATUS 11111010 FA

Start

STATUS 11111011 FB

Continue

STATUS 11111100 FC

Stop

STATUS 11111110 FE

Active sensing

STATUS 11111111 FF

System reset

Device Number

cc cc

DATA COUNT (the number of bytes that

follow this, ending before the checksum)

4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31

Model ID

DATA TYPE

mm mm

DATA NUMBER

CHECK SUM

362 Appendix C: MIDI

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Transmission

This message is transmitted on the [Tx CH] by key operations in the [MI-

DI]-[BULK DUMP] screen.

A bulk dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] in response to a bulk dump request.

The data area is handled by converting seven words of 8-bit data into eight

words of 7-bit data.

Conversion from actual data into bulk data

d[0~6]: actual data

b[0~7]: bulk data

b[0] = 0;

for( I=0; I<7; I++){

if( d[I]&0x80){

b[0] |= 1<<(6-I);

}

b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F;

}

Restoration from bulk data into actual data

d[0~6]: actual data

b[0~7]: bulk data

for( I=0; I<7; I++){

b[0] <<= 1;

d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]);

}

2.12.2.1 Scene memory bulk dump format (compress)

The DM1000 can transmit and receive scene memories in compressed form.

2.12.2.2 Scene memory bulk dump request format

(compress)

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the scene number that

is being requested. If this is 256, the data of the Edit Buffer will be bulk-dumped.

If this is 8192, the data of the Undo Buffer will be bulk-dumped.

2.12.2.3 Setup memory bulk dump format

Of the setup memory of the DM1000, this bulk-dumps data other than the User

Defined MIDI Remote, User Defined Keys, User Assignable Layer, Control

Change Table, and Program Change Table.

2.12.2.4 Setup memory bulk dump request format

2.12.2.5 User Defeined MIDI Remote bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.

Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases)

change if the same bank is being used.

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01101101 6D

‘m’

0mmmmmmm mh

m=0-99, 256, 8192(Scene0-99, EDIT

BUFFER, UNDO)

0mmmmmmm ml

Receive is effective 1-99, 256, 8192

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

Scene data of block[bb]

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01101101 6D

‘m’

0mmmmmmm mh

m=0-99, 256, 8192(Scene0-99, EDIT

BUFFER, UNDO)

0mmmmmmm ml

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01010011 53

‘S’

00000010 02

00000000 00

No.256 = Current

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

Setup data of block[bb]

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01010011 53

‘S’

00000010 02

00000000 00

No.256 = Current

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

MIDI Data Format 363

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

2.12.2.6 User Defeined MIDI Remote bulk dump request

format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.

2.12.2.7 User Deﬁned Keys bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.

Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases)

change if the same bank is being used.

2.12.2.8 User Deﬁned Keys bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.

2.12.2.9 User Assignable Layer bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.

Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases)

change if the same bank is being used.

2.12.2.10 User Assignable Layer bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.

DATA NAME 01001100 4C

‘L’

00000000 00

0bbbbbbb bb

b=0-3(bank no.1-4)

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

User deﬁne layer data of block[bb]

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01001100 4C

‘L’

00000000 00

0bbbbbbb bb

b=0-3(bank no.1-4)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01010110 56

‘V’

00000000 00

0bbbbbbb bb

b=0-7(bank no.A-H)

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

User deﬁne key data of block[bb]

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01010110 56

‘V’

00000000 00

0bbbbbbb bb

b=0-7(bank no.A-H)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01010101 55

‘U’

00000000 00

0bbbbbbb bb

b=0-3(bank no.1-4)

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

User assignable layer data of block[bb]

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01010101 55

‘U’

00000000 00

0bbbbbbb bb

b=0-3(bank no.1-4)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

364 Appendix C: MIDI

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

2.12.2.11 Control change table bulk dump format

2.12.2.12 Control change table bulk dump request format

2.12.2.13 Program change table bulk dump format

2.12.2.14 Program change table bulk dump request format

2.12.2.15 Equalizer library bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.

0:Library no.1 – 199:Library no.200,

256:CH1 – 303:CH48, 384:BUS1 – 391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 – 519:AUX8, 768:STE-

REO, 8192:UNDO

256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer.

For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (40-199, 256-)

2.12.2.16 Equalizer library bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. (See

above)

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01000011 43

‘C’

00000010 02

00000000 00

No.256 = Current

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

Control change table data of block[bb]

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01000011 43

‘C’

00000010 02

00000000 00

No.256 = Current

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01010000 50

‘P’

00000010 02

00000000 00

No.256 = Current

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

Program change table data of block[bb]

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01010000 50

‘P’

00000010 02

00000000 00

No.256 = Current

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01010001 51

‘Q’

0mmmmmmm mh

0-199(EQ Library no.1-200),

0mmmmmmm ml

256-(Channel current data)

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

EQ Library data of block[bb]

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01010001 51

‘Q’

0mmmmmmm mh

0-199(EQ Library no.1-200),

0mmmmmmm ml

256-(Channel current data)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

MIDI Data Format 365

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

2.12.2.17 Compressor library bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.

0:Library no.1 – 127:Library no.128,

256:CH1 – 303:CH48, 384:BUS1 – 391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 – 519:AUX8, 768:STE-

REO, 8192:UNDO

256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer.

For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (36-127, 256-)

2.12.2.18 Compressor library bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.

(See above)

2.12.2.19 Gate library bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.

0:Library no.1 – 127:Library no.128, 256:CH1 – 303:CH48, 8192:UNDO

256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer.

For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (4-127, 256-)

2.12.2.20 Gate library bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.

(See above)

2.12.2.21 Effect library bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.

0:Library no.1 – 127:Library no.128, 256:EFFECT1 – 259:EFFECT4, 8192:UN-

256-259 are the data for the corresponding area of the edit buffer.

For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (xx-127, 256-259,

8192) (xx varies with the firmware version.)

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01011001 59

‘Y’

0mmmmmmm mh

0-127(COMP Library no.1-128),

0mmmmmmm ml

256-(Channel current data)

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

COMP Library data of block[bb]

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01011001 59

‘Y’

0mmmmmmm mh

0-127(COMP Library no.1-128),

0mmmmmmm ml

256-(Channel current data)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01000111 47

‘G’

0mmmmmmm mh

0-127(GATE Library no.1-128),

0mmmmmmm ml

256-351(Channel current data)

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

GATE Library data of block[bb]

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01000111 47

‘G’

0mmmmmmm mh

0-127(GATE Library no.1-128),

0mmmmmmm ml

256-351(Channel current data)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01000101 45

‘E’

0mmmmmmm mh

0-127(Effect Library no.1-128),

0mmmmmmm ml

256-259(Effect1-4 current)

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

Effect Library data of block[bb]

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

366 Appendix C: MIDI

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

2.12.2.22 Effect library bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.

(See above)

2.12.2.23 Channel library bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.

0:Library no.0 – 128:Library no.128,

256:CH1 – 303:CH48, 384:BUS1 – 391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 – 519:AUX8, 768:STE-

REO, 8192:UNDO

256 and following are the data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer.

For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (2-128, 256-)

2.12.2.24 Channel library bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.

(See above)

2.12.2.25 Input patch library bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.

0:Library no.0 – 32:Library no.32, 256:current input patch data, 8192:UNDO

For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256, 8192)

2.12.2.26 Input patch library bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.

(See above)

2.12.2.27 Output patch library bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.

0:Library no.0 – 32:Library no.32, 256:current output patch data, 8192:UNDO

For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256)

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01000101 45

‘E’

0mmmmmmm mh

0-127(Effect Library no.1-128),

0mmmmmmm ml

256-259(Effect1-4 current)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01001000 48

‘H’

0mmmmmmm mh

0-128(Channel Library no.0-128),

0mmmmmmm ml

256-(Current data)

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

Channel Library data of block[bb]

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01001000 48

‘H’

0mmmmmmm mh

0-128(Channel Library no.0-128),

0mmmmmmm ml

256-(Current data)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01010010 52

‘R’

0mmmmmmm mh

0-32(Input patch Library no.0-32),

0mmmmmmm ml

256(Current data)

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

Input patch Library data of block[bb]

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01010010 52

‘R’

0mmmmmmm mh

0-32(Input patch Library no.0-32),

0mmmmmmm ml

256(Current data)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01001111 4F

‘O’

MIDI Data Format 367

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

2.12.2.28 Output patch library bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.

(See above)

2.12.2.29 Bus to Stereo library bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.

0:Library no.0 – 32:Library no.32, 256:current data, 8192:UNDO

For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256, 8192)

2.12.2.30 Bus to Stereo library bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.

(See above)

2.12.2.31 Surround Monitor library bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.

0:Library no.0 – 32:Library no.32, 256:current data, 8192:UNDO

For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256, 8192)

2.12.2.32 Surround Monitor library bulk dump request

format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.

(See above)

0mmmmmmm mh

0-32(Output patch Library no.0-32),

0mmmmmmm ml

256(Current data)

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

Output patch Library data of block[bb]

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01001111 4F

‘O’

0mmmmmmm mh

0-32(Output patch Library no.0-32),

0mmmmmmm ml

256(Current data)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01001010 4A

‘J’

0mmmmmmm mh

0-32(Bus to stereo Library no.0-32),

0mmmmmmm ml

256(Current data)

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

Bus to stereo Library data of block[bb]

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01001010 4A

‘J’

0mmmmmmm mh

0-32(Bus to stereo Library no.0-32),

0mmmmmmm ml

256(Current data)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01001011 4B

‘K’

0mmmmmmm mh

0-32(Surround Monitor Library no.0-32),

0mmmmmmm ml

256(Current data)

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

Surround Monitor Library data of block[bb]

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01001011 4B

‘K’

0mmmmmmm mh

0-32(Surround Monitor Library no.0-32),

0mmmmmmm ml

256(Current data)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

368 Appendix C: MIDI

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

2.12.2.33 Automix bulk dump format

The second byte of the DATA NAME indicates the library number.

0:Library no.1 – 15:Library no.16, 256:current automix data

2.12.2.34 Automix bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.

(See above)

2.12.2.35 Plug-in effect card bulk dump format

The second byte of the DATA NAME indicates the slot number.

0:SLOT 1 – 1:SLOT 2

The data is not received if the Developer ID and Product ID are different than

the card that is installed in the slot.

The data is not transmitted if a valid plug-in effect card is not installed.

2.12.2.36 Plug-in effect card bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the slot number. (See

above)

2.12.3 PARAMETER CHANGE

2.12.3.1 Basic behavior

Reception

If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.

If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device Number

included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. A specific parameter

is controlled when a Parameter Change is received. When a Parameter Request

is received, the current value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a

Parameter Change with the Device Number set to [Rx CH].

Transmission

If [Parameter change TX] is ON and you operate a parameter for which Control

Change transmission is not enabled, a parameter change will be transmitted

with [Tx CH] as the Device Number.

As a response to a Parameter Request, a parameter change will be transmitted

with [Rx CH] as the Device Number.

2.12.3.1.1 Parameter change basic format

*) For parameters with a data size of 2 or more, data for that size will be

transmitted.

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01100001 61

‘a’

0mmmmmmm mh

0-15(Automix no.1-16), 256(Current data)

0mmmmmmm ml

BLOCK INFO. 0bbbbbbb bh

current block number(0-total block number)

0bbbbbbb bl

0ttttttt th

total block number(minimum number is 0)

0ttttttt tl

DATA 0ddddddd ds

Automix memory data of block[bb]

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01100001 61

‘a’

0mmmmmmm mh

0-15(Automix no.1-16), 256(Current data)

0mmmmmmm ml

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01001110 4E

‘N’

0mmmmmmm mh

m=0-1(SLOT 1-2)

0mmmmmmm ml

BLOCK INFO. 0bbbbbbb bh

current block number(0-total block number)

0bbbbbbb bl

0ttttttt th

total block number(minimum number is 0)

0ttttttt tl

0000iiii 0i

Developer id (High)

0000iiii 0i

Developer id (Low)

0000jjjj 0j

Product id (High)

0000jjjj 0j

Product id (Low)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

Plug-in Effect card memory data of block[bb]

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

‘L’

01001101 4D

‘M’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00100000 20

‘ ’

00111000 38

‘8’

01000011 43

‘C’

00111001 39

‘9’

00110001 31

‘1’

DATA NAME 01001110 4E

‘N’

0mmmmmmm mh

m=0-1(SLOT 1-2)

0mmmmmmm ml

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00001100 0C

DM1000

ADDRESS 0ttttttt tt

Data type

0eeeeeee ee

Element no.

(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)

0ppppppp pp

Parameter no.

0ccccccc cc

Channel no.

DATA *) 0ddddddd dd

data

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

MIDI Data Format 369

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

2.12.3.1.2 Parameter Change basic format (Universal

format)

*) For parameters with a data size of 2 or more, data for that size will be

transmitted.

2.12.3.1.3 Parameter request basic format

2.12.3.1.4 Parameter request basic format (Universal

format)

2.12.3.1.5 Parameter Address

Consult your dealer for parameter address details.

2.12.3.2 Parameter change (Edit buffer)

2.12.3.3 Parameter request (Edit buffer)

2.12.3.4 Parameter change (Patch data)

2.12.3.5 Parameter request (Patch data)

2.12.3.6 Parameter change (Setup memory)

2.12.3.7 Parameter request (Setup memory)

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 01111111 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 0ttttttt tt

Data type

0eeeeeee ee

Element no.

(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)

0ppppppp pp

Parameter no.

0ccccccc cc

Channel no.

DATA *) 0ddddddd dd

data

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00001100 0C

DM1000

ADDRESS 0ttttttt tt

Data type

0eeeeeee ee

Element no.

(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)

0ppppppp pp

Parameter no.

0ccccccc cc

Channel no.

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 01111111 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 0ttttttt tt

Data type

0eeeeeee ee

Element no.

(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)

0ppppppp pp

Parameter no.

0ccccccc cc

Channel no.

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 01111111 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 00000001 01

Edit Buffer

0eeeeeee ee

Element no.

(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)

0ppppppp pp

Parameter no.

0ccccccc cc

Channel no.

DATA 0ddddddd dd

data

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 01111111 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 00000001 01

Edit Buffer

0eeeeeee ee

Element no.

(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)

0ppppppp pp

Parameter no.

0ccccccc cc

Channel no.

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00001100 0C

DM1000

ADDRESS 00000010 02

Patch data

0eeeeeee ee

Element no.

(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)

0ppppppp pp

Parameter no.

0ccccccc cc

Channel no.

DATA 0ddddddd dd

data

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00001100 0C

DM1000

ADDRESS 00000010 02

Patch data

0eeeeeee ee

Element no.

(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)

0ppppppp pp

Parameter no.

0ccccccc cc

Channel no.

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00001100 0C

DM1000

ADDRESS 00000011 03

Setup data

0eeeeeee ee

Element no.

(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)

0ppppppp pp

Parameter no.

0ccccccc cc

Channel no.

DATA 0ddddddd dd

data

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00001100 0C

DM1000

ADDRESS 00000011 03

Setup data

0eeeeeee ee

Element no.

(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)

0ppppppp pp

Parameter no.

0ccccccc cc

Channel no.

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

370 Appendix C: MIDI

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

2.12.3.8 Parameter change (Backup memory)

2.12.3.9 Parameter request (Backup memory)

2.12.3.10 Parameter change (Function call: Library store /

recall)

Reception

When this is received, the specified memory/library will be stored/recalled. If

this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link, the operation will be ex-

ecuted, and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a Parameter Re-

sponse.

Transmission

If [Parameter change Tx] is ON, and you store or recall a memory/library for

which Program Change transmission is not valid, this message will be transmit-

ted with the Device Number set to the [Tx CH].

*1) 0:CH1 – 47:CH48, 128:BUS1 – 135:BUS8, 256:AUX1 – 263:AUX8,

512:STEREO

Use 256 if the recall destination or store source is a single data item.

Effect is 0:Effect 1–3:Effect 4

If the store destination is 16383 (0x3FFF), this indicates that the li-

brary data has been changed by a external cause (such as bulk re-

ception)

(only transmitted by the DM1000)

*2) Varies with the firmware version.

2.12.3.11 Parameter change (Function call: title)

Reception

When this is received, the title of the specified memory/library will be changed.

If this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link, the operation will be

executed, and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a parameter re-

sponse.

Transmission

In response to a request, this is transmitted with the device number set to the

[Tx CH].

When the title is changed on the DM1000, this message will be transmitted with

the device number set to [Tx CH].

*1) Varies with the firmware version.

2.12.3.12 Parameter request (Function call: title)

Reception

When this is received, a parameter change will be transmitted with the device

number set to [Rx CH].

Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers.

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00001100 0C

DM1000

ADDRESS 00000100 04

Backup data

0eeeeeee ee

Element no.

(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)

0ppppppp pp

Parameter no.

0ccccccc cc

Channel no.

DATA 0ddddddd dd

data

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00001100 0C

DM1000

ADDRESS 00000100 04

Backup data

0eeeeeee ee

Element no.

(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)

0ppppppp pp

Parameter no.

0ccccccc cc

Channel no.

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 01111111 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 00010000 10

Function call

00ffffff ff

function

0mmmmmmm mh

number High

0mmmmmmm ml

number Low

DATA 0ccccccc ch

channel High

0ccccccc cl

channel Low

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

function number channel*1) tx/rx

SCENE RECALL 0x00 0-99, 8192 256 tx/rx

EQ LIB RECALL 0x01 1-200, 8192 0-513 tx/rx

GATE LIB RECALL 0x02 1-128, 8192 0-95 tx/rx

COMP LIB RECALL 0x03 1-128, 8192 0-513 tx/rx

EFF LIB RECALL 0x04 1-128, 8192 0-3 tx/rx

CHANNEL LIB RECALL 0x06 0-128, 8192 0-513 tx/rx

INPATCH LIB RECALL 0x07 0-32, 8192 256 tx/rx

OUTPATCH LIB RECALL 0x08 0-32, 8192 256 tx/rx

Bus to Stereo LIB RECALL 0x09 0-32, 8192 256 tx/rx

Surround Monitor LIB RECALL 0x0A 0-32, 8192 256 tx/rx

AUTOMIX LIB RECALL 0x0B 1-16 256 tx/rx

SCENE STORE 0x20 1-99 256, 16383 tx/rx

EQ LIB STORE 0x21 41-200 0-513, 16383 tx/rx

GATE LIB STORE 0x22 5-128 0-47, 16383 tx/rx

COMP LIB STORE 0x23 37-128 0-513, 16383 tx/rx

EFF LIB STORE 0x24 xx(*2)-128 0-3, 16383 tx/rx

CHANNEL LIB STORE 0x26 1-128 0-513, 16383 tx/rx

INPATCH LIB STORE 0x27 1-32 256, 16383 tx/rx

OUTPATCH LIB STORE 0x28 1-32 256, 16383 tx/rx

Bus to Stereo LIB STORE 0x29 1-32 256, 16383 tx/rx

Surround Monitor LIB STORE 0x2A 1-32 256, 16383 tx/rx

AUTOMIX LIB STORE 0x2B 1-16 256, 16383 tx/rx

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 01111111 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 00010000 10

Function call

0100ffff 4f

title

0mmmmmmm mh

number High

0mmmmmmm ml

number Low

DATA 0ddddddd dd

title 1

0ddddddd dd

title x(depend on the library)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

function number size

SCENE LIB TITLE 0x40 0-99,256(0:response only) 16

EQ LIB TITLE 0x41 1-200(1-40:response only) 16

GATE LIB TITLE 0x42 1-128(1-4:response only) 16

COMP LIB TITLE 0x43 1-128(1-36:response only) 16

EFF LIB TITLE 0x44 1-128(1-xx(*1):response only) 16

CHANNEL LIB TITLE 0x46 0-128(0:response only) 16

INPATCH LIB TITLE 0x47 0-32(0:response only) 16

OUTPATCH LIB TITLE 0x48 0-32(0:response only) 16

Bus to Stereo LIB TITLE 0x49 0-32(0:response only) 16

Surround Monitor LIB TITLE 0x4A 0-32(0:response only) 16

AUTOMIX LIB TITLE 0x4B 1-16 16

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 01111111 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 00010000 10

Function call

0100ffff 4f

title

0mmmmmmm mh

number High

0mmmmmmm ml

number Low

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

function number channel*1) tx/rx

MIDI Data Format 371

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

2.12.3.13 Parameter change (Function call: Scene/Library

Clear)

Reception

When this is received, the specified memory/library will be cleared. If this is re-

ceived from Studio Manager or Cascade Link, the operation will be executed,

and then the result of execution will be transmitted as the following parameter

response.

Transmission

When a memory or library is cleared on the DM1000, this message will be trans-

mitted with the device number set to [Tx CH].

*1) Varies with the firmware version.

2.12.3.14 Parameter change (Function call: attribute)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the

device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter

change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, the attribute of the specified memory/library will be

changed.

Transmission

In response to a request, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the

[Rx CH].

If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted without

change.

2.12.3.15 Parameter request (Function call: attribute)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the

device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter

change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the

[Rx CH].

Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers.

2.12.3.16 Parameter change (Function call: link)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the

device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter

change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, the patch link data of the specified scene will be modified.

Transmission

In response to a request, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the

[Rx CH].

If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted without

change.

2.12.3.17 Parameter request (Function call: link)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the

device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter

change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the

[Rx CH].

Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers.

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 01111111 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 00010000 10

Function call

0110ffff 6f

clear function

0mmmmmmm mh

number High

0mmmmmmm ml

number Low

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

function number

SCENE LIB CLEAR 0x60 1-99

EQ LIB CLEAR 0x61 41-200

GATE LIB CLEAR 0x62 5-128

COMP LIB CLEAR 0x63 37-128

EFF LIB CLEAR 0x64 41-200

CHANNEL LIB CLEAR 0x66 1-128

INPATCH LIB CLEAR 0x67 1-32

OUTPATCH LIB CLEAR 0x68 1-32

Bus to Stereo LIB CLEAR 0x69 1-32

Surround Monitor LIB CLEAR 0x6A 1-32

AUTOMIX LIB CLEAR 0x6B 1-16

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 01111111 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 00010100 14

Function call

0000ffff 0f

attribute

0mmmmmmm mh

number High

0mmmmmmm ml

number Low

DATA 0ttttttt th

attribute(protect:0x0001, normal:0x0000)

0ttttttt tl

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

function number

SCENE LIB ATTRIBUTE 0x00 0-99(0:response only)

AUTOMIX LIB ATTRIBUTE 0x0B 1-16

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 01111111 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 00010100 14

Function call

0000ffff 0f

attribute

0mmmmmmm mh

number High

0mmmmmmm ml

number Low

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 01111111 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 00010100 14

Function call

0010ffff 2f

link

0mmmmmmm mh

number High

0mmmmmmm ml

number Low

DATA 0iiiiiii ih

inpatch

0iiiiiii il

0ooooooo oh

outpatch

0ooooooo ol

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

function number

SCENE LIB LINK 0x20 0-99(0:response only)

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 01111111 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 00010100 14

Function call

0010ffff 2f

link

0mmmmmmm mh

number High

0mmmmmmm ml

number Low

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

372 Appendix C: MIDI

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

2.12.3.18 Parameter change (Function call: pair, copy)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the

device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter

change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, pairing will be enabled/disabled for the specified channel.

*1) 0:CH1 – 47:CH48, 128:BUS1 – 135:BUS8, 256:AUX1 – 263:AUX8,

512:STEREO

Effect is 0:Effect 1–3:Effect 4

• In the case of PAIR, you must specify channels for which pairing is pos-

sible.

• In the case of PAIR ON with COPY, you must specify Source Channel

as the copy source, and Destination Channel as the copy destination.

2.12.3.19 Parameter change (Function call Event: Effect )

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the

device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, the corresponding effect’s function activates (depending

on the effect type).

• This does not activate when the effect type is different.

2.12.3.20 Parameter change (Sort Table)

When scene memory sort is executed on the DM1000, the memory sort table

will be transmitted to Studio Manager.

Studio Manager will sort the memories according to this data.

If Studio Manager performs a scene memory sort, it will transmit this data to

the DM1000.

8-7 conversion is performed on the data area in the same way as for bulk.

2.12.3.21 Parameter request (Sort Table)

When the DM1000 receives this data, it will transmit Sort Table Data.

2.12.3.22 Parameter change (Key remote)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the

device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, the same processing that is executed when the key speci-

fied by Address is pressed (released).

Transmission

If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without

change.

2.12.3.23 Parameter change (Remote Meter)

When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote meter, the

specified meter information is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds. When

you want to transmit meter information continuously, a Request must be trans-

mitted continuously within every 10 seconds.

Reception

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

Transmission

When transmission has been enabled by a Request, the parameter specified by

Address will be transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel at 50 msec intervals for a

duration of 10 seconds.

Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if the

PORT setting is changed.

If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without

change.

* The meter data can be either the unadjusted DECAY value of the DSP,

or the table-converted value. The interpretation of the data will de-

pend on the parameter.

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 01111111 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 00010001 11

Function call Pair

0000ffff 0f

function

0sssssss sh

Source channel H

0sssssss sl

Source channel L

DATA 0ddddddd dh

Destination channel H

0ddddddd dl

Destination channel L

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

function channel

PAIR ON with COPY 0x00 *1)

PAIR ON with RESET BOTH 0x01 *1)

PAIR OFF 0x02 *1)

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 01111111 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 00010010 12

Function call Effect Event

0000ffff 0f

function

00000000 00

0ppppppp pp

Release:0, Press:1

DATA 00000000 00

0eeeeeee ee

Effect number (0:Effect1 - 3:Effect4)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

function channel

Freeze Play button 0x00 0:Effect1-3:Effect4

Freeze Record button 0x01 0:Effect1-3:Effect4

Auto Pan 5.1 Trigger Button 0x02 0:Effect1-3:Effect4

Auto Pan 5.1 Reset Button 0x03 0:Effect1-3:Effect4

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00001100 0C

DM1000

ADDRESS 00010011 13

Library sort table

0000ffff 0f

Library type

DATA 0ddddddd ds

Data

0ddddddd de

Data

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00001100 0C

DM1000

ADDRESS 00010011 13

Library sort table

0000ffff 0f

Library type

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00001100 0C

DM1000

ADDRESS 00100000 20

Key remote

0kkkkkkk kk

Key address H

0kkkkkkk kk

Key address M

0kkkkkkk kk

Key address L

DATA 0ppppppp pp

Release:0, Press:1

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00001100 0C

DM1000

ADDRESS 00100001 21

Remote meter

0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS UL

0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS LU

0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS LL

DATA 0ddddddd dd

Data1 H

0ddddddd dd

Data1 L

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

MIDI Data Format 373

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

2.12.3.24 Parameter request (Remote Meter)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the

device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter

change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, data of the specified address is transmitted on the [Rx

CH] at intervals of 50 msec as a rule (although this may not be the case if the

port is being used by other communication), for a period of 10 seconds.

If Address UL= 0x7F is received, transmission of all meter data will be halted

immediately. (disable)

Transmission

If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without

change.

2.12.3.25 Parameter change (Remote Time Counter)

When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote Time Counter,

the Time Counter data is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds. When you

want to transmit Counter information continuously, a Request must be trans-

mitted within every 10 seconds.

Reception

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

Transmission

When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request, the Time Counter infor-

mation is transmitted on [RxCH] channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds.

Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if the

PORT setting is changed.

If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without

change.

2.12.3.26 Parameter request (Remote Time Counter)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the

device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter

change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, the Time Counter information is transmitted on the [Rx

CH] channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds.

When the second byte of Address is received on 0x7F, data transmission will be

halted immediately. (disable)

Transmission

If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without

change.

2.12.3.27 Parameter change (Automix Status)

When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Automix status, the Au-

tomix Status data is transmitted every second for 10 seconds. When you want

to transmit the Automix Status information continuously, the Request must be

transmitted continuously minimum within 10 seconds interval. The data is

transmitted continuously while the transmission is enabled, even when the Au-

tomix Status on the DM1000 has been changed.

Reception

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

Transmission

When the transmission is set to enable by receiving a Request. The Automix Sta-

tus data is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel every second for 10 seconds. The

data is transmitted continuously while the transmission is enabled, even when

the Automix Status on the DM1000 has been changed.

Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if the

PORT setting is changed.

If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without

change.

2.12.3.28 Parameter request (Automix Status)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the

device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When the data is received, the Automix Status data is transmitted on the [Rx

CH] every second for 10 seconds.

When the second byte of Address is received on 0x7F, data transmission will be

halted immediately (disable).

Transmission

If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without

change.

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00001100 0C

DM1000

ADDRESS 00100001 21

Remote meter

0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS UL

0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS LU

0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS LL

0ccccccc ch

Count H

0ccccccc cl

Count L

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00001100 0C

DM1000

ADDRESS 00100010 22

Remote Time counter

0000tttt 0t

0:Time code, 1:Measure.Beat.Clock

0ddddddd dd

Hour / Measure H

0ddddddd dd

Minute / Measure L

DATA 0ddddddd dd

Second / Beat

0ddddddd dd

Frame / Clock

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00001100 0C

DM1000

ADDRESS 00100010 22

Remote Time counter

0ddddddd dd

0:Transmission request,

0x7F:Transmission stop request

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00001100 0C

DM1000

ADDRESS 00100011 23

Automix status

00000000 00

0000dddd 0d

Automix status H

0000dddd 0d

Automix status L

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00001100 0C

DM1000

ADDRESS 00100011 23

Automix status

0ddddddd dd

0:Transmission request,

0x7F:Transmission stop request

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

374 Appendix D: Options

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix D: About Optional Product

MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge

Installing the Meter Bridge

1 Attach the brackets to the meter bridge.

Align the holes on the lower part of the meter bridge with the holes on the upper part of the

brackets (as shown in the illustration below), then use four 8 mm screws (

1) included in

the MB1000 package to afﬁx the brackets to the meter bridge.

2 Install the meter bridge to the DM1000 following the steps below:

a) Insert two of four 12 mm screws (

2-2) included in the MB1000 package into the lower

holes (

2-2), then tighten them with your ﬁngers. Leave the screws projecting by about

4 mm.

b) Align these screws with the notches on the included meter angles, then align the holes

on the upper part of the meter angles with the holes on the upper part of the DM1000

(

2-1).

c) Insert the other two 12 mm screws (

2-1) into the upper holes (2-1), then tighten

them securely.

d) Tighten the screws (

2-2) that were ﬁnger-tightened in Step a) securely to ﬁrmly attach

the meter bridge to the DM1000.

3 Connect the meter bridge cable to the DM1000’s METER connector.

WORD CLOCK

INOUT

CONTROL

INOUT

TO HOST

USB

REMOTE MIDI

SMPTE IN

COAXIAL AES/EBUCOAXIALAES/EBU

2TR IN

DIGITAL

METER

SLOT

INPUT

OMNI

23456781101112131415 9

23456781101112 9

213

AC IN

POWER

OFF

2-1

2-2

2-1

2-2

2-1

2-2

2-1

2-2

Meter angle

Upper

Lower

MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge 375

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Meter Bridge Controls

A Channel indicators

These indicators display the channels for which the lev-

els are currently displayed (Input Channels 1-16, 17-32,

33-48, Aux Outs 1-8, Bus Outs 1-8).

B INPUT METERING POSITION indicators

These indicators display the current metering position

speciﬁed for the Input Channels.

C OUTPUT METERING POSITION indicators

These indicators display the current metering position

speciﬁed for the Output Channels.

D [PEAK HOLD] button

This button turns the Peak Hold function on or off.

When the Peak Hold function is turned on, the button

indicator lights up. This button works in unison with

the PEAK HOLD button displayed on the Meter display.

E TIME CODE display

This display indicates the timecode or MIDI clock value

the DM1000 is receiving or generating.

F [1-16] / [17-32] / [33-48] / [REMOTE 1] /

[REMOTE 2] / [MASTER] buttons

These buttons select the layers of the channel meters dis-

played on the meter bridge. The button indicator of the

currently-selected layer lights up.

If you turn on the Meter Follow Layer check box on the

Setup | Prefer1 page (see page 266), the layer selection

on the meter bridge follows the layer selection on the

DM1000.

G Level meters

These 12-segment LED level meters display the channel

levels of the selected layer.

H Bus meters

These 12-segment LED meters display the signal levels

of Bus Outs 1-8.

1-16

MASTER

17-32

33-48

REMOTE 1

REMOTE 2

PEAK METER BRIDGE MB1000 FOR

TIME CODE

BEAT

CLOCK

MEASURE

HM S F

AUX 8AUX 7AUX 6AUX 5AUX 4AUX 3AUX 2AUX 1 BUS 8BUS 7BUS 6BUS 5BUS 4BUS 3BUS 2BUS 1 BUS 8BUS 7BUS 6BUS 5BUS 4BUS 3BUS 2BUS 1

OVER

-12

-15

-18

-24

-30

-36

-48

-3

-6

-9

OVER

-12

-15

-18

-24

-30

-36

-48

-3

-6

-9

OVER

-12

-15

-18

-24

-30

-36

-48

-3

-6

-9

OVER

-12

-15

-18

-24

-30

-36

-48

-3

-6

-9

OVER

-12

-15

-18

-24

-30

-36

-48

-3

-6

-9

INPUT METERING POSITION OUTPUT METERING POSITION

PRE EQ PRE FADER POST FADERPRE EQ PRE FADER POST FADER

PEAK HOLD

376 Appendix D: Options

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Rack Mounting the MB1000 Using Rack Angle Brackets

You can rack mount the MB1000 meter bridge using the rack angle brackets that came with

the meter bridge.

1 Detach the MB1000 from the DM1000. Also, remove the SP1000 side panels

if they are attached.

2 Hold a rack bracket against one side of the meter bridge so that the rack

angle bracket ear projects to the side, and align two holes on the brackets

with the holes on the side of the meter bridge, as shown in the illustration

below.

3 Afﬁx the bracket using the screws included in the meter bridge package.

4 Attach the other bracket to the other side of the MB1000 in the same way.

Rack angle bracketSide of Meter Bridge

Installing the SP1000 Side Panels 377

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Installing the SP1000 Side Panels

The ﬁgure below illustrates how to attach the left side panel to the DM1000. Attach the right

side panel to the DM1000 in the same way.

Rack Mounting the DM1000 Using the RK1 Rack Mount

Kit

You can rack mount the DM1000 using the optional RK1 Rack Mount Kit.

1 Remove the side panels if they are attached.

2 Hold one of the brackets against one side of the DM1000 so that the bracket

ear projects to the side, and align ﬁve holes on the bracket with the holes

on the side of the DM1000, as shown in the illustration below.

3 Afﬁx the bracket using ﬁve screws included in the RK1 package.

4 Attach the other bracket to the other side of the DM1000 in the same way.

Caution: Do not rack mount the DM1000 and an MB1000 connected together as a unit. Be

sure to rack mount them separately using the dedicated brackets.

378 Index

DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual

Index

Symbols

ø/INS/DLY | DLY 1-16 page .............. 63

ø/INS/DLY | DLY 17-32 page

............ 63

ø/INS/DLY | DLY 33-48 page

............ 63

ø/INS/DLY | Insert page

................... 116

ø/Ins/Dly | Insert page

...................... 158

ø/INS/DLY | Out Dly page

........... 83, 95

ø/INS/DLY | Phase page

..................... 63

ø/INSERT/DELAY button

................. 19

+48V ON/OFF switches

..................... 16

Phantom power

............................ 53

Numerics

1–12 buttons ........................................ 23

1-16/17-32/33-48 buttons

.................. 22

2TR D1/D2 buttons

............................ 24

2TR IN D1/D2 buttons

....................... 56

2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 1

........... 27

2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 2

.......... 27

2TR IN DIGITAL connectors

............ 54

2TRD1/2

....................................... 48

2TR OUT DIGITAL AES/EBU 1

....... 27

2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL 2

..... 27

2TR OUT DIGITAL connectors

........ 54

2TRD1/2

.............................................. 48

ABORT .............................................. 204

About the display

................................ 29

AC IN connector

................................. 27

AD input

.............................................. 16

AD input and output section

............. 25

AD Input section

................................. 53

AD8HR/AD824

................................. 287

ADAT I/O card

.................................... 55

AES/EBU I/O card

.............................. 55

AMP SIMULATE

.............................. 314

Analog inputs & outputs

.................... 53

ASSIGN button

................................... 18

Assignable parameters

........................ 38

Assigne

Control changes

......................... 250

MIDI messages

........................... 239

Parameters to the encoder

........... 37

Program changes

........................ 249

Remote layer

............................... 215

USER DEFINED KEYS

.............. 225

Attenuator

...............................67, 83, 94

Output signals

.............................. 90

AUTO button

...................................... 17

Auto Channel Select preference

....... 267

Auto Direct Out On preference

....... 268

Auto EQ Edit in preference

.............. 270

Auto EQUALIZER Display preference

............................................... 267

Auto Inc TC Capture preference

..... 270

AUTO PAN

....................................... 312

AUTO PAN 5.1

................................. 319

Auto PAN/SURROUND Display

preference

.............................267

AUTO REC

........................................203

Auto ROUTING Display preference

266

Auto SOLO Display preference

........267

Auto update function

........................167

Auto WORD CLOCK Display

preference

.............................267

Automix

..............................................187

ABORT

........................................204

ABSOLUTE

.................................202

AUTO button

....................... 17, 199

AUTO REC

.................................203

AUTOMIX button

........................19

Automix main page

....................200

Automix memory page

..............204

COPY

...........................................208

EDIT OUT

.......................... 201, 206

Edit safe buttons

.........................206

Editing events offline

..................207

ERASE

..........................................208

Event edit page

............................211

Event job page

.............................207

FADER EDIT

..............................202

Fader Edit mode

..........................201

Fader1 &2 pages

..........................205

FRAMES

......................................188

INT START TIME

......................200

MOTOR

......................................206

MOVE/MERGE

..........................209

NEW

............................................203

OFFSET

.......................................200

OVERWRITE

..............................203

Parameter events can be recorded

.........................................187

PLAY

............................................203

Playing back

.................................199

PROTECT

...................................205

Punching in & out

......................197

REC

..............................................203

Recording

....................................190

Recording the event

....................191

RELATIVE

...................................202

RETURN

.....................................201

SEL button

...................................199

Setting up

.....................................188

Setup | Time Sig page

.................189

STOP

............................................204

TAKEOVER

................................201

TIME REFERENCE

....................200

TIME REFERENCE section

.......188

Time signature map

....................189

Timecode source

.........................188

TO END button

..........................200

TRIM

...........................................209

UPDATE

......................................200

Automix | Event Edit page

................211

Automix | Event Job page

.................207

Automix | Fader1 or 2 page

..............205

Automix | Main page

................ 190, 200

Automix | Memory page

...................204

AUTOMIX button

..............................19

Automix main page

...........................200

Automix memory page

.....................204

Automix Store Undo preference

......271

AUX 1–AUX 8 buttons

.......................18

AUX button

.........................................18

AUX indicator

...............................18, 35

AUX SELECT section

.........................18

Aux send mode

................... 99, 100, 103

Aux sends

.......................................93, 98

Attenuating

...................................94

Comp settings

...............................95

Copying channel fader positions

.........................................106

Delaying

.........................................95

EQ settings

..............................94, 96

Excluding certain channels

........105

Fixed mode

..................................100

Mix minus

...................................105

Panning

.......................................104

Setting from the control surface

..94

Setting from the display

.........94, 99

Setting levels

..................................94

Variable mode

.............................100

Viewing settings

............................96

Viewing settings for multiple

channels

.........................102

Aux1 | Pan1–32 page

.........................104

Aux1 | Pan33–48 page

.......................104

Aux1 | Send1-32 page

....................75, 99

Aux1 | Send33-48 page

........................99

Aux1 | View1–16 page

.......................102

Aux1 | View17–32 page

.....................102

Aux1 | View33–48 page

.....................102

Bass Management ..............................139

Battery

................................................289

Bulk dump

.........................................256

Messages

......................................245

BUS button

..................................24, 137

Bus out

.................................................81

Attenuating

...................................83

Compressing

.................................84

Delaying

.........................................83

EQ’ing

......................................84, 88

Naming

..........................................91

Pairing

...........................................89

Routing signals to the stereo bus

.85

Setting from the control surface

..88

Setting from the display

...............83

Setting the levels

...........................88

Viewing the settings

......................86

Bus to stereo library

..........................181

BUS1–BUS8

.......................................130

Buttons

.................................................31

Cascade COMM Link preference ....268

Cascading consoles

............................282

Cascade page

...............................285

Reverse cable

.................................26

SYNC parameter

.........................286

Transcripción de documentos

Owner’s Manual Keep This Manual For Future Reference. E FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. ADVARSEL! Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren. VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. VAROITUS Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti. (lithium caution) NEDERLAND / THE NETHERLANDS • Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back-up. • This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back-up. • Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur of gelieve dan contact op te nemen met de vertegenwoordiging van Yamaha in uw land. • For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the end of life please consult your retailer or Yamaha representative office in your country. • Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA. • Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small chemical waste. (lithium disposal) This product contains a battery that contains perchlorate material. Perchlorate Material—special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (Perchlorate) This product contains a high intensity lamp that contains a small amount of mercury. Disposal of this material may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal information in the United States, refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site: www.eiae.org * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (mercury) (class B) COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digital Production Console Model Name : DM1000 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (FCC DoC) IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: GREEN-AND-YELLOW : EARTH BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured GREEN-and-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or colored GREEN or GREEN-and-YELLOW. The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. (3 wires) • Explanation of Graphical Symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The above warning is located on the side of the unit IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. 12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/ apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the device. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the device. • Do not expose the device to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • Use only the specified power code. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Be sure to connect to an appropriate outlet with a protective grounding connection. Improper grounding can result in electrical shock. Do not open • Do not open the device or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The device contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. If you notice any abnormality • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the device, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • If this device should be dropped or damaged, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the device or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do not block the vents. This device has ventilation holes at the top/front/rear/ sides to prevent the internal temperature from rising too high. In particular, do not place the device on its side or upside down, or place it in any poorlyventilated location, such as a bookcase or closet. Power supply/Power cord • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the device is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • When removing the electric plug from the device or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Do not use the device in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the device, TV, or radio may generate noise. Location • If you are using the optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge, do not hold only the MB1000 when moving this unit. Otherwise, the meter brackets may be damaged, the main unit may malfunction, or you may be injured if the unit falls. • When transporting or moving the device, always use two or more people. • Before moving the device, remove all connected cables. When you move the device with the MB1000 attached, do not permit impact or stress on the cable connector that connects the MB1000 to the device. Connections • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Before connecting the device to other devices, turn off the power for all devices. Before turning the power on or off for all devices, set all volume levels to minimum. • Be sure to connect to a properly grounded power source. A ground screw terminal is provided on the rear panel for safely grounding the device and preventing electrical shock. • Avoid setting all equalizer controls and faders to their maximum. Depending on the condition of the connected devices, doing so may cause feedback and may damage the speakers. • Do not expose the device to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not place the device in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. (5)-1 1/2 Handling caution Backup battery • Do not insert your fingers or hand in any gaps or openings on the device (vents, etc.). • Avoid inserting or dropping foreign objects (paper, plastic, metal, etc.) into any gaps or openings on the device (vents, etc.) If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • This device has a built-in backup battery. When you unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, the internal data is retained. However, if the backup battery fully discharges, this data will be lost. If the backup battery is running low, when you turn on the device the display indicates “WARNING Low Battery!.” In this case, immediately save the data to an external media using MIDI Bulk Dump, then have qualified Yamaha service personnel replace the backup battery. • Do not use headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. • Do not apply oil, grease, or contact cleaner to the faders. Doing so may cause problems with electrical contact or fader motion. • Do not rest your weight on the device or place heavy objects on it, and avoid use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • This device has rear-panel slots for installing mini-YGDAI cards. For technical reasons, certain card combinations are not supported. Before installing any cards, check the Yamaha web site (see page 6) to see whether your card is compatible. Also check the total number of cards that can be installed in the unit. Installing cards that are not endorsed by Yamaha may cause electrical shock, fire, or damage to the unit. • Using a mobile telephone near this unit may induce noise. If noise occurs, use the telephone away from the unit. • The digital circuits of this unit may induce a slight noise into nearby radios and TVs. If noise occurs, relocate the affected equipment. • When connecting D-sub cables, be sure to tighten the screws on both sides of the connector securely. To disconnect the cable, loosen the screws completely, then remove the cable by holding the connector part. Do not remove the plug by pulling the cable while the screws are still attached. Other wise, the connector may be damaged, leading to malfunction. • When you change the wordclock settings on any device in your digital audio system, some devices may output noise, so turn down your power amps beforehand, otherwise your speakers may be damaged. XLR-type connectors are wired as follows (IEC60268 standard): pin 1: ground, pin 2: hot (+), and pin 3: cold (-). Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the device, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the device is not in use. The performance of components with moving contacts, such as switches, volume controls, and connectors, deteriorates over time. Consult qualifi ed Yamaha service personnel about replacing defective components. * The illustrations and screen displays as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only, and may be different from the ones on your device. * The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. * THX and THX pm3 are registered trademarks of THX Ltd. (5)-1 2/2 6 Yamaha Pro Audio global website Yamaha Pro Audio global website http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ Package Contents • • • • • DM1000 Digital Production Console CD-ROM Power cord This manual Studio Manager Installation Guide Optional Extras • • • • MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge SP1000 Wooden Side Panels RK1 Rack Mount Kit mini YGDAI I/O cards About this Owner’s Manual This Owner’s Manual explains how to operate the DM1000 Digital Production Console. The table of contents can help you familiarize yourself with the manual’s organization and to locate tasks and topics The index can help you locate specific information. Before diving in, it is recommended that you read the “Operating Basics” chapter, starting on page 29. Each chapter in this manual discusses a specific section or function of the DM1000. The Input and Output Channels are explained in the following chapters: “Input Channels,” “Bus Outs,” and “Aux Sends.” Where possible, these chapters have been organized in order of signal flow, from input to output. Conventions Used in this Manual The DM1000 features two types of buttons: physical buttons that you can press (e.g., ENTER and DISPLAY) and buttons that appear on the display pages. References to physical buttons are enclosed in square brackets, for example, “press the [ENTER] button.” References to display page buttons are not emphasized, for example, “move the cursor to the ON button.” You can select display pages by using the [DISPLAY] buttons or the Left Tab Scroll, Right Tab Scroll, and F1–4 buttons below the display. In order to simplify explanations, the procedures reference only the [DISPLAY] button method. See “Selecting Display Pages” on page 30 for details on all the ways in which pages can be selected. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual New Functions in DM1000 Version 2 7 New Functions in DM1000 Version 2 The following functions have been added to the DM1000 as part of the upgrade of the firmware from version 1.0 to version 2.0. Control Surface • • Encoder mode now features an assignable function, ALT LAYER, which enables you to control the channel level for all 32 channels without switching between layers. → page 36 There are now 50 assignable Encoder mode parameters. → page 38 Aux Sends • • If an Aux Send is set to pre-fader, you can set the Pre point before or after channel mute. → page 99 The AUX SELECT [AUX 1–8] buttons enable you to solo or unsolo Aux Sends without switching to the Master layer. → page 107 Control Room Monitor • • • You can select whether the Input Channel’s Pan setting is used when the Input Channel Solo signal is set to Pre Fader. → page 120 Raising the channel faders for soloed Channels from –∞ can unsolo the Channels. → page 121 You can simultaneously select 2TR D1 or 2TR D2, and STEREO as control room monitor sources. → page 123 Surround Function • • • The on/off status of the Follow Pan button is reflected in the pan and Surround Pan settings. → page 125 The Surround Monitor function now supports THX Surround. → page 138 You can simultaneously select BUS and SLOT as surround monitor sources. → page 137 Group/Link • • The Fader Group Master function enables you to control the overall level of the Fader group channels simultaneously while maintaining the relative level balance of each channel. → page 150 The Mute Group Master function enables you to mute all channels in a Mute group simultaneously. → page 152 Internal Effects • You can add optional Add-On Effects to the preset effects. → page 161 Scene Memory • • Any channel or parameter settings in the current scene can be copied and pasted into other scenes. → page 171 You can select additional parameters for the Recall Safe function. → page 170 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 8 New Functions in DM1000 Version 2 Automix • • You can insert the mix parameters in a region specified in the Automix data. → page 193 Touching the faders can punch parameter values in and out if the corresponding OVERWRITE button is set to on (Touch Sence Edit In ALL ). → page 271 Remote Control • • • Cubase SX has been added as a target of the Remote layer. → page 215 The Joystick or the controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section enable you to control Pro Tools Surround Pan settings. → page 216 Yamaha’s proprietary Advanced DAW protocol has been added to Nuendo, Cubase SX, and General DAW. This enables you to control these devices using the DM1000’s SELECTED CHANNEL section. (Controllable functions vary depending on the DAW software and version you are using.) Other Functions • • • • • • You can control the DM1000 from a connected Video Editor via the ESAM protocol. → page 259 You can set the Routing ST Pair Link so that the routing from paired channels to the Stereo Bus is linked. → page 268 Some Operation Lock Safe parameters have been added. → page 280 You can remotely control a connected Yamaha AD8HR A/D converter. → page 287 You can assign the selected channels to a Fader or Mute group using the USER DEFINED KEYS. → page 293 You can switch the windows of the included Studio Manager software application using the USER DEFINED KEYS. → page 293 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 9 Contents Contents 1 2 Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Control Surface & Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Installing an Optional Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3 Operating Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 About the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Display Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Fader Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Encoder Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button . . . . . . . . . . Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 29 30 31 33 34 35 36 37 39 Connections and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Wordclock Connections and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Input and Output Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 5 Analog I/O & Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Analog Inputs & Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Inputs & Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting Sampling Rates of Signals Received at 2TR Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dithering Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 About Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Input Channels from the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pairing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Naming Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using MS Stereo Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 53 54 55 57 58 59 61 63 75 76 79 80 Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 About Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bus Out 1–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . Pairing Buses or Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attenuating Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 82 83 88 89 90 91 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 10 Contents 8 Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Aux Out 1–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Aux Send Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panning Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Excluding Certain Channels from Aux Sends (Mix Minus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Channel Fader Positions to Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soloing AUX Sends using the [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 93 94 94 98 102 104 105 106 107 Input & Output Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Input Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Patching Direct Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 112 115 116 10 Control Room Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Control Room Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solo Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Solo Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Control Room Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Talkback Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 120 121 122 123 11 Surround Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Using Surround Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Surround Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 12 Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters . . . . . . . . . 147 Grouping & Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Fader Group Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mute Group Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 148 150 152 152 13 Internal Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 About the Internal Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting the Internal Effects into Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Surround Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Add-On Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 156 158 159 161 161 162 14 Scene Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 About Scene Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing and Recalling Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Scene Memory Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fading Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recalling Scenes Safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sorting Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying and Pasting a Scene (Global Paste) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 163 165 167 168 170 171 171 Contents 11 15 Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 About the Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 General Library Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Using Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 16 Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 About Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Setting Up for Automix Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Recording an Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Inserting Mix Parameters into Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Punching In & Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 [SEL] Button Functions While the [AUTO] Button Indicator Is On . . . . . . . . . 199 Playing Back an Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Automix Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Automix Memory Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Fader1 &2 pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Editing Events Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 17 Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 About Remote Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Pro Tools Remote Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Nuendo/Cubase SX Remote Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Other DAW Remote Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 MIDI Remote Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Machine Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 18 MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 MIDI & the DM1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 MIDI Port Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI (Bulk Dump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 19 Controlling the DM1000 from a Video Editor . . . . . . 259 About ESAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Crossfade via ESAM Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Video Editors with confirmed compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Supported Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Remote Connector Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 20 Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Changing the Input and Output Connector Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Setting Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels (User Assignable Layer) . . . 272 Using the Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Using the User Defined Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Using Operation Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Cascading Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Using the AD8HR/AD824 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Checking the Battery and the System Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Initializing the DM1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Calibrating the Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 12 Contents Appendix A: Parameter Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 USER DEFINED KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Patch Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Input Patch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Patch Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Output Patch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPI Trigger Source & Target List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effects Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effects and tempo synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preset EQ Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preset Gate Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamics Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 295 296 298 300 302 304 306 310 322 323 324 325 327 Appendix B: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 General Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Input Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Output Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Slot Spec (1–2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control I/O Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOTE Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONTROL Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 337 337 337 338 338 339 339 340 340 341 Appendix C: MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Scene Memory to Program Change Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Initial Parameter to Control Change Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 MIDI Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Appendix D: About Optional Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Installing the SP1000 Side Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Rack Mounting the DM1000 Using the RK1 Rack Mount Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 MIDI Implementation Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End of Manual DM1000 Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End of Manual DM1000 Level Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End of Manual DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Welcome 13 1 Welcome 1 ■ Hardware Features • • • • • • • • 17 touch-sensitive 100-mm motorized faders (for touch-sensitive selection of channels, or for punching in and out during Automix recording) Faders can set levels for Input Channels, Aux Sends, and Bus Outs. Rotary Encoders enable you to control panning for each channel, AUX send levels, and various parameters. Six selectable software layers determine the function of channel faders and Encoders. 320 x 240 dot LCD display with fluorescent backlighting Buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section enable direct editing of channel mix parameters. 12 USER-DEFINED KEYS enable you to assign functions to control DM1000 internal parameters. Two expansion slots for optional digital I/O, AD, and DA cards. ■ Sonic Specifications • • • • • Linear 24-bit, 128-times oversampling A/D converters Linear 24-bit, 128-times oversampling D/A converters 20 Hz through 40 kHz frequency response at 96 kHz sampling rate. 106 dB typical dynamic range 32-bit internal signal processing (58-bit accumulator) ■ Inputs and Outputs • • • • • • • • 16 mic/line inputs with switchable +48 V phantom power and 4 line inputs 12 Omni Outs assignable to Stereo Out, Bus Out, Monitor Out, and Input Channel Direct Outs. Two optional slots allow a maximum of 32 inputs. Two 2-track digital inputs, with sampling rate converters capable of converting sampling rates of 44.1 kHz through 96 kHz. Double Channel support for recording and playing at 88.2/96 kHz on 44.1/48 kHz legacy multi-track digital recorders. You can cascade two DM1000s while remaining in the digital domain. Input patches enable assignment of input signals to desired signal paths. Output patches enable assignment of Bus Out signals and Input Channel Direct Outs to desired output jacks. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Welcome Thank you for choosing the Yamaha DM1000 Digital Production Console. The compact DM1000 Digital Console features 24-bit/96 kHz digital audio processing without compromise, as well as 48-channel simultaneous mixing. The DM1000 covers a broad range of needs and applications, including multi-track recording, 2-channel mixdown, and cutting-edge surround sound production. This integrated, comprehensive audio system features remote control function for DAWs (Digital Audio Workstations) as popularized by the DM2000 and 02R96 Digital Mixing Consoles. The DM1000 offers the following features: 14 Chapter 1—Welcome ■ Channel Configuration • • • • Simultaneous mixing of up to 48 Input Channels. Group multiple channels and pair channels for stereo. 8 Bus Outs and 8 AUX Sends. Buses 1-8 can be routed to Stereo Buses for use as Group Buses. Channel library for storing and recalling the channel settings for each Input Channel and Output Channel. 4-band EQ and dynamics processor equip all channels. Dynamics processor and EQ settings can be stored in libraries and recalled. ■ Effects • • • Four high-quality multi-channel effects (Apply effects via AUX Sends or Channel Inserts). Effect library for storing and recalling effect settings. Optional Add-On Effects packages for adding effects that utilize a variety of new algorithms. ■ Scene Memory • • Scene memories for storing and recalling the mix settings as Scenes. Snapshot style automation with Scene memories recallable via Automix. ■ Surround Sound • • Supports 3-1, 5.1, and 6.1 channel surround sound production. Joystick for adjusting each channel's surround pan. ■ Automix • • Automated controls of channel faders and parameters via Automix. (Even more powerful when combined with an MTR, DAW, and MIDI sequence system.) Control parameters of connected MIDI devices via Automix. ■ Remote Control • • • Control and manage your DM1000 from your Mac or PC using bundled Studio Manager software Remote Layers for controlling popular DAWs (Digital Audio Workstations), including Pro Tools, Nuendo, etc. Control an external recorder via MMC commands and P2 commands. ■ MIDI • • Equipped with MIDI ports and a USB port for computer connection. Scene recall and mix parameter changes via MIDI ■ ESAM • Controls the DM1000 from a connected Video Editor via the ESAM II protocol DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Control Surface & Rear Panel 15 2 Control Surface & Rear Panel 2 Control Surface SELECTED CHANNEL Section (p. 21) 2 1 +48V OFF OFF +48V ON OFF 5 4 3 +48V ON +48V ON 6 +48V OFF ON OFF 7 +48V ON 8 +48V OFF ON OFF 9 +48V ON OFF 10 +48V ON OFF 11 +48V ON OFF 12 +48V ON OFF 13 +48V ON OFF OFF +48V ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 16 15 14 +48V ON +48V ON OFF +48V ON OFF ON PAD -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 0 10 TALKBACK LEVEL 0 -60 -16 GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL 10 PHONES PHONES LEVEL Headphones & Talkback Section (p. 23) SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING DISPLAY ACCESS AUTOMIX MIDI AUX SELECT Section (p. 18) DIO SETUP REMOTE UTILITY METER PAN/ SURROUND DYNAMICS OVER 0 -2 -2 -4 -4 -6 VIEW INPUT PATCH / PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY OVER 0 EFFECT Display Section (p. 20) OUTPUT PATCH SCENE AUX SELECT DISPLAY AUX5 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 AUX6 AUX7 AUX8 ENCODER MODE ENCODER MODE Section (p. 18) 1 2 3 4 -8 -10 -12 -12 5 6 -14 -14 -18 -18 -24 -24 -30 -30 -36 -36 7 8 -42 -42 -48 -48 -56 -56 -72 -72 L R MONITOR Section (p. 24) DISPLAY HIGH SOLO CLEAR HIGH MID 2TR D1 2TR D2 LOW MID SLOT BUS Q -6 -8 -10 MONITOR EQUALIZER DISPLAY DISPLAY FREQUENCY DIMMER TALKBACK LOW STEREO 0 10 MONITOR LEVEL GAIN STEREO DIRECT INC DEC GRAB Data Entry Section (p. 23) SCENE MEMORY FADER MODE DISPLAY FADER STORE RECALL AUX PAN AUX ASSIGN F1 F2 F4 F3 ENTER FADER MODE Section (p. 18) SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL AUTO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SEL ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SCENE MEMORY Section (p. 22) USER DEFINED KEYS +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 0 DISPLAY 5 5 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 0 10 5 15 5 5 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 0 10 5 15 10 15 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 20 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 30 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 40 30 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 50 60 70 60 40 50 1 17 2 33 AUX 1 18 3 34 AUX 2 19 4 35 AUX 3 20 5 36 AUX 4 21 6 37 AUX 5 22 7 38 AUX 6 23 8 39 AUX 7 24 9 40 AUX 8 25 10 41 BUS 1 Channel Strip Section (p. 17) 26 11 42 BUS 2 27 12 43 BUS 3 28 13 44 BUS 4 29 14 45 BUS 5 30 70 15 46 BUS 6 31 LAYER Section (p. 22) 16 47 BUS 7 32 48 BUS 8 STEREO STEREO Section (p. 17) USER DEFINED KEYS Section (p. 23) DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Control Surface & Rear Panel AD Input Section (p. 16) DISPLAY ACCESS Section (p. 19) 16 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel AD Input Section 1 2 1 +48V OFF OFF +48V ON OFF 5 4 3 +48V ON +48V ON OFF 6 +48V ON OFF 7 +48V ON 8 +48V OFF ON OFF 9 +48V ON OFF 10 +48V ON OFF 11 +48V ON OFF 12 +48V ON OFF 13 +48V ON OFF OFF +48V ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB -60 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 -60 -16 GAIN GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 +48V ON OFF +48V ON OFF ON 2 PAD -16 16 15 14 +48V ON GAIN PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL 3 4 5 A +48V ON/OFF switches 1–16 These switches turn on or off the +48 V phantom power feed to each INPUT. B PAD switches 1–16 These switches turn on or off the 20 dB pad (attenuator) for each AD Input. C GAIN controls 1–16 These controls adjust input sensitivity for each AD Input. Input sensitivity is +4 dB to –40 dB when the Pad is on, and –16 dB to –60 dB when the Pad is off. D PEAK indicators 1–16 These indicators light up when the input signal level is 3 dB below clipping. Adjust the Pad switch and GAIN control so that the indicator rarely lights up at signal peak. E SIGNAL indicators These indicators light up when the input signal level is 20 dB below nominal. Note: Screw holes for attaching a cover are located at both sides of the AD input section of the DM1000. (Size M3, horizontal spacing 417 mm, vertical spacing 36 mm.) You may wish to fabricate your own cover and attach it to the front panel to prevent the controls from being operated inadvertently. Yamaha does not sell such a cover. If you fabricate and attach your own cover, make sure that the mounting screws do not extend more than 10 mm into the front panel. You will need to allow approximately 15–20 mm between the top panel and the cover in order to clear the control knobs and buttons. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Control Surface 17 Channel Strip Section 2 SEL 3 SOLO 4 ON 1 +10 0 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 20 15 30 20 40 30 50 40 60 70 50 5 1 17 33 AUX 1 B [SEL] buttons 1–16 These buttons enable you to select desired channels. The [SEL] button indicator for the currently-selected channel lights up. The channel selected by each [SEL] button depends on the currently-selected button in the LAYER section (see page 22). These buttons also allow you to select channels for Automix recording and playback, create or cancel channel pairs, and add channels to (or remove them from) Fader, Mute, EQ, and Compressor groups. C [SOLO] buttons 1–16 These buttons solo the selected channels. The [SOLO] button indicator of the currently-soloed channel lights up. D [ON] buttons 1–16 These buttons turn the selected channels on or off. The [ON] button indicators for On channels light up. E Channel faders 1–16 These are touch-sensitive 100 mm motorized faders. Depending on the button selected in the FADER MODE Section (see page 18), the faders will adjust the input or output level of the selected channels or buses, or adjust the AUX Send level. STEREO Section 1 AUTO 2 A [AUTO] button When this button is turned on, you can use the [SEL] buttons 1–16 to turn the Automix function on or off. SEL 3 ON B [SEL] button Selects the Stereo Bus. C [ON] button Turns the selected bus on or off. 0 5 10 15 D [STEREO] fader This touch-sensitive 100 mm motorized fader adjusts the final output level of the Stereo Bus. 20 30 40 50 60 70 4 STEREO DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 2 Control Surface & Rear Panel A Encoders 1–16 These rotary Encoders adjust the channel parameter settings. Depending on the button selected in the ENCODER MODE section (see page 18), the Encoders will adjust the channel pan setting (when the ENCODER MODE [PAN] button indicator is lit), the AUX Send level (when the ENCODER MODE [AUX] button indicator is lit), or any parameter (when the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button indicator is lit). These Encoders also feature push switches that are used to view the value of the parameter currently assigned to the Encoder, or to punch in or out during Automix recording. 1 18 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel AUX SELECT Section 1 AUX SELECT DISPLAY 2 AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 AUX6 AUX7 AUX8 A [DISPLAY] button This button displays an Aux-related page (see page 99). B [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons These buttons select an Aux Send. When you press a button to select an AUX Send, the corresponding button indicator lights up. ENCODER MODE Section 1 ENCODER MODE DISPLAY PAN AUX ASSIGN 2 3 4 A [DISPLAY] button This button displays an Encoder page, enabling you to assign functions to Encoders 1–16 (see page 37). To use a function assigned to an Encoder, press the [ASSIGN] button to turn on the button indicator. B [PAN] button If you press this button, the button indicator turns on and Encoders 1–16 function as channel panpots. C [AUX] button If you press this button, the button indicator turns on and Encoders 1–16 function as channel Aux Send. The Send destination is selected in the AUX SELECT Section. D [ASSIGN] button If you press this button, the button indicator turns on and Encoders 1–16 function as assignable controls for the parameters assigned on the Encoder pages. (By default, Input Patches of the corresponding Input Channels are assigned.) FADER MODE Section FADER MODE 1 FADER AUX 2 3 A [FADER/AUX] button Toggles between the desired parameter to be adjusted by channel faders 1–16. The faders adjust the Channel or Bus level when the FADER indicator is lit, and adjust the Aux Send level when the AUX indicator is lit. B FADER indicator C AUX indicator An indicator lights up to indicate the parameter selected via the [FADER/AUX] button. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Control Surface 19 DISPLAY ACCESS Section 1 2 3 4 2 DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP UTILITY MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW / PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY PAN/ SURROUND DYNAMICS INPUT PATCH EFFECT OUTPUT PATCH 7 8 L K SCENE M N O P A [AUTOMIX] button This button displays an Automix page, enabling you to make Automix settings (see page 187). B [DIO] button This button displays a DIO page, enabling you to make digital I/O settings (see page 55). C [SETUP] button This button displays a Setup page, enabling you to make the DM1000 internal settings. D [UTILITY] button This button displays a Utility page, enabling you to use the internal oscillators and view information about installed optional cards. E [MIDI] button This button displays a MIDI page, enabling you to make MIDI settings (see page 248). F [REMOTE] button This button displays a Remote page, enabling you to control a DAW remotely and make machine control settings (see page 215). G [METER] button This button displays a Meter page, which displays Input Channel levels, or Bus Out or Aux Send Out levels (see page 39). H [VIEW] button This button displays a View page, enabling you to view and set mix parameters for a specific channel (see page 72). I [PAIR/GROUP] button This button displays a Pair/Group page, enabling you to pair channels, group multiple faders, or mute channels (see page 78 and 147). J [ /INSERT/DELAY] button This button displays a /INS/DLY page, enabling you to switch the signal phase, set the signal to be inserted, or set the delay parameters (see page 63 and 158). K [INPUT PATCH] button This button displays an In Patch page, enabling you to patch input signals and Bus Out signals to the desired Input Channels (see page 109). L [OUTPUT PATCH] button This button displays an Out Patch page, enabling you to patch Bus Out and Insert Out signals to the desired destination (see page 112). M [PAN/SURROUND] button This button displays a Pan/Surr page, enabling you to adjust stereo or surround pan settings (see page 70 and 125). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Control Surface & Rear Panel 6 5 9 J AUTOMIX 20 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel N [DYNAMICS] button This button displays a Dynamics page, enabling you to control channel gates and compressors (see page 65). O [EFFECT] button This button displays an Effect page, enabling you to edit the internal effects processors and use optional plug-in cards (see page 159). P [SCENE] button This button displays a Scene page, enabling you to store and recall Scenes (see page 163). Display Section OVER 0 OVER 0 -2 -2 -4 -4 -6 -6 -8 1 F1 5 F2 F3 -8 -10 -10 -12 -12 -14 -14 -18 -18 -24 -24 -30 -30 -36 -36 -42 -42 -48 -48 -56 -56 -72 -72 L R 2 3 F4 4 6 A Display This is a 320 x 240 dot LCD display with a fluorescent backlight. B Stereo meters These 32-segment level meters display the final output level of the Stereo Bus. C Contrast control This control adjusts the display contrast. D [F1]–[F4] buttons These buttons select a page from a multi-page screen. Selecting a tab at the bottom of the screen using one of these buttons displays the corresponding page. (See page 30 for more information on displaying a page.) E Left Tab Scroll [ ] button F Right Tab Scroll [ ] button If there are more pages available than the four whose tabs are currently displayed, use these buttons to display the additional tabs. These buttons are available only when the left or right Tab Scroll arrow appears. Tab Scroll arrow DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Control Surface 21 SELECTED CHANNEL Section 1 5 SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING J 6 2 HIGH Q 2 3 4 N 3 4 5 6 7 8 STEREO DIRECT HIGH MID FREQUENCY 7 8 LOW MID LOW GAIN 9 K L M GRAB A ROUTING [DISPLAY] button This button displays a Routing page, enabling you to route selected channels to the desired Bus, and adjust the level of the signals routed from Buses 1–8 to the Stereo Bus (see page 71 and 85). B ROUTING [1]–[8] buttons C ROUTING [STEREO] button D ROUTING [DIRECT] button These buttons select the desired Bus for routing the selected Input Channel signals. The corresponding button indicator for the currently-selected Bus lights up. E EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button This button displays an EQ page, enabling you to set the selected channel equalizer (see page 67 and 68). F EQUALIZER [HIGH] button G EQUALIZER [HIGH-MID] button H EQUALIZER [LOW-MID] button I EQUALIZER [LOW] button These buttons select the EQ band (HIGH, HIGH-MID, LOW-MID, LOW). The corresponding button indicator of the currently-selected band lights up. J EQUALIZER [Q] control This control adjusts the currently-selected band Q. K EQUALIZER [FREQUENCY] control This control adjusts the currently-selected band frequency. L EQUALIZER [GAIN] control This control adjusts the currently-selected band gain. M [GRAB] button This button enables Joystick control of the surround pan setting for the currently-selected Input Channel. This button can be turned on only when the surround pan setting is available. N Joystick The Joystick is used to set the surround pan position (see page 131). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 2 Control Surface & Rear Panel 1 EQUALIZER DISPLAY DISPLAY 22 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel LAYER Section 2 1 3 A [1-16]/[17-32]/[33-48] buttons These buttons select an Input Channel Layer. The channel strips control Channels 1–16, 17–32, or 33–48, depending on the button selected here. (See page 33 for more information on Layers.) B [REMOTE 1]/[REMOTE 2] buttons These buttons select the Remote Layer, which can be used to control external devices, including DAWs. (See page 215 for more information on the Remote Layer.) C [MASTER] button This button selects the Master Layer, which can be used to control Bus and Aux Send. (See page 33 for more information on the Master Layer.) SCENE MEMORY Section SCENE MEMORY STORE RECALL 12 3 4 5 A Scene memory display The number of the currently-selected Scene memory is displayed here. B Edit indicator If you adjust a mix parameter after a Scene has been recalled or stored, a dot flashes here. C [STORE] button This button enables you to store the current mix settings (See page 163 for more information on Scene Memories). D Scene Up [ ] / Down [ ] buttons These buttons select a Scene to store or recall. Pressing the Scene Up [ ] button increments the selection; pressing the Scene Down [ ] button decrements the selection. Holding down either key increments or decrements the selection continuously. E [RECALL] button This button recalls the Scene memory selected by the Scene Up [ ] / Down [ ] buttons. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Control Surface 23 USER DEFINED KEYS Section 1 A [DISPLAY] button This button displays a User Def page, enabling you to assign functions to buttons 1–12 (see page 274). USER DEFINED KEYS DISPLAY 2 Data Entry Section 3 DEC INC A Parameter wheel This control adjusts the parameter values shown on the display. Turning it clockwise increases the value; turning it counterclockwise decreases the value. This wheel also enables you to scroll a displayed list and select a character for entry (see page 32). 4 B [ENTER] button This button activates a selected (highlighted) button on the display, and confirms the edited parameter values. 1 C [DEC] & [INC] buttons These buttons increment or decrement a parameter value by one. Pressing the [INC] button increments the value; pressing the [DEC] button decrements the value. Holding down either key increments or decrements the value continuously. 2 ENTER D Left, Right, Up, Down ([ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]) cursor buttons These buttons move the cursor around the display pages, or select parameters and options. Holding down a cursor button moves the cursor continuously in the respective direction. Headphones & Talkback Section 1 2 0 10 TALKBACK LEVEL 3 4 0 10 PHONES LEVEL PHONES A TALKBACK LEVEL control This control sets the level of the built-in talkback microphone. (See page 123 for more information on the Talkback function.) B Talkback mic This built-in microphone is used for talkback. C PHONES LEVEL control This control sets the level of the PHONES. (See page 119 for more information on monitoring through the headphones.) D PHONES jack You can connect a set of stereo headphones to this stereo phone jack. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 2 Control Surface & Rear Panel B [1]–[12] buttons These buttons perform the functions assigned in the User Def pages. 24 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel MONITOR Section 1 MONITOR DISPLAY 2 SOLO CLEAR 2TR D1 2TR D2 SLOT BUS 4 STEREO 7 DIMMER TALKBACK 3 5 6 8 0 10 MONITOR LEVEL 9 J K A [DISPLAY] button This button displays a Monitor page, enabling you to adjust monitor settings (see page 119 and 136). B [SOLO] indicator This indicator flashes when a single or multiple channels are soloed. C [CLEAR] button This button “unsolos” all soloed Channels. D [2TR D1] button E [2TR D2] button F [STEREO] button These buttons select the Control Room Monitor output signal. When the [2TR D1] button indicator is lit, the signal at the 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1 jack is selected. When the [2TR D2] button indicator is lit, the signal at the 2TR OUT DIGITAL 2 jack is selected. When the [STEREO] button indicator is lit, the Stereo Bus signal is selected. If you change the parameter setting on the Monitor | C-R/TB page (see page 122), you can monitor the OMNI IN signal, instead of the 2TR IN DIGITAL signal, when you press the [2TR D1] or [2TR D2] button. G [SLOT] button H [BUS] button These buttons select the Surround Monitor signal source. When the [BUS] button indicator is lit, the Bus 1–8 signals are selected. When the [SLOT] button indicator is lit, the signals from Slots 1/2 are selected. (See page 136 for more information on the Surround Monitor.) I [DIMMER] button This button activates the Dimmer function, which lowers the Monitor and Surround Monitor signals. This function is convenient when you wish to talk in the control room during mixdown. The [TALKBACK] button indicator flashes while the Talkback function is active (see page 120). J [TALKBACK] button This button turns on the Talkback function. While the button indicator is lit, the Talkback mic signal is sent to any desired Bus or Slot (see page 123). K MONITOR LEVEL control This control adjusts the monitor level. Note: • The DM1000 allows you to patch source signals to any output jack (other than the PHONES jack). Therefore, the console does not feature a dedicated monitor output jack. Instead, you can route monitoring signals to any desired output jack (typically to OMNI OUT jacks 1–12). • By default, monitoring signals are assigned to OMNI OUT jacks 11 and 12. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 25 Rear Panel Rear Panel AD Input and Output Section (p. 25) 2 15 3 OMNI IN 14 2 13 1 12 11 10 9 12 11 10 9 INPUT 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SLOT Control Surface & Rear Panel 16 4 SLOT POWER ON OFF AC IN SMPTE IN METER REMOTE MIDI OUT IN TO HOST USB CONTROL WORD CLOCK OUT Digital I/O & Control Section (p. 26) 1 2 2 AES/EBU Power Section (p. 27) 2TR IN DIGITAL 1 IN COAXIAL COAXIAL AES/EBU SLOT Section (p. 26) AD Input and Output Section 1 16 4 15 3 OMNI IN 14 2 13 1 12 11 10 9 12 11 10 9 INPUT 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 A INPUT connectors 1–16 These balanced XLR-3-31-type connectors accept line-level and microphone signals. The nominal signal level ranges from –60 dB through +4 dB. 3 Male XLR plug 1 (ground) 3 (cold) 2 (hot) B OMNI IN connectors 1–4 These balanced XLR-3-31-type connectors accept line-level signals. The nominal signal level is +4 dB. C OMNI OUT connectors 1–4 These balanced XLR-3-32-type connectors output any Bus signals and channel Direct Out signals. The nominal signal level is +4 dB. Female XLR plug 2 (hot) 3 (cold) 1 (ground) DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 26 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel SLOT Section SLOT SLOT 1 A SLOT 1 & 2 You can insert optional mini-YGDAI cards into these slots. (See page 28 for more information on installing these cards.) Digital I/O & Control Section 1 METER SMPTE IN REMOTE MIDI OUT CONTROL 2 IN TO HOST USB WORD CLOCK OUT 3 4 5 6 7 2TR IN DIGITAL 1 IN 8 2 1 2 AES/EBU COAXIAL COAXIAL AES/EBU 9 JL K A METER connector This connector enables you to connect an optional MB1000 Meter Bridge. B CONTROL connector This 25-pin D-sub connector provides access to the GPI (General Purpose Interface). Through this connector, the Talkback function can be turned on and off from external equipment, or external equipment can be started or stopped from the DM1000 (see page 276). C SMPTE TIME CODE INPUT connector This balanced XLR-3-31-type connector is used to input SMPTE timecode to synchronize the Automix function. D REMOTE connector This 9-pin D-Sub connector is used to remotely control external equipment that supports the Yamaha AD8HR, AD824 and Sony P2 Protocol (remote control commands that are used on TASCAM DA-98HR and other professional video recorders). Use a reverse cable to connect an AD8HR/AD824, and use a straight cable to connect a P2 Protocol device. Use a reverse cable to connect two DM1000s to each other. Connecting two DM1000s to each other enables communication via MIDI Protocol and SOLO Logic synchronization. This connector can also be used to control the DM1000 from a video editor that supports the ESAM II protocol. In this case, use the dedicated cable to make the connection (see page 264). E MIDI IN & OUT ports These standard MIDI IN and OUT ports enable you to connect the DM1000 to other MIDI equipment. F TO HOST USB port This USB port enables you to connect a computer equipped with a USB port. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Rear Panel 27 G WORD CLOCK OUT connector This BNC connector outputs a wordclock signal from the DM1000 to a connected external device. I 2TR OUT DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 This XLR-3-31-type connector outputs AES/EBU format digital audio. The connector is typically used to connect the digital stereo input (AES/EBU format) of a DAT recorder, MD recorder, or CD recorder. J 2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL 2 This phono connector outputs consumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio. The connector is typically used to connect the digital stereo input (consumer format) of a DAT recorder, MD recorder, or CD recorder. K 2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 This XLR-3-32-type connector accepts AES/EBU format digital audio. The connector is typically used to connect the digital stereo output (AES/EBU format) of a DAT recorder, MD recorder, or CD recorder. L 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 2 This phono connector accepts consumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio. The connector is typically used to connect the digital stereo output (consumer format) of a DAT recorder, MD recorder, or CD recorder. Power Section 1 POWER ON OFF 2 AC IN 3 A Grounding screw Be sure to use this screw to ground the DM1000 to protect yourself against electrical shock. The supplied power cord features a three-pin plug. If the ground terminal of the AC outlet is grounded, then the unit will be grounded sufficiently via the power cord. If the AC outlet does not provide a suitable ground, this screw must be connected to a suitable ground point. Grounding is also an effective method for eliminating hum, interference, and other noise. B POWER ON/OFF switch This switch turns the power to the DM1000 on or off. Note: To prevent loud clicks and thumps in your speakers, turn on your audio equipment in the following order (reverse this order when turning off)—sound sources, multitrack and master recorders, DM1000, monitoring power amplifiers. C AC IN connector This connector enables you to connect the DM1000 to an AC outlet via the supplied power cord. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 2 Control Surface & Rear Panel H WORD CLOCK IN connector This BNC connector inputs a wordclock signal from a connected external device to the DM1000. 28 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel Installing an Optional Card Visit the following Yamaha Pro Audio web site to ensure that the card you are installing is supported by the DM1000. Also, verify the number of cards (including other Yamaha or third-party cards) that can be installed in the unit. <http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/>. Follow the steps below to install an optional mini-YGDAI card. 1 Make sure that the power to the DM1000 is turned off. 2 Undo the two fixing screws and remove the slot cover, as shown below. Keep the cover and fixing screws in a safe place for future use. 5 3 OM N IN I 14 2 13 1 12 12 11 10 11 PO W ON ER OF F 9 10 DIG MO ITAL DE MIX L D IN M1 G C 000 ON SO LE 9 INP UT 8 7 8 6 7 AC IN 6 ME TE R CO 5 4 5 SL OT 4 NT RO L SM 3 2 3 PT E IN 2 1 1 RE MO TE SL OT MID I OU T IN TO H USOST B WO RD OU T CL OC K IN 1 2 AE S/E BU CO AX IAL 2T DIGR IN ITA L 2 1 CO AX IAL AE S/E BU 3 Insert the card between the guide rails and slide it all the way into the slot, as shown below. You may have to push firmly to fully insert the card into the internal connector. 5 3 OM N IN I 14 2 13 1 12 12 11 10 11 PO W ON ER OF F 9 10 DIG MO ITAL DE MIX L D IN M1 G C 000 ON SO LE 9 INP UT 8 7 8 6 7 AC IN 6 CO NT RO L 5 4 5 SL OT ME TE R 4 SM 3 2 3 PT E IN 2 1 1 RE MO TE SL OT MID OU T I IN TO H USOST B WO RD OU T CL OC K IN 1 AE S/E BU 2 CO AX IAL 2T DIGR IN ITA L 2 1 CO AX IAL AE S/E BU 4 Secure the card using the attached thumbscrews. Tighten the screws firmly, or else the card may not be grounded correctly, which may cause the DM1000 to malfunction. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Operating Basics 29 3 Operating Basics This chapter describes basic operations on the DM1000, including how to use the display and operate the controls on the top panel. 3 About the Display 4EDIT indicator 3Current Scene 5EDIT indicator 6MIDI indicator 7Surround mode indicator 8Sampling rate indicator 1Selected DISPLAY 2Selected channel JPage title 9Timecode counter KChannel name LPage area MPage tabs NTab Scroll arrows A Selected DISPLAY This section indicates the currently-selected display page group. B Selected channel This section indicates the Input or Output Channel currently selected by its corresponding [SEL] button or fader. The first four characters are the Channel ID (e.g., CH1–CH48, BUS1–BUS8, AUX1–AUX8, ST-L, ST-R). The second four characters are the channel’s Short name. You can edit the channel’s Short name if you desire (see page 79 and 91). C Current Scene This section indicates the number and title of the currently-selected Scene memory (see page 164). If the selected Scene is write-protected, a padlock icon ( ) appears. D EDIT indicator This indicator appears when the current mix settings no longer match those of the Scene that was most-currently recalled. It works in unison with the Edit indicator dot on the Scene Memory display. E ESAM indicator This indicator appears when you select ESAM for the REMOTE FUNCTION parameter on the Setup | Remote page (see page 260). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Operating Basics The top panel display indicates various parameters that you must set before you can operate the DM1000. The display indicates the following items: 30 Chapter 3—Operating Basics F MIDI indicator This indicator appears when the DM1000 is receiving MIDI data via the MIDI IN port, USB port, REMOTE connector, or an installed MY8-mLAN card. G Surround mode indicator This indicator identifies the currently-selected Surround mode (ST=stereo, 3-1, 5.1, or 6.1) (see page 125). H Sampling rate indicator This indicator identifies the DM1000’s current sampling rate: 44.1 kHz (44k), 48 kHz (48k), 88.2 kHz (88k), or 96 kHz (96k). I Timecode counter This counter displays the current position in the MIDI timecode being received via the MIDI IN port, USB port, REMOTE connector, or an installed MY8-mLAN card. It works in unison with the timecode counter on an optional MB1000 Meter Bridge. If MIDI clock is selected as the timecode source on the Setup | Time Ref page, this counter indicates the current MIDI clock position in bars:beats:clocks. J Page title This section indicates the title of the current page. K Channel name Depending on which page is currently selected, the channel name is the Long name of the channel currently selected by its corresponding [SEL] button or the cursor buttons. L Page area This page area displays various page contents. M Page tabs These tabs enable you to select a display page. N Tab Scroll arrows These arrows indicate that more pages are available. Selecting Display Pages To select a display page: 1 Press the corresponding button on the top panel to select the desired page group. Display pages are grouped by function. To select a page group, press the [DISPLAY] button in the following sections: AUX SELECT, ENCODER MODE, ROUTING, EQUALIZER, MONITOR, USER DEFINED KEY. You can select additional page groups by pressing the desired button in the DISPLAY ACCESS section. 2 You can select pages that have currently-displayed tabs by pressing the [F1]–[F4] buttons. If the selected display page group contains multiple pages, press the [F1]–[F4] buttons below the corresponding tab to select a specific page. 3 To select a page for which a tab is not currently displayed, press either the Left or Right [ ]/[ ] Tab Scroll button (depending on where the page is located) to display the page tab, then press the corresponding [F1]–[F4] button. If display page groups contain more than four pages, either the left or right arrow appears. To display the currently-hidden tabs, press the Right or Left [ ]/[ ] Tab Scroll button. You can also select a page from a page group as follows: DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Display Interface 31 • Selecting the next page in a page group: Press the button you selected in Step 1 repeatedly. This enables you to select a page that has a hidden tab. • To select the previous page in a page group: Press and hold down the button you selected in Step 1. The screen steps back through the pages one by one. Release the button when the desired page is displayed. This enables you to select a page that has a hidden tab. 4 Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor (a bold frame) to a button, parameter box, rotary control, or fader so that you can change the value. Tip: The DM1000 remembers the current page and parameter when you select a new page group. If you return to the previous page group, the DM1000 displays the correct page, with the same parameter selected. You can also select a page by using the controls or buttons on the top panel (see page 266). Display Interface This section describes how to use the display interface. Rotary Controls & Faders The rotary controls and faders enable you to adjust the continuously variable parameter values, including Input Channel levels and effects parameters. Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a rotary control or fader you want to adjust, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the value. Buttons The buttons enable you to turn certain functions on (enabled) or off (disabled). Move the cursor to the appropriate button, then press the [ENTER] button to turn the function on (highlighted) or off. The buttons also enable you to select one of two options or to execute certain functions. Parameter Boxes The parameter boxes enable you to select one of multiple options. Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a parameter box, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the setting. You may need to press the [ENTER] button to confirm the change of certain parameter box. If you edit a value in this type of parameter boxes, the value flashes. Press the [ENTER] button to confirm the change, and the flashing stops. If you move the cursor to other parameters while the edited value is flashing, the edit is cancelled. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Operating Basics • To select the first page in the group: Double-click the button you selected in Step 1. 3 32 Chapter 3—Operating Basics Confirmation Messages For certain functions, the DM1000 prompts you for confirmation before executing the functions, as shown here. Move the cursor to YES and press [ENTER] to execute the function, or move the cursor to NO and press [ENTER] to cancel. If you take no action for awhile, the confirmation window closes automatically and the function is not executed. Title Edit Window The Title Edit window enables you to enter titles for Scene and library memories, Automixes, and so on. You can enter 4, 12, or 16 characters, depending on the item. The figure on the left shows uppercase characters and various punctuation marks. The figure on the right shows lowercase characters and numbers. Use the cursor buttons to select characters, and press the [ENTER] button to enter them into the title. The cursor moves to the right automatically as each character is entered. To move the cursor accross the title, use the Parameter wheel or the left and right arrows in the display page. Use the SHIFT LOCK button to select uppercase or lowercase characters, and use the SPC button to enter a space. To insert a space at the cursor position and move subsequent characters to the right, move the cursor to the INS button and press [ENTER]. To delete the character at the cursor position and move subsequent characters to the left, move the cursor to the DEL button and press [ENTER]. When you have finished, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER] to confirm the title. To cancel the title entry, move the cursor to the CANCEL button, then press [ENTER]. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Selecting Layers 33 Selecting Layers Input Channels and Output Channels (Bus Outs & Aux Outs) are arranged into layers, as illustrated below. There are six layers altogether. 3 1 33 AUX 1 2 34 35 36 17 1 33 AUX 1 18 2 34 19 AUX 2 3 35 20 AUX 3 4 36 Input Channel Layer 33–48 17 1 33 AUX 1 18 2 34 50 30 60 70 40 50 19 AUX 2 3 35 4 36 Master Layer 17 1 33 AUX 1 18 2 34 3 35 4 36 Remote Layer 1 17 1 33 AUX 1 18 2 34 3 35 20 AUX 3 4 36 Remote Layer 2 17 1 AUX 1 33 20 18 2 AUX 2 34 19 3 AUX 3 35 5 37 20 20 AUX 4 36 22 6 38 37 7 39 20 22 6 AUX 6 24 38 8 40 23 AUX 7 25 39 9 41 24 8 AUX 8 40 26 10 42 BUS 1 41 43 26 10 42 BUS 2 28 12 44 43 13 45 28 BUS 4 44 14 46 29 13 BUS 5 31 45 47 30 14 BUS 6 32 46 48 15 BUS 7 47 0 +10 15 20 32 10 0 0 5 5 10 10 15 15 20 20 30 30 40 50 60 70 0 5 15 20 10 15 20 5 5 0 5 30 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 +10 5 5 10 15 20 10 30 50 30 60 70 40 50 31 STEREO 0 +10 5 5 0 5 40 15 20 30 40 40 50 60 70 16 10 15 5 10 10 15 20 0 0 5 0 5 30 20 50 60 70 BUS 8 0 +10 15 20 0 +10 10 15 20 10 15 30 5 5 0 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 20 10 30 0 +10 5 5 10 15 20 5 5 0 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 STEREO 0 +10 5 20 10 15 30 15 10 15 20 48 5 0 5 BUS 7 15 20 10 30 15 20 30 40 40 50 60 70 16 10 0 +10 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 5 10 10 15 20 0 0 5 0 5 30 20 50 60 70 BUS 8 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 5 5 0 10 15 20 32 15 20 10 15 20 0 +10 10 15 20 10 15 30 5 5 0 5 40 0 +10 5 5 BUS 6 15 20 10 30 47 0 +10 5 5 10 15 20 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 5 30 STEREO 0 +10 5 20 10 15 30 15 10 40 0 +10 5 48 5 0 5 BUS 7 15 50 30 60 70 40 50 5 5 0 10 40 31 0 +10 5 15 20 30 40 40 50 60 70 16 10 20 10 15 20 30 BUS 5 15 20 10 50 30 60 70 40 50 12 46 5 30 5 10 10 15 20 0 0 5 0 5 30 20 50 60 70 BUS 8 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 15 20 14 10 15 32 15 20 10 15 20 0 +10 10 15 20 10 15 30 5 5 0 5 40 0 +10 5 5 BUS 6 5 0 +10 5 30 30 0 +10 5 5 0 10 40 47 0 +10 5 5 10 15 20 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 5 30 STEREO 0 +10 5 20 10 15 30 15 10 40 20 10 48 5 0 5 BUS 7 15 15 50 30 60 70 40 50 15 20 29 BUS 4 15 BUS 3 45 5 30 31 0 +10 5 20 10 0 5 40 0 +10 11 13 10 15 50 30 60 70 40 50 46 5 20 15 20 30 40 40 50 60 70 16 10 40 5 10 10 15 20 0 0 5 0 5 30 20 50 60 70 BUS 8 15 20 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 5 30 BUS 5 5 50 30 60 70 40 50 15 20 27 29 0 +10 20 10 30 14 10 40 32 0 +10 5 20 10 15 30 BUS 6 15 50 30 60 70 40 50 15 20 5 5 0 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 30 0 +10 5 15 20 10 11 10 15 20 44 5 30 47 5 5 0 +10 10 15 20 10 15 30 5 5 0 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 10 40 20 10 0 5 BUS 3 15 20 10 30 12 10 40 0 +10 5 45 5 20 15 BUS 7 15 20 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 5 30 BUS 4 15 50 30 60 70 40 50 5 5 0 10 40 28 0 +10 5 20 10 15 20 27 BUS 2 15 9 43 5 30 13 10 40 31 0 +10 5 20 10 15 30 BUS 5 15 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 5 40 29 0 +10 5 15 20 46 5 5 0 +10 5 5 10 15 20 10 15 20 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 10 40 20 10 11 10 15 50 30 60 70 40 50 44 5 30 14 BUS 6 15 20 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 5 BUS 3 5 50 30 60 70 40 50 20 10 20 25 27 0 +10 15 30 12 10 40 30 0 +10 5 20 10 15 30 BUS 4 15 50 30 60 70 40 50 15 0 +10 0 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 28 0 +10 5 15 20 10 5 5 10 20 42 5 20 45 5 5 0 +10 5 5 5 30 20 15 20 30 40 40 50 60 70 STEREO 0 10 15 20 10 15 30 5 10 10 15 20 0 0 5 0 5 30 20 50 60 70 48 0 +10 5 0 +10 5 5 10 15 20 10 15 30 16 5 5 0 10 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 10 40 20 10 0 5 30 BUS 1 15 20 10 15 30 10 10 40 0 +10 0 5 43 5 20 13 BUS 5 15 20 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 5 30 BUS 2 15 50 30 60 70 40 50 5 5 10 40 26 0 +10 5 20 10 15 20 11 10 40 29 0 +10 5 20 10 15 30 BUS 3 15 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 5 30 AUX 8 15 50 30 60 70 40 50 7 41 5 10 20 10 20 9 BUS 1 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 15 30 25 0 +10 15 27 0 +10 5 20 44 5 5 0 +10 15 0 +10 5 0 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 32 BUS 8 20 10 15 20 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 10 40 20 10 15 30 50 30 60 70 40 50 5 0 +10 0 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 42 5 5 40 12 BUS 4 15 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 10 15 20 10 5 5 10 15 20 10 15 30 40 10 5 28 0 +10 47 5 5 5 30 20 15 5 10 15 20 10 15 20 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 10 15 20 10 15 30 0 +10 5 5 5 30 20 31 BUS 7 0 +10 5 40 20 10 15 20 46 0 10 15 20 10 15 30 14 5 5 0 10 15 5 5 30 BUS 2 0 +10 15 20 43 5 0 10 40 20 10 0 5 30 AUX 7 0 +10 0 5 8 5 10 40 26 41 15 20 11 BUS 3 15 20 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 5 30 AUX 8 15 50 30 60 70 40 50 5 5 10 40 24 0 +10 5 20 10 20 23 AUX 6 15 AUX 5 39 15 30 9 5 10 40 27 0 +10 5 20 10 15 30 BUS 1 15 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 50 30 60 70 40 50 5 7 5 10 15 25 0 +10 5 20 10 15 20 42 5 5 40 0 +10 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 +10 5 5 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 30 BUS 6 20 10 15 20 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 10 20 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 5 30 AUX 7 5 20 10 20 21 23 0 +10 15 30 40 5 10 40 20 10 0 +10 0 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 4 38 8 AUX 8 15 50 30 60 70 40 50 15 20 5 5 10 15 20 10 15 30 24 0 +10 10 BUS 2 15 20 10 15 30 50 30 60 70 40 50 5 26 0 +10 5 0 5 40 20 10 0 5 30 AUX 5 0 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 6 5 10 40 0 +10 5 5 10 15 20 10 15 30 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 39 41 5 10 15 20 15 20 9 BUS 1 15 20 10 0 5 30 AUX 6 15 50 30 60 70 40 50 21 AUX 4 +10 5 0 5 10 15 20 22 5 20 7 5 10 40 25 0 +10 5 0 5 30 AUX 7 15 20 10 15 30 23 0 +10 5 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 40 5 10 40 20 10 20 0 +10 10 15 20 10 15 20 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 19 AUX 2 30 40 50 37 5 0 5 30 20 5 AUX 5 0 +10 5 5 10 15 20 10 15 30 38 15 30 8 AUX 8 15 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 5 50 30 60 70 40 50 21 AUX 4 +10 5 0 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 6 5 10 40 24 0 +10 5 20 10 15 20 45 5 5 5 30 20 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 13 0 10 15 20 10 15 20 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 10 15 20 10 15 30 20 0 +10 5 5 30 20 29 BUS 5 0 +10 5 15 20 10 15 30 5 0 10 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 44 5 15 20 10 15 30 12 0 10 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 28 BUS 4 5 0 10 15 20 10 15 20 40 5 5 0 5 30 20 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 5 30 AUX 6 15 50 30 60 70 40 50 20 AUX 3 10 15 20 22 0 +10 5 20 39 5 10 40 20 10 15 30 7 AUX 7 15 20 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 19 AUX 2 30 40 50 37 5 10 15 20 10 15 20 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 30 40 50 5 AUX 5 0 +10 0 5 30 20 23 0 +10 5 20 10 15 30 10 15 20 10 15 30 43 5 5 0 10 15 20 10 15 20 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 11 0 +10 5 5 0 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 5 5 10 15 20 10 15 30 38 5 10 20 21 AUX 4 +10 5 0 5 40 6 AUX 6 15 20 10 15 30 50 30 60 70 40 50 20 AUX 3 10 15 20 22 5 0 5 40 10 15 20 10 15 20 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 0 +10 5 5 5 30 20 27 BUS 3 0 +10 5 5 0 5 30 20 0 +10 10 15 20 10 15 20 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 30 40 50 37 5 0 5 30 20 5 AUX 5 0 +10 5 5 10 15 20 10 15 30 40 21 AUX 4 +10 5 0 5 10 15 20 10 15 20 10 15 30 42 0 10 15 20 10 15 30 10 0 +10 5 5 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 26 BUS 2 0 +10 5 5 0 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 41 0 10 15 20 10 15 20 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 9 0 +10 5 5 5 30 20 25 BUS 1 0 +10 5 5 10 15 20 10 15 20 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 40 0 10 15 20 10 15 30 8 0 +10 5 0 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 24 AUX 8 0 +10 5 0 5 30 20 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 39 5 10 15 20 10 15 20 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 7 0 +10 5 0 5 30 20 23 AUX 7 0 +10 10 15 20 10 15 30 20 5 0 5 15 30 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 38 5 10 15 20 10 15 30 6 0 +10 5 0 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 22 AUX 6 0 +10 5 5 10 15 20 10 15 20 30 40 50 37 5 10 15 20 10 15 20 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 5 0 +10 5 0 5 30 20 21 AUX 5 +10 5 0 5 10 Input Channel Layer 17–32 10 15 20 10 15 30 4 AUX 4 5 0 5 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 20 0 +10 5 5 10 15 20 10 15 20 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 3 AUX 3 0 +10 0 +10 0 30 20 19 AUX 2 5 15 30 40 50 30 60 70 40 50 18 5 5 10 15 20 10 15 20 30 40 50 17 Operating Basics +10 5 0 5 10 Input Channel Layer 1–16 40 50 60 70 16 BUS 8 48 STEREO The currently-selected layer determines the function of the channel strip Encoders, [SEL] buttons, [SOLO] buttons, [ON] buttons, and faders. Use the LAYER buttons to select a layer you wish to edit using the channel strip controls. The following table shows the layers that you can access using the LAYER buttons, and the parameters you can control using the channel strips on each layer. LAYER buttons Layers Channel Strips 1–8 9–16 [1-16] button Input Channel Layer 1–16 Input Channels 1–16 [17-32] button Input Channel Layer 17–32 Input Channels 17–32 [33-48] button Input Channel Layer 33–48 Input Channels 33–48 [REMOTE 1] button Remote Layer 1 [REMOTE 2] button Remote Layer 2 Operation depends on the selected target (see page 215). [MASTER] button Master Layer Aux Send masters 1–8 Bus Out masters 1–8 Tip: The function of each channel strip fader and Encoder depends on the currently-selected Fader mode (see page 35) and Encoder mode (see page 36) respectively. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 34 Chapter 3—Operating Basics Selecting Channels The SELECTED CHANNEL controls enable you to edit main mix parameters for a channel selected from the Input Channels and Output Channels (Aux Outs, Bus Outs, and Stereo Out). To select a channel for editing using the SELECTED CHANNEL controls, follow the steps below: 1 Press the corresponding LAYER button to select a layer that includes the desired channel (see page 33). SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING DISPLAY DISPLAY 1 EQUALIZER 2 HIGH Q 3 4 5 6 7 8 HIGH MID FREQUENCY LOW MID LOW GAIN STEREO DIRECT 2 Use the corresponding [SEL] button or fader to select the desired Input or Output Channel. The channel is selected and the [SEL] button indicator lights up. If the Fader Touch Sense parameter is enabled on the Setup | Prefer2 page (see page 268), operating a fader selects the corresponding channel. The Channel’s ID and Short name appear in the upper-left corner of the display. If the currently-displayed page contains a relevant channel parameter, the cursor moves to that parameter automatically. If the currently-displayed page contains no such parameter, a page that does contain such a parameter is selected automatically. GRAB Tip: For paired Input or Output Channels, the channel for which you pressed the [SEL] button is selected, and its indicator lights up. The [SEL] button indicator of the paired partner flashes. 3 To select the Stereo Out, press the STEREO [SEL] button or touch the [STEREO] fader. Repeatedly pressing the STEREO [SEL] button toggles between the Stereo Out left and Stereo Out right channels. If the currently-displayed page contains a relevant Stereo Out parameter, the cursor moves to that parameter automatically. If the currently-displayed page contains no such parameter, a page that does contain such a parameter is selected automatically. Tip: If the Auto Channel Select parameter is enabled on the Setup | Prefer1 page (see page 266), operating a fader or Encoder, or turning on a [SOLO] or [ON] button selects the corresponding channel. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Selecting Fader Modes 35 Selecting Fader Modes The function of channel faders (1–16) depends on the selected Layer and Fader mode. 1 Select a layer that includes the desired channel (see page 33). FADER The following table shows the channel fader functions for each Layer and Fader mode. LAYER buttons [1-16] button [17-32] button [33-48] button [REMOTE 1] button [REMOTE 2] button [MASTER] button Fader Mode Fader Channel Strip Fader 1–8 9–16 Input Channels 1–16 level Aux Input Channels 1–16 Aux Send level Fader Input Channels 17–32 level 3 AUX Aux Input Channels 17–32 Aux Send level Fader Input Channels 33–48 level Aux Input Channels 33–48 Aux Send level Fader Operation depends on the selected target (see page 215). Aux No operation Fader Operation depends on the selected target (see page 215). Aux No operation No operation Fader Aux Send master 1–8 output level Bus Out master1–8 output level Aux No operation No operation No operation Note: You cannot select Aux mode while the Master layer is selected. If you switch to the Master layer while the FADER MODE [AUX] indicator is lit, the indicator automatically turns off and the [FADER] indicator lights up. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Operating Basics FADER MODE 2 Press the FADER MODE [FADER/AUX] button to select a Fader mode. • When the [FADER]indicator lights up: .............................................. You can use channel faders to control Input Channel levels or Output Channel (Aux Out 1–8, Bus Out 1–8) master levels. • When the [AUX] indicator lights up: .............................................. You can use channel faders to control Input Channel Aux Send levels. 36 Chapter 3—Operating Basics Selecting Encoder Modes The function of Encoders (1–16) depends on the selected Layer and Encoder mode. 1 Select a layer that includes the desired channel (see page 33). 2 Press the corresponding ENCODER MODE button to ENCODER MODE select an Encoder mode. • When the [PAN] button indicator lights up: ...............................................Encoders 1–16 function as Pan controls for the selected layer. • When the [AUX] button indicator lights up: ...............................................Encoders 1–16 function as Aux Send level controls for the selected layer. • When the [ASSIGN] button indicator lights up: ...............................................Encoders control the parameters assigned to the [ASSIGN] button for the selected layer. (See the next section for more information on how to assign parameters to the [ASSIGN] button.) DISPLAY PAN AUX ASSIGN The following table shows the Encoder functions for each Layer and Encoder mode. LAYER buttons [1-16] button [17-32] button [33-48] button Encoder Mode Channel Strip Encoder 1–8 Pan Input Channels 1–16 pan Aux Input Channels 1–16 Aux Send level Assign Assigned parameter1 Pan Input Channels 17–32 pan Aux Input Channels 17–32 Aux Send level Assign Assigned parameter1 Pan Input Channels 33–48 pan Aux Input Channels 33–48 Aux Send level Assign Assigned parameter 9–16 Pan [REMOTE 1] button Aux Assign Pan [REMOTE 2] button Operation depends on the selected target (see page 215). Aux Assign Pan [MASTER] button Aux Assign No operation Assigned parameter 1. If ALT LAYER is assigned, the Encoder controls the parameters assigned to the faders of the layer that is currently not selected (if Layer 1-16 is currently selected, the Encoder controls the parameters assigned to the faders in Layer 17-32; if Layer 17-32 is currently selected, the Encoder controls the parameters assigned to the faders in Layer 1-16). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button 37 Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button While the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button indicator is lit, you can use Encoders 1–16 to control a parameter assigned to the [ASSIGN] button. Follow the steps below to assign a parameter to the [ASSIGN] button. 2 Use the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select a parameter in the right-hand box. A parameter is selected when it appears inside the dotted box. Refer to the next page for a complete list of assignable parameters. 3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the assignment. Once assigned, press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button to turn on the button indicator. You can now use Encoders 1–16 to control the assigned parameter. Note: When channels that do not feature the currently-assigned parameter are selected, the Encoders are inactive. For example, if the assigned Encoder parameter is “Phase,” and the Master layer is selected, Encoders are inactive, because the Aux Sends and Bus Outs do not feature Phase parameters. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 3 Operating Basics 1 Press the ENCODER MODE [DISPLAY] button. The Encoder | Encoder page appears. The name of the parameter currently assigned to the [ASSIGN] button is displayed in the left-hand box. All assignable parameters are displayed in the right-hand box. (The parameter currently-assigned to the button is highlighted in the right-hand box.) 38 Chapter 3—Operating Basics • Assignable Encoder Mode Parameter List # Parameters Encoder Operation Push Switch Operation — — 1 No Assign 2 Attenuator Attenuator 3 Input Patch Input Channel patch 4 Insert In Patch Insert In patch 5 Insert Out Patch Insert Out patch 6 Direct Out Direct Out patch 7 Phase: Phase: normal/reverse 8 Insert On Insert on/off 9 Aux pre/post Aux pre/post 10 Delay On Delay on/off 11 Delay Time Delay Time 12 Delay FB.Gain Delay FB.Gain 13 Delay Mix Delay Mix 14 EQ On EQ on/off 15 EQ Type EQ Type 16 EQ Low Q EQ Low Q 17 EQ Low F EQ Low Frequency 18 EQ Low G EQ Low Gain 19 EQ Low-Mid Q EQ Low-Mid Q 20 EQ Low-Mid F EQ Low-Mid Frequency 21 EQ Low-Mid G EQ Low-Mid Gain 22 EQ High-Mid Q EQ High-Mid Q 23 EQ High-Mid F EQ High-Mid Frequency 24 EQ High-Mid G EQ High-Mid Gain 25 EQ High Q EQ High Q 26 EQ High F EQ High Frequency 27 EQ High G EQ High Gain 28 Gate On Gate on/off 29 Gate Threshold Gate Threshold 30 Gate Range Gate Range 31 Gate Attack Gate Attack 32 Gate Decay Gate Decay 33 Gate Hold Gate Hold 34 Comp On Comp on/off 35 Comp Threshold Comp Threshold 36 Comp Ratio Comp Ratio 37 Comp Attack Comp Attack 38 Comp Release Comp Release 39 Comp Out Gain Comp Out Gain 40 Comp Knee/Width Comp Knee/Width 41 Surr L/R Pan Surr L/R Pan 42 Surr F/R Pan Surr F/R Pan 43 Surr Front DIV Surr Front DIV 44 Surr Rear DIV Surr Rear DIV 45 Surr LFE Level Surr LFE Level 46 Surr Pan Wheel Surr Pan Wheel 47 Scene Fade Time Scene Fade Time 48 ALT LAYER Alt Layer 49 HA Gain HA Gain 50 Ins HA Gain HA Ins Gain DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Display the settings. Confirm patch selection. Display the settings. Metering 39 Metering This section describes how to check Input and Output Channel levels using the Meter pages or an optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [METER] button repeatedly until the Meter | Position page appears. This page enables you to set the metering position for Input and Output Channels. 3 Operating Basics 1 2 A INPUT section This section enables you to select the metering position for Input Channel signals. B OUTPUT section This section enables you to select the metering position for Output Channel (Aux Out 1–8, Bus Out 1–8, Stereo Out) signals. 2 Move the cursor to the desired parameter button in the INPUT or OUTPUT section, then press [ENTER]. You can select one of the following three positions in each section. • PRE EQ ..........................Immediately before EQ. • PRE FADER ..................Immediately before the fader. • POST FADER ...............Immediately after the fader. Tip: If an optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge is installed, changes on this page will be reflected on the Input & Output Metering Position parameters on the Peak Meter Bridge. 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [METER] button repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears. - CH1-32 page - CH33-48 page These pages display the Input Channel 1–32 levels and Input Channel 33–48 levels respectively. - CH1-48 page This page displays the Input Channel 1–48 levels altogether. - Master page This page displays the Output Channel (Aux Out 1–8, Bus Out 1–8, Stereo Out) levels altogether. - Effect page This page displays the internal effects processor 1–4 input and output levels altogether. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 40 Chapter 3—Operating Basics - Stereo page This page displays the Stereo Out or Control Room Monitor output level. Tip: You can also select the CH1-32 page, the CH33-48 page, or the Master page using the LAYER buttons. In this case, if an optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge is installed, the Peak Meter Bridge displays the same signal meters in unison with the DM1000 meters. 4 If you selected the CH1-32 page, the CH33-48 page, or the Master page, use the MASTER MODE parameter to select one of the following three metering signal types: • GATE GR....................... The amount of gain reduction for the gate (except for the Master page) • COMP GR..................... The amount of gain reduction for the compressor • LEVEL ........................... Input Channel input level, or Output Channel output level • CH1-32 page • CH33-48 page • CH1-48 page • Master page Tip: These pages also allow you to change the metering position using the POSITION parameter. This parameter setting operates in unison with the Meter | Position page setting. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Metering 41 5 If you selected the Stereo page, use the METER MODE parameter to select one of the following two metering signal types: • C-R .................................Control Room Monitor output signal • STEREO.........................Stereo Out signal 3 Operating Basics This parameter setting affects the meters on the Meter | Master page, the ST meter on the Stereo page, and the stereo meter on the right side of the display. 6 To activate the Peak Hold function, move the cursor to the PEAK HOLD button, then press [ENTER]. The PEAK HOLD button turns on, and the peak level is held on the meters on the page and on the Peak Meter Bridge. To cancel the Peak Hold function, turn the PEAK HOLD button off. If an optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge is installed, its Peak Hold function switches in unison with the DM1000 meters. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 42 Chapter 3—Operating Basics DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Connections and Setup 43 4 Connections and Setup This chapter explains how to connect and set up your DM1000. Connections The following section explains three typical ways to connect the DM1000 to external equipment, although there are numerous others. Synthesizer Synthesizer MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER Integrated Sampling Sequencer Real-time External Control Surface Modular Synthesis Plug-in System Integrated Sampling Sequencer Real-time External Control Sur face Modular Synthesis Plug-in System SONG SCENE SONG SCENE REC REC MY8-AD96 etc. MY8-AD96 etc. Effects processor Connections and Setup ■ Configuring an analog 32-channel mixing system SLOT 1 Master recorder SLOT 2 88 2TR IN DIGITAL connector OMNI IN connector 2 1 +48V OFF OMNI OUT connector OFF +48V ON OFF 5 4 3 +48V ON +48V ON 6 +48V OFF ON OFF 7 +48V ON 8 +48V OFF ON OFF 9 +48V ON OFF 10 +48V ON OFF 11 +48V ON OFF 12 +48V ON OFF 13 +48V ON OFF 14 +48V ON OFF OFF 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 16 15 +48V ON 1 +48V ON OFF +48V ON OFF ON 2TR OUT DIGITAL connector PAD -60 -16 -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL -60 -16 GAIN PEAK SIGNAL 0 -60 -16 GAIN 0 10 TALKBACK LEVEL PEAK SIGNAL 10 PHONES LEVEL GAIN PEAK SIGNAL PHONES SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP UTILITY MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW INPUT PATCH / PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY PAN/ SURROUND DYNAMICS EFFECT OVER 0 OVER 0 -2 -2 -4 -4 -6 -6 -8 -8 OUTPUT PATCH SCENE AUXSELECT DISPLAY AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 AUX6 AUX7 AUX8 ENCODER MODE -10 -10 -12 -12 -14 -14 -18 -18 -24 -24 -30 -30 -36 -36 -42 -42 -48 -48 -56 -56 -72 -72 L R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MONITOR EQUALIZER DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY AUTOMIX HIGH SOLO CLEAR HIGH MID 2TR D1 2TR D2 LOW MID SLOT BUS Q FREQUENCY DIMMER TALKBACK LOW STEREO 0 10 MONITOR LEVEL GAIN STEREO DIRECT INC DEC GRAB SCENE MEMORY FADER MODE OMNI OUT connectors 11–12 DISPLAY FADER INPUT connector STORE RECALL AUX PAN AUX ASSIGN F1 F2 F4 F3 VOL Guitar SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL AUTO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SEL ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 INPUT connector VOL Monitoring system ENTER ON USER DEFINED KEYS +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 0 DISPLAY 5 5 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 5 15 5 5 5 0 5 0 10 5 15 5 10 5 15 5 5 5 0 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 5 15 5 5 5 0 5 0 10 5 15 5 0 10 5 15 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 20 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 30 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 30 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 50 60 70 60 40 50 1 17 2 33 AUX 1 18 3 34 AUX 2 19 4 35 AUX 3 20 5 36 AUX 4 21 6 37 AUX 5 22 7 38 AUX 6 23 8 39 AUX 7 24 9 40 AUX 8 25 10 41 BUS 1 26 11 42 BUS 2 27 12 43 BUS 3 28 13 44 BUS 4 29 14 45 BUS 5 30 70 15 46 BUS 6 31 PHONES jack 15 10 16 47 BUS 7 32 48 BUS 8 4 STEREO In this system, the DM1000, with optional AD cards (MY8-AD, MY8-AD96, etc.) installed in Slots 1 and 2, is used as a keyboard mixer or sound re-enforcement mixer. Up to 32 analog channels, including Inputs 1–16 and line inputs on the AD cards, are available for mixing. Tip: You can adjust the gain of the AD card channels by setting the DIP switches on the cards. For more information, see your AD card documentation. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 44 Chapter 4—Connections and Setup ■ Configuring a recording system with a hard disk recorder Computer HDR (Hard Disk Recorder) MIDI IN MIDI OUT MY8-AT etc. Effects processor OUT MY8-AT etc. SLOT 1 SLOT 2 TO HOST USB port IN MIDI OUT OUT MIDI IN IN WORD CLOCK IN connector WORD CLOCK OUT connector Master recorder 88 2TR IN DIGITAL connector OMNI IN connector 2 1 +48V OFF OMNI OUT connector Synthesizer OFF +48V ON OFF 5 4 3 +48V ON +48V ON 6 +48V OFF ON OFF 7 +48V ON 8 +48V OFF ON OFF 9 +48V ON OFF 10 +48V ON OFF 11 +48V ON OFF 12 +48V ON OFF 13 +48V ON OFF 14 +48V ON OFF OFF 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 16 15 +48V ON 1 +48V ON OFF +48V ON OFF ON 2TR OUT DIGITAL connector PAD -60 -16 -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL -60 -16 GAIN PEAK SIGNAL 0 -60 -16 GAIN 0 10 TALKBACK LEVEL PEAK SIGNAL 10 PHONES LEVEL GAIN PEAK SIGNAL PHONES SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING DISPLAY ACCESS AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW OVER 0 OVER 0 -2 -2 -4 -4 -6 -6 -8 -8 Integrated Sampling Sequencer Real-time External Control Surface Modular Synthesis Plug-in System -10 -10 -12 -12 -14 -14 -18 -18 -24 -24 -30 -30 -36 -36 -42 -42 -48 -48 -56 -56 -72 -72 L R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MONITOR EQUALIZER DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER HIGH SOLO CLEAR HIGH MID 2TR D1 2TR D2 LOW MID SLOT BUS Q STEREO SONG SCENE INPUT PATCH / PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY OUTPUT PATCH REC PAN/ SURROUND DYNAMICS EFFECT SCENE AUXSELECT DISPLAY AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 AUX6 AUX7 AUX8 ENCODER MODE FREQUENCY DIMMER TALKBACK LOW 0 10 MONITOR LEVEL GAIN STEREO DIRECT INC DEC GRAB SCENE MEMORY FADER MODE OMNI OUT connectors 11–12 DISPLAY FADER INPUT connector STORE RECALL AUX PAN AUX ASSIGN F1 F2 F4 F3 VOL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL AUTO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SEL ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 INPUT connector VOL Monitoring system ENTER ON USER DEFINED KEYS +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 0 DISPLAY 5 5 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 5 15 20 10 10 5 5 0 5 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 5 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 5 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 5 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 10 5 15 20 10 5 5 5 0 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 5 10 5 15 20 10 5 5 5 0 0 10 5 15 20 10 5 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 5 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 5 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 10 5 15 20 10 5 5 5 0 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 10 20 30 30 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 40 30 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 50 60 70 60 15 30 15 40 50 30 15 1 17 30 15 2 33 AUX 1 18 30 15 3 34 AUX 2 19 30 15 4 35 AUX 3 20 30 15 5 36 AUX 4 21 30 15 6 37 AUX 5 22 7 38 AUX 6 23 30 15 30 15 8 39 AUX 7 24 30 15 9 40 AUX 8 25 10 41 BUS 1 26 30 15 30 15 11 42 BUS 2 27 30 15 12 43 BUS 3 28 30 15 13 44 BUS 4 29 30 15 14 45 BUS 5 30 70 15 46 BUS 6 31 PHONES jack 15 20 16 47 BUS 7 32 48 BUS 8 STEREO In this system, the DM1000, with optional I/O cards (MY8-AT, MY16-AT, MY8-TD, etc.) installed in Slots 1 and 2, is one component in a system that includes a digital MTR, such as a hard disk recorder. This system will support track recording, overdubbing, track bouncing, and mixdown. You can also control the hard disk recorder’s transport section by sending MMC commands from the DM1000 to the recorder. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Connections 45 ■ Configuring a recording system that uses a DAW (Digital Audio Workstation) Computer 4 Connections and Setup MIDI interface MIDI IN MIDI OUT Audio interface MY-16AT etc. Effects processor OUT MY-16AT etc. SLOT 1 SLOT 2 TO HOST USB port IN MIDI OUT OUT MIDI IN IN WORD CLOCK IN connector WORD CLOCK OUT connector Master recorder 88 2TR IN DIGITAL connector OMNI IN connector 2 1 +48V OFF OMNI OUT connector Synthesizer +48V ON OFF 1 +48V ON OFF 2 5 4 3 +48V ON 3 6 +48V OFF ON 4 OFF +48V ON 5 7 +48V OFF 6 8 ON OFF 7 9 +48V ON OFF 8 10 +48V ON 9 OFF +48V ON 10 11 OFF +48V ON 11 12 OFF 12 13 +48V ON OFF 13 14 +48V ON OFF 14 +48V ON OFF 15 16 15 +48V ON OFF +48V ON OFF ON 16 2TR OUT DIGITAL connector PAD 20dB 20dB -60 -16 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL 20dB -60 -16 GAIN PEAK SIGNAL 0 TALKBACK LEVEL 0 -60 -16 GAIN 10 PEAK SIGNAL 10 PHONES LEVEL GAIN PEAK SIGNAL PHONES SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING DISPLAY ACCESS AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW OVER 0 Integrated Sampling Sequencer Real-time External Control Surface Modular Synthesis Plug-in System MONITOR EQUALIZER DISPLAY MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER DISPLAY DISPLAY OVER 0 -2 -2 -4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 HIGH SOLO CLEAR HIGH MID 2TR D1 2TR D2 SLOT BUS -4 -6 Q -6 -8 -8 -10 -10 -12 -12 -14 -14 -18 -18 -24 -24 -30 -30 -36 -36 -42 -42 -48 -48 -56 -56 -72 -72 L R STEREO SONG SCENE INPUT PATCH / PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY OUTPUT PATCH REC PAN/ SURROUND DYNAMICS EFFECT SCENE AUXSELECT DISPLAY AUX1 AUX5 AUX2 AUX3 AUX6 AUX7 AUX4 LOW MID DIMMER TALKBACK LOW 0 10 MONITOR LEVEL GAIN STEREO DIRECT INC DEC GRAB AUX8 ENCODER MODE FREQUENCY SCENE MEMORY FADER MODE OMNI OUT connectors 11–12 DISPLAY FADER INPUT connector STORE RECALL AUX PAN AUX ASSIGN F1 F2 F4 F3 VOL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL AUTO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SEL ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 INPUT connector VOL Monitoring system ENTER SEL ON USER DEFINED KEYS +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 0 DISPLAY 5 5 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 5 15 20 10 10 5 5 0 5 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 5 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 5 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 5 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 10 5 15 20 10 5 5 5 0 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 5 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 5 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 5 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 5 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 5 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 10 5 15 20 10 5 5 5 0 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 10 20 20 30 30 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 40 30 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 50 60 70 60 15 30 15 40 50 30 15 1 17 30 15 2 33 AUX 1 18 30 15 3 34 AUX 2 19 30 15 4 35 AUX 3 20 30 15 5 36 AUX 4 21 30 15 6 37 AUX 5 22 30 15 7 38 AUX 6 23 30 15 8 39 AUX 7 24 30 15 9 40 AUX 8 25 10 41 BUS 1 26 30 15 30 15 11 42 BUS 2 27 30 15 12 43 BUS 3 28 30 15 13 44 BUS 4 29 30 15 14 45 BUS 5 30 70 15 46 BUS 6 31 PHONES jack 15 16 47 BUS 7 32 48 BUS 8 STEREO In this system, the DM1000, with optional I/O cards (MY8-AT, MY16-AT, MY8-AE, etc.) installed in Slots 1 and 2, is connected to a computer-based DAW (Digital Audio Workstation). The DM1000 can provide audio input and output for the DAW. If you connect the DM1000 and the computer via USB, the DM1000’s Remote function enables you to control the DAW’s locate and transport functions and change the parameters. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 46 Chapter 4—Connections and Setup Wordclock Connections and Settings About wordclock Digital audio equipment must be synchronized when digital audio signals are transferred from one device to another. Even if both devices use identical sampling rates, digital signals may not transfer correctly, or audible noise or unwanted clicks may occur if the digital audio processing circuits inside each digital audio device are not synchronized with each other. Wordclocks are signals that enable digital audio processing circuits to synchronize with each other. In a typical digital audio system, one device operates as the wordclock master, transmitting wordclock signals, and the other devices operate as wordclock slaves, synchronizing to the wordclock master. If you are digitally connecting the DM1000 to other equipment, you must decide which device to use as the wordclock master and which devices to use as slaves, then set up all the devices accordingly. The DM1000 can be used as the wordclock master running at either 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, or 96 kHz, or slaved to an external wordclock source. Wordclock connections To establish wordclock synchronization between the DM1000 and external devices, you can distribute wordclock signals independently via dedicated cables, or you can use clock information derived from digital audio connections. The WORD CLOCK IN and OUT connectors transmit and receive wordclock signals independently on the DM1000. The following examples show two ways in which wordclock signals can be distributed and received via the WORD CLOCK IN and OUT connectors. • Daisy Chain Distribution In this example, the wordclock signal is distributed in a “daisy-chain” fashion, with each device feeding the wordclock signal from the wordclock out connector on to the wordclock in connector of the next device. This method of distribution is not recommended for larger systems. Wordclock master WC OUT (BNC) WC IN (BNC) WC OUT (BNC) WC IN (BNC) WC OUT (BNC) WC IN (BNC) Device A Device B Device C Wordclock slave Wordclock slave Wordclock slave • Star Distribution In this example, a dedicated wordclock distribution box is used to supply wordclock signals from the wordclock master to each wordclock slave individually. Wordclock master DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual WC OUT (BNC) Wordclock distribution box WC IN (BNC) WC IN (BNC) WC IN (BNC) WC IN (BNC) Device A Device B Device C Device D Wordclock slave Wordclock slave Wordclock slave Wordclock slave Wordclock Connections and Settings 47 If the external devices do not have wordclock in and out connectors, you can use the clock information included in the digital audio signals. In this case, digital audio signals and wordclock signals are transferred via the 2TR OUT DIGITAL and 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks or via the digital I/O cards installed in the rear panel slots. Digital audio signal + Wordclock signal External device 4 Digital I/O card OFF +48V ON OFF 5 4 3 +48V ON +48V ON 6 +48V OFF ON OFF 7 +48V ON 8 +48V OFF ON OFF 9 +48V ON OFF 10 +48V ON OFF 11 +48V ON OFF 12 +48V ON OFF 13 +48V ON OFF 14 +48V ON OFF OFF 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 16 15 +48V ON 1 +48V ON OFF +48V ON OFF -60 -16 -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL -60 -16 GAIN PEAK SIGNAL 0 -60 -16 GAIN 0 ON 10 TALKBACK LEVEL PEAK SIGNAL 10 PHONES LEVEL GAIN PEAK SIGNAL PHONES SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING DISPLAY ACCESS AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW OVER 0 -2 -2 -4 PAN/ SURROUND DYNAMICS EFFECT OUTPUT PATCH SCENE AUXSELECT DISPLAY AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 AUX6 AUX7 AUX8 ENCODER MODE 1 2 HIGH SOLO CLEAR HIGH MID 2TR D1 2TR D2 LOW MID SLOT BUS -4 -6 Q -6 -8 INPUT PATCH / PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY OVER 0 MONITOR EQUALIZER -8 -10 -10 -12 -12 -14 -14 -18 -18 -24 -24 -30 -30 -36 -36 -42 -42 -48 -48 -56 -56 -72 -72 L R 3 4 5 6 7 8 FREQUENCY DIMMER TALKBACK LOW STEREO 0 10 MONITOR LEVEL GAIN STEREO DIRECT INC DEC GRAB SCENE MEMORY FADER MODE DISPLAY FADER STORE RECALL AUX PAN AUX ASSIGN F1 F2 F4 F3 ENTER SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL AUTO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SEL ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ON USER DEFINED KEYS +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 0 DISPLAY 5 5 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 5 15 5 5 5 0 5 0 10 5 15 5 10 5 15 5 5 5 0 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 5 15 5 5 5 0 5 0 10 5 15 5 0 10 5 15 10 15 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 20 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 30 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 40 50 30 60 40 70 50 30 40 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 1 17 50 30 60 40 70 50 2 33 AUX 1 18 50 30 60 40 70 50 3 34 AUX 2 19 50 30 60 40 70 50 4 35 AUX 3 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 5 36 AUX 4 21 50 30 60 40 70 50 6 37 AUX 5 22 50 30 60 40 70 50 7 38 AUX 6 23 50 30 60 40 70 50 8 39 AUX 7 24 50 30 60 40 70 50 9 40 AUX 8 25 10 41 BUS 1 26 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 11 42 BUS 2 27 50 30 60 40 70 50 12 43 BUS 3 28 50 30 60 40 70 50 13 44 BUS 4 29 50 30 60 40 70 50 14 45 BUS 5 30 31 50 50 60 70 60 70 15 46 BUS 6 16 47 BUS 7 32 48 BUS 8 STEREO Specifying the Wordclock Source To digitally connect the DM1000 to external devices, you must specify the wordclock source for the system. Follow the steps below. Note: When you change the wordclock settings on any device in your digital audio system, some devices may output noise due to being out of synchronization. Be sure to turn down your monitoring device before changing wordclock settings. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F1] (WORD CLOCK) button. The Word Clock page appears. On this page, you can view the current synchronization status of input signals at each slot and connector. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Connections and Setup 2 1 +48V OFF PAD 48 Chapter 4—Connections and Setup The source select button indicators are explained below: A usable wordclock signal is present at this input, and it is in sync with the current DM1000 internal clock. No wordclock signal is present at this input. A usable wordclock signal is present at this input, but it is out of sync with the current DM1000 internal clock. This input is the currently-selected wordclock source. This input was selected as the wordclock source, but no usable signal was received. This input cannot be selected as the wordclock source because (a) a wordclock signal cannot be sourced from this input on this type of I/O card, or (b) no I/O card is installed. Tip: • The FS box displays the sampling frequency at which the DM1000 is currently operating. • The SLOT TYPE column displays the names of any installed I/O cards. • The IN and OUT columns indicate the number of input and output channels available for each installed I/O card. 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a source, then press [ENTER]. The following are possible wordclock sources: • SLOT1/SLOT2.............. These buttons select the inputs from the digital I/O cards installed in Slots 1 and 2 as the wordclock source. Inputs are selected in pairs (odd and even numbers in this order). The SLOT TYPE column displays the names of any installed I/O cards. The number of pairs depends on the type of I/O card installed. • WC IN............................ This button selects the wordclock signal input at the WORD CLOCK IN connector on the rear panel. • 2TRD1 ........................... This button selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL 1 input as the wordclock source. • 2TRD2 ........................... This button selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL 2 input as the wordclock source. • INT 44.1k, INT 48k, INT 88.2, INT 96k........ These buttons select the internal clock generator as the wordclock source. The DM1000 will function as the wordclock master. Note: To transfer data at higher sampling frequencies (88.2 kHz or 96 kHz) between the DM1000 and connected external devices, you need to set the data transfer format. See page 59 for more information. Tip: If the wordclock signal is interrupted while the DM1000 is syncing to an external device, the DM1000 will automatically switch to an internal clock (INT 44.1k/ INT 48k/INT 88.2k/INT 96k) that is closest to the interrupted clock. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Input and Output Patching 49 Input and Output Patching The DM1000 is designed to enable you to patch (assign) signals to Inputs and Outputs. This section explains how to view the signals patched to Inputs and Outputs and change the assignment. Tip: If the data from a connected instrument fails to be input, or if you are unable to monitor an OMNI OUT, check the I/O patching, as explained below: Patching Input Channels Follow the steps below to view or change the patching. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the following page appears. 1 Inputs and Slot channels that are currently assigned to Input Channels are shown in the parameter boxes (1) beneath the channel numbers. The parameter indicators are explained below: • – .....................................No assignment • AD1–AD16....................INPUT connectors 1–16 • OMN1–OMN4 .............OMNI IN connectors 1–4 • S1-1–S116......................Channels 1–16 of Slot 1 • S2-1–S216......................Channels 1–16 of Slot 2 • FX1-1–FX1-8 ................Outputs 1–8 of Internal Effects Processor 1 • FX2-1–FX2-2 ................Outputs 1–2 of Internal Effects Processor 2 • FX3-1–FX3-2 ................Outputs 1–2 of Internal Effects Processor 3 • FX4-1–FX4-2 ................Outputs 1–2 of Internal Effects Processor 4 • 2D1L & 2D1R ...............2TR DIGITAL IN 1 (L/R) DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 4 Connections and Setup By default, the Input Channels are patched as follows: • INPUT connectors 1–16 .................... Input Channels 1–16 • Channels 1–8 of Slot 1 ....................... Input Channels 17–24 • Channels 1–8 of Slot 2 ....................... Input Channels 25–32 • Outputs 1–2 of Internal Effects Processor 1–4 ...................................... Input Channels 33–40 • L&R of 2TR IN DIGITAL connectors 1–2 .................................... Input Channels 41–44 • OMNI IN connectors 1–4.................. Input Channels 45–48 50 Chapter 4—Connections and Setup • 2D2L & 2D2R ............... 2TR DIGITAL IN 2 (L/R) • BUS1–8.......................... Bus 1–8 Outputs • AUX1–8 ......................... Aux Send 1–8 Outputs 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a patch parameter (1) for which you want to change the assignment, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching. 3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change. Tip: • By default, you can also use the Encoders to select Input Channel sources. Rotate the Encoders to display the In Patch/In Patch page and select sources. Press the Encoder push switches to confirm the changes. • To restore the default patching, recall Input Patch memory #00 (see page 176). Patching Omni Outs By default, the Omni Outs are patched as follows: • OMNI OUT connectors 1–8 ..............Aux Sends 1–8 • OMNI OUT connectors 9–10 ............Stereo Bus L & R • OMNI OUT connectors 11–12 ..........Control Room Monitor L & R Follow the steps below to view or change the patching. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the following page appears. 1 Signals that are currently assigned to the OMNI OUT connectors are shown in the parameter boxes (1) underneath the connector numbers. The parameter indicators are explained below: • – .............................................................No assignment • BUS1–BUS8..........................................Bus 1–8 signals • AUX1–AUX8 ........................................Aux Send 1–8 Signals • ST L/R....................................................Stereo Bus signals • INS CH1–INS CH48 ...........................Input Channels 1–48 Insert Outs • INS BUS1–INS BUS8 ..........................Bus 1–8 Insert Outs • INS AUX1–INS AUX8 .........................Aux Send 1–8 Insert Outs • INS ST-L/ST-R......................................Stereo Bus Insert Outs DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Input and Output Patching 51 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a patch parameter (1) you wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching. 3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change. Tip: To restore the default patching, recall Output Patch memory #00 (see page 177). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 4 Connections and Setup • SURR XXX (“XXX” is a channel name). .............. Surround Monitor Outs • CR-L/CR-R........................................... Control Room Monitor signals • CAS BUS1–BUS8 ................................ Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs • CAS AUX1–AUX8 ............................... Aux Send 1–8 Cascade Outs • CAS ST-L/ST-R.................................... Stereo Bus Cascade Outs • CASSOLOL/CASSOLOR ................... Solo Bus Cascade Outs • SOLO-L/SOLO-R................................ Solo signals • M.MX XXX (“XXX” is a channel name.) .............. Surround Monitor Outs 52 Chapter 4—Connections and Setup DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Analog I/O & Digital I/O 53 5 Analog I/O & Digital I/O This chapter describes the DM1000’s analog and digital input/output connectors as well as the basic operations involving the digital I/Os. Analog Inputs & Outputs AD Input Section • INPUT connectors 1–16 These balanced XLR-3-31-type connectors accept line-level and microphone signals. The nominal input range is –60 dB through +4 dB. 9 8 INPUT • OMNI IN connectors 1–4 These balanced XLR-3-31-type connectors accept line-level signals. 3 OMNI 2 IN The nominal signal level is +4 dB. • Phantom Power 1 +48V OFF ON Inputs 1 through 16 feature switchable +48V phantom powering for use with condenser-type microphones and direct boxes. Individual +48V [ON/OFF] switches on each input turn phantom power on and off. • PAD switches Inputs 1 through 16 feature pad switches, which attenuate input signals by 20 dB. 1 PAD 20dB • GAIN controls -60 -16 GAIN Inputs 1 through 16 feature rotary gain controls that adjust input sensitivity. Input sensitivity ranges from +4 dB to –40 dB when the Pad is on, and from –16 dB to –60 dB when the Pad is off. • PEAK & SIGNAL Indicators The SIGNAL indicator lights up when the input signal level is 20 dB PEAK below nominal. The PEAK indicator lights up when the input signal SIGNAL level is 3 dB below clipping. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 5 Analog I/O & Digital I/O The DM1000’s rear panel features Input connectors 1–16, which enable you to connect microphone and line-level sources, and OMNI IN connectors, which enable you to connect line-level sources. Signals input at these connectors can be patched to Input Channels. (See page 109 for more information on patching Input Channels.) 54 Chapter 5—Analog I/O & Digital I/O Omni Outs • OMNI OUT connectors 1–12 INPUT The DM1000 rear panel features OMNI OUT connectors 1–12 for 9 8 connecting line-level sources, such as a monitoring system, master recorder, external effects processor. The OMNI OUT connectors use balanced XLR-3-32-type jacks, with a rated output level of +4 dB. These outputs can be patched to Bus Outs and Input Channel Direct Outs. (See page 113 for more information on patching outputs to the Omni Outs.) Digital Inputs & Outputs The DM1000 rear panel features digital input and output connectors that enable you to connect external digital devices. Any signal path can be patched to these digital inputs and outputs. You can also add analog and digital I/Os by installing optional I/O cards in Slots 1 and 2. Digital I/O Connectors • 2TR IN DIGITAL connector These connectors accept signals from a DAT or other 2-track digital recorder or consumer format digital audio device. 2TR IN DIGITAL 1 uses an XLR-3-31-type connector and accepts 2TR IN 1 DIGITAL AES/EBU format digital audio. 2 2TR IN DIGITAL 2 is an RCA phono connector and accepts conCOAXIAL AES/EBU sumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio. 2TR D1 2TR D2 You can patch signals input at these connectors to any Input Channels (see page 114). You can monitor these inputs via the Control Room monitors by using the MONITOR [2TR D1] and [2TR D2] buttons. • 2TR OUT DIGITAL connectors These connectors output signals to a DAT or other 2-track digital recorder or consumer format digital audio device. 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1 uses an XLR-3-32-type connector and outputs 1 AES/EBU format digital audio. 2 2TR OUT DIGITAL 2 is an RCA phono connector and outputs conAES/EBU COAXIAL sumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio. You can patch outputs to Bus Outs and Input Channel Direct Outs (see page 114). SLOT 1–2 These slots allow you to install optional mini-YGDAI (Yamaha General Digital Audio Interface) I/O cards. These cards offer AD/DA conversion, and various analog I/O options and digital I/O interfaces in all the popular digital audio interconnect formats, including AES/EBU, ADAT, and Tascam. You can patch signals input at these card connectors to any Input Channels or Insert Ins (see page 110). You can patch the card outputs to Bus Outs or Input Channel Direct Outs (see page 115). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Converting Sampling Rates of Signals Received at 2TR Digital Inputs 55 The following mini-YGDAI I/O cards are currently available. Card Format In Out MY8-AD MY8-AD241 MY4-AD Analog in Phone jack (balanced) x8 — 24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz 4 MY8-AD96 XLR-3-31 type (balanced) x4 8 Analog out — 24-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz D-sub 25-pin 4 8 8 MY8-AE2 8 8 AES/EBU I/O XLR-3-32 type (balanced) x4 D-sub 25-pin 24-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz Euroblock x4 D-sub 25-pin 24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 8 Optical x2 16 16 Optical x4 8 8 BNC connector x8 MY8-AE96 MY8-AE96S3 MY8-AT2 MY16-AT2 ADAT I/O MY8-TD2 Tascam MY16-TD2 MY8-mLAN2 MY16-mLAN2 D-sub 25-pin BNC wordclock output 24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz 16 16 8 8 16 16 8 8 D-sub 25-pin IEEE1394 6-pin 1394 connector x2 WAVES Y56K WAVES Y96K 24-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz D-sub 25-pin ADAT 24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz 24-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz Optical x2 1. This card is a substitution for a 20-bit MY8-AD card. 2. These cards support 24-bit/96 kHz in Double Channel mode. (Separate 96 kHz wordclock required.) 3. This card is identical to the MY8-AE96, except that it features a sampling rate converter. See the Yamaha Professional Audio Web site at the following URL for up-to-date news on I/O cards: <http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/>. Converting Sampling Rates of Signals Received at 2TR Digital Inputs The DM1000’s 2TR Digital Inputs and an optional MY8-AE96S Digital I/O card feature sampling rate converters, so you can easily convert the sampling frequency of digital inputs to the current DM1000 sampling rate. 1 To convert the sampling rate of the signals input at the 2TR Digital Inputs, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F1] button. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 5 Analog I/O & Digital I/O MY16-AE2 20-bit, 44.1/48 kHz 8 MY8-ADDA96 Analog in/out MY8-AEB Connectors 20-bit, 44.1/48 kHz 8 MY4-DA MY8-DA96 Resolution/Sampling Rate 56 Chapter 5—Analog I/O & Digital I/O The DIO | Word Clock page appears. Use the following buttons to turn the sampling rate converter on and off. • 2TR IN D1..................... This button turns on and off the sampling rate converter for 2TR IN DIGITAL 1. • 2TR IN D2..................... This button turns on and off the sampling rate converter for 2TR IN DIGITAL 2. 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the 2TR IN D1 or 2TR IN D2 button, then press [ENTER]. The sampling rate converter for the selected 2TR Digital Input turns on or off. When on, the sampling rate of the received digital audio is converted to the DM1000’s current sampling rate. Tip: • The FS box displays the sampling frequency at which the DM1000 is currently operating. • The AES/EBU and COAXIAL parameter fields display the converted sampling rate. (If the current wordclock is not synched, they display “Unlock.”) 3 To convert the sampling rate of the signals input at the installed I/O card inputs, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F2] button. The DIO | Format page appears. 1 Use the buttons in the SRC sections (1) to turn the sampling rate converters on and off. You can turn the sampling rate converters of the digital I/O cards on or off in pairs (odd & even channels, in this order). Note: The sampling rate converter is available only on the Yamaha MY8-AE96S Digital I/O card. If you have installed other types of I/O cards in the slots, or if no cards are installed in the DM1000, the buttons in the SRC sections are disabled. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status 57 4 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to any two-channel button in the SRC sections (1), then press [ENTER]. The sampling rate converter for the selected 2-channel input turns on or off. When on, the sampling rate of the received digital audio is converted to the DM1000’s current sampling rate. Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status You can view and monitor the Channel Status (sampling rate, emphasis, etc.) of digital audio signals connected to the 2TR Digital Inputs and Slot Inputs as follows. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] button, then press the [F2] button. The Utility | CH Status page appears. 5 Analog I/O & Digital I/O 1 2 3 4 5 6 On this page, use the following buttons to select a slot or connector for which you want to view the channel status. A SLOT1, SLOT2 These buttons enable you to view the Channel Status of each two adjacent (odd and even, in this order) channel signals connected to the digital I/O cards installed in Slots 1 and 2. B 2TR IN This button enables you to view the Channel Status of input signals connected to the 2TR Digital Inputs. 2 Move the cursor to the desired input or slot button, then press [ENTER]. Channel Status information for the selected input is displayed. However, if a mini-YGDAI I/O card other than AES/EBU format is installed, Channel Status information will be grayed out. Channel Status information includes the following items: C FS Indicates the sampling rate. If no signal is being input, or if the incoming wordclock is not synching to the internal clock, “Unlock” appears. D EMPHASIS Indicates the Emphasis on/off status. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 58 Chapter 5—Analog I/O & Digital I/O E CATEGORY Indicates the status of “Category Code Bit” included in the IEC958 Part 2 (S/PDIF-Consumer) format. This parameter can display the following values: Parameter values Description General Temporarily used. Laser Optical Laser optical device D/D Conv Digital - Digital converter and signal processing device Magnetic Magnetic tape device and magnetic disk device D.Broadcast Digital broadcast reception Instruments Musical instrument, microphone, and sources that generate string signals A/D Conv A/D converter (without copyright information) A/D Conv with(C) A/D converter (with copyright information) Solid Memory Solid memory device Experimental Experimental device Unknown Unknown Note: “AES/EBU” appears in the Category row when you are monitoring IEC958 Part 3 (AES/EBU-Professional) format signals (that do not include Category Code Bit). F COPY Indicates the status of copy protection information included in the IEC958 Part2 (S/PDIF-Consumer) format signals. “OK” appears if copying is allowed. “Prohibit” appears if copy-protected. 3 If you select the SLOT button for a slot that has an MY16-AE card installed, use the 01–08 and 09–16 buttons located in the lower-right corner of the screen to select a channel group you wish to display. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Dithering Digital Outputs 59 Dithering Digital Outputs When digital audio is transferred to lower-resolution systems, truncated bits may generate unpleasant noise. To cancel the audible effect of this noise, a small complement of noise is intentionally added to the digital outputs. This process is called “dithering.” On the DM1000, you can dither the 2TR Digital Outputs and Slot Outputs. For example, you can apply dithering to the DM1000 stereo mix data and record to a 16-bit DAT recorder. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F2] button. The DIO | Format page appears. The dithering settings are displayed on the bottom of the page. 5 Analog I/O & Digital I/O 2 Move the cursor to the output or channel to which you want to apply dithering, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the value that matches the resolution of the receiving device. Note: • You cannot apply dithering to outputs or channels that are set to “OFF.” • Dithering is effective only when the resolution of the receiving device is lower than that of the DM1000. Tip: To copy the currently-selected setting to all channels, double-click the [ENTER] button. The copy confirmation window is displayed. Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates To operate the DM1000 at higher sampling frequencies (88.2 kHz or 96 kHz) and transfer digital audio signals to and from connected external devices, you must set the data transfer format in accordance with the sampling frequencies supported by the external devices. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F1] button. The DIO | Word Clock page appears. 2 Select INT88.2k, INT96k, or an external device running at the higher sampling rates as the wordclock source. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 60 Chapter 5—Analog I/O & Digital I/O 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button, then press the [F2] button. The DIO | Format page appears. 1 4 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to an IN/OUT parameter field (1), and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to set the data transfer format. The IN/OUT parameters are used to set one of the following data transfer formats for each slot input and output. However, you cannot select this mode unless the DM1000 is operating at a higher sampling rate. • DOUBLE CHANNEL In Double Channel mode, digital audio data is received and transmitted as mono signals at a sampling rate that is exactly half (44.1/48 kHz) the current higher sampling rate. Data is handled by two channels. This is useful when you wish to transfer data between the DM1000 running at a higher sampling rate and legacy 44.1/48 kHz digital MTRs or HDRs. Note: Double Channel mode reduces the total number of inputs or outputs on the corresponding slot. The even-numbered channels are disabled. • DOUBLE SPEED In Double Speed mode, digital audio data is received and transmitted at the current higher sampling rate (i.e., 88.2 kHz or 96 kHz). Select this mode if the devices that support the higher sampling rates transmit or receive data. Note: You can select this setting only for slots in which a digital I/O card that inputs/outputs double-speed digital audio data (e.g., MY8-AE96, MY8-AE96S) is installed. • SINGLE In Single mode, digital audio data is received and transmitted at a sampling rate that is half (44.1/48 kHz) the current higher sampling rate of the DM1000. For example, this is useful when you wish to send 44.1 kHz digital signals from an external HDR to the DM1000 running at 88.2 kHz. Note: You cannot select this setting for slots in which a digital I/O card that inputs/outputs double-speed digital audio data (e.g., MY8-AE96, MY8-AE96S) is installed. Tip: The parameter fields display “–” if the corresponding slots contain no I/O cards or if AD/DA cards or other I/O cards that do not allow you to set the transfer format have been installed. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Input Channels 61 6 Input Channels This chapter describes how to adjust the DM1000’s Input Channel parameters. About Input Channels The input Channel section enables you to adjust the level and tone of the signals input to the DM1000 and route the signals to Bus 1–8, Stereo Bus, and Aux Out 1–8. The following diagram illustrates the Input Channel signal flow. INPUT 1(...48) 6 INPUT PATCH Input Channels • (Phase) This section switches the phase of input signals. • GATE This dynamics processor can be used as a gate or for ducking. • COMP (Compressor) This dynamics processor can be used as compressor, expander or limiter. The compressor can be pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. • ATT (Attenuator) This section enables you to attenuate or amplify the level of signals that will be input to the EQ. The attenuator enables you to prevent post-EQ signals from clipping and to correct signal levels that are too low. • 4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer) This parametric EQ features four bands (high, high-mid, low-mid, and low). • INPUT DELAY (Input delay) This section enables you to delay input signals. You can use this delay to fine-tune the timing between channels, or as a delay effect with feedback. • ON (On/Off) This section enables you to turn the channel on or off. The channel is muted with the Off setting. • LEVEL This section enables you to adjust the input level of the Input Channel signal. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 62 Chapter 6—Input Channels • PAN This section enables you to adjust the pan setting of the signals routed from the Input Channels to the Stereo Bus. You can also apply the pan setting to a pair of Bus channels. If the internal Surround Sound setting is activated, the Surround Pan settings for 3-1, 5.1, and 6.1 channels are available (see page 125). • AUX (Aux Send level) This section enables you to adjust the level of signals routed to Aux Out 1–8. The signals can be routed to Aux Sends from either the pre-fader or post-fader position. • INSERT This section enables you to patch input signals to external devices via the on-board I/O connectors or I/O cards, or insert the internal effect processors. • METER This section enables you to switch the metering position of the signal levels that are displayed in the Meter page or on the optional MB1000 Meter Bridge. (See page 39 for more information on selecting the metering position.) Tip: You can store these channel parameter settings in the Channel library. You can also store the Gate, Compressor, and EQ parameter settings to the corresponding libraries. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Setting the Input Channels from the Display 63 Setting the Input Channels from the Display To set the Input Channel parameters, you can either move the cursor to the desired parameter on the display and change the value, or operate the desired button or control on the top panel to directly change the setting. This section explains how to set the parameters via the display. Switching the Signal Phase To switch the phase of each Input Channel, press the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the following /INS/DLY | Phase page appears. Move the cursor to the NOR/REV button of the channel for which you want to change the phase, then press the [ENTER] or [INC]/[DEC] buttons to change the setting. 6 Input Channels 1 2 A NOR/REV These buttons switch the corresponding Input Channel phase. NOR buttons indicate normal phase, and REV buttons indicate reversed phase. B GLOBAL The GLOBAL NOR/REV buttons allow you to set the phase for all Input Channels simultaneously. Tip: • The name of the currently-selected channel is indicated in the upper-right corner of the screen. • You can set the phase separately for each channel in a channel pair. Delaying Input Channels To set the delay for each channel, press the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears. - DLY 1-16 page This page enables you to set the Delay function for Input Channels 1–16. - DLY 17-32 page This page enables you to set the Delay function for Input Channels 17–32. - DLY 33-48 page This page enables you to set the Delay function for Input Channels 33–48. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 64 Chapter 6—Input Channels The parameters on these three pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same. 1 2 3 A DELAY SCALE • • • • • The following buttons determine the units of the delay value shown below the msec value. meter ............................. Units are set to meters. feet ................................. Units are set to feet. sample ........................... Units are set to samples. beat ................................ Units are set to beats. frame ............................. Units are set to timecode frames. B GANG button When this button is turned on (highlighted), the delay time for each channel in a channel pair can be set simultaneously. When this option is turned off, the delay time can be set for each channel in a channel pair individually. C Channel section • • • • You can set individual delay parameters here. The delay parameters include the following items: msec............................... This parameter sets the delay time in milliseconds. meter/feet/sample/ beat/frame .................... The delay time can be set using units of meters, feet, samples, beats, or frames, which you select by using the DELAY SCALE buttons. MIX................................ This parameter sets the mix balance of dry (Input Channel) and wet (delayed) signals. FB.GAIN ....................... This parameter sets the amount of delay feedback. Tip: • The delay time range depends on the sampling rate at which the DM1000 is operating. (For example, at 44.1 kHz, the range is 0 through 984.1 msec.) • If you select the DELAY SCALE meter or feet button, the distance value can be converted to the delay time based on sonic speeds (about 340 m/sec at 15 degrees Celsius). This option is useful if you wish to correct the timing difference between two sound sources that are far apart. • If you select the DELAY SCALE beat button, a parameter box for setting a note that represents the beat and a parameter box for a tempo (BPM) setting appear below the DELAY SCALE parameter. Setting the note and BPM settings in these parameter boxes enables you to set a delay time that synchronizes to the song tempo. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Setting the Input Channels from the Display 65 Gating Input Channels To set the Input Channel gates, use the [SEL] buttons to select the desired Input Channel, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then the [F1] button. The Dynamics | Gate Edit page appears. 2 3 4 1 5 A KEYIN SOURCE Select one of the following buttons to determine the trigger source for the currently-selected Input Channel’s gate. • SELF ...............................The selected channel’s own input signal is the trigger source. • CHANNEL ....................Another Channel’s input signal is the trigger source. Select the desired channel in the parameter box below the CHANNEL button. • AUX................................An Aux Send signal is the trigger source. Select the desired bus in the parameter box below the AUX button. B STEREO LINK This parameter’s ON/OFF button enables you to pair gates for stereo operation even when the Input Channels are not paired. C CURVE This area displays the current gate curve. D TYPE This area displays the current gate type (GATE or DUCKING). Note: You cannot change the gate type on this page. To change the gate type, recall a program that uses the desired gate type from the Gate library. E Meters These meters indicate the levels of the post-gate signals and the amount of gain reduction. F ON/OFF The ON/OFF button turns the currently-selected Input Channel’s gate on or off. G PARAMETER These controls enable you to set the gate parameters. (See page 324 for more information on the parameters.) Tip: You can store the gate settings in the Gate library, which features preset programs that can be used for various applications (see page 181). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Input Channels 7 6 6 66 Chapter 6—Input Channels Compressing Input Channels To set the Input Channel compressors, use the [SEL] buttons to select the desired Input Channel, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then the [F3] button to display the Dynamics | Comp Edit page. 2 3 1 4 5 6 7 A POSITION Use the Parameter wheel, or the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the position of the compressor within the channel from the following options: • PRE EQ.......................... Immediately before EQ (default) • PRE FADER .................. Immediately before the fader • POST FADER ............... Immediately after the fader B STEREO LINK This ON/OFF button enables you to pair compressors for stereo operation even when channels are not paired. C CURVE This area displays the current compressor curve. D TYPE This field indicates the compressor type used by the currently-selected channel’s compressor (COMP/EXPAND/COMP (H)/COMP (S)). Note: You cannot change the compressor type on this page. To change the compressor type, recall a program that uses the desired compressor type from the compressor library. E Meters These meters indicate the levels of the post-compressor signals and the amount of gain reduction. F ON/OFF The ON/OFF button turns the currently-selected Input Channel’s compressor on or off. G PARAMETER section These controls enable you to set the compressor parameters. (See page 325 for more information on the parameters of each compressor type.) Tip: You can store the compressor settings in the Compressor library, which features preset programs that can be used for various applications (see page 183). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Setting the Input Channels from the Display 67 Attenuating Input Channels To set the attenuator for each channel, press the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears. - ATT 1-16 page This page enables you to set the attenuators for Input Channels 1–16. - ATT 17-32 page This page enables you to set the attenuators for Input Channels 17–32. - ATT 33-48 page This page enables you to set the attenuators for Input Channels 33–48. The parameters on these three pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same. 6 Input Channels Move the cursor to the knob for the desired Input Channel, then rotate the Parameter wheel to set the amount of attenuation in the range of –96 dB to +12 dB. To reset the attenuation amount to 0 dB, move the cursor to the desired knob, then press the [ENTER] button. You can also copy the currently-selected Input Channel attenuation setting to all Input Channels (including those not currently displayed on the screen). To do this, move the cursor to the source knob that you wish to copy, then double-click the [ENTER] button. The confirmation window appears. Select YES to execute the copy operation. You can also set the amount of attenuation in bits. To set the amount in bits in the range of +2 bits to –24 bits, move the cursor to the desired bit shift parameter below the attenuator knob, then rotate the Parameter wheel. (This function is available only for the Input Channel attenuators. You cannot use this function for the Output Channel attenuators.) You can copy the currently-selected attenuation setting in bits to all Input Channels. To do this, move the cursor to the source bit shift parameter box that you wish to copy, then double-click the [ENTER] button. The confirmation window appears. Select YES to execute the copy operation. Tip: • You can also display the desired page by pressing the EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button once, then press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the corresponding channel. • You can also set the attenuation amount (in dB) for the currently-selected channel on the EQ | EQ Edit page. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 68 Chapter 6—Input Channels EQ’ing Input Channels The DM1000’s Input Channels feature 4-band (LOW, LOW-MID, HIGH-MID, HIGH) parametric EQ. The LOW-MID and HIGH-MID bands are a peaking type of EQ. The LOW and HIGH bands can be set to shelving, peaking, or HPF and LPF respectively. 1 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the channel for which you wish to adjust EQ. 2 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to display the EQ | EQ Edit page. 2 3 4 1 5 6 The parameters on this page are described below: A EQ ON The ON/OFF button turns the currently-selected Input Channel’s EQ on or off. You can press the [ENTER] button to turn the EQ on or off as long as the cursor is located on any parameter other than TYPE. B TYPE Selects the type of EQ. TYPE I is the EQ type used on legacy Yamaha 02R series digital mixing consoles. TYPE II is a newly developed algorithm. C ATT Determines the amount of pre-EQ signal attenuation in dB. It is the same Attenuator parameter that appears on the EQ | ATT 1-16, ATT 17-32, and ATT 33-48 pages. D CURVE This area displays the current EQ curve. E Meters These meters indicate the post-EQ signal levels of the currently-selected Input Channel and its available pair partner. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Setting the Input Channels from the Display 69 F LOW, L-MID, H-MID, HIGH sections These sections contain the Q, Frequency (F), and Gain (G) parameters for the four bands. These parameter values range as follows: Parameter Q Frequency Gain LOW LOW-MID HPF, 10.0 to 0.10 (41 steps), L.SHELF HIGH-MID 10.0 to 0.10 (41 steps) HIGH LPF, 10.0 to 0.10 (41 steps), H.SHELF 21.2 Hz to 20.0 kHz (120 steps per 1/12 octave) –18.0 dB to +18.0 dB (0.1 dB steps)1 1. The LOW and HIGH GAIN controls function as filter on/off controls when Q is set to HPF or LPF respectively. 3 Move the cursor to the desired parameter, then rotate the Parameter wheel to change the value. Tip: • You can also press the buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to select the desired band and use the rotary controls to directly edit the Q, F, and G parameters (see page 75). • You can store the EQ settings in the EQ library, which features preset programs that can be used for various applications (see page 184). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 6 Input Channels Tip: • The LOW-band EQ functions as a high-pass filter when the Q parameter in the LOW section is set to HPF. It functions as a shelving-type EQ when the Q parameter is set to L.SHELF. • The HIGH-band EQ functions as a low-pass filter when the Q parameter in the HIGH section is set to LPF. It functions as a shelving-type EQ when the Q parameter is set to H.SHELF. 70 Chapter 6—Input Channels Panning Input Channels Input Channels can be panned in the range of L63 through CENTER to R63. To pan each channel, press the [PAN/SURROUND] button repeatedly until one of the following pages that contains the desired channels appears. - Pan1-32 page This page enables you to set the pan for Input Channels 1–32. - Pan33-48 page This page enables you to set the pan for Input Channels 33–48. The parameters on these two pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same. Move the cursor to the desired Pan control, then rotate the Parameter wheel to set the value. 2 1 A Pan controls These knobs adjust the channel pan settings. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected Pan control to center. B MODE The MODE parameter determines how paired Input Channels are panned. There are three Pan modes as follows: • INDIVIDUAL............... In Individual mode, paired Input Channel pan controls operate independently. • GANG............................ In Gang mode, paired Input Channel pan controls operate in unison, maintaining the current pan range. • INV GANG ................... In Inverse Gang mode, paired Input Channel pan controls operate in unison but move in opposite directions. Tip: • You can use the Encoders to change the Input Channel pan settings (see page 75). This is useful if you wish to change the pan settings quickly. You can also use the Joystick in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to change the pan settings, unless the DM1000 is in Surround mode. • Surround Pan is available when the DM1000 is in Surround mode. Refer to Chapter 11 “Surround Functions” on page 125 for more information on Surround Pan. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 71 Setting the Input Channels from the Display Routing Input Channels You can route each Input Channel to the Stereo Bus, Bus 1–8, or its own Direct Out. With the default setting, signals are routed only to the Stereo Bus. However, you can patch signals to a single or multiple destinations, if necessary. 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears. - CH1-16 page This page enables you to change the routing for Input Channels 1–16. - CH17-32 page This page enables you to change the routing for Input Channels 17–32. - CH33-48 page This page enables you to change the routing for Input Channels 33–48. 6 The parameters on these three pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same. 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 8 A PAN buttons These buttons determine whether the Input Channel’s Pan setting is applied to the Bus Outs. In surround mode, they also determine whether the Surround Pan setting is applied to the Bus Outs. B Bus buttons 1–8 These buttons route the currently-selected Input Channel to the Bus Outs. If the DM1000 is in Surround mode, the button indicators change as follows, depending on the selected Surround mode: Bus buttons 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Surround mode: 3-1 L R C S 5 6 7 8 Surround mode: 5.1 L R Ls Rs C E 7 8 Surround mode: 6.1 L R Ls Rs C Bs E 8 L=Left, R=Right, C=Center, S=Surround, Ls=Left Surround Rs=Right Surround, E=Low Frequency Effect, Bs=Back Surround The above table shows the default assignment. The actual assignment may vary, depending on the settings on the Setup | Surround Bus Setup page. C S button When this button is turned on, the currently-selected Input Channel is routed to the Stereo Bus. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Input Channels Tip: You can also display the desired page by pressing the ROUTING [DISPLAY] button once, then press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the corresponding channel. 72 Chapter 6—Input Channels D D button When this button is turned on, the currently-selected Input Channel is routed to its Direct Out. See page 115 for more information on the Direct Out. E ALL STEREO button This button turns on the S button for all channels on the page. F ALL BUS button This button turns on the Bus buttons 1–8 for all channels on the page. G ALL CLEAR button This button clears all routing assignments on the page. H SURROUND MODE This field displays the current Surround mode. Viewing Input Channel Settings You can view and adjust parameter settings for the currently-selected Input Channel on the View | Parameter or Fader pages. ■ Viewing the Gate, Compressor, and EQ Settings To display the View | Parameter page for a specific Input Channel, use the corresponding [SEL] button or fader to select the desired channel, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then the [F1] button. Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons or [ENTER] button to modify the setting. 43 1 5 2 6 7 8 A GATE section This section enables you to turn the gate-type dynamics processor on or off and set the parameters. (See page 65 for more information.) B COMP section This section enables you to turn the compressor-type dynamics processor on or off and set the parameters. (See page 66 for more information.) C INSERT section This section enables you to turn the Insert on or off and patch the Insert In and Out. (See page 116 for more information.) D EQ section This section enables you to set various EQ parameters. (See page 68 for more information.) DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Setting the Input Channels from the Display 73 E Meters These meters indicate the signal levels of the currently-selected Input Channel and its available pair partner. F (Phase) section You can reverse the signal phase of the currently-selected Input Channel. (See page 63 for more information.) G DELAY section This section enables you to set the currently-selected channel’s Delay function. (See page 63 for more information.) H PAIR section This section indicates whether or not channels are paired. The heart icon ( ) is in one piece when channels are paired. The heart icon is broken ( ) when channels are not paired. (See page 76 for more information.) To display the View | Fader page of a certain Input Channel, use the corresponding [SEL] button or fader to select the desired channel, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then the [F2] button. Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the setting. 1 2 3 4 5 6 A PAN/ON/Fader section • PAN control ..................This control adjusts the currently-selected Input Channel’s Pan parameter. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the Pan control to Center. • ON/OFF button ...........This button turns on or off the currently-selected Input Channel. • Fader ..............................This parameter sets the fader position of the currently-selected Input Channel. The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the Fader to 0.0 dB. B SURROUND PAN section • SURROUND PAN........The Surround pan parameters for the currently-selected Input Channel are displayed only when a Surround mode is selected. See page 125 for more information on Surround pan. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Input Channels ■ Viewing the Pan, Fader, and Aux Send Level Settings 6 74 Chapter 6—Input Channels C BUS ROUTING/FOLLOW PAN section • BUS ROUTING............ This section enables you to select a destination Bus for the selected channel. When the D button is turned on, the channel signal is patched to the Direct Out selected in the parameter box below the button. • FOLLOW PAN ............. This button determines whether the Input Channel’s Pan setting is applied to the paired Bus Outs (Follow Pan function). When the button is turned off, the Follow Pan function is disabled and an identical signal is sent to the paired Bus Outs. In surround mode, it also determines whether the Surround Pan setting is applied to the Bus Outs. D AUX section • AUX ............................... These controls set the currently-selected Input Channel’s Aux Send 1–8 levels and positions. (See page 93 for more information on Aux Sends.) E Meter section • Meters............................ These meters indicate the levels of the currently-selected Input Channel. • PRE EQ/PRE FADER/POST FADER ........... The metering position is displayed below the meters. F GROUP section • FADER/MUTE/EQ/COMP ................These buttons indicate which Fader, Mute, EQ, or Comp group, if any, the currently-selected Input Channel is in. If the channel is in a group, the group number appears. If the channel is not in a group, “—” appears. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface 75 Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface You can use the faders, Encoders, [SEL] buttons, and various buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the top panel to directly control most parameters for Input Channels. Setting Input Channel Levels and Panning the Channels 1 Press the LAYER [1-16], [17-32], or [33-48] button to select a Layer. 2 Use the faders to set the Input Channel levels. 3 Press the ENCODER MODE [PAN] button, then rotate the corresponding Encoder to pan the desired Input Channel. When you rotate the Encoder, the current pan setting display pops up. 6 Input Channels Routing and EQ’ing Input Channels 1 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader for the channel you wish to control. 2 To route each Input Channel, use the following buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL section: • ROUTING [1]–[8] buttons ............... These buttons route the currently-selected Input Channel to a Bus. • ROUTING [STEREO] button ........... When this button is turned on, Input Channel signals are routed to the Stereo Bus. • ROUTING [DIRECT] button ........... When this button is turned on, the currently-selected Input Channel is routed to its Direct Out. (See page 115 for more information on Direct Out.) The corresponding button indicator lights up. 3 To control EQ for the currently-selected channel, press one of the following buttons to select the band you wish to adjust: • EQUALIZER [HIGH] button............ HIGH band • EQUALIZER [H-MID] button.......... HIGH-MID band • EQUALIZER [L-MID] button........... LOW-MID band • EQUALIZER [LOW] button.............. LOW band DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 76 Chapter 6—Input Channels 4 Use the EQUALIZER [Q], [FREQUENCY], and [GAIN] controls to adjust the Q, frequency, and gain of the band selected in Step 3. See page 68 for more information on EQ. Tip: • Pressing and holding down the button selected in Step 3 resets the corresponding band gain. • Pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL [HIGH] and [LOW] buttons simultaneously resets the Q, frequency and gain for each band. Pairing Input Channels On the DM1000, you can pair adjacent odd-even Input Channels or counterpart channels on Layer 1 and Layer 2 that share the same physical fader. Faders and most parameters of paired channels are linked for stereo operation. Paired channels’ linked parameters and non-linked parameters (that are available for independent control) are listed below: Linked parameters Non-linked parameters [SEL] buttons Input patches Faders Insert patches Channel on/off Output patches Insert on/off Comp insert position Solo on/off Phase Solo Safe Delay on/off Aux on/off Delay time* Aux Send level Delay feedback Aux Sends as Pre or Post Delay mix Gate Routing Comp settings Pan, Follow Pan EQ settings Surround pan Fader group Aux Send pan Mute group Balance Fade time Attenuators** Recall Safe * You can set this parameter for each channel independently if the GANG button is turned off on the /INS/DLY | DLY page. ** You can set this parameter for each channel independently on the EQ | ATT page, but the paired channel settings are linked on the EQ | Edit and View pages. To pair channels, or to cancel channel pairs, you can use the [SEL] buttons on the top panel or access the Pair/Group pages. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Pairing Input Channels 77 ■ Pairing Channels by Using the [SEL] Buttons 1 While pressing and holding down the [SEL] button for one of the channels you wish to pair, press the [SEL] button for the adjacent channel. (The paired channel numbers should be odd and even in this order). Note: The settings of the first channel are copied to the second channel and the channels are paired if the Pair Confirmation check box on the Preference1 page is not checked (default). (If the selected channels have already been paired, this procedure will cancel the pair setting.) The Channel Pairing window appears. 6 2 Move the cursor to the desired button in the Channel Pairing window, then press [ENTER]. The following buttons are available in this window: • CANCEL Cancels the operation. • CH x ➔ y Copies the odd channel parameter values to the even channel. • CH y ➔ x Copies the even channel parameter values to the odd channel. • RESET BOTH Resets both channel parameters to the default settings (same as when Channel memory #01 is recalled). Move the cursor to the desired button, then press [ENTER] to confirm the pair. Tip: Pressing and holding down the first [SEL] button of the paired channels and pressing the second [SEL] button cancels the pair. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Input Channels Note: You can pair only channels that are adjacent, odd-even (in this order) channels. Pressing the [SEL] button for a non-adjacent channel will be ignored. You cannot pair or cancel a pair of vertical partners. 78 Chapter 6—Input Channels ■ Pairing Input Channels Using the Display 1 Press the [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until the Pair/Grup | Input page appears. 1 2 3 The parameters on this page are described below: A PAIR MODE Determines how channels are paired. B STEREO/MONO x2 buttons These buttons turn pairs on or off. C MS buttons These buttons are available when an MS microphone is connected. MS Decoding can be used to decode signals from MS microphones arranged as MS pairs. (See page 80 for more information on MS Decoding.) 2 Move the cursor to the PAIR MODE parameter field (1), then select the HORIZONTAL or VERTICAL button. The function of each mode is described below: • HORIZONTAL............. This button pairs adjacent odd-even channels (default). • VERTICAL.................... This button pairs counterpart channels on Layer 1 and Layer 2 that share the same physical fader (e.g., CH1 & CH17, CH16 & CH32, etc.). This mode is useful when you wish to use one fader to control both stereo channels. When you switch the Pair Mode, the combinations of channel numbers displayed on the page also change. Note: • When Pair mode is switched, only the channel numbers change. The mix parameters of the paired partners do not change. • For example, if you change Pair mode from Horizontal to Vertical, the Input Channel “2” indication changes to Input Channel “17.” However, its parameters do not change. (If Channels 1 and 2 have been paired, switching the mode will pair Channels 1 and 17.) 3 Move the cursor to the desired channel’s MONOx2 button, then press [ENTER]. The channels are paired. 4 To cancel a pair, move the cursor to the desired channel’s STEREO button, then press [ENTER]. Tip: You can also pair or cancel a pair of Output Channels in the same way on the Pair/Group | Output page (see page 89). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Naming Input Channels 79 Naming Input Channels By default, Input Channels are named CH1, CH2, etc. You can change these names if necessary. For example, it may be helpful for mixdown if you name a particular Input Channel with the type of musical instrument connected to the corresponding input jack. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the In Patch | CH Name page appears. 1 2 3 6 Input Channels You can specify Short names in the center column (1) and Long (full) names in the right column (2). When the Name Input Auto Copy check box (3) is on, the first four characters of a newly-entered Long name are automatically copied to the Short name. On the other hand, a newly-entered Short name is automatically added to the beginning of the Long name. You can reset all channel names to their default names by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then pressing [ENTER]. 2 Move the cursor to a name you wish to change, then press [ENTER]. The Title Edit window appears, enabling you to enter a name. 3 Edit the name, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER]. The new name is now effective. Tip: The edited name is stored in the Input Patch library. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 80 Chapter 6—Input Channels Using MS Stereo Microphone The MS system is a type of stereo recording that uses two microphones; mono-directional M (Middle) and bi-directional S (Side) microphones. An M microphone picks up main signals, and an S microphone picks up directional signals. These two signals are decoded by calculating a sum (M plus S) and a difference (M minus S), and are recorded to L and R channels. An MS microphone is usually a stereo microphone that has both M and S functions. Use an MS microphone in the following way: 1 Connect the L connector of an MS microphone to an odd channel input jack, and the R connector to an even channel input jack. Signals from the MS microphone are MS microphone input from the L and R connectors. To use an MS microphone with the DM1000, connect the L connector to the input jack of an odd Input Channel, and connect the R connector to the input jack of the partner channel. R connector 9 9 INPUT L connector 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 Press the [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until the Pair/Group | Input page appears. 3 Turn on the MS button for the channels to which the MS microphone is connected. The two channels are automatically paired and MS Decoding is turned on. With MS Decoding turned on, the faders and Encoders (Pan parameters) function as follows: • Odd-channel faders ................M level (Controls the volume level.) • Odd-channel Encoders...........ML/MR balance • Even-channel faders................S level (Controls the left and right directional spread.) • Even-channel Encoders ..........SL/SR balance 4 Use the faders and Encoders to adjust the MS microphone level and balance. When the signals are routed to paired Buses or the Stereo Bus, a sum of signals (ML plus SL) is sent to the odd-numbered Bus, and a difference of signals (ML minus SL) is sent to the even-numbered Bus. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Bus Outs 81 7 Bus Outs This chapter describes how to adjust the DM1000’s Stereo Out and Bus Out parameters. About Stereo Out The Stereo Out section receives Input Channel and Bus Out 1–8 signals, mixes them into two channels, processes them using on-board EQ, compressor, etc., then routes them to two channel output connectors. The following diagram illustrates the Stereo Out signal flow. (Gain Reduction) (Out Meter) METER METER INSERT ATT METER INSERT METER INSERT ON LEVEL BAL OUTPUT DELAY 4BAND EQ STEREO R • INSERT This section enables you to route the Stereo Out signals to external devices via the on-board connectors or I/O cards, or insert internal effects processors. • ATT (Attenuator) This section enables you to attenuate or amplify the level of signals to be input to the EQ. The attenuator prevents post-EQ signals from clipping or corrects signal levels that are too low. • 4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer) This parametric EQ features four bands (HIGH, HIGH-MID, LOW-MID, and LOW). • COMP (Compressor) This dynamics processor can be used as compressor, expander, or limiter. The processor can be located pre-EQ, pre-[STEREO] fader, or post-[STEREO] fader. • ON (On/Off) This button turns the Stereo Out on or off. • LEVEL The [STEREO] fader adjusts the Stereo Out output levels. • Balance This section enables you to adjust the level balance between the L and R channels of the Stereo Out. • OUTPUT DELAY (Output delay) This section delays the output signals. It is mainly used to fine-tune the signal timing. • METER This section enables you to switch the metering position of signal levels that are displayed on the Meter page or by the stereo meter to the right of the screen. (See page 39 for more information on selecting the metering position.) Note: By default, the Stereo Out signals are output to OMNI OUT 9–10. However, you can patch these signals to other output connectors or I/O cards using the Output Patch pages. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 7 Bus Outs Same as stereo master L STEREO L OUTPUT PATCH STEREO L STEREO R BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 BUS5 BUS6 BUS7 BUS8 COMP 82 Chapter 7—Bus Outs Bus Out 1–8 The Bus Out 1–8 section mixes signals routed from Input Channels to the specified buses, processes them using on-board EQ, compressor, etc., then routes them to the specified output connectors or I/O cards. The following diagram illustrates the Bus Out signal flow. (Gain Reduction) (Out Meter) METER METER INSERT ATT METER INSERT ON LEVEL METER INSERT BUS 1(...8) OUTPUT DELAY 4BAND EQ ON PAN LEVEL BUS to STEREO TO INPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH STEREO L STEREO R BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 BUS5 BUS6 BUS7 BUS8 COMP BUS 1(...8) • • • • • • • • INSERT ATT (Attenuator) 4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer) COMP (Compressor) ON (On/Off) LEVEL OUTPUT DELAY (Output delay) METER The parameters and sections listed above are identical to those for the Stereo Out. For more information, refer to the explanation the Stereo Out (see page 81). • Bus to Stereo Bus Out 1–8 signals are also routed to the Stereo Bus. In addition to the ON, LEVEL, and other parameters, you can also set the Send Level, On/Off, Pan, and other parameters. Tip: You can also pair adjacent odd-even buses (in this order) for stereo operation (see page 89). Note: By default, channels 1–8 and 9–16 of Slots 1 and 2 are patched to the Bus Out 1–8 outputs. However, you can change this patching on the Output Patch page. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display 83 Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display To set the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 parameters, you can either move the cursor to the desired parameter on the display and change the value, or operate the desired button or control on the top panel. This section explains how to set the parameters on the display. Tip: Refer to Chapter 9 “Input & Output Patching” on page 109 for more information on how to set inserts. Attenuating the Stereo Out and Bus Out To attenuate the Stereo Out and Bus Out signals, press the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to display the EQ | Out Att page. On this page, you can attenuate the Bus Out 1–8, Aux Out 1–8, and Stereo Out signals. 7 Bus Outs The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input Channels, except that this page does not include the bit shift parameters (see page 67). Delaying the Stereo Out and Bus Outs To delay the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 signals, press the [ repeatedly until the /INS/DLY | Out Dly page appears. /INSERT/DELAY] button The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input Channels, except that this page does not include the MIX/FB.GAIN parameters (see page 63). Tip: You can also display the Out Dly page by pressing the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button once, then press the [SEL] button or move the fader to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1–8. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 84 Chapter 7—Bus Outs Compressing the Stereo Out and Bus Outs To set the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 compressors, press the [DYNAMICS] button, then the [F3] button to display the Dynamics | Comp Edit page, and use the [SEL] buttons or faders to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1–8. The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input Channels (see page 66). EQ’ing the Stereo Out and Bus Outs To set the EQ for the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 EQ, press the EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to display the EQ | EQ Edit page, and use the [SEL] buttons or faders to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1–8. The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input Channels (see page 68). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display 85 Routing Bus Out 1–8 Signals to the Stereo Bus You can patch Bus Out 1–8 signals to Outputs and Slots 1/2, as well as to the Stereo Bus. You can adjust the level and pan settings of the signals routed to the Stereo Bus for each bus. This is convenient when you wish to use Bus Outs (1–8) as a Group Bus. To patch the Bus Out 1–8 signals to the Stereo Bus, press the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to display the Routing | Bus To St page. 1 2 3 7 Bus Outs Move the cursor to the desired parameter you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the setting. A TO ST PAN These controls pan the Bus Out 1–8 signals between the left and right Stereo Out buses. B TO ST ON/OFF These buttons turn on and off the Bus Out 1–8 to the Stereo Bus routing. C TO ST Faders These faders set the Bus Out 1–8 to Stereo Bus levels. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 86 Chapter 7—Bus Outs Viewing the Stereo Out and Bus Out Settings You can view and adjust parameter settings for the currently-selected Stereo Out or Bus Out on the View | Parameter and Fader pages. ■ Viewing the Compressor and EQ Settings To display the View | Parameter page, use the corresponding [SEL] button or fader to select the desired bus, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then the [F1] button. The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input Channels, except for the following items: • The Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 Parameter pages do not contain the Gate and Phase parameters. • The Stereo Out Parameter page does not contain the Pair parameter. ■ Viewing Faders and Other Parameters To display the View | Fader page, use the corresponding [SEL] button or fader to select the desired bus, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then the [F2] button. The Fader page layouts for Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 are slightly different. • Stereo Out Fader page 1 2 3 A BAL This control adjusts the level balance between the L and R channels of the Stereo Out. B ON/OFF This button turns the Stereo Out on or off, and links with the [ON] button in the STEREO section. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display 87 C Fader This fader adjusts the Stereo Out output levels, and links with the [STEREO] fader. The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB. • Bus Out (1–8) Fader page 345 1 2 7 Bus Outs A ON/OFF This button turns the currently-selected Bus Out (1–8) on or off, and links with the [ON] (9–16) button in the Master layer. B Fader This fader sets the currently-selected Bus Out (1–8) level, and links with the fader (9–16) in the Master layer. The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB. C TO ST PAN This control sets the Bus Out to Stereo Out Pan position for the currently-selected Bus Out (1–8). D TO ST ON/OFF This button turns on or off the Bus Out to Stereo Out signal for the currently-selected Bus Out (1–8). E TO ST Fader This fader sets the Bus Out to Stereo Out signal level for the currently-selected Bus Out (1–8). Tip: The TO ST PAN, ON/OFF, and TO ST Fader parameters also appear on the Routing | Bus to St page. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 88 Chapter 7—Bus Outs Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Control Surface You can use the faders, Encoders, [SEL] buttons, and various buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the top panel to directly control certain parameters for the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8. Setting the Levels Move the [STEREO] fader to adjust the Stereo Out levels. Press the [ON] button in the STEREO section to turn the Stereo Out on or off. To set Bus Out 1–8 levels, press the [MASTER] button in the LAYER section to select the Master layer, then move faders 9–16. At this time, you can turn Bus Out 1–8 on or off using the [ON] 9–16 buttons. EQ’ing the Stereo Out and Bus Outs 1 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the bus to which you want to apply EQ. 2 To control the EQ of the currently-selected bus, select the desired band to adjust by pressing one of the following buttons: • EQUALIZER [HIGH] button ............HIGH band • EQUALIZER [H-MID] button ..........HIGH-MID band • EQUALIZER [L-MID] button ...........LOW-MID band • EQUALIZER [LOW] button ..............LOW band 3 Use the EQUALIZER [Q], [FREQUENCY], and [GAIN] controls to adjust the Q, frequency, and gain of the band selected in Step 2. See page 68 for more information on EQ. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Pairing Buses or Aux Sends 89 Pairing Buses or Aux Sends You can pair adjacent odd-even (in this order) buses or Aux Sends for stereo operation. Paired bus and Aux Send linked parameters and non-linked parameters (that are available for independent controls) are listed below: Linked parameters Non-linked parameters [SEL] buttons Output Patching Fader Insert Patching Channel on/off Delay on/off** Insert on/off Delay time Solo on/off Bus to Stereo Pan* Comp settings Attenuators*** Comp insert position EQ settings Fader group Mute group Fade time ** You can set this parameter for each channel independently if the GANG button is turned off on the /INS/DLY | DLY page. *** You can set this parameter for each channel independently on the EQ | ATT page, but the paired channel settings are linked on the EQ | Edit and View pages. Recall safe Bus to Stereo fader* Parameters marked with an asterisk * are available only for Bus Outs. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until the Pair/Grup | Output page appears. 1 2 The parameters on this page are described below. A STEREO/MONOx2 These buttons turn Bus or Aux Send pairs on or off. B F.S This button determines whether Aux Sends follow the Input Channel Surround Pan when the DM1000 is in a Surround mode. When this button is turned on, Aux Sends follow the Input Channel Surround Pan. This is useful for feeding Surround signals to external Surround effects processors. 2 Move the cursor to the MONOx2 button for the desired Bus or Aux Send, then press [ENTER]. The buses or Aux Sends are paired. 3 To cancel a pair, move the cursor to the STEREO button for the desired Bus or Aux Send, then press [ENTER]. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Bus Outs Bus to Stereo on/off* 7 90 Chapter 7—Bus Outs Attenuating Output Signals To attenuate the DM1000’s output signals, display the EQ | Out Att page and adjust the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 attenuators individually. If necessary, you can also select Output and I/O card channels and specify the amount of attenuation. This technique is convenient when you want to attenuate output signals quickly, regardless of the source signal patching. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | Output Att page appears. 1 2 2 Move the cursor in the left column (1), then scroll the list up or down using the Parameter wheel to select the desired output or slot channel for which you want to adjust attenuation. The following outputs and slot channels can be selected: • OMNI OUT 1–12.....................OMNI OUT connectors 1–12 • SLOT 1-1 through 1-16...........Channels 1–16 of Slot 1 • SLOT 2-1 through 2-16...........Channels 1–16 of Slot 2 3 Move the cursor to the parameter value in the right column (2), then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to set the amount of attenuation. The amount of attenuation can be set from 0 dB to –9 dB. Tip: To reset the attenuation amount of all Output Channels to 0 dB, move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then press [ENTER]. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs 91 Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs You can change the default Bus names (BUS1, AUX4, STEREO, etc.). It may be convenient to name the buses “Monitor Out” or “Effect Send,” for example, so that you can easily identify the signal type. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out Patch | CH Name page appears. 1 2 3 7 Bus Outs You can specify Short names in the center column (1) and Long (full) names in the right column (2). When the Name Input Auto Copy check box (3) is on, the first four characters of a newly-entered Long name are automatically copied to the Short name. You can reset all bus names to their default names by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then pressing [ENTER]. 2 Move the cursor to a name you wish to change, then press [ENTER]. The Title Edit window appears, which enables you to edit the name. 3 Edit the name, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER]. The new name is now effective. Tip: The edited name is stored in the Output Patch library. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 92 Chapter 7—Bus Outs DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Aux Sends 93 8 Aux Sends This chapter describes how to control Aux Out 1–8. Aux Out 1–8 The Aux Out 1–8 section mixes signals routed from the Input Channels to the corresponding Aux Sends, processes them using on-board EQ, compressor, etc., then routes them to the specified internal effects processors, output connectors or I/O card connectors. The DM1000 features eight Aux Sends, which can be used to send signals to the internal and external effects processors and monitors. The following diagram illustrates the Aux Out 1–8 signal flow. (Gain Reduction) (Out Meter) METER METER INSERT 4BAND EQ INSERT METER INSERT ON LEVEL AUX 1(...8) OUTPUT DELAY TO INPUT PATCH AUX 1(...8) • • • • • • • • INSERT ATT (Attenuator) 4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer) COMP (Compressor) ON (On/Off) LEVEL OUTPUT DELAY (Output delay) METER These parameters are the same as the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 (see page 81). Tip: You can also pair adjacent odd-even Aux Sends (in this order) for stereo Aux operation. Note: With the default setting, Aux Out 1–8 are patched to OMNI OUT connectors 1–8 and Aux Out 1–4 are patched to internal effects processors 1–4. However, you can change this patching on the Out Patch page. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 8 Aux Sends ATT METER OUTPUT PATCH AUX 8 AUX 1 COMP 94 Chapter 8—Aux Sends Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Control Surface You can use the faders, Encoders, [SEL] buttons, and various buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the top panel to directly control certain parameters for Aux Out 1–8. Setting Levels To set Aux Out 1–8 levels, press the [MASTER] button in the LAYER section to select the Master layer, then move faders 1–8. At this time, you can turn Aux Out 1–8 on or off using the corresponding [ON] 1–8 buttons. EQ settings To control Aux Out 1–8 EQ parameters, select the desired Aux Out (1–8) using the corresponding [SEL] button or fader, then use the buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input Channels (see page 75). Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display To set Aux Out 1–8 parameters, you can either move the cursor to the desired parameter on the screen and change the value, or operate the desired button or control on the top panel. This section explains how to set the parameters on the screen. Tip: Refer to Chapter 9 “Input & Output Patching” on page 109 for more information on how to set inserts. Attenuating Aux Outs To attenuate Aux Out 1–8 signals, press the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to display the EQ | Out Att page. The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input Channels, except that this page does not include the bit shift parameters (see page 67). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display 95 Delaying Aux Outs To delay Aux Out 1–8 signals, press the [ /INS/DLY | Out Dly page appears. /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input Channels, except that this page does not have the MIX/FB.GAIN parameters (see page 63). 8 Tip: You can also display the Out Dly page by pressing the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button once, then selecting the desired Aux Out (1–8) by pressing the corresponding [SEL] button or moving the fader. Aux Sends Comp settings To set the Aux Out 1–8 compressors, press the [DYNAMICS] button, then the [F3] button to display the Dynamics | Comp Edit page, and select the desired Aux Out 1–8 by using the corresponding [SEL] buttons or faders. The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input Channels (see page 66). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 96 Chapter 8—Aux Sends EQ settings To set the EQ for Aux Out 1–8, press the EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to display the EQ | EQ Edit page, and use the [SEL] buttons or faders to select Aux Out 1–8. The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input Channels (see page 68). Viewing Aux Out settings You can view and adjust the parameter settings for the currently-selected Aux Out on the View | Parameter and Fader pages. ■ Viewing the Compressor and EQ Settings To display the View | Parameter page, use the corresponding [SEL] button or fader to select the desired Aux Out (1–8), then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then the [F1] button. The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting them) are the same as for Input Channels, except that this page does not include the Gate and Phase parameters (see page 72). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display 97 ■ Viewing Faders and On/Off Parameters To display the View | Fader page, use the corresponding [SEL] button or fader to select the desired Aux Out (1–8), then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then the [F2] button. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 8 Aux Sends • ON/OFF.........................This button turns the currently-selected Aux Out (1–8) on or off. It links with the corresponding [ON] (1–8) button in the Master layer. • Fader ..............................This fader sets the currently-selected Aux Out (1–8) level. It links with the corresponding fader (1–8) in the Master layer. The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0dB. 98 Chapter 8—Aux Sends Setting Aux Send Levels You can adjust the level of signals routed from Input Channels to the corresponding Aux Out (1–8). To do this, you can either use the Encoders on the top panel or set the parameters on the screen. Using the Encoders 1 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select the sends. 2 Press the ENCODER MODE [AUX] button. When the ENCODER MODE [AUX] button is turned on, you can rotate the Encoders to set Aux Send levels. 3 Select a layer that contains the source Input Channels, then rotate the corresponding Encoders. The DM1000 displays the Send level of the currently-selected channel. Note: If rotating the Encoders seems ineffective, check the Mode and Pre/Post parameters on the Aux | Send page (see page 99). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Setting Aux Send Levels 99 Setting Send Levels from the Display You can view multiple channels’ Aux Send levels on the screen and adjust them individually. 1 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select the Aux Sends. 2 Press the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears. - Send1-32 page This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 1–32. - Send33-48 page This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 33–48. 8 Aux Sends The parameters on these two pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same. • Aux Send rotary controls These controls adjust the Aux Send level of the Input Channels. The current numeric levels appear below the rotary controls. • PRE/POST These buttons enable you to specify the Aux Sends signal source points. The PRE buttons send pre-fader signals, and the POST buttons send post-fader signals. • MODE Aux Sends have two operating modes that determine how signals are sent: Fixed (Aux Send levels are fixed); and Variable (Aux Send levels are variable). • GLOBAL The GLOBAL PRE and POST buttons enable you to set all Input Channels for the selected Aux Send to pre-fader or post-fader simultaneously. • PRE POINT The PRE POINT PRE ON and POST ON buttons enable you to set the pre-fader channels to pre-on (before the [ON] button) or post-on (after the [ON] button). Note: In Fixed mode, Aux Send ON/OFF buttons appear instead of the Aux Send rotary controls, PRE/POST buttons, GLOBAL PRE/POST buttons, and PRE POINT PRE ON/POST ON. These ON/OFF buttons turn on or off each Input Channel for the currently-selected Aux Send. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 100 Chapter 8—Aux Sends 3 Move the cursor to the FIXED or VARIABLE button in the MODE section for the currently-selected Aux Send to select a mode. • Fixed Mode In this mode, Aux Send levels are fixed at nominal (0.0dB). Also, channel ON/OFF buttons appear instead of the Send level rotary controls and PRE/POST buttons. • Variable Mode In this mode, Aux Send levels are variable and the signal source point can be either pre-fader or post-fader. Channel Send level rotary controls and PRE/POST buttons appear on the screen. Tip: You can select Variable or Fixed mode individually for each of the eight Aux Sends. Note: • In Fixed mode, all ON/OFF buttons are turned OFF. • When you switch to Variable mode, the signal source points are set to post-fader (PRE/POST buttons are set to POST), and Send level rotary controls are reset to –∞. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Setting Aux Send Levels 101 4 If you switched to Fixed mode in Step 3, the ON/OFF buttons turn on or off each Input Channel on or off for the currently-selected Aux Send. Note: In Fixed mode, the Aux On/Off parameters for paired Input Channels are not linked to each other. You can turn each Input Channel on or off for the currently-selected Aux Send even in Variable mode. To do this, move the cursor to the desired Send level control, then press [ENTER]. (The rotary controls for Off channels are grayed out.) Tip: • In Variable mode, Aux Send levels, Aux On/Off, and Pre/Post parameters for paired Input Channels are linked to each other. • GLOBAL PRE/POST buttons enable you to set all Input Channels simultaneously (including those not displayed on the current page) to pre-fader or post-fader. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 8 Aux Sends 5 If you switched to Variable mode in Step 3, the PRE/POST buttons and Send level rotary controls enable you to adjust the signal source points and Send levels. 102 Chapter 8—Aux Sends Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels You can view and set parameters for all Aux Send 1–8, including setting levels and Pre/Post parameters. This is convenient when you wish to visually check all Aux Send settings or simultaneously adjust the levels of certain channels routed to Aux 1–8. 1 Press the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears. - View1–16 page This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 1–16. - View17–32 page This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 17–32. - View33–48 page This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels 33–48. These pages display the source Input channels and the corresponding Aux Sends in a matrix. The parameters on these three pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same. 1 2 3 A DISPLAY Use the following buttons to display the desired parameters. • LEVEL ........................... Select the LEVEL button to display Send level bar graphs for Input Channels routed to Aux 1–8. • PRE/POST .................... Select the PRE/POST button to display signal source points for Input Channels routed to Aux 1–8. B FIX/VARI These buttons indicate the Aux mode (Fixed or Variable) for Aux Out 1–8 and are only for display purposes. C LEVEL This field displays in dB the level of the Aux Send currently-selected by the cursor. 2 Move the cursor to either the DISPLAY LEVEL or PRE/POST button and press [ENTER] to display the Level or Pre/Post parameters. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels 103 3 If you selected the PRE/POST button in Step 2, move the cursor to the desired Input Channel and Aux intersection, then press the [ENTER] button to change the signal source point. Note: You can switch between Pre and Post only for Aux Sends that are set to Variable mode. The “FIX” indication appears for Aux Sends that are set to Fixed mode, and you cannot switch Pre/Post. • Aux Sends in Variable mode ............. The current Send levels are displayed by the bar graphs. If the level is set to nominal (0.0 dB), “N” appears in the bar. The bars for Aux Sends that are set to off are highlighted. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 8 Aux Sends 4 If you selected the LEVEL button in Step 2, move the cursor to the desired Input Channel and Aux intersection, then edit the Send level or turn the currently-selected AUX Send on or off. Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to set the Send level, and press the [ENTER] button to turn the currently-selected Aux Send on or off. One of the following indicators appears, depending on the current Aux mode. • Aux Sends in Fixed mode .................. A “FIX” indicator appears for On Aux Sends, and a dot “ . ” appears for Off Aux Sends. 104 Chapter 8—Aux Sends Panning Aux Sends You can pair adjacent odd-even (in this order) Aux Sends for stereo operation. This enables you to pan signals from Input Channels to paired Aux Sends. 1 Pair the desired two Aux Sends. (See page 89 for more information on pairing channels.) 2 Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select one of the paired Aux Sends. 3 Press the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears. - Pan1–32 page This page enables you to pan signals routed from Input Channels 1–32 to Aux Sends. - Pan33–48 page This page enables you to pan signals routed from Input Channels 33–48 to Aux Sends. The parameters on these two pages (and the procedure for setting them) are the same. 2 3 1 A Aux pan controls These controls adjust the pan setting of signals routed from Input Channels to paired Aux buses. B MODE The MODE parameter determines how paired Input Channels are panned. C INPUT PAN LINK When this parameter is turned on, Aux Sends follow the Input Channel Pan. 4 Move the cursor to the Aux pan control of the desired Input Channel and rotate the Parameter wheel to set the pan value. 5 If necessary, move the cursor to the MODE parameter box and rotate the Parameter wheel to select INDIVIDUAL, GANG, or INV GANG, then press [ENTER]. If the INPUT PAN LINK ON/OFF button is turned off, this Mode setting is independent of the Mode parameter on the Pan page. (See page 70 for more information on Mode options.) DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Excluding Certain Channels from Aux Sends (Mix Minus) 105 6 To link the Input Channel Pan setting with the Aux Send Pan setting, move the cursor to the INPUT PAN LINK ON/OFF button, then press [ENTER]. The pan positions on the Pan page are copied to the Aux pan setting, and the pan controls on both pages are linked. Tip: • If paired Aux Sends are in Variable mode, the Aux Send levels, Aux On/Off, and Pre/Post parameters for paired Input Channels are linked to each other. • If paired Aux Sends are in Fixed mode, the Aux On/Off parameters for paired Input Channels are not linked to each other. Excluding Certain Channels from Aux Sends (Mix Minus) You can quickly exclude signals from certain channels from Aux Sends by using the controls on the top panel. This operation is called “Mix Minus.” For example, when Aux Sends are being used as monitors for the musicians or a narrator, you can turn off the audio signals of the musicians or narrator, excluding them from the monitor sound. Note: If you release the button in the AUX SELECT section before you proceed to Step 2, you will be unable to complete the Mix Minus operation. 2 Press the [ON] buttons of the Input Channels you wish to exclude from the Aux Send. You can select multiple channels. The selected channels’ [ON] button indicators turn off, and signals routed from those channels to the corresponding Aux Send are turned off. “MIX MINUS FOR AUX * ” appears on the bottom of the screen. (The asterisk represents an Aux number.) Tip: At this time, the Send Level controls on the Aux | Send page are grayed out. 3 To reset the setting, while pressing and holding down the [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons you pressed in Step 1, press the [ON] buttons you pressed in Step 2. The corresponding [ON] button indicators light up. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 8 Aux Sends 1 Press and hold down the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons of the desired Aux Sends. The [ON] button indicators in the channel strip section remain lit while you hold down the button. This means that signals routed from channels with a lit [ON] button indicator to the Aux Send are turned on. 106 Chapter 8—Aux Sends Copying Channel Fader Positions to Aux Sends While Aux Sends are in Variable mode, you can copy all Input Channel fader positions on one layer to the corresponding Aux Sends. This is convenient when you wish to send to the musicians monitor signals that have the same balance setting as the Stereo Out signals. 1 Press and hold down the copy source layer (LAYER [1-16], [17-32], or [33-48]) button. Note: If you release the button in the LAYER section before you proceed to Step 2, you will be unable to complete the Copy operation. 2 Press one of the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select the desired Aux Send copy destination. The confirmation window for the Copy operation appears. 3 To execute the Copy operation, move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER]. To cancel the Copy operation, move the cursor to the NO button, then press [ENTER]. Tip: If the copy destination Input Channel has been paired with a vertical partner in another Layer, the fader position will be copied to the partner’s Aux Send. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Soloing AUX Sends using the [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] Buttons 107 Soloing AUX Sends using the [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] Buttons You can turn the Solo function on and off using the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons, without having to switch to the Master layer. This is convenient when you wish to control the Solo function for Aux Out 1-8 while adjusting the Aux Sends from Input Channels. 1 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Solo page appears. 8 3 Move the cursor to the AUX/SOLO LINK check box, then press the [ENTER] button. A pop-up window appears, asking you to confirm the setting. 4 To check the AUX/SOLO LINK check box, move the cursor to the YES button, then press the [ENTER] button. 5 Press the desired AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons (for the Aux Sends that you wish to solo) to light up the button indicators, then press the same buttons again. Only the selected Aux Sends are soloed, and the corresponding [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons flash. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Aux Sends 2 Make sure that the SOLO parameter is set to Enabled. 108 Chapter 8—Aux Sends DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Input & Output Patching 109 9 Input & Output Patching This chapter describes how to patch (assign) signal paths within the DM1000 to its inputs, outputs, and slot channels Input Patching Signals input at INPUT connectors 1–16, 2TR IN DIGITAL connectors 1–2, and Slot I/O cards are patched to Input Channels for use. Patch example: Input Patching Input Channel 1 INPUT connector 2 Input Channel 2 INPUT connector 3 Input Channel 3 INPUT connector 4 Input Channel 4 INPUT connector 5 Input Channel 5 INPUT connector 6 Input Channel 6 INPUT connector 7 Input Channel 7 INPUT connector 8 Input Channel 8 By default, the Input Channels are patched as follows: Input Channels Input connectors and Slot channels 1–16 INPUT connectors 1–16 17–24 Channels 1–8 of Slot 1 25–32 Channels 1–8 of Slot 2 33–40 Internal Effects Processor 1–4 Outputs 1–2 41/42 2TR DIGITAL IN 1 (L/R) 43/44 2TR DIGITAL IN 2 (L/R) 45–48 OMNI IN connectors 1–4 You can change these patches, if you desire. To change input patching, you can either use the Encoders on the top panel or set the parameters on the display. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 9 Input & Output Patching INPUT connector 1 110 Chapter 9—Input & Output Patching Input Patching from the Display 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the In Patch | In Patch page appears. 1 Inputs and slot channels that are currently assigned to Input Channels are shown in the parameter boxes (1) below the channel numbers. The parameter indicators are explained below: Parameter values Description – No assignment AD1–AD16 INPUT connectors 1–16 OMN1–OMN4 OMNI IN connectors 1–4 S1-1–S116 Channels 1–16 of Slot 1 S2-1–S216 Channels 1–16 of Slot 2 FX1-1–FX1-8 Outputs 1–8 of Internal Effects Processor 1 FX2-1–FX2-2 Outputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2 FX3-1–FX3-2 Outputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3 FX4-1–FX4-2 Outputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4 2D1L & 2D1R 2TR DIGITAL IN 1 (L/R) 2D2L & 2D2R 2TR DIGITAL IN 2 (L/R) BUS1–8 Bus 1–8 Outputs AUX1–8 Aux 1–8 Outputs 2 Move the cursor to an input patch parameter you wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching. The long name of the currently-selected channel is 1 indicated in the upper-right corner of the screen (1). 2 Below the channel name is the long name of the selected input/slot channel (2). (See page 79 and 265 for more information on changing channel names.) 3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change. Tip: • You can patch an input signal to multiple Input Channels. • You can store the Input Patch settings to the Input Patch library. Refer to Chapter 15 “Libraries” on page 173 for more information. • The number of outputs of internal Effects processor 1 varies depending on the selected effect program. (See page 155 for more information on effect programs.) DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Input Patching 111 Using the Encoders for Input Patching By default, you can also use the Encoders on the top panel to change the Input Patching. 1 Press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN] button. The button indicator lights up. By default, you can use the Encoders to change Input Patching while the [ASSIGN] button indicator is lit. Tip: On the Encoder page, you can specify the Encoder function that works while the [ASSIGN] button indicator is lit (see page 37). 2 Rotate the Encoder of the Input Channel for which you want to change patching. (Alternatively, press the corresponding Encoder push switch.) The In Patch | In Patch page appears, and the cursor moves to the corresponding Input Channel parameter box. 3 Rotate the Encoder to select the desired input/slot channel number you want to patch. 4 Press the Encoder push switch to confirm the setting (or press the [ENTER] button). 9 Input & Output Patching DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 112 Chapter 9—Input & Output Patching Output Patching The DM1000’s Stereo Out, Bus Out 1–8, Aux Out 1–8 signals can be patched to any outputs and slot channels. Patch example: Output Patching Stereo Out L OMNI Out connector 1 Stereo Out R OMNI Out connector 2 Aux Out 1 OMNI Out connector 3 Aux Out 2 OMNI Out connector 4 Aux Out 3 OMNI Out connector 5 Aux Out 4 OMNI Out connector 6 Aux Out 5 OMNI Out connector 7 Aux Out 6 OMNI Out connector 8 By default, the following signal paths are patched to outputs and slot output channels: Output connectors and slot channels Signal flow OMNI OUT connectors 1–8 Aux Outs 1–8 OMNI OUT connectors 9–10 Stereo Out L & R OMNI OUT connectors 11–12 Control Room Monitor L & R Channels 1–8 of Slot 1 Bus Outs 1–8 Channels 9–16 of Slot 1 Bus Outs 1–8 Channels 1–8 of Slot 2 Bus Outs 1–8 Channels 9–16 of Slot 2 Bus Outs 1–8 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1 (L) Stereo Out L 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1 (R) Stereo Out R 2TR OUT DIGITAL 2 (L) Stereo Out L 2TR OUT DIGITAL 2 (R) Stereo Out R Tip: • You can patch a signal to multiple outputs and slot channels. • You can store the Output Patch settings to the Output Patch library. Refer to Chapter 15 “Libraries” on page 173 for more information. You can change these patches, if you desire. The procedure for patching signals to output varies depending on the output connectors and slots. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Output Patching 113 Patching Omni Outs You can route the DM1000’s internal signals to OMNI OUT 1–12. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out Patch | Omni Out page appears. 1 The OMNI 1–12 parameter boxes (1) indicate the currently-patched signals. The parameter indicators are explained below: Parameter values Description No assignment BUS1–BUS8 Bus Out 1–8 signal AUX1–AUX8 Aux Out 1–8 signal ST L/R Stereo Out signal INS CH1–INS CH48 Input Channel 1–48 Insert Out INS BUS1–INS BUS8 Bus Out 1–8 Insert Out INS AUX1–INS AUX8 Aux Out 1–8 Insert Out INS ST-L/ST-R Stereo Out Insert Out SURR XXX (“XXX” represents a channel name.) Surround Monitor Outs CR-L/CR-R Control Room Monitor signals CAS BUS1–BUS8 Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs CAS AUX1–AUX8 Aux Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs CAS ST-L/ST-R Stereo Bus Cascade Outs CASSOLOL/CASSOLOR Solo Bus Cascade Outs SOLO-L/SOLO-R Solo Bus signal M.MX XXX (“XXX” represents a channel name.) Output signals from the surround monitor monitor matrix 2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter you wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching. 3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change. Tip: You can store the Output Patch settings to the Output Patch library. Refer to Chapter 15 “Libraries” on page 173 for more information. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Input & Output Patching – 9 114 Chapter 9—Input & Output Patching Patching the 2TR Digital Outputs You can route the DM1000’s internal signals to 2TR OUT DIGITAL connectors 1–2. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out Patch | 2TR Out page appears. Signals assigned on the Omni Out page can also be assigned to the 2TR digital outputs. 2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter you wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching. 3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change. Patching Slot Outputs You can route the DM1000’s internal signals to optional mini-YGDAI cards installed in Slot 1 and 2. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out Patch | Slot Out page appears. Signals assigned on the Omni Out page can also be assigned to the slot outputs. However, you cannot assign SURR. XXX and M.MX XXX. 2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter you wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching. 3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Patching Direct Outs 115 Patching Direct Outs Input Channel 1–48 signals can be directly patched to any outputs or slot outputs, as well as Bus Out 1–8 and Stereo Out. This patching is convenient when you wish to record each Input Channel signal to an individual track on a connected recorder. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out Patch | Direct Out page appears. 1 2 9 The parameters on this page are described below. These boxes indicate the Direct Out destination (outputs and slot channels) for Input Channels 1–48. B DIRECT OUT Determines the Direct Out signal source position from the following three options: • PRE EQ ..........................Immediately before Input Channel EQ • PRE FADER ..................Immediately before Input Channel fader • POST FADER ...............Immediately after Input Channel fader 2 Move the cursor to a patch parameter (1–48) you wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the destination. If necessary, specify the signal source position using the DIRECT OUT parameter. 3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change. Note: If you select a destination that is already used by an Output Patch setting and turn on the ROUTING [DIRECT] button, the Output Patch setting will be disabled. To restore the Output Patch setting, select another DIRECT OUT destination or turn off the ROUTING [DIRECT] button. 4 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the Input Channel that is patched to the Direct Out assigned in Steps 2 and 3. 5 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING [DIRECT] button. The Direct Out patching is now effective, and the signals are routed to the assigned outputs or slot channels. Tip: Press the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to display the Routing page. On this page, you can simultaneously route multiple Input Channels to Direct Outs. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Input & Output Patching A 1–48 116 Chapter 9—Input & Output Patching Insert Patching The DM1000’s Input Channels and Output Channels (Stereo Out, Bus Out 1–8, Aux Out 1–8) feature independent Insert Ins and Outs. Inputs, outputs, slot channels, and internal effects processor inputs and outputs can be patched to the Output Channel Insert Ins and Outs. In this way, you can send the signals to external effects processors for processing, or insert internal effects. Individual Insert Patching You can patch the DM1000’s inputs, outputs, slot channels, and effects processor inputs and outputs to the Insert Ins and Outs. The same procedure applies to both Input Channels and Output Channels. Effects Input Output connector Insert Out Output Input connector Insert In Channel 1 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader of an Input Channel or Output Channel for Insert patching. 2 Press the [ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the page appears. /INS/DLY | Insert 1 2 3 This page contains the following parameters: A POSITION This parameter determines the insert position of the Insert patch or compressor. The insert position is indicated by highlighted COMP or INSERT buttons. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Insert Patching 117 B INSERT section • ON/OFF.........................This button turns Insert on or off. • OUT ...............................This parameter enables you to select outputs, slot channels, or internal effects inputs as the Insert Out destination. • IN....................................This parameter enables you to select inputs, slot channels, or internal effects outputs as the Insert In source. C COMP section • ON/OFF.........................This button turns the compressor on or off. • ORDER..........................This parameter determines the order of Insert patch and compressor when they are inserted at the same signal path point. With the “COMP → INS” setting, signals pass through the compressor first, then the Insert. With the “INS → COMP” setting, signals pass through the Insert first, then the compressor. 3 Move the cursor to the OUT parameter box, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the desired outputs, slot channels, or internal effects inputs to be patched to Insert Out. The parameter indicators are explained below: Parameter values Description – No assignment S1-1–S116 Channels 1–16 of Slot 1 S2-1–S216 Channels 1–16 of Slot 2 OMN1–OM12 OMNI OUT connectors 1–12 2D1L & 2D1R 2TR OUT DIGITAL1 (L/R) 2D2L & 2D2R 2TR OUT DIGITAL2 (L/R) FX1-1–FX1-8 Inputs 1–8 of Internal Effects Processor 1 FX2-1 & FX2-2 Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2 FX3-1 & FX3-2 Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3 FX4-1 & FX4-2 Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4 9 5 Move the cursor to the desired IN parameter box, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the inputs or slot channels to be patched to the Insert In. Refer to the explanation regarding the Input Patch for more information on the parameter values (see page 110). 6 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change. Tip: Move the cursor to an empty OUT or IN parameter box and press the [ENTER] button. The Patch Select window appears. Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the cursor buttons to select an item to be patched and press [ENTER]. Then, move the cursor to the YES button and press [ENTER]. The selected item is now patched. 7 To enable the specified Insert patch, move the cursor to the ON/OFF button in the INSERT section, and press [ENTER] to turn it on or off. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Input & Output Patching 4 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change. If you move the cursor to another parameter box or display another page before you press the [ENTER] button, all settings on this page will be cancelled. 118 Chapter 9—Input & Output Patching Viewing and Changing Insert In Patch You can view and also change the items patched to the Insert Ins of all Input Channels (or all Output Channels). This is useful when you wish to find out if multiple channels have the same patch. 1 To view the Input Channels’ Insert Ins, press the [INPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the In Patch | Insert In page appears. This page displays Input Channels 1–48 Insert In Patches. 2 Move the cursor to a channel patch parameter box you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching. 3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change. 4 To view the Output Channels’ Insert Ins, press the [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out Patch | Insert In page appears. 5 Move the cursor to a channel patch parameter box you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching. 6 Press [ENTER] to confirm the change. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Control Room Monitoring 119 10 Control Room Monitoring This chapter explains how to set up control room monitoring and use the Solo and Talkback functions on the DM1000. Control Room Monitor The DM1000 features the Control Room stereo signal path to feed the control room’s main monitors. By default, the Control Room signal source is patched to OMNI OUT connectors 11 & 12, which can feed the Control Room signal to the control room’s monitor. 10 • SOLO bus This special bus routes soloed Input Channels to the Control Room Monitor output, bypassing Bus 1–8 and the Stereo Bus. • OUTPUT SOLO This section routes soloed Output Channels (Aux Out 1–8, Bus Out 1–8) to the Control Room Monitor output. Note: Input and Output Channels cannot be solo-monitored simultaneously. The solo function for the most-recently soloed channels is enabled. • MONITOR LEVEL Use the MONITOR [MONITOR LEVEL] control on the top panel to adjust the Control Room Monitor level. • DIMM (Dimmer) The [DIMMER] button lowers the Control Room Monitor signal by the specified amount. Note: The Dimmer function is activated automatically when the Talkback or Oscillator function is active. • PHONES The Control Room Monitor signal is also fed to the PHONES jack. You can set the level independently. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Control Room Monitoring • MONITOR SELECT As a Control Room Monitor signal, you can select one from Stereo Out output, 2TR IN DIGITAL 1 input, and 2TR IN DIGITAL 2 input. If you change the parameter setting on the Monitor | C-R/TB page (see page 122), you can monitor the OMNI IN signal, instead of the 2TR IN DIGITAL signal, when you press the [2TR D1] or [2TR D2] button. 120 Chapter 10—Control Room Monitoring Solo Setup For solo setup, press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Solo page appears. 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 This page contains the following parameters: A SOLO This parameter turns the Solo function on or off. By default, it is set to Enabled. B MODE This parameter determines how the Solo function works. There are two options. The setting affects only Input Channels. • RECORDING............... In Recording Solo mode, soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Solo bus and output via the Control Room Outputs. Other buses (Stereo bus and Bus 1–8) are unaffected by this mode. • MIXDOWN.................. In Mixdown Solo mode, soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Stereo bus and output via the Control Room Outputs. Unsoloed Input Channels are not fed to the Stereo bus while the Solo function is enabled. Tip: • Recording Solo mode is convenient when you wish to monitor certain Input Channels while recording, since the Stereo bus and Bus 1–8 signals are unaffected • Mixdown Solo mode is useful when you wish to mute unsoloed Input Channels and feed soloed Input Channel signals to the Stereo bus during mixdown. C SEL MODE This parameter determines how the Input Channels will be soloed when you press the [SOLO] button of each Channel. There are two options. • MIX SOLO.................... In Mix Solo mode, any number of channels can be soloed simultaneously. • LAST SOLO .................. In Last Solo mode, only one channel can be soloed at a time by pressing the [SOLO] button. The Solo function that was previously enabled for channels is automatically cancelled. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Using the Solo Function 121 D LISTEN This parameter determines the source of the Input Channel Solo signal: Pre Fader or After Pan. When Pre Fader is selected, turning on the PAN button below the Pre Fader option will solo the channel with the pan position specified by the Pan setting even if the source precedes the fader. This parameter is effective only in Recording Solo mode. E SOLO TRIM This parameter enables you to trim the level of the Solo signal in the range of –96 dB to +12 dB. F SOLO INTERRUPTION When this parameter is set to Off, soloed channel signals are not fed to the Control Room Monitor outputs. To monitor the Control Room Monitor signals and soloed channel signals separately, change the output patching so that the soloed channel signals are output independently from the Control Room Monitor outputs, then turn the Solo Interruption parameter to Off. G SOLO SAFE CHANNEL For Mixdown Solo mode, Input Channels can be configured individually so that they are not muted when other Input Channels are soloed (Solo Safe function). Signals from Input Channels with the SOLO SAFE CHANNEL button turned on are always fed to the Stereo bus, regardless of the channels’ Solo function status. You can clear all Solo Safe settings by turning on the ALL CLEAR button. Tip: For example, if you set the internal effects processor’s return signal to Solo Safe, you can monitor the soloed “processed (or wet)” signals. H AUX/SOLO LINK I FADER/SOLO RELEASE If this check box is checked, you can unsolo the channels by raising the channel faders that were at the level of –∞ when the Solo function was turned on. If the faders were set to higher than –∞, the channels cannot be soloed. This setting is not effective in Mixdown Solo mode and for Output Channels. Note: When you check the AUX/SOLO LINK or FADER/SOLO RELEASE check box, the Solo setting is temporarily cancelled. Using the Solo Function You can solo and monitor Input Channels, Aux Out 1–8, and Bus Out 1–8 using the [SOLO] buttons on the top panel. 1 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Solo page appears. 2 Set the SOLO parameter to On and the SOLO INTERRUPTION parameter to Off. Set other parameters on the page, if necessary. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Control Room Monitoring When this check box is checked, you can solo or unsolo Aux Sends using the AUX SELECT [AUX 1] - [AUX 8] buttons without having to switch to the Master layer (see page 107). 10 122 Chapter 10—Control Room Monitoring 3 To solo and monitor Input Channels, press the corresponding LAYER button to select a Layer that contains the desired channels, then press the channel [SOLO] buttons. The channel [SOLO] button indicators and the MONITOR [SOLO] indicator light up. Only the soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Control Room Monitor outputs. Tip: If the SEL MODE parameter is set to Mix Solo on the Monitor | Solo page, you can solo multiple Input Channels simultaneously. 4 To solo and monitor Output Channels, press the LAYER [MASTER] button, then press the channel [SOLO] buttons. Input and Output Channels (Aux Out 1–8, Bus Out 1–8) cannot be solo-monitored simultaneously. For example, if you solo an Input Channel, then solo an Output Channel, the first solo channel is temporarily cancelled. If you solo an Output Channel first, then solo an Input Channel, canceling the Input Channel’s solo will activate the Output Channel’s solo. 5 You can unsolo all soloed channels by pressing all illuminated channel [SOLO] buttons. The button indicators turn off. You can also unsolo all soloed channels by pressing the MONITOR [CLEAR] button. Using the Control Room Monitor 1 Connect a monitoring system to the outputs (by default, OMNI OUT 11&12) to which the Control Room Monitor signal is patched. To monitor the signal via headphones, connect headphones to the PHONES jack. 2 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | C-R/TB page appears. 4 1 3 2 A 2TR DIN FLIP This parameter enables you to specify the signal source that will be monitored when you press the MONITOR [2TR D1] or [2TR D2] button. • 2TR D1 & OMNI 1/2 ... These buttons select the 2TR IN DIGITAL 1 and OMNI IN 1/2 inputs respectively as the signal source that will be monitored when you press the [2TR D1] button. • 2TR D2 & OMNI 3/4 ... These buttons select the 2TR IN DIGITAL 2 and OMNI IN 3/4 inputs respectively as the signal source that will be monitored when you press the [2TR D2] button. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Using the Talkback Function 123 B CONTROL ROOM DIMMER LEVEL This parameter determines the amount of attenuation applied to the Control Room Monitor signal by the Dimmer function when you press the MONITOR [DIMMER] button. The amount of attenuation can range from 0 dB to –96 dB. C MONO This button switches the Control Room Monitor signal into mono. D MIX C-R SOURCES Check this check box to select the [2TR D1] or [2TR D2] button and the [STEREO] button as the monitoring signal sources simultaneously. 3 Set the Control Room Monitor parameters as necessary. 4 Press the MONITOR [STEREO], [2TR D1], or [2TR D2] button to select the monitoring signal source. Each button selects the following monitoring signal sources. When the MIX C-R SOURCES check box is checked, you can select the [2TR D1] or [2TR D2] button and the [STEREO] button simultaneously. However, you cannot select both [2TR D1] button and [2TR D2] button. If the MIX C-R SOURCES check box is not checked, you can select only one signal source. • [STEREO] button ........Selects the Stereo Out signal. • [2TR D1] button ..........Selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL1 signal. • [2TR D2] button ..........Selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL2 signal. Note: In this case, the [2TR D1] and [2TR D2] buttons are effective only when external devices are connected to the 2TR Digital Outputs respectively and are turned on. 5 Adjust the monitoring level using the MONITOR [MONITOR LEVEL] control while playing the sound sources. To adjust the level of the monitoring signal via headphones, turn the [PHONE LEVEL] control. Using the Talkback Function The DM1000 features a built-in talkback microphone on the control surface. The Talkback function distributes the Talkback mic signal to the specified outputs or slot channels. The Talkback function is useful when you wish to communicate with the musicians in the studio or record your comments to a recorder. MONITOR DISPLAY SOLO CLEAR 2TR D1 2TR D2 SLOT BUS DIMMER TALKBACK STEREO 0 10 MONITOR LEVEL DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Control Room Monitoring Tip: If you change the 2TR DIN FLIP parameter setting, pressing the [2TR D1] or [2TR D2] button enables you to monitor the OMNI IN signal, instead of the 2TR IN DIGITAL signal. 10 124 Chapter 10—Control Room Monitoring 1 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | C-R/TB page appears. 1 2 3 4 This page contains the following parameters: A OUTPUT ASSIGN section The buttons in this section enable you to assign the Talkback mic signal to the desired outputs. (You can select multiple destinations.) B TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL When the Talkback function is active, this parameter determines the amount of attenuation applied to the Control Room monitor signals. The amount of attenuation can range from 0 dB to –96 dB. C USE ..... AS TALKBACK check box Checking this box enables you to select an AD Input or slot input channel signal specified in the parameter box as the Talkback signal source. D NEVER LATCH TALKBACK check box If this check box is checked, the Talkback function is enabled only while you are holding down the [TALKBACK] button. When you release the button, the Talkback function turns off. If the check box is unchecked, the Talkback function remains effective after you press and release the [TALKBACK] button. 2 Move the cursor to the number button of an output channel to which you wish to assign the Talkback signal in the OUTPUT ASSIGN section, then press the [ENTER] button to highlight the channel number. 3 If you wish to operate the [DIMMER] button during Talkback communication, move the cursor to the TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL control and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to set the amount of attenuation. 4 Press the [TALKBACK] button. The Talkback function is enabled. By default, pressing and releasing the [TALKBACK] button once enables the Talkback function. Press the button again to turn off the function. If you press and hold down the [TALKBACK] button for more than 300ms, the Talkback function is enabled as long as you hold down the button, and the function is turned off when you release the button. However, if you have checked the NEVER LATCH TALKBACK check box on the Monitor | Talkback page, the Talkback function remains effective only while you are pressing and holding down the button. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 125 Surround Functions 11 Surround Functions This chapter describes surround panning, which determines how Input Channel signals are panned within and across the stereo field. It also describes the DM1000’s surround monitoring capabilities, which enable you to monitor, in a surround sound environment, DM1000 surround mixes or surround sources input via the slots. Using Surround Pan About Surround Pan The Surround Pan function places a sound image within a two-dimensional field using a multi-channel playback system, and pans the image to the front, rear, left, and right in relation to the listening position. To pan the stereo image, you can use the Parameter wheel, [INC]/[DEC] buttons, or Joystick. You can also store the surround pan settings in a Scene, or record the movement of the sound image to Automixes. If each channel’s follow pan (see page 74) is turned off, you can route the signals to the corresponding Bus Outs regardless of the Surround Pan setting. This is convenient when you wish to assign the surround source or surround effect returns to the Buses. If “Nominal Pan” (see page 267) in the Prefer1 page is checked, the level of the Input Channels that are panned hard left or right will be used as the nominal level. If the check box is not checked, the nominal level will be +3dB. In addition to a normal Stereo mode, the DM1000 features the following three Surround modes: • 3-1 This mode uses four channels that include front left, front right, front center, and rear. Front L Center Front R Surround • 5.1 This mode uses six channels that include front left, front right, rear left, rear right, front center, and subwoofer. Subwoofer Front L Rear L Center Front R Rear R DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 11 Surround Functions Note: If you save a scene with the Follow Pan function turned off while using a DM1000 that runs firmware older than Version 2.0, the surround settings of the scene may not be played back correctly. 126 Chapter 11—Surround Functions • 6.1 This mode uses seven channels that include six channels of 5.1 mode plus rear center. Subwoofer Front L Rear L Center Rear center Front R Rear R When you select one of these Surround modes, each surround channel is routed to the Buses specified on the Setup | Surr Bus page (see page 130). The following table shows the factory-default Surround Channel to Bus Out assignment in each Surround mode. Surround Mode 3-1 5.1 6.1 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 L R C S Front left Front right Center Surround BUS5 BUS6 BUS7 — — — L R Ls Rs C LFE Front left Front right Rear left Rear right Center Subwoofer — L R Ls Rs C Bs LFE Front left Front right Rear left Rear right Center Rear center Subwoofer Using Surround Pan 127 You can record each surround channel to a separate track to record surround panning. The following diagram is an example in which each channel signal in 5.1 Surround mode is recorded to digital MTR tracks. SURROUND PAN Input Channel 1 BUS1 (L) BUS2 (R) BUS3 (Ls) BUS4 (Rs) BUS5 (C) BUS6 (LFE) DM1000 LFE LEVEL SURROUND PAN Input Channel 2 LFE LEVEL SURROUND PAN Input Channel 3 LFE LEVEL Slot Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 8-TRACK DIGITAL Track 5 Digital MTR Track 6 11 MY8-TD etc. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Surround Functions Tip: You can set the surround pan either independently of normal panpots or in unison with them. 128 Chapter 11—Surround Functions Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes To configure the surround environment, select 3-1, 5.1, or 6.1 Surround mode on the DM1000 and connect a multi-channel monitoring system to the DM1000. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/SURROUND] button repeatedly until the Pan/Surr | Surr Mode page appears. 2 1 3 A SURROUND MODE • • • • This parameter enables you to select a Surround mode by using the following buttons. The button that is turned on (highlighted) indicates the currently-selected Surround mode. STEREO ........................ The DM1000 uses normal stereo mode (default). 3-1 .................................. Selects 3-1 Surround mode. 5.1................................... Selects 5.1 Surround mode. 6.1................................... Selects 6.1 Surround mode. B PAN/SURR LINK When this button is turned on, Input Channel panpots and stereo surround panning are linked. C Press this button to display the Surr Bus page, which enables you to change the Surround Channel to Bus Out assignment. 2 Move the cursor to the Surround mode button you want to use. When you move the cursor to one of these buttons, speaker icons appear, indicating a typical listening position and the Surround Channel to Bus Out configuration. • 3-1 Surround DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Using Surround Pan 129 • 5.1 Surround • 6.1 Surround 11 4 Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER]. The DM1000 enters the selected Surround mode. 5 To link the Input Channel Pan setting with the stereo surround panning, move the cursor to the PAN/SURR LINK button, then press [ENTER]. When the PAN/SURR LINK button is turned on, adjusting the Input Channel pan settings will also change the stereo surround panning accordingly, and vice versa. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Surround Functions 3 Press the [ENTER] button. The confirmation window for changing the Surround mode appears. 130 Chapter 11—Surround Functions 6 To change the Surround Channel to Bus Out assignment, move the cursor to the SURR/BUS SETUP button, then press [ENTER]. The Setup | Surr Bus page appears. 1 2 A BUS1–BUS8 These parameters select channels to be assigned to the Bus Outs in 3-1, 5.1, and 6.1 Surround modes. B INIT These buttons reset the channel assignment to the default setting. 7 To change the assignment, move the cursor to the desired Bus parameter, rotate the Parameter wheel to select a channel, then press [ENTER]. The channels are swapped between the selected Bus and the Bus to which the channel assigned to the selected Bus was assigned previously. Tip: • Pressing the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly also displays the Surr Bus page. • Available Bus Outs vary depending on the Surround mode. For example, in 3-1 Surround mode, Bus Outs 1–4 are available. In 5.1 Surround mode, Bus Outs 1–6 are available, and in 6.1 Surround mode, Bus Outs 1–7 are available. 8 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out Patch | Slot Out page appears, then make sure that each Bus Out is routed to the desired channel on the digital I/O card. To monitor signals routed to the digital I/O card in the surround environment, use surround monitoring (see page 136). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Using Surround Pan 131 Surround Panning from the Display You can set the surround pan parameters for each Input Channel from the display. 1 Make sure that the DM1000 is in one of the Surround modes, then press the [SEL] button of the channel for which you want to set surround pan. 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/SURROUND] button repeatedly until the Pan/Surr | Ch Edit page appears. The Ch Edit page displays the selected Input Channel, and its surround pan setting and available pair partner. The following display page is an example in 6.1 Surround mode. 1 2 3 4 5 67 11 98 A Surround pan graph This graph indicates the pan positions in the two-dimensional field, with the listening position in the center. A small diamond ( ) indicates the current surround pan position, and a small square ( ) indicates the current position of the Joystick. You can move the current surround pan position ( ) directly to one of the speaker icons by selecting its icon, then pressing [ENTER]. B Trajectory patterns These buttons represent seven trajectory patterns that determine how the surround pan moves when you operate the Parameter wheel or the [INC]/[DEC] buttons. C FAST Turning on this button increases the speed of sound images panned via the Parameter wheel. D Trajectory pattern parameters • • • • These parameters fine-tune the surround pan trajectory pattern. WIDTH ...................This parameter sets the left-to-right width of the selected trajectory pattern. DEPTH ....................This parameter sets the front-to-rear width of the selected trajectory pattern. OFFSET ...................This parameter offsets the left-to-right direction of the selected trajectory pattern. OFFSET ...................This parameter offsets the front-to-rear direction of the selected trajectory pattern. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Surround Functions The following parameters are available on this page: 132 Chapter 11—Surround Functions E LFE This parameter control sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel signal routed to the subwoofer, and appears only in 5.1 and 6.1 Surround modes. F DIV This parameter control determines how the Center signal is fed to the Left, Right, and Center channels. It is expressed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100%. When you set the parameter to 100, the Center signal is fed to only the Center channel. When you set the parameter to 0, the Center signal is fed to only the Left and Right channels. When you set the parameter to 50, the Center signal is fed equally to the Left, Right, and Center channels. This parameter control appears only in 3-1 and 5.1 Surround modes. 6F & R In 6.1 Surround mode, F and R parameter controls appear, instead of the DIV control. The F parameter control determines how the Front Center signal is fed to the Left and Right channels, and the R parameter control determines how the rear surround signal is fed to the Left and Right surround channels. G LINK This button is available only in 6.1 Surround mode. When you turn on this button, the F and R controls are set to the same value, and linked together. H ST LINK Turning on this button links the surround pan parameters of two Input Channels that are currently displayed on the page (Stereo Link function). You can link the surround pan parameters of two channels regardless of whether they are paired. I PATTERN When Input Channels are linked by the Stereo Link function, the seven patterns selectable here determine how the linked surround pan moves via the Parameter wheel and the [INC]/[DEC] buttons. Tip: In 3-1, 5.1, and 6.1 Surround modes, operating the Joystick locates the Pan/Surr | Ch Edit page. 3 Select one of seven trajectory patterns by turning on the corresponding trajectory pattern button. The following patterns are available: • ...................... The sound image moves between left and right. 36 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 40 40 56 Using Surround Pan • ...................... The sound image moves between front and rear. 36 • 36 36 36 40 48 56 12 8 8 44 16 20 16 ...................... The sound image moves from front left to rear right. With this pattern, you can also fine-tune the trajectory using the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( ) parameters. 36 • 40 12 8 8 44 16 20 16 ...................... The sound image moves between left and right while tracing an arc. With this pattern, you can also fine-tune the radius and shape of the arc using the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( ) parameters. 44 44 20 32 28 56 32 24 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 11 Surround Functions 36 40 ...................... The sound image moves from front right to rear left. With this pattern, you can also fine-tune the trajectory by using the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( ) parameters. 36 • 133 134 Chapter 11—Surround Functions • 40 48 44 • 44 ...................... The sound image moves between front and rear while tracing an arc. With this pattern, you can also fine-tune the radius and shape of the arc using the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( ) parameters. 44 20 32 28 56 32 24 ...................... The sound image moves while tracing a circle or oval. With this pattern, you can also fine-tune the radius and shape of the circle or oval using the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( ) parameters. 48 32 24 24 24 60 40 52 40 4 If necessary, fine-tune the trajectory by editing the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( ) parameter values. 5 To set the surround pan position, move the cursor to anywhere outside the parameter boxes, then rotate the Parameter wheel. Tip: You can also adjust the pan position using the Encoders if you assign the surround pan parameters to the Encoders. 6 To adjust the surround pan using the Joystick, press the SELECTED CHANNEL [GRAB] button (the button indicator lights up), then operate the Joystick. In this way, you can move the current pan position icons ( ) directly and quickly. Even if the [GRAB] button is turned off, placing the small square ( ) over the small diamond ( ) will automatically turn on the [GRAB] button. This Joystick function can be disabled by the Joystick Auto Grab preference (see page 268) on the Setup | Prefer1 page. 7 To link the surround pan settings of two channels displayed on the page, turn on the ST LINK button. Use the PATTERN parameter box below the ST LINK button to specify how you want the linked surround pan to move. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Using Surround Pan 135 The following table shows how the sound images on two linked channels move when different trajectory patterns and stereo link patterns are combined. A solid line indicates the movement of the selected channel, and a dotted line indicates the movement of the linked partner. Trajectory Pattern 11 8 To list multiple-channel surround pan settings, press the [PAN/SURROUND] button repeatedly until the Pan/Surr | Surr1–16, Surr17–32, or Surr33–48 page appears. These pages display and enable you to edit the surround pan settings for 16 channels. 1 2 3 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Surround Functions Note: If you record the movement of the linked channels in an Automix, the sound image moves on both channels when you play the Automix. 136 Chapter 11—Surround Functions A Surround pan graphs These graphs display the trajectory patterns and the current pan positions for the Input Channels. Move the cursor to the desired channel’s graph, then rotate the Parameter wheel to adjust the pan settings along the selected trajectory pattern. Turning on the [GRAB] button enables you to use the Joystick to set the surround pan of the currently-selected Input Channel. Press [ENTER] while the cursor is on the graph to display the Ch Edit page for the selected channel. B parameter box This parameter box enables you to move the surround pan setting of the selected channel left and right. C parameter box This parameter box enables you to move the surround pan setting of the selected channel front and rear. Surround Monitoring About Surround Monitoring The DM1000 features comprehensive surround monitoring functions that enable you to monitor, in the optimum environment, the surround sources in the Buses or those input from Slot 1 or 2. These functions include down mixing (which enables you to monitor signals on fewer channels) and fine-tuning of surround channel signals according to the monitoring environment. The surround monitoring functions also feature an oscillator for testing speakers, a monitoring matrix for down mixing, Bass Management for optimizing channel signals for the monitoring environment, and monitor alignment using individual Attenuator and Delay parameters for each speaker. FROM CONTROL ROOM L/R TO CONTROL ROOM DIMM C-R to SURROUND MONITOR SLOT1 1-8 SLOT2 1-8 8 8 8x8 Patch 8 8 MONITOR LEVEL SLOT SURROUND MONITOR PINK NOISE BUS1-8 8 BUS 1kHz, 50Hz MONITOR MATRIX BASS MANAGEMENT MONITOR ALLIGNMENT DIMM 500-2kHz BPF TO OUTPUT PATCH 8 STEREO 2 MONITOR MATRIX OUT To monitor the Surround Monitor signal via the surround system, you must connect the system to the output connectors on the DM1000, then patch the Surround Monitor signal source to these connectors. For example, if the surround system is connected to the OMNI OUT connector, press the [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out Patch | OMNI Out page appears. This page will enable you to patch the surround channel (indicated as “SURR XXX” where “XXX” is the channel name) to the corresponding OMNI OUT connector. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 137 Surround Monitoring The following diagram shows an example of 5.1 Surround Monitor signals patched to OMNI OUTs 1–6. Use the following two buttons in the MONITOR section on the top panel to select the Surround Monitor signal source. If the MIX MONITOR SOURCES check box is checked in the Monitor | Surround page, you can select both buttons simultaneously. • [BUS] button This button selects the Bus Outs assigned to the surround channels as the source. Turn on this button to check the effects of surround pan and surround effect settings, or to monitor a surround mix currently being recorded to a digital MTR. DISPLAY SOLO CLEAR 2TR D1 2TR D2 SLOT BUS DIMMER TALKBACK STEREO 0 10 MONITOR LEVEL Note: If you turn on the [BUS] button while Surround mode is set to Stereo, the Stereo Bus signals are patched to Surround Monitor. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 11 Surround Functions • [SLOT] button This button selects the Inputs of Slot 1 or 2 as the source. Turn on this button to monitor a surround mix from a connected multi-track recorder. Use the MONITOR [MONITOR LEVEL] control on the top panel to adjust the Surround Monitor level. MONITOR 138 Chapter 11—Surround Functions Configuring Basic Surround Monitoring You can set basic parameters for Surround Monitor, including monitor matrix, Bass Management, and monitor alignment. To do so, press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Surr Setup page appears. 1 This page displays the basic parameter settings in the MONITOR FLOW section (1). • SURR. MODE This parameter indicates the current Surround mode. (You cannot change the Surround mode on this page). Note: If you set Surround mode to 6.1 and Monitor Matrix to 6.1 for monitoring on the DM1000 with a firmware version older than 2.0, the DM1000 with the firmware version 2.0 may not reproduce the exact same monitoring environment. • MONITOR MATRIX This parameter selects a surround mode on the surround monitoring system. By default, it is set to the same mode as the SURR. MODE parameter, though you can select any mode that features fewer channels than the current mode. This function is useful when you wish to monitor, for example, a 5.1 surround source through a stereo monitoring system. Available modes depend on the current Surround mode. Surround Mode ST 3-1 5.1 6.1 STEREO O — — — 3-1 O O — — 5.1 O O O — 6.1 O O O O When you change the Monitor Matrix mode in the MONITOR MATRIX parameter box, the area below the MONITOR FLOW section displays the Matrix flow diagram as well as ATT parameter boxes that enable you to adjust the amount of attenuation for each signal path. Adjust the attenuation, if necessary. Note: If you selected 3-1 Monitor Matrix mode, specify a value identical to the following three attenuation parameters: • ATT1 for 3-1 SURR. • ATT4 for 5.1 SURR. • ATT5 for 6.1 SURR. This attenuation amount is not used for down-mixes, but rather for adjusting the monitoring level of the Ls, Rs, Ls2, and Rs2 speakers. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 139 Surround Monitoring The following diagram shows an example in 5.1 Surround mode and 3-1 Monitor Matrix mode. Note: You can patch the Surround Monitor Matrix channels to the output connectors. • BASS MANAGEMENT You can set the filter and attenuator settings for each Surround Monitor Channel using eight preset Bass Management modes. The following presets are available: Presets No. Parameters Title HPF 1, 2, 3 LPF1 LPF2 ATT 1 & 2 AMP 1 DVD LFE80Hz 80–12 80–24 80–24 0 10 2 DVD LFE120Hz 80–12 120–42 80–24 0 10 3 Movie LFE80Hz 80–12 80–24 80–24 –3 10 4 Movie LFE120Hz 80–12 120–42 80–24 –3 10 5 Bypass THRU THRU MUTE 0 0 THX DVD 80-12L 120-42 80-24L 0 10 THXF THX Movie 80-12L 120-42 80-24L –3 10 THXM THX Music 80-12L 120-42 80-24L 0 10 ATT1: Adjusts the level difference between LR and LsRs. ATT2: Adjusts the level difference between C and Bs. AMP: Corrects the LFE channel level. HPF1–3: Cut the low range so that the speakers’ supporting frequency ranges will not interfere with the subwoofer signals. HPF1–2: Cut the high range so that the subwoofer’s supporting frequency ranges will not interfere with other speakers’ signals. Note: • If you select preset THXD or THXF, you cannot change the parameters. • If you select preset THXM, you can switch AMP between 10 dB and 0 dB. However, you cannot change other parameters. You can set the Bass Management parameters in the following ranges: Parameters Range HPF 1, 2, 3 THRU, 80-12, 80-12L, 80-24, 80-24L LPF1 THRU, 80-24, 80-24L, 120-42 LPF2 THRU, 80-24, 80-24L, MUTE ATT 1 & 2 0 to –12 dB (1 dB steps) AMP 0 to +12 dB (1 dB steps) The HPF 1, 2, 3, and LPF 1 & 2 values indicate a cut-off frequency and a filter response. For example, “80-12” means a cutoff frequency of 80 Hz and a filter response of –12 dB/octave. “L” means Linkwitz filter. Other filters are Butterworth. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 11 Surround Functions THXD 140 Chapter 11—Surround Functions About the Presets (1) DVD LFE80Hz This is a preset optimized for DVD-Video production. The LFE playback bandwidth is set up to 80 Hz. When using this preset, we recommend that you use an external device to apply an LPF (fc=80 Hz, –24 dB/oct) to the LFE master source. To monitor audio on DVD-Audio or SACD discs, change the LFE level (AMP) and LPF (LPF1) to 0 dB and THRU, respectively, if necessary. The LFE output gain on some DVD players and decoders may already be set to +10 dB. To monitor the output from such devices, change the LFE level (AMP) to 0 dB. (2) DVD LFE120Hz This is also a preset optimized for DVD-Video production. This preset is the same as preset (1) mentioned above, except that the LFE playback bandwidth is set up to 120 Hz. Use this preset to monitor standard LFE signals recorded on DVD-Video discs that include the high-end frequency ranges (120 Hz). (3) Movie LFE80Hz This preset is the same as preset (1) mentioned above, except that the output level of surround channels is set to –3 dB when the Monitor Matrix mode is 5.1 or 6.1. This preset is suitable for movie production. When using this preset, we recommend that you use an external device to apply an LPF (fc=80 Hz, –24 dB/oct) to the LFE master source. (4) Movie LFE120Hz This preset is the same as preset (2) mentioned above, except that the output level of surround channels is set to –3 dB when the Monitor Matrix mode is 5.1 or 6.1. This preset is suitable for movie production. (5) Bypass Use this preset not only for bass management but to bypass all parameters, such as the LFE level & LPF, surround channel level, etc. To disable only the bass management, select another preset, then turn off the BASS MANAGEMENT ON/OFF button. ■ THX Presets: The following presets have been approved by THX™ Ltd. for use in THX pm3™ Certified Studios*. They are designed to provide dedicated parameters for the proper playback of multi-channel audio content in bass managed systems and to be compatible with subwoofer-satellite type consumer systems. * Use of a THX preset does not permit a studio to use the designation - THX pm3 Certified Studio. The THX pm3 Studio Certification Program uses performance and design specifications to create calibrated environments for optimum sound and picture presentation. For more information, visit the THX website at http://www.thx.com [THXD] THX DVD This preset is configured for DVD-Video production. Use this preset when mixing and/or monitoring audio content not from a theatrical film source. The parameters cannot be changed. [THXF] THX Film This preset is configured for Film pre-production. Use this preset when mixing and/or monitoring theatrical film-based content (such as a pre-mix for film). The parameters cannot be changed. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Surround Monitoring 141 [THXM] THX Music This preset is configured for DVD-Music production. Use this preset when mixing and/or monitoring multi-channel music content (including DVD-Audio and SACD). Only one parameter can be changed. The LFE gain (AMP) can be set to +10dB (default) or 0dB. Select the level that complies with the standards of the target media. Please note: The LFE output gain on some DVD players, receivers, and/or decoders may already be set to +10dB. Select the 0dB setting only if the destination environment (home theatre, etc.) has the LFE gain set to 0dB. Otherwise, use the default setting. The following diagrams show the Bass Management configuration for each Monitor Matrix setting, with Bass Management turned on or off. 6.1 ON 5.1 ON 6.1 OFF 5.1 OFF 11 Surround Functions 3-1 ON ST ON 3-1 OFF ST OFF DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 142 Chapter 11—Surround Functions • MONITOR ALIGNMENT You can adjust the Attenuator and Delay for each Surround Monitor Channel. This function is primarily used to correct the level difference and delay time among speakers. Move the cursor to the ATT or DLY parameter in the MONITOR FLOW section. The MONITOR ALIGNMENT diagram is displayed in the area below the section. Move the cursor to the ATT or DLY parameter box and edit the Attenuator or Delay value. The Attenuator parameters can be set to –∞ dB or from –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB in 0.1 dB steps. The Delay parameters can be set from 0.00 to 30.0 msec in 0.02 msec steps. Note: • These parameter settings are effective only on the monitoring signals, not on normal Bus Out signals. • If you set Surround mode to 6.1 and Monitor Matrix mode to 6.1 for monitoring, you must also make the settings described above. Tip: You can store these settings in the Surround Monitor library. See page 186 for more information. Setting the Monitoring Level of the Sound System 1 Adjust the monitoring levels using the MONITOR [MONITOR LEVEL] control. All channel monitoring levels change simultaneously. 2 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Surround page appears. This page enables you to solo or mute monitoring channels, store the [MONITOR LEVEL] control setting, and select the monitoring source. 1 2 3 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Surround Monitoring 143 A MUTE/SOLO section This section enables you to mute or solo Surround Monitor Channels for each Bus. • SOLO .............................This button turns the Surround Monitor Solo function on or off. When this button is turned on, you can select speaker icons ( ) to solo certain Buses. • buttons .................These buttons mute or unmute the speakers. The meters connected to the speaker icons indicate the signal level of the corresponding Buses. B SETTING section • MIX MONITOR SOURCES .............. When this check box is checked, you can select the [BUS] button and [SLOT] button simultaneously as the monitoring source. • SLOT 1 & 2 ........................................... These buttons determine which Slot Inputs are monitored through the Surround Monitor when you press the [SLOT] button. Turning on both buttons 1 and 2 mixes the two slot signals. • C-R TO MONITOR L/R..................... When this button is turned on, the Left and Right Surround Monitor Channels are fed to the Control Room Monitors. C STATUS section • • • Note: The Surround Monitor Mute and Solo functions are reset to the default condition when you change the Surround mode. 3 Move the cursor to the SET SPL button, then press [ENTER] to turn on the button. The volume setting of the [MONITOR LEVEL] control is calibrated to 85 dB SPL and stored. If you store the cinema standard level in this way, moving the cursor to the SNAP TO SPL85 button and pressing [ENTER] always restores the stored value, even after you adjust the [MONITOR LEVEL] control. Tip: When the SET SPL button is turned on, the standard value (85.0 dB ) indicated in the MONITOR LEVEL box is applied to the stored [MONITOR LEVEL] control setting. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 11 Surround Functions • This section enables you to set the output levels of the currently-selected Surround Monitors. SURROUND MODE ...This parameter displays the current Surround mode. MONITOR LEVEL.......This parameter indicates the current Surround Monitor level. SET SPL85.....................This button enables you to calibrate the volume setting of the [MONITOR LEVEL] control to 85 dB SPL, the cinema standard for setting up Surround Channel Monitor speakers, and then store the value. SNAP TO SPL85...........Turning on this button resets the [MONITOR LEVEL] control setting to the value stored by the SET SPL85 button. 144 Chapter 11—Surround Functions Using the Oscillator for Surround Monitor The DM1000 features a dedicated Oscillator that enables you to check the output and sound of the surround sound speakers. You can send the Oscillator signal to certain speakers or to each speaker in turn. This function is useful when you wish to check the volume balance and phase of the surround monitor speakers. Tip: This Oscillator is available only for Surround monitoring. 1 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Surr Setup page appears. The SPEAKER SETUP section enables you to turn the Oscillator on or off and specify the signal destination. 1 A SPEAKER SETUP You can select the Oscillator waveform and the speakers to which the Oscillator signal is sent. • OSC. .............................. This parameter selects the Oscillator waveform. • ON/OFF ........................ This button turns the Oscillator on or off. • ROTATE ........................ When the ROTATE button is on, the Oscillator signal is output by each speaker in turn, with an interval of five seconds (3-second signal and 2-second pause). • (Speaker) buttons.......................These buttons turn the Oscillator on or off for each speaker. • (SW Phase) button ......................This button reverses the phase of the signal output to the Subwoofer (SW). 2 Make sure that the Speaker button ( ) for the speaker to which you want to output the Oscillator signal is turned on. If the button is off, move the cursor to the button, then press [ENTER] to turn it on. 3 Move the cursor to the OSC. parameter box, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select one of the following Oscillator waveforms. • PINK NOISE ................ Pink noise • 500–2 kH....................... Pink noise through a 500 Hz to 2 kHz BPF • 1 kHz ............................. 1 kHz sinewave • 50 Hz.............................. 50 Hz sinewave DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Surround Monitoring 145 4 Move the cursor to the ON/OFF button, then press the [ENTER] or [INC]/[DEC] buttons to turn the Oscillator on. The speaker specified in Step 2 outputs the Oscillator signal. If necessary, adjust the speaker volume balance in the MONITOR ALIGNMENT section on the Surr Setup page (see page 142). Patching Slot Inputs to Surround Channels You can patch individual Slot Inputs to Surround Monitor Channels as follows. 1 Make sure that the DM1000 is in the same Surround mode as the monitoring source. 2 Press the MONITOR [SLOT] button. Slot 1 or 2 Input is selected as the surround monitor source. 3 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Surr Patch page appears. This page enables you to make the Slot Input to Surround Monitor Channel assignment. 11 5 If necessary, move the cursor to the LEVEL parameter box, then use the Parameter wheel to adjust the Slot Input levels simultaneously. You can adjust the signal levels in the range of –96 dB to +12 dB . 6 Press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Surround page appears. In the SETTING section of the Surround page (see page 143), you can select a Slot Input to be monitored. 7 Move the cursor to the SLOT 1 or 2 button in the SETTING section, then press [ENTER] to select the desired monitoring Slot Input. You can now monitor the selected Slot Input source via Surround Monitor. Tip: You can make a surround source channel assignment for each Surround mode. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Surround Functions 4 Move the cursor to a patch parameter for which you want to change the assignment, and rotate the Parameter wheel to select a slot channel to be assigned to the Surround Monitor channel. To assign no channels, select “–.” Set all unnecessary channels to “–.” 146 Chapter 11—Surround Functions DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters 147 12 Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters This chapter describes how to group faders or [ON] buttons for multiple channels and link the EQ or compressor parameters for simultaneous operation. Grouping & Linking On the DM1000, you can group faders or [ON] buttons for multiple Input Channels or multiple Output Channels (Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8) and link the EQ or compressor parameters. The following elements can be grouped or linked within Input Channels or Output Channels. • Fader group Input Channel or Output Channel faders can be grouped. There are eight Input Channel Fader groups and four Output Channel Fader groups. When channel faders are grouped, operating one of them enables you to control the level of the other grouped faders while maintaining the relative level differences. Also, the DM1000 features a Fader Group Master function that enables you to control the level of all grouped channels using the Group Master level while maintaining the relative level balance between channels. • EQ Link Input or Output Channel EQ parameters can be linked. There are four EQ links for Input Channels and Output Channels respectively. All channels in an EQ link share the same EQ parameter settings. When you change an EQ parameter value for one of the linked channels, the change is applied to all other linked channels. • Compressor Link Input or Output Channel compressor parameters can be linked. There are four compressor links for Input Channels and Output Channels respectively. All channels in a compressor link share the same compressor parameter settings. When you change a compressor parameter value for one of the linked channels, the change is applied to all other linked channels. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 12 Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters • Mute group Input Channel or Output Channel [ON] buttons can be grouped. There are eight Input Channel mute groups and four Output Channel mute groups. When channel [ON] buttons are grouped, pressing any one of them turns the [ON] buttons for all the grouped channels on or off. A mute group can include On channels and Off channels at the same time, which turn off or on respectively when you press any one of the grouped [ON] buttons. Also, the DM1000 features a Mute Group Master function that enables you to mute grouped channels using the Master Mute buttons. 148 Chapter 12—Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups Follow the steps below to group faders or [ON] buttons for Input Channels or Output Channels (Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8). 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until one of the pages that contains the desired group and channels appears. - Fader1–32 page - Fader33–48 page These pages enable you to set Fader groups (A–H) for Input Channels 1–48. - Out Fader page This page enables you to set Fader groups (Q–T) for Bus Outs (1–8) and Aux Outs (1–8). • Fader1–32 page - Mute1–32 page - Mute33–48 page These pages enable you to set Mute groups (I–P) for Input Channels 1–32 and 33–48 respectively. - Out Mute page This page enables you to set Mute groups (U–X) for Bus Outs (1–8) and Aux Outs (1–8). • Mute1–32 page DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups 149 2 Press the up ( ) or down ( ) button to select a group. Example: Fader group C is selected. 3 Press the [SEL] button for a channel you wish to add to the group. The selected channel is marked with “ ” and the channel is added to the group. Example: Input Channels 1–6, and 13–14 have been added to Fader group C. 4 In the same way, press the [SEL] button for other channels you wish to add to the group. The relative level of the faders for the grouped channels is determined by the position of the faders when the channels were added to the group. The On/Off status of the grouped channels is determined by the [ON] button status when the channels were added to the group. 5 To turn a group on or off, move the corresponding button in the ENABLE column, then press [ENTER]. When the group Enable button is turned off, the corresponding group is temporarily cancelled. 6 To use a fader group, operate one of the faders for the grouped channels. Note: • If you wish to change the relative level balance between the grouped channels while this page is displayed, first turn off the Enable button or remove the channels for which you want to change the level from the group. • If other pages are displayed, press and hold down the [SEL] button for the desired channels to temporarily remove them from the group, then change the level balance. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 12 Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters Tip: • If you add one channel from a pair to a group, the pair partner is automatically added to the group. • You can also select a channel on another layer by switching layers. 150 Chapter 12—Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters 7 To use a mute group, press one of the [ON] buttons for the grouped channels. All channels in the group switch their on/off status. Note: • While a mute group is enabled, you cannot turn a subset of the grouped channels on or off. • If you wish to turn a subset of the grouped channels on or off, first turn off the Enable button, or remove the channels you wish to turn on or off from the group. Using Fader Group Master The DM1000 features a Fader Group Master function that enables you to control the level of all channels using the Group Master level while maintaining the relative balance between channels, much like a VCA group on an analog mixing console. While this function is enabled, channel fader operation does not affect channel levels in the corresponding Fader group. 1 After you perform Step 5 in “Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups” on page 148, use the cursor buttons to select the INPUT FADER MASTER check box or the OUTPUT FADER MASTER check box, then press [ENTER] to turn on the Fader Group Master function. 2 When the Fader Master check box is checked, you can set channel levels of the Fader groups in the Master column. When the Master column is selected, repeatedly pressing the [ENTER] button turns the Fader group on and off. You can also make these settings in the In Master page or Out Master page, as shown below. 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button repeatedly until the Group | In Master or Group | Out Master page appears. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Using Fader Group Master 151 4 Use the cursor buttons to select parameters, then use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, or [ENTER] button to set the parameters. • INPUT/OUTPUT FADER MASTER....When this check box is checked, you can set the master levels for the Fader groups. The resultant Channel level equals the corresponding Channel fader level plus the Group Master level. • ALL NOMINAL............This button resets the master levels for all Fader groups to nominal. • ON/OFF.........................This turns each Input Fader group on or off. This function works like a VCA mute on an analog mixing console. • Faders ............................These faders adjust the master levels of the Fader groups. Fader knobs are highlighted when faders are set to 0.0 dB. Press the [ENTER] button to set the currently-selected fader to 0.0 dB. You can also control the parameters from the channel strips on the control surface as described below by using the User Assignable Layer of the Remote Layers. See page 272 for information on the User Assignable Layer. • Encoders........................The Encoders are not available. • [AUTO] buttons...........These buttons are used to control the Fader Group Master On/Off and the master level during Automix. • [SEL] buttons ...............These buttons move the cursor on the In Master page or Out Master page. • [SOLO] buttons ...........These buttons turn the Solo function of each Fader group on and off. You can monitor all the channels in each Fader group. • Channel Faders ............The channel faders enable you to set the master level for each Fader group. 12 Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 152 Chapter 12—Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters Using Mute Group Master In addition to the Mute Group function that links the operation of channel [ON] buttons, the DM1000 features a Mute Group Master function that enables you to mute grouped channels using the Master Mute buttons in a manner similar to using a mute group on an analog mixing console. While this function is enabled, the [ON] buttons for grouped channels will not be linked. 1 After you perform Step 5 in “Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups” on page 148, use the cursor buttons to select the INPUT MUTE MASTER check box or OUTPUT MUTE MASTER check box, then press [ENTER] to turn on the Mute Group Master function. 2 When the Mute Master check box is checked, use the group MASTER MUTE buttons to mute or unmute the groups. If channels are muted via the Mute Master function, the channel [ON] button indicators flash. It is useful if you assign the MASTER MUTE buttons to USER DEFINED KEYS buttons. Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters Follow the steps below to link EQ or compressor parameters for Input Channels or Output Channels (Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8). This function enables you to set EQ or compressor parameters for multiple channels to the same values simultaneously. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly until one of the following pages appears. - In EQ page This page enables you to set EQ links (a–d) for Input Channels. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters 153 - Out EQ page This page enables you to set EQ links (e–h) for Bus Outs (1–8) and Aux Outs (1–8). - In Comp page This page enables you to set Compressor links (i–l) for Input Channels. 12 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters - Out Comp page This page enables you to set Compressor links (m–p) for Bus Outs (1–8) and Aux Outs (1–8). 154 Chapter 12—Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters 2 Press the up ( ) or down ( ) cursor button to select a link to which you want to add channels. Example: EQ link C for Input Channels is selected. 3 Press the [SEL] button for a channel you wish to add to the EQ or Compressor link. The selected channel is marked with “ ” and the channel is added to the link. Example: Input Channels 1–4, 6, 9–10 and 14 have been added to EQ link C. Tip: • If you add one channel from a pair to a link, the pair partner is automatically added to the link. • You can also select a channel on another layer by switching layers. 4 In the same way, press the [SEL] button for other channels you wish to add to the link. The EQ or compressor settings for the first channel added to the link are applied to all subsequently-added channels. 5 After all desired channels are added to the link, edit the EQ or compressor parameters for one of the linked channels. The edits for the EQ or compressor parameters are applied to the rest of the linked channels. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Internal Effects 155 13 Internal Effects This chapter describes how to use the DM1000’s internal effects processors. About the Internal Effects EFFECT 3 1 2 EFFECT 4 1 2 INPUT PATCH OUTPUT OUTPUT 1 2 OUTPUT 1 2 EFFECT 2 OUTPUT EFFECT4 OUT 1-2 INPUT EFFECT3 OUT 1-2 INPUT EFFECT2 OUT 1-2 SELECT EFFECT1 OUT 1-2 INPUT 1 2 INSERT OUT EFFECT 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 INPUT FX1 SEND 1-8 FX2 SEND 1-2 1 2 FX3 SEND 1-2 AUX1-8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 FX4 SEND 1-2 The DM1000 features four internal multi-effects processors that can be used via Aux Sends or by inserting them into specific channels. These effects processors offer numerous types of effects, including reverbs, delays, modulation-based effects, combination effects, and multi-channel effects designed especially for use with surround sound. Processor inputs and outputs can be patched to various sources. For example, effects processor inputs can be fed from the Aux Sends and output to Input Channels (effects send/return). Effects processors can also be inserted into Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Outs, or the Stereo Out. Effects processor 1 creates 1-in/2-out, 2-in/2-out, or multi-channel surround effects. Effects processors 2 through 4 create 1-in/2-out or 2-in/2-out effects. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Internal Effects The DM1000 also features the Effects library, which contains 61 preset programs (including Add-On Effects) and 67 user programs. 13 156 Chapter 13—Internal Effects Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends You can use effects processors via Aux Sends by patching effects processor inputs to Aux Outs, and effects processor outputs to Input Channels. 1 Recall an effect program you wish to use. See page 177 for more information on recalling effect programs. 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the In Patch | Effect page appears. This page enables you to patch all inputs and outputs of Effects processors 1–4. 1 3 4 2 This page contains the following parameters: A IN These parameter boxes select the signals to be fed to the effects processors. B OUT These parameter boxes select the destination of the signals output from the effects processors. C FOLLOW SURROUND When surround effects (see page 161) are recalled to Effects processor 1, this button sorts the effect inputs and outputs displayed in the list according to the order specified on the Setup | Surr Bus page (see page 130). If the recalled surround effects are compatible with 5.1 Channel systems, the surround bus setting for 5.1 surround mode will be used. D button This button recalls the FX1 Edit–FX4 Edit pages, which enable you to adjust the effect parameters. 3 To select a signal to be input to the effects processor, move the cursor to the desired In parameter box, rotate the Parameter wheel to select a signal from the following options, then press [ENTER]. • – ..................................... No assignment • AUX1–8 ......................... Aux Outs 1–8 • INS CH1–48 ................. Input Channel 1–48 Insert Out • INS BUS1–8.................. Bus Out 1–8 Insert Out • INS AUX1–8 ................. Aux Out 1–8 Insert Out • INS ST-L & INS ST-R .. Stereo Out L & R Insert Out DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends 157 • FX1-1–FX4-2 ................Other effects processor outputs You cannot select outputs FX1–3 to FX1–8. In addition, you cannot select the output of the effects processor you are currently using. To use the internal effects processors via Aux Sends, select Aux 1–8 (in most cases). You can patch a different signal to the other input of 2-in/2-out effect programs. Tip: • You can patch a signal to multiple effect inputs. • Move the cursor to an IN parameter box and press the [ENTER] button. The Patch Select window appears. This window enables you to select the input source quickly. 4 To patch a signal output from the effects processor, move the cursor to the desired OUT parameter box, rotate the Parameter wheel to select the signal destination from the following options, then press [ENTER]. • – .....................................No assignment • CH1–48 .........................Input Channels 1–48 • INS CH1–48..................Input Channel Insert In • INS BUS1–8 ..................Bus Out 1–8 Insert In • INS AUX1–8..................Aux Out 1–8 Insert In • INS ST-L & INS ST-R...Stereo Out Insert In • FX1-1–FX4-2 ................Other effects processor inputs You cannot select the input of the effects processor you are currently using. To use the internal effects processors via Aux Sends, select CH 1–48 (in most cases). The channels you assign here will become the effects return channels. You can patch a different channel to the other output of a 1-in/2-out or 2-in/2-out effect program to create stereo effects. Note: You cannot select a channel as the destination of multiple effect signals. If you select a channel that is already selected in another OUT parameter box, that OUT parameter box switches its indicator to “–” (not assigned). 5 Adjust the level of Aux Sends patched to the effects processor. Refer to chapter 8 “Aux Sends” on page 93 for information on setting the Aux Sends. Note: Do not raise the level of the Aux Sends (patched to the effects processor) on the effects return channels. Otherwise, the signal will return to the same channel, causing a signal loop and possibly damaging your speakers. Tip: Use the Master layer fader to adjust the final Aux Send output level. At this time, you can view the level on the Meter | Master page (see page 39). 6 Adjust the level, pan, and EQ of the Input Channels patched to the effect outputs. Tip: To mix the effects sound returned via the Aux Sends with the original dry sound, set the effect’s MIX BALANCE parameter to 100% (only the effects sound will be output). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 13 Internal Effects Tip: • You can also use the Patch Select window to set the OUT parameter boxes, as explained in Step 3. • The number of inputs and outputs available for each effect varies depending on the type of effect programs initially recalled. 158 Chapter 13—Internal Effects Inserting the Internal Effects into Channels You can insert the internal effects into certain Input Channels or Output Channels (Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8, Stereo Out). Note: If effects are inserted in channels, you cannot use those effects via Aux Sends or insert them into other channels. 1 Select an internal Effects processor (1–4), then recall the desired effect programs. 2 Press the [SEL] button or move the fader of the Input Channel or Output Channel into which you want to insert the selected effects. Tip: Repeatedly pressing the STEREO [SEL] button toggles between the left and right Stereo Out channels. 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the /Ins/Dly | Insert page appears. 4 Select the effect insertion position using the INSERT button in the POSITION section. 5 Move the cursor to the OUT parameter box in the INSERT section, then select the inputs of the effects processor selected in Step 1. • FX1-1 through FX1-8 . Inputs 1–8 of Internal Effects Processor 1 • FX2-1 & FX2-2 ............. Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2 • FX3-1 & FX3-2 ............. Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3 • FX4-1 & FX4-2 ............. Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4 6 Press [ENTER] to confirm the setting. 7 Move the cursor to the IN parameter box in the INSERT section, select the outputs of the effects processor selected in Step 5 and 6, then press [ENTER] to confirm the setting. 8 Move the cursor to the ON/OFF button in the INSERT section, then press [ENTER] to turn on the button. Effect insertion is now enabled. Tip: • After inserting effects to channels, adjust the MIX BALANCE parameter for the effects, according to the purpose and effects type. • Move the cursor to an empty IN or OUT parameter box and press the [ENTER] button. The Patch Select window appears, which enables you to quickly select available signal paths. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Editing Effects 159 Editing Effects To edit effect programs recalled to the internal Effects processors 1–4, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [EFFECT] button repeatedly until the Edit page for the effects processor you wish to edit appears. Effects processors 1–4 correspond to the following pages: • Effects Processor 1.......FX1 Edit page • Effects Processor 2.......FX2 Edit page • Effects Processor 3.......FX3 Edit page • Effects Processor 4.......FX4 Edit page These Edit pages contain the following effect parameters. 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 A EFFECT NAME This parameter displays the name of the effect program currently used by the effects processor. B TYPE C button Move the cursor to this parameter, then press [ENTER] to display the Library page for the selected effects processor. D button Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to display the In Patch | Effect page, which enables you to assign signals to the inputs and outputs of Effects processors 1–4. E MIX BALANCE This parameter knob enables you to set the balance between wet and dry signals. When the parameter is set to 0%, only the dry signal is heard. When set to 100%, only the wet signal is heard. Turn on the BYPASS button to bypass the currently-selected effects processor. F TEMPO This section displays the parameters that appear only when a delay effect type or a modulation-based effect type is selected. These TEMPO parameters calculate and set the delay time for delay effects, or the modulation frequency for modulation effects, relative to the specified tempo and note length. Use these parameters along with the SYNC or NOTE parameter located at the bottom of the display page. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Internal Effects This parameter displays the type of effect program currently used by the effects processor. The I/O configuration of the effect program is displayed below this parameter. 13 160 Chapter 13—Internal Effects When you turn on the SYNC parameter, the DM1000 recalculates the delay time or modulation frequency based on the TEMPO parameter value (tempo) and the NOTE parameter value (note). For example, if the TEMPO parameter is set to 120BPM and the NOTE parameter is set to one eighth note, turning on the SYNC parameter sets the delay time to 250 msec and the modulation frequency to 0.25 Hz. Tip: • If you turn on the SYNC parameter and edit the TEMPO or NOTE parameter, the DM1000 recalculates the delay time or modulation frequency. • If you turn on the SYNC parameter and edit the delay time or modulation frequency, the NOTE parameter value changes based on the TEMPO parameter setting. • TEMPO ......................... This parameter control sets the TEMPO parameter value in BPM. • MIDI CLK..................... Turning on the MIDI CLK by moving the cursor to this button and pressing [ENTER] updates the TEMPO data based on the MIDI Clock information received at the specified MIDI Rx port. (The TEMPO data is not updated if the MIDI Clock tempo is outside the range of 25 to 300 BPM.) • TAP TEMPO................. You can also specify the tempo by moving the cursor to this button and double-clicking the [ENTER] button. The DM1000 calculates the tempo based on the time interval between your two taps (clicks) on the [ENTER] button. (The TEMPO data is not updated if the tap tempo is outside the range of 25 to 300 BPM.) Tip: If the Freeze effect is selected, the TEMPO section displays the record and playback buttons for using the effect, the recording data condition, and a progress bar that indicates the current status. G Meters These meters indicate the input or output levels of the currently-selected effects processor. Select the IN button or OUT button to display the input levels or output levels respectively. There are eight meters when Effects processor 1 is selected; two when Effects processors 2–4 are selected. Tip: You can also view the input and output levels of the effects processors on the Meter | Effect 1–4 pages (see page 39). Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to adjust the setting. You can store the edited settings as a new program in the Effects library (see page 177). Note: You cannot change the effects type on this page. To change the effects type, recall a program that uses the desired effects type from the Effects library. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual About Surround Effects 161 About Surround Effects The effects types available for Effects processor 1 include surround effects that support 5.1-channel (AUTO PAN 5.1, CHORUS 5.1, etc.). Surround effects are multi-channel effects that feature up to six inputs and six outputs, and enable you to create the effect of the sound image moving or circling back and forth and left to right, and to process up to six channel input signals simultaneously. Note: • Only Effects processor 1 enables you to recall Surround effects settings. • Recalling certain surround effects into Effects processor 1 will disable Effects processors 2–4. The DM1000 Surround mode setting does not affect the surround effects. For example, even if the DM1000 is in Stereo Surround mode, you can recall a surround effect program and use its 6-channel inputs and outputs. However, to monitor the effect signals correctly, you must patch the effect outputs to Input Channels and monitor the signals using the Surround Monitor function (see page 136). About Add-On Effects Installing optional Add-On Effects packages enables you to expand your effects selection beyond the internal effects. Add-On Effects will be stored in and recalled from preset #53 and the subsequent preset programs. You can also store edited effects in user program #62 and the subsequent user programs. For more information on Add-On Effects, refer to the installation guide that is included in your Add-On Effects packages. 13 Internal Effects DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 162 Chapter 13—Internal Effects About Plug-Ins If you installed a mini-YGDAI card that supports the Effects function into Slot 1 or 2, you can use plug-in effects in addition to the internal effects processors. You can patch Bus signals or channel insert outs to the plug-in input. The plug-in output can be patched to Input Channels or channel insert ins. To use the plug-in effects, press the [EFFECT] button repeatedly until the Effect | P-IN Edit1 or P-IN Edit 2 page appears. If you installed a mini-YGDAI card in Slot 1, use the P-IN Edit1 page to set the plug-in. If you installed the card in Slot 2, use the P-IN Edit2 page. For details on using plug-ins, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the plug-in card. As of July 2004, the DM1000 supports the following plug-in cards. Visit the Yamaha web site for the latest information on compatible plug-in cards. • Waves............................. Y56K The Y56K card setting is stored in memory in the card when you store scenes, and is recalled at the time of scene recall. The setting is not stored in a scene memory on the DM1000. Therefore, the setting does not support the scene memory’s Global Paste, Sort, and Auto Update functions. Note: The Y56K card supports scenes #1-96. If you store or recall a scene # 97 or subsequent scenes, the Y56K card setting will not respond. (In this case, a warning message appears.) DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Scene Memories 163 14 Scene Memories This chapter describes Scene memories, which store DM1000 mix and effects settings. About Scene Memories Scene memories enable you to store a snapshot of DM1000 channel mix settings and internal effects processor settings as a “Scene” in a special memory area. There are 99 Scene memories, and you can recall any Scene using the display pages or the controls on the top panel. Tip: • You can also recall Scenes by replaying Automixes (see page 187) or by transmitting Program Changes from external MIDI devices (see page 249). • You can back up Scene memories to external MIDI devices by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 256). What is Stored in a Scene? The following parameter settings are stored in a Scene: Scene Parameters All channel faders Channel to Aux Out 1–8 Send levels Aux Out 1–8 & Bus Out 1–8 levels All channel [ON] button settings All channel Phase & Delay settings All channel Attenuator settings Mix parameters All channel Compressor settings Input Channel Gate settings All channel EQ settings All channel Pan settings All channel routings Fader groups, Mute groups, Fader group Masters, Mute group Masters, EQ links, and Compressor links Effects parameters Effect programs recalled for Effects processors 1–4 and their parameter settings Remote Layer Fader, Encoder and [ON] button status (only when Remote Control Target is set to USER DEFINED) Scene settings Scene titles and Fade Time settings Input Patching Input Patch library numbers Output Patching Output Patch library numbers Note: • Scenes take a snapshot of Input and Output Patch library numbers that are in use at the time the Scene is stored, but exclude current (edited) Input and Output patching. • If you do not store the edited Input and Output patching to the libraries, recalling a Scene may change the current patching. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Scene Memories All channel pair settings 14 164 Chapter 14—Scene Memories About Scene Numbers Scene memories are numbered with #U or from #0 through #99. You can store Scenes in Scene memories #1–99. When you recall a Scene, the Scene memory number (Ud, 00–99) appears on the Scene memory display and at the top of the display page. Scene memory #0 (#00 on the Scene memory display) is a special read-only memory that contains the default settings of all mix parameters. To reset all mix parameters on the DM1000 to their initial or default values, recall Scene memory #0. Also, the Initial Data Nominal check box on the Setup | Prefer1 page (see page 266) enables you to specify whether Input Channel faders are set to either 0 dB or –∞ dB when Scene memory #0 is recalled. Scene memory #U (“Ud” on the Scene memory display) is a special read-only memory that contains the mix settings immediately before you most recently recalled or stored a Scene. To undo or redo Scene memory recall and store operations, recall Scene memory #U. When you adjust parameters after recalling a Scene, the Edit indicators appear (the dot in the Scene memory display and “EDIT” at the top of the display), indicating that the mix settings no longer match those of the Scene that was most recently recalled. The contents of the Edit Buffer (where the current mix settings are stored) are retained while the DM1000 is turned off. This allows the DM1000 to restore the edited mix settings when you turn on the power. 02 Scene memory display 02 Dot Display Edit indicator The contents of recalled Scene memory #2 match the current settings on the DM1000, and the Edit indicator remains off. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual The parameters of recalled Scene memory #2 were edited. Therefore, the Edit indicators appear, indicating that the current settings on the DM1000 do not match Scene memory #2. Storing and Recalling Scenes 165 Storing and Recalling Scenes You can store and recall Scenes by pressing the buttons on the top panel or using the dedicated Scene memory page on the display. Note: • When you store Scenes, make sure that there are no settings in the Edit Buffer that you do not want to store. Make sure that no settings, especially faders, have been adjusted unintentionally. • If you are not sure of the Edit Buffer’s contents, recall the last Scene, make the adjustments you want, then store the Scene. You may wish to store the current Scene to an unused Scene memory, just in case. Storing and Recalling Scenes Using the SCENE MEMORY Buttons You can use the SCENE MEMORY buttons to store and recall Scenes. 1 Adjust the mix parameters on the DM1000 to the conditions you wish to store as a Scene. 2 Press the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] or Down [ ] buttons to select a Scene memory number. If you select a Scene memory other than the currently-recalled Scene, its number flashes on the Scene memory display. Scene memories #U (“Ud”) and #0 (“00”) are special read-only memories, to which you cannot store Scenes. Also, you cannot store Scenes to write-protected Scene memories (see page 166). 3 Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] button. The Title Edit window appears, which enables you to name the Scene to be stored. Tip: You can disable this window by turning the Store Confirmation parameter to Off on the Setup | Prefer1 page (see page 266). In this case, the stored Scene will have the same name as the one recalled most-recently. 5 To recall a Scene, press the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] or Down [ ] buttons to select a Scene memory number, then press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] button. Tip: If you turn the Recall Confirmation parameter to On on the Setup | Prefer1 page, a Scene recall confirmation window for Scene recalls appears before the Scene is recalled (see page 266). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 14 Scene Memories 4 Enter the title, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER]. The Title Edit window closes and the current Scene is stored to the selected Scene memory. 166 Chapter 14—Scene Memories Storing and Recalling Scenes Using the Scene Memory Page On the Scene Memory page, you can store, recall, write-protect, delete, and edit the titles of Scenes. 1 Adjust the mix parameters on the DM1000 to the conditions you wish to store as a Scene. 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | Scene page appears. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select a Scene memory, move the cursor to one of the following buttons, then press [ENTER]. The stored Scene memory titles are displayed. The DM1000 displays the message “No Data!” for empty Scene memories. A TITLE EDIT Select this button to display the Title Edit window, which enables you to edit a selected Scene title. B RECALL This button recalls the contents of the selected Scene memory. C STORE This button stores the current Scene to the selected Scene memory. By default, a confirmation window appears before you store the Scene. D CLEAR This button deletes the contents of the selected Scene memory. E PROTECT ON/OFF This button switches on and off the write-protection of the contents of the selected Scene memory. A padlock icon ( ) appears next to the title of a Scene memory that is write-protected. F PATCH LINK INPUT This indicates the Input Patch library number that is linked to each scene. When you store a scene, the number of the input patch that was most recently recalled or stored will automatically be linked with that scene. When you recall that scene, this library number will also be automatically recalled. You can also move the cursor to the parameter boxes and change the library numbers. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Auto Scene Memory Update 167 G PATCH LINK OUTPUT This indicates the Output Patch library number that is linked to each scene. When you store a scene, the number of the output patch that was most recently recalled or stored will automatically be linked with that scene. When you recall that scene, this library number will also be automatically recalled. You can also move the cursor to the parameter boxes and change the library numbers. Auto Scene Memory Update If the Scene MEM Auto Update check box on the Setup | Prefer1 page (see page 266) is turned on, parameter edits are stored automatically in a Shadow memory, which is available for each Scene. This is called the Auto Update function. If the Auto Update function is enabled, parameter edits made after the Scene was recalled are stored in the Scene’s Shadow memory. When you again recall the Scene, the contents of the Original and Shadow memories are recalled alternately. Therefore, even after you recall the Original Scene memory, you can recall the edited version from Shadow memory to restore the most recent edits. When recalling Original and Shadow memories, you can easily tell which is currently active by viewing the Edit indicators. 02 Scene memory display 02 Dot Display Edit indicator Original Scene Shadow memory DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 14 Scene Memories If a Shadow memory is recalled, the edited version is stored when you store the Scene. (The contents of the Original and Shadow memories then become identical.) If you recall a Scene by replaying an Automix or while the Automix function is enabled, the contents of the Original memory are always recalled, even if the Auto Update function is enabled. 168 Chapter 14—Scene Memories Fading Scenes You can specify the time it takes the Input and Output Channel faders to move to their new positions when a Scene is recalled. This is called Fade Time, and it can be set for each channel in the range of 00.0 through 30.0 seconds (in 0.1 second steps). You can set the Fade Time for each Scene individually or for all Scenes globally. Fading Input Channels To set the Fade Time for Input Channels 1–48, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | In Fade page appears. Move the cursor to the desired channel parameter box, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the Fade Time setting. 1 2 3 A Global Fade Time When this check box is checked, a Scene is recalled using the currently-specified Fade Time. (The Fade Time setting stored in the recalled Scene is temporarily ignored.) This check box setting works in unison with the Out Fade page. B ALL INPUT CLEAR This button resets all channel Fade Times on the page to 00.0 second. C INPUT CH1–48 These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for each Input Channel in the range of 00.0 through 30.0 seconds. The Fade Time setting for one channel in a pair works in unison with its partner. Tip: • After you set the Fade Time, if you operate a certain fader while recalling a Scene, the fader’s Fade Time setting is ignored. • You can copy the currently-selected Input Channel Fade Time setting to all Input Channels by double-clicking the [ENTER] button. This is convenient when you wish to set the Fade Time for all channels simultaneously. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Fading Scenes 169 Fading Output Channels To set the Fade Time for the Output Channels (Stereo Out, Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8), press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | Out Fade page appears. The basic operation is the same as on the In Fade page. 1 2 3 4 5 A BUS1–8 These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for each Bus Out (1–8) in the range of 00.0 through 30.0 seconds. B AUX1–8 These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for Aux Outs 1–8. C STEREO This parameter enables you to set the Fade Time for the Stereo Out. D INPUT MASTER A–H These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for Input Fader Group Master A–H. E OUTPUT MASTER Q–T These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for Output Fader Group Master Q–T. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 14 Scene Memories Tip: You can copy the currently-selected Output Channel Fade Time setting to all Output Channels by double-clicking the [ENTER] button. 170 Chapter 14—Scene Memories Recalling Scenes Safely When a Scene is recalled, all mix parameters are set accordingly. However, in some situations, you can retain the current settings of certain parameters on certain channels by using the Recall Safe function. You can set the Recall Safe function parameters for each Scene individually or for all Scenes globally. To set the Recall Safe function, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | Rcl Safe page appears. 1 2 3 4 A Global Recall Safe When this check box is checked, Recall Safe settings stored in Scene memories are ignored and the current settings are retained. B SAFE This parameter enables or disables the Recall Safe function. C MODE • • • • • • • • • • • The following MODE buttons determine which Safe channel parameters will remain unaffected by Scene recalls. The MODE buttons correspond to the following parameters: ALL ................................ All parameters FADER........................... Channel faders ON.................................. Channel On/Off parameters PAN................................ Channel Pan parameters, Stereo Out balance EQ .................................. Channel EQ parameters COMP............................ Channel Comp parameters GATE ............................. Channel Gate parameters AUX ............................... Channel Aux Send levels, Pre/Post AUX ON ........................ Aux Send On/Off parameters DELAY........................... Channel Delay parameters ROUTING .................... Channel Routing parameters Tip: The ALL button is mutually exclusive of the other buttons. D RECALL SAFE CHANNEL section This section enables you to select which channels will remain unaffected by Scene recalls, including Input Channels 1–48, Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8, Stereo Out, each Group Master, internal effects, USER DEFINED Remote layers, HA (AD8HR/AD824), and plug-in effects. The Recall Safe function is effective on channels and functions for which the buttons are turned on. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Sorting Scenes 171 Sorting Scenes You can sort Scenes in Scene memories. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | Sort page appears. 1 2 2 Move the cursor to the SOURCE list (1) in the left column, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the Scene memory you wish to move. 3 Move the cursor to the DESTINATION list (2) in the right column, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the position to which you want to move the source Scene memory. 4 Press [ENTER] to move the source Scene memory to the specified destination. The Scene memory numbers are updated accordingly. Copying and Pasting a Scene (Global Paste) 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Paste SRC page appears. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Scene Memories Any channel or parameter settings for the current scene can be copied and pasted into one or more scenes. This function is useful when you want to apply edited parameter settings in the current scene to other scenes. 14 172 Chapter 14—Scene Memories 2 Use the cursor buttons, [SEL] buttons, or Parameter wheel to select the channel category, then use the [ENTER] button or the INC/DEC buttons to select the copy source channel. The number of the source channel is highlighted. You can also select Group Masters, internal Effects, a User Defined Remote layer, or HA (AD8HR/AD824) as copy sources. 3 Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the copy source parameter, then press the [ENTER] button. 4 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button repeatedly until the Paste DST page appears. 5 Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the destination scene(s). Scenes specified between FROM and TO (inclusive) become the paste destination. You can paste up to 10 scenes at a time. 6 Use the cursor buttons to select the PASTE button, then use the [ENTER] button to paste the settings. You cannot paste the settings to write-protected scenes. To restore the previous settings that existed before the paste operation, click the UNDO button, then press [Enter]. However, if the settings in the scene are changed after the paste operation (such as by saving, clearing, or sorting the scene, or receiving scene data via MIDI Bulk Dump), the UNDO function is disabled. Also, note that you will not be able to undo the operation after you turn off the power to the console. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Libraries 173 15 Libraries This chapter describes the DM1000’s various libraries. About the Libraries The DM1000 features nine libraries that enable you to store Channel, Input Patch, Output Patch, Effects, and other data. You can also quickly recall this data from the libraries to restore previous parameter values. The DM1000 offers the following libraries: • Channel Library • Input Patch Library • Output Patch Library • Effects Library • Bus to Stereo Library • Gate Library • Compressor Library • EQ Library • Surround Monitor Library Tip: • You can store library data to a computer hard disk using the included Studio Manager software. Be sure to back up your important data. • You can also store library data to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 256). General Library Operation Most library functions are the same for each library. 1 Use the buttons on the top panel to locate the desired library pages. The procedure for locating library pages varies depending on the library. Refer to the latter part of this chapter for more information on how to display the desired library page. The example below assumes you have located the Input Patch library page. 15 Libraries 1 2 3 4 The library memory title list is displayed in the middle of the page. The message “No Data!” appears in the title column of empty library memories. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 174 Chapter 15—Libraries An “ ” icon is displayed next to the name of read-only preset memories. You cannot store, clear, or edit the titles of these memories. Memories #0 and #U are special read-only memories. Recall memory #0 to reset the parameter settings to their initial values. Recall #U to undo memory recall and store operations. 2 Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the desired memory. The selected memory appears inside the dotted box. 3 Move the cursor to one of the following function buttons, then press [ENTER]. A TITLE EDIT This button displays the Title Edit window, which enables you to edit the title of the selected memory. Move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER] to confirm the edited title. See page 32 for more information on entering characters. B RECALL This button recalls the contents of the selected library memory. If you turn on the Recall Confirmation parameter on the Setup | Prefer1 page, the DM1000 displays a memory recall confirmation window. C STORE This button stores the settings to the selected memory. Before you store the settings, you can enter or edit the title using the Title Edit window. See page 32 for more information on entering characters. You can disable the Title Edit window by turning off the Store Confirmation parameter on the Setup | Prefer1 page. If you bypass the Edit Title window, the name “New Data” will be used as a title for the Scene memory. D CLEAR This button deletes the contents of the selected memory. After you press [ENTER], the DM1000 displays a confirmation window. To execute the delete operation, move the cursor to the OK button in the confirmation window, then press [ENTER]. Note: If you select a memory that already contains settings and execute the delete operation, the settings will be lost. Make sure that you do not accidentally delete important settings. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Using Libraries 175 Using Libraries Channel Library Channel library enables you to store and recall Input Channel and Output Channel parameter settings. The library contains two preset memories and 127 user (readable & writable) memories. You can recall only the settings for the currently-selected channels from the Channel library. For example, you can recall Input Channel settings to Input Channels, but not to Bus Outs, Aux Sends, or Stereo Out, with the exception that memories #0 and #1 can be recalled to any channels. Follow the steps below to use the Channel library. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then press the [F3] button. The View | Library page appears. 1 2 3 4 A SEL CH This parameter indicates the currently-selected channel. B CURRENT CONFIGURATION section If the currently-selected channel is an Input Channel, its Surround mode and Aux configuration information is displayed here. C Level meters D STORED FROM This parameter indicates the channel for which the settings were originally stored in the selected library memory. If the currently-selected library memory contains Input Channel settings, its Surround mode and Aux pairing information are also displayed below this parameter. 2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then press the [SEL] buttons to select channels. For details on the Store and Recall functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 173. If the selected memory’s channel type does not match the type of the destination channel, an alarm mark ( ) and the word “CONFLICT” appear next to the STORED FROM parameter. These alarms indicate that you tried to recall unrecallable channel settings to the currently-selected channel. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Libraries These meters indicate the levels of the currently-selected channel and the available partner. 15 176 Chapter 15—Libraries The alarm indicators also appear when the Surround mode, Aux pair, and other non-channel parameter settings originally stored in the memory do not match those for the destination channel. However, if the channel type of the memory and that of the destination channel match, you can recall the settings even with the alarm indicators displayed. (For unmatched parameter settings, the DM1000 will use the settings in the memory that is to be recalled.) The following preset memories are available for the Channel library. No. Preset Name Description 0 Reset (–∞ dB) This preset memory resets all parameters of the currently-selected channel to their initial values and sets the channel fader level to (–∞ dB). 1 Reset (0 dB) This preset memory resets all parameters of the currently-selected channel to their initial values and sets the channel fader level to 0 dB (i.e., nominal). Input Patch Library The Input Patch library enables you to store and recall all Input Patch settings. The library contains one preset memory and 32 user (readable & writable) memories. To access the Input Patch library, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the In Patch | Library page appears. For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library Operation” on page 173. Input Patch preset memory #0 contains the following settings: Input Channels 1–16 INPUT connectors 1–16 Input Channels 17–24 Channels 1–8 of Slot 1 Input Channels 25–32 Channels 1–8 of Slot 2 Input Channels 33–40 Internal Effects Processor 1–4 Outputs 1 & 2 Input Channels 41–44 2TRD1 & D2 Input Channels 45–48 OMNI IN connectors 1–4 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Using Libraries 177 Output Patch Library The Output Patch library enables you to store and recall all Output Patch settings. The library contains one preset memory and 32 user (readable & writable) memories. To access the Output Patch library, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out Patch | Library page appears. For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library Operation” on page 173. The Output Patch preset memory #0 contains the following settings: OMNI OUT connectors 1–8 Aux Outs 1–8 OMNI OUT connectors 9–10 Stereo Out L & R OMNI OUT connectors 11–12 Control Room Monitor L & R Channels 1–8 of Slot 1 BUS1–BUS8 Channels 9–16 of Slot 1 BUS1–BUS8 Channels 1–8 of Slot 2 BUS1–BUS8 Channels 9–16 of Slot 2 BUS1–BUS8 2TR OUT DIGITAL1 (L) Stereo Out L 2TR OUT DIGITAL1 (R) Stereo Out R 2TR OUT DIGITAL2 (L) Stereo Out L 2TR OUT DIGITAL2 (R) Stereo Out R 15 The Effects library enables you to store and recall Effects processor 1–4 programs. The library contains 61 preset programs (including Add-On Effects) and 67 user (readable & writable) programs. Note: • The Effects library is shared by Effects processors 1–4. However, only Effects processor 1 enables storing and recalling Surround effects settings. • Certain effects type settings recalled to Effects processor 1 disable Effects processors 2–4. To store and recall settings to and from the library, you must locate the corresponding Effects processor’s page. To access the Effects library, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [EFFECT] button repeatedly until the library page for the desired Effects processor appears. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Libraries Effects Library 178 Chapter 15—Libraries Each Effects processor features the library pages listed below: • Internal Effects Processor 1 Library ........... FX1 Lib page • Internal Effects Processor 2 Library ........... FX2 Lib page • Internal Effects Processor 3 Library ........... FX3 Lib page • Internal Effects Processor 4 Library ........... FX4 Lib page 1 2 5 3 4 A EFFECT NAME This parameter displays the name of the Effects program currently used by the Effects processor. B TYPE This parameter displays the effects type currently used by the Effects processor. The number of input and output channels for the currently-used effects appears below the TYPE parameter. C Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to display the Effect | FX1 Edit, FX2 Edit, FX3 Edit, or FX4 Edit page to adjust the Effects parameters. D Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to display the In Patch | Effect page to assign the input and output signals of Effects processors 1–4. E Level meters These meters indicate the input or output levels of the currently-selected Effects processor. Select the IN button or OUT button to display the input levels or output levels respectively. For details on storing and recalling programs, see “General Library Operation” on page 173. The following tables list the preset effects programs in the Effects library: • Reverbs No. Preset Name Type Description Reverb Hall REVERB HALL Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate 2 Reverb Room REVERB ROOM Room reverberation simulation with gate 3 Reverb Stage REVERB STAGE Reverb designed for vocals, with gate 4 Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE Plate reverb simulation with gate 5 Early Ref. EARLY REF. Early reflections without the subsequent reverb 6 Gate Reverb GATE REVERB Gated early reflections 7 Reverse Gate REVERSE GATE Gated reverse early reflections 1 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Using Libraries 179 • Delays No. Preset Name Type Description 8 Mono Delay MONO DELAY Simple mono delay 9 Stereo Delay STEREO DELAY Simple stereo delay 10 Mod.delay MOD.DELAY Simple repeat delay with modulation 11 Delay LCR DELAY LCR 3-tap (left, center, right) delay 12 Echo ECHO Stereo delay with crossed left/right feedback • Modulation-based Effects No. Preset Name Type Description 13 Chorus CHORUS Chorus 14 Flange FLANGE Flanger 15 Symphonic SYMPHONIC Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and more complex modulation than normal chorus 16 Phaser PHASER 16-stage stereo phase shifter 17 Auto Pan AUTO PAN Auto-panner 18 TREMOLO TREMOLO Tremolo 19 HQ.Pitch HQ.PITCH Mono pitch shifter, producing stable results 20 Dual Pitch DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shifter 21 Rotary ROTARY Rotary speaker simulation 22 Ring Mod. RING MOD. Ring modulator 23 Mod.Filter MOD.FILTER Modulated filter • Guitar Effects No. Preset Name Type Description 24 Distortion DISTORTION Distortion 25 Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar amp simulation • Dynamic Effects No. Preset Name Type Description 26 Dyna.Filter DYNA.FILTER Dynamically controlled filter 27 Dyna.Flange DYNA.FLANGE Dynamically controlled flanger 28 Dyna.Phaser DYNA.PHASER Dynamically controlled phase shifter Libraries • Combination Effects No. Preset Name 15 Type Description 29 Rev+Chorus REV+CHORUS Reverb and chorus in parallel 30 Rev->Chorus REV->CHORUS Reverb and chorus in series 31 Rev+Flange REV+FLANGE Reverb and flanger in parallel 32 Rev->Flange REV->FLANGE Reverb and flanger in series 33 Rev+Sympho. REV+SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in parallel 34 Rev->Sympho. REV->SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in series 35 Rev->Pan REV->PAN Reverb and auto-pan in series 36 Delay+ER. DELAY+ER. Delay and early reflections in parallel 37 Delay->ER. DELAY->ER. Delay and early reflections in series 38 Delay+Rev DELAY+REV Delay and reverb in parallel 39 Delay->Rev DELAY->REV Delay and reverb in series 40 Dist->Delay DIST->DELAY Distortion and delay in series DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 180 Chapter 15—Libraries • Others No. Preset Name Type Description 41 Multi.Filter MULTI.FILTER 3-band parallel filter (24 dB/octave) 42 Freeze FREEZE Simple sampler 43 Stereo Reverb ST REVERB Stereo reverb 44 Reverb 5.1 REVERB 5.1 6-channel reverb for 5.1 surround 451 Octa Reverb OCTA 461 Auto Pan 5.1 AUTO PAN 5.1 6-channel auto pan for 5.1 surround 471 Chorus 5.1 CHORUS 5.1 6-channel chorus for 5.1 surround 481 Flange 5.1 FLANGE 5.1 6-channel flanger for 5.1 surround 491 Sympho. 5.1 SYMPHO. 5.1 6-channel symphonic effect for 5.1 surround 50 M. Band Dyna. M. BAND DYNA. Multi-band dynamics processor 511 Comp 5.1 521 Compand 5.1 REVERB2 COMP 5.12 COMPAND 8-channel reverb Multi-band compressor for 5.1 surround 5.12 Multi-band compander for 5.1 surround 1. These effects can be recalled only to Effects processor #1. 2. If these effects types are recalled to Effects processor #1, Effects processors #2 through #4 are disabled. • Add-On Effects No. Preset Name Type 533 Comp276 COMP276 543 Comp276S COMP276S 553 Comp260 COMP260 563 Comp260S COMP260S 573 Equalizer601 EQUALIZER601 583 OpenDeck OPENDECK 593 REV-X Hall REV-X HALL 603 REV-X Room REV-X ROOM 613 REV-X Plate REV-X PLATE Description — 3. These preset programs are dedicated to Add-On Effects. The numbers of effects programs that do not have Add-On Effects installed are grayed out and cannot be used. For more information on Add-On Effects, refer to “About Add-On Effects” on page 161. Note: • Effects that include “5.1” in the names are multi-channel Surround effects that support 5.1 channels. These effects types are most effective when 6-channel outputs are connected to a 5.1-channel system. • If REVERB 5.1, OCTA REVERB, COMP 5.1, or COMPAND 5.1 are recalled to Effects processor #1, Effects processors #2 through #4 are disabled. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Using Libraries 181 Bus to Stereo Library You can store Bus to Stereo settings (levels and panpots of signals routed from Bus Outs 1–8 to the Stereo Bus). The library contains one preset memory and 32 user (readable & writable) memories. To access the Bus to Stereo library, press the SELECTED CHANNEL [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Routing | Library page appears. 1 2 A CURRENT CONFIGURATION section Bus Out (1–8) pairing information for the current configuration is displayed here. B LIBRARY CONFIGURATION box Bus Out pairing information for the configuration stored in the currently-selected memory is displayed here. When the current configuration and the configuration in the selected memory do not match, the word “CONFLICT” appears in the LIBRARY CONFIGURATION box. For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library Operation” on page 173. Gate Library The Gate library enables you to store and recall Input Channel gate settings. The library contains four preset memories and 124 user (readable & writable) memories. Follow the steps below to use the Gate library. 15 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then press the [F2] button. The Dynamics | Gate Lib page appears. Libraries 1 2 3 4 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 182 Chapter 15—Libraries A CURRENT TYPE This parameter displays the currently-selected channel gate type (Gate or Ducking). B CURRENT CURVE This graph displays the current channel gate curve. C GR meters These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being applied by the gate, and the post-gate levels of the currently-selected channel and its available pair partner. D Type & Curve section The type (Gate or Ducking) and curve of the currently-selected memory is displayed here. Tip: If you selected an Aux Out (1–8), Bus Out (1–8), or Stereo Out that does not feature a gate, the DM1000 indicates “XXX HAS NO GATE!” (in which XXX represents a signal name). 2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then press the [SEL] buttons to select channels. You can now store the selected channel gate settings or recall the gate library memories to channels. For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library Operation” on page 173. The following table lists the preset memories in the Gate library: No. Preset Name Type Description Gate GATE Gate template 2 Ducking DUCKING Ducking template 3 A. Dr. BD GATE Gate preset for use with acoustic bass drums 4 A. Dr. SN GATE Gate preset for use with acoustic snare drums 1 Compressor Library This library enables you to store and recall settings for the compressors on Input Channels, Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8, and Stereo Out. The library contains 36 preset memories and 92 user (readable & writable) memories. Follow the steps below to use the Compressor library. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then press the [F4] button. The Dynamics | Comp Lib page appears. 1 2 3 4 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Using Libraries 183 A CURRENT TYPE This parameter displays the currently-selected channel comp type (Compressor, Expander, Compander Soft, Compander Hard). B CURRENT CURVE This graph displays the current compressor curve. C GR meters These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being applied by the compressor, and the post-comp levels of the currently-selected channel and its available pair partner. D Type & Curve section The type and curve of the currently-selected memory is displayed here. 2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then press the [SEL] buttons to select channels. You can now store the selected channel comp settings and recall the compressor library memories to channels. For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library Operation” on page 173. The following table lists the preset memories in the Compressor library: No. Preset Name Type Description Compressor for reducing the overall volume level. Use it on the stereo output during mixdown, or with paired Input or Output Channels. 1 Comp COMP 2 Expand EXPAND Expander template. 3 Compander (H) COMPAND-H Hard-kneed compressor template. 4 Compander (S) COMPAND-S Soft-kneed compressor template. 5 A. Dr. BD COMP Compressor for use with acoustic bass drum. 6 A. Dr. BD COMPAND-H Hard-kneed compander for use with acoustic bass drum. 7 A. Dr. SN COMP Compressor for use with acoustic snare drum. 8 A. Dr. SN EXPAND Expander for use with acoustic snare drum. 9 A. Dr. SN COMPAND-S Soft-kneed compander for use with acoustic snare drum. 10 A. Dr. Tom EXPAND Expander for use with acoustic tom toms, which automatically reduces the volume when the tom toms are not played, improving mic separation. A. Dr. OverTop COMPAND-S 12 E. B. Finger COMP Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a finger-picked electric bass guitar. 13 E. B. Slap COMP Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a slapped electric bass guitar. 14 Syn. Bass COMP Compressor for controlling or emphasizing the level of a synth bass. 15 Piano1 COMP Compressor for brightening the tonal color of a piano. 16 Piano2 COMP A variation on preset 15, using a deep threshold to change the overall attack and level. 17 E. Guitar COMP Compressor for electric guitar “cutting” or arpeggio-style backing. The sound color can be varied by playing different styles. 18 A. Guitar COMP Compressor for acoustic guitar “stroke” or arpeggio-style backing. 19 Strings1 COMP Compressor for use with strings. 20 Strings2 COMP A variation on preset 19, intended for violas or cellos. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 15 Libraries 11 Soft-kneed compander for emphasizing the attack and ambience of cymbals recorded with overhead mics. It automatically reduces the volume when the cymbals are not played, improving mic separation. 184 Chapter 15—Libraries No. Preset Name Type Description 21 Strings3 COMP A variation on preset 20, intended for string instruments with a very low range, such as cellos or contrabass. 22 BrassSection COMP Compressor for brass sounds with a fast and strong attack. 23 Syn. Pad COMP Compressor for musical instruments that feature gentle sounds which, depending on the tones, could diffuse, such as synth pad. Intended to prevent diffusion of the sound. 24 SamplingPerc COMPAND-S Compressor for making sampled percussion sound like real acoustic percussion. 25 Sampling BD COMP A variation on preset 24, intended for sampled bass drum sounds. 26 Sampling SN COMP A variation on preset 25, intended for sampled snare drum sounds. 27 Hip Comp COMPAND-S A variation on preset 26, intended for sampled loops and phrases. 28 Solo Vocal1 COMP Compressor for use with main vocals. 29 Solo Vocal2 COMP A variation on preset 28. 30 Chorus COMP A variation on preset 28, intended for choruses. 31 Click Erase EXPAND Expander for removing a click track that may bleed through from a musicians headphones. 32 Announcer COMPAND-H Hard-kneed compander for reducing the level of the music when an announcer speaks. 33 Limiter1 COMPAND-S A soft-kneed compander with a slow release. 34 Limiter2 COMP A “peak-stop” compressor. 35 Total Comp1 COMP Compressor for reducing the overall volume level. Use it on the stereo output during mixdown, or with paired Input or Output Channels. 36 Total Comp2 COMP A variation on preset 35, but with more compression. EQ Library This library enables you to store and recall EQ settings for Input Channels, Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8, and Stereo Out. The library contains 40 preset memories and 160 user (readable & writable) memories. Follow the steps below to use the EQ library. 1 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button repeatedly to display the EQ | EQ Library page. 1 2 3 4 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Using Libraries 185 A CURRENT TYPE This parameter displays the currently-selected channel EQ type (TYPE I or II). B CURRENT CURVE This graph displays the current EQ curve. C Level meters These meters indicate the post-EQ levels of the currently-selected channel and its available pair partner. D Type & Curve section The type and curve of the currently-selected EQ program are displayed here. 2 Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then press the [SEL] buttons to select channels. You can now store the selected channel EQ settings or recall the EQ library memories to channels. For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library Operation” on page 173. The following table lists the preset memories in the EQ library: No. Preset Name Description Bass Drum 1 2 Bass Drum 2 Creates a peak around 80 Hz, producing a tight, stiff sound. 3 Snare Drum 1 Emphasizes “snappy” and rimshot sounds. 4 Snare Drum 2 Emphasizes various ranges for that classic rock snare drum sound. 5 Tom-tom 1 Emphasizes the attack of tom-toms, and creates a long, “leathery” decay. 6 Cymbal Emphasizes the attack of crash cymbals, extending the “sparkling” decay. 7 High Hat Use on a tight high-hat, emphasizing the mid to high range. 8 Percussion Emphasizes attack and adds clarity to the high-range of instruments, such as shakers, cabasas, and congas. 9 E. Bass 1 Produces a tight electric bass sound by cutting very low frequencies. 10 E. Bass 2 Unlike preset 9, this preset emphasizes the low range of an electric bass. 11 Syn. Bass 1 Use on a synth bass with emphasized low range. 12 Syn. Bass 2 Emphasizes the attack that is peculiar to synth bass. 13 Piano 1 Makes pianos sound brighter. 14 Piano 2 Used in conjunction with a compressor, this preset emphasizes the attack and low range of pianos. 15 E. G. Clean Use for line-level recording of an electric or semi-acoustic guitar to get a slightly harder sound. 16 E. G. Crunch 1 Adjusts the tonal quality of a slightly distorted guitar sound. 17 E. G. Crunch 2 A variation on preset 16. 18 E. G. Dist. 1 Makes a heavily distorted guitar sound clearer. 19 E. G. Dist. 2 A variation on preset 18. 20 A. G. Stroke 1 Emphasizes the bright tones of acoustic guitars. 21 A. G. Stroke 2 A variation on preset 20. You can also use it with an acoustic-electric nylon string guitar. 22 A. G. Arpeg. 1 Ideal for arpeggio playing on acoustic guitars. 23 A. G. Arpeg. 2 A variation on preset 22. 24 Brass Sec. Use with trumpets, trombones, or saxes. When used with a single instrument, try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID frequency. 25 Male Vocal 1 An EQ template for male vocals. Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID parameters according to the voice quality. 26 Male Vocal 2 A variation on preset 25. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 15 Libraries 1 Emphasizes the low range of a bass drum and the attack created by the beater. 186 Chapter 15—Libraries No. Preset Name Description 27 Female Vo. 1 An EQ template for female vocals. Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID parameters according to the voice quality. 28 Female Vo. 2 A variation on preset 27. 29 Chorus&Harmo An EQ template for brightening choruses. 30 Total EQ 1 Use on a stereo mix during mixdown. Sounds even better when used with a compressor. 31 Total EQ 2 A variation on preset 30. 32 Total EQ 3 A variation on preset 30. Can also be used with paired Input or Output Channels. 33 Bass Drum 3 A variation on preset 1, with low and mid range reduced. 34 Snare Drum 3 A variation on preset 3, creating a thicker sound. 35 Tom-tom 2 A variation on preset 5, emphasizing the mid and high ranges. 36 Piano 3 A variation on preset 13. 37 Piano Low Emphasizes the low range of pianos recorded in stereo. 38 Piano High Emphasizes the high range of pianos recorded in stereo. 39 Fine-EQ Cass Add clarity when recording to or from cassette tape. 40 Narrator Ideal for recording narration. Surround Monitor Library This library enables you to store and recall Surround Monitor settings. The library contains one preset memory that initializes the Surround Monitor settings, and 32 user (readable & writable) memories. To access the Surround Monitor library, press the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button repeatedly until the Monitor | Surr Lib page appears. For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library Operation” on page 173. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 187 Automix 16 Automix This chapter describes the Automix function, which automates real-time mix operation, and explains how to use it. About Automix The DM1000 features an Automix function, which allows dynamic automation of virtually all mix parameters, including Levels, Mutes, Pan, Surround Pan, Aux Sends, Aux Send Mutes, EQ, and effects. Various mixing events can be recorded in Automix. You can also punch channels or parameters in and out of recording on-the-fly, and edit most parameters off-line with 1/4 frame accuracy. Remote layer operations, and Scene and library recall operations can also be automated, which enables you to create mix automation that combines snap shots and dynamic mix parameter changes. You can store up to 16 Automixes in the Automix library. You can also store an Automix or the entire Automix library to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using MIDI Bulk Dump. The following parameter events can be recorded in an Automix: Input Channels Bus Out Master Aux Send Master Stereo Out Channel levels (faders) O O O O Channel mutes (ON/OFF) O O O O Pan O — — — Surround pan, LFE level, and DIV O — — — EQ (F, Q, G, On/Off) O O O O Aux Send 1–8 levels O — — — Aux Send 1–8 mutes O — — — Parameters Fader Group Master (Level, On/Off) — Scene recalls — EQ, Gate, Comp, Effects, Channel library recalls — Effects parameters (certain parameters) — User Defined Remote Layers (faders, [ON], Encoders) — 16 Automix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 188 Chapter 16—Automix Setting Up for Automix Recording This section describes the procedure you must perform before you start Automix recording. Selecting the Timecode Source Follow the steps below to select the timecode source and frame rate that the DM1000 uses for the Automix function. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | Time Ref page appears. This page enables you to select the timecode source for the Automix operation, and the port that receives the timecode. 3 1 2 A TIME REFERENCE section • • • • • • • Select one of the following timecode sources for the Automix operation. INTERNAL ................... Internally generated timecode SMPTE .......................... SMPTE timecode received via the TIME CODE INPUT SMPTE connector MIDI CLOCK............... MIDI Clock received via the Rx PORT (specified on the Setup | MIDI/Host page) MTC-MIDI ................... MTC received via the MIDI IN port MTC-USB ..................... MTC received via the USB port MTC-REMOTE ............ MTC received via the REMOTE connector MTC-SLOT1................. MTC received via Slot 1 (for use with an optional MY8-mLAN card installed in Slot 1) B FRAMES These parameter buttons select the SMPTE/MTC frame rate. C button Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER]. The DM1000 quickly locates the Automix | Main page. 2 Move the cursor to the TIME REFERENCE section and select the desired timecode source. 3 If you selected INTERNAL, SMPTE, or MTC timecode, move the cursor to one of the FRAMES parameter buttons to select the desired frame rate. If the DM1000 receives timecode with a frame rate that differs from the specified rate, the error message “Frame Mismatch!” appears. If you select the SMPTE timecode, the error message “Frame Jump!” may appear, depending on the selected frame rate. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Setting Up for Automix Recording 189 4 If you select MIDI CLOCK, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | MIDI/Host page appears (see page 246). Then, in the Rx PORT parameter box, specify the port or slot that receives MIDI Clock. Tip: • If you select the MIDI CLOCK source, Automix will respond to MIDI Start, Stop, and Continue messages. • An Automix will play back correctly even if the frame rate differs from that used when the Automix was originally recorded. However, an Automix recorded using MIDI Clock and an Automix recorded using other timecode sources are not compatible with one another. Creating a Time Signature Map If you selected the MIDI CLOCK source, you must specify the initial time signature and any time signature changes that follow, according to the song. (If you do not do this, the song timing and Automix position may not match when playback starts in mid-song.) 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | Time Sig page appears. This page enables you to specify a measure number in the MEAS column and the time signature in the TIME column. By default, 4/4 is set in the first measure. 2 To change the initial time signature, move the cursor to the TIME value in the first measure, and use the Parameter wheel or [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the desired time signature. 3 To insert a time signature change, specify the desired measure number in an empty box in the MEAS column, and specify the corresponding time signature in the TIME column. To delete a time signature change, select it, then press [ENTER]. You cannot delete the initial time signature entry at measure #1. 16 Automix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 190 Chapter 16—Automix Recording an Automix This section describes a general procedure for Automix recording, including creating a new Automix, as well as recording the fader, [ON] button, and other controller events real-time. Creating a New Automix Follow the steps below to create a new Automix and select the parameters you want to record. 1 Connect a timecode source to the DM1000. 2 Select the timecode source on the Setup | Time Ref page (see page 188). If you selected MIDI CLOCK timecode, create a time signature map (see page 189). 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly until the Automix | Main page appears. This page enables you to set the basic Automix parameters, and record and play back Automixes. 4 Move the cursor to the NEW button located in the lower-right corner of the page, then press [ENTER]. A confirmation window for creating a new Automix appears. 5 Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER]. A new Automix is created. 6 Move the cursor to the AUTOMIX DISABLED/ENABLED button, then press [ENTER] to switch it to ENABLED. The new Automix is enabled. 7 In the OVERWRITE section, select parameters you want to record. The seven buttons in the OVERWRITE section enable you to select parameters to be recorded in the Automix, including the following. See page 196 for more information. • FADER........................... Fader operation • ON.................................. [ON] button on/off DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Recording an Automix • • • • • 191 PAN ................................Pan operation SURR .............................Surround pan operation AUX................................Aux Send level operation AUX ON ........................Aux Send on/off operation EQ...................................EQ operation Recording the First Event Follow the steps below to select channels and start Automix recording. 1 Move the cursor to the REC button at the bottom of the page, then press [ENTER]. The REC button flashes, indicating that the Automix is ready to record. Tip: Alternatively, you could press the AUTO REC button (instead of the REC button), then press [ENTER] to place the Automix in record ready mode. Whether you press REC or AUTO REC will affect the way in which you cancel record ready mode. 2 Press the [AUTO] button on the top panel. The button indicator lights up. If you turn on the [AUTO] button indicator while the REC button is lit or flashing on the Automix Main page, the [SEL] buttons will allow you to enable or disable the Automix function for each channel, or arm or disarm each channel. Depending on the REC button status on the Main page, pressing the channel [SEL] buttons will place the corresponding channels in the following state: • When the REC button is flashing or lit: Green Ready for Automix playback Orange Ready for Automix recording Off Automix disabled Green Ready for Automix playback Orange Ready for Automix recording 16 • When the REC button is off: Automix Off Automix disabled Green Ready for Automix playback 3 Select the layer that contains the channels you wish to record, then press the corresponding channel [SEL] buttons. The button indicators light up orange. The corresponding channels are armed. 4 Start the timecode source. The REC and PLAY buttons are highlighted and the recording starts. The [SEL] button indicators (illuminated in Step 3) change from orange to red (indicating that recording is in progress). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 192 Chapter 16—Automix 5 Adjust the faders, Encoders, [ON] buttons, and other controls of the channels selected in Step 3. Tip: To punch channels out of recording, press the corresponding [SEL] buttons to change the button indicators from red to green. 6 To record EQ events, use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ settings of the currently-selected channel. To select other channels, press the [AUTO] button to turn off the [AUTO] button indicator, then use the [SEL] buttons to select channels. Tip: Scene and library recalls are always recorded, regardless of the selection in the OVERWRITE section and the [SEL] button status. 7 To stop Automix recording, stop the timecode source, or move the cursor to the STOP button on the page, then press [ENTER]. A confirmation message appears asking whether you want to update the existing Automix data (i.e., keep the edits just recorded). Move the cursor to YES and press [ENTER] to update the data, or move the cursor to NO and press [ENTER] to discard the edits and return to the previous condition. Even after you update the existing Automix data, unless you proceed to the next recording, you can still restore the previous data by moving the cursor to the UNDO button on the Main page and pressing [ENTER]. Tip: • When you stop Automix recording, all channels are disarmed, and the [SEL] button indicators light up green. • If you use the AUTO REC button instead of the REC button in Step 1, the AUTO REC button will continue to flash after you stop Automix recording. In this way, you can resume recording when you restart the timecode source. To cancel record ready mode, move the cursor to the AUTO REC button, then press [ENTER]. • If the Mix Update Confirmation preference is off on the Setup | Prefer3 page, the confirmation window for updating the existing Automix data will not appear, and the edits just recorded will be retained. Note: • You can rerecord events as many times as you like. Remember, however, that unlike the first pass, on subsequent passes existing events for the currently-punched in parameter are overwritten. • You can reduce the risk of overwriting important data by punching in and out only necessary parameters using the buttons in the OVERWRITE section. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Inserting Mix Parameters into Automix 193 Inserting Mix Parameters into Automix You can insert the static mix parameter settings into the range specified by the IN and OUT parameters in the current Automix data. This is useful when you want to quickly insert static EQ settings into a specified range of the Automix data. Before Insert Event No event After Insert Event Event erased Value prior to Insert Inserted parameter value Time IN OUT Time 1 After you create a new Automix following the steps in the “Creating a New Automix” (page 190), press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | Prefer3 page appears. 2 For the “Insert Time Link to Locate Memory” preference, select Locate memories that will be applied to Insert In and Out. Note: If the timecode source is MIDI clock, this preference setting is ignored, since the IN and OUT parameters in the TIME SETTING section (page 207) on the Automix | Event Job page will be applied. 16 Automix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 194 Chapter 16—Automix 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button repeatedly until the Remote | Machine page appears. 4 Assign the Insert In and Out Locate points to the Locate memories specified in the LOCATE/TIME section (page 244) and selected in Step 2. 5 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly until the Automix | Main page appears. 6 Use the cursor buttons to select the INSERT button, then press [ENTER]. A confirmation message appears. The default IN and OUT parameter values use the Locate memories specified in Steps 1 – 4. If you change the Locate points for the corresponding Locate memories while the confirmation message is displayed, the IN and OUT parameter values will be updated accordingly. If MIDI clock is selected as a timecode source, the values are displayed by bars. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Inserting Mix Parameters into Automix 195 7 Use the cursor buttons to select YES, then press [ENTER]. The DM1000 enters Insert mode, and the INSERT button is highlighted. The fader positions, mute function and other parameters are updated to the settings specified for the time value of the IN parameter. 8 Select the parameter you wish to insert using the buttons in the OVERWRITE section. To select effect or plug-in parameters, locate the Effect | Edit or P-in Edit page, then move the cursor to the desired parameter and press [ENTER]. 9 Press the [AUTO] button. The button indicator lights up. 10 Select a channel to be inserted by pressing the corresponding channel [SEL] button. The selcted channel [SEL] button lights up red. 11 Edit a parameter you wish to insert. 12 Use the cursor buttons to select the INSERT button, then press [ENTER]. A confirmation message appears. 16 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Automix 13 Use the cursor buttons to select YES, then press [ENTER] to insert the data. Once the data is inserted, Insert mode is cancelled and the INSERT button is unhighlighted. 196 Chapter 16—Automix Parameter Recording The following table summarizes the parameter recording operation for each parameter available in Automix recording. Parameters Channel Levels (faders) Channel Mutes (ON/OFF) Channel OVERWRITE Input Set Layer to Input, Fader mode to Fader, use faders Bus Out, Aux Send Set Layer to Master, Fader mode to Fader, use faders Stereo Out FADER Use faders set to the Group Master in User Assignable Layer Input Set Layer to Input, use [ON] buttons Bus Out, Aux Send Set Layer to Master, use [ON] buttons Stereo Out Input Surround Pan Input EQ (F, Q, G, On/Off) Input, Bus Out, Aux Send, Stereo Out Aux Sends 1–8 Level Aux Send 1–8 mutes Use Stereo Out fader Group Master Level ON Input Scene recalls [ON] buttons of paired channels and grouped mutes are recorded together. Set Layer to Input, Encoder mode to Pan, use Encoders. Use SELECTED CHANNEL section PAN control If Pan mode is Gang or Inverse-Gang, paired channels are recorded together. SURR Use Joystick. If a surround parameter assigned to an Encoder, also use Encoders If ST LINK button on Surround Edit page is on, adjacent partners are recorded together. Use SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER section. (If EQ parameter assigned to an Encoder, also use Encoders.) EQ of paired channels, and grouped EQs recorded together. If Fader mode is Aux, use faders. If Encoder mode is Aux, use Encoders (also use Aux Send or Aux View pages). Aux send levels of paired channels recorded together. (If the selected Aux Send is paired, the send level to both Aux Sends is recorded.) Use Aux Send or Aux View pages Aux send mutes of paired channels recorded together. (If the selected Aux Send is paired, mutes for both Aux Sends recorded.) EQ AUX ON — Faders of paired channels and grouped faders are recorded together. PAN AUX Input Use Stereo Out [ON] button Pair/Group Use [ON] buttons set to the Group Master in User Assignable Layer Group Maser On/Off Pan Operation — Use SCENE MEMORY section or Scene Memory page — Library recalls EQ, Gate, Comp, Effects, Channel — Use corresponding library page — Effects parameters (certain parameters) Effects processors 1–4 — Use corresponding page — FADER Select User Defined Remote Layer, use faders — [ON] buttons ON Select User Defined Remote Layer, use [ON] buttons — Encoders PAN Select User Defined Remote Layer, use Encoders — Faders User Defined Remote Layer DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Punching In & Out 197 Punching In & Out You can modify part of a recorded Automix or add events to an Automix (Punch In & Out). You can punch in and out channels using the [SEL] buttons, or individual parameters using other controls. Punch In & Out Using the [SEL] Buttons Follow the steps below to punch channels in and out using the [SEL] buttons. 1 Select parameters you wish to record in the OVERWRITE section. 2 Move the cursor to the REC or AUTO REC button at the bottom of the page, then press [ENTER]. 3 Press the [AUTO] button. The button indicator lights up. At this time, make sure that the [SEL] button indicators for all channels (including the channels you want to punch in) are lit green. 4 Start the timecode source. The REC and PLAY buttons are highlighted and parameter event recording is armed. However, no events are yet recorded since no channels are selected. 5 To punch in channels, press the corresponding [SEL] buttons. The corresponding [SEL] button indicators light up red and the channels are placed in record mode. Note: If the punch-in channels already contain the parameter events selected in the OVERWRITE section, punching-in immediately overwrites the existing events. Be careful while selecting parameters in the OVERWRITE section so that you will not delete events you wish to retain. 6 Adjust the controls of the selected channels. 7 To punch out the channels, press the corresponding [SEL] buttons again. 8 Stop the Automix. A confirmation window regarding updating the Automix data appears. Tip: You can also select the recording channels first using the [SEL] buttons, start the timecode source, then select the desired parameters in the OVERWRITE section to punch in and out. Punching In & Out Individual Events 1 In the OVERWRITE section, select the parameters you want to record. 2 Move the cursor to the REC or AUTO REC button at the bottom of the page, then press [ENTER]. 3 Press the [AUTO] button on the top panel. The button indicator lights up. Make sure that the [SEL] button indicators for all channels are lit green. 4 Start the timecode source. The REC and PLAY buttons are highlighted and event recording is armed. However, no events are yet recorded since no channels are selected. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 16 Automix Even if you selected some parameters in the OVERWRITE section, you can punch in an individual parameter by following the steps below: 198 Chapter 16—Automix 5 Perform the following operations to punch in and out individual events. Parameters Channel Channel Levels (faders) OVERWRITE Input Set Layer to Iinput, Fader mode to Fader Bus Out, Aux Send Set Layer to Master, Fader mode to fader Stereo Out FADER Input Surround Pan Input Effects parameters (certain parameters) User Defined Remote Layer 1. 2. 3. 4. Input Effects processors 1–4 Faders Encoders Touch fader knob and adjust1 Release fader knob2 Set Layer to Input, Encoder mode to Pan Press Encoder and adjust Press Encoder SURR Select Input Layer and assign Surround LFE Level or Surround Pan Wheel to the Encoders Press Encoder and adjust Press Encoder Use SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER section. (If EQ parameter assigned to an Encoder, also use Encoders.) Adjust SELECTED CHANNEL control3 Press Encoder and adjust Press [SEL] button Press Encoder and adjust4 Press Encoder Set Layer to Input, Fader mode to Aux Touch fader knob and adjust1 Release fader knob2 Set Layer to Input, Encoder mode to Aux Press Encoder and adjust Press Encoder Select internal effects processors Move the cursor to the parameter control on the page, then press [ENTER]. Move the cursor to the parameter control on the page, then press [ENTER]. FADER Select User Defined Remote Layer Touch fader knob and adjust1 Release fader knob2 PAN Select User Defined Remote Layer Press Encoder and adjust Press Encoder EQ EQ On/Off Aux Sends 1–8 Level Punch Out PAN EQ (F, Q, G) All channels Stereo Out fader Punch In Set Fader mode to fader. Set Group Master in User Assignable Layer. Group Master Fader Pan Operation AUX — To punch in events by performing this operation, set TOUCH SENSE to TOUCH or LATCH on the Fader1 or 2 page. To punch out events by performing this operation, set TOUCH SENSE to TOUCH on the Fader1 or 2 page. To punch in events by performing this operation, turn on the Auto EQ Edit preference. To punch in events by performing this operation, assign EQ parameters to the Encoders. 6 Stop the Automix. A confirmation window regarding updating the Automix data appears. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual [SEL] Button Functions While the [AUTO] Button Indicator Is On 199 [SEL] Button Functions While the [AUTO] Button Indicator Is On While the [AUTO] button indicator is lit, you can use the channel [SEL] buttons to turn the Automix function on and off, arm or disarm channels, or punch channels in and out. The [SEL] button indicators operate as follows: • Off ..................................Automix recording or playback disabled. • Green .............................Automix stopped or playing • Orange...........................The channel is armed. • Red .................................Automix recording in progress • Flashing red ..................Edit Out mode set to TAKEOVER, and fader events continue recording after punch out • Flashing green..............Edit Out mode set to TAKEOVER, and faders are disabled after punch out Playing Back an Automix As long as the Automix function is enabled, the Automix function will chase the incoming timecode and play and stop the current Automix accordingly. You can stop playback manually by moving the cursor to the STOP or ABORT button on the Automix | Main/Memory page, then pressing [ENTER]. Playback will stop automatically if the DM1000 receives no timecode for a while, if the DM1000 receives MIDI Stop commands (only when the MIDI CLOCK source is selected), or if the end of the Automix data is reached. While the [AUTO] button indicator is lit, the [SEL] button indicators light up green on the channel strips available for Automix playback. When Automix playback for an individual channel is disabled, its [SEL] button indicator turns off. During playback, faders move in accordance with recorded fader events (as long as the corresponding layer and Fader mode is selected). You can disable fader movement by turning off the MOTOR button on the Fader 1 or 2 page (see page 205). You can view fader events on the Fader 1 or 2 page (see page 205), and other events on the corresponding pages. Recorded events of the currently-selected channel are reflected in the SELECTED CHANNEL section controls and displays. Note: If the current effects type is different from that used when the effects parameter edits were recorded, the parameter edits will not be played back. However, they are not deleted. When you rerecord effects parameter edits from the beginning, it is recommended that you delete the existing effects events offline. 16 Automix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 200 Chapter 16—Automix Automix Main Page This section explains the Automix Main page. This page enables you to set the basic Automix parameters and record and play back Automixes. To locate the Automix | Main page, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly until the page appears. 2 1 3 4 5 8 9 K L M 6 7 J N O P Q R S A FREE The amount of free Automix memory remaining is displayed here in kilobytes, as a percentage, and by a bar graph. B SIZE The size of the current Automix and the size of any Automix data in the undo buffer are displayed here in kilobytes. C TIME REFERENCE The timecode source and frame rate specified on the Time Ref page (see page 188) are also displayed here. D INT START TIME This parameter sets the start time of the DM1000 internal timecode generator in hours, minutes, seconds, frames, and subframes. Move the cursor to a digit you wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the value. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected digit to “00.” E OFFSET This parameter specifies an offset relative to the external timecode source in hours, minutes, seconds, frames, and subframes. Specify a “+” value to move events forward relative to the incoming timecode. Specify a “–” value to move events backwards relative to the incoming timecode. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected digit to “00.” F UPDATE This button determines the fate of events that exist beyond the point at which rerecording is stopped. When the TO END button is on, the DM1000 erases all events (that exist beyond the point at which rerecording is stopped) for parameters that have been edited during the current pass. This function is useful when you want parameters to remain the same right through to the end of the Automix. When the TO END button is off, existing events are left as they are. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Automix Main Page 201 When the TO END button is on, the way in which fader events are processed depends on the currently-selected Fader Edit mode and Edit Out mode. The following table shows how the faders operate when the Fader Edit mode is set to Absolute. TO END Return Takeover or Off At the point at which recording is stopped, the fader returns to the position specified by the existing fader data, at the speed specified by the Time parameter on the Fader1 or 2 page. At the point at which recording is stopped, the fader remains at the same position until the next fader event in the existing data is encountered. Existing data Existing data Return time OFF Fader edit Fader edit Punch in Time Stop recording At the point at which recording is stopped, the fader returns to the position specified by the existing fader data, at the speed specified by the Time parameter on the Fader1 or 2 page. All subsequent events are erased. The fader remains at that position through to the end of the Automix. Existing data Time Punch in Stop recording At the point at which recording is stopped, all subsequent events are erased so that the fader remains at that position right through to the end of the Automix. Existing data Return time ON Fader edit Punch in Time Stop recording Fader edit Time Punch in Stop recording If the Fader Edit mode is set to Relative, and the Edit Out mode is set to either Takeover or Off, the fader will remain at a position relative to its position when recording was stopped right through to the end of the Automix. G EDIT OUT DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 16 Automix This parameter sets the Edit Out mode: TAKEOVER, RETURN, or OFF (both buttons are off). This mode determines how rerecorded fader moves align with existing fader data at the punch out point. Fader data includes Input Channel levels, Bus Out master levels, Aux Send master levels, the Stereo Out level, and Remote layer faders. 202 Chapter 16—Automix The following table shows how faders move in each Edit Out mode. You can set the Return Time (time required by Input and Output Channel faders to return to the previously-recorded position) on the Fader1 or 2 page (see page 205). Off Return At the punch out point, the fader remains at the same position until the next fader event in the existing data occurs. Takeover At the punch out point, the fader returns to the position specified by the existing fader data, at the speed specified by the Time parameter on the Fader1 or 2 page. At the punch out point, recording continues until the fader position intersects the existing fader data. If you are still touching the fader knob at the actual punch out point, the fader is disabled until you release it. Existing data Existing data Existing data Return time Fader edit Time Punch in Fader edit Fader edit Time Punch out Actual punch out Time Punch out Punch in Punch out Punch in In this example, punch out was performed by pressing the [AUTO] button, and the fader was moved manually between the specified punch out point and actual punch out point. H FADER EDIT This parameter determines how fader moves are rerecorded (it has no effect during the first recording pass). You can select ABSOLUTE or RELATIVE. In Absolute mode, fader moves are rerecorded as absolute values (existing fader data is erased). In Relative mode, fader moves are rerecorded relative to the existing fader data. Fader data includes Input Channel level, Bus Out master levels, Aux Out master levels, the Stereo Out level, Remote layer faders. The following table explains Fader Edit mode operation (TO END: off. Edit Out: off). Absolute Relative Fader edits are recorded as absolute values and existing fader data between the punch in and out points is erased. Fader edits are rerecorded relative to the existing fader data. Existing data Existing data Fader edit Fader edit Time Punch in Punch out Time Punch in Punch out I TOUCH SENSE If you set this parameter to TOUCH, you can punch in and out the parameters selected in the OVERWRITE section by just touching the fader knobs. If you set this parameter to LATCH, you can only punch in the parameters (punch-out is disabled). If the Fader Touch Sense parameter is set to “DISABLED,” on the Setup | Prefer2 page, this section is grayed out. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Automix Main Page 203 J OVERWRITE section This section enables you to select parameters to be recorded on the first pass, and rerecorded (i.e., overwritten) on subsequent passes. You can select or deselect these parameters while recording is in progress (see page 190). K AUTOMIX ENABLED/DISABLED This parameter enables or disables the Automix. When the parameter is set to DISABLE, you cannot record or play back an Automix. If the ESAM function is enabled, you cannot enable the Automix. L NEW Move the cursor to the NEW button, then press [ENTER] to create a new Automix. When you create a new Automix, a Scene recall event to recall the current Scene (i.e., the last Scene recalled) is automatically inserted at the start of the Automix. (You can edit this event so that you will be able to recall another Scene.) M UNDO Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to undo various Automix operations (Undo function). When you record new events in an Automix, or when you perform an offline edit, the current Automix data is copied to the Undo buffer. You can retrieve the data from the buffer by moving the cursor to the UNDO button and pressing [ENTER] while Automix is stopped. You can also cancel the Undo operation (Redo function). Tip: • The Undo buffer is cleared when you turn off the power to the DM1000. If you want to save the contents of the Undo buffer, perform the undo operation, then store the Automix. • However, you cannot undo the operations performed on the Event Edit page. N INSERT Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to insert the current mix parameters into the current Automix data. This is useful when you want to quickly replace the Automix data in the specified range (e.g., to replace dialogs). Refer to “Inserting Mix Parameters into Automix” on page 193 O AUTO REC Move the cursor to the AUTO REC button, then press [ENTER] to place the DM1000 in Automix record ready mode. The button becomes highlighted. In this state, when the DM1000 receives the appropriate timecode, it automatically starts Automix recording. Record ready mode is not canceled, even if Automix recording is stopped, unless you move the cursor to this button and press [ENTER]. P REC Q PLAY If the timecode source is set to internal, move the cursor to the PLAY button and press [ENTER]. Automix recording or playback starts. If you selected an external timecode source, as soon as the DM1000 receives the external timecode, recording or playback starts, and this button turns on automatically. After you stop Automix by pressing the STOP button or ABORT button, you can restart recording or playback by pressing this button as long as the DM1000 is still receiving timecode. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 16 Automix Move the cursor to the REC button, then press [ENTER] to place the DM1000 in Automix record ready mode. The button starts to flash. In this state, when the DM1000 receives the appropriate timecode, it automatically starts Automix recording. Unlike the AUTO REC button, however, record ready mode is canceled when recording is stopped. If you move the cursor to this button and press [ENTER] during Automix playback, the DM1000 engages record ready mode. 204 Chapter 16—Automix R STOP Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to stop Automix recording or playback. (If you stop recording, a confirmation window appears asking whether you wish to update the Automix data.) The button remains highlighted while Automix is stopped. S ABORT This button aborts the current recording without updating the existing Automix data. Automix Memory Page The Automix Memory page enables you to store and recall Automixes. The lower half of this page is identical to the Automix Main page. To locate the Automix | Memory page, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly until the page appears. 5 6 1 2 3 4 K 7 8 9 J A TITLE EDIT This button enables you to edit the title of the Automix memory selected in the center column. B RECALL This button recalls the Automix memory selected in the center column. C STORE This button enables you to store the current Automix to the memory selected in the center column. D CLEAR This button clears the Automix memory selected in the center column. E TITLE This parameter displays the title of the current Automix. F MEMORY TITLE column This column enables you to select an Automix memory to be recalled or stored. The column lists the titles of Automix memories. An empty Automix memory has a title of “No Data!” G CURRENT This parameter displays the size of the current Automix. H UNDO This parameter displays the size of the current Undo buffer. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Fader1 &2 pages 205 I FREE This parameter displays the amount of free memory available for storing the current Automix. J MEMORY This parameter displays the size of the Automix memory selected in the center column. K PROTECT ON/OFF To protect the contents of the Automix memory selected in the MEMORY TITLE column, move the cursor to this button and press [ENTER]. A padlock icon ( ) appears next to the titles of Automix memories that are write-protected. You cannot store, clear, or edit the title of write-protected Automix memories. For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 173. Fader1 &2 pages The Fader1 & 2 pages enable you to edit fader positions while viewing the current fader position and the fader data recorded in the Automix. To locate the Fader1 or 2 page, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly until the page appears. During Automix playback, fader positions are displayed graphically as black bars on the Automix | Fader1 or 2 page. The Fader1 page displays fader positions for Input Channel 1 through 48 and Stereo out. The Fader2 page displays fader positions for Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8 and Fader Group Masters A–H, Q–T. 1 2 3 16 5 6 When the Fader mode is set to Fader, each page displays Input and Output Channel levels. When the Fader mode is set to Aux, each page displays Aux Send levels. During rerecording, the Fader1 and 2 pages display the existing fader data in bar graphs. While fader events are being recorded, arrows appear next to each fader bar. A downward arrow indicates that the current fader position is higher than that specified by the existing fader data. An upward arrow indicates that the current fader position is lower than that specified by the existing fader data. A ABSOLUTE & RELATIVE These buttons are the same as those on the Main page (see page 200). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Automix 4 206 Chapter 16—Automix B MOTOR This button turns the fader motors on or off for Automix playback. The button is highlighted when the motors are on. Tip: You cannot turn off the motors during Automix recording. Even if this button is turned off, the motors are automatically turned on when recording starts. C Edit Safe buttons The numbered buttons below each fader bar are Edit Safe buttons, which prohibit Automix recording on certain channels. A channel is set to safe and excluded from Automix recording when its button is highlighted. However, you can play existing events and use faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons on safe channels. This is useful for rehearsing mix moves. Tip: • You can make all channels safe simultaneously by selecting a non-highlighted button and double-clicking the [ENTER] button. A confirmation window appears. • You can cancel all safe channels simultaneously by selecting a highlighted button and double-clicking the [ENTER] button. A confirmation window appears. D TOUCH SENSE This function is the same as that on the Automix Main page. E UPDATE This button is the same as that on the Automix Main page. F EDIT OUT The TAKEOVER and RETURN buttons are the same as those on the Automix | Main page. The EDIT OUT section on this page also contains the TIME parameter. This parameter determines the time required for faders to return to the levels specified by the existing Automix data when the RETURN button is turned on. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Editing Events Offline 207 Editing Events Offline You can edit recorded Automix events offline on the Event Job and Event Edit pages. You can perform offline editing only while the Automix function is stopped. Event Job Page On the Event Job page, you can erase, copy, move/merge, or trim specified events on specified channels between specified in and out points. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly until the Automix | Event Job page appears. 2 3 1 5 4 A Channel buttons These button enable you to select the channels for which you want to edit Automix data. B ALL SELECT This button selects all channels. C ALL CLEAR This button de-selects all channels. D TIME SETTING This section enables you to specify the region of Automix data to be edited (IN and OUT points). E JOB TYPE This section enables you to select the job type. If you select “MEM” in the SOURCE section, the MERGE button replaces the MOVE button. 3 Specify the region of Automix data you want to edit by setting the IN and OUT parameters in the TIME SETTING section. You can also capture the IN and OUT points on-the-fly by moving the cursor to the IN or OUT button and pressing the [ENTER] button. To modify the captured positions, move the cursor to the value you wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected digit to “00.” Up to eight IN and OUT timecode values can be captured and stored in the eight Capture memories. The currently-selected Capture memory number (1–8) appears to the left of the IN and OUT buttons. Move the cursor to the Capture memory number, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the desired Capture memory. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Automix 2 Use the Channel buttons to select channels for which you want to edit Automix data. You can select multiple Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Outs, and the Stereo Out. 16 208 Chapter 16—Automix 4 Move the cursor to the desired Job button in the Job Type section, then press [ENTER]. The following Jobs are available. Certain Jobs feature an extra parameter below the TIME SETTING section. ■ ERASE This button erases the specified range of Automix data. ■ COPY This button copies the specified range of Automix data to another position. When you select this button, the SOURCE and COPY TO sections appear below the TIME SETTING section. • SOURCE section This section enables you to select the copy source Automix. • COPY TO section - TIME This parameter specifies the start point to which the specified data is to be copied. (The number in parentheses on the right indicates the end point of the destination.) You can also capture the start point on-the-fly by moving the cursor to the TO button and pressing the [ENTER] button to capture the current position. To modify the captured positions, move the cursor to the value you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected digit to “00.” - CH This parameter specifies the channel to which you want to copy the specified data. If multiple channels are selected as the copy source, use the CH parameter box to specify the number of the top channel in the destination. (The number in parentheses on the right indicates the number of the last channel in the destination.) For example, if eight channels are selected as the copy source and you specify “17” in the CH parameter box, the copy destination will be Channels 17 through 24. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Editing Events Offline 209 ■ MOVE/MERGE The function of this button changes depending on the SOURCE section setting. If you select CURRENT (current Automix) in the SOURCE section, this button becomes the MOVE button, which moves the specified range of Automix data to another position. If you select MEM (Automix memories 1–16) in the SOURCE section, this button becomes the MERGE button, which merges the specified range of Automix data with other Automix data. When you select this Job, the SOURCE section and MOVE TO (MERGE TO) section appear below the TIME SETTING section. • SOURCE section These parameters select the source Automix to be moved or merged. If you select CURRENT (the current Automix), you can use the MOVE button. If you select MEM (Automix memory), you can use the MERGE button. If you select MEM, specify the Automix memory number in the small parameter box on the right. • MOVE TO (MERGE TO) section - TIME This parameter specifies the start point to which the specified data is to be moved or merged. (The number in parentheses on the right indicates the end point of the destination.) You can also capture the start point on-the-fly by moving the cursor to the TO button, then pressing the [ENTER] button to capture the current position. To modify the captured positions, move the cursor to the value you wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected digit to “00.” ■ TRIM This button enables you to adjust the level of fader events in the specified range of Automix data. When you select this Job, the TRIM EDIT section appears below the TIME SETTING section. - IN This parameter determines the time required for the fader to reach the level specified by the Trim amount parameter. - OUT This parameter determines the time required for the fader to return to the previous level. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 16 Automix - CH This parameter specifies the channel to which the specified data is to be moved or merged. If multiple channels are selected as the move/merge source, use the CH parameter box to specify the number of the top channel in the destination. (The number in parentheses on the right indicates the number of the last channel in the destination.) For example, if eight channels are selected as the move/merge source and you specify “17” in the CH parameter box, the move/merge destination will be Channels 17 through 24. 210 Chapter 16—Automix - Trim amount This parameter specifies the trim amount in the range of –96 dB to +96 dB. Existing data Trim: –x dB Trimmed data TRIM IN TRIM OUT IN Time OUT 5 After setting all necessary parameters, move the cursor to the EXEC button, then press [ENTER]. The PARAMETERS window appears, which enables you to select parameters to be edited, and to perform the selected Job. A parameter is selected when its button is highlighted. (You can specify multiple parameters.) These buttons correspond to the following parameters: Button Events FADER Channel Fader events (Inputs Channels, Bus Out masters, Aux Out masters, Group Master Levels, and the Stereo Out) ON Channel Mute events, and Group Master On PAN Input Channel pan events SURR Input Channel surround pan, LFE level, and DIV parameter events EQ Channel EQ events CH Channel library recall events GATE Gate library recall events COMP Comp library recall events EQ EQ library recall events SCENE Scene recall events FX LIB 1–4 Effects library recall events of each internal effects processor AUX 1–8 Level events of each Aux Send ON 1–8 Mute events of each Aux Send REMOTE 1–2 User Defined Remote Layer events EFFECT 1–4 Parameter events for each internal effects processor LIB DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Editing Events Offline 211 Tip: • You can select all parameter buttons simultaneously by moving the cursor to a non-highlighted button and double-clicking the [ENTER] button. A confirmation window appears. • You can deselect all selected parameter buttons simultaneously by moving the cursor to a highlighted button and double-clicking the [ENTER] button. A confirmation window appears. 6 To execute the selected Job, move the cursor to the EXEC button, then press [ENTER]. A confirmation window appears. Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER] to execute the Job. Tip: • Move the cursor to the NO button, then press [ENTER] to abort the Job. • To return to the previous page without executing the Job, move the cursor to the button, then press [ENTER]. Event Edit Page The Event Edit page enables you to edit, duplicate, delete events and insert new events. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button repeatedly until the Automix | Event Edit page appears. 1 53 2 4 6 8 9 J 7 K 16 This list contains the Automix event time, channels, and parameter values. The currently-selected event in the list is indicated by a triangular icon (®). Use the Up and Down cursor buttons to select an event, and use the Left and Right cursor buttons to select a parameter value of the selected event. B SYNC This button synchronizes the event list to the current timecode position. Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to select events closest to the current timecode position. C DUPLICATE This button duplicates the event selected in the list. D DELETE This button deletes the event selected in the list. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Automix A Event list 212 Chapter 16—Automix E SELECTED CH When this option is on, only events of the channels currently selected by the channel [SEL] buttons are displayed in the list. F Event select buttons These buttons select the type of events to be displayed in the event list. G INSERT This button inserts a new event in the position selected in the event list. H LOCATE This button locates events at (or closest to) the timecode position indicated on the Capture memory display. I Capture memory display This display counter indicates the captured timecode position. J CAPTURE This button captures the current timecode position. Up to eight timecode values can be captured and stored in the eight Capture memories. K Capture memory This box indicates the number of the currently-selected Capture memory (1–8). 2 Use the Event select buttons to select the type of events to be displayed in the event list. The format of the list varies depending on the selected event. The following table shows the events that correspond to the Event select buttons, and the list format: Button Events Listed List Format SCENE/LIB Library and Scene recall events TIME CODE, CH, SCENE/LIB FADER Channel Fader events (Inputs Channels, Bus Out masters, Aux Out masters, Group Master Levels, and the Stereo Out) TIME CODE, CH, dB, SEC ON Channel Mutes (ON/OFF), and Group Master On TIME CODE, CH, ON/OFF PAN Pan TIME CODE, CH, L-C-R SURR-PAN Surround Pan TIME CODE, CH, SURR SURR-LFE Surround LFE TIME CODE, CH, dB SURR-DIV Surround DIV TIME CODE, CH, DIV SURR-RDIV Surround RDIV TIME CODE, CH, RDIV EQ-ON EQ On/Off TIME CODE, CH, ON/OFF EQ-FREQ EQ Frequency TIME CODE, CH, BAND/Hz EQ-Q EQ Q TIME CODE, CH, BAND/Q EQ-GAIN EQ Gain TIME CODE, CH, BAND/dB AUX Aux Send 1–8 levels TIME CODE, CH, AUX, dB AUX ON Aux Send 1–8 mutes TIME CODE, CH, AUX, ON/OFF Tip: When the SELECTED CH check box is on, only events of the currently-selected channel are displayed. Note: If the data size of the selected event exceeds 1.75 MB, the message “Automix Work Memory Full!” appears, and not all events may be displayed. In this case, check the SELECTED CH check box to display only events of the selected channel. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Editing Events Offline 213 3 To duplicate or delete events, select an event by moving the triangular icon ®) to the event in the list, then select the DUPLICATE or DELETE button. (® 4 To modify the event time, channel or parameter value, move the cursor to a parameter value you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons. 5 To locate an event, play the Automix and move the cursor to the CAPTURE button, then press [ENTER]. The current position is captured and indicated in the Capture memory display. Tip: • To modify the captured position, move the cursor to the Capture memory display, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected digit to “00.” • Up to eight timecode values can be captured in the Capture memories. To recall another Capture memory, move the cursor to the parameter box located to the left of the CAPTURE button, then select the desired Capture memory number (1–8). 6 To recall the event at the captured position, move the cursor to the LOCATE button, then press [ENTER]. The event at (or closest to) the captured position is displayed and selected in the event list. 7 To insert a new event, use the Event select buttons to select the type of event that you want to insert. Use the Capture memory display to specify the point at which you want to insert the new event. Move the cursor to the INSERT button, then press [ENTER]. The new event is inserted at the position currently displayed in the Capture memory display. 16 Automix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 214 Chapter 16—Automix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Remote Control 215 17 Remote Control This chapter describes the Remote function, which enables you to control external equipment directly from the DM1000 top panel. About Remote Function The DM1000’s Remote function enables you to control external DAW (Digital Audio Workstation) equipment, MIDI devices, recorders, etc. There are three types of Remote functions (Remote 1 &2, and Machine Control): ■ REMOTE 1 (Remote Layer 1) ■ REMOTE 2 (Remote Layer 2) To use these Remote functions, you must connect the DM1000 to an external device via USB, and operate the faders, Encoders and [ON] buttons on the top panel to control the external device remotely. You can specify a target device and parameter values on the Remote | Remote1 and Remote 2 pages. These layers are enabled when you turn on the LAYER [REMOTE 1] and [REMOTE 2] buttons respectively. During Remote operation, the controls on the top panel enable you to control the external device. (You cannot adjust the DM1000’s parameters unless you select a different layer.) You can assign functions of a target device to the controls on the top panel of the DM1000 by using Remote Layers 1 and 2. The following targets are available for remote control: • ProTools ........................You can remotely control Digidesign Pro Tools. • Nuendo..........................You can remotely control Steinberg Nuendo. • Cubase SX .....................You can remotely control Steinberg Cubase SX. • General DAW................You can remotely control DAW software that supports the protocol used by Pro Tools. • User Defined.................You can also assign MIDI messages to the faders, [ON] buttons, or Encoders to remotely control a connected MIDI device, such as a synthesizer. • User Assignable Layer.......You can combine the DM1000 channels to create a custom layer. (See page 272 for more information on this function.) Tip: ProTools, Nuendo, Cubase SX, and General DAW targets can be assigned to only one layer at a time. If you have already assigned a ProTools, Nuendo, Cubase SX, or General DAW target to Remote Layer 1 or 2, you cannot assign other targets to the other Remote Layer. 17 ■ Machine Control Tip: To control external devices from the DM1000, you can also use the User Defined buttons or the CONTROL connector as a GPI (General Purpose Interface). Refer to Chapter 20 “Other Functions” on page 265 for more information. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Remote Control From the Remote | Machine Control page, you can control an external recording machine that is connected to the DM1000 MIDI port, REMOTE connector, USB port, or optional MY8-mLAN card. There are two types of commands used for machine control. • MMC..............................MMC stands for MIDI Machine Control. MMC commands can be transferred via the MIDI ports, USB port, and Slot 1 if an MY8-mLAN card is installed. • P2....................................P2 protocol is used by the Tascam DA-98HR and other professional video machines. This command can be transferred via the REMOTE connector. 216 Chapter 17—Remote Control Pro Tools Remote Layer The DM1000 features Remote Layer 1 and 2 targets especially designed for controlling Pro Tools. Connections and Configuring Pro Tools Follow the steps below to connect the DM1000 to your computer via the USB port so that you can control Pro Tools from the DM1000. Note: You cannot control Pro Tools via MIDI connections. Be sure to connect your computer via the USB or an optional MY8-mLAN card installed in one of the DM1000 slots. ■ Configuring Windows Computers 1 Connect the DM1000 TO HOST USB port to a USB port on your PC using a USB cable. TO HOST USB port 2 1 +48V OFF OFF +48V ON OFF 5 4 3 +48V ON +48V ON 6 +48V OFF ON OFF USB 7 +48V ON 8 +48V OFF ON OFF 9 +48V ON OFF 10 +48V ON OFF 11 +48V ON OFF 12 +48V ON OFF 13 +48V ON OFF 14 +48V ON OFF OFF 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 16 15 +48V ON 1 20dB +48V ON OFF +48V ON OFF ON PAD -60 -16 -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN PEAK SIGNAL -60 -16 GAIN PEAK SIGNAL -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL -60 -16 GAIN PEAK SIGNAL 0 -60 -16 GAIN 0 10 TALKBACK LEVEL PEAK SIGNAL 10 PHONES PHONES LEVEL GAIN PEAK SIGNAL SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING DISPLAY ACCESS DIO MIDI SETUP REMOTE UTILITY METER OVER 0 OVER 0 -2 -2 -4 -4 -6 -6 VIEW EFFECT OUTPUT PATCH AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 AUX6 AUX7 AUX8 ENCODER MODE -10 -10 -12 -12 -14 -14 -18 -18 -24 -24 -30 -30 -36 -36 -42 -42 -48 -48 -56 -56 -72 -72 3 L R HIGH 4 5 SCENE AUXSELECT DISPLAY AUX1 2 SOLO CLEAR 2TR D1 2TR D2 SLOT BUS Q -8 -8 INPUT PATCH / PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY PAN/ SURROUND DYNAMICS DISPLAY DISPLAY 1 MONITOR EQUALIZER DISPLAY AUTOMIX HIGH MID 6 FREQUENCY 7 8 STEREO DIRECT LOW MID DIMMER TALKBACK LOW STEREO 0 10 MONITOR LEVEL GAIN INC DEC GRAB SCENE MEMORY FADER MODE DISPLAY FADER STORE RECALL AUX PAN AUX ASSIGN F1 F2 F4 F3 ENTER SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Computer AUTO SEL ON 16 USER DEFINED KEYS +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 0 DISPLAY 5 5 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 5 15 5 5 5 0 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 5 15 5 5 5 0 5 0 10 5 15 5 0 10 5 15 10 15 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 20 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 30 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 40 50 30 60 40 70 50 30 40 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 1 17 50 30 60 40 70 50 2 33 AUX 1 18 50 30 60 40 70 50 3 34 AUX 2 19 50 30 60 40 70 50 4 35 AUX 3 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 5 36 AUX 4 21 50 30 60 40 70 50 6 37 AUX 5 22 50 30 60 40 70 50 7 38 AUX 6 23 50 30 60 40 70 50 8 39 AUX 7 24 50 30 60 40 70 50 9 40 AUX 8 25 10 41 BUS 1 26 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 11 42 BUS 2 27 50 30 60 40 70 50 12 43 BUS 3 28 50 30 60 40 70 50 13 44 BUS 4 29 50 30 60 40 70 50 14 45 BUS 5 30 31 50 50 60 70 60 70 15 46 BUS 6 16 47 BUS 7 32 48 BUS 8 STEREO 2 Install the necessary USB drivers included on the DM1000 CD-ROM. See the Studio Manager Installation Guide for more information on installing the drivers. ■ Configuring Macintosh Computers 1 Connect the DM1000 TO HOST USB port to a USB port on your Mac using a USB cable. 2 Install the required USB driver included on the DM1000 CD-ROM. See the Studio Manager Installation Guide for more information on installing the driver. 3 If you are using Mac OS versions 8.6 through 9.2.2, install OMS. The DM1000 communicates with Pro Tools via OMS (Open Music System) software. If you have not installed OMS on your Mac, use the OMS installer included on the DM1000 CD-ROM to install OMS. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 217 4 Launch Pro Tools. 5 Choose OMS Studio Setup from the Setups menu, and configure OMS as necessary. Refer to the documentation that came with OMS for more information on configuring the OMS Studio Setup menu. OMS recognizes the DM1000 as a USB MIDI interface that features eight ports. 6 Choose Peripherals from the Setups menu to open the Peripherals window. 7 Double-click the MIDI Controllers tab. 8 Refer to the screen below to set the Type, Receive From, Send To, and #Ch’s parameters. As the controller type, select HUI for #1 and #2, and MCS Panner for #3 to use the Joystick. 17 9 When you finish setting the parameters, close the window. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Remote Control Tip: To control Pro Tools remotely, you need one port for every eight audio channels. Also, you need an additional port to control surround pan via the Joystick. Therefore, select MIDI Controller #1 for Channels 1-8, MIDI Controller #2 for Channels 9-16, and #3 for the Joystick. 218 Chapter 17—Remote Control Configuring the DM1000 Follow the steps below to set up the DM1000 so that you can remotely control Pro Tools from the DM1000 Remote Layer 1. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | MIDI/Host page appears. 1 2 Move the cursor to the first DAW parameter box (1) in the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section, then rotate the Parameter wheel to select USB as the port. 3 Press [ENTER] to confirm the setting. 4 Move the cursor to the adjacent parameter box (on the right), then rotate the Parameter wheel to specify the port ID. Note: If you select an incorrect port, you will be unable to use the Remote function. Be sure to match the port ID with that specified in the Peripherals window in Pro Tools. 5 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, then press the [F1] button. The Remote | Remote 1 page appears. 2 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 219 6 Select ProTools (as the target device) for the Target parameter (2) located in the upper-right corner of the page. By default, Remote Layer 1 target is set to ProTools. If another target has been selected, rotate the Parameter wheel to select ProTools. 7 Press the LAYER [REMOTE 1] button. Remote Layer 1 is now available for control, enabling you to remotely control Pro Tools. Note: When the Pro Tools Remote Layer is selected, the DM1000’s top panel faders, Encoders and other channel buttons control Pro Tools. To control the DM1000, you need to select an Input Channel layer or the Master layer. Tip: • If an optional MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge is installed, Pro Tools channel levels are displayed on the MB1000 meters. • Pressing the [REMOTE 2] button and setting the TARGET parameter to ProTools enables you to control Pro Tools from the Remote Layer 2. In this case, the Remote Layer 1 Target parameter is automatically set to No Assign. 17 Remote Control DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 220 Chapter 17—Remote Control Display While the Pro Tools layer is selected, you can use the [F2]–[F4] buttons as well as the left and right [ ]/[ ] Tab Scroll buttons to select display modes. You can select the following display modes using these buttons: ■ Insert Display mode ( [F2] button) Press the [F2] button to select Insert Display mode. In this mode, you can assign and edit plug-ins. 1 2 3 4 5 A TARGET This parameter enables you to select the remote control target device. B COUNTER • • • • This counter indicates the current position. This counter works in unison with the timecode counter on Pro Tools. The display format of the counter is specified in Pro Tools. The following three check boxes in the COUNTER section indicate the currently-selected format. TIME CODE:................ Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Time Code.” FEET: ............................. Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Feet:Frames.” BEATS:........................... Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Bars:Beats.” If no check boxes are selected:...........Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Minutes:Seconds” or “Samples.” C SELECT ASSIGN This parameter indicates the current function of the Encoders. For example, Pan, PanR, SndA, SndB, SndC, SndD, or SndE (see page 222). D P.WHEEL MODE This parameter indicates the function currently assigned to the Parameter wheel (see page 224). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 221 E INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section This section enables you to insert plug-ins into Pro Tools channels and adjust plug-in settings. Use the left and right [ ]/[ ] Tab Scroll buttons to change the parameters displayed in this section. • ASSIGN .........................Turn on this button to insert plug-ins into Pro Tools channels. (If you are using the TDM system, you can also assign outboard effects processors.) • COMPARE ....................You can compare your edits with the original settings by turning on this button. This button works in unison with the Compare button in the Pro Tools Inserts and Sends windows. • BYPASS..........................Turning on this button bypasses the plug-ins (see page 231). • INSERT/PARAM..........Switching this button to INSERT enables you to assign plug-ins using four rotary controls on the page. Switching this button to PARAM enables you to adjust the plug-in parameters using the four rotary controls (see page 230). • Information box ..........This box displays plug-in parameter names, values, alarm messages from Pro Tools, etc. • Rotary controls 1–4.....These controls enable you to select plug-ins or adjust the selected plug-in parameters. ■ Channel Display mode ( [F3] button) Press the [F3] button to select this display mode, in which the parameter controls for tracks 1–16 are displayed. 17 Remote Control • Parameter controls 1–16 ................... Channel parameter controls, such as channel 1–16 panpots, Send A–E send levels, etc. are displayed. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 222 Chapter 17—Remote Control ■ Meter Display mode ( [F4] button) Press the [F4] button to select this display mode, in which the level meters for tracks 1–16 are displayed. • Channels 1–16.............. The channel 1–16 levels or Send levels are displayed. Control Surface Operation When the Pro Tools Remote Layer is selected, the DM1000 controls on the top panel engage the following functions: ■ Channel Strip section • Encoders Encoders adjust the panpots or Aux Send levels. Use the ENCODER MODE [PAN] or [AUX] button to select a parameter to edit. • [SEL] buttons These buttons select Pro Tools channels, inserts, and Automation mode. By default, these buttons select channels. • [SOLO] buttons These buttons solo Pro Tools channels. The button indicators for the soloed channels light up. • [ON] buttons These buttons mute Pro Tools channels. • Faders The faders set Pro Tools channel levels, including the audio tracks, MIDI tracks, master fader, Aux Ins, etc. If 16 or fewer channels are displayed in Pro Tools, faders are assigned starting from the left-most channel. ■ STEREO section • [AUTO] button This button switches Pro Tools Automation mode. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 223 ■ AUX SELECT Section • [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons These buttons select Sends A–E so that you can adjust the corresponding Pro Tools channel send level. • [AUX 6] button Press and hold down this button and press the desired [SEL] button to reset the corresponding channel fader level. Press and hold down this button and press the desired Encoder push-switch to reset the corresponding channel panpot to center. While you are holding down the [AUX 6] button, the SELECT ASSIGN parameter indicates “DFLT.” • [AUX 8] button Use this button along with the desired [SEL] button to assign a plug-in to the corresponding Pro Tools channel. ■ ENCODER MODE section • [PAN] button When you turn on this button, the Encoders function as Pro Tools channel panpots. • [AUX] button When you turn on this button, the Encoders function as Send A–E level controls. AUX Send destination is selected in the AUX SELECT section. When you press this button, Send A is selected as the destination automatically. If the Encoders are currently set to control the Send A–E levels, the button indicator lights up. ■ FADER MODE section • [FADER/AUX] button This button selects Flip mode (see page 228) for faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons. ■ DISPLAY ACCESS section • [AUTOMIX] button To display channel Automation mode, press this button while a Channel Display mode or Meter Display mode page is selected. • [PAIR/GROUP] button Press this button while a Channel Display mode or Meter Display mode page is selected to display a Group ID to which each channel belongs. ■ Display section • Tab Scroll buttons These buttons switch the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT parameter settings on Insert Display mode pages. • [F1] button Press this button to turn off the Peak Hold indicator on Meter Display mode pages. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Remote Control • [EFFECT] button Press this button to display or hide the Inserts window in Pro Tools. 17 224 Chapter 17—Remote Control ■ SELECTED CHANNEL Section • ROUTING [1] button Selects the previous track to be controlled by the Joystick. • ROUTING [2] button Selects the next track to be controlled by the Joystick. • ROUTING [3] button Functions the same as the [OPTION] key on a computer keyboard. • ROUTING [4] button Switches between L and R of the selected track. The [4] button indicator lights up when the R channel is selected. • ROUTING [5] button Selects Main, or Send (in this order) for the selected track. • ROUTING [6] button Selects a controller mode for Panner operation. The button does not affect the DM1000’s operation. • ROUTING [7] button Selects Send, or Main (in this order) for the selected track. • ROUTING [8] button Mutes or unmutes the selected track. The [8] button indicator lights up while the track is muted. • ROUTING [DIRECT] button Functions the same as the [SHIFT] key on the computer keyboard. • [GRAB] button Press this button, turning on the button indicator, then operate the Joystick to quickly set the pan position. • Joystick Operating the Joystick while the [GRAB] button indicator is turned on enables you to quickly set the pan position. ■ Data Entry section • [ENTER] button This button switches the on/off status of the buttons on the display. • Left, Right, Up, Down ([ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]) cursor buttons These buttons move the cursor on the display. • [INC] & [DEC] buttons The [INC] button works the same as the Enter key on your computer keyboard. The [DEC] button works the same as the Esc key on your computer keyboard. • Parameter wheel The Parameter wheel enables you to adjust the currently-selected parameter, or execute the shuttle and scrub operation. By default, it adjusts the value of the currently-selected parameter (The P.WHEEL MODE parameter indicates “Prm.”). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 225 ■ USER DEFINED KEYS section • [1]–[12] buttons You can assign one of 164 parameters to each of these buttons. In particular, if you assign any of 53 Remote Control parameters to these buttons, you can operate the transport section and select various Pro Tools modes from the DM1000 top panel. See page 274 for more information on assigning the parameters to the buttons. Parameter Function DAW REC Places Pro Tools in Record Enabled mode. The button indicator flashes while the transport section is stopped. The indicator lights up when recording starts. DAW PLAY Starts playback from the current cursor position. DAW STOP Stops playback and recording. DAW FF Fast forwards the cursor position. DAW REW Fast rewinds the cursor position. DAW SHUTTLE Switches Wheel mode to Shuttle. DAW SCRUB Switches Wheel mode to Scrub (Jog). DAW AUDITION You can audition the pre-roll, post-roll, in-point area, or out-point area by holding down the button to which this function is assigned and pressing a button to which DAW PRE, DAW POST, DAW IN, or DAW OUT is assigned. DAW PRE Plays back from the pre-roll point up to the beginning of the selected area. DAW IN Plays back from the beginning of the selected area for a duration specified as the pre-roll. DAW OUT Plays back to the end of the selected area for a duration specified as the post-roll. DAW POST Plays back from the end of the selected area for a duration specified as the post-roll. DAW RTZ Moves the playback cursor to the beginning of the session. DAW END Moves the playback cursor to the end of the session. DAW ONLINE Toggles between on-line and off-line. DAW LOOP Toggles between Loop Playback on and off. DAW QUICKPUNCH Toggles between QuickPunch on and off. DAW AUTO FADER DAW AUTO MUTE DAW AUTO PAN DAW AUTO SEND Correspond to the Automation Overwrite (Auto Enable) functions. DAW AUTO PLUGIN DAW AUTO SENDMUTE DAW AUTO READ DAW AUTO TOUCH 17 DAW AUTO LATCH DAW AUTO WRITE Select Automation modes. DAW AUTO OFF DAW AUTO SUSPEND Cancels Automation recording and playback for all channels. When Automation is interrupted, the LED flashes, and channel strip controls maintain the current settings. DAW AUTO STATUS Displays the channel Automation mode (Read, Tch, Ltch, Wrt, or Off). The mode setting appears at the bottom of each channel on a Channel or Meter Display page when you press and hold the button to which this function is assigned. DAW GROUP STATUS Displays a Group ID (to which each channel belongs) below each channel number on a Channel or Meter Display page (in all caps for a main group and in lowercase letters for a sub-group). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Remote Control DAW AUTO TRIM 226 Chapter 17—Remote Control Parameter Function DAW MONI STATUS Pressing the key (to which this function is assigned) enables you to view the current monitoring mode and the channel strip type. DAW CREATE GROUP Pressing the key (to which this function is assigned) enables you to execute the function specified in the menu of the Pro Tools Group list. DAW SUSPEND GROUP Suspends all mix groups temporarily. Press the button again to undo suspension. DAW WIN TRANSPORT Shows or hides the Transport window. DAW WIN INSERT Shows or hides the Inserts window. DAW WIN MIX/EDIT Toggles between the Mix window and Edit window. (Both windows are not displayed at the same time.) DAW WIN MEM-LOC Shows or hides the Memory Locations window. DAW WIN STATUS Shows or hides the Status window. DAW UNDO Executes the Edit menu’s Undo/Redo command. DAW SAVE Executes the Edit menu’s Save command. DAW EDIT MODE Pressing the button (to which this function is assigned) repeatedly selects Shuffle, Slip, Spot, or Grid edit mode in this order. DAW EDIT TOOL Pressing the button (to which this function is assigned) repeatedly selects one of seven edit tools (Zoomer, Trimmer, Selector, Grabber, Smart Tool, Scrubber, and Pencil, in this order). DAW SHIFT/ADD DAW OPTION/ALL DAW CTRL/CLUCH DAW ALT/FINE DAW BANK + DAW BANK – DAW Channel + DAW Channel – Functions in the same way as Macintosh keyboard keys (Shift, Option, Control, and Alt). Pressing one of the buttons (to which these functions are assigned) along with another button enables you to execute various commands. Executes the Bank Swap operation. Pressing the button (to which this function is assigned) switches the entire 16-channel bank. Executes the Channel Scroll operation. Pressing the buttons (to which these functions are assigned) enables you to scroll channels horizontally. DAW REC/RDY 1 DAW REC/RDY 2 DAW REC/RDY 3 DAW REC/RDY 4 DAW REC/RDY 5 DAW REC/RDY 6 DAW REC/RDY 7 DAW REC/RDY 8 DAW REC/RDY 9 Pressing the buttons (to which these functions are assigned) places the corresponding channel strips in Record Ready mode. At this time, the indicator of the button you pressed flashes. It lights up when recording starts. DAW REC/RDY 10 DAW REC/RDY 11 DAW REC/RDY 12 DAW REC/RDY 13 DAW REC/RDY 14 DAW REC/RDY 15 DAW REC/RDY 16 DAW REC/RDY ALL DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual If no channel strips are in Record Enabled mode, pressing the button (to which this function is assigned) places all channel strips in Record Enabled mode. The button indicator flashes if any channel strip in any bank is in Record Enabled mode. Pressing the button while the button indicator is flashing cancels Record Enabled mode for all channel strips. Pro Tools Remote Layer 227 Selecting Channels To select a single Pro Tools channel, press the [SEL] button that corresponds to the desired channel. To select multiple Pro Tools channels simultaneously, while holding down one [SEL] button, press the [SEL] buttons of the other channels you wish to add. Press the [SEL] buttons again to cancel the selection. Setting Channel Levels 1 Make sure that the FADER MODE [FADER] indicator is lit steadily. If the FADER MODE [FADER] and [AUX] indicators are flashing alternately, press the [FADER/AUX] button to turn on the [FADER] indicator. 2 Operate the faders to set channel levels. Press and hold down the [AUX 6] button and press the desired [SEL] button to reset the corresponding channel fader level. Muting Channels To mute Pro Tools channels, press the [ON] buttons. The [ON] button indicators of muted channels turn off. Grouped channels are muted together. Press the [ON] buttons again to unmute channels. The [ON] button indicators of unmuted channels light up. There are two mute modes in Pro Tools: Implicit mute and Explicit mute. You can check the mute mode by viewing the [ON] button indicators. • Implicit mute................This is a forced mute mode in which the channels are muted because other channels are soloed. In this mode, the [ON] button indicators flash. • Explicit mute ................In this mode, the channels are muted or turned off manually. In this mode, the [ON] button indicators turn off. Panning Channels You can adjust the Pro Tools channel pan settings. 1 Press the ENCODER MODE [PAN] button. 2 Press the [F2] button to select Channel Display mode. On a Channel Display mode page, parameter controls 1–16 indicate the pan settings. 4 Turn the Encoders to pan the channels. Press and hold down the [AUX 6] button and press the desired Encoder push-switch to reset the corresponding channel panpot to center. Soloing Channels To solo Pro Tools channels, press the [SOLO] buttons of the desired channels. Grouped channels are soloed together, and other channels are muted. Press the [SOLO] buttons again to unsolo the channels. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 17 Remote Control 3 For stereo channel pan settings, press the [PAN] button again. The button indicator flashes. Pressing the [PAN] button repeatedly toggles between the left and right panpots. When the left panpot is active, the SELECT ASSIGN parameter of the display indicates “Pan.” When the right panpot is active, the SELECT ASSIGN parameter indicates “PanR.” 228 Chapter 17—Remote Control Configuring Sends A–E as Pre or Post You can set Pro Tools channels for the selected Sends (A–E) to pre or post. 1 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons to select the desired Sends (A–E). The selected button indicators light up. Send pre/post status can be viewed in Channel Display or Meter Display mode by pressing and holding down the [AUX1]–[AUX5] buttons. 2 Press the Encoder push-switches for the desired channels. Pressing the Encoder push-switches repeatedly toggles between pre and post. You can set Sends as pre or post by pressing the Encoder push-switches if faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons are in Flip mode. See page 228 for more information. Setting Send Levels You can adjust Pro Tools Send (A–E) send levels as follows. 1 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons to select the desired Sends (A–E). 2 Rotate the Encoders for the desired channels. You can set Send levels by rotating the Encoders if faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons are in Flip mode. Refer to “Flip Mode” for more information. Muting Sends A–E You can mute Sends by pressing the [ON] buttons if faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons are in Flip mode. Refer to “Flip Mode” for more information. Panning Sends A–E You can pan only Sends assigned to stereo destinations by rotating the Encoders if faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons are in Flip mode. Refer to the next section for more information. Flip Mode In Flip mode, you can use the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons to control send levels, pre/post positions, and mute settings as shown in the following table. Control Normal mode Flip Mode Faders Channel level Send level Encoders Channel pan/send level Send pan Encoder push-switches Encoder mode is Pan: inactive; Encoder mode is Send level: Send pre/post Send pre/post [ON] buttons Channel mute Send mute 1 Press the FADER MODE [FADER/AUX] button. The FADER MODE [FADER] and [AUX] indicators flash alternately, and the SELECT ASSIGN parameter on the display indicates “FLIP.” 2 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons to select the desired Sends (A–E). The button indicator of the selected send lights up. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 229 3 Use the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons to control the currently-selected send. For stereo Aux input channels, you can set the left and right panpots individually. To do this, press the ENCODER MODE [PAN] button repeatedly. When the button indicator is lit continuously, you can set the left panpot. When the button indicator is flashing, you can set the right panpot. Assigning Plug-ins to Pro Tools Channels You can assign plug-ins to five inserts available for Pro Tools channel strips as follows. 1 Press the [F2] button to select Insert Display mode. 2 Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 8] button. The [AUX 8] button indicator flashes. You can now select a channel to which you want to insert plug-ins. 3 Press the [SEL] button of each desired channel. 4 Make sure that the INSERT button (1) is selected in the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section. If the PARAM button is selected instead, move the cursor to the button, then press [ENTER] to select INSERT. 2 1 5 Move the cursor to the ASSIGN button (2), then press [ENTER] to turn on the button. You can now select plug-ins. If you press another channel’s [SEL] button after you turn on the ASSIGN button, the button turns off. If you wish to assign plug-ins to other channels, turn on the ASSIGN button again. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 17 Remote Control 6 Move the cursor to one of the four parameter controls, then rotate the Parameter wheel to select a plug-in. By default, the parameter controls enable you to select plug-ins to be assigned to channel inserts #1–#4. To assign a plug-in to insert #5, press the Tab Scroll button [ ] to change the indication in the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section. If you are using the TDM system, you can also assign outboard effects processors. 230 Chapter 17—Remote Control 7 Press [ENTER] to confirm the assignment. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to assign more plug-ins to other insert positions in the channel strip. 8 In the same way, assign plug-ins to other channels. 9 When you finish assigning plug-ins, press the [AUX 8] button. The button indicator turns off. Editing Plug-ins You can edit plug-ins inserted in the channel strips as follows: 1 Press the [F2] button to select Insert Display mode. 2 Press the corresponding [SEL] button to select the channel that was assigned the plug-in you want to edit. 3 In the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section, move the cursor to the parameter control (Insert 1–4) that was assigned the parameter you want to edit. Note: To adjust a plug-in assigned to insert #5, press the Tab Scroll button [ ] to change the parameter indication in the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section, then select a parameter control. 4 Press [ENTER] to display the parameters. In the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section, the PARAM button is automatically selected and the Information box indicates the selected plug-in parameters. You can now use parameter controls 1–4 and the [ENTER] button to adjust the parameters. 5 Use the Tab Scroll buttons to display the parameter value you wish to change. Most plug-ins feature five or more parameters. To edit the fifth or subsequent parameters, use the Tab Scroll buttons to display the desired parameters and their values in the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section. The current page number and the plug-in name appear for a moment immediately after you press the Tab Scroll buttons. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 231 6 Move the cursor to a parameter control, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [ENTER] button to adjust the value. One or two parameters are assigned to a single parameter control. To turn the parameter setting on or off, press [ENTER]. To modify the parameter variable, rotate the Parameter wheel. 7 When you finish adjusting the parameters, move the cursor to the PARAM button, then press [ENTER] to switch it to INSERT. Bypassing Plug-ins You can bypass plug-ins assigned to Pro Tools channels. Before bypassing plug-ins, you must press the corresponding [SEL] button to select a channel to which the plug-ins have been assigned, then press the [F2] button to select Insert Display mode. To bypass plug-ins, display the parameters of the plug-in you wish to bypass in the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section, then turn on the BYPASS button. 17 Remote Control DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 232 Chapter 17—Remote Control Scrub & Shuttle By assigning the DAW SCRUB parameter to one of the User Defined buttons [1]–[12], you can scrub Pro Tools tracks back and forth by turning the Parameter wheel. By assigning the DAW SHUTTLE parameter to one of the User Defined buttons [1]–[12], you can shuttle back and forth by turning the Parameter wheel. 1 Assign the DAW SCRUB or DAW SHUTTLE parameter to one of the User Defined buttons [1]–[12]. Before assigning parameters to these buttons, you must switch layers to cancel the Remote function. See page 274 for more information on assigning the parameters to the User Defined buttons. 2 Press the LAYER [REMOTE 1] or [REMOTE 2] button to enable remote control of Pro Tools. 3 Make sure that Pro Tools is stopped. 4 Press the User Defined button to which you assigned the DAW SCRUB or DAW SHUTTLE parameter in Step 1. You can now use the Scrub or Shuttle function. 5 Rotate the Parameter wheel. Rotate the Parameter wheel clockwise to scrub or shuttle forwards. Turn it counterclockwise to scrub or shuttle backwards. The minimum scrub playback step varies depending on the zoom setting in the Pro Tools Edit window. 6 To cancel the Scrub or Shuttle function, press the User Defined button to which you assigned the DAW SCRUB or DAW SHUTTLE parameter in Step 1. Alternatively, you can cancel the Scrub or Shuttle function by pressing the User Defined button to which the DAW STOP parameter is assigned. The Scrub or Shuttle function is automatically cancelled if you commence playback or fast forward. Note: The Scrub/Shuttle operation might be stopped unexpectedly by Pro Tools. Therefore, whenever you use the Scrub or Shuttle function, make sure that the P.WHEEL MODE parameter indicates “SCRUB” or “SHUTTLE.” You can check the Scrub/Shuttle function status by viewing the corresponding User Defined button indicator. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Pro Tools Remote Layer 233 Automation You can view the Pro Tools Automation mode as follows: 1 Press the [F3] or [F4] button to display the channels for remote control. 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button. The channel’s Automation settings are displayed. While the STEREO [AUTO] button is on, the channel [SEL] button indicators also display the channel’s Automation mode. Pro Tools Display Auto write Wrt Auto touch Tch Auto latch Ltch Auto read Read Auto off Off [SEL] Button Indicators Flashing red (Record Ready) Red (Recording) Green Off Tip: If you assign the parameter that controls Automation to one of the User Defined buttons, you can control the Automation settings by holding down the programmed User Defined button and pressing the [SEL] button of the target channel. See page 274 for more information on assigning parameters to User Defined buttons. 17 Remote Control DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 234 Chapter 17—Remote Control Using the Panner ■ Selecting a Track Use the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING buttons to manipulate the following track operations. To do this... Use these buttons: Selecting the previous track ROUTING [1] button Selecting the next track ROUTING [2] button Selecting the top track ROUTING [3] + [1] buttons Selecting the last track ROUTING [3] + [2] buttons Selecting the main output of the selected track ROUTING [3] + [5] buttons Selecting Send 5 of the selected track ROUTING [3] + [7] buttons Selecting the output/send of the selected track ROUTING [5] + [7] buttons ■ Stereo Track Link You can control the panner for the L and R channels of stereo tracks simultaneously or individually, depending on the stereo link status. To cancel the stereo panner link, press and hold down the [Control] key on the keyboard and move the Joystick. ■ Panner Operation via the Joystick 1 Select the track you wish to pan. 2 Press the [GRAB] button, turning on the [GRAB] button indicator. 3 While the [GRAB] button indicator is lit, operate the Joystick. If you move the Joystick for direct panning while the [GRAB] button indicator is lit, the pan position is specified as an absolute value, which may cause the pan position to jump drastically. You can also restrict the trajectory direction of the Joystick. To limit movement to the L and R directions, press and hold down the [DIRECT] button and move the Joystick. To limit movement to the up and down (front and rear) directions, select 3 Knob mode in the Pro Tools Panner window. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Nuendo/Cubase SX Remote Layer 235 Nuendo/Cubase SX Remote Layer You can remotely control Nuendo and Cubase SX using Remote Layers 1 and 2. ■ Configuring Computers 1 Connect the DM1000 to your computer using a USB cable, and install the required USB driver included on the DM1000 CD-ROM. Refer to the Studio Manager installation guide for more information on installing the driver. 2 Launch Nuendo/Cubase SX, select the Device Setup menu, and set up Nuendo/Cubase SX so that the DM1000 can communicate with the software. Refer to the Nuendo/Cubase SX User’s Manual for more information on setting up the software. ■ Configuring the DM1000 1 Refer to page 218 to configure the Setup | MIDI/HOST page. 2 Press the LAYER [REMOTE 1] or [REMOTE 2] button to set the TARGET parameter to Nuendo/Cubase SX. You can now remotely control Nuendo/Cubase SX using the selected Remote Layer. Other DAW Remote Layers You can remotely control DAW software that supports the Pro Tools protocol. ■ Configuring Computers 1 Connect the DM1000 to your computer using a USB cable, and install the required USB driver included on the DM1000 CD-ROM. Refer to the Studio Manager installation guide for more information on installing the driver. 2 Launch and set up DAW software so that the DM1000 communicates with the software. Refer to the DAW software’s user’s manual for more information on setting up the software. ■ Configuring the DM1000 1 Refer to page 218 to configure the Setup | MIDI/HOST page. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Remote Control 2 Press the LAYER [REMOTE 1] or [REMOTE 2] button to set the TARGET parameter to General DAW. You can now remotely control DAW software using the selected Remote Layer. 17 236 Chapter 17—Remote Control MIDI Remote Layer If you select USER DEFINED as the target for Remote Layer 1 or 2, you can remotely control the parameters of external MIDI devices (such as synthesizers and tone generators) by operating the channel Encoders, [ON] buttons, and faders to output various MIDI messages. (This is called MIDI Remote function.) You can store MIDI messages assigned to the channel controls in four banks. When the DM1000 is shipped from the factory, it includes main MIDI settings in these banks, which you can quickly recall to use the MIDI Remote function. If necessary, you can also assign other MIDI messages to the faders, [ON] buttons, or Encoders to remotely control the parameters of a connected MIDI device. Using the MIDI Remote Function This section describes how to use Remote Layer 2 to recall and use the factory-preset MIDI Remote settings stored in the banks. By default, the DM1000’s four MIDI Remote banks (Banks 1–4) contain the following MIDI messages. Bank Control Function Usage Encoders [ON] buttons Faders Pan — Volume Effect Send — Volume Panning and setting XG sound levels Pan — Volume Adjusting pan, mute, and levels for Cubase series mixer Pan Mute Volume 1 Panning and setting GM sound levels 2 Setting GM sound effect send levels/Adjusting volume levels 3 4 1 Connect the DM1000’s MIDI OUT port to the MIDI IN port of the MIDI device. MIDI OUT MIDI IN MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER Integrated Sampling Sequencer Real-time External Control Sur face Modular Synthesis Plug-in System SONG SCENE 2 1 +48V OFF OFF 1 +48V ON OFF 2 5 4 3 +48V ON +48V ON 3 6 +48V OFF ON 4 OFF 5 7 +48V ON 6 8 +48V OFF ON OFF 7 9 +48V ON OFF 8 10 +48V ON 9 OFF 10 11 +48V ON OFF 11 12 +48V ON OFF 12 13 +48V ON OFF 13 14 +48V ON OFF 14 OFF 15 16 15 +48V ON REC +48V ON OFF +48V ON OFF ON 16 PAD 20dB 20dB -60 -16 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL 0 20dB -60 -16 GAIN PEAK SIGNAL 10 TALKBACK LEVEL 0 -60 -16 GAIN PEAK SIGNAL 10 PHONES PHONES LEVEL GAIN PEAK SIGNAL SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING DISPLAY ACCESS DISPLAY AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW OVER 0 OVER 0 -2 -2 -4 -4 -6 -6 -8 INPUT PATCH / PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY PAN/ SURROUND DYNAMICS EFFECT OUTPUT PATCH AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 AUX6 AUX7 AUX8 ENCODER MODE -10 -12 -14 -14 -18 -18 -24 -24 -30 -30 -36 -36 -42 -42 -48 -48 -56 -56 -72 -72 L R HIGH SOLO CLEAR 2TR D1 2TR D2 SLOT BUS Q 3 -8 -10 -12 2 4 5 SCENE AUXSELECT DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY 1 MONITOR EQUALIZER HIGH MID 6 FREQUENCY 7 8 STEREO DIRECT LOW MID DIMMER TALKBACK LOW STEREO 0 10 MONITOR LEVEL GAIN INC DEC GRAB SCENE MEMORY FADER MODE DISPLAY FADER STORE RECALL AUX PAN AUX ASSIGN F1 F2 F4 F3 ENTER SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 AUTO SEL ON USER DEFINED KEYS +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 0 DISPLAY 5 5 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 5 15 20 10 10 15 15 33 18 10 5 15 34 AUX 2 19 10 5 15 35 AUX 3 20 10 5 15 36 21 5 15 37 22 10 5 15 38 AUX 6 23 10 5 15 39 AUX 7 24 10 5 15 40 AUX 8 25 41 5 15 26 10 5 15 42 BUS 2 27 10 5 15 43 28 5 15 44 29 10 5 15 45 30 10 5 15 30 15 40 20 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 14 BUS 5 5 0 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 13 BUS 4 5 0 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 12 BUS 3 10 5 5 5 0 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 11 5 5 0 20 10 30 15 40 20 5 5 0 20 10 50 30 60 40 70 50 10 BUS 1 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 9 5 5 0 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 8 5 5 0 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 7 5 5 0 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 6 AUX 5 5 0 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 5 AUX 4 10 5 5 5 0 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 4 5 5 0 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 3 5 5 0 20 10 30 15 40 20 5 5 0 20 10 2 AUX 1 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 5 50 30 60 40 70 50 1 17 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 30 40 50 5 5 0 20 10 30 15 20 5 5 0 46 31 15 20 20 30 30 40 40 50 50 60 70 60 70 15 BUS 6 10 16 47 BUS 7 32 48 BUS 8 STEREO Synthesizer MIDI Remote Layer 237 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | MIDI/Host page appears. 1 3 Move the cursor to the REMOTE 2 parameter box (1) in the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section, rotate the Parameter wheel to select MIDI, then press [ENTER]. If the MIDI port is already in use, a confirmation window for changing the assignment appears. Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER]. Tip: If the REMOTE 2 parameter box is grayed out, proceed to Steps 4 and 5 to set the TARGET parameter, then return to Steps 2 and 3. 4 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, then press the [F2] button. The Remote | Remote 2 page appears. 5 Move the cursor to the TARGET parameter box, rotate the Parameter wheel to select USER DEFINED, then press [ENTER]. The confirmation window for changing the setting appears. Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER]. The display changes as follows: 1 4 3 2 5 17 6 Remote Control 7 A TRANSMIT ENABLE/DISABLE This button switches the MIDI Remote function between enable and disable. B INITIALIZE This button resets the settings stored in the bank selected by the BANK parameter to the default setting. C BANK This parameter enables you to select one of four banks. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 238 Chapter 17—Remote Control D ID, SHORT, LONG These parameters display the channel names. The ID parameter displays the channel ID (RM01–RM16) for the currently-controlled MIDI device. E ON section This section displays the type of MIDI messages (in hexadecimal or alphabet) assigned to the [ON] buttons for the currently-selected channels (RM01–RM16). • LATCH/UNLATCH ..... This button toggles between Latch and Unlatch for [ON] button operation. • LEARN .......................... When you turn on this button, MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN port are assigned to the DATA parameter boxes. • DATA parameter boxes.......................These boxes display the type of MIDI messages (in hexadecimal or alphabets) assigned to the [ON] button). F ENCODER section This section displays the type of MIDI messages (in hexadecimal or alphabet) assigned to the Encoders for the currently-selected channels (RM01–RM16). G FADER section This section displays the type of MIDI messages (in hexadecimal or alphabet) assigned to the faders for the currently-selected channels (RM01–RM16). 6 Move the cursor to the desired bank button (BANK parameter buttons 1–4), then press [ENTER]. 7 Press the LAYER [REMOTE 2] button to select Remote Layer 2. You can now use the MIDI Remote function. 8 Use the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons to control the MIDI device. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual MIDI Remote Layer 239 Assigning MIDI Messages to Channel Controls You can quickly use the MIDI Remote function if you use the factory presets in the banks. However, you can also assign the desired MIDI messages to the faders, [ON] buttons, or Encoders. This section describes how to assign MIDI messages to the channel controls, using the example of assigning Hold On/Off messages (Control Change #64; Values 127 & 0) to the Channel 1 [ON] button. 1 Connect the DM1000’s MIDI IN port to the MIDI OUT port of a MIDI keyboard to which a Hold On/Off controllable foot switch is connected. Enable the MIDI Remote function on the DM1000. MIDI OUT 2 1 +48V OFF OFF +48V ON OFF 5 4 3 +48V ON +48V ON MIDI IN 6 +48V OFF ON OFF 7 +48V ON 8 +48V OFF ON OFF 9 +48V ON OFF 10 +48V ON OFF 11 +48V ON OFF 12 +48V ON OFF 13 +48V ON OFF 14 +48V ON OFF OFF 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB +48V ON OFF MIDI IN 16 15 +48V ON 1 20dB MIDI OUT +48V ON OFF ON PAD -60 -16 -60 -16 GAIN PEAK SIGNAL -60 -16 GAIN PEAK SIGNAL -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL -60 -16 GAIN 0 -60 -16 GAIN 0 10 TALKBACK LEVEL PEAK PEAK SIGNAL SIGNAL 10 PHONES PHONES LEVEL GAIN SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP UTILITY MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW OVER 0 -2 -4 INPUT PATCH / PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY EFFECT OUTPUT PATCH AUX2 AUX5 AUX3 AUX6 AUX4 AUX7 2 3 4 -8 -10 -12 -12 -14 -14 -18 -18 -24 -24 -30 -30 -36 -36 -42 -42 -48 -48 -56 -56 -72 -72 L R 6 FREQUENCY 7 8 STEREO DIRECT SOLO CLEAR 2TR D1 2TR D2 SLOT BUS LOW MID DIMMER TALKBACK LOW STEREO 0 10 MONITOR LEVEL GAIN INC DEC GRAB AUX8 ENCODER MODE HIGH HIGH MID Q -6 -8 -10 5 SCENE AUXSELECT AUX1 1 -4 -6 DISPLAY MIDI keyboard DISPLAY DISPLAY OVER 0 -2 PAN/ SURROUND DYNAMICS MONITOR EQUALIZER DISPLAY AUTOMIX SCENE MEMORY FADER MODE DISPLAY FADER STORE RECALL AUX PAN AUX ASSIGN F1 F2 F4 F3 ENTER SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL AUTO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SEL ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ON USER DEFINED KEYS +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 0 DISPLAY 5 5 5 5 0 10 5 15 0 10 5 15 20 10 10 15 50 33 AUX 1 10 5 15 34 AUX 2 0 10 5 15 35 AUX 3 0 10 5 15 36 AUX 4 0 10 5 15 37 AUX 5 10 5 15 38 AUX 6 0 10 5 15 39 AUX 7 0 10 5 15 40 AUX 8 0 10 5 15 41 BUS 1 0 10 5 15 42 BUS 2 0 10 5 15 43 BUS 3 0 10 5 15 44 BUS 4 10 5 15 45 BUS 5 0 10 5 15 46 BUS 6 0 10 5 15 30 15 40 20 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 14 30 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 13 29 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 12 28 0 5 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 11 27 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 10 26 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 9 25 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 8 24 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 7 23 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 6 22 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 5 21 0 5 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 4 20 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 3 19 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 2 18 5 5 20 10 50 30 60 40 70 50 1 17 0 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 30 40 5 5 20 10 30 15 20 5 5 47 BUS 7 15 20 30 30 40 40 50 50 60 70 60 Foot switch 70 15 31 10 20 16 32 48 BUS 8 STEREO 2 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, then the [F2] button to display the Remote | Remote 2 page. Rotate the Parameter wheel to set the TARGET parameter to USER DEFINED. You can now use the MIDI Remote function. Refer to the previous section for more information on using the MIDI Remote function. 3 Move the cursor to the desired bank button (BANK parameter buttons 1–4), then press [ENTER]. 4 Press the [SEL] buttons for the desired channels. Currently-assigned MIDI messages appear in the ON, ENCODER, and FADER sections. Tip: You can also choose the desired channels using the ID, SHORT, and LONG parameters. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 17 Remote Control 5 Move the cursor to the LEARN button in the ON section, then press [ENTER]. MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN port of the DM1000 will be assigned to the DATA parameter boxes in the ON section. 240 Chapter 17—Remote Control 6 Press and hold down the MIDI keyboard foot switch. The MIDI Hold On message is assigned in the DATA parameter box. MIDI messages are described below: • 00–7F ............................. MIDI messages are expressed in hexadecimal. • END ............................... This message indicates the end of MIDI messages. Subsequent messages assigned in the DATA parameter boxes will be ignored. • –...................................... This message indicates that no messages are assigned to the DATA parameter boxes. Tip: When you click the LEARN button to assign MIDI messages, the DM1000 automatically recognizes the end of the messages and assigns END and “–.” 7 While continuing to hold down the foot switch, turn off the LEARN button. 8 Move the cursor to the third parameter box (“7F” in this example), then rotate the Parameter wheel to change the value to SW. “SW” is a variable that changes depending on the [ON] button’s on/off status. You can use the following variables in MIDI messages. • SW.................................. This variable is selectable only in the DATA parameter boxes of the ON section. When the [ON] buttons are turned on, “7F” (127 in decimal) is output. When the [ON] buttons are turned off, “00” (0 in decimal) is output. • ENC................................ This setting is selectable only in the DATA parameter boxes of the ENCODER section. When you operate the Encoders, values in the range of 00 to 7F (0–127 in decimal) are output. • FAD................................ This setting is selectable only in the DATA parameter boxes of the FADER section. When you operate the faders, values in the range of 00 to 7F (0–127 in decimal) are output. Tip: If “SW” is not assigned in the DATA parameter boxes of the ON section, the current MIDI messages are output. Note: Be sure to set variables in the ENCODER and FADER sections. If no variables are assigned, operation of the Encoders or faders is ignored. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual MIDI Remote Layer 241 9 Move the cursor to the LATCH/UNLATCH button, then press [ENTER] to select LATCH or UNLATCH depending on how you want the [ON] buttons to function. • LATCH...........................Pressing the [ON] buttons repeatedly transmits alternating On and Off messages. • UNLATCH ....................Pressing and holding down the [ON] buttons transmits On messages, and releasing the [ON] buttons transmits Off messages. Tip: Refer to the diagrams below for information on how the [ON] buttons behave when Latch or Unlatch is selected. ■ When “SW” is assigned: - LATCH MIDI data transmission (SW=7F) Off MIDI data transmission (SW=00) Illuminated Off - UNLATCH MIDI data transmission (SW=7F) Off Illuminated MIDI data transmission (SW=00) Off ■ When “SW” is not assigned: - UNLATCH MIDI data transmission Off Illuminated Off 17 10 To change the channel name, move the cursor to the ID LONG parameter box, then press [ENTER] to display the Title Edit window. See page 32 for more information on editing names. Tip: • Move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then press [ENTER]. A window is displayed that enables you to reset the parameter settings in the currently-selected bank. • You can also assign MIDI messages to the parameter boxes manually without using the LEARN button. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Remote Control Tip: In most situations, select Unlatch if SW is not assigned. 242 Chapter 17—Remote Control Machine Control Function The DM1000 can control the transport functions and select tracks on external recording machines that support MMC and the P2 protocol by transmitting commands via the MIDI OUT port and REMOTE connector respectively. Tip: P2 protocol is used by Tascam DA-98HR and other professional video machines. The DM1000 is capable of transmitting P2 protocol commands via the REMOTE connector. Note: Controllable parameters vary depending on the connected devices. Refer to the User’s Manual for the external device for more information on controllable parameters. 1 Refer to the diagram below for information on connecting the DM1000 to an external device. MIDI OUT 2 1 +48V OFF OFF +48V ON OFF 5 4 3 +48V ON +48V ON 6 +48V OFF ON OFF MIDI IN 7 +48V ON 8 +48V OFF ON OFF 9 +48V ON OFF 10 +48V ON OFF 11 +48V ON OFF 12 +48V ON OFF 13 +48V ON OFF 14 +48V ON OFF OFF 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 16 15 +48V ON 1 20dB MIDI OUT +48V ON OFF +48V ON OFF ON PAD -60 -16 -60 -16 GAIN SIGNAL -60 -16 GAIN PEAK PEAK SIGNAL -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL -60 -16 GAIN 0 -60 -16 GAIN 0 10 TALKBACK LEVEL PEAK PEAK SIGNAL SIGNAL 10 MMC-supported machine PHONES PHONES LEVEL GAIN MIDI IN REMOTE connector 2 1 +48V OFF OFF +48V ON OFF 5 4 3 +48V ON +48V ON 6 +48V OFF ON OFF 7 +48V ON RS422 8 +48V OFF ON OFF 9 +48V ON OFF 10 +48V ON OFF 11 +48V ON OFF 12 +48V ON OFF 13 +48V ON OFF OFF 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB -60 -16 -60 -16 GAIN SIGNAL -60 -16 GAIN PEAK PEAK -60 -16 GAIN SIGNAL ROUTING SETUP UTILITY REMOTE METER VIEW INPUT PATCH / PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY PAN/ SURROUND DYNAMICS EFFECT OVER 0 OVER 0 -2 -2 -4 -4 -6 -6 -8 -8 -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN OUTPUT PATCH SCENE AUXSELECT DISPLAY AUX1 AUX5 AUX2 AUX3 AUX6 AUX7 AUX4 -10 -10 -12 -12 -14 -14 -18 -18 -24 -24 -30 -30 -36 -36 -42 -42 -48 -48 -56 -56 -72 -72 L R 2 3 4 PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL 5 6 7 8 CLEAR 2TR D2 0 +48V ON OFF ON 10 PEAK PEAK SIGNAL 10 P2 protocolsupported machine PHONES PHONES LEVEL GAIN SIGNAL ROUTING DISPLAY ACCESS LOW MID SLOT BUS DIMMER TALKBACK LOW STEREO AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW OVER 0 OVER 0 -2 -2 -4 -4 -6 -6 -8 -8 INPUT PATCH / PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY 0 10 MONITOR LEVEL PAN/ SURROUND DYNAMICS EFFECT OUTPUT PATCH SCENE AUXSELECT DIRECT INC DEC DISPLAY AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX6 AUX7 AUX4 -10 -10 -12 -12 -14 -14 -18 -18 -24 -24 -30 -30 -36 -36 -42 -42 -48 -48 -56 -56 -72 -72 L R GRAB AUX8 ENCODER MODE OFF 0 TALKBACK LEVEL SELECTED CHANNEL SOLO 2TR D1 GAIN STEREO +48V ON -60 -16 GAIN AUX5 SCENE MEMORY FADER MODE DISPLAY 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 HIGH SOLO CLEAR HIGH MID 2TR D1 2TR D2 LOW MID SLOT BUS Q FREQUENCY DIMMER TALKBACK LOW STEREO 0 10 MONITOR LEVEL GAIN STEREO DIRECT INC DEC GRAB AUX8 ENCODER MODE DISPLAY DISPLAY 1 MONITOR EQUALIZER DISPLAY HIGH HIGH MID Q FREQUENCY -60 -16 GAIN DISPLAY DISPLAY 1 MONITOR EQUALIZER DISPLAY DIO MIDI OFF 3 20dB 16 15 +48V ON 2 20dB SELECTED CHANNEL DISPLAY ACCESS AUTOMIX 14 +48V ON 1 20dB PAD SCENE MEMORY FADER MODE DISPLAY FADER STORE FADER RECALL AUX PAN AUX STORE RECALL AUX ASSIGN F1 F2 PAN F4 F3 AUX ASSIGN F1 F2 F4 F3 ENTER ENTER SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL AUTO SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SEL SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO ON ON 1 ON 2 ON 3 ON 4 ON 5 ON 6 ON 7 ON 8 ON 9 ON 10 ON 11 ON 12 ON 13 ON 14 ON ON 15 ON 16 ON 1 ON 2 ON 3 ON 4 ON 5 ON 6 ON 7 ON 8 ON 9 ON 10 ON 11 ON 12 ON 13 ON 14 AUTO SEL ON ON 15 16 USER DEFINED KEYS +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 USER DEFINED KEYS +10 0 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 0 DISPLAY 5 5 5 5 0 10 5 15 0 10 5 15 20 10 10 15 50 33 AUX 1 10 5 15 34 AUX 2 0 10 5 15 35 AUX 3 0 10 5 15 36 AUX 4 0 10 5 15 37 AUX 5 10 5 15 38 AUX 6 0 10 5 15 39 AUX 7 0 10 5 15 40 AUX 8 0 10 5 15 41 BUS 1 0 10 5 15 42 BUS 2 0 10 5 15 43 BUS 3 0 10 5 15 44 BUS 4 10 5 15 45 BUS 5 0 10 5 15 46 BUS 6 0 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 47 BUS 7 0 15 5 20 20 10 30 30 15 40 40 20 15 15 31 5 10 15 50 50 30 60 70 60 40 70 50 48 BUS 8 0 10 5 15 30 15 STEREO 0 10 5 15 34 AUX 2 0 10 5 15 35 AUX 3 0 10 5 15 36 AUX 4 0 10 5 15 37 AUX 5 10 5 15 38 AUX 6 0 10 5 15 39 AUX 7 0 10 5 15 40 AUX 8 0 10 5 15 41 BUS 1 0 10 5 15 42 BUS 2 0 10 5 15 43 BUS 3 0 10 5 15 44 BUS 4 10 5 15 45 BUS 5 0 10 5 15 46 BUS 6 0 10 5 15 30 15 40 20 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 14 30 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 13 29 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 12 28 0 5 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 11 27 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 10 26 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 9 25 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 8 24 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 7 23 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 6 22 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 5 21 0 5 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 4 20 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 3 19 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 2 18 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 33 AUX 1 5 5 20 10 1 17 5 5 20 10 16 32 5 5 10 10 5 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 14 30 DISPLAY 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 13 29 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 12 28 0 5 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 11 27 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 10 26 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 9 25 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 8 24 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 7 23 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 6 22 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 5 21 0 5 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 4 20 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 3 19 5 5 20 10 30 15 40 20 2 18 5 5 20 10 50 30 60 40 70 50 1 17 0 30 15 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 30 40 5 5 20 10 30 15 20 5 5 47 BUS 7 15 20 20 30 30 40 40 50 50 60 70 60 70 15 31 10 16 32 48 BUS 8 STEREO 2 To control a device that supports the P2 protocol, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly to display the Setup | Remote page, then set the REMOTE FUNCTION parameter (1) to “P2-DFLT.” This page enables you to select the type of signals transmitted or received via the REMOTE connector. See page 287 for more information. 1 Tip: For the REMOTE FUNCTION parameter, you can also select P2-VTR1, P2-VTR2, or P2-VTR3 as a P2 protocol format. These three options are provided to support future P2 protocol supporting devices. Currently, they are identical to P2-DFLT. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Machine Control Function 243 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | MIDI/Host page appears. 1 4 Move the cursor to either the MMC button or P2 button in the MACHINE CONTROL section (1) to specify the remote control method, then press the [ENTER] button. In the MACHINE CONTROL section, you can also select the type of commands used on the Remote | Machine Control page. The MMC button selects MMC commands, and the P2 button select the P2 protocol. 5 If the MMC button is turned on, press the cursor [ ] button to move the cursor to the PORT parameter box, then rotate the Parameter wheel to select the MMC destination. The following ports and slots are available as the MMC destination. • MIDI ..............................MIDI port • USB ................................USB port • SLOT1............................Slot 1 with an MY8-mLAN (mLAN card) installed • REMOTE .......................REMOTE connector If USB is selected, move the cursor to the adjacent parameter box (on the right), and select one of eight ports. 6 Move the cursor to the DEVICE ID parameter box, then rotate the Parameter wheel to set the DM1000 MMC Device ID to the same ID number as the external device. MMC commands are effective on devices that use the same Device ID. Therefore, the DM1000’s MMC Device ID needs to match the ID of the devices you wish to control. 17 Remote Control DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 244 Chapter 17—Remote Control 7 To start remote control, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, then press the [F3] button to display the Remote | Machine page. 2 3 1 4 This page contains the following parameters: A LOCATE/TIME section • • • • This section enables you to set the locate points. LOCATE 1–8................. These buttons locate the positions (specified by the TIME values) on external machines. RTZ ................................ This Return To Zero button locates the zero timecode position on external machines. TIME.............................. Locate points are specified in hour/minute/second/frame format. CAPTURE..................... These buttons capture the current position on external machines and import the information into the TIME column. B TRACK ARMING section This section controls the tracks on external machines. • 1–24 buttons................. These buttons turn external tracks 1–24 on or off, and set or cancel their Record Ready mode. • ALL CLEAR .................. Turning on this button switches all buttons (1–24) simultaneously. C TRANSPORT section • • • • • This section enables you to control the transport functions on external machines. REW............................... This button starts rewind on external machines. FF ................................... This button starts fast forward on external machines. STOP.............................. This button stops external machines. PLAY .............................. This button starts playback on external machines. REC................................ This button is used in conjunction with the PLAY button to start recording on external machines. D FRAMES This parameter selects the timecode frame rate. 8 To control the transport functions, move the cursor to the desired button in the TRANSPORT section, then press [ENTER]. 9 If you desire, move the cursor to the buttons and parameters in the LOCATE/TIME section and the TRACK ARMING section, then press the [ENTER] button or rotate the Parameter wheel to control the transport functions on external machines. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual MIDI 245 18 MIDI This chapter describes the DM1000’s MIDI-related functions. MIDI & the DM1000 Using Control Changes, Program Changes, and other MIDI messages enables you to recall Scenes and edit parameters on the DM1000, and store DM1000 internal data on external MIDI devices. The DM1000 supports the following MIDI messages. Each of these MIDI messages can be individually turned on or off for transmission and reception. • Program Changes If you assign the DM1000’s Scenes to Program Change numbers, the DM1000 transmits Program Changes when it recalls Scenes. Also, the DM1000 will switch Scenes when it receives Program Changes. • Control Changes If you assign the DM1000’s parameters to Control Change numbers, the DM1000 transmits the assigned Control Changes when the parameter values change. Also, the DM1000 changes certain parameter values when it receives the corresponding Control Changes. • System Exclusive Messages The DM1000 transmits System Exclusive Parameter Changes in real-time when the parameter values change. Also, the DM1000 notifies certain parameter values when it receives assigned Parameter Changes. • MTC (MIDI Timecode) The DM1000 uses MTC to synchronize Automix with a recorder or computer-based sequencer. • MIDI Clock The DM1000 uses MIDI Clock to synchronize Automix with a MIDI device that does not support MTC. • MMC (MIDI Machine Control) MMC is used for external machine control. • MIDI Note On/Off These messages are used to adjust the Freeze effect and Auto Pan 5.1. • Bulk Dump Messages These messages enable you to store the DM1000’s internal data to a sequencer or MIDI filer. When the DM1000 receives these messages, they overwrite the DM1000 data The DM1000 features the following interface for transmitting and receiving MIDI data. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual MIDI • MIDI IN & OUT ports These ports transmit and receive MIDI data to and from standard MIDI devices. Each port is a single port interface that transmits and receives single-port data (16 channels x 1 ports). 18 246 Chapter 18—MIDI • USB port This port is used to connect a computer and transfer MIDI messages. This is a multiport interface that transmits and receives up to eight-port data (16 channels x 8 ports). If you connect a computer to the USB port, you must install the appropriate driver software on the computer. See the Studio Manager Installation Guide for more information on installing drivers. Note: If the computer is turned on but the USB MIDI application has not been launched, DM1000 performance may be slow. In this case, cancel the assignment of the USB port as the MIDI message transmission port. • REMOTE connector This connector normally enables you to remotely control a Yamaha AD8HR/AD824 or a device that supports Sony P2 protocol, or to make a cascade connection with another DM1000. It also enables you to transfer MIDI messages. To transfer MIDI messages, you need to set the parameters in the GENERAL section on the Setup | MIDI/Host page to “MIDI” (see “Tx PORT”). Note that a connection between the REMOTE connector and a computer’s COMM port does not transfer MIDI messages. • SLOT 1 Instaling an optional “MY8-MLAN” mLAN card in Slot 1 enables the DM1000 to transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from the connected MIDI device. MIDI Port Setup Selecting a Port for MIDI Message Transfer To configure MIDI ports for MIDI message transfer, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | MIDI/Host page appears. This page enables you to set MIDI message input and output. 1 4 2 3 The following parameters are available on this page: A GENERAL section This section enables you to select ports that transmit and receive MIDI messages, such as Program Changes and Control Changes. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual MIDI Port Setup 247 • Rx PORT .......................This parameter specifies a port for general MIDI data reception. In the left parameter box, select MIDI, USB, SLOT1, or REMOTE. If you select USB, specify the port number in the right parameter box. • Tx PORT........................This parameter specifies a port for general MIDI data transmission. The available ports are the same as for the Rx PORT parameter. B MIDI THRU section These parameters enable you to route incoming MIDI data from one port to another without changes. Select a port for reception in the first parameter box, and select a port for transmission in the next parameter box (located to the right of the arrow). If you select USB, specify the port number in the small parameter box adjacent to the port parameter box. C MACHINE CONTROL section This section enables you to select a remote control method and a remote control port to control external devices, including hard disk recorders and video equipment. • TYPE..............................Specify a type (method) of remote control by turning on either the MMC (MIDI Machine Control) button or the P2 (Sony P2 protocol) button. • PORT .............................Select MIDI, USB, SLOT1, or REMOTE for MMC command transfer. If you select USB, specify the port number in the right parameter box. • DEVICE ID ...................Specify the DM1000’s MMC Device ID. MMC Device IDs identify connected devices, enabling recognition during MMC transmission and reception. D SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section • • • • • DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 18 MIDI This section enables you to specify ports for various special functions. Studio Manager............In the left parameter box, select MIDI, USB, SLOT1, or REMOTE as the port used by the included Studio Manager software. In the two small parameter boxes on the right, specify a port number (if you selected USB), and an ID number. DAW...............................Select USB or SLOT1 as a port for use with a DAW. If you select USB, specify in the right parameter box a port number pair (1-3, 2-4, 3-5, 4-6, 5-7, 6-8). REMOTE 1 ....................This parameter indicates the target currently selected for Remote Layer 1. If the target is set to “USER DEFINED,” you can select a MIDI message destination port. REMOTE 2 ....................This parameter indicates the target currently selected for Remote Layer 2. If the target is set to “USER DEFINED,” you can select a MIDI message destination port. CASCADE LINK ..........Select MIDI or REMOTE as a port for DM1000 cascade connection. The TRANSMIT and REQUEST buttons are used to synchronize all parameters that are cascade-linked. The TRANSMIT button synchronizes the connected DM1000’s parameters to your primary DM1000’s parameters. The REQUEST button synchronizes your DM1000 parameters to the connected DM1000’s parameters. 248 Chapter 18—MIDI Selecting MIDI Messages for Transmission and Reception You can select MIDI messages to be transmitted or received at a port specified in the GENERAL section on the Setup | MIDI/Host page (see page 246). To do so, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button repeatedly until the MIDI | Setup page appears. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Select MIDI channels for transmission and reception in the CHANNEL row, and turn the transmission and reception of each MIDI message on or off using the buttons in the parameter rows from PROGRAM CHANGE to OTHER COMMANDS. A CHANNEL This parameter row enables you to specify MIDI Channels for MIDI message transmission and reception. The following parameters are available in this row: • Tx ................................... This parameter box specifies a MIDI Transmit Channel. • Rx ................................... This parameter box specifies a MIDI Receive Channel. B PROGRAM CHANGE • • • • This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Program Changes. Tx ON/OFF................... Transmission of Program Change messages is enabled or disabled. Rx ON/OFF................... Reception of Program Change messages is enabled or disabled. OMNI ON/OFF............ When this button is turned on, Program Changes on all MIDI Channels are received regardless of the CHANNEL row settings. ECHO ON/OFF ........... This button determines whether Program Change messages received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port. C CONTROL CHANGE This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Control Changes. • Tx ON/OFF................... Transmission of Control Change messages is enabled or disabled. • Rx ON/OFF................... Reception of Control Change messages is enabled or disabled. • ECHO ON/OFF ........... This button determines whether Control Change messages received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port. D PARAMETER CHANGE This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Parameter Changes. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall 249 • Tx ON/OFF...................Transmission of Parameter Change messages is enabled or disabled. • Rx ON/OFF................... Reception of Parameter Change messages is enabled or disabled. • ECHO ON/OFF............This button determines whether Parameter Change messages received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port. E BULK This parameter row enables or disables reception of Bulk Dump data. • Rx ON/OFF...................Reception of Bulk Dump data is enabled or disabled. F OTHER COMMANDS • ECHO ON/OFF............This button determines whether other MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port. G Fader Resolution This parameter specifies the resolution of the value output when you operate the DM1000’s faders. To transfer fader value data between two cascaded DM1000s, or to record the DM1000 operation to or play it back from a sequencer, select the HIGH button. When the LOW button is selected, the fader resolution switches to 256 steps. Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall You can assign DM1000 Scenes to MIDI Program Changes for remote recall. When you recall a Scene on the DM1000, the unit transmits the assigned Program Change to the connected MIDI device. When the DM1000 receives a Program Change, the assigned Scene is recalled. Initially, Scenes 1 through 99 are assigned sequentially to Program Changes 1 through 99, and Scene #0 is assigned to Program Change #100, although you can change these assignments. Tip: You can store a Scene to Program Change assignment table to an external device by using MIDI Bulk Dump or included Studio Manager software. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports for transmission and reception of MIDI messages (see page 246). 2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the DM1000 can transfer MIDI messages to and from the external device. 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button, then press the [F2] button. The MIDI | Pgm Asgn page appears. 18 MIDI DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 250 Chapter 18—MIDI 4 Move the cursor to a parameter box in the PGM CHG column, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the Program Change numbers to which you want to assign Scenes. 5 Press the cursor button [ ] to move the cursor to a parameter box in the SCENE NO./TITLE column, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select Scenes. Tip: • If you assign a Scene to multiple Program Changes, the Program Change with the lowest number becomes effective. • You can initialize the Scene to Program Change assignment table by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then pressing [ENTER]. 6 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button repeatedly until the MIDI | Setup page appears, then specify the MIDI Transmit and Receive Channels. 7 Turn on the PROGRAM CHANGE Tx ON/OFF and Rx ON/OFF buttons. Now, when the DM1000 receives the Program Changes on the specified MIDI Channels, the corresponding Scenes are recalled. Also, when you switch Scenes on the DM1000, the DM1000 transmits the Program Changes on the specified MIDI Channels. Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control You can assign DM1000 parameters to MIDI Control Changes for real-time control. When the DM1000 receives a Control Change, the assigned DM1000 parameter is set accordingly. Also, when you adjust a parameter on the DM1000, the DM1000 transmits the assigned Control Change message. Tip: You can store a Parameter to Control Change assignment table to an external device by using MIDI Bulk Dump or included Studio Manager software. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports for transmission and reception of MIDI messages (see page 246). 2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the DM1000 can transfer MIDI messages to and from the external device. 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button, then press the [F3] button. The MIDI | Ctl Asgn page appears. This page enables you to assign DM1000 parameters to Control Changes. 1 Tip: See page 344 for more information on the default Parameter to Control Change assignments. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control 251 4 Move the cursor to the MODE parameter’s TABLE button (1), then press [ENTER]. The MODE parameter determines which MIDI messages are transmitted when DM1000 parameters are adjusted. The following options are available for the MODE parameter: • TABLE............................MIDI Control Change messages are transmitted in accordance with the assignments on this page. • NRPN.............................The assignments on the Ctl Asgn page are ignored, and predefined NRPNs (Non Registered Parameter Numbers) are transmitted for remote control. Tip: NRPNs are special MIDI messages that combine three different Control Changes. They enable you to control many parameters on a single MIDI Channel. 5 Move the cursor to a parameter box in the No. (CH) column, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the Control Changes to which you want to assign parameters. You can assign parameters to up to 16-channel Control Changes on the Ctl Asgn page, regardless of the MIDI Channels currently selected for transmission and reception. Skip Steps 5 and 6 if you turned on the NRPN button in Step 4. 6 Select parameters in the parameter boxes in the three PARAMETER columns. Select a parameter group in the parameter box in the first PARAMETER column, and specify the desired values in the parameter boxes in the second and third PARAMETER columns. The following parameters and values are available: HIGH NO ASSIGN MID LOW — — CHANNEL INPUT1–48 MASTER BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO AUX1 SEND AUX2 SEND AUX3 SEND FADER H AUX4 SEND AUX5 SEND INPUT1–48 AUX6 SEND AUX7 SEND AUX8 SEND BUS TO ST BUS1–8 CHANNEL INPUT1–48 MASTER BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO AUX1 SEND AUX2 SEND 18 AUX3 SEND FADER L AUX4 SEND MIDI AUX5 SEND INPUT1–48 AUX6 SEND AUX7 SEND AUX8 SEND BUS TO ST BUS1–8 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 252 Chapter 18—MIDI HIGH MID LOW CHANNEL INPUT1–48 MASTER BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO AUX1 SEND AUX2 SEND AUX3 SEND ON AUX4 SEND AUX5 SEND INPUT1–48 AUX6 SEND AUX7 SEND AUX8 SEND PHASE INSERT ON BUS TO ST BUS1–8 CHANNEL INPUT1–48 CHANNEL INPUT1–48 MASTER BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO AUX1 SEND AUX2 SEND AUX3 SEND PRE/POST AUX4 SEND AUX5 SEND INPUT1–48 AUX6 SEND AUX7 SEND AUX8 SEND ON TIME HIGH TIME MID IN DELAY TIME LOW MIX HIGH INPUT1–48 MIX LOW FB GAIN H FB GAIN L ON OUT DELAY TIME HIGH TIME MID TIME LOW DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO L, R Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control HIGH MID 253 LOW ON Q LOW F LOW G LOW H G LOW L Q LO-MID F LO-MID G LO-MID H G LO-MID L Q HI-MID EQ F HI-MID INPUT1–48/BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO G HI-MID H G HI-MID L Q HIGH F HIGH G HIGH H G HIGH L ATT H ATT L HPF ON LPF ON ON ATTACK THRESH H THRESH L GATE RANGE INPUT1–48 HOLD H HOLD L DECAY H DECAY L ON ATTACK THRESH H THRESH L COMP RELEASE H RELEASE L INPUT1–48/BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO RATIO GAIN H GAIN L KNEE CHANNEL AUX1–2 PAN AUX3–4 18 INPUT1–48 AUX5–6 BALANCE BUS TO ST BUS1–8 MASTER STEREO MIDI AUX7–8 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 254 Chapter 18—MIDI HIGH MID LOW LFE H LFE L DIV (F) DIV R SURROUND LR FR INPUT1–48 WIDTH DEPTH OFS LR OFS FR BYPASS MIX PARAM1 H EFFECT PARAM1 L EFFECT1–4 : PARAM32 H PARAM32 L Parameters that feature a setting range of more than 128 steps (such as Fader and Delay Time parameters) require two or more Control Change messages to specify the values. For example, if you wish to control Fader parameters on certain channels using Control Changes, you must assign the same channel to two Control Change numbers, and select “FADER H” and “FADER L” for the Control Changes in the parameter boxes in the first PARAMETER column. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control 255 If you wish to control Delay Time parameters on certain channels using Control Changes, you must assign the same channel Delay parameter to three Control Change numbers, and select “TIME LOW,” “TIME MID,” and “TIME HIGH” for the Control Changes in the parameter boxes in the second (middle) PARAMETER column. Note: Parameters that feature a setting range in excess of 128 steps require an appropriate combination of range parameters for successful MIDI Control Change. Tip: You can initialize the Parameter to Control Change assignment table by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then pressing [ENTER]. 7 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button repeatedly until the MIDI | Setup page appears, then specify MIDI Transmit and Receive Channels. 8 Turn on the CONTROL CHANGE Tx ON/OFF and Rx ON/OFF buttons. DM1000 parameters will now be set accordingly when the DM1000 receives corresponding Control Changes. Also, when you adjust parameters on the DM1000, the DM1000 will transmit corresponding Control Changes. Note: Before controlling parameters using Control Changes, make sure that both Tx and Rx ON/OFF buttons in the PARAMETER CHANGE row are turned off. 18 MIDI DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 256 Chapter 18—MIDI Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes You can control DM1000 parameters in real time by using Parameter Change messages that are System Exclusive messages, instead of using MIDI Control Changes. See “MIDI Data Format” at the end of this Manual for detailed information on available Parameter Changes. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports for transmission and reception of MIDI messages (see page 246). 2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the DM1000 can transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from the external device. 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button repeatedly until the MIDI | Setup page appears, then turn off the Tx and Rx ON/OFF buttons in the PARAMETER CHANGE row. The DM1000 will now set certain parameter values when it receives corresponding Parameter Changes. Also, when you adjust certain parameters on the DM1000, it transmits corresponding Parameter Changes. Note: When you control paramters using Parameter Changes, make sure that both buttons in the CONTROL CHANGE section on the MIDI | SETUP page are turned off. Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI (Bulk Dump) You can back up data stored in the DM1000, such as libraries and Scenes, to an external MIDI device by using MIDI Bulk Dump. In this way, you can later restore previous DM1000 settings by transmitting this MIDI data back to the DM1000. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports for transmission and reception of MIDI messages (see page 246). 2 Make connections using the ports selected in Step 1 so that the DM1000 can transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from the external device. 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button, then press the [F4] button. Note: Some of the data transmitted from the DM1000 to the sequence software may occasionally drop out during Bulk Dump transmission. To avoid this, we recommend that you use the included Studio Manager software to store DM1000 data to an external device. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI (Bulk Dump) 257 The MIDI | Bulk page appears. 2 3 1 4 The page includes the following parameters: A CATEGORY section This section enables you to select data for transmission and reception. B REQUEST Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to transmit messages from the DM1000 that request a second DM1000 (connected to the first DM1000) to transmit the data specified in the CATEGORY section. This button is used primarily when two DM1000s are connected in cascade. C TRANSMIT Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to transmit data specified in the CATEGORY section to an external MIDI device. D INTERVAL This parameter specifies the interval between data packets during bulk transmission in 50 millisecond steps. If the external device drops part of the bulk data, increase this parameter value. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 18 MIDI 4 In the CATEGORY section, move the cursor to the button of the data type you want to transmit, then press [ENTER]. The following options are available: • ALL.................................This button selects all data available for bulk dump. When this button is turned on, all other buttons in this section are turned off. • SCENEMEM .................This button selects Scene memories. You can select Scenes you wish to transmit in the parameter box next to the button. • AUTOMIX ....................This button selects Automix memories. You can select Automixes you wish to transmit in the parameter box next to the button. • LIBRARY.......................This button selects libraries. You can select the type of library in the TYPE parameter box (next to the button), then specify the library number in the parameter box on the right. • BANK.............................This parameter enables you to select the User Defined Key banks (KEYS UDEF), User Defined Remote Layer banks (RMT UDEF), or User Assignable Layer banks (USR LAYER) for bulk dump. You can select one of these three types in the parameter box next to the button, and select the banks in the parameter box on the right. 258 Chapter 18—MIDI • SETUPMEM ................. This button selects the DM1000 setup data (i.e., system settings). • PGM TABLE ................. This button selects the MIDI | Pgm Asgn page settings. • CTL TABLE................... This button selects the MIDI | Ctl Asgn page settings. • PLUG-IN....................... This button selects the settings of any optional Y56K cards installed in Slot #1 or #2. You can select Y56K card programs in the parameter box next to the button. Note: Data selected by the SETUPMEM button includes MIDI transmission and reception port settings and message settings. After you store to an external device bulk dump data that has its reception disabled, if the DM1000 later starts to receive this particular data, DM1000 bulk dump reception will be turned off immediately, and the DM1000 will be unable to receive subsequent data. Therefore, before you store the data selected by the SETUPMEM button using Bulk Dump, be sure to enable bulk data transmission and reception. 5 If necessary, move the cursor to the parameter box next to the selected button, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the desired bulk dump data. Tip: If you selected [ALL] in the parameter box, all data selected by the corresponding button is transmitted as bulk dump data. 6 To start transmitting bulk data, move the cursor to the TRANSMIT button, then press [ENTER]. Bulk Dump is executed. During the operation, the Bulk Dump window appears, indicating the current bulk dump status. To abort the bulk dump operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL button in the window, then press [ENTER]. Tip: To transmit bulk dump request messages, move the cursor to the REQUEST button, then press [ENTER]. If a second DM1000 is connected, it will transmit bulk data to the first DM1000 in response to the request. 7 To receive bulk data, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button repeatedly until the MIDI | Setup page appears, then turn on the Rx ON/OFF button in the BULK row. Now, when the DM1000 receives bulk data, the corresponding internal data is updated. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Controlling the DM1000 from a Video Editor 259 19 Controlling the DM1000 from a Video Editor This chapter describes the control functions, which enable you to control the DM1000 from a video editor using the ESAM protocol. About ESAM ESAM (Editing Suite Audio Mixers) is the post-production standards for linking video editor to a mixing console. You can automate audio crossfade and switching operations that are linked to video editing operations. The DM1000 supports the ESAM Serial II Protocol (ESAM II) - Extended. For supported commands, see page 264. Connection Example The following diagram illustrates an example of connecting a video editor and a VTR via the DM1000. You need a dedicated cable to connect the DM1000’s REMOTE connector to the video editor (page 264). For more information on the basic connections and setup, refer to chapter 4 “Connections and Setup” on page 43. Remote (D-sub 9-pin) Video switcher VTR1 (REC) VTR2 VTR3 AES/EBU ESAM II (D-sub 9-pin) Digital I/O card MY16-AE or MY8-AE REMOTE Video editor 2 1 +48V OFF OFF +48V ON OFF 5 4 3 +48V ON +48V ON 6 +48V OFF ON OFF 7 +48V ON 8 +48V OFF ON OFF 9 +48V ON OFF 10 +48V ON OFF 11 +48V ON OFF 12 +48V ON OFF 13 +48V ON OFF 14 +48V ON OFF OFF 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 16 15 +48V ON 1 +48V ON OFF +48V ON OFF ON PAD -60 -16 -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL -60 -16 GAIN PEAK SIGNAL 0 -60 -16 GAIN 0 10 TALKBACK LEVEL PEAK SIGNAL 10 PHONES LEVEL GAIN PEAK SIGNAL PHONES SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING DISPLAY ACCESS AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW -2 EFFECT SCENE AUXSELECT DISPLAY AUX1 AUX2 AUX5 AUX3 AUX6 AUX4 AUX7 2 3 4 5 6 -8 -10 -10 -12 -12 -14 -14 -18 -18 -24 -24 -30 -30 -36 -36 -42 -42 -48 -48 -56 -56 -72 -72 L R FREQUENCY 7 8 STEREO DIRECT SOLO CLEAR 2TR D1 2TR D2 LOW MID SLOT BUS DIMMER TALKBACK LOW STEREO 0 10 MONITOR LEVEL GAIN INC DEC GRAB AUX8 ENCODER MODE HIGH HIGH MID Q -6 -6 -8 PAN/ SURROUND DYNAMICS 1 -4 -4 OUTPUT PATCH DISPLAY DISPLAY OVER 0 OVER 0 -2 INPUT PATCH / PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY MONITOR EQUALIZER DISPLAY SCENE MEMORY FADER MODE DISPLAY FADER STORE RECALL AUX PAN AUX ASSIGN F1 F2 F4 F3 ENTER SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL AUTO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SEL ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ON USER DEFINED KEYS +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 0 DISPLAY 5 5 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 5 15 5 5 5 0 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 5 15 5 5 5 0 5 0 10 5 15 5 0 10 5 15 10 15 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 20 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 30 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 40 30 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 50 60 70 60 40 50 1 17 33 AUX 1 2 18 34 AUX 2 3 19 35 AUX 3 4 20 36 AUX 4 5 21 37 AUX 5 6 22 38 AUX 6 7 23 39 AUX 7 8 24 40 AUX 8 9 25 41 BUS 1 10 26 11 42 BUS 2 27 43 BUS 3 12 28 44 BUS 4 13 29 45 BUS 5 14 30 46 BUS 6 70 15 31 47 BUS 7 16 32 48 BUS 8 STEREO DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Controlling the DM1000 from a Video Editor Note: • Use control room monitoring (page 119) to monitor the signals. First, set the OMNI OUT connectors' signal routing to “CR-L/CR-R” using the Output Patch | Omni Out page (page 113). • The maximum output level of the OMNI OUT connectors is +24 dB. If you are connecting a device with the maximum input level of +18 dB to an OMNI OUT connector, attenuate the output signal using the attenuators (page 90). 19 260 Chapter 19—Controlling the DM1000 from a Video Editor Tip: • It is useful to combine Input Channels from VTR1-3 and Output Channels (Bus Outs) to VTR1 (REC) on the same layer. For more information, refer to “Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels (User Assignable Layer)” on page 272. • Save the DM1000 Channel settings and Input and Output patches in scene memories (page 163) and Input/Output Patch libraries (page 176, 177). • Use the Operation Lock function to prevent the DM1000 settings from being modified accidentally (page 280). Crossfade via ESAM Commands This section describes how to execute a crossfade (transition) using the DM1000’s ESAM mode. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | Remote page appears. 2 Move the cursor to the REMOTE FUNCTION parameter, then select ESAM to enter ESAM mode. A confirmation message appears. Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER] to confirm. Note: You cannot switch to ESAM mode during Automix recording or playback. Note: When the DM1000 enters ESAM mode, various settings will change as follows: • The Solo function will be enabled (page 120). • The Solo function’s MODE will be set to RECORDING (page 120). • The Solo function’s LISTEN will be set to AFTER PAN (page 120). • The Solo function’s SEL MODE will be set to MIX SOLO (page 120). • The Automix function will be disabled (page 190). • The Fader Group Master will be disabled (page 150). Note: In ESAM mode, the Fade Time setting for Scene Recall is temporarily disabled (page 168). 3 Move the cursor to EVEN, ODD, or NONE in the ESAM PARITY section, then press [ENTER] to set the Parity Flag for the REMOTE connector. Set the Parity Flag appropriate for your video editor. Normally, set this parameter to EVEN. However, for some video editors, such as the Ampex ACE200, select ODD. Note: If the Parity Flag is not set correctly and the video editor transmits the ESAM commands, an error message “REMOTE Parity Error” appears on the display. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Crossfade via ESAM Commands 261 4 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | Time Ref page appears. 5 Move the cursor to the FRAMES parameter, then select the desired frame rate. The Transition Time transmitted from a video editor is expressed in frames. Match the frame rate. 6 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button repeatedly until the Remote | ESAM 1-32 page or ESAM 33-48 page appears. 7 Assign Input Channels 1-48 to Machines A-H. (Specify which machine is connected to which channel.) To add or delete machines to or from Input Channels, move the cursor to a desired machine (A-H), then press the channel [SEL] button. You cannot assign a channel to multiple machines. Note: These settings are effective only when the DM1000 receives Machine commands. If the DM1000 receives Source commands that control individual channels, the settings will be ignored. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 19 Controlling the DM1000 from a Video Editor 8 Move the cursor to the REC column, then press [ENTER] to select one REC machine from Machines A-H. The REC machine selected here will be used to specify a REC machine via the ESAM command. You cannot specify multiple REC machines. 262 Chapter 19—Controlling the DM1000 from a Video Editor 9 Move the cursor to the MOTOR button, then press [ENTER] to turn the motor faders on or off. When the MOTOR button is turned off, the motor faders will not move even when the DM1000 receives the ESAM commands. (However, the fader levels will change.) Note: When the MOTOR button is turned off, the physical position of the faders will not correspond to the actual fader levels. In this case, touch a fader or turn the MOTOR button on to match the fader position and level. 10 Set each channel routing on the Routing page (page 71). Use BUS 1–8 as sends to the REC machine. The routing settings will differ as follows depending on whether you use pre-read (page 263). - When not using pre-read On the PLAY machine, turn on channel routing assignments to the BUS 1–8 to which you want to send audio signals, and turn off assignments to the stereo bus. On the REC machine, turn on channel routing assignments to the stereo bus. Turn off assignments to BUS 1–8. - When using pre-read For the routing settings of the PLAY machine and the REC machine, turn on assignments of the audio signals to the BUS 1–8 to which you want to send audio signals. Turn on assignments to the stereo bus if you want to use the stereo bus to monitor the input signals from the machine. Note: If your video editor does not transmit commands for monitoring, you will need to make routing settings for the channels being monitored so that the assignment to the stereo bus is turned on. 11 Press the [AUTO] button to turn on the button indicator so that each channel [SEL] button will reflect the corresponding ESAM fader on/off status. AUTO SEL 12 Press the channel [SEL] buttons to turn on or off the corresponding Input Channel ESAM fader. Repeatedly pressing a [SEL] button toggles the corresponding ESAM fader on and off. When an ESAM fader is turned off, the ESAM command for the corresponding channel fader level will be ignored. SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL When an ESAM fader is turned on, the [SEL] button status changes depending on the channel status, as follows: • Off .................................. ESAM fader is off. • Lights up red ................ ESAM fader (FROM channel) is on. • Flashes red.................... ESAM fader (TO channel) is on. • Lights up green ............ ESAM fader (non-FROM/TO channel) is on. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Crossfade via ESAM Commands 263 13 Set the pre-crossfade FROM machine level (the fader’s initial value) and the post-crossfade TO machine level (the fader’s target value). Set the stereo fader to 0 dB. If you’re not using pre-read, you’ll need to set the channel fader of the REC machine to 0 dB in order to monitor the return from the REC machine. - Setting the FROM machine level Use the fader to adjust the level of the FROM machine channel. When a video editor transmits the ESAM command, the channel will be set as the FROM machine. At this time, the fader level will be used as the initial value of the crossfade. The target value is fixed at –∞. - Setting the TO machine level Use the fader to adjust the level of the TO machine channel. When a video editor transmits the ESAM command, the channel will be set as the TO machine. At this time, the fader level will be used as the target value of the crossfade. The initial value is fixed at –∞. 14 Set the delay for each Input Channel, if necessary. For more information, see page 63. 15 Send the ESAM command from the video editor to execute the crossfade (transition). If you touch a fader during the crossfade operation, the corresponding channel will stop the crossfade operation and you will be able to control the fader manually. Tip: If you save the DM1000 setup settings in a scene memory, you can quickly restore the setting later. For more information on scene memories, refer to chapter 14 “Scene Memories” on page 163. Pre-read Operation Pre-read is an editing operation performed on a single device that is used as a PLAY and REC machine. It requires a special VTR that supports the pre-read operations. To perform the pre-read operation, you must send playback signals from the REC machine to Bus 1-8. Do not send the playback signal to Bus 1-8 unless you perform the pre-read operation. Otherwise, the signal will loop. If you plan to occasionally perform the pre-read operation, store two different routing settings in scene memories so that you can recall either scene anytime. 19 Controlling the DM1000 from a Video Editor DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 264 Chapter 19—Controlling the DM1000 from a Video Editor Video Editors with confirmed compatibility As of June 2004, we have confirmed that this system operates correctly with the following video editors. • Sony BVE2000, 9100 • Accom Axial 2010, 2020, 3000 • Ampex ACE200 • Panasonic AG A850 For the most recent information, check the following website. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ Supported Commands All commands are Write commands that will be used to change the status of the DM1000 from the connected video editor. No. Command Hexadecimal 1 All Stop A0 2 Transition Duration A7 3 Transition Start A9 4 Monitor Mode AA 5 FROM Machine B4 6 TO Machine B5 7 Monitor Machine B6 8 Swap Machine C0 9 FROM Source A1 10 TO Source A3 11 Monitor Source A5 12 FROM Source (Multi-channel) BC 13 TO Source (Multi-channel) BD 14 Monitor Source (Multi-channel) BE 15 Transition Duration (Multi-channel) BF Remote Connector Pin Assignment You need the following dedicated cable to connect the DM1000’s Remote connector to a video editor. - Remote connector’s pin assignment Pin # Connector on a video editor 12345 6789 Remote connector on the DM1000 1 Ground Ground 2 Receive A Receive A (*) 3 Transmit B Transmit B (*) 4 Ground Ground 5 Spare Spare 6 Ground Ground 7 Receive B Receive B (*) 8 Transmit A Transmit A (*) 9 Ground Ground * On the dedicated cable, 2 and 8, and 3 and 7 should be crossed. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Other Functions 265 20 Other Functions This chapter describes the DM1000’s miscellaneous functions. Changing the Input and Output Connector Names You can change the default name of the input and output connectors, if you desire. Changing the Input Connector Names 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | In Port page appears. 3 1 2 You can specify Short names in the parameter boxes (1) in the center column, and Long names in the parameter boxes (2) in the right column. 2 Use the Parameter wheel to select a port for which you want to change the name. 3 Move the cursor to a name you want to change, then press [ENTER]. The Title Edit window appears, which enables you to edit the name. 4 Edit the name, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER]. The new name is now effective. When the Name Input Auto Copy check box (3) is on, the first four characters of a newly-entered Long name are automatically copied to the Short name. You can reset all port names to their default names by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then pressing [ENTER]. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Other Functions Tip: The edited name is stored in the Input Patch library. 20 266 Chapter 20—Other Functions Changing the Output Connector Names To change output connector names, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | Out Port page appears. The procedure for editing the names and using the Name Output Auto Copy check box and the INITIALIZE button is the same as on the In Port page. Setting Preferences You can change the default settings and environmental settings of the DM1000 by using the Setup | Prefer1, Prefer2, and Prefer3 pages. To locate one of the Preferences page, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly. Prefer1 page This page enables you to set the DM1000 so that when you press a button on the top panel, the DM1000 displays the corresponding display page, and shows or hides confirmation and alarm messages. This page contains the following parameters. (These parameters are explained in the order from the top of the left column to the bottom of the right column.) • Auto ROUTING Display If this check box is on, the Routing pages appear automatically when you press a routing-related button in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Setting Preferences 267 • Auto PAN/SURROUND Display If this check box is on, the Pan/Surr pages appear automatically when you operate the Joystick in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. If you want to use the Joystick to adjust the pan setting, turn on this check box. In Stereo Surround mode, operating the Joystick enables you to adjust the Pan setting. Otherwise, it enables you to adjust the Surround Pan settings. • Auto EQUALIZER Display If this check box is on, the EQ | EQ Edit page appears automatically when you press an EQ-related button in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. • Auto SOLO Display If this check box is on, the Monitor | Solo C-R page appears automatically when you solo an Input Channel. • Auto WORD CLOCK Display If this check box is on, the DIO | Word Clock page appears automatically if the currently-selected external wordclock source fails. • Auto Channel Select If this check box is on, you can select a channel by moving the corresponding fader or Encoder, or by turning on the corresponding channel [SOLO], [ON], or [AUTO] button. • Store Confirmation If this check box is on, the Title Edit window to input a Scene or library memory name appears when you store a Scene or library memory. • Recall Confirmation If this check box is on, a confirmation window appears when you recall a Scene or library memory. • Patch Confirmation If this check box is on, a confirmation message appears when you edit the Input and Output Patches. • Pair Confirmation If this check box is on, the confirmation message appears when you create or cancel a pair. • Nominal Pan If this check box is checked, and when Input Channel signals are panned hard left or hard right, the signals on the left/odd channels and right/even channels will be at the nominal level. If this check box is not checked, these signals will be boosted by 3 dB. (When the signals are panned to center, they will be at the nominal level.) In Surround mode, the same thing applies when any Surroound pan channel is panned hard left or right. • Fast Meter Fall Time If this check box is on, the level meters fall more quickly. • TC Drop Warning If this check box is on, a warning message appears if a dropout is detected in the incoming timecode. • DIO Warning If this check box is on, a warning message appears when any errors are detected in digital audio signals received at the Slot 1 or 2, or 2TR Digital Inputs. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Other Functions • MIDI Warning If this check box is on, a warning message appears when any errors are detected in the incoming MIDI messages. 20 268 Chapter 20—Other Functions • Initial Data Nominal If this check box is on, Input Channel faders are set to nominal (0 dB) when you recall Scene #0. • Meter Follow Layer If this check box is on, a connected optional MB1000 Meter Bridge automatically track a layer selection made in the LAYER section on the DM1000. • Scene MEM Auto Update If this check box is on, you can use the Scene Memory Auto Update function (see page 167). • Joystick Auto Grab If this check box is on, the [GRAB] button is automatically enabled and the Joystick is engaged in as the surround pan control when you move the Joystick pointer to the current surround pan position. • Cascade COMM Link If this check box is on, various functions and parameters are linked between cascaded DM1000s (See page 282 for more information on cascade connection). When the check box is off, only the Solo function is linked. • Auto Direct Out On If this check box is on and you change the channel Direct Out destination from “–” to any other output, the channel Direct Out is automatically enabled. If you change the channel Direct Out destination from an output to “–,” the channel Direct Out is automatically disabled. • Routing ST Pair Link When this check box is checked, paired channels’ routing to the Stereo Bus will be linked. Prefer2 page The Prefer2 page enables you to name the channel indicated on the display, and adjust the display brightness. 1 2 3 4 5 This page contains the following parameters: A Channel ID/Channel This parameter selects a style for displayed channel. If the Channel ID check box is selected, the Channel ID appears (e.g., CH1, BUS1). If the Channel Short Name check box is on, the Channel Short name appears (see page 265). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Setting Preferences 269 B Port ID/PORT This parameter selects a format for the port name displayed on the pages. When the Port ID check box is on, the Port ID (such as AD1 or OMN10) appears. When the Port Short Name check box is on, the Short Port name appears (see page 266). C Channel Copy Parameter • • • • • • • • This parameter selects the channel parameters to be copied when you assign the Channel Copy function to one of the User Defined buttons (see page 274). You can select multiple options. ALL.................................This button selects all parameters that can be copied. When you turn on this button, all other options are cancelled. FADER...........................Copies the fader values. ON..................................Copies the on/off status of the [ON] buttons. PAN ................................Copies the pan settings. SURR .............................Copies the surround pan settings. AUX................................Copies the Aux Send levels. AUX ON ........................Copies the on/off status of the Channel to Aux signals. EQ...................................Copies the EQ parameter values. D Fader Touch Sense • • • • These parameters control the Touch Sense function. ENABLED/DISABLED ..This button enables or disables the Touch Sense function. CONTROL ....................If this button is turned on and the touch sensors are not triggered, fader operations is ignored. During Automix recording, you can perform “cut-in” style operations by touching a fader. When this button is off, the DM1000 always recognizes fader movements. SELECT .........................If this button is on, you can select channels using the Touch Sense function. Sensitivity .....................This parameter adjusts the touch sensitivity in the range of 01 to 10. E Display Brightness This parameter sets the brightness of the Scene Memory display and the LED indicators in the range of 1 through 4. 20 Other Functions DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 270 Chapter 20—Other Functions Prefer3 page This page enables you to set various Automix preferences. This page contains the following parameters. (These parameters are explained in the order from the top of the left column to the bottom of the right column). • Mix Update Confirmation If this check box is on, when Automix recording stops, a confirmation message appears asking if you want to update the current Automix with the latest edits. • Auto EQ Edit in If this check box is on, EQ settings are automatically punched into the Automix recording when you adjust an EQ control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. • Copy Initial Fader If this check box is on, the fader value recorded immediately before the specified IN point is copied to the specified TO point when you copy or move the Fader events. This eliminates fader position matching problems when no fader event exists at the specified TO point. • Auto Inc TC Capture If this check box is on, the Timecode Capture memory is incremented automatically each time a timecode address is captured on the Automix | Event Edit page (see page 211). • Link Capture & Locate Memory If this check box is on, the Capture memories on the Automix | Event Edit page are linked to the Locate memories. • Clear Edit Channel after REC If this check box is on, the previously-recorded channel events are automatically cleared when Automix recording (with Auto Rec on) stops. • Timecode Display Relative If this check box is on, the indicated timecode is offset based on the OFFSET parameter on the Main page. • Receive Full Frame Message If this check box is on, MTC full-frame messages, in addition to the usual quarter-frame messages, are recognized and Automix follows them. If this check box is off, only the usual quarter-frame messages are recognized. • Show Compact Size Automix data is compressed while recording. If this check box is on, the DM1000 displays the compressed size of the Automix. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Setting Preferences 271 • Automix Store Undo If this check box is on, you can undo the Automix Store & Clear functions. • Touch Sence Edit In ALL If this check box is on, all parameters that are turned on in the OVERWRITE section on the Automix | Main page will be punched in and out via the faders’ Touch Sense function. If this check box is off, only the faders selected in Fader mode will be punched in and out. • Drop Out Time This parameter sets an interval (in frames) between the interruption of incoming timecode and the stoppage of Automix recording or playback. • Lock Time This parameter sets the interval (in frames) allowed until the Automix locks to incoming timecode messages. If the sync operation is unstable, set this value higher. • Frame Jump Error This parameter sets the time interval (in frames) required by the DM1000 to recognize an error after incoming timecode messages jump. If the actual interval is shorter than the value specified by this parameter, the DM1000 continues the sync operation. If the frame jump causes the recording or playback to stop during the MTC sync operation, set the parameter value higher than the number of frames indicated in the error message. If you set the parameter to a higher value, adjust the Drop Out Time parameter value, if necessary. • Fader REC Accuracy This parameter sets the accuracy of recording faders over time to “Little,” “Some,” “More,” or “Most.” If you set the parameter to lower values, you will save Automix memory space. • Insert Time Link to Locate Memory This parameter selects Locate memories that are applied to the Insert IN/OUT parameters. 20 Other Functions DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 272 Chapter 20—Other Functions Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels (User Assignable Layer) If you set the Remote Layer target to “USER ASSIGNABLE,” you can create a custom layer by combining any DM1000 channels (excluding the Stereo Out). This custom layer is called “User Assignable layer.” You can use either Remote 1 or Remote 2 for a User Assignable layer. 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, then press the [F1] or [F2] button. The Remote | Remote1 or Remote2 page appears. 2 Set the TARGET parameter to USER ASSIGNABLE, then press [ENTER]. A confirmation window appears. 3 Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER]. The DM1000 displays the page shown below. 1 4 Select the channels you wish to assign to the User Assignable layer using the 1–16 parameter boxes (1). You can store up to four 16-channel setups in four banks by switching Banks 1–4 via the BANK 1–4 buttons. If you press[ENTER] before selecting the channels to assign, you will still be able to select the channels you wish to assign in the User CH Select window. Tip: You can reset the assignment to default by moving the cursor to the CLEAR button and pressing [ENTER]. 5 Use the LAYER [REMOTE 1] or [REMOTE 2] button to assign or recall the User Assignable layer. You can use the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons to control the assigned channels. Tip: If you connected an optional MB1000 Meter Bridge, its meters indicate the level of the channels currently-assigned to layer channels 1–16. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Using the Oscillator 273 Using the Oscillator The DM1000 features an Oscillator you can use for sound checks. Follow the steps below to use the Oscillator: 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] button, then press the [F1] button. The Utility | Oscillator page appears. 1 3 4 2 This page contains the following parameters: A OSCILLATOR ON This parameter button turns the Oscillator on or off. B WAVEFORM These parameter buttons select the Oscillator waveforms. C LEVEL section The parameter control in this section sets the Oscillator output level. D ASSIGN section The buttons in this section select the Oscillator output. 2 Move the cursor to the button for the Oscillator output channel in the ASSIGN section, then press [ENTER] (you can select multiple channels). 3 Move the cursor to one of the WAVEFORM parameter buttons, then press [ENTER]. You can select the following waveforms: • SINE 100Hz ..................100 Hz sinewave • SINE 1kHz ....................1 kHz sinewave • SINE 10kHz ..................10 kHz sinewave • 1kHz/400Hz..................Sinewave with different frequency output to L, R, and odd/even buses • PINK NOISE.................Pink noise • BURST NOISE .............Burst noise (200 msec pink noise pulses at four second intervals) Note: Sinewave and pink noise create unusually high sound pressure. Oscillator levels that are too high can damage the speakers. When you use the Oscillator, be sure to set the level to minimum, then raise the level gradually. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 20 Other Functions 4 Move the cursor to the parameter control in the LEVEL section, then rotate the Parameter wheel to set the Oscillator level to minimum. 274 Chapter 20—Other Functions 5 Move the cursor to the OSCILLATOR ON/OFF button, then press the [ENTER] or [INC]/[DEC] buttons to turn on the Oscillator. The Oscillator signal is now routed to the channels selected in the ASSIGN section. 6 Move the cursor to the parameter control in the LEVEL section, then rotate the Parameter wheel to raise the Oscillator level. You can view the current Oscillator level on the LEVEL meter. Using the User Defined Keys USER DEFINED KEYS DISPLAY You can assign any of more than 200 functions to the USER DEFINED KEYS [1]–[12]. If you assign to one of the buttons (or “keys”) a function that is usually executed on the display pages, you can use the assigned button as a shortcut. The Function to User Defined Keys assignments are stored in banks. (See page 295 for more information on the initial bank settings.) The DM1000 provides eight banks (Banks A–H). Switching banks enables you to change the assignment quickly. Follow the steps below to assign functions to the USER DEFINED KEYS. 1 Press the USER DEFINED KEYS [DISPLAY] button to locate the User Def | User Def page. 1 3 2 4 This page contains the following parameters: A INITIALIZE This button resets the contents of all banks to their initial settings. B BANK These buttons select the desired banks. C TITILE This parameter displays the name of the bank selected by the BANK parameter button. Move the cursor to the TITLE parameter box, then press [ENTER]. The Title Edit window appears, enabling you to enter a name. D 1–12 These parameter boxes enable you to assign functions to USER DEFINED KEYS [1]–[12]. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Using the User Defined Keys 275 2 Move the cursor to the desired BANK parameter button, then press [ENTER]. The corresponding bank is selected, and the functions assigned to the User Defined buttons in that bank are displayed in the 1–12 parameter boxes. Tip: When you select a function that is executed based on specified numbers (for example, a function that recalls a specific Scene or library memory or transmits MIDI messages), an extra parameter box appears on the right, in which you must specify the number. 3 Move the cursor to one of the 1–12 parameter boxes, then press [ENTER]. The DM1000 displays the User Define Select window, which enables you to assign functions to the selected buttons. 4 Move the cursor to the left column, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select a function you wish to assign. A function is selected when it appears inside the dotted box. See page 293 for a complete list of assignable functions. 5 In the same way, set the center and right column. The items that appear in the center and right columns vary depending on the function selected in Step 4. 6 To close the window, move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER]. When the window closes, the specified function is assigned to the selected User Defined button. To cancel the assignment, move the cursor to the CANCEL button, then press [ENTER]. 7 If you assigned functions that require numbers (such as recalling a Scene or library memory), move the cursor to the extra parameter box shown on the right and specify the number. Tip: • You can store User Defined Keys banks to a computer hard disk using the included Studio Manager software. Be sure to back up important data. • You can also store the assignment data to an external device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 256). 20 Other Functions DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 276 Chapter 20—Other Functions Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) The DM1000’s CONTROL port provides a GPI (General Purpose Interface) for controlling external equipment. You can configure the GPI so that it will output 8-channel trigger signals when you operate the faders or USER DEFINED KEYS, or so that it will receive 4-channel trigger signals to control the DM1000 parameters. You can assign functions to these trigger signals. In this way, for example, you can control a “RECORDING” warning light outside a studio from the DM1000, or you can control the DM1000’s Talkback function or Dimmer function using an outside switch. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 2 3 This is an example of the external circuit that operates GPI. In this example, a trigger signal causes the LEDs to light up when the button is selected as the trigger signal polarity in the OUTPUT section. A trigger signal causes the LEDs to turn off when the button is selected as the trigger signal polarity. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 GPO0 13 9 GPO1 1 21 GPO4 9 14 9 GPO5 3 21 GPI0 22 GPO2 10 2 21 15 GPO6 16 9 GPO7 4 21 17 GPI2 GPI1 5 GPO3 6 23 GPI3 5 11 6 1 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | GPI page appears. 1 2 A INPUT section This section enables you to select functions that will be controlled via trigger signals 1–4 input at the CONTROL port. Assignable functions are listed in the area below this section. B OUTPUT section This section enables you to select the sources that will output trigger signals 1–8. Selectable sources are listed in the area below this section. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) 277 2 To assign functions to the incoming trigger signals, move the cursor to one of four trigger signal parameters 1–4 in the INPUT section. 3 Rotate the Parameter wheel to select the desired function from the list below the INPUT section, then press [ENTER] to confirm the selection. 4 Select one of two buttons located to the right of trigger signal parameters 1–4 to specify how the incoming trigger signals will be detected. • .......... When the switch is grounded (Low), the trigger signal is active and the selected parameter changes. • .......... When the GPI Input goes High (open), the trigger signal is active and the selected parameter changes. Trigger = Input signals from the CONTROL port Executes the function. Executes the function. Trigger = Input signals from the CONTROL port Executes the function. Executes the function. At this point, when the DM1000 receives the trigger signal at the CONTROL port, the selected parameter changes. Tip: Refer to the next page for a complete list of assignable parameters. 5 To select parameters or controls as the trigger signal sources, move the cursor to the OUTPUT section and select the desired trigger signal parameters 1–8 in the same way as for the INPUT section. 6 Use the buttons located to the right of the trigger signal (1–8) parameters to switch the polarity of the trigger signals that are output when you control the trigger sources. • .......... The GPI Output goes High (open) when the trigger signal source is active. • .......... The GPI Output goes Low (ground) when the trigger signal source is active. 20 Other Functions DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 278 Chapter 20—Other Functions Trigger signal polarity = Output signals from the CONTROL port Trigger signal polarity = Output signals from the CONTROL port At this time, the trigger signal is output from the CONTROL port when you operate the assigned parameters or controls. Tip: Refer to the next page for a complete list of assignable parameters and controls. ■ Parameters available in the INPUT section No Assign TALKBACK DIMMER AUX1 ON : AUX8 ON BUS ST ON SLOT CH1 ON UNLATCH STEREO : 2TRD1 CH48 ON UNLATCH 2TRD2 BUS1 ON UNLATCH TALKBACK UNLATCH : DIMMER UNLATCH BUS8 ON UNLATCH BUS UNLATCH AUX1 ON UNLATCH SLOT UNLATCH : STEREO UNLATCH AUX8 ON UNLATCH 2TRD1 UNLATCH ST ON UNLATCH 2TRD2 UNLATCH UDEF1 CH1 ON : : UDEF12 CH48 ON BUS1 ON : BUS8 ON • TALKBACK/DIMMER .......................Same as the MONITOR [TALKBACK] and [DIMMER] button functions. • BUS/SLOT ............................................Same as the MONITOR [BUS] and [SLOT] button functions. • STEREO/2TRD1/2TRD2....................Same as the MONITOR [STEREO], [2TRD1], and [2TRD2] button functions. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) 279 • xxx UNLATCH .............The assigned button function is enabled only while the incoming trigger signal is active. • xxx ON...........................The corresponding channels are turned on or off each time the incoming trigger signal becomes active. • xxx ON UNLATCH......The corresponding channels are turned on only while the incoming trigger signal is active. • UDEFxxx.......................Same as the corresponding User Defined buttons. ■ Trigger sources available in the OUTPUT section No Assign ST FADER OFF CH1 FADER ON CH1 FADER TALLY : : CH48 FADER ON CH48 FADER TALLY BUS1 FADER ON BUS1 FADER TALLY : : BUS8 FADER ON BUS8 FADER TALLY AUX1 FADER ON AUX1 FADER TALLY : AUX8 FADER ON : AUX8 FADER TALLY ST FADER ON ST FADER TALLY CH1 FADER OFF UDEF1 LATCH : : CH48 FADER OFF UDEF12 LATCH BUS1 FADER OFF UDEF1 UNLATCH : : BUS8 FADER OFF UDEF12 UNLATCH AUX1 FADER OFF REC LAMP : POWER ON AUX8 FADER OFF • xxx FADER ON ............The trigger signal is transmitted when you raise a fader from –∞. • xxx FADER OFF...........The trigger signal is transmitted when you lower a fader to –∞. • xxx FADER TALLY.......The trigger signal is transmitted while a fader remains above –∞. • xxx LATCH ...................Pressing the corresponding button toggles the trigger signal on and off. • xxx UNLATCH .............The trigger signal is transmitted while you are pressing and holding down the corresponding button. • REC LAMP....................The trigger signal is transmitted while the transport section on the Remote | Machine Control page is in record mode. • POWER ON ..................The trigger signal is transmitted while the power to the DM1000 is on. 20 Other Functions DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 280 Chapter 20—Other Functions Using Operation Lock The DM1000 features an Operation Lock function that prevents unintentional edits and restricts access to panel operation with a password. To use the Operation Lock function, press the [UTILITY] button, then the [F4] button to display the Utility | Lock page. 1 2 3 This page contains the following parameters: A OPERATION LOCK This button enables or cancels Operation Lock. When you turn on this button, the Password window appears. Enter a four-letter password using the Channel 1–10 [SEL] buttons (Channel 10 [SEL] button enters “0”). (The password characters are represented by asterisks.) Move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER] to enable Operation Lock. The factory default password is “1234.” To cancel Operation Lock, press [ENTER]. The Password window appears again. Enter the password and select the OK button. Operation Lock is cancelled. Note: If you forget the password, you cannot cancel Operation Lock. Be sure to write down the password. B OPERATION LOCK SAFE section This section enables you to select certain controls on the panel to exclude from Operation Lock. To cancel all “safe” buttons simultaneously, move the cursor to the CLEAR ALL button, then press [ENTER]. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Using Operation Lock 281 C PASSWORD This button enables you to change the current password. Move the cursor to the PASSWORD button, then press [ENTER]. The Set Password window appears, enabling you to change the password. Enter the current password in the PASSWORD field, and a new password in the NEW PASSWORD field. The factory default password is “1234.” Enter the new password again in the REENTRY field located below the NEW PASSWORD field. Move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER] to change the password. Tip: To clear the registered password, move the cursor to the CLEAR button, then press [ENTER]. If you forget the password, initialize the password setting (see page 289). 20 Other Functions DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 282 Chapter 20—Other Functions Cascading Consoles The DM1000 features a Cascade Bus that enables cascade connection. You can connect two DM1000s in cascade using the digital inputs and outputs, or the OMNI IN and OMNI OUT connectors. In this way, two consoles work just like one big console, integrating each unit’s Buses 1–8, Aux Sends 1–8, Stereo Bus, and Solo Bus. The following DM1000 functions are linked via the cascade connection. To link functions and parameters (excluding the Solo function), turn on the Cascade COMM Link check box on the Setup | Prefer1 page (see page 266). • Display page selection • Aux selection • Solo function • Fader Mode • Encoder Mode • Metering Position • Peak Hold On/Off • Meter Fast Fall on/off • Scene Store, Recall, and Title Edit • The following Automix functions: - Make New Automix - Store and Recall Automix - Automix Title Edit of - Automix Transport (AutoREC, REC, PLAY, STOP,ABORT) • The following Automix parameters: - Automix Enable/Disable - Motor On/Off - Frame Type - Return Time - Int Start Time - TC Offset - Write to End - Fader Return - Fader Edit Mode - Touch Sense Edit Off/Touch/Latch - Overwrite (FADER/CH ON/PAN/EQ/AUX/AUX ON/SURR) Tip: The Solo function is always linked regardless of the status of the Cascade COMM Link check box. Tip: The Fader Mode will not be linked if the Master layer is selected. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 283 Cascading Consoles The following paragraphs explain how to make a cascade connection using two DM1000s and the inputs and outputs of digital I/O cards installed in the slots of two DM1000s. 1 Install digital I/O cards into Slot 1 or 2 on two DM1000s. 2 Connect two DM1000s as follows: • If you want to use the REMOTE connector to transfer MIDI messages, connect the REMOTE connector of each DM1000 using a 9-pin D-sub reverse cable. If you want to use the MIDI IN and OUT ports, connect MIDI IN on one DM1000 to MIDI out on the other DM1000 using a MIDI cable. The following connection example uses the REMOTE connectors. • Connect the digital I/O card output on the transmitting DM1000 (slave) to the digital I/O card input on the receiving DM1000 (master). OUT OUT MY8-AT etc. MY8-AT etc. SLOT 1 REMOTE connector SLOT 2 2 1 +48V OFF OFF +48V ON OFF 2 5 4 3 +48V ON 1 +48V ON 3 6 +48V OFF ON 4 OFF 7 +48V ON 5 8 +48V OFF 6 ON OFF 7 9 +48V ON OFF 8 10 +48V ON 9 OFF 11 +48V ON 10 OFF 12 +48V ON 11 OFF 12 13 +48V ON OFF 13 14 +48V ON OFF 14 OFF +48V ON OFF IN MY8-AT etc. MY8-AT etc. SLOT 1 16 15 +48V ON 15 IN OFF 2 1 +48V ON +48V ON OFF 16 OFF +48V ON OFF 2 5 4 3 +48V ON 1 PAD REMOTE connector SLOT 2 +48V ON 3 6 +48V OFF ON 4 OFF 7 +48V ON 5 8 +48V OFF 6 ON OFF 7 9 +48V ON OFF 8 10 +48V ON 9 OFF 11 +48V ON 10 OFF 12 +48V ON 11 OFF 12 13 +48V ON OFF 13 14 +48V ON OFF 14 OFF 16 15 +48V ON 15 +48V ON OFF +48V ON OFF ON 16 PAD 20dB 20dB -60 -16 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL 20dB -60 -16 GAIN PEAK SIGNAL 0 20dB TALKBACK LEVEL 0 -60 -16 GAIN 10 PEAK SIGNAL 10 PHONES LEVEL GAIN PEAK SIGNAL PHONES 20dB -60 -16 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN 20dB -60 -16 GAIN ROUTING PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL DISPLAY ACCESS AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW -2 EFFECT SCENE AUXSELECT DISPLAY AUX1 AUX2 AUX5 AUX3 AUX6 AUX4 AUX7 -10 -12 -14 -14 2 3 4 5 6 -18 -18 -24 -24 -30 -30 -36 -36 -42 -42 -48 -48 -56 -56 -72 -72 L R 7 8 STEREO DIRECT SOLO CLEAR 2TR D1 2TR D2 LOW MID SLOT BUS AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW -2 DIMMER TALKBACK LOW 0 10 MONITOR LEVEL PAN/ SURROUND DYNAMICS EFFECT OUTPUT PATCH SCENE AUXSELECT INC DEC DISPLAY AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 AUX6 AUX7 2 3 4 5 6 -8 -10 -12 -14 -14 -18 -18 -24 -24 -30 -30 -36 -36 -42 -42 -48 -48 -56 -56 -72 -72 L R FREQUENCY 7 8 STEREO DIRECT SOLO CLEAR 2TR D1 2TR D2 LOW MID SLOT BUS DIMMER TALKBACK LOW STEREO 0 10 MONITOR LEVEL GAIN INC DEC GRAB AUX8 ENCODER MODE HIGH HIGH MID Q -6 -10 -12 GRAB SCENE MEMORY FADER MODE 1 -4 -6 -8 INPUT PATCH / PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY DISPLAY SCENE MEMORY FADER MODE DISPLAY FADER STORE FADER RECALL AUX PAN AUX STORE RECALL AUX ASSIGN F1 F2 PAN F4 F3 AUX ASSIGN F1 F2 F4 F3 ENTER SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL AUTO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SEL ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ENTER SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL AUTO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SEL ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ON USER DEFINED KEYS +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 USER DEFINED KEYS +10 0 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 0 DISPLAY 5 5 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 5 15 5 5 5 0 5 0 10 5 15 5 10 5 15 5 5 5 0 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 0 10 5 15 DISPLAY 5 5 10 0 15 5 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 10 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 5 15 5 5 5 0 5 0 10 5 15 5 10 5 15 5 5 5 0 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 5 15 5 5 5 0 5 0 10 5 15 5 0 10 5 15 10 15 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 20 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 30 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 40 30 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 50 30 40 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 60 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 60 70 70 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 60 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 60 70 50 30 60 40 70 50 10 PHONES MONITOR DISPLAY DISPLAY OVER 0 OVER 0 -2 STEREO GAIN AUX8 ENCODER MODE HIGH HIGH MID -4 FREQUENCY 10 PHONES LEVEL EQUALIZER DISPLAY Q -8 -8 PAN/ SURROUND DYNAMICS 1 -6 -6 -10 -12 PEAK SIGNAL DISPLAY ACCESS -4 -4 OUTPUT PATCH 0 GAIN PEAK SIGNAL ROUTING DISPLAY DISPLAY OVER 0 OVER 0 -2 INPUT PATCH / PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY TALKBACK LEVEL -60 -16 GAIN 10 SELECTED CHANNEL MONITOR EQUALIZER DISPLAY 20dB -60 -16 GAIN PEAK SIGNAL SELECTED CHANNEL 0 40 50 1 17 2 33 AUX 1 18 3 34 AUX 2 19 4 35 AUX 3 20 5 36 AUX 4 21 6 37 AUX 5 22 7 38 AUX 6 23 8 39 AUX 7 24 9 40 AUX 8 25 10 41 BUS 1 26 11 42 BUS 2 27 12 43 BUS 3 28 13 44 BUS 4 29 14 45 BUS 5 30 15 46 BUS 6 DM1000 (Slave) 31 16 47 BUS 7 32 1 48 BUS 8 STEREO 17 2 33 AUX 1 18 3 34 AUX 2 19 4 35 AUX 3 20 5 36 AUX 4 21 6 37 AUX 5 22 7 38 AUX 6 23 8 39 AUX 7 24 9 40 AUX 8 25 10 41 BUS 1 26 11 42 BUS 2 27 12 43 BUS 3 28 13 44 BUS 4 29 14 45 BUS 5 30 70 15 46 BUS 6 31 16 47 32 BUS 7 48 BUS 8 STEREO DM1000 (Master) Tip: To link Automixes between two DM1000s in a cascade system, configure the units so that they can receive the same sync signal (SMPTE or MTC). If necessary, connect a distribution box to distribute the sync signal to each DM1000. Note: Do not make any MIDI connections between DM1000s that are cascaded via the REMOTE connectors, or vice versa. Otherwise, a loop will be created, causing both consoles to execute endless transmission and reception. 3 On the slave unit, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the Out Patch | Slot Out page appears. 20 Other Functions DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 284 Chapter 20—Other Functions 4 Assign the Bus signals to the slot channels that are used for the cascade connection. The following signals are available: Options Description CAS BUS1–BUS8 Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs CAS AUX1–AUX8 Aux Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs CAS ST-L, CAS ST-R Stereo Bus L & R Cascade Outs CASSOLOL, CASSOLOR Solo Bus L & R Cascade Outs The following display page is an example of integrating Bus 1–8, Aux Send 1–4, Stereo Bus, and Solo Bus signals via two 8-channel digital I/O cards (such as MY8-AT). Tip: Patching may vary depending on the type and number of buses used for the cascade connection. Note: Since the number of channels available on the digital I/O cards is limited, only Aux Sends 1–4 are cascaded in this example. Using a 16-channel digital I/O card (such as MY16-AT) enables you to cascade all buses. 5 On the master unit, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button repeatedly until the In Patch | Cascade In page appears. 6 Select the Input Channels on the master unit to which the Bus signals are input from the Slave unit. The following display page is an example of receiving the slave unit’s Bus 1–8, Aux Send 1–4, Stereo Bus, and Solo Bus signals via two 8-channel digital I/O cards (such as MY8-AT). Note: Be sure to patch the slave Bus signals to the same Buses on the master unit. Incorrect patching will result in an incorrect cascade connection. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Cascading Consoles 285 7 On the master unit, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button repeatedly until the DIO | Cascade page appears, then adjust the Attenuators using the parameter controls. The DIO | Cascade page enables you to adjust the level of signals input to the Cascade Bus using the dedicated attenuators. You can also turn the Cascade Buses on or off using the buttons below the parameter controls. 8 On the slave unit, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly to display the Setup | Remote page, then set the REMOTE FUNCTION parameter (1) to “MIDI.” 1 9 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly to display the Setup | MIDI/Host page, then set the Cascade Link parameter to “REMOTE.” After Steps 8 and 9, the slave unit will be able to transmit and receive MIDI messages via the REMOTE connector. 20 Other Functions DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 286 Chapter 20—Other Functions 10 Repeat Steps 8 and 9 for the master unit so that it will be able to transmit and receive MIDI messages via the REMOTE connector. 11 To match the parameters of both DM1000s, locate the Setup | MIDI/Host page on the copy source unit. 12 Move the cursor to the TRANSMIT button for the SYNC parameter, then press [ENTER]. Parameters for cascade link (page 282) will be copied to the other DM1000 via the REMOTE connector. If you select the REQUEST button instead of the TRANSMIT button for the SYNC parameter, you can reverse the copy direction. At this point, Bus 1–8, Aux 1–4, and the Stereo Bus on both DM1000s are integrated, and the data is output via Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–4, and the Stereo Out on the master unit. If you solo channels on one of the DM1000s, you can monitor the soloed signals via the Control Monitor. Note: You can also link the parameters using the MIDI IN and OUT connection if you set the CASCADE LINK parameter to “MIDI.” DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 287 Using the AD8HR/AD824 Using the AD8HR/AD824 The Yamaha AD8HR/AD824, an 8-channel AD converter, enables you to control its gain and phantom power from a connected DM1000. The DM1000 can control up to four AD8HR/AD824s simultaneously. If you connect the DM1000 to the AD8HR/AD824 digitally, and connect the DM1000 REMOTE connector to the AD8HR/AD824 REMOTE connector using a serial cable, you can use the AD8HR/AD824 as AD Inputs for which you can preset the gain. Tip: You cannot store the Phantom power setting as a Scene on the DM1000. This section describes how to connect and configure the DM1000 and two AD8HRs. 1 Install a digital I/O card in a DM1000 slot. If you plan to connect an AD824, install a digital I/O card on the AD824. 2 Connect the DM1000 and AD8HRs as follows. Connection methods and cables vary depending on the specifications of the devices. The following illustration is an example of a system in which two AD8HRs are connected via MY8-AE cards. IN IN MY8-AE etc. MY8-AE etc. SLOT 1 REMOTE connector SLOT 2 HA REMOTE connector 1 DIGITAL OUT A +48V 96kHz 88.2kHz 48kHz 44.1kHz HPF dB 2 1 +48V OFF OFF +48V ON OFF 5 4 3 +48V ON +48V ON 6 +48V OFF ON OFF 7 +48V ON 8 +48V OFF ON OFF 9 +48V ON OFF 10 +48V ON OFF 11 +48V ON OFF 12 +48V ON OFF 13 +48V ON OFF 14 +48V ON OFF OFF 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB +48V ON OFF HA REMOTE connector 2 AD8HR 16 15 +48V ON 1 +48V ON OFF +48V MASTER OFF ON WORD CLOCK ON PAD -60 -16 -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN -60 -16 GAIN PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL -60 -16 GAIN PEAK SIGNAL 0 -60 -16 GAIN 0 10 TALKBACK LEVEL PEAK SIGNAL 10 PHONES LEVEL GAIN PEAK SIGNAL PHONES SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING DISPLAY ACCESS AUTOMIX DIO SETUP UTILITY MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW -2 -2 EFFECT SCENE AUXSELECT DISPLAY AUX1 AUX2 AUX5 AUX3 AUX6 AUX4 AUX7 2 -10 -10 -12 -12 -14 -14 -18 -18 4 6 -24 -24 -30 -30 7 8 -36 -36 -42 -42 -48 -48 -56 -56 STEREO DIRECT -72 -72 L R FREQUENCY SOLO CLEAR 2TR D1 2TR D2 LOW MID SLOT BUS DIMMER TALKBACK LOW STEREO GRAB +48V SCENE MEMORY 96kHz 88.2kHz 48kHz 44.1kHz FADER MODE DISPLAY FADER STORE AUX ASSIGN F1 F2 dB AD8HR ENTER SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL AUTO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SEL ON ON 1 ON 2 ON 3 ON 4 ON 5 ON 6 ON 7 ON 8 ON 9 ON 10 ON 11 ON 12 ON 13 ON 14 ON ON 15 +48V MASTER OFF ON WORD CLOCK F4 F3 HPF RECALL AUX PAN DIGITAL OUT A INC DEC HA REMOTE connector 1 0 10 MONITOR LEVEL GAIN AUX8 ENCODER MODE HIGH HIGH MID Q 3 5 -8 -8 PAN/ SURROUND DYNAMICS 1 -6 -6 OUTPUT PATCH DISPLAY -4 -4 INPUT PATCH / PAIR/GROUP INSERT/ DELAY MONITOR EQUALIZER DISPLAY DISPLAY OVER 0 OVER 0 16 USER DEFINED KEYS +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 0 DISPLAY 5 5 0 10 5 15 5 0 10 5 15 20 10 5 0 10 5 15 10 5 15 10 5 15 10 5 15 10 5 15 10 5 15 10 5 15 10 5 15 10 5 15 10 5 15 10 5 15 10 5 15 10 5 15 10 5 15 15 20 20 30 30 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 40 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 50 60 70 60 50 1 17 33 AUX 1 2 18 34 AUX 2 3 19 35 AUX 3 4 20 36 AUX 4 5 21 37 AUX 5 6 22 38 AUX 6 7 23 39 AUX 7 8 24 40 AUX 8 9 25 41 BUS 1 10 26 42 BUS 2 30 15 30 15 11 27 43 BUS 3 30 15 12 28 44 BUS 4 30 15 13 29 45 BUS 5 20 10 10 50 30 60 40 70 50 30 15 20 10 5 0 40 20 30 15 20 10 5 0 50 30 60 40 70 50 30 15 20 10 5 0 40 20 30 15 20 10 5 0 50 30 60 40 70 50 30 15 20 10 5 0 40 20 30 15 20 10 5 0 50 30 60 40 70 50 30 15 20 10 0 40 20 30 15 20 10 5 5 0 50 30 60 40 70 50 30 15 20 10 5 0 40 20 30 15 20 10 5 0 50 30 60 40 70 50 40 20 10 5 0 30 15 20 10 5 0 20 10 20 10 5 0 5 30 15 14 30 46 BUS 6 70 15 31 47 BUS 7 16 32 48 BUS 8 STEREO DM1000 (Master) Note: • Set the AD8HR PC/RS422 switches to “RS422.” (If these switches are set to “PC,” the system will not work correctly.) • To control multiple AD8HRs or AD824s, connect the DM1000 and the AD8HRs or AD824s in daisy chain. If you are using both AD8HR and AD824, make sure that you connect the AD8HR closer to the DM1000. 20 Other Functions DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 288 Chapter 20—Other Functions 3 Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly until the Setup | Remote page appears. 2 1 3 This page contains the following parameters: A REMOTE FUNCTION This parameter selects a device to be connected to the DM1000 REMOTE connector. B HA section This section enables you to specify the slot channels that will receive eight channel signals from AD8HR/AD824s that have their ID numbers set to 1 through 4. C HA CONTROL section • • • • • This section enables you to set the AD8HR/AD824 channel 1–8 gain and the Phantom power on or off. ID #1–#4........................ These buttons select the AD8HR/AD824s you want to control. 1–8 (1st row)................. These parameter controls adjust the gain for AD8HR/AD824 channels 1–8. +48V .............................. When you turn on these buttons, the phantom power on the corresponding channels will be turned on. 1–8 (2nd row)............... These parameter controls adjust the cut-off frequency of the high-pass filter for the corresponding channels. They are grayed out and cannot be set for the AD824. HPF................................ When you turn on these buttons, the high-pass filter on the corresponding channels will be turned on. They are grayed out and cannot be set for the AD824. 4 Make sure that the REMOTE FUNCTION parameter is set to “HA,” and in the HA section select the slot channels that receive signals from the AD8HR/AD824s. 5 Use the parameter controls and buttons in the HA CONTROL section to set the channel gain, turn on/off the phantom power, and adjust the high-pass filter. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Checking the Battery and the System Version 289 Checking the Battery and the System Version The Utility | Battery page enables you to check the condition of the internal memory-backup battery and the system version number. To locate this page, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] button repeatedly. 1 2 A Status If the Status is “Okay,” the battery has sufficient voltage for operation. If the Status is “Voltage low!,” ask your Yamaha dealer to replace the battery as soon as possible. Failure to replace a low battery may result in data loss. Note: Do not attempt to replace the battery yourself as a malfunction may occur. B Ver X.XX (X.XX represents the version number.) This indicator identifies the system version number. Check the current system version number before you update the firmware. Visit the following website to check the latest system version number: http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ Initializing the DM1000 You can delete all currently-recorded settings and restore the factory-preset values, and reset the Operation Lock password to its initial setting. Follow the steps below. Tip: • If you want to keep the current internal data, be sure to first back up the data using the included Studio Manager software. • You can also store the data to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 256). 1 Make sure that the power to the DM1000 is turned off. 2 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] button, turn on the POWER ON/OFF switch. After a moment, the DM1000 displays the following confirmation window. 20 Other Functions DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 290 Chapter 20—Other Functions 3 To reset the DM1000 to factory default settings, move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then press [ENTER]. To cancel the initialization operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL button, then press [ENTER]. When the internal data is thoroughly overwritten, the DM1000 restarts using the factory settings. 4 To reset the Operation Lock password to its initial setting, in Step 2, move the cursor to the PASSWORD button, then press [ENTER]. The password is reset to “1234”. If you do not take any action after the confirmation window appears, the window automatically closes and the DM1000 restarts without being initialized. Calibrating the Faders The DM1000 motorized fader positions may shift over time depending on the operating conditions and environment. You can correct the shifted faders using the Calibration function. 1 Make sure that the power to the DM1000 is turned off. 2 Press and hold down the [ENTER] button, then turn on the POWER ON/OFF switch. After a while, the following calibration window appears. 3 Make sure that “1 FADER MOVE & FADER POSITION” is selected, then press [ENTER]. To adjust only the motor fader movement, use the cursor buttons to select “2 FADER MOVE ONLY,” then press [ENTER]. To adjust only the fader position, use the cursor buttons to select “3 FADER POSITION ONLY,” then press [ENTER]. Proceed to Step 5. To cancel the calibration operation, use the cursor buttons to select “4 QUIT,” then press [ENTER]. The DM1000 starts in normal mode. 4 The calibration operation begins, adjusting the motor fader movement, and the DM1000 displays a message that indicates the calibration operation is in progress. The calibration operation takes about two minutes. DO NOT touch the faders during the operation. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Calibrating the Faders 291 5 When the calibration operation is complete, the DM1000 displays a window in which you can select faders for position adjustment. If you selected “2 FADER MOVE ONLY” in Step 3, the fader adjustment is complete. The DM1000 starts in normal mode. 6 Use the channel [SEL] buttons to select faders for which you wish to calibrate the position, then press [ENTER]. The selected channel [SEL] button indicators flash. (When you press [ENTER], they light up steadily.) At the beginning, all [SEL] buttons are flashing. However, if an error occurs and the unit is trying calibration again, only the [SEL] button indicator of a problematic fader flashes. 7 Follow the instruction in the window to set the position of the selected faders to –∞, then press [ENTER]. 8 Set the position of the selected faders to the level instructed in the window, then press [ENTER]. Set faders 1-16 to –15, and Stereo fader to –30. 9 Set the position of the selected faders to the level instructed in the window, then press [ENTER]. Set faders 1-16 to 0, and Stereo fader to any position. 10 Set the position of the selected faders to the level instructed in the window, then press [ENTER]. Set faders 1-16 to +10, and Stereo fader to 0. If there is no problem with the calibration result, this concludes the calibration operation. The DM1000 will start in normal mode. 20 Other Functions DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 292 Chapter 20—Other Functions 11 If there is any problem with the calibration result, the DM1000 displays the following window. Also, the channel [SEL] button indicator of a problematic fader flashes. Use the cursor buttons to select one of the following three options, then press[ENTER]. • CONTINUE..........................................While the [SEL] button indicator of a problematic fader is flashing, the calibration process returns to Step 5. • START FROM THE BEGINNING ....The calibration process returns to Step 2. • QUIT ANYWAY ...................................The DM1000 cancels the calibration operation and starts in normal mode. The standard setting will be applied to problematic faders. If this window appears after you try the calibration process several times, consult your nearest Yamaha dealer. If the calibration data has some problems, the DM1000 displays the following window when it starts up. In this case, calibrate the position of the faders specified in the window. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual USER DEFINED KEYS 293 Appendix A: Parameter Lists USER DEFINED KEYS # Function # Display Function 56 Input Fader Group Enable B Display IN Fader Group B 57 Input Fader Group Enable C IN Fader Group C 0 No Assign No Assign 58 Input Fader Group Enable D IN Fader Group D 1 Scene MEM. Recall +1 Scene +1 Recall 59 Input Fader Group Enable E IN Fader Group E 2 Scene MEM. Recall -1 Scene -1 Recall 60 Input Fader Group Enable F IN Fader Group F 3 Scene MEM. Recall No. XX Scene XX Recall 61 Input Fader Group EnableG IN Fader Group G 4 Effect-1 Lib. Recall +1 Fx1 Lib+1 Recall 62 Input Fader Group Enable H IN Fader Group H 5 Effect-1 Lib. Recall -1 Fx1 Lib-1 Recall 63 Input MUTE Group Enable I IN Mute Group I 6 Effect-1 Lib. Recall No.XX Fx1 LibXXX RCL. 64 Input MUTE Group Enable J IN Mute Group J 7 Effect-2 Lib. Recall +1 Fx2 Lib+1 Recall 65 Input MUTE Group Enable K IN Mute Group K 8 Effect-2 Lib. Recall -1 Fx2 Lib-1 Recall 66 Input MUTE Group Enable L IN Mute Group L IN Mute Group M 9 Effect-2 Lib. Recall No.XX Fx2 LibXXX RCL. 67 Input MUTE Group Enable M 10 Effect-3 Lib. Recall +1 Fx3 Lib+1 Recall 68 Input MUTE Group Enable N IN Mute Group N 11 Effect-3 Lib. Recall -1 Fx3 Lib-1 Recall 69 Input MUTE Group Enable O IN Mute Group O 12 Effect-3 Lib. Recall No.XX Fx3 LibXXX RCL. 70 Input MUTE Group Enable P IN Mute Group P 13 Effect-4 Lib. Recall +1 Fx4 Lib+1 Recall 71 Output Fader Group Enable Q OutFader Group Q 14 Effect-4 Lib. Recall -1 Fx4 Lib-1 Recall 72 Output Fader Group Enable R OutFader Group R 15 Effect-4 Lib. Recall No.XX Fx4 LibXXX RCL. 73 Output Fader Group Enable S OutFader Group S 16 Effect-1 Bypass On/Off Fx1 Bypass 74 Output Fader Group Enable T OutFader Group T 17 Effect-2 Bypass On/Off Fx2 Bypass 75 Output MUTE Group Enable U Out Mute Group U 18 Effect-3 Bypass On/Off Fx3 Bypass 76 Output MUTE Group Enable V Out Mute Group V 19 Effect-4 Bypass On/Off Fx4 Bypass 77 Output MUTE Group Enable W Out Mute Group W 20 Channel Lib. Recall +1 CH Lib+1 Recall 78 Output MUTE Group Enable X Out Mute Group X 21 Channel Lib. Recall -1 CH Lib-1 Recall 79 Input Fader Group Assign X IN Fader Assign X 22 Channel Lib. Recall No. XX CH LibXXX Recall 80 Input Mute Group Assign X IN Mute Assign X 23 GATE Lib. Recall +1 Gate Lib+1 RCL. 81 Input EQ Group Assign X IN EQ Assign x 24 GATE Lib. Recall -1 Gate Lib-1 RCL. 82 Input COMP Group Assign X IN COMP Assign x 25 GATE Lib. Recall No. XX Gate LibXXX RCL. 83 Output Fader Group Assign X OutFader Assign X 26 COMP Lib. Recall +1 Comp Lib+1 RCL. 84 Output Mute Group Assign X Out Mute Assign X 27 COMP Lib. Recall -1 Comp Lib-1 RCL. 85 Output EQ Group Assign X Out EQ Assign x 28 COMP Lib. Recall No. XX Comp LibXXX RCL. 86 Output COMP Group Assign X Out COMP Assign x 29 EQ Lib. Recall +1 EQ Lib+1 Recall 87 Input Mute Group Master X In Mute Master X 30 EQ Lib. Recall -1 EQ Lib-1 Recall 88 Output MUTE Group Master X Out Mute Master X 31 EQ Lib. Recall No. XX EQ LibXXX Recall 89 Automix REC Automix REC 32 Surr Lib. Recall +1 Surr. Lib+1 90 Automix PLAY Automix PLAY 33 Surr Lib. Recall -1 Surr. Lib-1 91 Automix STOP Automix STOP 34 Surr Lib. Recall No.XX Surr. Libxxx 92 Automix ABORT Automix ABORT 35 SURR. MONI MUTE Mute L On/Off Surr.Mon L Mute 93 Automix AUTO REC Automix AUTOREC 36 SURR. MONI MUTE Mute R On/Off Surr.Mon R Mute 94 Automix ENABLE Automix ENABLE 37 SURR. MONI MUTE Mute Ls On/Off Surr.Mon Ls Mute 95 Automix RETURN Automix RETURN 38 SURR. MONI MUTE Mute Rs On/Off Surr.Mon Rs Mute 96 Automix RELATIVE Automix RELATIVE 39 SURR. MONI MUTE Mute C On/Off Surr.Mon C Mute 97 Automix TOUCH SENSE Automix T.SENSE 40 SURR. MONI MUTE Mute Bs On/Off Surr.Mon Bs Mute 98 Automix UPDATE TO END Amx UPDATETO END 41 SURR. MONI MUTE Mute LFE On/Off Surr.Mon LFEMute 99 Overwrite FADER Overwrite FADER 100 Overwrite ON Overwrite ON 42 SURR. MONI SLOT1 ON/OFF Surr.SLOT1 ON 101 Overwrite PAN Overwrite PAN 43 SURR. MONI SLOT2 ON/OFF Surr.SLOT2 ON 102 Overwrite SURROUND Overwrite SURR. 44 SURR. MONI BASS MANAGE ON/OFF Bass Manage ON 103 Overwrite EQ Overwrite EQ 45 SURR. MONI SNAP TO 85dB SPL SNAP TO SPL85 104 Overwrite AUX Overwrite AUX 46 Bus to ST Lib. Recall +1 BUS to ST Lib+1 47 Bus to ST Lib. Recall -1 BUS to ST Lib-1 48 Bus to ST Lib. Recall No. XX BUS to ST LibXX 49 Input Patch Lib. Recall +1 IN Patch Lib+1 50 Input Patch Lib. Recall -1 IN Patch Lib-1 51 Input Patch Lib. Recall No. XX IN Patch LibXX 52 Output Patch Lib. Recall +1 Out Patch Lib+1 53 Output Patch Lib. Recall -1 Out Patch Lib-1 54 Output Patch Lib. Recall No. XX Out Patch LibXX 55 Input Fader Group Enable A IN Fader Group A 105 Overwrite AUX ON Overwrite AUX ON 106 PEAK HOLD On/Off Peak Hold 107 OSCILLATOR On/Off OSC ON/OFF 108 SOLO Enable SOLO ENABLE 109 AUX/SOLO LINK Mode On/Off AUX/SOLO LINK 110 FADER/SOLO RELEASE Mode On/Off FaderSolo RELEASE C-R MONO 112 Pan / Surround Link PAN/SURR LINK 113 Talkback Assign SLOT1-XX Talkback SLOT1-XX 114 Talkback Assign SLOT2-XX Talkback SLOT2-XX DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Appendix 111 Control Room Monitor MONO 294 Appendix A: Parameter Lists # Function 115 Talkback Assign OMNI OUT XX Display # Function Display Talkback OMNI XX 179 DAW IN DAW IN 116 Channel Name ID/Short CH ID/Short 180 DAW OUT DAW OUT 117 Port Name ID/Short Port D/Short 181 DAW POST DAW POST 118 Channel Copy Channel Copy 182 DAW RTZ DAW RTZ 119 Channel Paste Channel Paste 183 DAW END DAW END 120 Display Back Display Back 184 DAW ONLINE DAW ONLINE 121 Display Forward Display Forward 185 DAW LOOP DAW LOOP 122 UDEF KEYS BANK +1 UDEF KEYS BANK+1 186 DAW QUICKPUNCH DAW QUICKPUNCH 123 UDEF KEYS BANK -1 UDEF KEYS BANK-1 187 DAW GROUP STATUS DAW GROUP STATUS 124 UDEF KEYS BANK X UDEF KEYS BANK x 188 DAW AUTO FADER DAW AUTO FADER 125 REMOTE USER DEFINE BANK +1 RMT UDEF BANK+1 189 DAW AUTO MUTE DAW AUTO MUTE 126 REMOTE USER DEFINE BANK -1 RMT UDEF BANK-1 190 DAW AUTO PAN DAW AUTO PAN 127 REMOTE USER DEFINE BANK X RMT UDEF BANK X 191 DAW AUTO SEND DAW AUTO SEND 128 REMOTE USER ASS LAYER BANK +1 USR LAYER BANK+1 192 DAW AUTO PLUGIN DAW AUTO PLUGIN 129 REMOTE USER ASS LAYER BANK -1 USR LAYER BANK-1 193 DAW AUTO SEND MUTE DAW AUTO SENDMUTE 130 REMOTE USER ASS LAYER BANK X USR LAYER BANK X 194 DAW AUTO READ DAW AUTO READ 131 MIDI NOTE No.XX MIDI NOTE XXX 195 DAW AUTO TOUCH DAW AUTO TOUCH 132 MIDI Program change No.XX MIDI PGM XXX 196 DAW AUTO LATCH DAW AUTO LATCH 133 MIDI Control Change No.XX MIDI CC XXX 197 DAW AUTO WRITE DAW AUTO WRITE 134 Machine REC Machine REC 198 DAW AUTO TRIM DAW AUTO TRIM 135 Machine PLAY Machine PLAY 199 DAW AUTO OFF DAW AUTO OFF 136 Machine STOP Machine STOP 200 DAW AUTO SUSPEND DAW AUTO SUSPEND 137 Machine FF Machine FF 201 DAW AUTO STATUS DAW AUTO STATUS 138 Machine REW Machine REW 202 DAW MONITOR STATUS DAW MONI STATUS 139 Machine SHUTTLE Machine SHUTTLE 203 DAW CREATE GROUP DAW CREATE GROUP 140 Machine SCRUB Machine SCRUB 204 DAW SUSPEND GROUP DAW SUSPEND GRP 141 Machine LOCATE X Machine LOCATE X 205 DAW WINDOW TRANSPORT DAW WIN TRANSPORT 142 Machine Set LOCATE X Machine Capture X 206 DAW WINDOW INSERT DAW WIN INSERT 143 Machine RTZ Machine RTZ 207 DAW WINDOW MIX/EDIT DAW WIN MIX/EDIT 144 Machine Set RTZ Machine Set RTZ 208 DAW WINDOW MEM-LOC DAW WIN MEM-LOC 145 Track Arming 1 Track Arming 1 209 DAW WINDOW STATUS DAW WIN STATUS 146 Track Arming 2 Track Arming 2 210 DAW Shortcut UNDO DAW UNDO 147 Track Arming 3 Track Arming 3 211 DAW Shortcut SAVE DAW SAVE 148 Track Arming 4 Track Arming 4 212 DAW Shortcut EDIT MODE DAW EDIT MODE 149 Track Arming 5 Track Arming 5 213 DAW Shortcut EDIT TOOL DAW EDIT TOOL 150 Track Arming 6 Track Arming 6 214 DAW Shortcut SHIFT/ADD DAW SHIFT/ADD 151 Track Arming 7 Track Arming 7 215 DAW Shortcut OPTION/ALL DAW OPTION/ALL 152 Track Arming 8 Track Arming 8 216 DAW Shortcut CTRL/CLUCH DAW CTRL/CLUCH 153 Track Arming 9 Track Arming 9 217 DAW Shortcut ALT/FINE DAW ALT/FINE 154 Track Arming 10 Track Arming 10 218 DAW BANK + DAW BANK + 155 Track Arming 11 Track Arming 11 219 DAW BANK - DAW BANK - 156 Track Arming 12 Track Arming 12 220 DAW Channel + DAW Channel + 157 Track Arming 13 Track Arming 13 221 DAW Channel - DAW Channel - 158 Track Arming 14 Track Arming 14 222 DAW REC/RDY X DAW REC/RDY X 159 Track Arming 15 Track Arming 15 223 DAW REC/RDY ALL DAW REC/RDY ALL 160 Track Arming 16 Track Arming 16 161 Track Arming 17 Track Arming 17 Studio Manager Window Control 224 Close SM CTRL Close Studio Manager Window Control 225 Close All SM CTRL Close All 162 Track Arming 18 Track Arming 18 163 Track Arming 19 Track Arming 19 164 Track Arming 20 Track Arming 20 165 Track Arming 21 Track Arming 21 166 Track Arming 22 Track Arming 22 226 Studio Manager Window Control Selected Channel SM CTRL Sel Ch 227 Studio Manager Window Control Library SM CTRL Library 167 Track Arming 23 Track Arming 23 168 Track Arming 24 Track Arming 24 Studio Manager Window Control 228 Patch Editor 169 Track Arming All Clear Track Arming CLR 229 SM CTRL Surround 170 DAW REC DAW REC Studio Manager Window Control Surround Editor 171 DAW PLAY DAW PLAY 230 Studio Manager Window Control Time Counter SM CTRL TimeCount 172 DAW STOP DAW STOP 173 DAW FF DAW FF 231 Studio Manager Window Control Effect Editor SM CTRL Effect 174 DAW REW DAW REW SM CTRL Meter 175 DAW SHUTTLE DAW SHUTTLE Studio Manager Window Control 232 Meter 176 DAW SCRUB DAW SCRUB 233 DAW AUDITION Studio Manager Window Control Layer SM CTRL Layer 177 DAW AUDITION 178 DAW PRE DAW PRE 234 Studio Manager Window Control Master SM CTRL Master DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual SM CTRL Patch USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments 295 USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments TITLE BANK A BANK B BANK C BANK D Surround Monitor Scene Recall Group Enable Automix 1 Snap to SPL85 Scene 1 Recall IN Fader Group A Automix ENABLE 2 Bass Manage ON Scene 2 Recall IN Mute Group I Overwrite FADER 3 Surr.Mon L Mute Scene 3 Recall IN Fader Group B Overwrite ON 4 Surr.Mon R Mute Scene 4 Recall IN Mute Group J Overwrite PAN 5 Surr.Mon C Mute Scene 5 Recall IN Fader Group C Overwrite SURR 6 Surr.Mon Bs Mute Scene 6 Recall IN Mute Group K Overwrite AUX 7 Surr.Mon Ls Mute Scene 7 Recall IN Fader Group D Overwrite AUX ON 8 Surr.Mon Rs Mute Scene 8 Recall IN Mute Group L Overwrite EQ Automix ABORT 9 Surr.Mon LFEMute Scene 9 Recall IN Fader Group E 10 No Assign Scene 10 Recall IN Mute Group M Automix AUTOREC 11 Surr Lib-1 Recall Scene _1 Recall IN Fader Group F Automix RETURN 12 Surr Lib+1 Recall Scene +1 Recall IN Mute Group N Amx UPDATE TO END TITLE BANK E BANK F BANK G BANK H DAW 1 DAW 2 Machine Control Program Change 1 UDEF BANK F UDEF BANK E Machine Locate 1 MIDI PGM 1 2 DAW WIN MIX/EDIT DAW AUTO STATUS Machine Locate 2 MIDI PGM 2 3 DAW BANK - DAW BANK - Machine Locate 3 MIDI PGM 3 4 DAW BANK + DAW BANK + Machine Locate 4 MIDI PGM 4 5 DAW CHANNEL - DAW AUTO READ Machine SHUTTLE MIDI PGM 5 6 DAW CHANNEL + DAW AUTO TOUCH Machine SCRUB MIDI PGM 6 7 DAW SHUTTLE DAW AUTO LATCH Machine RTZ MIDI PGM 7 8 DAW SCRUB DAW AUTO WRITE Machine REC MIDI PGM 8 9 DAW STOP DAW AUTO TRIM Machine STOP MIDI PGM 9 10 DAW PLAY DAW AUTO OFF Machine PLAY MIDI PGM 10 11 DAW SHIFT/ADD DAW AUTO SUSPEND Machine REW MIDI PGM 11 12 DAW OPTION/ALL DAW OPTION/ALL Machine FF MIDI PGM 12 Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 296 Appendix A: Parameter Lists Input Patch Parameters Port ID – AD1 AD2 AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7 AD8 AD9 AD10 AD11 AD12 AD13 AD14 AD15 AD16 OMNI1 OMNI2 OMNI3 OMNI4 S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4 S1-5 S1-6 S1-7 S1-8 S1-9 S110 S111 S112 S113 S114 S115 S116 S2-1 S2-2 S2-3 S2-4 S2-5 S2-6 S2-7 S2-8 S2-9 S210 S211 S212 S213 S214 S215 S216 FX1-1 INPUT Description NONE AD IN 1 AD IN 2 AD IN 3 AD IN 4 AD IN 5 AD IN 6 AD IN 7 AD IN 8 AD IN 9 AD IN 10 AD IN 11 AD IN 12 AD IN 13 AD IN 14 AD IN 15 AD IN 16 OMNI IN 1 OMNI IN 2 OMNI IN 3 OMNI IN 4 Slot1 CH1 IN Slot1 CH2 IN Slot1 CH3 IN Slot1 CH4 IN Slot1 CH5 IN Slot1 CH6 IN Slot1 CH7 IN Slot1 CH8 IN Slot1 CH9 IN Slot1 CH10 IN Slot1 CH11 IN Slot1 CH12 IN Slot1 CH13 IN Slot1 CH14 IN Slot1 CH15 IN Slot1 CH16 IN Slot2 CH1 IN Slot2 CH2 IN Slot2 CH3 IN Slot2 CH4 IN Slot2 CH5 IN Slot2 CH6 IN Slot2 CH7 IN Slot2 CH8 IN Slot2 CH9 IN Slot2 CH10 IN Slot2 CH11 IN Slot2 CH12 IN Slot2 CH13 IN Slot2 CH14 IN Slot2 CH15 IN Slot2 CH16 IN Effect1 OUT 1 Port ID – AD1 AD2 AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7 AD8 AD9 AD10 AD11 AD12 AD13 AD14 AD15 AD16 OMNI1 OMNI2 OMNI3 OMNI4 S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4 S1-5 S1-6 S1-7 S1-8 S1-9 S110 S111 S112 S113 S114 S115 S116 S2-1 S2-2 S2-3 S2-4 S2-5 S2-6 S2-7 S2-8 S2-9 S210 S211 S212 S213 S214 S215 S216 FX1-1 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual INSERT IN Description NONE AD IN 1 AD IN 2 AD IN 3 AD IN 4 AD IN 5 AD IN 6 AD IN 7 AD IN 8 AD IN 9 AD IN 10 AD IN 11 AD IN 12 AD IN 13 AD IN 14 AD IN 15 AD IN 16 OMNI IN 1 OMNI IN 2 OMNI IN 3 OMNI IN 4 Slot1 CH1 IN Slot1 CH2 IN Slot1 CH3 IN Slot1 CH4 IN Slot1 CH5 IN Slot1 CH6 IN Slot1 CH7 IN Slot1 CH8 IN Slot1 CH9 IN Slot1 CH10 IN Slot1 CH11 IN Slot1 CH12 IN Slot1 CH13 IN Slot1 CH14 IN Slot1 CH15 IN Slot1 CH16 IN Slot2 CH1 IN Slot2 CH2 IN Slot2 CH3 IN Slot2 CH4 IN Slot2 CH5 IN Slot2 CH6 IN Slot2 CH7 IN Slot2 CH8 IN Slot2 CH9 IN Slot2 CH10 IN Slot2 CH11 IN Slot2 CH12 IN Slot2 CH13 IN Slot2 CH14 IN Slot2 CH15 IN Slot2 CH16 IN Effect1 OUT 1 EFFECT IN Description – NONE AUX1 AUX1 AUX2 AUX2 AUX3 AUX3 AUX4 AUX4 AUX5 AUX5 AUX6 AUX6 AUX7 AUX7 AUX8 AUX8 INSCH1 InsertOut-CH1 INSCH2 InsertOut-CH2 INSCH3 InsertOut-CH3 INSCH4 InsertOut-CH4 INSCH5 InsertOut-CH5 INSCH6 InsertOut-CH6 INSCH7 InsertOut-CH7 INSCH8 InsertOut-CH8 INSCH9 InsertOut-CH9 INSCH10 InsertOut-CH10 INSCH11 InsertOut-CH11 INSCH12 InsertOut-CH12 INSCH13 InsertOut-CH13 INSCH14 InsertOut-CH14 INSCH15 InsertOut-CH15 INSCH16 InsertOut-CH16 INSCH17 InsertOut-CH17 INSCH18 InsertOut-CH18 INSCH19 InsertOut-CH19 INSCH20 InsertOut-CH20 INSCH21 InsertOut-CH21 INSCH22 InsertOut-CH22 INSCH23 InsertOut-CH23 INSCH24 InsertOut-CH24 INSCH25 InsertOut-CH25 INSCH26 InsertOut-CH26 INSCH27 InsertOut-CH27 INSCH28 InsertOut-CH28 INSCH29 InsertOut-CH29 INSCH30 InsertOut-CH30 INSCH31 InsertOut-CH31 INSCH32 InsertOut-CH32 INSCH33 InsertOut-CH33 INSCH34 InsertOut-CH34 INSCH35 InsertOut-CH35 INSCH36 InsertOut-CH36 INSCH37 InsertOut-CH37 INSCH38 InsertOut-CH38 INSCH39 InsertOut-CH39 INSCH40 InsertOut-CH40 INSCH41 InsertOut-CH41 INSCH42 InsertOut-CH42 INSCH43 InsertOut-CH43 INSCH44 InsertOut-CH44 INSCH45 InsertOut-CH45 Port ID Port ID – AD1 AD2 AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7 AD8 AD9 AD10 AD11 AD12 AD13 AD14 AD15 AD16 OMNI1 OMNI2 OMNI3 OMNI4 S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4 S1-5 S1-6 S1-7 S1-8 S1-9 S110 S111 S112 S113 S114 S115 S116 S2-1 S2-2 S2-3 S2-4 S2-5 S2-6 S2-7 S2-8 S2-9 S210 S211 S212 S213 S214 S215 S216 2TD1L CASCADE Description NONE AD IN 1 AD IN 2 AD IN 3 AD IN 4 AD IN 5 AD IN 6 AD IN 7 AD IN 8 AD IN 9 AD IN 10 AD IN 11 AD IN 12 AD IN 13 AD IN 14 AD IN 15 AD IN 16 OMNI IN 1 OMNI IN 2 OMNI IN 3 OMNI IN 4 Slot1 CH1 IN Slot1 CH2 IN Slot1 CH3 IN Slot1 CH4 IN Slot1 CH5 IN Slot1 CH6 IN Slot1 CH7 IN Slot1 CH8 IN Slot1 CH9 IN Slot1 CH10 IN Slot1 CH11 IN Slot1 CH12 IN Slot1 CH13 IN Slot1 CH14 IN Slot1 CH15 IN Slot1 CH16 IN Slot2 CH1 IN Slot2 CH2 IN Slot2 CH3 IN Slot2 CH4 IN Slot2 CH5 IN Slot2 CH6 IN Slot2 CH7 IN Slot2 CH8 IN Slot2 CH9 IN Slot2 CH10 IN Slot2 CH11 IN Slot2 CH12 IN Slot2 CH13 IN Slot2 CH14 IN Slot2 CH15 IN Slot2 CH16 IN 2TR IN Dig.1 L Input Patch Parameters Port ID FX1-2 FX1-3 FX1-4 FX1-5 FX1-6 FX1-7 FX1-8 FX2-1 FX2-2 FX3-1 FX3-2 FX4-1 FX4-2 2D1L 2D1R 2D2L 2D2R BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 INPUT Description Effect1 OUT 2 Effect1 OUT 3 Effect1 OUT 4 Effect1 OUT 5 Effect1 OUT 6 Effect1 OUT 7 Effect1 OUT 8 Effect2 OUT 1 Effect2 OUT 2 Effect3 OUT 1 Effect3 OUT 2 Effect4 OUT 1 Effect4 OUT 2 2TR IN Dig.1 L 2TR IN Dig.1 R 2TR IN Dig.2 L 2TR IN Dig.2 R BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 BUS5 BUS5 FX1-11 Effect1 OUT 1 BUS6 BUS6 FX1-2*1 Effect1 OUT 2 BUS7 BUS7 FX2-1*1 Effect2 OUT 1 BUS8 BUS8 FX2-2*1 Effect2 OUT 2 AUX1 AUX1 FX3-1*1 Effect3 OUT 1 AUX2 AUX2 FX3-2*1 Effect3 OUT 2 AUX3 AUX3 FX4-1*1 Effect4 OUT 1 AUX4 AUX4 FX4-2*1 Effect4 OUT 2 AUX5 AUX6 AUX7 AUX8 AUX5 AUX6 AUX7 AUX8 Port ID FX1-2 FX1-3 FX1-4 FX1-5 FX1-6 FX1-7 FX1-8 FX2-1 FX2-2 FX3-1 FX3-2 FX4-1 FX4-2 2D1L 2D1R 2D2L 2D2R INSERT IN Description Effect1 OUT 2 Effect1 OUT 3 Effect1 OUT 4 Effect1 OUT 5 Effect1 OUT 6 Effect1 OUT 7 Effect1 OUT 8 Effect2 OUT 1 Effect2 OUT 2 Effect3 OUT 1 Effect3 OUT 2 Effect4 OUT 1 Effect4 OUT 2 2TR IN Dig.1 L 2TR IN Dig.1 R 2TR IN Dig.2 L 2TR IN Dig.2 R EFFECT IN Port ID Description INS CH46 InsertOut-CH46 INS CH47 InsertOut-CH47 INS CH48 InsertOut-CH48 INS BUS1 InsertOut-BUS1 INS BUS2 InsertOut-BUS2 INS BUS3 InsertOut-BUS3 INS BUS4 InsertOut-BUS4 INS BUS5 InsertOut-BUS5 INS BUS6 InsertOut-BUS6 INS BUS7 InsertOut-BUS7 INS BUS8 InsertOut-BUS8 INS AUX1 InsertOut-AUX1 INS AUX2 InsertOut-AUX2 INS AUX3 InsertOut-AUX3 INS AUX4 InsertOut-AUX4 INS AUX5 InsertOut-AUX5 INS AUX6 InsertOut-AUX6 INS AUX7 InsertOut-AUX7 INS AUX8 InsertOut-AUX8 INS ST-L InsertOut-STL INS ST-R InsertOut-STR Port ID 2D1R 2D2L 2D2R 297 CASCADE Description 2TR IN Dig.1 R 2TR IN Dig.2 L 2TR IN Dig.2 R 1.You cannot assign the output of the same effect to EFFECT IN. Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 298 Appendix A: Parameter Lists Initial Input Patch Settings CHANNEL EFFECT IN PATCH 1 AD1 1-1 AUX1 2 AD2 1-2 NONE 3 AD3 1-3 NONE 4 AD4 1-4 NONE 5 AD5 1-5 NONE 6 AD6 1-6 NONE 7 AD7 1-7 NONE 8 AD8 1-8 NONE 9 AD9 2-1 AUX2 10 AD10 2-2 NONE 11 AD11 3-1 AUX3 12 AD12 3-2 NONE 13 AD13 4-1 AUX4 14 AD14 4-2 NONE 15 AD15 16 AD16 17 S1-1 18 S1-2 19 S1-3 20 S1-4 21 S1-5 22 S1-6 23 S1-7 24 S1-8 25 S2-1 26 S2-2 27 S2-3 28 S2-4 29 S2-5 30 S2-6 31 S2-7 32 S2-8 33 FX1-1 34 FX1-2 35 FX2-1 36 FX2-2 37 FX3-1 38 FX3-2 39 FX4-1 40 FX4-2 EFFECT1 REVERB HALL 41 2TD1L EFFECT2 REVERB ROOM 42 2TD1R EFFECT3 REVERB STAGE 43 2TD2L EFFECT4 REVERB PLATE 44 2TD2R 45 OMNI1 46 OMNI2 47 OMNI3 48 OMNI4 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual CASCADE IN PATCH BUS1 NONE BUS2 NONE BUS3 NONE BUS4 NONE BUS5 NONE BUS6 NONE BUS7 NONE BUS8 NONE AUX1 NONE AUX2 NONE AUX3 NONE AUX4 NONE AUX56 NONE AUX6 NONE AUX7 NONE AUX8 NONE ST L NONE ST R NONE SOLO L NONE SOLO R NONE EFFECT TYPE (mono input) Initial Input Patch Settings 299 CHANNEL NAME CHANNEL ID SHORT LONG CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH4 CH4 CH5 CH5 CH5 CH5 CH6 CH6 CH6 CH6 CH7 CH7 CH7 CH7 CH8 CH8 CH8 CH8 CH9 CH9 CH9 CH9 CH10 CH10 CH10 CH10 CH11 CH11 CH11 CH11 CH12 CH12 CH12 CH12 CH13 CH13 CH13 CH13 CH14 CH14 CH14 CH14 CH15 CH15 CH15 CH15 CH16 CH16 CH16 CH16 CH17 CH17 CH17 CH17 CH18 CH18 CH18 CH18 CH19 CH19 CH19 CH19 CH20 CH20 CH20 CH20 CH21 CH21 CH21 CH21 CH22 CH22 CH22 CH22 CH23 CH23 CH23 CH23 CH24 CH24 CH24 CH24 CH25 CH25 CH25 CH25 CH26 CH26 CH26 CH26 CH27 CH27 CH27 CH27 CH28 CH28 CH28 CH28 CH29 CH29 CH29 CH29 CH30 CH30 CH30 CH30 CH31 CH31 CH31 CH31 CH32 CH32 CH32 CH32 CH33 CH33 CH33 CH33 CH34 CH34 CH34 CH34 CH35 CH35 CH35 CH35 CH36 CH36 CH36 CH36 CH37 CH37 CH37 CH37 CH38 CH38 CH38 CH38 CH39 CH39 CH39 CH39 CH40 CH40 CH40 CH40 CH41 CH41 CH41 CH41 CH42 CH42 CH42 CH42 CH43 CH43 CH43 CH43 CH44 CH44 CH44 CH44 CH45 CH45 CH45 CH45 CH46 CH46 CH46 CH46 CH47 CH47 CH47 CH47 CH48 CH48 CH48 CH48 Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 300 Appendix A: Parameter Lists Output Patch Parameters SLOT, OMNI Description – NONE BUS1 BUS1 BUS2 BUS2 BUS3 BUS3 BUS4 BUS4 BUS5 BUS5 BUS6 BUS6 BUS7 BUS7 BUS8 BUS8 AUX1 AUX1 AUX2 AUX2 AUX3 AUX3 AUX4 AUX4 AUX5 AUX5 AUX6 AUX6 AUX7 AUX7 AUX8 AUX8 STEREO-L STEREO L STEREO-R STEREO R INSCH1 InsertOut-CH1 INSCH2 InsertOut-CH2 INSCH3 InsertOut-CH3 INSCH4 InsertOut-CH4 INSCH5 InsertOut-CH5 INSCH6 InsertOut-CH6 INSCH7 InsertOut-CH7 INSCH8 InsertOut-CH8 INSCH9 InsertOut-CH9 INSCH10 InsertOut-CH10 INSCH11 InsertOut-CH11 INSCH12 InsertOut-CH12 INSCH13 InsertOut-CH13 INSCH14 InsertOut-CH14 INSCH15 InsertOut-CH15 INSCH16 InsertOut-CH16 INSCH17 InsertOut-CH17 INSCH18 InsertOut-CH18 INSCH19 InsertOut-CH19 INSCH20 InsertOut-CH20 INSCH21 InsertOut-CH21 INSCH22 InsertOut-CH22 INSCH23 InsertOut-CH23 INSCH24 InsertOut-CH24 INSCH25 InsertOut-CH25 INSCH26 InsertOut-CH26 INSCH27 InsertOut-CH27 INSCH28 InsertOut-CH28 INSCH29 InsertOut-CH29 INSCH30 InsertOut-CH30 INSCH31 InsertOut-CH31 INSCH32 InsertOut-CH32 INSCH33 InsertOut-CH33 INSCH34 InsertOut-CH34 INSCH35 InsertOut-CH35 Source Source – AD1 AD2 AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7 AD8 AD9 AD10 AD11 AD12 AD13 AD14 AD15 AD16 OMNI1 OMNI2 OMNI3 OMNI4 S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4 S1-5 S1-6 S1-7 S1-8 S1-9 S110 S111 S112 S113 S114 S115 S116 S2-1 S2-2 S2-3 S2-4 S2-5 S2-6 S2-7 S2-8 S2-9 S210 S211 S212 S213 S214 S215 S216 FX1-1 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual INSERT IN Description NONE AD IN 1 AD IN 2 AD IN 3 AD IN 4 AD IN 5 AD IN 6 AD IN 7 AD IN 8 AD IN 9 AD IN 10 AD IN 11 AD IN 12 AD IN 13 AD IN 14 AD IN 15 AD IN 16 OMNI IN 1 OMNI IN 2 OMNI IN 3 OMNI IN 4 Slot1 CH1 IN Slot1 CH2 IN Slot1 CH3 IN Slot1 CH4 IN Slot1 CH5 IN Slot1 CH6 IN Slot1 CH7 IN Slot1 CH8 IN Slot1 CH9 IN Slot1 CH10 IN Slot1 CH11 IN Slot1 CH12 IN Slot1 CH13 IN Slot1 CH14 IN Slot1 CH15 IN Slot1 CH16 IN Slot2 CH1 IN Slot2 CH2 IN Slot2 CH3 IN Slot2 CH4 IN Slot2 CH5 IN Slot2 CH6 IN Slot2 CH7 IN Slot2 CH8 IN Slot2 CH9 IN Slot2 CH10 IN Slot2 CH11 IN Slot2 CH12 IN Slot2 CH13 IN Slot2 CH14 IN Slot2 CH15 IN Slot2 CH16 IN Effect1 OUT 1 DIRECT OUT Source Description – NONE S1-1 Slot1 CH1 OUT S1-2 Slot1 CH2 OUT S1-3 Slot1 CH3 OUT S1-4 Slot1 CH4 OUT S1-5 Slot1 CH5 OUT S1-6 Slot1 CH6 OUT S1-7 Slot1 CH7 OUT S1-8 Slot1 CH8 OUT S1-9 Slot1 CH9 OUT S110 Slot1 CH10 OUT S111 Slot1 CH11 OUT S112 Slot1 CH12 OUT S113 Slot1 CH13 OUT S114 Slot1 CH14 OUT S115 Slot1 CH15 OUT S116 Slot1 CH16 OUT S2-1 Slot2 CH1 OUT S2-2 Slot2 CH2 OUT S2-3 Slot2 CH3 OUT S2-4 Slot2 CH4 OUT S2-5 Slot2 CH5 OUT S2-6 Slot2 CH6 OUT S2-7 Slot2 CH7 OUT S2-8 Slot2 CH8 OUT S2-9 Slot2 CH9 OUT S210 Slot2 CH10 OUT S211 Slot2 CH11 OUT S212 Slot2 CH12 OUT S213 Slot2 CH13 OUT S214 Slot2 CH14 OUT S215 Slot2 CH15 OUT S216 Slot2 CH16 OUT OMNI1 OMNI OUT 1 OMNI2 OMNI OUT 2 OMNI3 OMNI OUT 3 OMNI4 OMNI OUT 4 OMNI5 OMNI OUT 5 OMNI6 OMNI OUT 6 OMNI7 OMNI OUT 7 OMNI8 OMNI OUT 8 2TD1L 2TR OUT Dig.1 L 2TD1R 2TR OUT Dig.1 R 2TD2L 2TR OUT Dig.2 L 2TD2R 2TR OUT Dig.2 R OMNI9 OMNI OUT 9 OMNI10 OMNI OUT 10 OMNI11 OMNI OUT 11 OMNI12 OMNI OUT 12 — — — — — — — — — — 2TR OUT Digital Source Description – NONE BUS1 BUS1 BUS2 BUS2 BUS3 BUS3 BUS4 BUS4 BUS5 BUS5 BUS6 BUS6 BUS7 BUS7 BUS8 BUS8 AUX1 AUX1 AUX2 AUX2 AUX3 AUX3 AUX4 AUX4 AUX5 AUX5 AUX6 AUX6 AUX7 AUX7 AUX8 AUX8 STEREO-L STEREO L STEREO-R STEREO R INSCH1 InsertOut-CH1 INSCH2 InsertOut-CH2 INSCH3 InsertOut-CH3 INSCH4 InsertOut-CH4 INSCH5 InsertOut-CH5 INSCH6 InsertOut-CH6 INSCH7 InsertOut-CH7 INSCH8 InsertOut-CH8 INSCH9 InsertOut-CH9 INSCH10 InsertOut-CH10 INSCH11 InsertOut-CH11 INSCH12 InsertOut-CH12 INSCH13 InsertOut-CH13 INSCH14 InsertOut-CH14 INSCH15 InsertOut-CH15 INSCH16 InsertOut-CH16 INSCH17 InsertOut-CH17 INSCH18 InsertOut-CH18 INSCH19 InsertOut-CH19 INSCH20 InsertOut-CH20 INSCH21 InsertOut-CH21 INSCH22 InsertOut-CH22 INSCH23 InsertOut-CH23 INSCH24 InsertOut-CH24 INSCH25 InsertOut-CH25 INSCH26 InsertOut-CH26 INSCH27 InsertOut-CH27 INSCH28 InsertOut-CH28 INSCH29 InsertOut-CH29 INSCH30 InsertOut-CH30 INSCH31 InsertOut-CH31 INSCH32 InsertOut-CH32 INSCH33 InsertOut-CH33 INSCH34 InsertOut-CH34 INSCH35 InsertOut-CH35 Output Patch Parameters Source SLOT, OMNI Description InsertOut-CH36 InsertOut-CH37 InsertOut-CH38 InsertOut-CH39 InsertOut-CH40 InsertOut-CH41 InsertOut-CH42 InsertOut-CH43 InsertOut-CH44 InsertOut-CH45 InsertOut-CH46 InsertOut-CH47 InsertOut-CH48 InsertOut-BUS1 InsertOut-BUS2 InsertOut-BUS3 InsertOut-BUS4 InsertOut-BUS5 InsertOut-BUS6 InsertOut-BUS7 InsertOut-BUS8 InsertOut-AUX1 InsertOut-AUX2 InsertOut-AUX3 InsertOut-AUX4 InsertOut-AUX5 InsertOut-AUX6 InsertOut-AUX7 InsertOut-AUX8 InsertOut-STL InsertOut-STR Surr Monitor L Surr Monitor R Surr Monitor Ls Surr Monitor Rs Surr Monitor C Surr Monitor SW Surr Monitor Ls2 Surr Monitor Rs2 Control Room L Control Room R Cascade Out Bus1 Cascade Out Bus2 Cascade Out Bus3 Cascade Out Bus4 Cascade Out Bus5 Cascade Out Bus6 Cascade Out Bus7 Cascade Out Bus8 Cascade Out Aux1 Cascade Out Aux2 Cascade Out Aux3 Cascade Out Aux4 Cascade Out Aux5 Cascade Out Aux6 Cascade Out Aux7 FX1-2 FX1-3 FX1-4 FX1-5 FX1-6 FX1-7 FX1-8 FX2-1 FX2-2 FX3-1 FX3-2 FX4-1 FX4-2 2TD1L 2TD1R 2TD2L 2TD2R — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — INSERT IN Description Effect1 OUT 2 Effect1 OUT 3 Effect1 OUT 4 Effect1 OUT 5 Effect1 OUT 6 Effect1 OUT 7 Effect1 OUT 8 Effect2 OUT 1 Effect2 OUT 2 Effect3 OUT 1 Effect3 OUT 2 Effect4 OUT 1 Effect4 OUT 2 2TR IN Dig.1 L 2TR IN Dig.1 R 2TR IN Dig.2 L 2TR IN Dig.2 R — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — DIRECT OUT Source Description — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 2TR OUT Digital Source Description INSCH36 INSCH37 INSCH38 INSCH39 INSCH40 INSCH41 INSCH42 INSCH43 INSCH44 INSCH45 INSCH46 INSCH47 INSCH48 INSBUS1 INSBUS2 INSBUS3 INSBUS4 INSBUS5 INSBUS6 INSBUS7 INSBUS8 INSAUX1 INSAUX2 INSAUX3 INSAUX4 INSAUX5 INSAUX6 INSAUX7 INSAUX8 INSSTL INSSTR CR-L CR-R CAS BUS1 CAS BUS2 CAS BUS3 CAS BUS4 CAS BUS5 CAS BUS6 CAS BUS7 CAS BUS8 CAS AUX1 CAS AUX2 CAS AUX3 CAS AUX4 CAS AUX5 CAS AUX6 CAS AUX7 CAS AUX8 CAS ST_L CAS ST_R CAS SO_L CAS SO_R SOLO L SOLO R — InsertOut-CH36 InsertOut-CH37 InsertOut-CH38 InsertOut-CH39 InsertOut-CH40 InsertOut-CH41 InsertOut-CH42 InsertOut-CH43 InsertOut-CH44 InsertOut-CH45 InsertOut-CH46 InsertOut-CH47 InsertOut-CH48 InsertOut-BUS1 InsertOut-BUS2 InsertOut-BUS3 InsertOut-BUS4 InsertOut-BUS5 InsertOut-BUS6 InsertOut-BUS7 InsertOut-BUS8 InsertOut-AUX1 InsertOut-AUX2 InsertOut-AUX3 InsertOut-AUX4 InsertOut-AUX5 InsertOut-AUX6 InsertOut-AUX7 InsertOut-AUX8 InsertOut-STL InsertOut-STR Control Room L Control Room R Cascade Out Bus1 Cascade Out Bus2 Cascade Out Bus3 Cascade Out Bus4 Cascade Out Bus5 Cascade Out Bus6 Cascade Out Bus7 Cascade Out Bus8 Cascade Out Aux1 Cascade Out Aux2 Cascade Out Aux3 Cascade Out Aux4 Cascade Out Aux5 Cascade Out Aux6 Cascade Out Aux7 Cascade Out Aux8 Cascade STEREO_L Cascade STEREO_R Cascade SOLO_L Cascade SOLO_R SOLO OUT L SOLO OUT R — DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Appendix INSCH36 INSCH37 INSCH38 INSCH39 INSCH40 INSCH41 INSCH42 INSCH43 INSCH44 INSCH45 INSCH46 INSCH47 INSCH48 INSBUS1 INSBUS2 INSBUS3 INSBUS4 INSBUS5 INSBUS6 INSBUS7 INSBUS8 INSAUX1 INSAUX2 INSAUX3 INSAUX4 INSAUX5 INSAUX6 INSAUX7 INSAUX8 INSSTL INSSTR Surr L Surr R Surr Ls Surr Rs Surr C Surr SW Surr Ls2 Surr Rs2 CR-L CR-R CAS BUS1 CAS BUS2 CAS BUS3 CAS BUS4 CAS BUS5 CAS BUS6 CAS BUS7 CAS BUS8 CAS AUX1 CAS AUX2 CAS AUX3 CAS AUX4 CAS AUX5 CAS AUX6 CAS AUX7 Source 301 302 Appendix A: Parameter Lists SLOT, OMNI Source Description CAS AUX8 Cascade Out Aux8 CAS ST_L Cascade STEREO_L CAS ST_R Cascade STEREO_R CAS SO_L Cascade SOLO_L CAS SO_R Cascade SOLO_R SOLO L SOLO OUT L SOLO R SOLO OUT R Moni L Moni Matrix L Moni R Moni Matrix R Moni Ls Moni Matrix Ls Moni Rs Moni Matrix Rs Moni C Moni Matrix C Moni Bs Moni Matrix Bs Moni LFE Moni Matrix LFE Source — — — — — — — — — — — — — — INSERT IN Description — — — — — — — — — — — — — — DIRECT OUT Source Description — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 2TR OUT Digital Source Description — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Initial Output Patch Settings SLOT OMNI OUT SLOT1-1 BUS1 1 AUX1 SLOT1-2 BUS2 2 AUX2 SLOT1-3 BUS3 3 AUX3 SLOT1-4 BUS4 4 AUX4 SLOT1-5 BUS5 5 AUX5 SLOT1-6 BUS6 6 AUX6 SLOT1-7 BUS7 7 AUX7 SLOT1-8 BUS8 8 AUX8 SLOT1-9 BUS1 9 ST L SLOT1-10 BUS2 10 ST R SLOT1-11 BUS3 11 C-R L SLOT1-12 BUS4 12 C-R R SLOT1-13 BUS5 SLOT1-14 BUS6 SLOT1-15 BUS7 SLOT1-16 BUS8 SLOT2-1 BUS1 SLOT2-2 BUS2 SLOT2-3 BUS3 SLOT2-4 BUS4 SLOT2-5 BUS5 SLOT2-6 BUS6 SLOT2-7 BUS7 SLOT2-8 BUS8 SLOT2-9 BUS1 SLOT2-10 BUS2 SLOT2-11 BUS3 SLOT2-12 BUS4 SLOT2-13 BUS5 SLOT2-14 BUS6 SLOT2-15 BUS7 SLOT2-16 BUS8 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 303 Initial Output Patch Settings DIRECT OUT 2TR OUT Digital 1 SLOT1-1 1L ST L 2 SLOT1-2 1R ST R 3 SLOT1-3 2L ST L 4 SLOT1-4 2R ST R 5 SLOT1-5 6 SLOT1-6 7 SLOT1-7 8 SLOT1-8 9 SLOT2-1 10 SLOT2-2 11 SLOT2-3 12 SLOT2-4 13 SLOT2-5 14 SLOT2-6 15 SLOT2-7 16 SLOT2-8 17 NONE 18 NONE 19 NONE 20 NONE 21 NONE 22 NONE 23 NONE 24 NONE 25 NONE 26 NONE 27 NONE 28 NONE 29 NONE 30 NONE 31 NONE 32 NONE 33 NONE 34 NONE 35 NONE 36 NONE 37 NONE 38 NONE 39 NONE 40 NONE 41 NONE 42 NONE 43 NONE 44 NONE 45 NONE 46 NONE 47 NONE 48 CHANNEL NAME CHANNEL ID SHORT LONG AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 AUX6 AUX6 AUX6 AUX6 AUX7 AUX7 AUX7 AUX7 AUX8 AUX8 AUX8 AUX8 BUS1 BUS1 BUS1 BUS1 BUS2 BUS2 BUS2 BUS2 BUS3 BUS3 BUS3 BUS3 BUS4 BUS4 BUS4 BUS4 BUS5 BUS5 BUS5 BUS5 BUS6 BUS6 BUS6 BUS6 BUS7 BUS7 BUS7 BUS7 BUS8 BUS8 BUS8 BUS8 STEREO ST ST STEREO NONE ST IN has no DIRECT OUT Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 304 Appendix A: Parameter Lists GPI Trigger Source & Target List INPUT # 0 Target # Target # Target NO ASSIGN 59 CH46 ON 117 CH39 ON UNLATCH 1 TALKBACK 60 CH47 ON 118 CH40 ON UNLATCH 3 DIMMER 61 CH48 ON 119 CH41 ON UNLATCH 4 BUS 62 BUS1 ON 120 CH42 ON UNLATCH 5 SLOT 63 BUS2 ON 121 CH43 ON UNLATCH 6 2TRD1 64 BUS3 ON 122 CH44 ON UNLATCH 7 2TRD2 65 BUS4 ON 123 CH45 ON UNLATCH 8 TALKBACK UNLATCH 66 BUS5 ON 124 CH46 ON UNLATCH 9 DIMMER UNLATCH 67 BUS6 ON 125 CH47 ON UNLATCH 10 BUS UNLATCH 68 BUS7 ON 126 CH48 ON UNLATCH 11 SLOT UNLATCH 69 BUS8 ON 127 BUS1 ON UNLATCH 12 2TRD1 UNLATCH 70 AUX1 ON 128 BUS2 ON UNLATCH 13 2TRD2 UNLATCH 71 AUX2 ON 129 BUS3 ON UNLATCH 14 CH1 ON 72 AUX3 ON 130 BUS4 ON UNLATCH 15 CH2 ON 73 AUX4 ON 131 BUS5 ON UNLATCH 16 CH3 ON 74 AUX5 ON 132 BUS6 ON UNLATCH 17 CH4 ON 75 AUX6 ON 133 BUS7 ON UNLATCH 18 CH5 ON 76 AUX7 ON 134 BUS8 ON UNLATCH 19 CH6 ON 77 AUX8 ON 135 AUX1 ON UNLATCH 20 CH7 ON 78 ST ON 136 AUX2 ON UNLATCH 21 CH8 ON 79 CH1 ON UNLATCH 137 AUX3 ON UNLATCH 22 CH9 ON 80 CH2 ON UNLATCH 138 AUX4 ON UNLATCH 23 CH10 ON 81 CH3 ON UNLATCH 139 AUX5 ON UNLATCH 24 CH11 ON 82 CH4 ON UNLATCH 140 AUX6 ON UNLATCH 25 CH12 ON 83 CH5 ON UNLATCH 141 AUX7 ON UNLATCH 26 CH13 ON 84 CH6 ON UNLATCH 142 AUX8 ON UNLATCH 27 CH14 ON 85 CH7 ON UNLATCH 143 ST ON UNLATCH 28 CH15 ON 86 CH8 ON UNLATCH 144 UDEF1 29 CH16 ON 87 CH9 ON UNLATCH 145 UDEF2 30 CH17 ON 88 CH10 ON UNLATCH 146 UDEF3 31 CH18 ON 89 CH11 ON UNLATCH 147 UDEF4 32 CH19 ON 90 CH12 ON UNLATCH 148 UDEF5 33 CH20 ON 91 CH13 ON UNLATCH 149 UDEF6 34 CH21 ON 92 CH14 ON UNLATCH 150 UDEF7 35 CH22 ON 93 CH15 ON UNLATCH 151 UDEF8 36 CH23 ON 94 CH16 ON UNLATCH 152 UDEF9 37 CH24 ON 95 CH17 ON UNLATCH 153 UDEF10 38 CH25 ON 96 CH18 ON UNLATCH 154 UDEF11 39 CH26 ON 97 CH19 ON UNLATCH 155 UDEF12 40 CH27 ON 98 CH20 ON UNLATCH 41 CH28 ON 99 CH21 ON UNLATCH 42 CH29 ON 100 CH22 ON UNLATCH 43 CH30 ON 101 CH23 ON UNLATCH 44 CH31 ON 102 CH24 ON UNLATCH 45 CH32 ON 103 CH25 ON UNLATCH 46 CH33 ON 104 CH26 ON UNLATCH 47 CH34 ON 105 CH27 ON UNLATCH 48 CH35 ON 106 CH28 ON UNLATCH 49 CH36 ON 107 CH29 ON UNLATCH 50 CH37 ON 108 CH30 ON UNLATCH 51 CH38 ON 109 CH31 ON UNLATCH 52 CH39 ON 110 CH32 ON UNLATCH 53 CH40 ON 111 CH33 ON UNLATCH 54 CH41 ON 112 CH34 ON UNLATCH 55 CH42 ON 113 CH35 ON UNLATCH 56 CH43 ON 114 CH36 ON UNLATCH 57 CH44 ON 115 CH37 ON UNLATCH 58 CH45 ON 116 CH38 ON UNLATCH DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual GPI Trigger Source & Target List 305 OUTPUT # Target # Target # Target # Target NO ASSIGN 60 AUX4 FADER ON 120 BUS7 FADER OFF 180 BUS2 FADER TALLY 1 CH1 FADER ON 61 AUX5 FADER ON 121 BUS8 FADER OFF 181 BUS3 FADER TALLY 2 CH2 FADER ON 62 AUX6 FADER ON 122 AUX1 FADER OFF 182 BUS4 FADER TALLY 3 CH3 FADER ON 63 AUX7 FADER ON 123 AUX2 FADER OFF 183 BUS5 FADER TALLY 4 CH4 FADER ON 64 AUX8 FADER ON 124 AUX3 FADER OFF 184 BUS6 FADER TALLY 5 CH5 FADER ON 65 STEREO FADER ON 125 AUX4 FADER OFF 185 BUS7 FADER TALLY 6 CH6 FADER ON 66 CH1 FADER OFF 126 AUX5 FADER OFF 186 BUS8 FADER TALLY 7 CH7 FADER ON 67 CH2 FADER OFF 127 AUX6 FADER OFF 187 AUX1 FADER TALLY 8 CH8 FADER ON 68 CH3 FADER OFF 128 AUX7 FADER OFF 188 AUX2 FADER TALLY 9 CH9 FADER ON 69 CH4 FADER OFF 129 AUX8 FADER OFF 189 AUX3 FADER TALLY 10 CH10 FADER ON 70 CH5 FADER OFF 130 STEREO FADER OFF 190 AUX4 FADER TALLY 11 CH11 FADER ON 71 CH6 FADER OFF 131 CH1 FADER TALLY 191 AUX5 FADER TALLY 12 CH12 FADER ON 72 CH7 FADER OFF 132 CH2 FADER TALLY 192 AUX6 FADER TALLY 13 CH13 FADER ON 73 CH8 FADER OFF 133 CH3 FADER TALLY 193 AUX7 FADER TALLY 14 CH14 FADER ON 74 CH9 FADER OFF 134 CH4 FADER TALLY 194 AUX8 FADER TALLY 15 CH15 FADER ON 75 CH10 FADER OFF 135 CH5 FADER TALLY 195 ST FADER TALLY 16 CH16 FADER ON 76 CH11 FADER OFF 136 CH6 FADER TALLY 196 UDEF1 LATCH 17 CH17 FADER ON 77 CH12 FADER OFF 137 CH7 FADER TALLY 197 UDEF2 LATCH 18 CH18 FADER ON 78 CH13 FADER OFF 138 CH8 FADER TALLY 198 UDEF3 LATCH 19 CH19 FADER ON 79 CH14 FADER OFF 139 CH9 FADER TALLY 199 UDEF4 LATCH 20 CH20 FADER ON 80 CH15 FADER OFF 140 CH10 FADER TALLY 200 UDEF5 LATCH 21 CH21 FADER ON 81 CH16 FADER OFF 141 CH11 FADER TALLY 201 UDEF6 LATCH 22 CH22 FADER ON 82 CH17 FADER OFF 142 CH12 FADER TALLY 202 UDEF7 LATCH 23 CH23 FADER ON 83 CH18 FADER OFF 143 CH13 FADER TALLY 203 UDEF8 LATCH 24 CH24 FADER ON 84 CH19 FADER OFF 144 CH14 FADER TALLY 204 UDEF9 LATCH 25 CH25 FADER ON 85 CH20 FADER OFF 145 CH15 FADER TALLY 205 UDEF10 LATCH 26 CH26 FADER ON 86 CH21 FADER OFF 146 CH16 FADER TALLY 206 UDEF11 LATCH 27 CH27 FADER ON 87 CH22 FADER OFF 147 CH17 FADER TALLY 207 UDEF12 LATCH 28 CH28 FADER ON 88 CH23 FADER OFF 148 CH18 FADER TALLY 208 UDEF1 UNLATCH 29 CH29 FADER ON 89 CH24 FADER OFF 149 CH19 FADER TALLY 209 UDEF2 UNLATCH 30 CH30 FADER ON 90 CH25 FADER OFF 150 CH20 FADER TALLY 210 UDEF3 UNLATCH 31 CH31 FADER ON 91 CH26 FADER OFF 151 CH21 FADER TALLY 211 UDEF4 UNLATCH 32 CH32 FADER ON 92 CH27 FADER OFF 152 CH22 FADER TALLY 212 UDEF5 UNLATCH 33 CH33 FADER ON 93 CH28 FADER OFF 153 CH23 FADER TALLY 213 UDEF6 UNLATCH 34 CH34 FADER ON 94 CH29 FADER OFF 154 CH24 FADER TALLY 214 UDEF7 UNLATCH 35 CH35 FADER ON 95 CH30 FADER OFF 155 CH25 FADER TALLY 215 UDEF8 UNLATCH 36 CH36 FADER ON 96 CH31 FADER OFF 156 CH26 FADER TALLY 216 UDEF9 UNLATCH 37 CH37 FADER ON 97 CH32 FADER OFF 157 CH27 FADER TALLY 217 UDEF10 UNLATCH 38 CH38 FADER ON 98 CH33 FADER OFF 158 CH28 FADER TALLY 218 UDEF11 UNLATCH 39 CH39 FADER ON 99 CH34 FADER OFF 159 CH29 FADER TALLY 219 UDEF12 UNLATCH 40 CH40 FADER ON 100 CH35 FADER OFF 160 CH30 FADER TALLY 220 REC LAMP 41 CH41 FADER ON 101 CH36 FADER OFF 161 CH31 FADER TALLY 221 POWER ON 42 CH42 FADER ON 102 CH37 FADER OFF 162 CH32 FADER TALLY 43 CH43 FADER ON 103 CH38 FADER OFF 163 CH33 FADER TALLY 44 CH44 FADER ON 104 CH39 FADER OFF 164 CH34 FADER TALLY 45 CH45 FADER ON 105 CH40 FADER OFF 165 CH35 FADER TALLY 46 CH46 FADER ON 106 CH41 FADER OFF 166 CH36 FADER TALLY 47 CH47 FADER ON 107 CH42 FADER OFF 167 CH37 FADER TALLY 48 CH48 FADER ON 108 CH43 FADER OFF 168 CH38 FADER TALLY 49 BUS1 FADER ON 109 CH44 FADER OFF 169 CH39 FADER TALLY 50 BUS2 FADER ON 110 CH45 FADER OFF 170 CH40 FADER TALLY 51 BUS3 FADER ON 111 CH46 FADER OFF 171 CH41 FADER TALLY 52 BUS4 FADER ON 112 CH47 FADER OFF 172 CH42 FADER TALLY 53 BUS5 FADER ON 113 CH48 FADER OFF 173 CH43 FADER TALLY 54 BUS6 FADER ON 114 BUS1 FADER OFF 174 CH44 FADER TALLY 55 BUS7 FADER ON 115 BUS2 FADER OFF 175 CH45 FADER TALLY 56 BUS8 FADER ON 116 BUS3 FADER OFF 176 CH46 FADER TALLY 57 AUX1 FADER ON 117 BUS4 FADER OFF 177 CH47 FADER TALLY 58 AUX2 FADER ON 118 BUS5 FADER OFF 178 CH48 FADER TALLY 59 AUX3 FADER ON 119 BUS6 FADER OFF 179 BUS1 FADER TALLY Appendix 0 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 306 Appendix A: Parameter Lists User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings Bank 1 (GM Vol & Pan) ID Name Short Long Controller ON RM01 GM01 GM-CH01 VOL&PAN ENCODER FADER ON RM02 GM02 GM-CH02 VOL&PAN ENCODER FADER ON RM03 GM03 GM-CH03 VOL&PAN ENCODER FADER ON RM04 GM04 GM-CH04 VOL&PAN ENCODER FADER ON RM05 GM05 GM-CH05 VOL&PAN ENCODER FADER ON RM06 GM06 GM-CH06 VOL&PAN ENCODER FADER ON RM07 GM07 GM-CH07 VOL&PAN ENCODER FADER ON RM08 GM08 GM-CH08 VOL&PAN ENCODER FADER ON RM09 GM09 GM-CH09 VOL&PAN ENCODER FADER ON RM10 GM10 GM-CH10 VOL&PAN ENCODER FADER ON RM11 GM11 GM-CH11 VOL&PAN ENCODER FADER ON RM12 GM12 GM-CH12 VOL&PAN ENCODER FADER ON RM13 GM13 GM-CH13 VOL&PAN ENCODER FADER ON RM14 GM14 GM-CH14 VOL&PAN ENCODER FADER ON RM15 GM15 GM-CH15 VOL&PAN ENCODER FADER ON RM16 GM16 GM-CH16 VOL&PAN ENCODER FADER DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Data Format 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – B0 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – B0 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – – – – – – – – – – B1 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – – B1 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – – – – – – – – – – B2 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – B2 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – – – – – – – – – – B3 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – B3 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – – – – – – – – – – B4 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – B4 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – – – – – – – – – – B5 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – B5 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – – – – – – – – – – B6 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – B6 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – – – – – – – – – – B7 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – B7 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – – – – – – – – – – B8 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – B8 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – – – – – – – – – – B9 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – B9 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – – – – – – – – – – BA 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – BA 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – – – – – – – – – – BB 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – BB 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – – – – – – – – – – BC 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – BC 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – – – – – – – – – – BD 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – BD 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – – – – – – – – – – BE 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – BE 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – – – – – – – – – – BF 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – – BF 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – 307 User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings Bank 2 (GM Vol & Effect 1) ID Name Short Long Controller ON RM01 GM01 GM-CH01 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER FADER ON RM02 GM02 GM-CH02 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER FADER ON RM03 GM03 GM-CH03 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER FADER ON RM04 GM04 GM-CH04 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER FADER ON RM05 GM05 GM-CH05 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER FADER ON RM06 GM06 GM-CH06 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER FADER ON RM07 GM07 GM-CH07 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER FADER ON RM08 GM08 GM-CH08 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER FADER ON RM09 GM09 GM-CH09 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER FADER ON RM10 GM10 GM-CH10 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER FADER ON RM11 GM11 GM-CH11 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER FADER ON RM12 GM12 GM-CH12 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER FADER ON RM13 GM13 GM-CH13 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER FADER ON RM14 GM14 GM-CH14 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER FADER ON RM15 GM15 GM-CH15 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER FADER ON RM16 GM16 GM-CH16 VOL&EFF1 ENCODER FADER Data Format 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – B0 0C ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – B0 07 – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – – – – – – – – – B1 0C ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – B1 07 – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – FAD END – FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – B2 0C ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – B2 07 – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – B3 0C ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – B3 07 – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – B4 0C ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – B4 07 – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – B5 0C ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – B5 07 – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – B6 0C ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – B6 07 – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – B7 0C ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – B7 07 – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – B8 0C ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – B8 07 – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – B9 0C ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – B9 07 – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – BA 0C ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – BA 07 – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – BB 0C ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – BB 07 – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – BC 0C ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – BC 07 – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – BD 0C ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – BD 07 – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – BE 0C ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – BE 07 – – – – – – – – – – – – – END – – – – – FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – BF 0C ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – BF 07 – – – – – – – – – – – – FAD END Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 308 Appendix A: Parameter Lists Bank 3 (XG Vol & Pan) ID Name Short Long Controller 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 00 0E ENC F7 END – – – – – – FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 00 0B FAD F7 END – – – – – – – ON RM01 XG01 XG-CH01 VOL&PAN ON RM02 XG02 XG-CH02 VOL&PAN END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 01 0E ENC F7 END – – – – – – FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 01 0B FAD F7 END – – – – – – – ON RM03 XG03 XG-CH03 VOL&PAN END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 02 0E ENC F7 END – – – – – – FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 02 0B FAD F7 END – – – – – – – ON RM04 XG04 XG-CH04 VOL&PAN END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 03 0E ENC F7 END – – – – – – FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 03 0B FAD F7 END – – – – – – – ON RM05 XG05 XG-CH05 VOL&PAN END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 04 0E ENC F7 END – – – – – – FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 04 0B FAD F7 END – – – – – – – ON RM06 XG06 XG-CH06 VOL&PAN END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 05 0E ENC F7 END – – – – – – FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 05 0B FAD F7 END – – – – – – – ON RM07 XG07 XG-CH07 VOL&PAN END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 06 0E ENC F7 END – – – – – – FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 06 0B FAD F7 END – – – – – – – ON RM08 XG08 XG-CH08 VOL&PAN END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 07 0E ENC F7 END – – – – – – FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 07 0B FAD F7 END – – – – – – – ON RM09 XG09 XG-CH09 VOL&PAN END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 08 0E ENC F7 END – – – – – – FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 08 0B FAD F7 END – – – – – – – ON RM10 XG10 XG-CH10 VOL&PAN END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 09 0E ENC F7 END – – – – – – FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 09 0B FAD F7 END – – – – – – – ON RM11 XG11 XG-CH11 VOL&PAN END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 0A 0E ENC F7 END – – – – – – FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 0A 0B FAD F7 END – – – – – – – ON RM12 XG12 XG-CH12 VOL&PAN END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 0B 0E ENC F7 END – – – – – – FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 0B 0B FAD F7 END – – – – – – – ON RM13 XG13 XG-CH13 VOL&PAN END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 0C 0E ENC F7 END – – – – – – FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 0C 0B FAD F7 END – – – – – – – ON RM14 XG14 XG-CH14 VOL&PAN END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 0D 0E ENC F7 END – – – – – – FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 0D 0B FAD F7 END – – – – – – – ON RM15 XG15 XG-CH15 VOL&PAN END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 0E 0E ENC F7 END – – – – – – FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 0E 0B FAD F7 END – – – – – – – ON RM16 XG16 XG-CH16 VOL&PAN Data Format 1 END – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER F0 43 10 4C 08 0F 0E ENC F7 END – – – – – – FADER F0 43 10 4C 08 0F 0B FAD F7 END – – – – – – DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 309 User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings Bank 4 (Nuendo VST Mixer) ID Name Short RM01 CH1 RM02 CH2 RM03 CH3 RM04 CH4 RM05 CH5 RM06 CH6 RM07 CH7 RM08 CH8 RM09 CH9 RM10 CH10 RM11 CH11 RM12 CH12 RM13 CH13 RM14 CH14 RM15 CH15 RM16 CH16 Long VST MIXER CH1 VST MIXER CH2 VST MIXER CH3 VST MIXER CH4 VST MIXER CH5 VST MIXER CH6 VST MIXER CH7 VST MIXER CH8 VST MIXER CH9 VST MIXER CH10 VST MIXER CH11 VST MIXER CH12 VST MIXER CH13 VST MIXER CH14 VST MIXER CH15 VST MIXER CH16 Controller Data Format 1 2 ON B0 40 ENCODER B0 FADER B0 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SW END – – – – – – – – – – – – 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – ON B1 40 SW END – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER B1 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – FADER B1 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – ON B2 40 SW END – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER B2 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – FADER B2 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – ON B3 40 SW END – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER B3 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – FADER B3 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – ON B4 40 SW END – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER B4 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – FADER B4 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – ON B5 40 SW END – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER B5 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – FADER B5 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – ON B6 40 SW END – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER B6 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – FADER B6 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – ON B7 40 SW END – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER B7 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – FADER B7 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – ON B8 40 SW END – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER B8 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – FADER B8 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – ON B9 40 SW END – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER B9 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – FADER B9 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – ON BA 40 SW END – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER BA 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – FADER BA 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – ON BB 40 SW END – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER BB 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – FADER BB 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – ON BC 40 SW END – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER BC 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – FADER BC 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – ON BD 40 SW END – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER BD 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – FADER BD 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – ON BE 40 SW END – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER BE 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – FADER BE 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – – ON BF 40 SW END – – – – – – – – – – – ENCODER BF 0A ENC END – – – – – – – – – – – – FADER BF 07 FAD END – – – – – – – – – – – – Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 310 Appendix A: Parameter Lists Effects Parameters REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates. Parameter Range Description GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early reflections with reverse gate. Parameter TYPE Range Type-A, Type-B Description Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF. 0–10 Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread) DENSITY 0–100% Reflection density HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections) FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency GATE LVL OFF, –60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in ATTACK 0–120 ms Gate opening speed HOLD 1 Gate open time Parameter Gate closing speed DELAY 0.0–2730.0 ms Delay time REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread) DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density E/R DLY 0.0–100.0 ms Delay between early reflections and reverb E/R BAL. 0–100% HPF DECAY 2 MONO DELAY One input, two output basic repeat delay. Range Description 1. 0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz), 0.01 ms–1.06 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 0.01 ms–981 ms (fs=96 kHz) FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) 2. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency EARLY REF. One input, two output early reflections. Parameter TYPE Range S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring Description Type of early reflection simulation SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY 1. ( Max. value depends on tempo setting) ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) STEREO DELAY INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins Two input, two output basic stereo delay. 0–10 Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread) Parameter 0.0–1350.0 ms 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. G L –99 to +99% Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. G R –99 to +99% Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY NOTE R 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY DIFF. DENSITY 0–100% Reflection density DELAY L ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections DELAY R FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF Range Description Left channel delay time 1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Effects Parameters 311 MOD. DELAY ECHO One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation. Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop. Parameter Range Description Parameter Range Description DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) DELAY R FB. GAIN FB.DLY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel feedback delay time FB.DLY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel feedback delay time FB. G L –99 to +99% Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. G R –99 to +99% Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) L->R FBG –99 to +99% Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) R->L FBG –99 to +99% Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency DELAY LCR LPF Low-pass filter cutoff frequency One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right). 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L NOTE R 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R NOTE FBL 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB.DLY L NOTE FBR 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB.DLY R HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation depth Modulation waveform HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off DLY.NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY MOD.NOTE 2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 1. ( Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) 2. Range Parameter Description DELAY L 0.0–2730.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY C 0.0–2730.0 ms Center channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–2730.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–2730.0 ms Feedback delay time LEVEL L –100 to +100% Left channel delay level LEVEL C –100 to +100% Center channel delay level LEVEL R –100 to +100% Right channel delay level FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth LPF Low-pass filter cutoff frequency PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time NOTE L 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency NOTE C 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY C LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R EQ F NOTE R EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain NOTE FB 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain 1. 1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) CHORUS Two input, two output chorus effect. Parameter FREQ. ( Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) Range 0.05–40.00 Hz Description Modulation speed SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 312 Appendix A: Parameter Lists FLANGE PHASER Two input, two output flange effect. Two input, two output 16-stage phaser. Parameter Range Description Parameter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time –99 to +99% –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. GAIN FB. GAIN Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) OFFSET 0–100 WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency PHASE LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain 0.00–354.38 degrees Left and right modulation phase balance EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. Modulation speed 1. 1. SYMPHONIC AUTO PAN Two input, two output symphonic effect. Two input, two output autopanner. Parameter Range Description Parameter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed FREQ. DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time DIR. 1 Panning direction WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. L<->R, L—>R, L<—R, Turn L, Turn R 2. TREMOLO Two input, two output tremolo effect. Parameter Description 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Range FREQ. Effects Parameters 313 HQ. PITCH ROTARY One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter. One input, two output rotary speaker simulator. Parameter Range Description PITCH –12 to +12 semitones Pitch shift FINE –50 to +50 cents Pitch shift fine DELAY 0.0–1000.0 ms –99 to +99% FB. GAIN Parameter Rotation stop, start SPEED SLOW, FAST Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters) Delay time SLOW 0.05–10.00 Hz SLOW rotation speed Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FAST 0.05–10.00 Hz FAST rotation speed DRIVE 0–100 Overdrive level ACCEL 0–10 Acceleration at speed changes 0–100 Low-frequency filter 0–100 High-frequency filter MODE 1–10 Pitch shift precision SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off HIGH 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY 1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) RING MOD. Two input, two output ring modulator. Parameter DUAL PITCH Range Range Description Modulation source: oscillator or input signal SOURCE OSC, SELF OSC FREQ 0.0–5000.0 Hz Oscillator frequency FM FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed Channel #1 pitch shift FM DEPTH 0–100% Oscillator frequency modulation depth SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE FM 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM FREQ Two input, two output pitch shifter. Parameter Description STOP, START LOW NOTE Range ROTATE Description PITCH 1 –24 to +24 semitones FINE 1 –50 to +50 cents Channel #1 pitch shift fine LEVEL 1 –100 to +100% Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase) PAN 1 L63 to R63 Channel #1 pan DELAY 1 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #1 delay time FB. G 1 –99 to +99% Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) PITCH 2 –24 to +24 semitones Channel #2 pitch shift FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz FINE 2 –50 to +50 cents Channel #2 pitch shift fine DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth LEVEL 2 –100 to +100% Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase) PHASE 0.00–354.38 degrees Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase difference PAN 2 L63 to R63 Channel #2 pan TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF DELAY 2 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #2 delay time Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset –99 to +99% Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance LEVEL 0–100 Output level SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ FB. G 2 MODE SYNC 1–10 Pitch shift precision OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #1 delay NOTE 2 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #2 delay 1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) 1. MOD. FILTER Two input, two output modulation filter. Parameter Range Description Modulation speed 1. DISTORTION One input, two output distortion effect. Parameter Range Description DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive MASTER 0–100 Master volume TONE –10 to +10 Tone N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 314 Appendix A: Parameter Lists AMP SIMULATE DYNA. PHASER One input, two output guitar amp simulator. Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser. Parameter Range Description AMP TYPE 1 DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive MASTER 0–100 Master volume BASS 0–100 Bass tone control MIDDLE 0–100 Middle tone control TREBLE 0–100 High tone control CAB DEP 0–100% Speaker cabinet simulation depth EQ F 100–8.00 kHz Parametric equalizer frequency EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Parametric equalizer gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 N. GATE 0–20 1. Guitar amp simulation type Parameter Description Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity SOURCE INPUT, MIDI SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY 1 Decay speed OFFSET 0–100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Parametric equalizer bandwidth STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages Noise reduction LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT DYNA. FILTER 1. Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter. Parameter Range Range Description SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz) REV+CHORUS One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel. Parameter Range DECAY 1 Filter frequency change decay speed INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset DIFF. 0–10 Spread RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density LEVEL 0–100 Output Level HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency DYNA. FLANGE REV/CHO 0–100% Reverb and chorus balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all chorus) Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger. FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz 1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz) Parameter SOURCE SENSE Range INPUT, MIDI Description Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity 0–100 Sensitivity DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY 1 Decay speed OFFSET 0–100 Delay time offset FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain 1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz) DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 0.3–99.0 s Description REV TIME Reverb time Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. Effects Parameters 315 REV->CHORUS REV->FLANGE One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series. One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series. Parameter Range REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s INI. DLY HI. RATIO Description Parameter Range Description Reverb time REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV.BAL 0–100% Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = all chorused reverb, 100% = all reverb) REV.BAL 0–100% Reverb and flanged reverb balance (0% = all flanged reverb, 100% = all reverb) FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz High-pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb time Modulation speed FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform FB. GAIN –99 to +99% SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. REV+FLANGE 1. One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel. Parameter Range Description One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel. REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins Parameter HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s DIFF. 0–10 Spread INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency DIFF. 0–10 Spread 0–100% Reverb density LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU DENSITY Low-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF High-pass filter cutoff frequency REV/FLG 0–100% Reverb and flange balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all flange) THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz LPF Low-pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth REV/SYM 0–100% MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all symphonic) FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time Sine, Tri Modulation waveform FB. GAIN Reverb time REV+SYMPHO. Range Description Reverb time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform WAVE SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. 1. Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 316 Appendix A: Parameter Lists REV->SYMPHO. DELAY+ER. One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series. One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel. Parameter Range REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s INI. DLY HI. RATIO Description Parameter Range Description Reverb time DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density FB. GAIN –99 to +99% HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF High-pass filter cutoff frequency REV.BAL 0–100% Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = all symphonic reverb, 100% = all reverb) THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth DLY/ER 0–100% Delay and early reflections balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all early reflections) MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform TYPE S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring Type of early reflection simulation SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF. 0–10 Spread REV->PAN DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density One input, two output reverb and autopan effects in parallel. ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L NOTE R 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R NOTE FB 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY 1. Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV.BAL 0–100% Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all panned reverb, 100% = all reverb) FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth DIR. 1 Panning direction WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. Reverb time L<–>R, L–>R, L<–R, Turn L, Turn R 2. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) Effects Parameters 317 DELAY->ER. DELAY+REV One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in series. One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel. Parameter Range Description Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio DELAY HI 0.1–1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF Low-pass filter cutoff frequency DLY.BAL 0–100% Delay and early reflected delay balance (0% = all early reflected delay, 100% = all delay) 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU DLY.BAL 0–100% Delay and reverb balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb) S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring Type of early reflection simulation REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time TYPE INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L NOTE R 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R NOTE FB 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L NOTE R 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R NOTE FB 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY 1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) 1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 318 Appendix A: Parameter Lists DELAY->REV MULTI FILTER One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series. Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/octave). Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms FB. GAIN DELAY HI Parameter Range Description TYPE 1 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass Feedback delay time TYPE 2 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) TYPE 3 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass FREQ. 1 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 1 frequency 0.1–1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio FREQ. 2 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 2 frequency FREQ. 3 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 3 frequency LEVEL 1 0–100 Filter 1 level Filter 2 level HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU LEVEL 2 0–100 LPF Low-pass filter cutoff frequency LEVEL 3 0–100 Filter 3 level RESO. 1 0–20 Filter 1 resonance 0–100% Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = all delayed reverb, 100% = all delay) RESO. 2 0–20 Filter 2 resonance RESO. 3 0–20 Filter 3 resonance DLY.BAL REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY FREEZE One input, one output basic sampler. Parameter Range REC MODE MANUAL, INPUT REC DLY –1000 to +1000 ms Recording delay. For plus values, recording starts after the trigger is received. For minus values, recording starts before the trigger is received. TRG LVL –60 to 0 dB Input trigger level (i.e., the signal level required to trigger recording or playback) TRG MASK 0–1000 ms Once playback has been triggered, subsequent triggers are ignored for the duration of the TRG MASK time. PLY MODE MOMENT, CONTI., INPUT In MOMENT mode, the sample plays only while the that the PLAY button is pressed. In CONT mode, playback continues once the PLAY button has been pressed. The number of times the sample plays is set using the LOOP NUM parameter. In INPUT mode, playback is triggered by the input signal. START 1 Playback start point in milliseconds 1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) DIST->DELAY One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series. Parameter Range Description DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive MASTER 0–100 Master volume TONE –10 to +10 Tone control N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. GAIN Description In MANUAL mode, recording is started by pressing the REC and PLAY buttons. In INPUT mode, Record-Ready mode is engaged by pressing the REC button, and actual recording is triggered by the input signal. END 1 Playback end point in milliseconds LOOP 1 Loop start point in milliseconds LOOP NUM 0–100 Number of times the sample plays HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth START [SAMPLE] 0–262000 Playback start point in samples DLY.BAL 0–100% Distortion and delay balance (0% = all distortion, 100% = all delayed distortion) END [SAMPLE] 0–262000 Playback end point in samples SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off LOOP [SAMPLE] 0–262000 Loop start point in samples DLY.NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY PITCH –12 to +12 semitones Playback pitch shift MOD.NOTE 2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. FINE –50 to +50 cents Playback pitch shift fine MIDI TRG OFF, C1–C6, ALL PLAY button can be triggered by using MIDI Note on/off messages. 1. ( Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) 2. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 1. 0.0–5941.0 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 ms–5458.3 ms (fs=48 kHz), 0.0–2970.5 ms (fs=88.2 kHz), 0.0 ms–2729.2 ms (fs=96 kHz) Effects Parameters ST REVERB OCTA REVERB Two input, two output stereo reverb. Eight input, eight output reverb. Parameter Range Description Parameter Range 319 Description REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time REV TYPE Hall, Room, Stage, Plate Reverb type REV TYPE Hall, Room, Stage, Plate Reverb type INI. DLY 0.0–100.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins INI. DLY 0.0–100.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread) DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread) DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density E/R BAL. 0–100% Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections) E/R BAL. 0–100% Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections) HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REVERB 5.1 AUTO PAN 5.1 One input, six output reverb for 5.1 surround, with surround panning. Six input, six output autopanner for 5.1 surround. Parameter Range REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time REV TYPE Hall, Room, Stage, Plate Reverb type HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread) DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency 0–100% Divergence determines how the front center signal is fed to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to 0%, it’s fed only to the Left and Right channels (i.e., Phantom Center). When set to 50%, it’s fed equally to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to 100%, it’s fed to only the Center channel (i.e., Real Center). DIV. Parameter Range Description SOURCE OFF, HOLD, INPUT1, INPUT2, INPUT3, INPUT4, INPUT5, INPUT6, MIDI Source specifies the trigger that will initiate auto pan. When you press the TRIGGER button in the screen, auto pan will begin regardless of the setting of this parameter. OFF: No trigger is specified. Auto pan will always be off. HOLD: No trigger is specified. Auto pan will always be on. INPUT 1-6: The input signal to effect inputs 1-6 will be the trigger. MIDI: MIDI note-on messages will be the trigger. TRG LVL –60 to 0 dB If SOURCE is set to INPUT, any signal with a level greater than the setting of this parameter will be detected as a trigger. Description TRG MASK 0–1000 ms Trigger Mask specifies the time from when a trigger is received until the next trigger will be accepted. TIME 0.1 s–10.0 s The time after which autopan starts once it’s been triggered ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Size of simulated room’s reverb POS L/R Left/right listening position SPEED 0.05–40.00 Hz Autopan speed F63–R63 Front/rear listening position DIR. Turn L, Turn R Autopan direction OFFSET –180 to +180 degrees Pan offset HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency POS F/R L63–R63 POS CTRL OFF, NOR, INV 1 ER L/R L63–R63 Left/right early reflections position ER F/R F63–R63 Front/rear early reflections position ER LVL 0–100% Early reflections level ER CTRL OFF, NOR, INV 1 REV L/R L63–R63 Left/right reverb position REV F/R F63–R63 Front/rear reverb position REV LVL 0–100% Reverb level REV CTRL OFF, NOR, INV 1 POS RAD. 0–63 Radius of the panning track at the listening position ER RAD. 0–63 Radius of the panning track for early reflections REV RAD. 0–63 Radius of the panning track for reverb When set to NOR, the position can be set by using the Joystick so long as the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND [EFFECT] button’s indicator is on. When set to INV, the Joystick will work inversely. When set to OFF, Joystick control is off. Appendix 1. • When you press the RESET button, the phase will be initialized to the setting of the OFFSET parameter. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 320 Appendix A: Parameter Lists CHORUS 5.1 M.BAND DYNA. Six input, six output chorus for 5.1 surround. Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band. Parameter FREQ. Range 0.05–40.00 Hz Description Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth Parameter PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level MOD. DLY 0.0–400.0 ms Modulation delay time MID GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform HI. GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency –10 to +10 SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered and the threshold of the low band is increased. For negative values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands are affected the same. 1. PRESENCE Range Description CMP. THRE 24.0 to 0.0 dB Compressor threshold CMP. RAT Compressor ratio 1:1 to 20:1 CMP. ATK 0–120 ms Compressor attack FLANGE 5.1 CMP. REL 1 Compressor release time Six input, six output flanger for 5.1 surround. CMP. KNEE 0–5 Parameter Range Description Compressor knee LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay CMP. BYP OFF, ON Compressor bypass 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed L–M XOVR DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth M–H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency MOD. DLY 0.0–400.0 ms Modulation delay time SLOPE –6 to –12 dB Filter slope –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) CEILING FB. GAIN –6.0 to 0.0 dB, OFF Specifies the maximum output level EXP. THRE –54.0 to –24.0 dB Expander threshold EXP. RAT 1:1 to ∞:1 Expander ratio WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency EXP. REL 1 Expander release time EXP. BYP OFF, ON Expander bypass LIM. THRE –12.0 to 0.0 dB Limiter threshold LIM. ATK 0–120 ms Limiter attack Limiter release time SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off LIM. REL 1 NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. LIM. BYP OFF, ON Limiter bypass LIM. KNEE 0–5 Limiter knee 1. SOLO LOW OFF, ON If this is on, only the low-frequency band will be output. SYMPHO. 5.1 SOLO MID OFF, ON If this is on, only the mid-frequency band will be output. Six input, six output symphonic effect for 5.1 surround. SOLO HIGH OFF, ON If this is on, only the high-frequency band will be output. Parameter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–400.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz) Effects Parameters 321 COMP 5.1 COMPAND 5.1 Six input, six output compressor for 5.1 surround, with individual solo for each band, and gain reduction metering of left and right (L+R), left surround and right surround (LS+RS), center (C), or LFE channels. Six input, six output compander for 5.1 surround, with individual solo for each band, and gain reduction metering of left and right (L+R), left surround and right surround (LS+RS), center (C), or LFE channels. Parameter Range Description Parameter Range Description LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level MID GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level MID GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level HI. GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level HI. GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level PRESENCE –10 to +10 For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered and the threshold of the low band is increased. For negative values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands are affected the same. PRESENCE –10 to +10 For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered and the threshold of the low band is increased. For negative values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands are affected the same. THRE. –24.0 to 0.0 dB Compressor threshold THRE. –24.0 to 0.0 dB Compressor threshold RATIO 1:1 to ∞:1 Compressor ratio RATIO 1:1 to 20:1 Compressor ratio ATTACK 0–120 ms Compressor attack ATTACK 0–120 ms Attack time RELEASE 1 Compressor release time RELEASE 1 Release time KNEE 0–5 Compressor knee WIDTH 1–90 dB LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay Compressor effect range and expander effect width KEY LINK 2 Key-in linking TYPE Soft, Hard Compander type LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay KEY LINK 2 Key-in linking 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency L–M XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency M–H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency SLOPE Filter slope L–M XOVR Specifies the maximum output level M–H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency SLOPE –6 to –12 dB Filter slope –6.0 to 0.0 dB, OFF Specifies the maximum output level CEILING –6 to –12 dB –6.0 to 0.0 dB, OFF SOLO LOW OFF, ON If this is on, only the low-frequency band will be output. CEILING SOLO MID OFF, ON If this is on, only the mid-frequency band will be output. SOLO LOW OFF, ON If this is on, only the low-frequency band will be output. SOLO HIGH OFF, ON If this is on, only the high-frequency band will be output. SOLO MID OFF, ON If this is on, only the mid-frequency band will be output. SOLO HIGH OFF, ON If this is on, only the high-frequency band will be output. 1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz) 2. 5.1: Key-in’s of all inputs are linked 5.0: Key-in’s of L, C, R, LS, and RS are linked (LFE is independent) 3+2: Key-in’s of L, C, and R, and key-in's of LS and RS, are linked respectively (LFE is independent) 2+2: Key-in’s of L and R, and key-in's of LS and RS, are linked respectively (C and LFE are independent) 1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz) 2. 5.1: Key-in’s of all inputs are linked 5.0: Key-in’s of L, C, R, LS, and RS are linked (LFE is independent) 3+2: Key-in’s of L, C, and R, and key-in's of LS and RS, are linked respectively (LFE is independent) 2+2: Key-in’s of L and R, and key-in's of LS and RS, are linked respectively (C and LFE are independent) Other preset effects (COMP276, COMP276S, COMP260, COMP260S, EQUALIZER601, OPENDECK, REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, REV-X PLATE) are optional Add-On Effects. For more information on these effects, refer to the Owner’s Manual that came with the Add-On Effects packages. Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 322 Appendix A: Parameter Lists Effects and tempo synchronization Some of the DM2000’s effects allow you to synchronize the effect with the tempo. There are two such types of effect; delay-type effects and modulation-type effects. For delay-type effects, the delay time will change according to the tempo. For modulation-type effects, the frequency of the modulation signal will change according to the tempo. • Parameters related to tempo synchronization The following five parameters are related to tempo synchronization. 1) SYNC 2) NOTE 3) TEMPO 4) DELAY 5) FREQ. SYNC:.............................This is the on/off switch for tempo synchronization. NOTE and TEMPO: .....These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization. DELAY and FREQ.: .......DELAY is the delay time, and FREQ. is the frequency of the modulation signal. These directly affect the way in which the effect sound will change. DELAY is relevant only for delay-type effects, and FREQ. is relevant only for modulation-type effects. • How the parameters are related Tempo synchronization uses TEMPO and NOTE to calculate a value that will be the basis for the tempo, and continues making adjustments so that this tempo basis stays essentially the same as the DELAY (or FREQ.). This means that when TEMPO, NOTE, and DELAY (or FREQ.) are synchronized, and you change any of these values, the other parameters will be re-set in order to maintain the correct relationship. The parameters that are re-set and the calculation method(*a) used are as follows. If you turn SYNC on → NOTE will be set If you edit DELAY (or FREQ.) → NOTE will be set In this case, the NOTE value is calculated as follows. NOTE = DELAY (or FREQ.)/(4 x (60/TEMPO)) If you edit NOTE → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows. DELAY (or FREQ.) = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO) If you edit TEMPO → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows. DELAY (or FREQ.) = original DELAY (or FREQ.) x (previous TEMPO/new TEMPO) Example 1: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, TEMPO=120, you change NOTE from 8th note to quarter note DELAY= new NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO) = (1/4) x 4 x (60/120) = 0.5 (sec) = 500 ms Thus, the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms. Example 2: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, NOTE=8th note, you change TEMPO from 120 to 121 DELAY= original DELAY x (previous TEMPO/new TEMPO) = 250 x (120/121) = 247.9 (ms) Thus, the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247.9 ms. *a Rounded values are used for the calculation results. • Ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values The ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values are limited by the ranges of the DELAY or FREQ. values. You cannot set NOTE or TEMPO values that would cause DELAY or FREQ. to exceed their maximum possible values when synchronized to tempo. This limitation also applies even when SYNC is OFF. • Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters. • It is a common value shared by all effects • You cannot stored it to or recall it from the Effects Library. (You can store it to and recall it from a Scene.) This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled as when that effect was stored. Here is an example. Store the effect: TEMPO=120 → Change TEMPO to 60 → Recall the effect: TEMPO=60 Normally when you change the TEMPO, the DELAY (or FREQ.) will be re-set accordingly. However if the DELAY (or FREQ.) were changed, the effect would sound differently when recalled than when it was stored. To prevent the effect from changing in this way between store and recall, the DM2000 does not update the DELAY (or FREQ.) value when an effect is recalled, even if the TEMPO is no longer the same as when that effect was stored. * The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values. = 1/48 = 1/24 = 1/16 = 1/12 = 3/32 = 1/8 = 1/6 = 3/16 = 1/4 = 3/8 = 1/2 = 3/4 = 1/1 = 2/1 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Preset EQ Parameters 323 Preset EQ Parameters # Parameter Title 01 Bass Drum 1 02 Bass Drum 2 03 Snare Drum 1 04 Snare Drum 2 05 Tom-tom 1 06 Cymbal 07 High Hat 08 Percussion 09 E. Bass 1 10 E. Bass 2 11 Syn. Bass 1 12 Syn. Bass 2 13 Piano 1 LOW G L-MID # H-MID Parameter Title HIGH LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.5 dB –8.5 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB 224 Hz 600 Hz 3.15 kHz 5.30 kHz PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF +3.5 dB –3.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB 14 Piano 2 F 100 Hz 265 Hz 1.06 kHz 5.30 kHz F Q 1.2 10 0.9 — Q G PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF +8.0 dB –7.0 dB +6.0 dB ON 15 E. G. Clean 5.6 10 0.7 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.0 dB –5.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.5 dB 265 Hz 400 Hz 1.32 kHz 4.50 kHz F 80 Hz 400 Hz 2.50 kHz 12.5 kHz F Q 1.4 4.5 2.2 — Q G PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +4.5 dB F 132 Hz 1.00 kHz 3.15 kHz 5.00 kHz Q 1.2 4.5 0.11 — G L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING +1.5 dB –8.5 dB +2.5 dB +4.0 dB F 180 Hz 335 Hz 2.36 kHz 4.00 kHz Q — 10 0.7 0.1 G PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING +2.0 dB –7.5 dB +2.0 dB +1.0 dB 16 E. G. Crunch 1 0.0 dB +4.0 dB +2.0 dB 140 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.60 kHz 8 4.5 0.63 9 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB F 125 Hz 450 Hz 3.35 kHz 19.0 kHz 0.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB 3.35 kHz 12.5 kHz 670 Hz 4.50 kHz 6.30 kHz 10 1.2 0.28 Q PEAKING H.SHELF 0.0 dB +3.0 dB 19 E. G. Dist. 2 –8.5 dB +4.5 dB +4.0 dB 4.25 kHz 12.5 kHz 425 Hz 1.06 kHz 13.2 kHz — 8 0.9 — Q PEAKING H.SHELF –2.5 dB +1.0 dB +0.5 dB F 95 Hz 425 Hz 2.80 kHz 7.50 kHz Q — 0.5 1 — G L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF –4.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB F 100 Hz 400 Hz 2.80 kHz 17.0 kHz Q — 4.5 0.56 — G L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF –7.5 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB F 35.5 Hz 112 Hz 2.00 kHz 4.00 kHz Q — 5 4.5 — G PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF +3.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.5 dB +0.5 dB F 112 Hz 112 Hz 2.24 kHz 4.00 kHz Q 0.1 5 6.3 — G PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF +3.5 dB +8.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 20 A. G. Stroke 1 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +4.0 dB 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.30 kHz 0.9 4.5 3.5 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –3.5 dB –2.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB F 300 Hz 750 Hz 2.00 kHz 3.55 kHz 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 6.70 kHz — 4.5 4.5 0.12 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G 0.0 dB –5.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB F 180 Hz 355 Hz 4.00 kHz 4.25 kHz — 7 4.5 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB 90 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz 950 Hz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz 0.1 8 4.5 — Q PEAKING H.SHELF 0.0 dB +1.5 dB 0.0 dB F 125 Hz 180 Hz 1.12 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 1.6 8 2.2 — G L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF –6.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB 95 Hz 950 Hz 3.15 kHz 7.50 kHz — 8 0.9 — 2 0.7 7 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB F 190 Hz 1.00 kHz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz Q 26 Male Vocal 2 2.8 PEAKING 0.11 4.5 0.56 0.11 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.0 dB –5.0 dB –2.5 dB +4.0 dB F 170 Hz 236 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.70 kHz Q 0.11 10 5.6 — DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Appendix F Q 25 Male Vocal 1 — PEAKING 224 Hz 85 Hz PEAKING 4.5 PEAKING –0.5 dB F +2.5 dB 9 PEAKING F Q PEAKING — L.SHELF G F G — H.SHELF 106 Hz Q 24 Brass Sec. 4 PEAKING –2.0 dB Q 23 A. G. Arpeg. 2 10 PEAKING F Q 22 A. G. Arpeg. 1 — PEAKING G Q 21 A. G. Stroke 2 — H.SHELF 1.06 kHz 106 Hz PEAKING 10 PEAKING 315 Hz F –4.0 dB 9 PEAKING +6.0 dB Q L.SHELF — L.SHELF G F G — H.SHELF 950 Hz 1.4 0.0 dB 0.16 PEAKING 355 Hz 212 Hz PEAKING 0.4 PEAKING +5.0 dB F –2.0 dB 8 L.SHELF G Q L.SHELF — PEAKING +4.5 dB F G 6.3 PEAKING F Q 18 E. G. Dist. 1 10 PEAKING G Q 17 E. G. Crunch 2 0.18 PEAKING 324 # Appendix A: Parameter Lists Parameter Title 27 Female Vo. 1 28 Female Vo. 2 L-MID H-MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –1.0 dB +1.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB F 118 Hz 400 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.00 kHz Q 0.18 0.45 0.56 0.14 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –7.0 dB +1.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB Hold (ms) 2.56 F 112 Hz 335 Hz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz Decay (ms) 331 Q 29 Chorus & Harmo 30 Total EQ 1 PEAKING PEAKING –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB F 90 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz Q 2.8 2 0.7 7 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +6.5 dB F 95 Hz 950 Hz 2.12 kHz 16.0 kHz 35 Tom-tom 2 36 Piano 3 37 Piano Low 38 Piano High 39 Fine-EQ Cass 40 Narrator 3 Ducking A. Dr. BD DUCKING GATE –26 Range (dB) –56 Attack (ms) 0 Threshold (dB) –19 Range (dB) –22 Attack (ms) 93 Hold (ms) 1.20 S Decay (ms) 6.32 S Threshold (dB) –11 Range (dB) –53 Attack (ms) 0 Hold (ms) 1.93 Decay (ms) 400 5.6 — H.SHELF Threshold (dB) –8 Range (dB) –23 +2.0 dB +6.0 dB 750 Hz 1.80 kHz 18.0 kHz 7 2.8 5.6 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +1.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB F 67 Hz 850 Hz 1.90 kHz 15.0 kHz — 0.28 0.7 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G +3.5 dB –10.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB F 118 Hz 315 Hz 4.25 kHz 20.0 kHz 2 10 0.4 0.4 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB F 224 Hz 560 Hz 4.25 kHz 4.00 kHz — 4.5 2.8 0.1 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –9.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB F 90 Hz 212 Hz 5.30 kHz 17.0 kHz — 4.5 1.2 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +4.5 dB –13.0 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB F 100 Hz 475 Hz 2.36 kHz 10.0 kHz 8 10 9 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –5.5 dB +1.5 dB +6.0 dB 0.0 dB F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 12.5 kHz 10 6.3 2.2 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –5.5 dB +1.5 dB +5.0 dB +3.0 dB F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 5.60 kHz 10 6.3 2.2 0.1 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –1.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +3.0 dB F 75 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 2 Value PEAKING +1.5 dB Q GATE Parameter Threshold (dB) 2.2 95 Hz Q Gate Type PEAKING +4.0 dB Q 1 Title 7 F Q # PEAKING G Q (fs = 44.1 kHz) — PEAKING Q 34 Snare Drum 3 0.2 –2.0 dB Q 33 Bass Drum 3 0.16 PEAKING Q 32 Total EQ 3 — G Q 31 Total EQ 2 Preset Gate Parameters LOW — 4.5 1.8 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –4.0 dB –1.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB F 106 Hz 710 Hz 2.50 kHz 10.0 kHz Q 4 7 0.63 — DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 4 A. Dr. SN GATE Attack (ms) 1 Hold (ms) 0.63 Decay (ms) 238 Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) Preset Compressor Parameters # 1 Title Comp Type COMP Parameter 3 Expand Compander (H) EXPAND COMPAND-H COMPAND-S 6 A. Dr. BD COMP COMPAND-H A. Dr. SN COMP 2 Attack (ms) 60 Attack (ms) 38 Out gain (dB) 0.0 A. Dr. SN EXPAND COMPAND-S EXPAND 54 Threshold (dB) –23 Threshold (dB) –12 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Ratio ( :1) 2 1 Attack (ms) 15 Out gain (dB) 4.5 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 12 E. B. Finger COMP 3.5 Knee 2 Knee Release (ms) 70 Release (ms) 470 Threshold (dB) –10 Threshold (dB) –12 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Attack (ms) 1 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 13 E. B. Slap COMP 0.0 6 250 2 6 Out gain (dB) 4.0 Knee hard Release (ms) 133 Threshold (dB) –8 Threshold (dB) –10 Ratio ( :1) 4 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 Attack (ms) 25 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 0.0 Out gain (dB) 3.0 Width (dB) 24 Knee hard Release (ms) 180 Release (ms) 250 –24 Threshold (dB) –9 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 14 Syn. Bass COMP 3 9 15 Piano1 COMP 5.5 9 Attack (ms) 17 Out gain (dB) 1.0 Knee 2 Knee hard Release (ms) 58 Release (ms) 238 Threshold (dB) –11 Threshold (dB) –18 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 1 Attack (ms) Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 16 Piano2 COMP –1.5 Out gain (dB) Knee 7 7 6.0 2 Release (ms) 192 Release (ms) Threshold (dB) –17 Threshold (dB) –8 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 8 17 E. Guitar COMP 3.5 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 174 7 2.5 Knee 2 Knee Release (ms) 12 Release (ms) 261 Threshold (dB) –23 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 4 Threshold (dB) –10 2 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 0 Attack (ms) 18 A. Guitar COMP 0.5 Out gain (dB) Knee 2 151 5 1.5 2 Release (ms) 238 –11 Threshold (dB) –8 Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Ratio ( :1) 2 Attack (ms) 11 Attack (ms) 33 Out gain (dB) 0.0 Out gain (dB) 1.5 Width (dB) 10 Knee Release (ms) 128 Release (ms) 749 Threshold (dB) –20 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Knee Release (ms) 19 Strings1 COMP 2 Threshold (dB) –12 2 Ratio ( :1) 1.5 2 Attack (ms) 93 Out gain (dB) 1.5 5.0 2 749 20 Strings2 COMP Knee Release (ms) 4 1.35 S DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Appendix A. Dr. Tom –3.5 Width (dB) 842 Ratio ( :1) 10 2 Out gain (dB) Release (ms) Release (ms) A. Dr. SN COMPAND-S 250 Knee 9 11 A. Dr. OverTop –24 Release (ms) Ratio ( :1) 8 Value Ratio ( :1) Width (dB) 7 Parameter –8 Ratio ( :1) A. Dr. BD Type 2.5 Threshold (dB) 5 Title Ratio ( :1) Release (ms) Compander (S) # Threshold (dB) Width (dB) 4 (fs = 44.1 kHz) Threshold (dB) Knee 2 Value 325 326 # 21 Appendix A: Parameter Lists Title Strings3 Type COMP Parameter BrassSection COMP Syn. Pad COMP 25 26 27 28 SamplingPerc Sampling BD Sampling SN Hip Comp Solo Vocal1 COMPAND-S COMP COMP COMPAND-S COMP COMP 2 Attack (ms) 76 Attack (ms) 1 Out gain (dB) 2.5 COMP EXPAND 2 Out gain (dB) Knee 2.0 2 Release (ms) 284 Threshold (dB) –18 Threshold (dB) –14 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Attack (ms) 18 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 4.0 32 Announcer COMPAND-H 1 Out gain (dB) 1 –2.5 Width (dB) 18 Release (ms) 226 Release (ms) 180 Threshold (dB) –13 Threshold (dB) –9 Ratio ( :1) 2 Ratio ( :1) 3 Attack (ms) 58 Attack (ms) 20 Out gain (dB) 2.0 33 Limiter1 COMPAND-S 1 Out gain (dB) Width (dB) –3.0 90 Release (ms) 238 Release (ms) Threshold (dB) –18 Threshold (dB) 0 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Ratio ( :1) ∞ Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 8 –2.5 34 Limiter2 COMP Attack (ms) 3.90 s 0 Out gain (dB) 0.0 Width (dB) 18 Knee hard Release (ms) 238 Release (ms) 319 Threshold (dB) –14 Threshold (dB) –18 3.5 Ratio ( :1) 2 Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) 2 Attack (ms) 94 Out gain (dB) 2.5 Out gain (dB) 3.5 35 Total Comp1 COMP Knee 4 Knee hard Release (ms) 35 Release (ms) 447 Threshold (dB) –18 Threshold (dB) –16 Ratio ( :1) 4 Ratio ( :1) 6 Attack (ms) 8 Attack (ms) 11 Out gain (dB) 6.0 36 Total Comp2 COMP Out gain (dB) 8.0 Knee hard Knee Release (ms) 354 Release (ms) Threshold (dB) –23 Ratio ( :1) 20 Attack (ms) 15 Out gain (dB) 0.0 Width (dB) 15 Release (ms) 163 Threshold (dB) –20 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Attack (ms) 31 Out gain (dB) 2.0 1 342 Threshold (dB) –8 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Attack (ms) 26 Out gain (dB) 1.5 3 331 Threshold (dB) –9 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Attack (ms) 39 Out gain (dB) 2.5 Knee Release (ms) DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Click Erase 186 Release (ms) Chorus 31 –33 Release (ms) Knee 30 Value Ratio ( :1) Release (ms) Solo Vocal2 Parameter 1.5 Knee 29 Type Ratio ( :1) Knee 24 Title Threshold (dB) Knee 23 # –17 Knee 22 Value Threshold (dB) 2 226 1 180 327 Dynamics Parameters Dynamics Parameters The dynamics effects for each channel strip include a Gate section (only for Input Channels) and a Comp section. The Gate section includes Gate and Ducking types. The Comp section includes Compressor, Expander, Compander Hard (COMP. (H)), and Compander Soft (COMP. (S)) types. GATE Section (Only for Input Channels) GATE A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount (RANGE). Parameter Range Description THRESHOLD (dB) –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points) This determines the level at which the gate effect is applied. RANGE (dB) –70 to 0 (71 points) This determines the amount of attenuation when the gate closes. ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points) This determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold level. HOLD (ms) 44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec 48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec 88.2kHz: 0.01 ms – 1.06 sec 96kHz: 0.01 ms – 981 ms (160 points) This determines how long the gate stays open once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold. DECAY (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec 88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec 96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec (160 points) This determines how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. I/O Characteristics Time Series Analysis Output Signal THRESHOLD Output Level Input Level Output Level Input Signal ATTACK HOLD DECAY THRESHOLD RANGE RANGE Input Level Time Time Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 328 Appendix A: Parameter Lists DUCKING Ducking is commonly used for voice-over applications in which the background music level is reduced automatically when an announcer speaks. When the KEY IN source signal level exceeds the specified THRESHOLD, the output level is attenuated by a specified amount (RANGE). Parameter Range Description THRESHOLD (dB) –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points) This determines the level of trigger signal (KEY IN) required to activate ducking. RANGE (dB) –70 to 0 (71 points) This determines the amount of attenuation when ducking is activated. ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points) This determines how soon the signal is ducked once the ducker has been triggered. HOLD (ms) 44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec 48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec 88.2kHz: 0.01 ms – 1.06 sec 96kHz: 0.01 ms – 981 ms (160 points) This determines how long ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen below the THRESHOLD level. DECAY (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec 88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec 96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec (160 points) This determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. I/O Characteristics Time Series Analysis Output Level Output Signal Input Level Output Level Input Signal THRESHOLD ATTACK HOLD DECAY THRESHOLD RANGE RANGE Input Level DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Time Time Dynamics Parameters 329 COMP Section COMP The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO. The COMP processor can also be used as a limiter, which, with a RATIO of ∞:1, reduces the level to the threshold. This means that the limiter’s output level never actually exceeds the threshold. Parameter Range Description THRESHOLD (dB) –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points) This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compressor. RATIO 1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1, 8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points) This determines the amount of compression, that is, the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level. ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points) This determines how soon the signal will be compressed once the compressor has been triggered. RELEASE (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec 88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec 96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec (160 points) This determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. OUT GAIN (dB) 0.0 to +18.0 (180 points) This sets the compressor's output signal level. KNEE Hard, 1–5 (6 points) This determines how compression is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings, compression is applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound. I/O Characteristics (KNEE=hard, OUT GAIN=0.0dB) Time Series Analysis (RATIO=∞:1) RATIO Output Level THRESHOLD Output Signal Input Level Output Level Input signal ATTACK RELEASE THRESHOLD Input Level Time Time Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 330 Appendix A: Parameter Lists EXPAND An expander attenuates signals below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO. Parameter Range Description THRESHOLD (dB) –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points) This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander. RATIO 1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1, 8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points) This determines the amount of expansion. ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points) This determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level exceeds the threshold. RELEASE (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec 88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec 96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec (160 points) This determines how soon the signal is expanded once the signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. OUT GAIN (dB) 0.0 to +18.0 (180 points) This sets the expander's output signal level. Hard, 1–5 (6 points) This determines how expansion is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings, expansion is applied gradually as the signal falls below the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound. KNEE I/O Characteristics (KNEE=hard, OUT GAIN=0.0dB) Time Series Analysis (RATIO=∞:1) Output Level THRESHOLD Output Signal Input Level Output Level Input Signal ATTACK RELEASE THRESHOLD RATIO Input Level DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Time Time Dynamics Parameters 331 Output Level COMPANDER HARD (H) COMPANDER SOFT (S) The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor, expander and limiter. THRESHOLD 0dB Input Level WIDTH The companders function differently at the following levels: 1 0 dB and higher .................................... Functions as a limiter. 2 Exceeding the threshold....................... Functions as a compressor. 3 Below the threshold and width ........... Functions as an expander. The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5:1, while the soft compander has an expansion ratio of 1.5:1. The expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to maximum. The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2. * The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values, and can be increased by up to 18 dB. * The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change caused by the compression and expansion processes. Parameter Range Description THRESHOLD (dB) –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points) This determines the level at which compression is applied. RATIO 1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1, 8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, (15 points) This determines the amount of compression. ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points) This determines how soon the signal is compressed or expanded once the compander has been triggered. RELEASE (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec 88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec 96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec (160 points) This determines how soon the compressor or expander returns to the normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below or exceeds the threshold respectively. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. OUT GAIN (dB) –18.0 to 0.0 (180 points) This sets the compander's output signal level. 0–90 (91 points) This determines how far below the threshold expansion will be applied. The expander is activated when the level drops below the threshold and width. WIDTH (dB) Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 332 Appendix B: Specifications Appendix B: Specifications General Spec Number of scene memories 99 Internal Sampling Frequency Signal Delay External 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz Normal rate: 44.1 kHz–10% to 48 kHz+6% Double rate: 88.2 kHz–10% to 96 kHz+6% fs=48 kHz Less than 1.6 ms CH INPUT to OMNI OUT fs=96 kHz Less than 0.8 ms CH INPUT to OMNI OUT 100 mm motorized with touch sense × 17 Fader +10 to –138, –∞ dB input faders Fader Resolution 0 to –138, –∞ dB master faders, stereo fader Total Harmonic Distortion1 (CH INPUT to OMNI OUT) (Input Gain=Min.) fs=48 kHz Less than 0.05% 20 Hz to 20 kHz @ +14 dB into 600 Ω Less than 0.01% 1 kHz @ +24 dB into 600 Ω fs=96 kHz Less than 0.05% 20 Hz to 40 kHz @ +14 dB into 600 Ω Less than 0.01% 1 kHz @ +24 dB into 600 Ω Frequency Response (CH INPUT to OMNI OUT) fs=48 kHz 20 Hz–20 kHz, 0.5, –1.5 dB @ +4 dB into 600 Ω fs=96 kHz 20 Hz–40 kHz, 0.5, –1.5 dB @ +4 dB into 600 Ω 110 dB typ. DA Converter (OMNI OUT) Dynamic Range (maximum level to noise level) 106 dB typ. AD+DA (to OMNI OUT) @ fs=48 kHz 106 dB typ. AD+DA (to OMNI OUT) @ fs=96 kHz –128 dB Equivalent Input Noise –86 dB residual output noise. OMNI OUT (STEREO OUT off) Hum & Noise2 (20 Hz–20 kHz) Rs=150 Ω Input Gain=Max. –86 dB (90 dB S/N) OMNI OUT Input Pad =0 dB (STEREO fader at nominal level and all CH INPUT faders at minimum level) Input Pad =0 dB Input Sensitivity =–60 dB –64 dB (68 dB S/N) OMNI OUT (STEREO fader at nominal level and one CH INPUT fader at nominal level) Maximum Voltage Gain 74 dB CH INPUT (CH1–16) to OMNI OUT (STEREO, BUS, AUX) Crosstalk (@ 1 kHz) 80 dB adjacent input channels (CH1–16) 80 dB input to output Input Gain=Min. Phantom switch +48 V DC Pad switch 0/20 dB attenuation Gain control 44 dB (–60 to –16), detented Peak indicator LED (red) turns on when post HA level reaches 3 dB below clipping at digital domain Signal indicator LED (green) turns on when post HA level reaches 20 dB below nominal at digital domain AD converter 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times oversampling (fs=88.2, 96 kHz) Analog Input (OMNI IN 1–4) AD converter 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times oversampling (fs=88.2, 96 kHz) Option Input (SLOT 1–2) Available cards Optional digital interface cards (MY16, MY8, MY4 series) Digital Input (2TR IN DIGITAL 1–2) SRC On/off (1:3 and 3:1 maximum input to output sample rate ratio) AD Input (1–16) DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual General Spec Input patch Phase Gate-type3 333 — Normal/reverse On/off Key in: 12 ch Group (1–12, 13–24, 25–36, 37–48)/AUX1–8 On/off Comp-type4 Key in: self /Stereo Link Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader Attenuator EQ –96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step) 4-band PEQ (TYPE1)5 On/off Input Channel CH1–48 Delay 0–43400 samples On/off — Fader 100 mm motorized (INPUT/AUX1–8) Aux send Solo OSCILLATOR On/off Pre fader/after pan 127 positions (Left= 1–63, Center, Right= 1–63) Surround pan 127 × 127 positions [(Left= 1–63, Center, Right= 1–63)] x [(Front= 1–63, Center, Rear= 1–63)] LFE level –∞, –96 dB to +10 dB (256 step) Routing STEREO, BUS1–8, DIRECT OUT Direct out Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader Displayed on LCD Peak hold on/off Level control Analog rotary potentiometer AD converter 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times oversampling (@fs=88.2, 96 kHz) Talkback select Built-in microphone/AD IN 1–16/OMNI IN 1–4 On/off — Level 0 to –96 dB (1 dB step) On/off — Waveform Sine 100 Hz, sine 1 kHz, sine 10 kHz, 400 Hz/1 kHz, pink noise, burst noise Routing BUS1–8, AUX1–8, STEREO L, R Output patch STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX1–8, SURROUND MONITOR, CONTROL ROOM, DIRECT OUT 1–48, INSERT OUT (CH1–48, BUS1–8, AUX1–8, STEREO), MONITOR MATRIX OUT, SOLO OUT, CASCADE OUT (BUS1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO, SOLO) DA converter 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times oversampling (@fs=88.2, 96 kHz) OMNI OUT 1–12 Dither 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1–2 Option Output (SLOT 1–2) AUX1–8; pre fader/post fader Pan Metering TALKBACK On/off On/off Word length 16, 20, 24-bit Output patch STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX 1–8, CONTROL ROOM, DIRECT OUT 1–48, INSERT OUT (CH 1–48, BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO), SOLO OUT, CASCADE OUT (BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO, SOLO) Available card Optional digital interface card (MY16, MY8, MY4 series) Output patch STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX 1–8, SURROUND MONITOR, CONTROL ROOM, DIRECT OUT 1–48, INSERT OUT (CH 1–48, BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO), MONITOR MATRIX OUT, SOLO OUT, CASCADE OUT (BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO, SOLO) Dither On/off Word length 16/20/24-bit Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 334 Appendix B: Specifications Comp-type4 Attenuator EQ On/off Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader –96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step) 4-band PEQ5 On/off STEREO On/off — Fader 100 mm motorized Balance 127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63) Delay 0–29100 samples Displayed on LCD Metering Peak hold on/off 32-elements x2 LED meters Comp-type4 Attenuator EQ On/off Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader –96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step) 4-band PEQ5 On/off BUS1–8 On/off — Fader 100 mm motorized Delay 0–29100 samples Bus to stereo On/off Level (–∞, –138 dB to 0 dB) Pan: 127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63) Metering Comp-type4 Attenuator EQ AUX1–8 INTERNAL EFFECTS (EFFECT 1–4) Peak hold on/off On/off Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader –96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step) 4-band PEQ5 On/off On/off — Fader 100 mm motorized Delay 0–29100 samples Metering SURROUND MONITOR Displayed on LCD Displayed on LCD Peak hold on/off Mute On/off Solo On/off Source BUS1–8, SLOT 1–2 Monitor to C-R On/off Oscillator Pink noise/500–2 kHz/1 kHz Monitor matrix 6.1→6.1, 6.1→5.1, 6.1→3-1, 6.1→ST, 5.1→5.1, 5.1→3-1, 5.1→ST, 3-1→3-1, 3-1→ST Bass management 5 presets Monitor alignment ATT (–12.0 dB to 12 dB 0.1 dB step), Delay (0–30.0 msec 0.02 msec step) Bypass On/off In/out Effect-in from 8-in, 8-out (EFFECT1): depends on effects type 2-in, 2-out (EFFECT2–4): depends on effects type AUX1–8/INSERT OUT/effect-out (out 1, 2 only) Effect-out 1, 2 to Input patch/effect-in DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual General Spec Power Requirements Dimensions 335 U.S./Canada 120 V, 60 Hz 135 W Other 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz 135 W (H x D x W) 200 x 585 x 436 mm (7.8" x 23.0" x 17.1") With MB1000 and SP1000 installed: 295 x 635 x 486 mm (11.6" x 25.0" x 19.1") Net weight 20 kg (75 lbs) Operating free-air temperature range 10–35°C (50–95°F) Storage temperature range –20 to 60°C (–4 to 140°F) Supplied Accessories AC Cable, CD-ROM (Studio Manager), Owner’s Manual, Studio Manager Installation Guide Options Digital interface card (MY16, MY8, MY4 series) PEAK METER BRIDGE: MB1000 SIDE PANEL: SP1000 RACK MOUNT KIT: RK1 1. Total harmonic distortion is measured with a 6 dB/octave filter @ 80 kHz. 2. Hum & Noise are measured with a 6 dB/octave filter @ 12.7 kHz; equivalent to a 20 kHz filter with infinite dB/octave attenuation. 3. See “Gate Parameters” on page 335. 4. See “Comp Parameters” on page 336. 5. See “EQ Parameters” on page 335. EQ Parameters LOW/HPF L-MID H-MID 0.1–10.0 (41 points) low shelving HPF Q F 0.1–10.0 (41 points) HIGH /LPF 0.1–10.0 (41 points) high shelving LPF 21.2 Hz–20 kHz (1/12 oct step) ±18 dB (0.1 dB step) HPF: on/off G ±18 dB (0.1 dB step) ±18 dB (0.1 dB step) LPF: on/off Gate Parameters Threshold –54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step) Range –70 dB to 0 dB (1 dB step) Attack 0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step) 0.02 ms–1.96 s (216 points) @ 48 kHz Gate Hold 0.02 ms–2.13 s (216 points) @ 44.1 kHz 0.01 ms–981 ms (216 points) @ 96 kHz 0.01 ms–1.06 s (216 points) @ 88.2 kHz 5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz Decay 6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz 3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz 3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz Threshold –54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step) Range –70 dB to 0 dB (1 dB step) Attack 0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step) 0.02 ms–1.96 s (216 points) @ 48 kHz Ducking Hold 0.02 ms–2.13 s (216 points) @ 44.1 kHz 0.01 ms–981 ms (216 points) @ 96 kHz 0.01 ms–1.06 s (216 points) @ 88.2 kHz 5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz 6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz Appendix Decay 3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz 3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 336 Appendix B: Specifications Comp Parameters Compressor Threshold –54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step) Ratio (x :1) x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20, ∞ (16 points) Out gain 0 dB to +18 dB (0.1 dB step) Knee Hard, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (6 step) Attack 0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step) 5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz Release 6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz 3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz 3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz Threshold Expander –54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step) Ratio (x :1) x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20, ∞ (16 points) Out gain 0 dB to +18 dB (0.1 dB step) Knee Hard, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (6 points) Attack 0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step) 5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz Release 6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz 3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz 3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz Compander H Threshold –54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step) Ratio (x :1) x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20 (15 points) Out gain –18 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step) Width 1 dB–90 dB (1 dB step) Attack 0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step) 5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz Release 6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz 3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz 3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz Compander S Threshold –54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step) Ratio (x :1) x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20 (15 points) Out gain –18 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step) Width 1 dB–90 dB (1 dB step) Attack 0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step) 5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz Release 6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz 3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz 3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Libraries 337 Libraries Effect library (EFFECT 1–4) Compressor library Gate library EQ library Channel library Surround Monitor library Input patch library Output patch library Bus to Stereo library Presets 61 (EFFECT 2–4: 53) User memories 67 Presets 36 User memories 92 Presets 4 User memories 124 Presets 40 User memories 160 Presets 2 User memories 127 Presets 1 User memories 32 Presets 1 User memories 32 Presets 1 User memories 32 Presets 1 User memories 32 Analog Input Spec Input PAD GAIN Actual Load Impedance For Use With Nominal Sensitivity1 –60 dB 0 3k Ω INPUT 1–16 –16 dB 50–600 Ω Mics & 600 Ω Lines 20 OMNI IN 1–4 — 10k Ω 600 Ω Lines Input level Nominal Max. before clip –70 dB (0.245 mV) –60 dB (0.775 mV) –40 dB (7.75 mV) –26 dB (38.8 mV) –16 dB (0.123 V) +4 dB (1.23 V) –6 dB (388 mV) +4 dB (1.23 V) +24 dB (12.28 V) +4 dB (1.23 V) +4 dB (1.23 V) +24 dB (12.28 V) Connector XLR-3-31 type (Balanced)2 1. Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of +4 dB (1.23 V) or the nominal output level when the unit is set to maximum gain. (All faders and level controls are maximum position.) 2. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD). In these specifications, when dB represents a specific voltage, 0 dB is referenced to 0.775 Vrms. All input AD converters (INPUT 1–16, OMNI INPUT 1–4, TALKBACK) are 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling. (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz) +48 V DC (phantom power) is supplied to CH INPUT (1–16) XLR type connectors via individual switches. Analog Output Spec Actual Source Impedance For Use With Nominal OMNI OUT 1–12 75 Ω 600 Ω Lines PHONES 100 Ω Output Output level Connector Nominal Max. before clip +4 dB (1.23 V) +24 dB (12.28 V) 8 Ω Phones 4 mW 25 mW Stereo Phone Jack (TRS) 40 Ω Phones 12 mW 75 mW (Unbalanced)2 XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)1 1. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD). 2. PHONES stereo phone jack is unbalanced (Tip=LEFT, Ring=RIGHT, Sleeve=GND). DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Appendix In these specifications, when dB represents a specific voltage, 0 dB is referenced to 0.775 Vrms. All output DA converters (OMINI OUT 1–12, PHONES) are 24-bit, 128-times oversampling. (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz) 338 Appendix B: Specifications Digital Input Spec Input 2TR IN DIGITAL Format Data length Level Connector 1 AES/EBU 24-bit RS422 2 IEC-60958 24-bit 0.5 Vpp/75 Ω XLR-3-31 type (Balanced)1 Phono 1. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD). Digital Output Spec Output Format 1 2TR OUT DIGITAL 2 AES/EBU1 Professional use IEC-609584 Consumer use Data length 24-bit2 24-bit2 1. Channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1 Type: linear PCM Emphasis: NO Sampling rate: depends on the internal configuration 2. Dither: word length 16/20/24 bit 3. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD). 4. Channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL 2 Type: linear PCM Category code: Digital signal mixer Copy prohibit: NO Emphasis: NO Clock accuracy: Level II (1000 ppm) Sampling rate: depends on the internal configuration DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Level RS422 Connector XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)3 0.5V pp/75 Ω Phono I/O Slot Spec (1–2) 339 I/O Slot Spec (1–2) Each I/O SLOT accepts a digital interface card. SLOT #1 has a serial interface. Maker Model Function INPUT OUTPUT 1 MY8-AT 8 8 MY16-AT 16 16 MY8-TD 8 8 MY16-TD 16 16 MY8-AE Digital I/O MY16-AE 8 8 16 16 8 8 MY8-AEB MY8-AE96 Yamaha MY4-AD MY8-AD24 MY8-DA96 MY8ADDA96 ANALOG IN Apogee 2 ANALOG OUT ANALOG I/O 20 bit 4 — 44.1/48 kHz 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz 20 bit 44.1/48 kHz 24 bit 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz IEEE1394 24 bit 44.1/48 kHz ADAT 24 bit — 24 bit 2 8 8 16 16 Effect & I/O 8 8 AP8AD ANALOG IN 8 — AP8DA ANALOG OUT — 8 mLAN Interface Sampling Rate Converter for input 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz 24 bit 8 Y96K Can handle 24 bit/96 kHz by double channel mode 44.1/48 kHz 24 bit — 8 8 Y56K TASCAM — MY8-mLAN Waves Note 24 bit 8 MY16mLAN The number of Available cards Frequency ADAT 4 MY8-AD96 MY4-DA Resolution AES/EBU MY8-AE96S MY8-AD Format Maximum 5 nodes 44.1/48 kHz 1 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz 2 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz 2 4ch @fs=88.2, 96 kHz 1. Selectable from STEREO/BUS/AUX/DIRECT/EXT INSERT/SURROUND MONITOR/CR MONITOR. Details depend on each interface card. Control I/O Spec I/O Port Format Level USB 0 V–3.3 V IN1 MIDI — DIN Connector 5P OUT MIDI — DIN Connector 5P SMPTE Nominal –10 dB/10k Ω IN — TTL/75 Ω BNC Connector OUT — TTL/75 Ω BNC Connector TO HOST USB MIDI TIME CODE INPUT WORD CLOCK C-MOS IN, Open collector OUT 1pin: 150 mA, 8pin total: 500 mA Connector in Console B type USB connector XLR-3-31 type (Balanced)2 CONTROL — REMOTE — RS422 D-SUB Connector 9P (Male) METER — RS422 D-SUB Connector 15P (Female) D-SUB Connector 25P (Female) 1. MIDI IN can use as TIME CODE IN MTC. 2. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD). Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 340 Appendix B: Specifications REMOTE Port Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 GND 6 RX+/GND1 2 RX–/RX–1 7 RTS/RX+1 3 TX–/TX+1 8 CTS/TX–1 4 TX+/GND1 9 GND 5 N.C. 1. RS422 (for AD8HR, AD824)/SONY 9 pin protocol (P2), ESAM II CONTROL Port Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 GPO0 14 GPO1 2 GPO2 15 GPO3 3 GPO4 16 GPO5 4 GPO6 17 GPO7 5 GND 18 GND 6 GND 19 GND 7 GND 20 GND 8 GND 21 +5V 9 +5V 22 GPI0 10 GPI1 23 GPI2 11 GPI3 24 N.C. 12 N.C. 25 N.C. 13 N.C. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Dimensions 341 154 87 355 154 200 112 430(Not included Screw heads) 436(Included Screw heads) 32 Dimensions 156 280 101 374 565 585 Unit: mm Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 342 Appendix B: Specifications 295 486 Dimensions with the MB1000 and SP1000 installed: 635 Unit: mm Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. European Models Purchaser/User Information specified in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2. Inrush Current: 28 A Conforms to Environments: E1, E2, E3 and E4 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Appendix C: MIDI 343 Appendix C: MIDI Scene Memory to Program Change Table Program Change # Initial Scene # 1 User Scene # Program Change # Initial Scene # 01 44 2 02 3 03 4 User Scene # Program Change# Initial Scene # 44 87 87 45 45 88 88 46 46 89 89 04 47 47 90 90 5 05 48 48 91 91 6 06 49 49 92 92 7 07 50 50 93 93 8 08 51 51 94 94 9 09 52 52 95 95 10 10 53 53 96 96 11 11 54 54 97 97 12 12 55 55 98 98 13 13 56 56 99 99 14 14 57 57 100 00 15 15 58 58 101 — 16 16 59 59 102 — 17 17 60 60 103 — 18 18 61 61 104 — 19 19 62 62 105 — 20 20 63 63 106 — 21 21 64 64 107 — 22 22 65 65 108 — 23 23 66 66 109 — 24 24 67 67 110 — 25 25 68 68 111 — 26 26 69 69 112 — 27 27 70 70 113 — 28 28 71 71 114 — 29 29 72 72 115 — 30 30 73 73 116 — 31 31 74 74 117 — 32 32 75 75 118 — 33 33 76 76 119 — 34 34 77 77 120 — 35 35 78 78 121 — 36 36 79 79 122 — 37 37 80 80 123 — 38 38 81 81 124 — 39 39 82 82 125 — 40 40 83 83 126 — 41 41 84 84 127 — 42 42 85 85 128 — 43 43 86 86 User Scene # Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 344 Appendix C: MIDI Initial Parameter to Control Change Table CHANNEL1 # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 High NO ASSIGN FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H NO ASSIGN FADER H NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L Mid Low CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 MASTER STEREO CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual # 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 High FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L NO ASSIGN FADER L NO ASSIGN ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON NO ASSIGN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN NO ASSIGN Mid Low MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 MASTER STEREO CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 345 CHANNEL2 # High NO ASSIGN FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H NO ASSIGN ON NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L Mid Low CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 BUS5 BUS6 BUS7 BUS8 MASTER STEREO CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL MASTER MASTER INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 BUS5 BUS6 # 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 High FADER L FADER L NO ASSIGN BALANCE NO ASSIGN ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON NO ASSIGN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN NO ASSIGN Mid Low MASTER MASTER BUS7 BUS8 MASTER STEREO CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 Appendix 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 346 Appendix C: MIDI CHANNEL3 # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 High NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ FADER L FADER L Mid G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L MASTER MASTER DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Low INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 AUX1 AUX2 # 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 High FADER L FADER L NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN Mid Low MASTER MASTER AUX3 AUX4 F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 347 CHANNEL4 # High NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ FADER L FADER L Mid G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H G LOW H MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L G LOW L MASTER MASTER Low INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 AUX5 AUX6 AUX7 AUX8 INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 AUX5 AUX6 # 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 High FADER L FADER L NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN Mid Low MASTER MASTER AUX7 AUX8 F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW F LOW INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW Q LOW INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 Appendix 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 348 Appendix C: MIDI CHANNEL5 # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 High NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ ON ON ON ON NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ ON ON Mid G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L MASTER MASTER DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Low INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 BUS1 BUS2 BUS3 BUS4 INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 BUS5 BUS6 # 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 High ON ON NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN Mid Low MASTER MASTER BUS7 BUS8 F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 349 CHANNEL6 # High NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ ON ON ON ON NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ ON ON Mid G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H G LO-MID H MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L G LO-MID L MASTER MASTER Low INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 AUX5 AUX6 # 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 High ON ON NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN Mid Low MASTER MASTER AUX7 AUX8 F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID F LO-MID INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID Q LO-MID INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 Appendix 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 350 Appendix C: MIDI CHANNEL7 # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 High NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN Mid G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Low INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 # 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 High NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN Mid Low F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 351 CHANNEL8 # High NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN Mid G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID H G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L G HI-MID L Low INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 # 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 High NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN Mid Low F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID F HI-MID INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID Q HI-MID INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 Appendix 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 352 Appendix C: MIDI CHANNEL9 # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 High NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN Mid G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Low INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 # 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 High NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN Mid Low F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 353 CHANNEL10 # High NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN Mid G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH H G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L G HIGH L Low INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 # 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 High NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN Mid Low F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH F HIGH INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH Q HIGH INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 Appendix 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 354 Appendix C: MIDI CHANNEL11 # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 High NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN Mid ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Low INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 # 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 High NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN Mid Low HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 355 CHANNEL12 # High NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN Mid ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT H ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L ATT L Low INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 # 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 High NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN Mid Low HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON HPF ON INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON LPF ON INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 Appendix 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 356 Appendix C: MIDI CHANNEL13 # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 High NO ASSIGN SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN Mid LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Low INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 # 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 High NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN Mid Low DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 357 CHANNEL14 # High NO ASSIGN SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN Mid LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE H LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L LFE L Low INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 # 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 High NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND NO ASSIGN EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ NO ASSIGN Mid Low DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F DIV F INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 Appendix 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 358 Appendix C: MIDI CHANNEL15 # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 High NO ASSIGN SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN Mid LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Low INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 # 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 High NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND NO ASSIGN SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND NO ASSIGN Mid Low WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 Initial Parameter to Control Change Table 359 CHANNEL16 # High NO ASSIGN SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN Mid LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR LR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR Low INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 # 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 High NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND NO ASSIGN SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND NO ASSIGN Mid Low WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 INPUT41 INPUT42 INPUT43 INPUT44 INPUT45 INPUT46 INPUT47 INPUT48 Appendix 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 360 Appendix C: MIDI MIDI Data Format 1. DATA FORMAT 1.4.2.2 PARAMTER CHANGE 1.1 CHANNEL MESSAGE Command 8n NOTE OFF 9n NOTE ON Bn CONTROL CHANGE Cn PROGRAM CHANGE rx/tx rx rx rx/tx rx/tx function Control the internal effects Control the internal effects Control parameters Switch scene memories rx/tx rx rx function MTC Used when TIME REFERENCE is MIDI CLOCK. 1.3 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE Command F8 TIMING CLOCK FA START FB CONTINUE FC STOP FE ACTIVE SENSING FF RESET rx/tx rx rx rx rx rx rx function MIDI clock Start automix (from the beginning) Start automix (from the middle) Stop automix Check MIDI cable connections Clear running status 1.4 EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE rx/tx Data name tx/rx tx/rx ‘S’ ‘L’ tx/rx tx/rx ‘V’ ‘U’ ‘C’ ‘P’ ‘Q’ ‘Y’ ‘G’ ‘E’ ‘H’ ‘R’ ‘O’ ‘J’ ‘K’ ‘a’ tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx ‘N’ tx/rx rx/tx General purpose digital mixer parameter change General purpose digital mixer parameter request rx/tx Type (HEX) tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx rx rx tx/rx tx/rx rx tx/rx tx/rx function Edit buffer Patch data Setup data Backup data Function (recall, store, title, clear) Function (pair, copy) Function (effect) Sort table Function (attribute, link) Key remote Remote meter Remote time counter 35 (23) tx/rx Automix status * ‘tx’ indicates that the data can be transmitted from the DM1000, and ‘rx’ indicates that the data can be received by the DM1000. 2.1 NOTE OFF MMC response MTC full message Reception If [OTHER ECHO] is ON, these message are echoed from MIDI OUT. If the [Rx CH] matches, these messages are received and used to control effects. STATUS DATA function BULK DUMP DATA BULK DUMP REQUEST The following data types of bulk dump are used on the DM1000. ‘m’ DM1000-specific parameter change 1 (01) 2 (02) 3 (03) 4 (04) 16 (10) 17 (11) 18 (12) 19 (13) 20 (14) 32 (20) 33 (21) 34 (22) 1.4.2.1 Bulk Dump rx/tx rx/tx rx/tx function MMC command 1.4.2 System Exclusive Message Command F0 43 0n 7E … F7 BULK DUMP DATA F0 43 2n 7E … F7 BULK DUMP REQUEST function DM1000-specific parameter change 2. Format Details 1.4.1 Real Time System Exclusive Command rx/tx F0 7F dd 06 … F7 MMC tx COMMAND F0 7F dd 07 … F7 MMC RESPONSE rx F0 7F dd 01 … F7 MIDI TIME CODE rx rx/tx rx/tx The following data types of parameter change are used by the DM1000. 1.2 SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGE Command F1 MIDI TIME CODE QUARTER FRAME F2 SONG POSITION POINTER Command F0 43 1n 3E 0C … F7 RARAMETER CHANGE F0 43 3n 3E 0C … F7 PARAMETER REQUEST F0 43 1n 3E 7F … F7 PARAMETER CHANGE F0 43 3n 3E 7F … F7 PARAMETER REQUEST function Scene Memory & Request (compressed data) Setup Memory & Request User defined MIDI remote & Request User defined keys & Request User assignable layer & Request Control change table & Request Program change table & Request Equalizer library & Request Compressor library & Request Gate library & Request Effect library & Request Channel library & Request Input patch library & Request Output patch library & Request Bus to Stereo library & Request Surround Monitor library & Request Automix data & Request (compressed data) Plug-in Effect Card Data & Request DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual (8n) 1000nnnn 8n Note off message 0nnnnnnn nn Note number 0vvvvvvv vv Velocity(ignored) 2.2 NOTE ON (9n) Reception If [OTHER ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed from MIDI OUT. If the [Rx CH] matches, these messages are received and used to control effects. STATUS DATA 1001nnnn 9n Note on message 0nnnnnnn nn Note number 0vvvvvvv vv Velocity(1-127:on, 0:off) 2.3 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn) Reception If [Control Change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed from MIDI OUT. If [TABLE] is selected, these message are received if [Control Change Rx] is ON, and will control parameters according to the [Control assign table] settings. The parameters that can be set are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter List. If [NRPN] is selected, these messages are received if [Control Change Rx] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches, and will control the parameter that is specified by the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and Data Entry control number (06h, 26h). Parameter settings are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter List. MIDI Data Format Transmission If [TABLE] is selected, operating a parameter specified in the [Control assign table] will cause these messages to be transmitted if [Control Change Tx] is ON. The parameters that can be specified are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter List. If [NRPN] is selected, operating a specified parameter will cause data to be transmitted on the [Tx CH] if [Control Change Tx] is ON, using the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and Data Entry control number (06h, 26h). Parameter settings are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter List. This data cannot be transmitted via control change to Studio Manager since there is no guarantee that the contents of the tables will match. (Parameter Change messages will always be used.) If [TABLE] is selected STATUS DATA 1011nnnn Bn Control change 0nnnnnnn nn Control number (0-95, 102-119) 0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127) If [NRPN] is selected STATUS DATA STATUS DATA STATUS DATA STATUS DATA 1011nnnn 01100010 0vvvvvvv 1011nnnn 01100011 0vvvvvvv 1011nnnn 00000110 0vvvvvvv 1011nnnn 00100110 0vvvvvvv Bn 62 vv Bn 63 vv Bn 06 vv Bn 26 vv Control change NRPN LSB LSB of parameter number NRPN MSB STATUS 11111010 FA Start 2.8 CONTINUE (FB) Reception This message is received if the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI CLOCK, and will cause automix to start from the current song position. In actuality, automix will start when the next TIMING CLOCK is received after receiving the CONTINUE message. STATUS 11111011 FB Continue 2.9 STOP (FC) 11111100 FC Stop 2.10 ACTIVE SENSING MSB of parameter number (FE) Reception Once this message has been received, the failure to receive any message for an interval of 400 ms or longer will cause MIDI transmission to be initialized, such as by clearing the Running Status. Control change *1 MSB of data entry MSB of parameter data Control change *1 STATUS LSB of data entry 11111110 FE Active sensing LSB of parameter data (Cn) Reception If [Program Change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed from MIDI OUT. If [Program Change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches, these messages will be received. However if [OMNI] is ON, they will be received regardless of the channel. When a message is received, a Scene Memory will be recalled according to the settings of the [Program Change Table]. Transmission If [Program Change TX] is ON, this message is transmitted according to the settings of the [Program Change Table] on the [Tx CH] channel when a scene memory is recalled. If the recalled scene has been assigned to more than one program number, the lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted. Transmission to Studio Manager using Program Change messages will not be performed since there is no guarantee that the contents of the tables will match. (Parameter Changes will always be used.) 1100nnnn Cn Program change 0nnnnnnn nn Program number (0-127) 2.5 SONG POSITION POINTER (F2) 11110010 F2 Song position pointer 0vvvvvvv vv Song position LSB 0vvvvvvv vv Song position MSB 2.6 TIMING CLOCK (F8) (FF) Reception When this message is received, MIDI communications will be cleared, e.g., by clearing the Running Status. STATUS 11111111 FF System reset 2.12 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE 2.12.1 MIDI MACHINE CONTROL (F0) (MMC) These messages are transmitted when the Machine Control section of the DM1000 is operated. 2.12.2 BULK DUMP This message sends or receives the contents of various memories stored within the DM1000. The basic format is as follows. For DUMP DATA F0 43 0n 7E cc cc <Model ID> tt mm mm [Data …] cs F7 For DUMP REQUEST F0 43 2n 7E <Model ID> tt mm mm F7 Device Number 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 tt mm mm cs DATA COUNT (the number of bytes that follow this, ending before the checksum) Model ID DATA TYPE DATA NUMBER CHECK SUM A unique header (Model ID) is used to determine whether the device is a DM1000. CHECK SUM is obtained by adding the bytes that follow BYTE COUNT (LOW) and end before CHECK SUM, taking the binary compliment of this sum, and then setting bit 7 to 0. CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F Reception This message is received if [Bulk RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. When a bulk dump is received, it is immediately written into the specified memory. When a bulk dump request is received, a bulk dump is immediately transmitted. DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Appendix Reception If the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI CLOCK, this message is used to synchronize automix. It is also used to control effects. This message is transmitted 24 times per quarter note. 11111000 F8 Timing clock 2.11 SYSTEM RESET n cc cc Reception If this is received when the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI CLOCK, the automix will move to the song position that was received. STATUS Reception This message is received if the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI CLOCK, and will start the automix. In actuality, automix will start when the next TIMING CLOCK is received after receiving the START message. STATUS Control change *1 2.4 PROGRAM CHANGE STATUS DATA (FA) Reception This message is received if the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI CLOCK, and will cause automix to stop. *1) The second and subsequent STATUS need not be added during transmission. Reception must be implemented so that reception occurs whether or not STATUS is present. STATUS DATA 2.7 START 361 362 Appendix C: MIDI Transmission This message is transmitted on the [Tx CH] by key operations in the [MIDI]-[BULK DUMP] screen. A bulk dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] in response to a bulk dump request. The data area is handled by converting seven words of 8-bit data into eight words of 7-bit data. Conversion from actual data into bulk data d[0~6]: actual data b[0~7]: bulk data b[0] = 0; for( I=0; I<7; I++){ if( d[I]&0x80){ b[0] |= 1<<(6-I); } b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F; } Restoration from bulk data into actual data d[0~6]: actual data b[0~7]: bulk data for( I=0; I<7; I++){ b[0] <<= 1; d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]); } 2.12.2.1 Scene memory bulk dump format (compress) The DM1000 can transmit and receive scene memories in compressed form. 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 01101101 0mmmmmmm F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 6D mh System exclusive message BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt 0bbbbbbb DATA 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee EOX 11110111 tt bb ds : de ee F7 total block number(minimum number is 0) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW DATA NAME Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl ‘L’ 0mmmmmmm mh m=0-99, 256, 8192(Scene0-99, EDIT BUFFER, UNDO) EOX 0mmmmmmm ml 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2.12.2.3 Setup memory bulk dump format Of the setup memory of the DM1000, this bulk-dumps data other than the User Defined MIDI Remote, User Defined Keys, User Assignable Layer, Control Change Table, and Program Change Table. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 DATA NAME 01010011 00000010 00000000 BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt 0bbbbbbb DATA 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee EOX 11110111 F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 53 02 00 tt bb ds : de ee F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘S’ No.256 = Current total block number(minimum number is 0) current block number(0-total block number) Setup data of block[bb] ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F End of exclusive ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ 2.12.2.4 Setup memory bulk dump request format STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. ‘m’ m=0-99, 256, 8192(Scene0-99, EDIT BUFFER, UNDO) 0mmmmmmm ml Receive is effective 1-99, 256, 8192 current block number(0-total block number) Scene data of block[bb] DATA NAME ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F End of exclusive EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 01010011 00000010 00000000 11110111 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 53 02 00 F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘S’ No.256 = Current End of exclusive 2.12.2.2 Scene memory bulk dump request format (compress) 2.12.2.5 User Defeined MIDI Remote bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the scene number that is being requested. If this is 256, the data of the Edit Buffer will be bulk-dumped. If this is 8192, the data of the Undo Buffer will be bulk-dumped. The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases) change if the same bank is being used. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. DATA NAME 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 01101101 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 6D System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘m’ DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ MIDI Data Format DATA NAME 01001100 00000000 0bbbbbbb BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt 0bbbbbbb DATA 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee EOX 11110111 4C 00 bb tt bb ds : de ee F7 ‘L’ 2.12.2.8 User Defined Keys bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. b=0-3(bank no.1-4) total block number(minimum number is 0) current block number(0-total block number) User define layer data of block[bb] STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F End of exclusive 2.12.2.6 User Defeined MIDI Remote bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. DATA NAME EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 01001100 00000000 0bbbbbbb 11110111 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 4C 00 bb F7 System exclusive message n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 56 00 bb tt bb ds : de ee F7 EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 01010110 00000000 0bbbbbbb 11110111 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 56 00 bb F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘V’ b=0-7(bank no.A-H) End of exclusive ‘L’ ‘M’ 2.12.2.9 User Assignable Layer bulk dump format ‘’ The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases) change if the same bank is being used. ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘L’ b=0-3(bank no.1-4) End of exclusive The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases) change if the same bank is being used. 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 DATA NAME 01010110 00000000 0bbbbbbb BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt 0bbbbbbb DATA 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee EOX 11110111 DATA NAME Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) 2.12.2.7 User Defined Keys bulk dump format STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 363 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 DATA NAME 01010101 00000000 0bbbbbbb BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt 0bbbbbbb DATA 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee EOX 11110111 F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 55 00 bb tt bb ds : de ee F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘U’ b=0-3(bank no.1-4) total block number(minimum number is 0) current block number(0-total block number) User assignable layer data of block[bb] ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F End of exclusive ‘9’ ‘1’ 2.12.2.10 User Assignable Layer bulk dump request format ‘V’ The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. b=0-7(bank no.A-H) total block number(minimum number is 0) current block number(0-total block number) User define key data of block[bb] STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F End of exclusive DATA NAME EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 01010101 00000000 0bbbbbbb 11110111 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 55 00 bb F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘U’ b=0-3(bank no.1-4) End of exclusive Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 364 Appendix C: MIDI 2.12.2.11 Control change table bulk dump format STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 DATA NAME 01000011 00000010 00000000 BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt 0bbbbbbb DATA 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee EOX 11110111 F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 43 02 00 tt bb ds : de ee F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump DATA NAME EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 01000011 00000010 00000000 11110111 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 43 02 00 F7 ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 DATA NAME 01010000 00000010 00000000 BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt 0bbbbbbb DATA 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee EOX 11110111 F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 50 02 00 tt bb ds : de ee F7 DATA NAME ‘1’ ‘C’ EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 01010000 00000010 00000000 11110111 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 50 02 00 F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘P’ No.256 = Current End of exclusive No.256 = Current total block number(minimum number is 0) 2.12.2.15 Equalizer library bulk dump format current block number(0-total block number) The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. 0:Library no.1 – 199:Library no.200, 256:CH1 – 303:CH48, 384:BUS1 – 391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 – 519:AUX8, 768:STEREO, 8192:UNDO 256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer. For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (40-199, 256-) Control change table data of block[bb] ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F End of exclusive System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘C’ No.256 = Current End of exclusive 2.12.2.13 Program change table bulk dump format STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. data count = ch * 128 + cl 2.12.2.12 Control change table bulk dump request format STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. 2.12.2.14 Program change table bulk dump request format System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 DATA NAME 01010001 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt 0bbbbbbb DATA 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee EOX 11110111 F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 51 mh ml tt bb ds : de ee F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘Q’ 0-199(EQ Library no.1-200), 256-(Channel current data) total block number(minimum number is 0) current block number(0-total block number) EQ Library data of block[bb] ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F End of exclusive Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl 2.12.2.16 Equalizer library bulk dump request format ‘L’ The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. (See above) ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘P’ No.256 = Current total block number(minimum number is 0) current block number(0-total block number) Program change table data of block[bb] ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F End of exclusive DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual DATA NAME EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 01010001 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 11110111 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 51 mh ml F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘Q’ 0-199(EQ Library no.1-200), 256-(Channel current data) End of exclusive MIDI Data Format 2.12.2.17 Compressor library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. 0:Library no.1 – 127:Library no.128, 256:CH1 – 303:CH48, 384:BUS1 – 391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 – 519:AUX8, 768:STEREO, 8192:UNDO 256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer. For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (36-127, 256-) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 DATA NAME 01011001 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt 0bbbbbbb DATA 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee EOX 11110111 F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 59 mh ml tt bb ds : de ee F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump 00110001 01000111 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt 0bbbbbbb DATA 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee EOX 11110111 DATA NAME 31 47 mh ml tt bb ds : de ee F7 365 ‘1’ ‘G’ 0-127(GATE Library no.1-128), 256-351(Channel current data) total block number(minimum number is 0) current block number(0-total block number) GATE Library data of block[bb] ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F End of exclusive data count = ch * 128 + cl 2.12.2.20 Gate library bulk dump request format ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘Y’ 0-127(COMP Library no.1-128), 256-(Channel current data) total block number(minimum number is 0) current block number(0-total block number) COMP Library data of block[bb] DATA NAME ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F End of exclusive EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 01000111 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 11110111 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 47 mh ml F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘G’ 0-127(GATE Library no.1-128), 256-351(Channel current data) End of exclusive 2.12.2.18 Compressor library bulk dump request format 2.12.2.21 Effect library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above) The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. 0:Library no.1 – 127:Library no.128, 256:EFFECT1 – 259:EFFECT4, 8192:UNDO 256-259 are the data for the corresponding area of the edit buffer. For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (xx-127, 256-259, 8192) (xx varies with the firmware version.) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. DATA NAME EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 01011001 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 11110111 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 59 mh ml F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘Y’ 0-127(COMP Library no.1-128), 256-(Channel current data) End of exclusive 2.12.2.19 Gate library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. 0:Library no.1 – 127:Library no.128, 256:CH1 – 303:CH48, 8192:UNDO 256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer. For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (4-127, 256-) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 DATA NAME 01000101 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt 0bbbbbbb DATA 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee EOX 11110111 F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 45 mh ml tt bb ds : de ee F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘E’ 0-127(Effect Library no.1-128), 256-259(Effect1-4 current) total block number(minimum number is 0) current block number(0-total block number) Effect Library data of block[bb] ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F End of exclusive ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ Appendix 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 366 Appendix C: MIDI 2.12.2.22 Effect library bulk dump request format EOX The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above) 2.12.2.25 Input patch library bulk dump format STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. DATA NAME EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 01000101 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 11110111 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 45 mh ml F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘E’ 0-127(Effect Library no.1-128), 256-259(Effect1-4 current) End of exclusive 2.12.2.23 Channel library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. 0:Library no.0 – 128:Library no.128, 256:CH1 – 303:CH48, 384:BUS1 – 391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 – 519:AUX8, 768:STEREO, 8192:UNDO 256 and following are the data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer. For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (2-128, 256-) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 DATA NAME 01001000 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt 0bbbbbbb DATA 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee EOX 11110111 F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 48 mh ml tt bb ds : de ee F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 11110111 F7 End of exclusive The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. 0:Library no.0 – 32:Library no.32, 256:current input patch data, 8192:UNDO For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256, 8192) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 DATA NAME 01010010 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt 0bbbbbbb DATA 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee EOX 11110111 F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 52 mh ml tt bb ds : de ee F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘R’ 0-32(Input patch Library no.0-32), 256(Current data) total block number(minimum number is 0) current block number(0-total block number) Input patch Library data of block[bb] ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F End of exclusive Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl 2.12.2.26 Input patch library bulk dump request format ‘L’ The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above) ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘H’ 0-128(Channel Library no.0-128), 256-(Current data) total block number(minimum number is 0) current block number(0-total block number) Channel Library data of block[bb] ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F DATA NAME EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 01010010 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 11110111 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 52 mh ml F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘R’ 0-32(Input patch Library no.0-32), 256(Current data) End of exclusive End of exclusive 2.12.2.27 Output patch library bulk dump format 2.12.2.24 Channel library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. DATA NAME 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 01001000 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 48 mh ml System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump ‘L’ ‘M’ The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. 0:Library no.0 – 32:Library no.32, 256:current output patch data, 8192:UNDO For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘H’ 0-128(Channel Library no.0-128), 256-(Current data) DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual DATA NAME 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 01001111 F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 4F System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘O’ MIDI Data Format 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt 0bbbbbbb DATA 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee EOX 11110111 mh ml tt bb ds : de ee F7 0-32(Output patch Library no.0-32), 2.12.2.30 Bus to Stereo library bulk dump request format 256(Current data) The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above) total block number(minimum number is 0) current block number(0-total block number) Output patch Library data of block[bb] STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F End of exclusive 2.12.2.28 Output patch library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. DATA NAME EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 01001111 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 11110111 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 4F mh ml F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) ‘L’ ‘M’ F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 4A mh ml tt bb ds : de ee F7 EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 01001010 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 11110111 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 4A mh ml F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘J’ 0-32(Bus to stereo Library no.0-32), 256(Current data) End of exclusive ‘’ ‘’ 2.12.2.31 Surround Monitor library bulk dump format ‘8’ The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. 0:Library no.0 – 32:Library no.32, 256:current data, 8192:UNDO For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256, 8192) ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘O’ 0-32(Output patch Library no.0-32), 256(Current data) End of exclusive The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. 0:Library no.0 – 32:Library no.32, 256:current data, 8192:UNDO For reception by the DM1000, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256, 8192) 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 DATA NAME 01001010 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt 0bbbbbbb DATA 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee EOX 11110111 DATA NAME Universal bulk dump 2.12.2.29 Bus to Stereo library bulk dump format STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 367 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 DATA NAME 01001011 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt 0bbbbbbb DATA 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee EOX 11110111 F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 4B mh ml tt bb ds : de ee F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘K’ 0-32(Surround Monitor Library no.0-32), 256(Current data) total block number(minimum number is 0) current block number(0-total block number) Surround Monitor Library data of block[bb] ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F End of exclusive ‘J’ 0-32(Bus to stereo Library no.0-32), 256(Current data) total block number(minimum number is 0) current block number(0-total block number) Bus to stereo Library data of block[bb] ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F 2.12.2.32 Surround Monitor library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. End of exclusive DATA NAME F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 4B mh ml F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘K’ 0-32(Surround Monitor Library no.0-32), 256(Current data) End of exclusive DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Appendix EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 01001011 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 11110111 368 Appendix C: MIDI 2.12.2.33 Automix bulk dump format The second byte of the DATA NAME indicates the library number. 0:Library no.1 – 15:Library no.16, 256:current automix data STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 DATA NAME 01100001 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm BLOCK INFO. 0bbbbbbb 0bbbbbbb 0ttttttt 0ttttttt DATA 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee EOX 11110111 F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 61 mh ml bh bl th tl ds : de ee F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘a’ 0-15(Automix no.1-16), 256(Current data) current block number(0-total block number) total block number(minimum number is 0) DATA NAME 01001110 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm BLOCK INFO. 0bbbbbbb 0bbbbbbb 0ttttttt 0ttttttt 0000iiii 0000iiii 0000jjjj 0000jjjj DATA 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee EOX 11110111 DATA NAME EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 01100001 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 11110111 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 61 mh ml F7 STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F End of exclusive Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) Universal bulk dump ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘a’ 0-15(Automix no.1-16), 256(Current data) End of exclusive 2.12.2.35 Plug-in effect card bulk dump format The second byte of the DATA NAME indicates the slot number. 0:SLOT 1 – 1:SLOT 2 The data is not received if the Developer ID and Product ID are different than the card that is installed in the slot. The data is not transmitted if a valid plug-in effect card is not installed. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 DATA NAME System exclusive message n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump EOX current block number(0-total block number) total block number(minimum number is 0) Developer id (High) Developer id (Low) Product id (High) Product id (Low) Plug-in Effect card memory data of block[bb] ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F End of exclusive 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00111001 00110001 01001110 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 11110111 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 31 4E mh ml F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘8’ ‘C’ ‘9’ ‘1’ ‘N’ m=0-1(SLOT 1-2) End of exclusive 2.12.3 PARAMETER CHANGE 2.12.3.1 Basic behavior Reception If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed. If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device Number included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. A specific parameter is controlled when a Parameter Change is received. When a Parameter Request is received, the current value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a Parameter Change with the Device Number set to [Rx CH]. Transmission If [Parameter change TX] is ON and you operate a parameter for which Control Change transmission is not enabled, a parameter change will be transmitted with [Tx CH] as the Device Number. As a response to a Parameter Request, a parameter change will be transmitted with [Rx CH] as the Device Number. 2.12.3.1.1 Parameter change basic format STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS data count = ch * 128 + cl System exclusive message 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00001100 0ttttttt 0eeeeeee F0 43 1n 3E 0C tt ee 0ccccccc 0ddddddd : 11110111 cc Channel no. dd data : F7 End of exclusive Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM1000 Data type Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes) 0ppppppp pp Parameter no. ‘L’ ‘M’ ‘’ m=0-1(SLOT 1-2) The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the slot number. (See above) 2.12.2.34 Automix bulk dump request format STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. ‘N’ 2.12.2.36 Plug-in effect card bulk dump request format Automix memory data of block[bb] The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above) 4E mh ml bh bl th tl 0i 0i 0j 0j ds : de ee F7 DATA *) ‘’ ‘8’ EOX ‘C’ *) For parameters with a data size of 2 or more, data for that size will be transmitted. ‘9’ ‘1’ DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual MIDI Data Format 2.12.3.1.2 Parameter Change basic format (Universal format) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS System exclusive message 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 01111111 0ttttttt 0eeeeeee F0 43 1n 3E 7F tt ee 0ccccccc 0ddddddd : 11110111 cc Channel no. dd data : F7 End of exclusive Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) Universal 2.12.3.3 Parameter request STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS Data type EOX *) For parameters with a data size of 2 or more, data for that size will be transmitted. 2.12.3.1.3 Parameter request basic format STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00001100 0ttttttt 0eeeeeee F0 43 3n 3E 0C tt ee System exclusive message DM1000 DATA 2.12.3.1.4 Parameter request basic format (Universal format) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 01111111 0ttttttt 0eeeeeee F0 43 3n 3E 7F tt ee System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) EOX Data type Consult your dealer for parameter address details. 2.12.3.2 Parameter change 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 01111111 00000001 0eeeeeee F0 43 1n 3E 7F 01 ee (Edit buffer) EOX 0ccccccc 0ddddddd : 11110111 DATA Universal cc Channel no. dd data : F7 End of exclusive Edit Buffer 0ccccccc cc Channel no. 11110111 F7 End of exclusive (Patch data) System exclusive message 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00001100 00000010 0eeeeeee F0 43 1n 3E 0C 02 ee 0ccccccc 0ddddddd : 11110111 cc Channel no. dd data : F7 End of exclusive Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM1000 Patch data 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00001100 00000010 0eeeeeee F0 43 3n 3E 0C 02 ee (Patch data) System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM1000 Patch data 0ccccccc cc Channel no. 11110111 F7 End of exclusive (Setup memory) System exclusive message 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00001100 00000011 0eeeeeee F0 43 1n 3E 0C 03 ee 0ccccccc 0ddddddd : 11110111 cc Channel no. dd data : F7 End of exclusive Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM1000 Setup data Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes) 0ppppppp pp Parameter no. n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Edit Buffer Universal 2.12.3.6 Parameter change STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes) 0ppppppp pp Parameter no. DATA EOX System exclusive message MODEL ID (digital mixer) MODEL ID (digital mixer) Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes) 0ppppppp pp Parameter no. Universal 0ccccccc cc Channel no. 11110111 F7 End of exclusive n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 2.12.3.5 Parameter request STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS MODEL ID (digital mixer) 2.12.3.1.5 Parameter Address STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS EOX n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes) 0ppppppp pp Parameter no. Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes) 0ppppppp pp Parameter no. MODEL ID (digital mixer) 0ccccccc cc Channel no. 11110111 F7 End of exclusive (Edit buffer) System exclusive message 2.12.3.4 Parameter change STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes) 0ppppppp pp Parameter no. EOX EOX Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) Data type F0 43 3n 3E 7F 01 ee Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes) 0ppppppp pp Parameter no. Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes) 0ppppppp pp Parameter no. DATA *) 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 01111111 00000001 0eeeeeee 369 EOX 2.12.3.7 Parameter request STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00001100 00000011 0eeeeeee F0 43 3n 3E 0C 03 ee (Setup memory) System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM1000 Setup data Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes) 0ppppppp pp Parameter no. 0ccccccc cc Channel no. 11110111 F7 End of exclusive DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Appendix EOX 370 Appendix C: MIDI 2.12.3.8 Parameter change STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS (Backup memory) System exclusive message 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00001100 00000100 0eeeeeee F0 43 1n 3E 0C 04 ee 0ccccccc 0ddddddd : 11110111 cc Channel no. dd data : F7 End of exclusive Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM1000 Backup data Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes) 0ppppppp pp Parameter no. DATA EOX 2.12.3.9 Parameter request STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00001100 00000100 0eeeeeee F0 43 3n 3E 0C 04 ee (Backup memory) System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM1000 Backup data 0ccccccc cc Channel no. 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2.12.3.10 Parameter change (Function call: Library store / recall) Reception When this is received, the specified memory/library will be stored/recalled. If this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link, the operation will be executed, and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a Parameter Response. Transmission If [Parameter change Tx] is ON, and you store or recall a memory/library for which Program Change transmission is not valid, this message will be transmitted with the Device Number set to the [Tx CH]. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 01111111 00010000 00ffffff 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 11110111 F0 43 1n 3E 7F 10 ff mh ml ch cl F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) Universal Function call function number High number Low number 1-32 1-32 1-16 channel*1) 256, 16383 256, 16383 256, 16383 tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx *1) 0:CH1 – 47:CH48, 128:BUS1 – 135:BUS8, 256:AUX1 – 263:AUX8, 512:STEREO Use 256 if the recall destination or store source is a single data item. Effect is 0:Effect 1–3:Effect 4 If the store destination is 16383 (0x3FFF), this indicates that the library data has been changed by a external cause (such as bulk reception) (only transmitted by the DM1000) *2) Varies with the firmware version. (Function call: title) Reception When this is received, the title of the specified memory/library will be changed. If this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link, the operation will be executed, and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a parameter response. Transmission In response to a request, this is transmitted with the device number set to the [Tx CH]. When the title is changed on the DM1000, this message will be transmitted with the device number set to [Tx CH]. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 01111111 00010000 0100ffff 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd 11110111 function SCENE LIB TITLE EQ LIB TITLE GATE LIB TITLE COMP LIB TITLE EFF LIB TITLE CHANNEL LIB TITLE INPATCH LIB TITLE OUTPATCH LIB TITLE Bus to Stereo LIB TITLE Surround Monitor LIB TITLE AUTOMIX LIB TITLE F0 43 1n 3E 7F 10 4f mh ml dd : dd F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) Universal Function call title number High number Low title 1 : title x(depend on the library) End of exclusive 0x40 0x41 0x42 0x43 0x44 0x46 0x47 0x48 0x49 0x4A 0x4B number 0-99,256(0:response only) 1-200(1-40:response only) 1-128(1-4:response only) 1-128(1-36:response only) 1-128(1-xx(*1):response only) 0-128(0:response only) 0-32(0:response only) 0-32(0:response only) 0-32(0:response only) 0-32(0:response only) 1-16 size 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 *1) Varies with the firmware version. channel High channel Low 2.12.3.12 Parameter request End of exclusive function SCENE RECALL EQ LIB RECALL GATE LIB RECALL COMP LIB RECALL EFF LIB RECALL CHANNEL LIB RECALL INPATCH LIB RECALL OUTPATCH LIB RECALL Bus to Stereo LIB RECALL Surround Monitor LIB RECALL AUTOMIX LIB RECALL 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x06 0x07 0x08 0x09 0x0A 0x0B number 0-99, 8192 1-200, 8192 1-128, 8192 1-128, 8192 1-128, 8192 0-128, 8192 0-32, 8192 0-32, 8192 0-32, 8192 0-32, 8192 1-16 channel*1) 256 0-513 0-95 0-513 0-3 0-513 256 256 256 256 256 tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx SCENE STORE EQ LIB STORE GATE LIB STORE COMP LIB STORE EFF LIB STORE CHANNEL LIB STORE INPATCH LIB STORE OUTPATCH LIB STORE 0x20 0x21 0x22 0x23 0x24 0x26 0x27 0x28 1-99 41-200 5-128 37-128 xx(*2)-128 1-128 1-32 1-32 256, 16383 0-513, 16383 0-47, 16383 0-513, 16383 0-3, 16383 0-513, 16383 256, 16383 256, 16383 tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 0x29 0x2A 0x2B 2.12.3.11 Parameter change Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes) 0ppppppp pp Parameter no. EOX function Bus to Stereo LIB STORE Surround Monitor LIB STORE AUTOMIX LIB STORE (Function call: title) Reception When this is received, a parameter change will be transmitted with the device number set to [Rx CH]. Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS EOX 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 01111111 00010000 0100ffff 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 11110111 F0 43 3n 3E 7F 10 4f mh ml F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) Universal Function call title number High number Low End of exclusive MIDI Data Format 2.12.3.13 Parameter change (Function call: Scene/Library Clear) Reception When this is received, the specified memory/library will be cleared. If this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link, the operation will be executed, and then the result of execution will be transmitted as the following parameter response. Transmission When a memory or library is cleared on the DM1000, this message will be transmitted with the device number set to [Tx CH]. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 01111111 00010000 0110ffff 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 11110111 F0 43 1n 3E 7F 10 6f mh ml F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) number Low End of exclusive number 1-99 41-200 5-128 37-128 EFF LIB CLEAR CHANNEL LIB CLEAR INPATCH LIB CLEAR OUTPATCH LIB CLEAR Bus to Stereo LIB CLEAR Surround Monitor LIB CLEAR AUTOMIX LIB CLEAR 0x64 0x66 0x67 0x68 0x69 0x6A 0x6B 41-200 1-128 1-32 1-32 1-32 1-32 1-16 *1) Varies with the firmware version. 2.12.3.14 Parameter change (Function call: attribute) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, the attribute of the specified memory/library will be changed. Transmission In response to a request, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the [Rx CH]. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted without change. DATA EOX function SCENE LIB ATTRIBUTE AUTOMIX LIB ATTRIBUTE F0 43 1n 3E 7F 14 0f mh ml th tl F7 STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS clear function 0x60 0x61 0x62 0x63 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 01111111 00010100 0000ffff 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0ttttttt 0ttttttt 11110111 Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the [Rx CH]. Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers. Function call function SCENE LIB CLEAR EQ LIB CLEAR GATE LIB CLEAR COMP LIB CLEAR STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS 2.12.3.15 Parameter request (Function call: attribute) Universal number High System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) Universal Function call attribute number High number Low attribute(protect:0x0001, normal:0x0000) End of exclusive 0x00 0x0B number 0-99(0:response only) 1-16 371 EOX 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 01111111 00010100 0000ffff 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 11110111 F0 43 3n 3E 7F 14 0f mh ml F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) Universal Function call attribute number High number Low End of exclusive 2.12.3.16 Parameter change (Function call: link) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, the patch link data of the specified scene will be modified. Transmission In response to a request, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the [Rx CH]. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted without change. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 01111111 00010100 0010ffff 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0iiiiiii 0iiiiiii 0ooooooo 0ooooooo 11110111 function SCENE LIB LINK F0 43 1n 3E 7F 14 2f mh ml ih il oh ol F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) Universal Function call link number High number Low inpatch outpatch End of exclusive 0x20 number 0-99(0:response only) 2.12.3.17 Parameter request (Function call: link) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the [Rx CH]. Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS EOX 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 01111111 00010100 0010ffff 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 11110111 F0 43 3n 3E 7F 14 2f mh ml F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) Universal Function call link number High number Low End of exclusive Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 372 Appendix C: MIDI 2.12.3.18 Parameter change (Function call: pair, copy) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, pairing will be enabled/disabled for the specified channel. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 01111111 00010001 0000ffff 0sssssss 0sssssss 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 11110111 F0 43 1n 3E 7F 11 0f sh sl dh dl F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) Universal Function call Pair Source channel H Destination channel L End of exclusive channel *1) *1) *1) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, the corresponding effect’s function activates (depending on the effect type). EOX function Freeze Play button Freeze Record button Auto Pan 5.1 Trigger Button Auto Pan 5.1 Reset Button Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM1000 Library sort table Library type End of exclusive (Key remote) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, the same processing that is executed when the key specified by Address is pressed (released). Transmission If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without change. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00001100 00100000 0kkkkkkk 0kkkkkkk 0kkkkkkk 0ppppppp 11110111 F0 43 1n 3E 0C 20 kk kk kk pp F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM1000 Key remote Key address H Key address M Key address L Release:0, Press:1 End of exclusive 2.12.3.23 Parameter change When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote meter, the specified meter information is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds. When you want to transmit meter information continuously, a Request must be transmitted continuously within every 10 seconds. MODEL ID (digital mixer) Universal Function call Effect Event function Release:0, Press:1 Effect number (0:Effect1 - 3:Effect4) End of exclusive channel 0:Effect1-3:Effect4 0:Effect1-3:Effect4 0:Effect1-3:Effect4 0:Effect1-3:Effect4 (Sort Table) System exclusive message Transmission When transmission has been enabled by a Request, the parameter specified by Address will be transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel at 50 msec intervals for a duration of 10 seconds. Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if the PORT setting is changed. If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without change. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM1000 Library sort table Library type Data DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual (Remote Meter) Reception This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When scene memory sort is executed on the DM1000, the memory sort table will be transmitted to Studio Manager. Studio Manager will sort the memories according to this data. If Studio Manager performs a scene memory sort, it will transmit this data to the DM1000. DATA System exclusive message n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 F0 43 1n 3E 0C 13 0f ds : F0 43 3n 3E 0C 13 0f F7 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) 2.12.3.20 Parameter change 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00001100 00010011 0000ffff 0ddddddd : 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00001100 00010011 0000ffff 11110111 System exclusive message • This does not activate when the effect type is different. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS 2.12.3.22 Parameter change Destination channel H 2.12.3.19 Parameter change (Function call Event: Effect ) DATA (Sort Table) When the DM1000 receives this data, it will transmit Sort Table Data. Source channel L 0x00 0x01 0x02 F0 43 1n 3E 7F 12 0f 00 pp 00 ee F7 2.12.3.21 Parameter request EOX *1) 0:CH1 – 47:CH48, 128:BUS1 – 135:BUS8, 256:AUX1 – 263:AUX8, 512:STEREO Effect is 0:Effect 1–3:Effect 4 • In the case of PAIR, you must specify channels for which pairing is possible. • In the case of PAIR ON with COPY, you must specify Source Channel as the copy source, and Destination Channel as the copy destination. 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 01111111 00010010 0000ffff 00000000 0ppppppp 00000000 0eeeeeee 11110111 0ddddddd de Data 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 8-7 conversion is performed on the data area in the same way as for bulk. function function PAIR ON with COPY PAIR ON with RESET BOTH PAIR OFF STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS EOX EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00001100 00100001 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0ddddddd 0ddddddd : 11110111 F0 43 1n 3E 0C 21 mm mm mm dd dd : F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM1000 Remote meter ADDRESS UL ADDRESS LU ADDRESS LL Data1 H Data1 L End of exclusive * The meter data can be either the unadjusted DECAY value of the DSP, or the table-converted value. The interpretation of the data will depend on the parameter. MIDI Data Format 2.12.3.24 Parameter request (Remote Meter) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, data of the specified address is transmitted on the [Rx CH] at intervals of 50 msec as a rule (although this may not be the case if the port is being used by other communication), for a period of 10 seconds. If Address UL= 0x7F is received, transmission of all meter data will be halted immediately. (disable) Transmission If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without change. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS EOX 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00001100 00100001 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 11110111 F0 43 3n 3E 0C 21 mm mm mm ch cl F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM1000 Remote meter ADDRESS UL ADDRESS LU Count H Count L End of exclusive When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote Time Counter, the Time Counter data is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds. When you want to transmit Counter information continuously, a Request must be transmitted within every 10 seconds. Reception This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. Transmission When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request, the Time Counter information is transmitted on [RxCH] channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds. Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if the PORT setting is changed. If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without change. DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00001100 00100010 0000tttt 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 11110111 F0 43 1n 3E 0C 22 0t dd dd dd dd F7 Transmission If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without change. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS EOX 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00001100 00100010 0ddddddd F0 43 3n 3E 0C 22 dd System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM1000 Remote Time counter 0:Transmission request, 0x7F:Transmission stop request 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 2.12.3.27 Parameter change (Automix Status) When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Automix status, the Automix Status data is transmitted every second for 10 seconds. When you want to transmit the Automix Status information continuously, the Request must be transmitted continuously minimum within 10 seconds interval. The data is transmitted continuously while the transmission is enabled, even when the Automix Status on the DM1000 has been changed. Reception This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. ADDRESS LL 2.12.3.25 Parameter change (Remote Time Counter) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS 373 Transmission When the transmission is set to enable by receiving a Request. The Automix Status data is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel every second for 10 seconds. The data is transmitted continuously while the transmission is enabled, even when the Automix Status on the DM1000 has been changed. Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if the PORT setting is changed. If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without change. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00001100 00100011 00000000 0000dddd 0000dddd 11110111 F0 43 1n 3E 0C 23 00 0d 0d F7 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM1000 Automix status Automix status H Automix status L End of exclusive System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM1000 Remote Time counter 0:Time code, 1:Measure.Beat.Clock Hour / Measure H Minute / Measure L Second / Beat Frame / Clock End of exclusive 2.12.3.26 Parameter request (Remote Time Counter) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, the Time Counter information is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds. When the second byte of Address is received on 0x7F, data transmission will be halted immediately. (disable) 2.12.3.28 Parameter request (Automix Status) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When the data is received, the Automix Status data is transmitted on the [Rx CH] every second for 10 seconds. When the second byte of Address is received on 0x7F, data transmission will be halted immediately (disable). Transmission If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without change. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS EOX 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00001100 00100011 0ddddddd F0 43 3n 3E 0C 23 dd System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM1000 Automix status 0:Transmission request, 0x7F:Transmission stop request 11110111 F7 End of exclusive Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 374 Appendix D: Options Appendix D: About Optional Product MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge Installing the Meter Bridge 2-1 2-1 16 4 15 3 OMNI IN 14 2 13 1 12 11 10 9 12 11 10 9 INPUT 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2-2 2-2 SLOT SLOT POWER ON OFF AC IN METER SMPTE IN REMOTE MIDI OUT IN TO HOST USB CONTROL WORD CLOCK OUT 2TR IN DIGITAL 1 IN 2 AES/EBU 1 2 COAXIAL COAXIAL AES/EBU 1 Attach the brackets to the meter bridge. Align the holes on the lower part of the meter bridge with the holes on the upper part of the brackets (as shown in the illustration below), then use four 8 mm screws (1) included in the MB1000 package to affix the brackets to the meter bridge. 2 Install the meter bridge to the DM1000 following the steps below: a) Insert two of four 12 mm screws (2-2) included in the MB1000 package into the lower holes (2-2), then tighten them with your fingers. Leave the screws projecting by about 4 mm. b) Align these screws with the notches on the included meter angles, then align the holes on the upper part of the meter angles with the holes on the upper part of the DM1000 (2-1). c) Insert the other two 12 mm screws (2-1) into the upper holes (2-1), then tighten them securely. d) Tighten the screws (2-2) that were finger-tightened in Step a) securely to firmly attach the meter bridge to the DM1000. 3 Connect the meter bridge cable to the DM1000’s METER connector. Upper 2-1 2-2 1 2-1 Lower 2-2 1 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Meter angle MB1000 Peak Meter Bridge 375 BUS 8 OVER 0 -3 -6 -9 -12 -15 -18 -24 -30 -36 -48 8 BUS 4 S M BUS 5 BUS 6 B INPUT METERING POSITION indicators REMOTE 2 MASTER 17-32 33-48 H BUS 1 OVER 0 -3 -6 -9 -12 -15 -18 -24 -30 -36 -48 REMOTE 1 E TIME CODE display BUS 8 F [1-16] / [17-32] / [33-48] / [REMOTE 1] / BUS 6 BUS 7 [REMOTE 2] / [MASTER] buttons These buttons select the layers of the channel meters displayed on the meter bridge. The button indicator of the currently-selected layer lights up. If you turn on the Meter Follow Layer check box on the Setup | Prefer1 page (see page 266), the layer selection on the meter bridge follows the layer selection on the DM1000. BUS 5 G Level meters AUX 8 OVER 0 -3 -6 -9 -12 -15 -18 -24 -30 -36 -48 BUS 2 BUS 1 This button turns the Peak Hold function on or off. When the Peak Hold function is turned on, the button indicator lights up. This button works in unison with the PEAK HOLD button displayed on the Meter display. This display indicates the timecode or MIDI clock value the DM1000 is receiving or generating. OVER 0 -3 -6 -9 -12 -15 -18 -24 -30 -36 -48 1 -16 6 BUS 4 16 32 48 15 31 47 14 30 46 13 29 45 12 28 44 C OUTPUT METERING POSITION indicators D [PEAK HOLD] button 11 27 43 BUS 3 10 26 42 9 25 41 7 These 12-segment LED level meters display the channel levels of the selected layer. H Bus meters AUX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 These 12-segment LED meters display the signal levels of Bus Outs 1-8. OVER 0 -3 -6 -9 -12 -15 -18 -24 -30 -36 -48 AUX 2 AUX 1 AUX 3 8 24 40 7 23 39 3 19 35 2 18 34 1 17 33 1 4 20 36 5 21 37 6 22 38 INPUT METERING POSITION PRE FADER POST FADER PRE EQ 2 These indicators display the current metering position specified for the Input Channels. These indicators display the current metering position specified for the Output Channels. BUS 2 MEASURE TIME CODE PEAK HOLD OUTPUT METERING POSITION PRE EQ PRE FADER POST FADER 3 These indicators display the channels for which the levels are currently displayed (Input Channels 1-16, 17-32, 33-48, Aux Outs 1-8, Bus Outs 1-8). BUS 3 5 4 A Channel indicators BUS 7 CLOCK BEAT PEAK METER BRIDGE MB1000 FOR F Meter Bridge Controls Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 376 Appendix D: Options Rack Mounting the MB1000 Using Rack Angle Brackets You can rack mount the MB1000 meter bridge using the rack angle brackets that came with the meter bridge. 1 Detach the MB1000 from the DM1000. Also, remove the SP1000 side panels if they are attached. 2 Hold a rack bracket against one side of the meter bridge so that the rack angle bracket ear projects to the side, and align two holes on the brackets with the holes on the side of the meter bridge, as shown in the illustration below. 3 Affix the bracket using the screws included in the meter bridge package. 4 Attach the other bracket to the other side of the MB1000 in the same way. Side of Meter Bridge DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Rack angle bracket Installing the SP1000 Side Panels 377 Installing the SP1000 Side Panels The figure below illustrates how to attach the left side panel to the DM1000. Attach the right side panel to the DM1000 in the same way. Rack Mounting the DM1000 Using the RK1 Rack Mount Kit You can rack mount the DM1000 using the optional RK1 Rack Mount Kit. 1 Remove the side panels if they are attached. 2 Hold one of the brackets against one side of the DM1000 so that the bracket ear projects to the side, and align five holes on the bracket with the holes on the side of the DM1000, as shown in the illustration below. 3 Affix the bracket using five screws included in the RK1 package. 4 Attach the other bracket to the other side of the DM1000 in the same way. Caution: Do not rack mount the DM1000 and an MB1000 connected together as a unit. Be sure to rack mount them separately using the dedicated brackets. Appendix DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 378 Index Index Symbols ø/INS/DLY | DLY 1-16 page .............. 63 ø/INS/DLY | DLY 17-32 page ............ 63 ø/INS/DLY | DLY 33-48 page ............ 63 ø/INS/DLY | Insert page ................... 116 ø/Ins/Dly | Insert page ...................... 158 ø/INS/DLY | Out Dly page ........... 83, 95 ø/INS/DLY | Phase page ..................... 63 ø/INSERT/DELAY button ................. 19 +48V ON/OFF switches ..................... 16 Phantom power ............................ 53 Numerics 1–12 buttons ........................................ 23 1-16/17-32/33-48 buttons .................. 22 2TR D1/D2 buttons ............................ 24 2TR IN D1/D2 buttons ....................... 56 2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 ........... 27 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 2 .......... 27 2TR IN DIGITAL connectors ............ 54 2TRD1/2 ....................................... 48 2TR OUT DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 ....... 27 2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL 2 ..... 27 2TR OUT DIGITAL connectors ........ 54 2TRD1/2 .............................................. 48 A ABORT .............................................. 204 About the display ................................ 29 AC IN connector ................................. 27 AD input .............................................. 16 AD input and output section ............. 25 AD Input section ................................. 53 AD8HR/AD824 ................................. 287 ADAT I/O card .................................... 55 AES/EBU I/O card .............................. 55 AMP SIMULATE .............................. 314 Analog inputs & outputs .................... 53 ASSIGN button ................................... 18 Assignable parameters ........................ 38 Assigne Control changes ......................... 250 MIDI messages ........................... 239 Parameters to the encoder ........... 37 Program changes ........................ 249 Remote layer ............................... 215 USER DEFINED KEYS .............. 225 Attenuator ...............................67, 83, 94 Output signals .............................. 90 AUTO button ...................................... 17 Auto Channel Select preference ....... 267 Auto Direct Out On preference ....... 268 Auto EQ Edit in preference .............. 270 Auto EQUALIZER Display preference ............................................... 267 Auto Inc TC Capture preference ..... 270 AUTO PAN ....................................... 312 AUTO PAN 5.1 ................................. 319 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Auto PAN/SURROUND Display preference .............................267 AUTO REC ........................................203 Auto ROUTING Display preference 266 Auto SOLO Display preference ........267 Auto update function ........................167 Auto WORD CLOCK Display preference .............................267 Automix ..............................................187 ABORT ........................................204 ABSOLUTE .................................202 AUTO button ....................... 17, 199 AUTO REC .................................203 AUTOMIX button ........................19 Automix main page ....................200 Automix memory page ..............204 COPY ...........................................208 EDIT OUT .......................... 201, 206 Edit safe buttons .........................206 Editing events offline ..................207 ERASE ..........................................208 Event edit page ............................211 Event job page .............................207 FADER EDIT ..............................202 Fader Edit mode ..........................201 Fader1 &2 pages ..........................205 FRAMES ......................................188 INT START TIME ......................200 MOTOR ......................................206 MOVE/MERGE ..........................209 NEW ............................................203 OFFSET .......................................200 OVERWRITE ..............................203 Parameter events can be recorded .........................................187 PLAY ............................................203 Playing back .................................199 PROTECT ...................................205 Punching in & out ......................197 REC ..............................................203 Recording ....................................190 Recording the event ....................191 RELATIVE ...................................202 RETURN .....................................201 SEL button ...................................199 Setting up .....................................188 Setup | Time Sig page .................189 STOP ............................................204 TAKEOVER ................................201 TIME REFERENCE ....................200 TIME REFERENCE section .......188 Time signature map ....................189 Timecode source .........................188 TO END button ..........................200 TRIM ...........................................209 UPDATE ......................................200 Automix | Event Edit page ................211 Automix | Event Job page .................207 Automix | Fader1 or 2 page ..............205 Automix | Main page ................ 190, 200 Automix | Memory page ...................204 AUTOMIX button ..............................19 Automix main page ...........................200 Automix memory page .....................204 Automix Store Undo preference ......271 AUX 1–AUX 8 buttons .......................18 AUX button .........................................18 AUX indicator ...............................18, 35 AUX SELECT section .........................18 Aux send mode ................... 99, 100, 103 Aux sends .......................................93, 98 Attenuating ...................................94 Comp settings ...............................95 Copying channel fader positions .........................................106 Delaying .........................................95 EQ settings ..............................94, 96 Excluding certain channels ........105 Fixed mode ..................................100 Mix minus ...................................105 Panning .......................................104 Setting from the control surface ..94 Setting from the display .........94, 99 Setting levels ..................................94 Variable mode .............................100 Viewing settings ............................96 Viewing settings for multiple channels .........................102 Aux1 | Pan1–32 page .........................104 Aux1 | Pan33–48 page .......................104 Aux1 | Send1-32 page ....................75, 99 Aux1 | Send33-48 page ........................99 Aux1 | View1–16 page .......................102 Aux1 | View17–32 page .....................102 Aux1 | View33–48 page .....................102 B Bass Management ..............................139 Battery ................................................289 Bulk dump .........................................256 Messages ......................................245 BUS button ..................................24, 137 Bus out .................................................81 Attenuating ...................................83 Compressing .................................84 Delaying .........................................83 EQ’ing ......................................84, 88 Naming ..........................................91 Pairing ...........................................89 Routing signals to the stereo bus .85 Setting from the control surface ..88 Setting from the display ...............83 Setting the levels ...........................88 Viewing the settings ......................86 Bus to stereo library ..........................181 BUS1–BUS8 .......................................130 Buttons .................................................31 C Cascade COMM Link preference ....268 Cascading consoles ............................282 Cascade page ...............................285 Reverse cable .................................26 SYNC parameter .........................286 CATEGORY .........................................57 Changing names ................................265 Index Channel Copy Parameter preference ................................................269 Channel faders .....................................17 Channel ID/Channel preference ......268 Channel library ..................................175 Channel strip section ..........................17 CHORUS ...........................................311 CHORUS 5.1 .....................................320 CLEAR button .....................................24 Clear Edit Channel after REC preference ................................................270 COMP 5.1 ..........................................321 COMPAND 5.1 .................................321 Compressor library ...........................182 Preset ...........................................183 Compressors ............................66, 84, 95 Compressor link .........................147 DYNAMICS button .....................20 Linking ........................................152 Parameter table ...........................336 Preset parameters .......................325 Confirmation messages ......................32 Connections .........................................43 Configuring a recording system that uses a DAW .....................45 Configuring a recording system with a hard disk recorder ........44 Configuring an analog 32-channel mixing system .................43 Contrast control ..................................20 Control changes .........................245, 250 CONTROL connector ........................26 CONTROL port pin assignments ....340 CONTROL ROOM DIMMER LEVEL ................................................123 Control room monitor .....................119 Control surface ....................................15 AD input section ..........................16 AUX SELECT section ...................18 Channel strip section ...................17 Data entry section .........................23 DISPLAY ACCESS section ..........19 Display section ..............................20 ENCODER MODE section .........18 FADER MODE section ................18 Headphones & talkback section ..23 LAYER section ..............................22 MONITOR section .......................24 SCENE MEMORY section ..........22 SELECTED CHANNEL section ..21 STEREO section ...........................17 USER DEFINED KEYS section ...23 COPY ...................................................58 Copy Initial Fader preference ...........270 Cursor buttons ....................................23 D Daisy chain distribution .....................46 Data entry section ................................23 DAW ..................................................235 Nuendo/Cubase SX ....................235 Other ...........................................235 Pro tools ......................................216 Recording system ......................... 45 Remote ........................................ 215 DEC & INC buttons ........................... 23 DEL button .......................................... 32 Delay ........................................63, 83, 95 DELAY SCALE ............................. 64 FB.GAIN ....................................... 64 DELAY LCR ...................................... 311 DELAY SCALE .................................... 64 DELAY+ER. ...................................... 316 DELAY+REV ..................................... 317 DELAY->ER. ..................................... 317 DELAY->REV ................................... 318 Digital I/O & control section ............. 26 Digital inputs & outputs ..................... 54 Dimensions ........................................ 341 DIMMER button ................................ 24 DIO | Cascade page ........................... 285 DIO | Format page ..................56, 58, 59 DIO | Word Clock page ................ 47, 55 DIO button .......................................... 19 DIO Warning preference ................. 267 Direct outs ......................................... 115 Display ................................................. 20 DISPLAY ACCESS section ................. 19 Display Brightness preference .......... 269 DISPLAY button .....................18, 23, 24 Display section .................................... 20 DIST->DELAY .................................. 318 DISTORTION ................................... 313 Dithering .............................................. 58 DIV ..................................................... 132 DOUBLE CHANNEL ......................... 59 DOUBLE SPEED ................................ 59 Drop Out Time preference .............. 271 DUAL PITCH ................................... 313 DYNA. FILTER ................................. 314 DYNA. FLANGE ............................... 314 DYNA. PHASER ............................... 314 Dynamics | Comp Edit page ..66, 84, 95 Dynamics | Comp Lib page .............. 182 Dynamics | Gate Edit page ................. 65 Dynamics | Gate Lib page ................. 181 DYNAMICS button ............................ 20 E EARLY REF. ...................................... 310 ECHO ................................................ 311 EDIT indicator .................................... 29 Edit indicator ....................................... 22 Editing events offline ........................ 207 Effect | FX1 Edit page ........................ 159 Effect | FX1 Lib page ......................... 178 Effect | FX2 Edit page ........................ 159 Effect | FX2 Lib page ......................... 178 Effect | FX3 Edit page ........................ 159 Effect | FX3 Lib page ......................... 178 Effect | FX4 Edit page ........................ 159 Effect | FX4 Lib page ......................... 178 Effect | P-IN Edit 2 page ................... 162 Effect | P-IN Edit1 page .................... 162 EFFECT button ................................... 20 379 Effects Bypass ..........................................159 EFFECT button .............................20 Internal effects .............................155 Parameter tables ..........................310 Plug-ins ........................................162 Effects library .....................................177 Preset ............................................178 programs ......................................178 Effects parameters ..............................310 Effects processor 1 .............................155 EMPHASIS ...........................................57 Encoder | Encoder page .......................37 ENCODER MODE section .................18 Encoders .................................. 17, 36, 38 Assigning parameters ...................37 Encoder mode ...............................36 ENTER button .....................................23 Enter titles Title edit window ..........................32 EQ ................................68, 84, 88, 94, 96 Preset ............................................323 EQ | ATT 1-16 page .............................67 EQ | ATT 17-32 page ...........................67 EQ | ATT 33-48 page ...........................67 EQ | EQ Edit page ................... 68, 84, 96 EQ | EQ Library page .........................184 EQ | Out Att page ......................... 83, 94 EQ library ...........................................184 Preset ............................................185 EQ link ................................................147 EQUALIZER DISPLAY button ..........21 EQUALIZER FREQUENCY control .21 EQUALIZER GAIN control ...............21 EQUALIZER HIGH button ................21 EQUALIZER HIGH-MID button ......21 EQUALIZER LOW button .................21 EQUALIZER LOW-MID button .......21 EQUALIZER Q control .......................21 ESAM ..................................................259 ESAM indicator ...................................29 Event edit page ...................................211 Event job page ....................................207 F F & R ...................................................132 F1–F4 buttons ......................................20 Fader groups ............................. 147, 148 FADER indicator .......................... 18, 35 FADER MODE section .......................18 Fader REC Accuracy preference .......271 Fader Touch Sense preference ..........269 FADER/AUX button ...........................18 Fader1 &2 pages .................................205 Fading .................................................168 ALL INPUT CLEAR ...................168 AUX1–8 .......................................169 BUS1–8 ........................................169 Global fade time ..........................168 INPUT CH1–48 ..........................168 STEREO .......................................169 FAST ...................................................131 Fast Meter Fall Time preference .......267 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 380 Index FB.GAIN .............................................. 64 Features ................................................ 13 Automix ........................................ 14 Channel configuration ................. 14 Effects ............................................ 14 ESAM ............................................ 14 Hardware ...................................... 13 Inputs and Outputs ...................... 13 MIDI ............................................. 14 Remote control ............................. 14 Scene memory .............................. 14 Sonic specifications ...................... 13 Surround sound ........................... 14 Fixed mode ................................100, 103 FLANGE ............................................ 312 FLANGE 5.1 ...................................... 320 FOLLOW SURROUND ................... 156 Frame Jump Error preference .......... 271 FRAMES ............................................ 188 FREEZE .............................................. 318 FS .......................................................... 57 G GAIN controls ............................... 16, 53 Gain of the AD card ............................ 43 GANG .................................................. 70 Gate library ........................................ 181 GATE REVERB ................................. 310 Gates ..................................................... 65 DYNAMICS button ..................... 20 KEYIN SOURCE .......................... 65 Parameter table ........................... 335 Preset parameters ....................... 324 Global Paste ....................................... 171 GPI ..................................................... 276 Parameters .................................. 278 Sources ........................................ 279 GRAB button ....................................... 21 Grounding screw ................................. 27 Group ................................................. 147 Fader groups ............................... 148 Mute groups ............................... 148 H HA HA CONTROL .......................... 288 Hard disk Recording system ......................... 44 Headphones & talkback section ......... 23 Higher sampling rates ......................... 59 HORIZONTAL ................................... 78 HQ. PITCH ....................................... 313 I I/O card ................................................ 55 Installing ....................................... 28 SLOT 1–2 ...................................... 54 IEEE1394 ............................................. 55 In Patch | Cascade In page ................ 284 In Patch | CH Name page ................... 79 In Patch | Effect page ........................ 156 In Patch | In Patch page .............. 49, 110 In Patch | Insert In page ................... 118 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual In Patch | Library page ......................176 INDIVIDUAL ......................................70 INIT ....................................................130 Initial Data Nominal preference .......268 Initializing the DM1000 ....................289 Input channels .....................................61 Attenuating ....................................67 Compressing .................................66 Delaying .........................................63 EQ ..................................................75 EQ’ing ............................................68 Gating ............................................65 Levels ..............................................75 Naming ..........................................79 Pairing ............................................76 Panning ................................... 70, 75 Routing ................................... 71, 75 Setting from the control surface ..75 Setting from the display ...............63 Switching the signal phase ...........63 Viewing the settings ......................72 INPUT connectors ....................... 25, 53 Input patch .........................................109 Initial settings ..............................298 Parameters ...................................296 INPUT PATCH button .............. 19, 110 Input patch library .............................176 Input sensitivity GAIN controls ...............................16 INS button ............................................32 Insert in ..............................................118 Insert patching ...................................116 Insert Time Link to Locate Memory preference .............................271 Installing a card ....................................28 INT 44.1k, INT 48k, INT 88.2, INT 96k ..................................................48 INT START TIME .............................200 Internal effects Aux sends .....................................156 Editing ..........................................159 Effects processors 2 through 4 ...155 FOLLOW SURROUND .............156 Inserting into channels ...............158 Meters ..........................................160 MIDI CLK ...................................160 MIX BALANCE ..........................159 TAP TEMPO ...............................160 TEMPO ............................... 159, 160 INV GANG ..........................................70 J Joystick ..................................................21 Reverb 5.1 effect ..........................319 Joystick Auto Grab preference ..........268 K KEYIN SOURCE .................................65 L LAST SOLO ........................................120 LATCH ...............................................241 LAYER section .....................................22 Layers ....................................................33 Initial bank settings ....................306 LEARN button ...................................239 Levels ..............................................88, 94 LFE ......................................................132 Libraries ..............................................173 Bus to stereo library ....................181 Channel library ...........................175 Compressor library .....................182 Effects library ..............................177 EQ library ....................................184 Gate library ..................................181 General operation .......................173 Input patch library .....................176 Output patch library ..................177 specifications ...............................337 Surround monitor library ..........186 Link .....................................................147 Compressors ...............................152 EQ ................................................152 Link Capture & Locate Memory preference .............................270 Lock Time preference .......................271 M M.BAND DYNA. ..............................320 Machine control ................................242 MASTER button ..................................22 MASTER MODE .................................40 MB1000 peak meter bridge ..............374 Meter | CH1-32 page ...........................39 Meter | CH1-48 page ...........................39 Meter | CH33-48 page .........................39 Meter | Effect page ...............................39 Meter | Master page .............................39 Meter | Position page ..........................39 Meter | Stereo page ..............................40 Meter bridge ......................................374 METER button ..............................19, 39 METER connector ..............................26 Meter Follow Layer preference .........268 Metering ...............................................39 Meters Stereo meters .................................20 MIDI ...........................................217, 245 Bulk dump ..................................256 Bulk dump messages ..................245 Control changes ..........................250 Data format .................................360 FADER H/L .................................254 Initial parameter to control change table ................................344 MIDI clock ..................................245 MIDI IN & OUT ports .........26, 245 MIDI indicator .............................30 MIDI note on/off ........................245 Parameter changes ......................256 Parameters ...................................251 Program changes ........................249 REMOTE connector ..................246 Scene memory to program change table ................................343 Setup ............................................246 Index SLOT 1 ........................................246 System exclusive messages .........245 Transmission and Reception .....248 USB port ......................................246 MIDI | Bulk page ...............................257 MIDI | Ctl Asgn page ........................250 MIDI | Pgm Asgn page ......................249 MIDI | Setup page .............................248 MIDI button ........................................19 MIDI interface ...................................217 MIDI machine control ......................245 MIDI remote .....................................236 Banks ...........................................236 LATCH ........................................241 LEARN button ............................239 MIDI messages ...........................239 TARGET parameter ...................237 UNLATCH ..................................241 MIDI timecode ..................................245 MIDI Warning preference ................267 mini-YGDAI I/O cards .......................55 Mix minus ..........................................105 MIX SOLO .........................................120 Mix Update Confirmation preference ................................................270 MIXDOWN .......................................120 mLAN I/O card ...................................55 MMC ................................. 215, 242, 245 MOD. DELAY ...................................311 MOD. FILTER ...................................313 Monitor | C-R/TB page .....................124 Monitor | Solo page ...........................120 Monitor | Surr Lib page ....................186 Monitor | Surr Patch page ................145 Monitor | Surr Setup page ........138, 144 Monitor | Surround page ..................142 Monitor alignment ............................142 MONITOR LEVEL control ................24 Monitor matrix ..................................138 MONITOR section .............................24 Monitoring ........................................119 CONTROL ROOM DIMMER LEVEL ............................123 Digital input channel status .........57 DIMM (Dimmer) .......................119 LAST SOLO ................................120 MIX SOLO ..................................120 MIXDOWN ................................120 MONO ........................................123 MUTE/SOLO section .................143 RECORDING .............................120 SETTING section .......................143 Solo function ...............................121 SOLO SAFE .................................121 Solo safe function .......................121 Solo setup ....................................120 SPEAKER SETUP .......................144 STATUS section .........................143 Talkback function .......................123 MONO ...............................................123 MONO DELAY .................................310 MS buttons ..........................................78 MS microphone .............................78, 80 MTC ................................................... 245 MULTI FILTER ................................ 318 Mute groups ..............................147, 148 MUTE/SOLO section ....................... 143 Muting ............................................... 227 N Naming .......................................... 79, 91 Nominal Pan preference ................... 267 Nuendo .............................................. 215 Nuendo/Cubase SX .......................... 235 O OCTA REVERB ................................ 319 OFFSET .............................................. 200 OMNI IN connectors ................... 25, 53 OMNI OUT connectors .........25, 50, 54 Omni outs ............................................ 54 OMS ................................................... 217 ON buttons .......................................... 17 Operating basics .................................. 29 About the display ......................... 29 AUX indicator .............................. 35 Buttons .......................................... 31 Channel name .............................. 30 Confirmation messages ............... 32 FADER indicator .......................... 35 Metering ........................................ 39 Page area ....................................... 30 Page tabs ....................................... 30 Page title ........................................ 30 Parameter boxes ........................... 31 Rotary controls & faders .............. 31 Sampling rate indicator ............... 30 Selecting channels ........................ 34 Selecting display pages ................. 30 Selecting encoder modes ............. 36 Selecting fader modes .................. 35 Selecting layers .............................. 33 Tab scroll arrows .......................... 30 Timecode counter ........................ 30 Title edit window ......................... 32 OPERATION LOCK ........................ 280 Operation lock .................................. 280 Optional card ...................................... 28 Installing ....................................... 28 Options .......................................... 6, 374 I/O card ......................................... 55 MB1000 ....................................... 374 RK1 .............................................. 377 SP1000 ......................................... 377 Oscillator ........................................... 273 Other functions ................................. 265 Preferences .................................. 266 Out Patch | 2TR Out page ................ 114 Out Patch | CH Name page ................ 91 Out Patch | Direct Out page ............. 115 Out Patch | Library page ................... 177 Out Patch | Omni Out page ....... 50, 113 Out Patch | Slot Out page .114, 130, 283 Output patch ..................................... 112 Initial settings ............................. 302 Parameters .................................. 300 381 OUTPUT PATCH button ..................19 Output patch library ..........................177 P P2 ............................................... 215, 242 Straight cable .................................26 Package contents ....................................6 PAD switches ................................ 16, 53 Pair Confirmation preference ...........267 PAIR/GROUP button .........................19 Pair/Grup | Fader1–32 page ..............148 Pair/Grup | Fader33–48 page ............148 Pair/Grup | In Comp page ................153 Pair/Grup | In EQ page .....................152 Pair/Grup | Input page ........................78 Pair/Grup | Mute1–32 page ..............148 Pair/Grup | Mute33–48 page ............148 Pair/Grup | Out Comp page .............153 Pair/Grup | Out EQ page ..................153 Pair/Grup | Out Fader page ..............148 Pair/Grup | Out Mute page ...............148 Pair/Grup | Output page .....................89 Pairing ........................................... 76, 89 HORIZONTAL .............................78 Using the display ...........................78 Using the SEL buttons ..................77 VERTICAL ....................................78 PAN button ..........................................18 Pan/Surr | Ch Edit page .....................131 Pan/Surr | Pan1-32 page .....................70 Pan/Surr | Pan33-48 page ...................70 Pan/Surr | Surr Mode page ...............128 Pan/Surr | Surr1-16 page ...................135 Pan/Surr | Surr17-32 page .................135 Pan/Surr | Surr33-48 page .................135 PAN/SURR LINK ..............................128 PAN/SURROUND button .................19 Panning ....................................... 70, 104 F.S button ......................................89 FOLLOW PAN .............................74 GANG ............................................70 INDIVIDUAL ...............................70 INV GANG ....................................70 PAN buttons ..................................71 Parameter boxes ...................................31 Parameter changes .............................256 Parameter lists ....................................293 Parameter wheel ..................................23 Patch Confirmation preference ........267 Patching ..............................................109 2TR digital outputs .....................114 Direct outs ...................................115 Input and Output .........................49 Input channels ..............................49 INPUT PATCH button ......... 19, 49 Input patching .............................109 Input patching from the display 110 Insert in ........................................118 Insert patching ............................116 Omni outs ............................ 50, 113 OUTPUT PATCH button ............19 Output patching .........................112 PAN/SURROUND button ...........19 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual 382 Index Slot outputs ................................. 114 Using the encoders ..................... 111 PEAK indicators ............................ 16, 53 Peak level ............................................. 41 Phantom power ................................... 53 +48V ON/OFF switches .............. 16 Phase .................................................... 63 PHASER ............................................. 312 PHONES jack .............................. 23, 119 PHONES LEVEL control ................... 23 PLAY .................................................. 203 PLUG-IN ........................................... 258 Plug-ins .............................................. 229 Y56K ............................................ 162 Port ID/PORT preference ................ 269 POWER ON/OFF switch ................... 27 Power section ...................................... 27 Prefer1 page ....................................... 266 Prefer2 page ....................................... 268 Prefer3 page ....................................... 270 Preferences ......................................... 266 Preset compressor parameters ......... 325 Preset EQ parameters ....................... 323 Preset gate parameters ...................... 324 Pro tools .............................215, 216, 227 Automation ................................ 233 Channel display mode ............... 221 Channel levels ............................. 227 Control surface operation ......... 222 Display ........................................ 220 Explicit mute .............................. 227 Flip mode .................................... 228 Implicit mute .............................. 227 Insert display mode .................... 220 Meter display mode ................... 222 MIDI ........................................... 217 Muting ........................................ 228 OMS ............................................ 217 Panning ...............................227, 228 Plug-ins ....................................... 229 Pre or Post .................................. 228 Scrub & Shuttle .......................... 232 Selecting ...................................... 227 Send levels ................................... 228 Soloing ........................................ 227 Program changes .......................245, 249 PROTECT button ............................. 166 Punching in & out ............................. 197 R Rear panel ............................................ 25 AD input and output section ...... 25 Digital I/O & control section ....... 26 Power section ............................... 27 SLOT section ................................ 26 REC .................................................... 203 RECALL button .................................. 22 Recall Confirmation preference ....... 267 Recall safe function ........................... 170 Receive Full Frame Message preference ............................................... 270 RECORDING .................................... 120 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual Remote ................................................215 AD8HR/AD824 ...........................287 Display .........................................220 FRAMES ......................................244 Insert display mode ....................220 LOCATE/TIME section .............244 Machine control ................. 215, 242 MACHINE CONTROL section 243 MIDI messages ............................239 MIDI remote ...............................236 MMC ...........................................215 Nuendo ........................................215 P2 ..................................................215 ProTools ......................................215 REMOTE 1/2 ...............................215 Target parameter ........................219 TRACK ARMING section ..........244 TRANSPORT section .................244 Remote | Channel page .....................233 Remote | Insert page ..........................219 Remote | Machine page .....................244 Remote | Meter page ..........................222 Remote | Remote 1 page ....................218 Remote | Remote 2 page ....................237 REMOTE 1/REMOTE 2 buttons .......22 REMOTE button ........................ 19, 215 REMOTE connector ................... 26, 246 Remote layer Nuendo/Cubase SX ....................235 Pro tools .......................................216 RESET BOTH ......................................77 REV+CHORUS .................................314 REV+FLANGE ..................................315 REV+SYMPHO. ................................315 REV->CHORUS ................................315 REV->FLANGE .................................315 REV->PAN ........................................316 REV->SYMPHO. ..............................316 REVERB 5.1 .......................................319 REVERB HALL ..................................310 REVERB PLATE ................................310 REVERB ROOM ................................310 REVERB STAGE ................................310 Reverse cable ......................................283 REVERSE GATE ................................310 RING MOD. ......................................313 RK1 rack mount kit ...........................377 ROTARY ............................................313 Rotary controls & faders .....................31 Routing .................................................71 Routing | Bus To St page .....................85 Routing | CH1-16 page .......................71 Routing | CH17-32 page .....................71 Routing | CH33-48 page .....................71 Routing | Library page .......................181 ROUTING 1–8 buttons ......................21 ROUTING DIRECT button ...............21 ROUTING DISPLAY button ..............21 Routing ST Pair Link preference ......268 ROUTING STEREO button ...............21 S Sampling rates ...............................55, 57 DOUBLE CHANNEL ..................59 DOUBLE SPEED ..........................59 Sampling rate indicator ................30 Setting the higher sampling rates 59 SINGLE .........................................60 SRC sections ..................................56 Scene | In Fade page ..........................168 Scene | Out Fade page .......................169 Scene | Rcl Safe page ..........................170 Scene | Scene page .............................166 Scene | Sort page ................................171 SCENE button .....................................20 Scene MEM Auto Update preference ................................................268 Scene memories .................................163 Auto update function .................167 Edit indicators .............................164 Fading ..........................................168 PROTECT button ......................166 Recall safe function .....................170 Scene numbers ............................164 Shadow memory .........................167 Sorting .........................................171 Storing and Recalling .................165 Using the Scene Memory Page ..166 What is stored .............................163 Scene memory #0 ..............................164 Scene memory #U .............................164 Scene memory display ........................22 SCENE MEMORY section .................22 Scene numbers ...................................164 Scene up/down buttons ......................22 SEL buttons ..........................................17 SELECTED CHANNEL section .........21 Selecting channels ................................34 Selecting display pages ........................30 Selecting fader modes ..........................35 SET SPL85 ..........................................143 Setting levels .........................................98 SETTING section ..............................143 Setup .....................................................43 Setup | GPI page ................................276 Setup | In Port page ...........................265 Setup | MIDI/Host page ....................... 218, 243, 246, 285 Setup | Out Port page ........................266 Setup | Output Att page ......................90 Setup | Prefer1 page ...........................266 Setup | Prefer2 page ...........................266 Setup | Prefer3 page ...........................266 Setup | Remote page ..................285, 288 Setup | Surr Bus page ........................130 Setup | Time Ref page .......................188 Setup | Time Sig page ........................189 SETUP button .....................................19 Shadow memory ...............................167 SHIFT LOCK button ..........................32 Show Compact Size preference ........270 SIGNAL indicators ........................16, 53 SINGLE ................................................60 SLOT 1 ...............................................246 Index SLOT 1/2 ..................................26, 48, 54 SLOT button ................................24, 137 SLOT section .......................................26 SMPTE TIME CODE INPUT connector ..................................................26 SNAP TO SPL85 ................................143 Solo .....................................................120 2TR DIN FLIP ............................122 LAST SOLO ................................120 LISTEN ........................................121 MIX SOLO ..................................120 MIXDOWN ................................120 RECORDING .............................120 SOLO ...........................................120 Solo function ...............................121 SOLO INTERRUPTION ...........121 SOLO SAFE CHANNEL ............121 Solo safe function .......................121 SOLO TRIM ...............................121 SOLO buttons ......................................17 SOLO indicator ...................................24 SOLO SAFE .......................................121 SP1000 side panels ............................377 SPEAKER SETUP ..............................144 Specifications .....................................332 SRC sections ........................................56 Star distribution ..................................46 STATUS section ................................143 STEREO button ...................................24 STEREO DELAY ...............................310 STEREO fader ......................................17 Stereo meters .......................................20 Stereo out .............................................81 Attenuating ...................................83 Compressing .................................84 Delaying ........................................83 EQ’ing ......................................84, 88 Naming ..........................................91 Pairing ...........................................89 Setting from the control surface ..88 Setting from the display ...............83 Setting the levels ...........................88 Viewing the settings .....................86 STEREO section ..................................17 STOP ..................................................204 STORE button .....................................22 Store Confirmation preference ........267 Storing and Recalling ........................165 SURR. MODE ...................................138 Surround ............................................125 BASS MANAGEMENT .............139 BUS1–BUS8 ................................130 DIV ..............................................132 F & R ............................................132 F.S button ......................................89 FAST ............................................131 GRAB button ................................21 INIT .............................................130 Joystick ..........................................21 LFE ...............................................132 LINK ............................................132 MONITOR ALIGNMENT ........142 Monitoring ..................................136 Monitoring matrix ..................... 136 Oscillator ..................................... 144 Pan graph .................................... 131 PAN/SURR LINK ...................... 128 PAN/SURROUND button .......... 19 Panning from the display .......... 131 PATTERN ................................... 132 Setting up and Selecting ............. 128 Slot ............................................... 145 SPEAKER SETUP ...................... 144 ST LINK ...................................... 132 Surround effects ......................... 161 SURROUND MODE ........... 72, 128 Surround mode indicator ............ 30 Surround pan ............................. 125 Trajectory patterns ..................... 131 SURROUND MODE ........................ 128 Surround mode indicator .................. 30 Surround modes ...............125, 128, 138 Factory-default ........................... 126 Surround monitor ............................ 136 Bass management ....................... 138 Configuring basic ....................... 138 Monitor alignment ..................... 138 Monitor matrix .......................... 138 Monitoring level ......................... 142 Surround monitor library ................ 186 Surround pan .................................... 125 SYMPHO. 5.1 .................................... 320 SYMPHONIC ................................... 312 SYNC parameter ............................... 286 System exclusive messages ............... 245 System version ................................... 289 T Tab scroll arrows ................................. 30 Tab scroll buttons ............................... 20 TALKBACK button .................... 24, 123 Talkback function ............................. 123 TALKBACK LEVEL control .............. 23 Talkback mic ....................................... 23 Target parameter ............................... 219 Tascam I/O card .................................. 55 TC Drop Warning preference .......... 267 THX pm3 ........................................... 140 TIME REFERENCE .......................... 200 TIME REFERENCE section ............. 188 Time signature map .......................... 189 Timecode counter ............................... 30 Timecode Display Relative preference ............................................... 270 Timecode source ............................... 188 Title edit window ................................ 32 TO END button ................................ 200 TO HOST USB port ........................... 26 Touch Sence Edit In ALL preference ............................................... 271 Trajectory patterns ............................ 132 TREMOLO ........................................ 312 Trigger signals ................................... 276 383 U UNLATCH .........................................241 UPDATE ............................................200 USB .......................................................26 OMS .............................................217 USB port ......................................246 User assignable layer ..........................272 User Def | User Def page ...................274 USER DEFINED KEYS .......................23 Initial assignments ......................295 User defined keys ...............................274 Utility | Battery page ..........................289 Utility | CH Status page .......................57 Utility | Lock page ..............................280 Utility | Oscillator page ......................273 UTILITY button ..................................19 V Variable mode ........................... 100, 103 VERTICAL ...........................................78 Video Editor .......................................259 View | Fader page .................... 73, 86, 97 View | Library page ............................175 View | Parameter page ............ 72, 86, 96 VIEW button .......................................19 W WC IN ..................................................48 Web site ................................................55 Website ...................................................6 Welcome ...............................................13 Window Changing the surround mode ...129 Channel Pairing ............................77 Copy operation ...........................106 Password ......................................280 Set Password ................................281 User Define Select .......................275 Wordclock ............................................46 About wordclock ..........................46 Connections ..................................46 Daisy chain distribution ...............46 Source ............................................48 Specifying source ..........................47 Star distribution ............................46 WC IN ...........................................48 WORD CLOCK IN connector ....27 WORD CLOCK OUT connector 27 Y Y56K ...................................................162 Yamaha web site ..................................55 Yamaha website .....................................6 DM1000 Version 2—Owner’s Manual YAMAHA [Digital Mixing Console-Internal Parameters] Model: DM1000 Function... Date: 26 Aug. 2002 MIDI Implementation Chart Version: 1.0 Transmitted Recognized Remarks Basic Channel Default Changed 1–16 1–16 1–16 1–16 Memorized Mode Default Messages Altered X X ************** OMNI off/OMNI on X X Memorized Note Number True Voice X ************** 0–127 X Velocity Note On Note Off X X O O After Key’s Ch’s X X X X X X O O Assignable 0–127 ************** 0–127 0–99 Assignable O O *1 Pitch Bend Control Change Prog Change 0-95,102-119 :True# System Exclusive Effect Control System Common :Song Pos :Song Sel :Tune X X X O X X Automix System Real Time :Clock :Commands X X O O Automix, Effect Control Aux Messages :Local ON/OFF :All Notes OFF :Active Sense :Reset X X X X X X O O Notes MTC quarter frame message is recognized. *1: Bulk Dump/Request, Parameter Change/Request, and MMC. For MIDI Remote, ALL messages can be transmitted. Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO O: Yes X: No DM1000 Block Diagram DM1000 Level Diagram Analog Analog Digital dBu dBFS +24 +20 +10 +4 0 –2 0 –10 –20 –30 –10 –40 –20 –50 –30 –60 –40 –70 –50 –80 –60 –90 –70 –100 –80 –110 –90 –120 –100 –130 –110 –140 –120 –150 –130 –160 –140 –170 –150 –180 –160 –190 –170 –200 –180 –210 –190 PAD GAIN INSERT Digital AD INPUT PATCH PHASE Digital GATE INSERT ATT. EQ INSERT COMP DELAY ON LEVEL INSERT PAN BUS Adder INSERT ATT. EQ INSERT COMP MASTER ON MASTER LEVEL INSERT BAL DELAY Analog OUTPUT PATCH Analog DA dBu Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 [0dBu = 0.775Vrms] [0dBFS = Full Scale] Max. Input [+24dBu] CASCADE IN CASCADE OUT Max. Output [+24dBu] Digital Clipping Level [+18dBu] [+4dBu] Nominal Input Nominal Output [+4dBu] [–2dBu] OMNI OUT 1-12 GAIN MIN., PAD ON +24 +20 +10 +4 0 –10 –20 –30 Max. Input [–40dBu] –40 –50 Nominal [–60dBu] In Input –60 GAIN MAX., PAD OFF –70 –80 –90 –100 –110 –120 –130 –140 –150 –160 DSP Noise Floor –170 –180 –190 For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. ASIA POLAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-868-07-57 Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Combo Division Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 SWEDEN ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 011-4119-7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 INDIA Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd. 5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India Tel: 0124-466-5551 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 080-004-0022 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) Office 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia Tel: 495 626 0660 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG SPAIN/PORTUGAL BRAZIL THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2313 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2313 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2441 PA25 Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Pro Audio Division © 2004 Yamaha Corporation 006IPTO-F0 Printed in Japan WD83390